Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D09-015 - VERIZON BUSINESS - TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMVERIZON BUSINESS 12682 GATEWAY DR D09 -015 Parcel No.: 2716000020 Address: 12682 GATEWAY DR TUKW Suite No: Tenant: Name: VERIZON BUSINESS Address: 12682 GATEWAY DR , TUKWILA WA Owner: Name: RREEF AMERICA REIT II CORP/ Address: PO BOX 4900 #207 , SCOTTSDALE AZ 85261 Phone: Contact Person: Name: K. CRAIG MANAWES, PE Address: ONE VILLAGE DR, STE 500 , ABILENE TX 79606 Phone: 325 695 -1090 Contractor: Name: A C SCHOMMER & SONS INC Address: 6421 NE COLWOOD WY , PORTLANDOR 97218 Phone: 503 - 287 -4646 Contractor License No: ACSCHSI171CW DESCRIPTION OF WORK: INTERIOR BUILDOUT OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM Value of Construction: 1,400,000.00 Fees Collected: $15,794.67 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2006 Type of Construction: VN Occupancy per IBC: 0008 doc: IBC -10/06 Cityllif Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us DEVELOPMENT PERMIT * *continued on next page ** Permit Number: D09 -015 Issue Date: 04/23/2009 Permit Expires On: 10/20/2009 Expiration Date: 03/30/2011 D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: City (*Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us N N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0 Start Time: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Start Time: End Time: Fill 0 c.y. End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non - Profit: N Water Main Extension: Private: Public: Water Meter: N Permit Center Authorized Signature: Date: 1 )-1 f Permit Number: D09 -015 Issue Date: 04/23/2009 Permit Expires On: 10/20/2009 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am au orized to sign and obtain this development permit. I / Signature: v! 9 - Date: Print Name: /)r) U G This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. doc: IBC -10/06 /7/ /Y D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 Parcel No.: 2716000020 Address: Suite No: Tenant: 12682 GATEWAY DR TUKW VERIZON BUSINESS 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: Status: Applied Date: Issue Date: D09 -015 ISSUED 02/05/2009 04/23/2009 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431- 3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 6: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 7: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 8: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 9: Ventilation is required for all new rooms and spaces of new or existing buildings and shall be in conformance with the International Building Code and the Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Code. 10: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila Permit Center. 11: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 12: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 13: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 14: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206- 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 15: Per Mr. Craig Manawes PE, the room that the new batteries and racks will be placed in, is an existing IFC code compliant battery room. 16: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel,distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1) 17: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (1FC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 18: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 19: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 20: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4) 21: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 22: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 23: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 24: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 25: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 26: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1) • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 27: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) 28: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot -candle (11 lux) at the floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3) The path of egress shall require emergency lighting until exit discharge is accomplished. 29: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) 30: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4) 31: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3) 32: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050) 33: Maintain square foot coverage of detectors per manufacturer's specifications in all areas including: closets, elevator shafts, top of stairwells, etc. (NFPA 72- 5.5.2.1) 34: Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and/or adding automatic fire detectors. 35: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051) 36: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC 104.2) 37: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this project. 38: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 39: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 40: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and #2051) 41: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 42: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 43: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575 -4407. 44: ** *PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT CONDPI'fONS * ** 45: THIS PERMIT IS ISSUED WITH THE AGREEMENT THAT PERMIT PW09 -027 WILL BE ISSUED AND WORK ASSOCIATED WITH IT WILL BE FULFILLED. CONTACT PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT CENTER IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS @ 206 - 433 -0179. doc: Cond -10!06 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us * *continued on next page ** D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. Signature: � % -�� Date: r ? Print Name: 0O /,l & f7 /7 doc: Cond -10/06 D09 -015 Printed: 04 -23 -2009 • CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.citulavilawa. us Name: K. Craig Manawes, PE Mailing Address: One Village Drive, Suite 500 E -Mail Address: craig.manawes@wta-inc.com Building Permit No. 1719 1 d IS Mechanical Permit No. Plumbing/Gas Permit No. Public Works Permit No. Project No. (For office use only) Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** SITE LOCATION Site Address: 12682 Gateway Drive South Tenant Name: VERIZON Business Property Owners Name: RREEF America REIT II Corporation Mailing Address: PO Box 4900 #207 King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 271600 -0070 Suite Number: Floor: 1 New Tenant: ❑ Yes ..No Scottsdale City AZ State CONTACT PERSON - who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued Day Telephone: (325) 695 -1090 Abilene TX City State Fax Number: (325) 685 -3757 85261 Zip 79606 Zip GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION — (Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5)) Company Name: TBD Mailing Address: Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: ARCHITECT OF RECORD - All plans must be wet stamped by Architect of Record Company Name: Kord S. Kurisu, Architect Mailing Address: 13028 Harbour Hts. Dr. Contact Person: Kord Kurisu E -Mail Address: kskurisu @msn.com Company Name: WTA, Inc. Mailing Address: One Village Drive, Suite 500 Contact Person: K. Craig Manawes, PE E -Mail Address: craig.manawes @wta- inc.com H:\Applications\Fonns- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \I -2009 - Permit Applicationdoc Revised: 1 -2009 bh City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: Mukilted Abilene State City State Day Telephone: (425) 870 -0368 Fax Number: (425) 741 -0936 City State Day Telephone: (325) 695 -1090 Fax Number: (325) 695 -3757 Zip WA 98275 Zip ENGINEER OF RECORD - All plans must be wet stamped by Engineer of Record TX 79606 Zip Page 1 of 6 . Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing • Structure New Type of Construction per IBC• Type of Occupancy per IBC lb` Floor 70,775 9,800 V -N (Sprk.) B rd Floor 3r Floor Floors thru Basement • • Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION - 206 - 431 -3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 1,400,000 Existing Building Valuation: $ 15,515,400 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Interior buildout of telecommunications equipment room. Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes ®.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes 0 No If "yes ", explain: FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: El Sprinklers m Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? m Yes ❑ No If ' yes ; attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 - 1/2 "x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\ApplicationsWonms- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \1 -2009 - Permit Application.doc Revised: 1 -2009 bh Page 2 of 6 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review— Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. Signature: Building and Mechanical Permit The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). Plumbing Permit The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER O HORIZED Date Application Accepted: o1-1 os Print Name: K. Craig Manawe`s!PE Day Telephone: (325) 695 -1090 Mailing Address: One Village Drive, Suite 500 H:\Applications\Forns- Applications On Line\2009 Applications \I -2009 - Permit Application. doe Revised: 1 -2009 bh Abilene City Date: 02/02/2009 TX 79606 State Zip Date Application Expires: n�I o s 101 Staff Initials: T`A Page 6 of 6 Receipt No.: R09 -00619 Initials: User ID: Payee: WER 1655 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description doc: Receiot -06 AC SCHOMMER • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 5724 9,574.30 Authorization No. BUILDING - NONRES 000/322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 640.237.114 RECEIPT Parcel No.: 2716000020 Permit Number: D09 -015 Address: 12682 GATEWAY DR TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 02/05/2009 Applicant: VERIZON BUSINESS Issue Date: Account Code Current Pmts Payment Amount: $9,574.30 Payment Date: 04/23/2009 10:05 AM Balance: $0.00 9,569.80 4.50 Total: $9,574.30 PAYMENT RECEIVED Printed: 04 -23 -2009 Copy Reprinted on 02 -05 -2009 at 11:05:20 02/05/2009 RECEIPT NO: R09 -00202 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: WTA, INC. SET ID: S000001171 SET NAME: Tmp set/Initialized Activities SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member Amount D09 -015 EL09 -0101 M09 -013 TOTAL: ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Cit,of Tukwila. Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: ht0://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 6,220.37 1,783.25 649.80 6,220.37 ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES PLAN CHECK - NONRES SET RECEIPT • Payment Date: 02/05/2009 Total Payment: 8,653.42 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 8629 8,653.42 TOTAL: 8 , 653. Account Code Current Pmts 000.345.832.00.0 1,783.25 000/345.830 6,870.17 TOTAL: 8,653.42 Proj t: V e v 1 - 3, 6' [ILLS I ^lei Type of Inspection: t— 1 N A L Address: I2GSZ CoArEtAAALt ci e_._ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: g—ZS_U p.m. Requester: Phone No: 5 if) 3 - 9L1c , INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPE ION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: I L)/ 7 ;1 6 M4/ 4 (Inspect° Da 25-e 60 c REINSPECTION FEE RE E UIRED. ° rior to inspection, fee must be t 6300 Southcenter Blvd., ' uite i O. Call to schedule reinspection. Re ei No.: 'Date: Project: • Type of Inspection: Address. /1G 82 G4 "�u , 1l• Date Called: r Special Instructions: • . Date Wan -05 : m Requester: Phone No: .543 — 49 g /5 — ' i60 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 proved per applicable codes. EJ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 6 ) ,9, : 2 ) _ ,4le - CAI AY44- /- ki‘..d4e eipt No.: (Date: .06a/5 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3 7 t6, z d _ / � .00 REINSPECTION FE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be Id at 6300 Southcenter lvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. G Proje \k v t ZUNI Sus NPCS Type of Inspection: W S Address: (("'- `2- C.9ATeV / �� Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: • — / I – Uc 0.0 p.m. Requester: Phone No: `5o 3 – I (oOZ INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. P•-• (206)431 -3670 El Approved per applicable codes. O Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: c r .$ ✓UJT 1 (A t)( .SLe.b L1/ 4 1 _ Inspec or: Date: s - - /I J 7 ri $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: 7 Project: _ r / ® / / a d , , . . . . Type of Inspection: t - - , e 6 Address: /2 G 32 Co•4/ct ‘)/?. Date Called: —, Special Instructions: ,s/r-55/4c Date Wanted: — . - 0 fi : p.m. Requester: Phone No: °3 --,ei _, 602 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit I/ -0 / INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION "- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 ... "0 ..., Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: m pa 60 0 REINSPECTION FE at 6300 Southcenter S REQUIRED. Prior to inspection,.fiee must be vd., S ite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. R -Ipt No.: 'Date: COMMENTS: i ),A,P\ 4 pl d U A 4A,1 I v(C ' me e S , - — JTh Ai a Gk , i 42e , r; . -I r 1Z 4),.► .1-.r NJ-, J p i 7 { . 1 . 31 Az (-.,r o. ' 'kJ f oA T /1-P x J SC- t?s / ,) f v/ (A J iff ,- A ere,. -o (,'f'e ( c A fc ( S-Arf r 11 \05 .A )Pl't�'C.[1�1� �a� rr p.m. Requester: I a Pro c .: `r/ 3 e • 2945 - Type of Ins ection: ��� /Ale'. / _26u2_. � i Date Cal Special Instructions: Date Wanted: C/- g ` 475 �a� rr p.m. Requester: Phone No: <TO -(5' 1/5 i6a2 13e -etc INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 12 ' 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. Ei Corrections required prior to approval. Inspect r: i Date: —‘7.1.- p 1 ri $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQU Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project Info Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South Date 2/2/2009 Tukwila, WA 98168 For Building Department Use Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawea, PE Applicant Address: one village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79606 Applicant Phone: 325- 695 -1090 Project Summary PRJ -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form FILE COPY Permit No. Plan review approval is subiect to errors and omissions Revised July 2007 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKIIALA Fth 05?009 PERMIT CENTER 17� 0 16 Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No.' Capacity Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV Location For Building Dept. Use Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawee, PE Applicant Address: one village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79606 Applicant Phone: 325- 695 -1090 Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No. CFM SP' HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service Efficiency For Building Dept. Use Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawee, PE Applicant Address: one village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79606 Applicant Phone: 325- 695 -1090 Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name' Model No. Capacity Btu /h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency For Building Dept. Use Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawee, PE Applicant Address: one village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79606 Applicant Phone: 325- 695 -1090 Project Info Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South Date 2/2/2009 Tukwila, WA 98168 For Building Dept. Use Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawee, PE Applicant Address: one village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79606 Applicant Phone: 325- 695 -1090 Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Fans Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features. Includes Plans 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 'If available. 2 As tested accord ng to Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. 3 If required. ° COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS). Revised July 2007 Project includes installation of (4) 30 -ton Computer room air conditioning units, (1) 163 -ton air cooled packaged chiller, (1) 15 -HP chilled water pump and associated chilled water piping. Project will also include relocation of existing chilled water piping and relocation of (1) existing 30 -ton CRAC unit. Drawings must contain notes requireing compliance with commissioning requirements - Section 1416 Compliance Option 0 Simple System 0 Complex System 0 Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. If Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only: ❑ Constant vol? ❑ Split system? ❑ Air cooled? ❑ Packaged sys? U <20,000 Btuh? Economizer included? If Heating Only: ❑ <5000 cfm? ❑ <70% outside air? Mechanical Summary (back) MECH - SUM Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. ( START ) Heating Only 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Reference Section 1421 Yes — Yes* Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only Yes Yes <5000 cfm? <70% OSA Use Complex Systems (section 1430) Econo ncluded? Simple System Allowed (section 1420) ingle Package Unit? •ol Ca <20,000 Btu h? otal Ca . wo economize <240,000 Btuh or 10 %? plit Syst <= 84,000 Btuh? Outd or Adjacent to utdoo of Ca <54,000 tuh? Reference Section 1423) Yes Yes Complex Systems Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. Mechanical - Complex Systems Checklist , MECH (COMP 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South Date 2/2/2009 The following additional information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for a complex mechanical system for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Use the checklist as a reference for notes added to the mechanical drawings (see the MECH- CHK checklist for additional system requirements). This information must be on the plans since this is the official record of the permit. Having this information in separate specifications alone is NOT an acceptable alternative. For Building Department Use Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes ADDITIONAL CHECKLIST ITEMS FOR COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY n.a. 1431.1 Field assem. sys. Provide calculations yes 1432.1 Setback & shut -off Indicate separate systems or show isolation devices on plans M -3,M- 4,M -7,M- 8 n.a. 1432.2.1 Air system reset Indicate automatic reset yes 1432.2.2 Hydronic System Indicate automatic reset, cooling tower, & heat pump loop valves M -5, M- 6 n.a. 1433 Air Economizer Indicate economizer on equipment schedule or provide calculations to justify exemption and demonstrate 10% higher efficiency for equipment with out economizer. n. a. 1433 Water Economizer Indicate water economizer and provide calculations if 1433 Exception 2 is utilized yea 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans M - 3, M- 4 n. a. 1435 Simul. htg. & clg. Indicate that simultaneous heating and cooling is prohibited, unless use of exception is justified n.a. 1436 Heat recovery Indicate heat recovery on plans; complete and attach heat recovery calculations yes 1437 Elec. motor effic. MECH -MOT or Equip. Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency M n.a. 1438 Variable flow sys. Indicate variable flow on fan and pump schedules n.a. 1439.1 Kitchen Hoods Indicate uncooled and unheated make -up air n.a. 1439.2 Fume Hoods Indicate VAV, unheated /uncooled or heat rec. makeup no is circled for any question, provide exp anation: Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine how the requirements of the Complex Systems Option apply to the project. Refer to the indicated Code sections for more complete information on the requirements. C Start Here ) i Section 1411.1 Equipmen Efficiency Shall Meet Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G Yes 1411.1 Intermittent Ignition Device & Power Venting or Damper. If input 225,000 Btuh then 1412.6 Modulating or Staged Combustion Controls Required 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form as/Oil Fuma input ? 225,000 tuh or Gas/O' 't Heat Air System Serving Multiple Zones? apacity of H Heating System > 00,000 Btuh? Yes 1411.1 0.75% Maximum Jacket Loss Yes Section 1431.1 Calculations of Total On -Site Energy Input 8 Ouput Required (continued on back) Yes Section 1432.2.1 Supply Air Reset Controls Required Yes Section 1432.2.2 Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset Required No 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical - Complex Systems (bac;k) MECH -COMP 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms .0% Air Econ Provided? Section 1413 Water Cooled w/Wafer Econo? otal Clg Capacity w/ Water Econo <500 Tons ppiy Air >5,0 cfm & OSA > 70% otor Incl. i qpmt. Covr'd by Tbl 14-1A-14- 1G? EER 10% Better than Code tal Cap. cono <= 480,00 Btuh or 20% of otal Cap. Section 1436 50% Effective Heat Recovery Required Yes 0 Yes Yes Yes stem or Zon w/ Simultaneous Htg. & Clg.? No No No No DONE • No Yeses Multi-speed Motor in Multi - eed system Yes--* Yes—■ Yes Yes Yes Section 1435 Zone Controls Must Reduce Supply Air Quantity Before Reheating /Recooling Application Involves Variable Flow? Section 1439.1 No Heating or Cooling for at Least 50% of Make -up Air Ye s No—O. Yes-* Yes Section 1433 Economizer Required Yes Section 1437 Motors Must Meet Efficiencies in Table 14-4 Section 1438 Variable Flow Devices Required Section 1439.2 One Required: a. 50% VAV Exhaust & Make -up b. 75% Direct Makeup w/ Tempering Only c. Heat Recovery per 1436 d. Constant Volume w/ < 5ofpm Face Velocity Yes Revised July 2007 Open Motors Closed Motors 3,600 1,800 1,200 3,600 1,800 1,200 Efficiency ( %) Efficiency ( %) - 82.5 80.0 75.5 82.5 80.0 82.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 91.0 90.2 91.0 91.7 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.0 92.4 91.7 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 no 92.4 93.0 93.0 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.6 94.5 94.1 93.6 94.5 94.1 94.5 94.5 94.1 93.6 95.0 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 Electric Motors ; MECH 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address CW Pump 3- 08 Chiller 3- 08 Complete the following for all design A & B squirrel -cage, T -frame induction permanently wired polyphase motors from 1 hp to 200 hp having synchronous speeds of 3600, 1800 or 1200 rpm (unless one of the exceptions below applies). Motor No. or Location CRAC 16 CRAC 18 CRAC 23 CRAC 25 Synchronous Speed (RPM) HP 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 15 2 15 15 15 15 HP 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 12682 Gateway Drive South Type (open /dosed) closed closed closed closed closed closed Minimum Nominal Full -Load Efficiency Description of Application or Use Chilled Water Pump motor Air Cooled Pkg. Chiller Computer Room Air Conditioner Evaporator Fan Motor Computer Room Air Conditioner Evaporator Fan Motor Computer Room Air Conditioner Evaporator Fan Motor Computer Room Air Conditioner Evaporator Fan Motor Date For Building Department Use Synch. Speed 1800 1800 1800 Exception No. 2 1800 Exception No. 2 1800 2/2/2009 Revised July 2007 Min.Nom. Full load Efficiency 70.0% Exception No. 2 Exception No. 2 1800 Exception No. 2 Exceptions: 1. Motors in systems designed to use more than one speed of a multi -speed motor. 2. Motors already included in the efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment (Tables 14- 1Aor14 -1B). 3. Motors that are an integral part (i.e. not easily removed and replaced) of specialized process equipment (i.e. equipment which requires a special motor, such as an explosion - proof motor). 4. Motors integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no qualifying motor has been approved (i.e. if the only U.L. listing for the equipment is with a less- efficient motor and there is no energy - efficient motor option). For motors claiming an exception, list motor and note which exception applies. Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH -CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South 'Date 2/2/2009 The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424) 1411 Equipment performance yes 1411.4 Pkg. elec. htg.& cig. List heat pumps on schedule M - 3, M- yes 1411.1 Minimum efficiency Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency M - 9 n.a. 1411.1 Combustion htg. Indicate intermittent ignition, flue/draft damper & jacket loss 1412 HVAC controls yes 1412.1 Temperature zones Indicate locations on plans M - 3, M- n. a. 1412.2 Deadband control Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum n.a. 1412.3 Humidity control Indicate humidistat no 1412.4 Automatic setback Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types Expt 1 n.a. 1412.4.1 Dampers Indicate damper location and auto. controls & max. leakage n.a. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Indicate optimum start controls n.a. 1412.5 Heat pump control Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule n.a. 1412.6 Combustion htg. Indicate modulating or staged control n.a. 1412.7 Balancing Indicate balancing features on plans 1412.8 Ventilation Control Indicate demand control ventilation for high - occupancy areas n.a. 1422 Thermostat interlock Indicate thermostat interlock on plans n.a. 1423 Economizers Equipment schedule 1413 Air economizers n.a. 1413.1 Air Econo Operation Indicate 100% capability on schedule n.a. 1413.1 Wtr Econo Operation Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F wb n.a. 1413.2 Water Econo Doc Indicate clg load & water econoe & clg tower performance n.a. 1413.3 Integrated operation Indicate capability for partial cooling n.a. 1413.4 Humidification Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer 1414 Ducting systems n.a. 1414.1 Duct sealing Indicate sealing necessary n.a. 1414.2 Duct insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on duct yes 1415.1 Piping insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping 15083 1416 Completion Requirements yes 1416.2.1 Commissioning Provide commissioning plan 15734 yes 1416.2.2 -3 Sys.Bal & Func.Test Indicate air and water system balancing & functional testing 15950 yes 1416.2.4 Commissioning Indicate O &M manuals, record drawings, staff training 15734 yes 1416.2.5 Comm. Report Indicate requirements for prelim. & final commissioning report 15734 yes 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans M - 3, M- Mechanical Summary Form Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer SERVICE WATER HEATING AND - HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454) 1440 Service water htg. n.a. 1441 Elec. water heater Indicate R -10 insulation under tank n.a. 1442 Shut -off controls Indicate automatic shut -off n.a. 1443 Pipe Insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping n.a. 1452 Heat Pump COP Indicate minimum COP of 4.0 n.a. 1452 Heater Efficiency Indicate pool heater efficiency n.a. 1453 Pool heater controls Indicate switch and 65 degree control n.a. 1454 Pool covers Indicate vapor retardant cover n.a. 1454 Pools 90+ degrees Indicate R -12 pool cover 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form ues provi exp 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Permit Plans , Checklist MECH-CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device (IID), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW), including electric furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have either an Energy FActor (EF) or a CAE of not less than the following: 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Coo ing Equipment: Packaged electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be a heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and • cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where dead band controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,828 Btu /h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than 3 stories in height. 4. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust and relief outlets in the first story and levels below the first story of buildings three or more stories in height. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1436. 2. Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4. Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 ° F dry- bulb /40 ° F wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air - cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 ° F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 65,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling. 2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAC 246 - 320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches; seal transverse joints. 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or greater. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any exterior envelope surfaces per Chapter 13. Outside air ducts serving individual supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they, 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying EF CAE < 50 gal storage 0.58 0.71 50 to 70 gal storage 0.57 0.71 > 70 gal storage 0.55 0.70 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Permit Plans , Checklist MECH-CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device (IID), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW), including electric furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have either an Energy FActor (EF) or a CAE of not less than the following: 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Coo ing Equipment: Packaged electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be a heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and • cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where dead band controls are not appropriate. 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the same temperature setpoint. 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,828 Btu /h) or less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that is capable of shutting the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 minutes. 4. Systems controlled solely by a manually operated timer capable of operating the system for no more than two hours. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by the fire alarm system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than 3 stories in height. 4. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust and relief outlets in the first story and levels below the first story of buildings three or more stories in height. 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1436. 2. Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4. Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 ° F dry- bulb /40 ° F wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air - cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 ° F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 65,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical cooling. 2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAC 246 - 320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1414 Ducting Systems 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches; seal transverse joints. 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or greater. 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any exterior envelope surfaces per Chapter 13. Outside air ducts serving individual supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they, 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying UUIICli 111 1110 11101 0117 01191 100010 VOIWW 1110 11101 011117 VI 19V11,01190 three or more stories in he 6 Washington State Nonresidential Eher §9n(i0 tlei hiptipmereocabrIfilequipment, or '1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying air capacities exceeding 10,000 cfm shall have optimum start controls. Optimum start controls shall be designed to automatically adjust the start time of an HVAC system each day to bring the space to desired occupied temperature levels immediately before scheduled occupancy. The control algorithm shall, as a minimum, be a function of the difference between space temperature and occupied setpoint and the amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy. 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set- up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall indicate when supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g., LED indicators). 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or staged combustion . control. 000 EXCEPTIONS: 1. Boilers. 2. Radiant heaters. 1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers, temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves. with Section 1412.4.1. Once outside air ducts meet the above listed requirements, any runs within conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements. Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14 -5. Exceptions: 1. Within the HVAC equipment. 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. 3. Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone. 1415 Piping Systems 1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally insulated in accordance with Table 14 -6. Exception: Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment. Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -26) 1416 Completion Requirements (Refer to NREC Section 1416 and the Building Commissioning Guidelines, published by the Building Commissioning Association, for complete text and guidelines for building completion and commissioning requirements.) Project Info Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South Date 2/2/2009 Tukwila, Washington 98168 For Building Department Use FILE COPY +J�� as No. Applicant Name: K. Craig Manawes, PE Applicant Address: One Village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, TX 79Pjt - "� Applicant Phone: 325 - 695 -1090 2006 Washington Slate Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Envelope Requirements (enter values as applicable) Minimum Insulation R- values Roofs Over Attic All Other Roofs Opaque Walls' Below Grade Walls Floors Over Unconditioned Space Slabs -on -Grade Radiant Floors Opaque Doors Vertical Glazing Overhead Glazing Maximum U- factors Maximum SHGC (or SC) Vertical /Overhead Glazing 1. Assemblies with metal framing must comply with overall U- factors Notes: 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Envelope Summary Climate' Zone 1 ENV -SUM Project Description ❑ New Building ❑ Addition Alteration ❑ Change of Use Compliance Option ❑ Prescriptive ❑ Component Performance (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications) ❑ Seattle EnvStd ❑ Systems Analysis Space Heat Type Glazing Area Calculation Note: Below grade walls may be included in the Gross Exterior Wall Area if they are insulated to the level required for opaque walls. Concrete/Masonry Option Semi - Heated Path O Electric resistance 0 All other (see over for definitions) Total Glazing Area (rough opening) (vertical & overhd) divided by Wall Area Electronic version: these values are automatically taken from ENV -UA -1. Gross Exterior times 100 equals % Glazing X 100 = O yes O no Check here if using this option and if project meets all requirements for the Concrete/Masonry Option. See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Enter requirements for each qualifying assembly below. O yes Q no Check here if using semi - heated path and if project meets all requirements for semi - heated spaces as defined in section 1310. Requires other fuel heating and qualifying thermostat. Only wall insulation requirement is reduced (2006 change). Only available in prescriptive path. crMAKILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER • Opaque Concrete /Masonry Wall Requirements Wall Maximum U- factor is 0.15 (R5.7 continuous ins) CMU block walls with insulated cores comply Revised July 2007 If project qualifies for Concrete /Masonry Option, list walls with HC z 9.0 Btu/ft'• F below (other walls must meet Opaque Wall requirements). Use descriptions and values from Table 10 -9 in the Code. Wall Description U- factor (including insulation R -value & position) REVIE ED FOR 1)01 0 ic Concrete/Masonry Option* Wall Heat Capacity (HC) Assembly Description Assy.Tag HC ** Area (sf) HC x Area 1-1311Ap 3: Totals Area weighed HC: divide total of (HC x A;o ' :s ; ` , area) by Total Area Envelope Summary (back) Climate Zone 1 ENV -SUM 2000 Washington State Nonrestdenfat Energy Code Compliance Forms Decision Flowchart for Prescriptive Option Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for the optional Prescriptive Option. If not, either the Component Performance or Systems Analysis Options must be used. 1302 Space Heat Type: For the pu gg of determining building envelope reoaremeINAfrill&winrtwo gate oils comprise all space heating types: Othe AII'dther g s tirnsriT eluding gas, solid fuel, oil, and propane space heating systems and those systems listed in the exception to electric resistance. (continued at right) 4—N All Insulation Installed? Below Grd Wall (ext) R -10 Below Grd Wall (oth) R -19 Roof Over Attic R -30 All Other Roof R -21 Raised Floor R -19 Slab -On -Grade R -10 Radiant Floor R -10 Opaque Door U -0.60 L N Mass Wall Criteria OK? (below) AG Mass Wall Insulation Req. Mass Wall CMU Block Wood Frame Metal Framed U0.15/R5.7ci Ins. Cores R19 R19 r Yes . o 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form es Glazing Area % 0-30% 30-45% >45% No Yes Glazing Criteria Met? Vert OH UVaI UVaI SHGC 0.55 0.70 0.45 0.45 0.60 0.40 Not Allowed Yes I b, Prescriptive Path Allowed Component Performance, Systems Analysis, or EnvStd Required Electric Resistance: Space heating systems which use electric resistance elements as the primary heating system including baseboard, radiant, and forced air units where the total electric resistance heat capacity exceeds 1.0 W/ft the gross conditioned floor area. Exception: Heat pumps and terminal electric resistance heating in variable air volume distribution systems. Yes Glazing Criteria Met? Glazing Vert OH Area % UVaI UVaI SHGC 0 -30% 0.40 0.60 0.40 >30 Not Allowed Yes s All Insulation Installed? Wood Metal Below Grd Wall (ext) R -10 R -10 Below Grd Wall (oth) R -19 U -0.062 Roof Over Attic R -38 U -0.031 All Other Roof R -30 U - 0.034 Raised Floor R -30 U -0.029 Slab -On -Grade R -10 R -10 Radiant Floor R -10 R -10 Opa ue Door U-0.60 U -0 60 vPC Yes— [.4 3 ! .1_ tkM AG Mass Wall Insulation Req. Mass Wall U0.15/R5.7ci CMU Block Ins. Cores Wood Frame R19 Metal Framed 1.10.062 Revised July 2007 No— No-► *If the area weighted heat capacity (HC) of the total above grade wall is a minimum of 9.0, the Concrete Masonry Option may be used. For framed walls, assume HC =1.0 unless calculations are provided; for all other walls, use Section 1009. Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South Date 2/2/2009 Space Heat Type 0 Electric resistance All other For Building Department Use Glazing Area as % gross exterior wall area Prop. I Max.Target Concrete/Masonry Option 0 Yes 0 No Notes: If glazing area exceeds maximum allowed in Table, then calculate adjusted areas on back (over). Building Component List components by assembly ID & page # Proposed UA U- factor x Area (A) = UA (U x A) Target UA U- factor x Area (A) = UA (U x A) 6u!ze10 I °!lean U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -30% 0.40 0.55 >30 -45% see note above 0.45 Overhead Glazing so!uy ianO U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -30% 0.6 0.7 >30 -45% see note above 0.6 I Oth.Roofs U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: Opaque Doors U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: U= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.60 0.60 Roofs Over R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.031 0.036 s;oob Jagio R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.034 0.046 Opaque Walls' R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: * *Note: sum of Target Areas here should equal Target Opaque Wall Area ** ** (see back) Electric Resist. Other Heating Frame -Wd 0.062 0.062 Frame -Mtl 0.062 0.109 Mass Wall` 0.15 0.15 ++ see mass wall Criteria Below Grade R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Note: if insulated to levels required for opaque walls, list above with opaque walls Electric Resist. Other Heating Int Ins 0.062 0.062 Ext Ins 0.07 0.07 Floors Over Uncond. R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating 0.029 0.056 Slab -on- grade R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: R= Plan ID: Electric Resist. Other Heating F =0.54 F =0.54 (see Table 13 -1 for radiant floor values) *For CMU walls, indicate core insulation material. Totals I Totals' 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Envelope UA 'Calculations Climate Zone 1 ENV -UA 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 To comply: 1) Proposed Total UA shall not exceed Target Total UA. 2) Proposed Total Area shall equal Target Total Area. I Glazing List components by assembly ID & page # Proposed SHGC SHGC* x Area (A) = SHGC x A Target SHGC SHGC x Area (A) = SHGC x A Glazing ID: ID: ID: ID: ID: ID: Glazing % Electric Resist. Other Heating 0 -30% 0.4 0.45 >30 -45% not allowed 0.4 - fg ote: Manufacturer's SC may be used in lieu of Totals' Totals' Climate Zone 1 ENV -SHGC 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms ` N For compliance: Proposed total SHGC x A shall not exceed Target total SHGC x A NOTE: Since 1997 SHGC compliance for vertical and overhead glazing is allowed to be calculated together. Target Area Adjustment Calculations then this calculation must be submitted Use the resulting areas In the Target UA and SHGC calculations above. OG= OG= VG= Glazing Area Opaque Area G Exterior all Area I Roofs over Attics Walls) Proposed Areas: Numbered values are used in calculations below. Roofs over Attics Other Roofs Walls X 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Max Glazing Area (Table 13-1) B lesser Proposed Opaque Area Proposed Opaque Area I -100 Target OG Area in Roofs over Attics Max OG Remaining Proposed OG Area Maximum Targe Glazing Area / Target OG Area in Other Roofs Tj lesser Target OG Area — I Target values in shaded boxe are used in the applicable Target UA calculation on the front. Target VG Area and Total Target OG Area are also used in the applicable Target SHGC calculations above. Proposed VG Area Target VG Area Note: OG a overhead glazing VG = vertical glazing For Target OG'a, the lesser values are used both here and below. Target VG Area Target Opaque Area Target Opaque Area Note: If there is more than one type of wall, the Target VG Area may be distributed among them, and separate Target Opaque Areas found. If the Target Areas for Opaque Walls listed on the front must equal the total calculated here. Revised July 2007 Target Areas OK I Building Permit Plans Checklist ENV -CHK 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Fours Revised July 2007 Project Address 12682 Gateway Drive South (Date 2/2/2009 The following information is necessary to check a building permit application for compliance with the building envelope requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1301 -1314) 1301 Scope Unconditioned spaces identified on plans if allowed n.a. 1302 Space heat type: If "Other", indicate on plans that electric resistance heat is not allowed n.a. 1310.2 Semi- heated spaces Semi - heated spaces identified on plans if allowed 1311 Insulation n.a. 1311.1 Insul. installation Indicate densities and clearances n. a. 1311.2 Roof /ceiling insul. Indicate R -value on roof sections for attics and other roofs; Indicate clearances for attic insulation; Indicate baffles if eave vents installed; Indicate face stapling of faced batts n. a. 1311.3 Wall insulation Indicate R -value on wall sections; Indicate face stapling of faced batts; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected; Indicate loose -fill core insulation for masonry walls as necess; Indicate heat capacity of masonry walls if masonry option is used F73; n.a. 1311.4 Floor insulation Indicate R -value on floor sections; Indicate substantial contact with surface; Indicate supports not more than 24" o.c.; Indicate that insulation does not block airflow through foundation vents n. a . 1311.5 Slab -on -grade floor Indicate R -value on wall section or foundation detail; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 24" from top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected n • a . 1311.6 Radiant floor Indicate R -value on wall section or foundation detail; Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 36" from the top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected; Indicate insulation also under entire slab where req'd. by Official n.a. 1312 Glazing and doors Provide calculation of glazing area (including both vertical vertical and overhead) as percent of gross wall area n. a . 1312.1 U- factors Indicate glazing and door U- factors on glazing and door schedule (provide area - weighted calculations as necessary); Indicate if values are NFRC or default, if values are default then specify frame type. glazing layers, gapwidth, low-e coatings, gas fillings n.a. 1312.2 SHGC & SC Indicate glazing solar heat gain coefficient or shading coefficient on glazing schedule (provide area - weighted calculations as necessary) 1313 Moisture control n.a. 1313.1 Vapor retarders Indicate vapor retarders on warm side n.a. 1313.2 Roof /ceiling vap.ret. Indicate vapor retarder on roof section; Indicate vap. retard. with sealed seams for non -wood struc. n.a. 1313.3 Wall vapor retarder Indicate vapor retarder on wall section n.a. 1313.4 Floor vapor retarder Indicate vapor retarder on floor section n • a . 1313.5 Crawl space vap. ret. Indicate six mil black polyethylene overlapped 12" on ground 1314 Air leakage n. a. n. a. 1314.1 Bldg. envel. sealing Indicate sealing, caulking, gasketing, and weatherstripping 1314.2 Glazing /door sealing Indicate weatherstripping n. a. 1314.3 Assemb. as ducts Indicate sealing, caulking and gasketing n.a. 1314.4 Recessed Lighting Fixtur¢ Indicate IC rating, ASTM E283 certification, and gasketing or caulking to ceiling PRESCRIPTIVE /COMPONENT PERFORMANCE (Sections 1320 -23 or 1330 -34) yes Envelope Sum. Form Completed and attached. Provide component performance worksheet if necessary If "no" is shown for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Building Permit Plans Checklist ENV -CHK 2008 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Envelope - General Requirement 1311 Insulation 1311.1 Installation Requirements: All insulation materials shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions to achieve proper densities, maintain clearances and maintain uniform R- values. To the maximum extent possible, insulation shall extend over the full component area to the intended R- value. 1311.2 Roof /Ceiling Insulation: Open -blown or poured loose -fill insulation may be used in attic spaces where the slope of the ceiling is not more than 3/12 and there is at least 30 inches of clear distance from the top of the bottom chord of the truss or ceiling joist to the underside of the sheathing at the roof ridge. When eave vents are installed, baffling of the vent openings shall be provided so as to deflect the incoming air above the surface of the insulation. Where lighting fixtures are recessed into a suspended or exposed grid ceiling, the roof /ceiling assembly shall be insulated in a location other than directly on the suspended ceiling. EXCEPTION: Type IC rated recessed lighting fixtures. Where installed in wood framing, faced batt insulation shall be face stapled. 1311.3 Wall Insulation: Exterior wall cavities isolated during framing shall be fully insulated to the levels of the surrounding walls. When installed in wood framing, faced batt insulation shall be face stapled. Above grade exterior insulation shall be protected. 1311.4 Floor Insulation: Floor insulation shall be installed in a permanent manner in substantial contact with the surface being insulated. Insulation supports shall be installed so spacing is not more than 24 inches on center. Installed insulation shall not block the airflow through foundation vents. 1311.5 Slab -On -Grade Floor: Slab -on -grade insulation installed inside the foundation wall shall extend downward from the top of the slab a minimum distance of 24 inches or to the top of the footing, whichever is Tess. Insulation installed outside the foundation shall extend downward a minimum of 24 inches or to the frost line, whichever is greater. Above grade insulation shall be protected. EXCEPTION: For monolithic slabs, the insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab to the bottom of the footing. 1311.6 Radiant Floors (on or below grade): Slab -on- grade insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab a minimum distance of 36 inches or downward to the top of the footing and horizontal for an aggregate of not less than 36 inches. If required by the building official where soil conditions warrant such insulation, the entire area of a radiant floor shall be thermally isolated from the soil. Where a soil gas control system is provided below the radiant floor, which results in increased convective flow below the radiant floor, the radiant floor shall be thermally isolated from the sub - floor gravel layer. 1312 Glazing and Doors 1312.1 Standard Procedure for Determination of Glazing and Door U- Factors: U- factors for glazing and doors shall be determined, certified and labeled in accordance with Standard RS -31 by a certified independent agency licensed by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Compliance shall be based on the Residential or the Nonresidential Model Size. Product samples used for U- factor determinations shall be production line units or representative of units as purchased by the consumer or contractor. Unlabeled glazing and doors shall be assigned the default U- factor in Table 10 -6. 1312.2 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Shading Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), shall be determined, certified and labeled in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Standard by a certified, independent agency, licensed by the NFRC. EXCEPTION: Shading coefficients (SC) shall be an acceptable alternate for compliance with solar heat gain coefficient requirements. Shading coefficients for glazing shall be taken from Chapter 31 of Standard RS -1 or from the manufacturer's test data. 1313 Moisture Control 1313.1 Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarders shall be installed on the warm side (in winter) of insulation as required by this section. EXCEPTION: Vapor retarder installed with not more than 1/3 of the nominal R -value between it and the conditioned space. 1313.2 Roof /Ceiling Assemblies: Roof /ceiling assemblies where the ventilation space above the insulation is less than an average of 12 inches shall be provided with a vapor retarder. (For enclosed attics and enclosed rafter spaces, see Section 1203.2 of the International Building Code.) Roof /ceiling assemblies without a vented airspace, allowed only where neither the roof deck nor the roof structure are made of wood, shall provide a continuous vapor retarder with taped seams. EXCEPTION: Vapor retarders need not be provided where all of the insulation is installed between the roof membrane and the structural roof deck. 1313.3 Walls: Walls separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder. 1313.4 Floors: Floors separating conditioned space from unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder. 1313.5 Crawlspaces: A ground cover of six mil (0.006 inch thick) black polyethylene or approved equal shall be laid over the ground within crawlspaces. The ground cover shall be overlapped 12 inches minimum at the joints and shall extend to the foundation wall. EXCEPTION: The ground cover may be omitted in crawl spaces if the crawlspace has a concrete slab floor with a minimum thickness of 3 -1/2 inches. 1314 Air Leakage 1314.1 Building Envelope: The requirements of this section shall apply to building elements separating conditioned from unconditioned spaces. Exterior joints around windows and door frames, openings between walls and foundation, between walls and roof and wall panels; openings at penetrations of utility services through walls, floors and roofs; and all other openings in the building envelope shall be sealed, caulked, gasketed or weatherstripped to limit air leakage. 1314.2 Glazing and Doors: Doors and operable glazing separating conditioned from unconditioned space shall be weatherstripped. Fixed windows shall be tight fitting with glass retained by stops with sealant or caulking all around. EXCEPTION: Openings that are required to be fire resistant. 1314.3 Building Assemblies Used as Ducts or Plenums: Building assemblies used as ducts or plenums shall be sealed, caulked and gasketed to limit air leakage. 1314.4 Recessed Lighting Fixtures: When installed in the building envelope, recessed lighting fixtures shall by Type IC rated, and certified under ASTM E283 to have no more than 2.0 cfm air movement from the conditioned space to the ceiling cavity. The lighting fixture shall be tested at 75 Pascals or 1.57 Ibs /ft pressure difference and have a label attached, showing compliance with this test method. Recessed lighting fixtures shall be installed with a gasket or caulk between the fixture and ceiling to prevent air leakage. • February 02, 2009 PROJECT NUMBER: 08093 PROJECT LOCATION: VERIZONBusiness 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, Washington 98168 EQUIPMENT: Flood Cell Batteries EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Battery ENGINEERS - CONSULTANTS FILE COPY Permit No. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION One (1) Flooded Cell UPS Battery — C &D 240XT4LC -15 Lead Calcium consists of 240 cells (60 four -cell jars), 480 VDC, rated at 714 AH at the 8 hour'rate, 1.25 S.G. at 77 degrees F. Features: • Approximate Jar dimensions — 14.12 "W X 15.00 "L X 22.75 "H • Float vpc = 2.26 VDC: Maximum vpc = 2.38 VDC • Jarwei.. — 535 Ibs Batte we •ht = 3 10S Ibs On Village Drive, Suit. 500 Abilene, Texas 79606 Phone (325) 695 - 1090. -Fax (325) 6 -3757 CITY EIV 4 0$ TU A LA MAR 2 4 2009 PERMIT CENTER • Jar contents (four (4) cells per jar) — Electrolyte Volume = 8 gallons /Jar X 60 Jars/Battery = 480 gallons olycarbonate jar material • Provide battery complete with jar spacers, inter -cell connecting plates, terminal plates, connectors covers, and inter -rack connecting cables. CORRECTION LT R# P01-015 • 2. Battery Racks Four (4) BATTERY RACKS — C &D ROB- 0902- 07EP2P, seismic zone 4, 3 -tier 2 -row, 7ft.long painted racks. Features: • Earthquake protected rack suitable for installation in seismic zon • Powder coated painted rail • Rack length = 7 ft. suitable for 5 of the above specified battery jars per tier —15 jars total per rack • Rack width = 25.06 "; Rack hei;ght = 83.50" • Provide racks with two sets of spill containment assembly complete with acid absorbing pillows. Each set shall be selected to emcompass two 7 ft. racks installed back -to -back One Village Drive, Suite 500 Abilene, Texas 79606 Phone (325) 695-1090 -- Fax (325) 695 -3757 REVISION 1 03 -17 -09 CITY COMMENTS Product Line Model # of Cells per unit Specific Gravity Lead Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Weight per Cell (Lbs) Pure Sulfuric Acid Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Volume per Cell (Gal) Discontinued VRLA models - historical purposes only Liberty 1000 LS12 -25* 6 1.300 3 0.9 0.3 0.1 Liberty 1000 LS6 -50* 3 1.300 5 1.7 0.7 0.2 Liberty 1000 Front Access FAl2 -125* 6 1.300 13 3.7 1.5 0.3 Guardsman* 12G -225* 6 1.300 8 1.9 0.8 0.2 Guardsman* 12G -250* 6 1.300 8 1.9 0.8 0.2 Guardsman* 12G -325* 6 1.300 10 2.6 1.0 0.2 Guardsman* 12G -350* 6 1.300 10 2.6 1.0 0.2 Guardsman* 12G -400* 6 1.300 12 3.2 1.2 0.3 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD- 350* 1 1.300 44 12.0 4.8 1.1 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD- 460* 1 1.300 56 15.7 6.2 1.5 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD -580* 1 1.300 70 19.2 7.6 1.8 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD- 810* 1 1.300 95 26.0 10.3 2.4 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD- 1040* 1 1.300 120 33.5 13.2 3.1 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD -1260* 1 1.300 145 40.4 15.9 3.7 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD -1500* 1 1.300 170 47.0 18.5 4.3 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HD -2000* 1 1.300 220 61.1 24.1 5.6 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 295* 1 1.250 44 11.6 3.9 1.1 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 390* 1 1.250 56 15.1 5.1 1.5 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 490* 1 1.250 70 18.5 6.2 1.8 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 685* 1 1.250 95 25.0 8.5 2.4 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 880* 1 1.250 120 32.2 10.9 3.1 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL- 1075* 1 1.250 145 38.8 13.1 3.7 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL -1270* 1 1.250 170 45.2 15.3 4.3 Liberty 2000 SuperMax* HDL -1700* 1 • 1.250 220 59.1 19.8 5.6 Liberty 2000 Max* HD- 300* 1 1.300 44 12.0 4.8 1.1 Liberty 2000 Max* HD- 400* 1 1.300 56 15.7 6.2 1.5 Liberty 2000 Max* HD- 500* 1 1.300 70 19.2 7.6 1.8 Liberty 2000 Max* HD- 700* 1 1.300 95 26.0 10.3 2.4 Liberty 2000 Max* HD- 900* 1 1.300 120 33.5 13.2 3.1 Liberty 2000 Max* HD -1100* 1 1.300 145 40.4 15.9 3.7 Liberty 2000 Max* HD -1300* 1 1.300 170 47.0 18.5 4.3 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 260* 1 1.250 44 11.6 3.9 1.1 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 350* 1 1.250 56 15.1 5.1 1.5 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 440* 1 1.250 70 18.5 6.2 1.8 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 610* 1 1.250 95 25.0 8.5 2.4 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 785* 1 1.250 120 32.2 10.9 3.1 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL- 960* 1 1.250 145 38.8 13.1 3.7 Liberty 2000 Max* HDL -1135* 1 1.250 170 45.2 15.3 4.3 RHD* RHD -190* 1 1.300 23 7.7 3.0 0.7 RHD* RHD -250* 1 1.300 30 9.8 3.9 0.9 RHD* RHD -315* 1 1.300 36 11.7 4.6 1.1 RHD* RHD -440* 1 1.300 49 16.4 6.5 1.5 RHD* RHD -600* 1 1.300 62 20.6 8.1 1.9 RHDL* RHDL -160* 1 1.250 23 7.4 2.5 0.7 RHDL* RHDL -215* 1 1.250 30 9.4 3.2 0.9 RHDL* RHDL -270* 1 1.250 36 11.3 3.8 1.1 RHDL* RHDL -375* 1 1.250 49 15.8 5.3 1.5 RHDL* RHDL -500* 1 1.250 62 19.8 6.7 1.9 Hazardous Materials Quantities C &D TECHNOLOGIES, INC. HAZMAT TABLE: LEAD WEIGHT & ACID CONTENT per CELL TYPES Page 1 of 5 11/18/2008 Product Line Model # of Cells per unit Specific Gravity Lead Weight per CeII (Lbs) Electrolyte Weight per CeII (Lbs) Pure Sulfuric Acid Weight per CeII (Lbs) Electrolyte Volume per CeII (Gal) LST* LST- 780* 1 1.245 118 63.4 21.4 6.1 LST* LST- 900* 1 1.245 134 58.7 19.8 5.7 LST* LST -1010* 1 1.245 149 56.5 19.1 5.4 LST* LST -1120* 1 1.245 165 54.3 18.4 5.2 LST* LST -1340* 1 1.245 195 60.9 20.6 5.9 LST* LST -1680* 1 1.245 241 81.6 27.6 7.9 LST* LST -1900* 1 1.245 270 97.1 32.8 9.4 LST* LST -2020* 1 1.245 284 95.0 32.1 9.1 LST* LST -2130* 1 1.245 299 92.8 31.4 8.9 TEL TEL12 -150F 6 1.300 14 4.1 1.6 0.4 TEL TEL12 -170F 6 1.300 15 4.2 1.8 0.4 XLB* XL4B- 7* 4 1.290 48 15.9 6.1 1.5 XLB* XL4B- 9* 4 1.290 60 15.1 5.8 1.4 XLB* XL4B -11* 4 1.290 72 23.6 9.1 2.2 XLB* XL4B -13* 4 1.290 84 22.5 8.7 2.1 XLB* XL4B -15* 4 1.290 97 21.3 8.2 2.0 XLB* XL2B -17* 2 1.290 111 46.9 18.1 4.4 XLB* XL2B -19* 2 1.290 124 45.7 17.6 4.3 XLB* XL2B -21 * 2 1.290 137 44.9 17.3 4.2 XLB* XL2B -23* 2 1.290 149 43.8 16.9 4.1 XLB* XL2B -25* 2 1.290 162 42.6 16.4 4.0 XLB* XL1 B -27* 1 1.290 175 44.6 17.2 4.1 XLB* XL1 B -29* 1 1.290 187 42.5 16.4 3.9 XLB* XL1 B -31 * 1 1.290 201 48.9 18.8 4.5 XLB* XL1 B -33* 1 1.290 214 46.7 18.0 4.3 XLB* XL1 B -35* 1 1.290 226 61.6 23.7 5.7 XLB* XL1 B -37* 1 1.290 239 59.5 22.9 5.5 XLB* XL1 B -39* 1 1.290 252 57.3 22.1 5.3 XLB* XL1 B -41 * 1 1.290 265 55.2 21.3 5.1 UPS High Rate Max UPS12- 475MRLP* 6 1.300 10.6 2.3 1.0 0.2 UPS High Rate Max UPS12- 490MR* 6 1.300 12.4 3.2 1.3 0.3 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -100 / FR* 6 1.300 2.6 0.7 0.3 0.1 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -140 / FR* 6 1.300 3.5 0.7 0.3 0.1 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -170 / FR* 6 1.300 5.0 1.2 0.5 0.1 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -200 / FR* 6 1.300 5.0 1.2 0.5 0.1 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -270 / FR* 6 1.300 7.1 1.8 0.7 0.2 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -310 / FR* 6 1.300 8.2 2.1 0.8 0.2 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -370 / FR* 6 1.300 9.2 2.3 0.9 0.2 UPS High Rate* UPS6 -620 / FR* 3 1.300 17.0 4.5 1.8 0.4 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -475 / FR* 6 1.300 12.4 3.2 1.3 0.3 UPS High Rate* UPS12 -530 / FR* 6 1.300 12.7 3.2 1.3 0.3 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -150* 6 1.300 3.5 0.7 0.3 0.1 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -210* 6 1.300 5.0 1.2 0.5 0.1 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -300* 6 1.300 7.1 1.8 0.7 0.2 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -350* 6 1.300 8.2 2.1 0.8 0.2 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -400* 6 1.300 9.2 2.3 0.9 0.2 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -490* 6 1.300 12.4 3.2 1.3 0.3 UPS Max Rate* MR12 -540* 6 1.300 12.7 3.2 1.3 0.3 msEndur* AT -7* 1 1.300 44 12.0 4.8 1.1 msEndur* AT -9* 1 1.300 56 15.7 6.2 1.5 Y Hazardous Materials Quantities Page 2 of 5 11/18/2008 Product Line Model # of Cells per unit Specific Gravity Lead Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Weight per Cell (Lbs) Pure Sulfuric Acid Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Volume per Cell (Gal) msEndur* AT -11* 1 1.300 70 19.2 7.6 1.8 msEndur* AT -15 * 1 1.300 95 26.0 10.3 2.4 msEndur* AT -19* 1 1.300 120 33.5 13.2 3.1 msEndur* AT -23* 1 1.300 145 40.4 15.9 3.7 msEndur* AT -27* 1 1.300 170 47.0 18.5 4.3 msEndur* AT -35* 1 1.300 220 61.1 24.1 5.6 msEndur* ATL -7* 1 1.250 44 11.6 3.9 1.1 msEndur* ATL -9* 1 1.250 56 15.1 5.1 1.5 msEndur* ATL -11* 1 1.250 70 18.5 6.2 1.8 msEndur* ATL -15* 1 1.250 95 25.0 8.5 2.4 msEndur* ATL -19* 1 1.250 120 32.2 10.9 3.1 msEndur* ATL -23* 1 1.250 145 38.8 13.1 3.7 msEndur* ATL -27* 1 1.250 170 45.2 15.3 4.3 msEndur* ATL -35* 1 1.250 220 58.4 19.7 5.6 VR Solar VRS12 -33* 6 1.300 3 0.9 0.3 0.1 VR Solar VRS12 -50* 6 1.300 5 1.2 0.5 0.1 VR Solar VRS12 -75* 6 1.300 6 1.8 0.7 0.2 VR Solar VRS12 -88* 6 1.300 8 2.1 0.8 0.2 Discontinued FLOODED models - historical purposes only DCU 3DCU- 3* 3 1.215 4 3.0 0.9 0.3 DCU DCU -15* 1 1.215 23 11.5 3.4 1.1 KCR 3KCR- 5* 3 1.215 25 13.0 3.8 1.3 KCT 3KCT -180* 3 1.215 24 13.0 3.8 1.3 XT XT3K -11 * 3 1.215 38 12.0 3.5 1.2 XTC XT3KC -11* 3 1.250 38 12.3 4.2 1.2 CPV CPV290* 1 1.285 32 9.1 3.5 0.8 CPV CPV360* 1 1.285 39 10.3 3.9 1.0 CPV CPV430* 1 1.285 44 12.6 4.8 1.2 CPV CPV550* 1 1.285 50 15.5 5.9 1.5 CPV CPV660* 1 1.285 57 18.4 7.0 1.7 CPV CPV780* 1 1.285 68 22.1 8.4 2.1 CPV CPV890* 1 1.285 73 25.2 9.6 2.4 CPV CPV1000* 1 1.285 85 28.0 10.7 2.6 CPV CPV1100* 1 1.285 94 30.9 11.7 2.9 CPV CPV1220* 1 1.285 117 29.2 11.1 2.7 CPV CPV1550* 1 1.285 145 36.8 14.0 3.4 CPV CPV1880* 1 1.285 179 44.9 17.1 4.2 CPV CPV2190* 1 1.285 206 51.7 19.7 4.8 XT XT4L -11* 4 1.215 71 22.0 6.5 2.2 XT XT4L -13* 4 1.215 84 21.0 6.2 2.1 XT XT4L -15* 4 1.215 97 20.0 5.9 2.0 XT XT2L -17* 2 1.215 110 44.0 13.0 4.3 XT XT2L -19* 2 1.215 123 43.0 12.7 4.2 XT XT2L -21 * 2 1.215 135 42.0 12.4 4.1 XT XT2L -23* 2 1.215 148 41.0 12.1 4.0 XT XT2L -25* 2 1.215 161 40.0 11.8 3.9 XT XT1 L -27* 1 1.215 174 42.0 12.4 4.1 XT XT1 L -29* 1 1.215 187 40.0 11.8 3.9 XT XT1 L -31 * 1 1.215 200 46.0 13.6 4.5 XT XT1 L -33* 1 1.215 213 44.0 13.0 4.3 Hazardous Materials Quantities Page 3 of 5 11/18/2008 Product Line Model # of Cells per unit Specific Gravity Lead Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Weight per Cell (Lbs) Pure Sulfuric Acid Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Volume per Cell (Gal) XTR* 4XTR -17* 4 1.215 125 32.0 9.5 3.2 XTR* 4XTR -19* 4 1.215 140 30.0 8.9 3.0 XTR* 4XTR -21 * 4 1.215 154 33.0 9.8 3.3 XTR* 2XTR -27* 2 1.215 196 50.0 14.8 4.9 XTR* 2XTR -29* 2 1.215 210 49.0 14.5 4.8 XTR* 2XTR -31 * 2 1.215 225 48.0 14.2 4.7 XT - Plus XT4LP -11 * 4 1.215 71 22.0 6.5 2.2 XT - Plus XT4LP -13* 4 1.215 84 21.0 6.2 2.1 XT - Pius XT4LP -15* 4 1.215 97 20.0 5.9 2.0 XT - Plus XT2LP -17* 2 1.215 110 44.0 13.0 4.3 XT - Plus XT2LP -19* 2 1.215 123 43.0 12.7 4.2 XT - Plus XT2LP -21 * 2 1.215 135 42.0 12.4 4.1 XT - Plus XT2LP -23* 2 1.215 148 41.0 12.1 4.0 XT - Plus XT2LP -25* 2 1.215 161 40.0 11.8 3.9 XT - Plus XT1 LP -27* 1 1.215 174 42.0 12.4 4.1 XT - Plus XT1 LP -29* 1 1.215 187 40.0 11.8 3.9 XT - Plus XT1 LP -31 * 1 1.215 200 46.0 13.6 4.5 XT - Plus XT1 LP -33* 1 1.215 213 44.0 13.0 4.3 XTR - Plus* 4XTRP -17* 4 1.215 125 32.0 9.5 3.2 XTR - Plus* 4XTRP -19* 4 1.215 140 30.0 8.9 3.0 XTR - Plus* 4XTRP -21 * 4 1.215 154 33.0 9.8 3.3 XTR - Plus* 2XTRP -27* 2 1.215 196 50.0 14.8 4.9 XTR - Plus* 2XTRP -29* 2 1.215 210 49.0 14.5 4.8 XTR - Pius* 2XTRP -31 * 2 1.215 225 48.0 - 14.2 4.7 XTC XT4LC -11* 4 1.250 71 22.6 7.7 2.2 '1'Y XTCY YM ^ A XT4t 13ic` "(-.{" 4_' t ry," -2 p`s . • - - XTC XT4LC -15* 4 1.250 97 20.6 7.0 2.0 XTC - - T C 17* 2 .2 0 110 4 .3 15.3 4.3 XTC - X 2LC -1 •* _ ' 2 1. 51 ' - ! •4 ! 1 50 4. '' XTC XT2LC -21 * 2 1.250 135 43.2 14.6 4.1 XTC XT2LC -23* 2 1.250 148 42.2 14.3 4.0 XTC XT2LC -25* 2 1.250 161 41.2 13.9 3.9 XTC XT1 LC -27* 1 1.250 174 43.2 14.6 4.1 XTC XT1 LC -29* 1 1.250 187 41.2 13.9 3.9 XTC XT1 LC-31 * 1 1.250 200 46.0 15.5 4.5 XTC XT1 LC -33* 1 1.250 213 44.0 14.9 4.3 XTRC - Pius* 4XTRC -17* 4 1.250 125 32.0 10.8 3.2 XTRC - Plus* 4XTRC -19* 4 1.250 140 30.0 10.1 3.0 XTRC - Plus* 4XTRC -21 * 4 1.250 154 33.0 11.2 3.3 XTRC - Plus* 2XTRC -27* 2 1.250 196 50.0 16.9 4.9 XTRC - Pius* 2XTRC -29* 2 1.250 210 49.0 16.6 4.8 XTRC - Plus* 2XTRC -31* 2 1.250 225 48.0 16.2 4.7 XTC - Plus XT4LCP -11* 4 1.250 71 22.6 7.7 2.2 XTC - Pius XT4LCP -13* 4 1.250 84 21.6 7.3 2.1 XTC - Plus XT4LCP -15* 4 1.250 97 20.6 7.0 2.0 XTC - Plus XT2LCP -17* 2 1.250 110 45.3 15.3 4.3 XTC - Pius XT2LCP -19* 2 1.250 123 44.2 15.0 4.2 XTC - Pius XT2LCP -21* 2 1.250 135 43.2 14.6 4.1 XTC - Plus XT2LCP -23* 2 1.250 148 42.2 14.3 4.0 Hazardous Materials Quantities Page 4of5 11/18/2008 Product Line Model # of Cells per unit Specific Gravity Lead Weight per Cell (Lbs) Electrolyte Weight per Cell (Lbs) Pure Sulfuric Acid Weight per CeII (Lbs) Electrolyte Volume per Cell (Gal) XTC - Plus XT2LCP -25* 2 1.250 161 41.2 13.9 3.9 XTC - Plus XT1 LCP -27* 1 1.250 174 43.2 14.6 4.1 XTC - Plus XT1LCP -29* 1 1.250 187 41.2 13.9 3.9 XTC - Plus XT1 LCP -31 * 1 1.250 200 47.3 16.0 4.5 XTC - Plus XT1 LCP -33* 1 1.250 213 45.3 15.3 4.3 XTRC - Plus* 4XTRCP -17* 4 1.215 125 32.0 10.8 3.2 XTRC - Plus* 4XTRCP -19* 4 1.215 140 30.0 10.1 3.0 XTRC - Plus* 4XTRCP -21 * 4 1.215 154 33.0 11.2 3.3 XTRC - Plus* 2XTRCP -27* 2 1.215 196 50.0 16.9 4.9 XTRC - Plus* 2XTRCP -29* 2 1.215 210 49.0 16.6 4.8 XTRC - Plus* 2XTRCP -31 * 2 1.215 225 48.0 16.2 4.7 Hazardous Materials Quantities Notes: 1. Electrolyte values given are estimated quantities designed to meet or exceed the reporting requirements of all known, applicable health and safety codes. 2. All values listed above are approximate values and are subject to change without notice. 3. Above information are C &D confidential information. Page 5 of 5 11/18/2008 SECTION III: HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION (These hazards apply to Battery Acid only) APPEARANCE AND ODOR: Liquid, Colorless, Oily Fluid, Vapors are Colorless; Acrid odor when hot or charging. RATING CODES: 0= Insignificant 1= Slight 2= Moderate 3 =High 4= Extreme HMIS RATING: Health: 2 Flammability: 0 Reactivity: 1 Other: 0 NFPA RATING: Health: 2 Flammability: 0 Reactivity: 1 Other: CORR ROUTES OF ENTRY: Inhalation X Skin X Ingestion X TARGET ORGANS: Skin, Eyes, Upper Respiratory Tract HEALTH HAZARDS (ACUTE AND CHRONIC): ACUTE: Tissue destruction on contact. May cause 2nd and 3rd degree burns or blindness with prolonged contact. Ingestion will cause corrosive burns on contact. May be fatal if swallowed. CHRONIC: Inhalation of mists may cause upper respiratory irritation. SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS: Irritation and burning of exposed tissues. MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE: Respiratory disorders may be aggravated by prolonged inhalation of mists. California Proposition 65 Warning — Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling. SECTION II: COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS HAZARDOUS COMPONENT CAS# OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV %BY WEIGHT *Lead, Lead Compounds 7439 -92 -1 0.05mg /m3 0.05mg /m3 62 - 65% *Sulfuric Acid 7664 -93 -9 1.0mg/ m3 1.0mg/ m3 6 - 8% NON - HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Water 7732 -18 -5 N/A N/A 12 - 15% Calcium 7440 -70 -2 N/A N/A 1% Inert Components N/A N/A N/A 10 - 18% SECTION 313 (40 CFR) LISTED TOXIC CHEMICALS ARE PRECEDED BY AN * SECTION I: CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION PRODUCT IDENTITY: Flooded Lead - Calcium Battery CDID: DCU, DJ, JC, KCR, KCT, LCR, LCT, LCT -HP, LCTII, LCY, MCT, XDJ, XTJ, XTL, XTR XTH AND LCU SERIES MANUFACTURER NAME: C & D Technologies, Inc. ADDRESS: 1400 Union Meeting Road P. O. Box 3053 Blue Bell, PA 19422 -0858 TELEPHONE: (215) 619 -2700 EMERGENCY: (610) 828 -9309 24 HOUR EMERGENCY TELEPHONE: (CHEM TEL) 1- 800 - 255 -3924 SECTION IV: FIRST AID MEASURES EMERGENCY AND FIRST AID PROCEDURES: SKIN / EYES INGESTION • Flush with water for 15 minutes • Do not induce vomiting • Remove contaminated clothing • Drink large quantities of milk or water • If irritation continues, seek medical attention. • Give CPR if breathing has stopped • Seek medical attention immediately =CI TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Power Solutions MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET 14 -324 1 SECTION VIII: EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION ENGINEERING CONTROLS: General room ventilation is sufficient during normal use and handling. Do . not install these batteries in a sealed, unventilated area. All battery installation, preparation, charging, post cleaning and maintenance must be conducted by qualified personnel per the Installation and Operating Instructions (RS- 1476). PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (WHEN HANDLING BATTERY ACID): Eye Protection = chemical goggles or safety glasses with sideshields and a full -face shield. Protective Gloves = rubber or neoprene gloves. Respiratory Protection = NIOSH approved acid mist respirator, if OSHA PEL for sulfuric acid is exceeded. WORK PRACTICES: Do not wear metallic jewelry when working with batteries. Use non - conductive tools only. Discharge static electricity prior to working on a battery. Maintain an eyewash, fire extinguisher and emergency communication device in the work area. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (WHEN CLEANING BATTERY POSTS OR REMOVING FACTORY - APPLIED GREASE COATING FROM POSTS): Eye Protection = safety glasses with sideshields. Protective Gloves = nitrile gloves. Respiratory Protection = NIOSH approved respirator with HEPA cartridges, if OSHA PEL for lead is exceeded. SECTION IX: PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES ACID: Boiling Point: 235F Vapor Density: (water =1): <1 Specific Gravity: 1.215 - 1.290 + / -.010 Vapor Pressure: 145.8/mm Appearance /Odor: colorless, oily fluid / acrid odor when hot. Solubility in water: 100% SECTION V: FIREFIGHTING MEASURES FIRE AND EXPLOSIVE PROPERTIES: Flash Point: N/A Flammable Limits (as H2 gas): LEL: 4% UEL: 74% UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS: Hydrogen gas and acid mist is generated upon overcharge or in fires. Ventilate area thoroughly. EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: Class ABC or CO Caution should be taken not to use CO directly on the battery cell as the thermal shock may cause cracking of the battery case and release of battery electrolyte. SPECIAL FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURES: Ventilate the area well. SCBA and acid protective clothing are recommended. SECTION VI: ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES STEPS TO BE TAKEN IF BATTERY IS BROKEN: Neutralize any spilled electrolyte or exposed battery parts with soda ash or sodium bicarbonate until fizzing stops. pH should be neutral at 6 -8. Collect residue and place in a suitable container. Residue may be hazardous waste. When neutralized, the spill is non- hazardous. Keep untrained individuals away from the spilled material. Place the broken battery in a heavy gauge plastic bag or other non - metallic container. Provide adequate ventilation, hydrogen gas may be given off during neutralization. SECTION VII: HANDLING AND STORAGE Store in a cool, dry area away from combustibles. Do not store in sealed, unventilated areas. Avoid overheating and overcharging. Do not use organic solvents or other than recommended chemical cleaners on the batteries. 2 SECTION XI: TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION - SULFURIC ACID (Under normal use and handing of this product there is no exposure to the lead contents.) LD 50: Administration Route: Oral Dose: 2140mg /kg Test Animal: Rat LDLo: Administration Route: Unreported Dose: 135mg /kg Test Animal: Man LC50: Administration Route: Inhalation Dose: 510mg/m3 Test Animal: Rat CARCINOGENICITY: The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) has classified "strong inorganic acid mists containing sulfuric acid" as a category 1 carcinogen (inhalation), a substance that is carcinogenic to humans. "The National Toxicology Program (NTP) has designated strong inorganic sulfuric acid mists as a known human acarcinogen." This classification does not apply to the liquid forms of sulfuric acid contained within the battery. Inorganic acid mist (sulfuric acid mist) is generated in very nominal levels at the end of charging. 2 -3 room air changes is sufficient for control of this emission. However, misuse of the product, such as overcharging, may result in the generation of sulfuric acid mist at higher levels. SECTION X: STABILITY AND REACTIVITY STABILITY: This battery and contents are stable. CONDITIONS TO AVOID: Overheating, overcharging which result in acid mist / hydrogen generation. INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIALS TO AVOID): Strong alkaline materials, conductive metals, organs solvents, sparks or open flame. HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION OR BYPRODUCTS: Hydrogen gas may be generated in an overcharged condition, in fire or at very high temperatures. In fire may emit CO, CO2 and Sulfur Oxides. HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION WILL NOT OCCUR. SECTION XIV: TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION UN OR NA IDENTIFICATION: UN -2794 PROPER DOT SHIPPING NAME: Batteries, Wet, Filled with Acid, Electric Storage HAZARD CLASS: 8 1 PACKING GROUP: III 1 LABEL: Corrosive SECTION XII: ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION Lead and its compounds can pose a threat if released to the environment. See waste disposal method in Section XIII. SECTION XIII: DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: This battery is recyclable. It is illegal to dispose of lead -acid batteries by any means other than recycling. C &D provides an environmentally responsible nation wide lead acid battery collection and recycling program. Contact your local C &D sales representative for more information. HAZARDOUS WASTE CODES: D002, D008 SECTION XV: REGULATORY INFORMATION See 29 CFR 1910.268(b)(2) SECTION XVI: OTHER INFORMATION The information herein is given in good faith, but no warranty, expressed or implied, is made. MSDS Preparation / Review Date: 08/26/2008 Revision Number: 22 Prepared by: W. E. Kozlowski 3 AT verizp business PROJECT MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 98168 FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA FOR VERIZON BUSINESS - TECHNICAL FACILITIES OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION 604 EAST HOAG STREET PO BOX 10 YACOLT, WA 98675 VERIZON BUSINESS SR. IMPLEMENTATION ENGINEER LISA H. DAVIE PREPARED BY WTF'I WTA, 1 N C. ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 (325) 695 -1090 FAX (325) 695 -3757 January 15, 2009 FILE COPY Penult 1. RECEIVED FEB 10 7009 TUrcvvi PUBLIC WORKS art R MILA FEB 0 5 MN PERMIT CENTER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION I VOLUME ONE - BUILDING CONSTRUCTION P15 Vim/'/ on ,business PROJECT MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT AT 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 98168 FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA FOR VERIZON BUSINESS - TECHNICAL FACILITIES OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION 604 EAST HOAG STREET PO BOX 10 YACOLT, WA 98675 VERIZON BUSINESS SR. IMPLEMENTATION ENGINEER LISA H. DAVIE PREPARED BY WTFI WTA, 1 N C - ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 (325) 695 -1090 FAX (325) 695 -3757 January 15, 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS PROJECT MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WA FAILITY CODE: TYKWWA TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE NO. Instruction to Bidders P1 -3 Proposal Form P4 -5 Deviation Form DF -1 Certificate of Insurance (ACORD Form) 1 General Conditions (VERIZON Revised 2 -04) GC -1 -20 Supplementary General Conditions SGC -1 Special Conditions SC -1 -17 Welding Permit Form 1 General Requirements 01000 -1 -3 Cost Estimates 1 -2 Contractor's Projected Schedule of Payments 1 Guarantees G -1 Project Closeout Requirements 1 -2 Certificate for Payment 1 -2 Tax Information 1 Partial Waiver and Release By Contractor 1 -2 Final Waiver and Release By Contractor 1 -2 Certificate of Substantial Completion 1 -2 Summary of Work 01010 -1 Cutting and Patching 01045 -1 -3 Reference Standards 01090 -1 -2 Project Meetings 01200 -1 -3 Construction Schedules 01310 -1 -3 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 01340 -1 -4 Schedule of Values 01370 -1 Methods of Procedures 01410 -1 Supervision 01510 -1 -3 Materials and Equipment 01600 -1 -3 Substitutions and Project Option 01630 -1 -2 Cleaning 01710 -1 -2 Project Record Documents 01720 -1 -2 Warranties and Certificates 01740 -1 -3 Minor Demolition for Renovations 02072 -1 -2 Dust Control 02073 -1 -2 Building Insulation 07210 -1-4 Through- Penetration Firestop Systems 07841 -1 -9 Joint Sealants 07920 -1 -10 Steel Doors and Frames 08110 -1 -7 Door Hardware 08711 -1 -15 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 -1 -11 Resilient Floor Tile and Wall Base 09651 -1 -5 Painting (Professional Line Products) 09912 -1 -17 Access Flooring 10270 -1 -11 MPE Table of Contents 1 -2 1. PROPOSALS: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Sealed proposals (bids) in duplicate addressed to Ms. Lisa Davie, Verizon Business Senior Implementation Engineer, Verizon Business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction, 604 E. Hoag Street, PO Box 10, Yaco lt, WA 78675. Facility Code: TYKWWA; covering the Equipment Room Buildout at 12682 Gateway Dr. South, Tukwila, Washington will be received until: TIME: 5:00 P.M (Pacific Time Zone) PLACE: VERIZON business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction 604 E. Hoag Street. PO Box 10 Yacolt, WA 98675 DATE: Fehruary- 5, 2009 B. Bid Modifications by party submitting proposal in person at bid opening may be made up to time of closing bids. Closing of Bids is at 5:00 P.M. (Pacific Time). However, it is the Owner's discretion as to when bids are actually opened; this is not a public bid. C. Any proposal received after closing time will be returned to the bidder unopened, and such proposals will receive no consideration. It is suggested that because of uncertainty of mail delivery, proposals be mailed at least 72 hours prior to the opening time. Bids may not be modified by telephone, telegraph, telecommunication, etc. D. Proposals submitted must be on attached forms. All blank spaces in the proposal forms must be completed. E. Seal proposals in an envelope and mark proposal: PROPOSAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT AT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON. FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA for VERIZON BUSINESS, c/o Ms. Lisa Davie, Verizon Business Senior implementation Engineer, Verizon Business `lcchmnical Facilities Operation and Construction, 604 East Hoag St., PO Box 10, Yacolt, WA 98675, place the name and address of the bidder on the envelope also. If sent by express mail, special delivery or independent carrier, the envelope shall be addressed to Ms. Lisa Davie, Verizon 13nsine,s Senior Implementation Ens;incer, Verizon Business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction. 604 East Hoag Si, I'O Box 10, Yacolt, WA 98675, and shall be labeled in the lower left hand corner on the outside of the envelope " PROPOSAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT AT 12682 GATEWAY DR. SOUTH, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON. FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA; c/o Ms. Lisa Davie, Verizon Business Senior Implementation Engineer, Verizon Business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction. F. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive all formalities as its best interests may direct. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. Drawings and specifications may be obtained from the office of WTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers, One Village Drive • Suite 500 • Abilene, Texas 79606. 2. Verizon will provide one (1) set of project Plans & Specifications to invited bidders at no cost to Contractor. Verizon will provide the required quantity of project plans & specifications to state and local governmental authorities at no cost to Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for paying all cost for any additional documents, other than those noted, requested by Contractor for subcontractors & suppliers to Consultant's office. C. These plans and specifications are intended to completely describe the construction for UPS INSTALLATION PROJECT AT 1501 FRANCISCO ST., TORRANCE CALIFORNIA. The Contractors are instructed to examine carefully the drawings and specifications as every item shown thereon and/or word written therein will remain in force and effect unless changed by written addendum before agreement is issued. D. If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed project is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the drawings and/or specifications, he may submit and interpretation request to the Engineers. 3. PRE -BID MEETING: Pre -bid meeting is mandatory and is scheduled for January 22, 2009 at 10:00 am. 4. ADDENDA: Any addenda issued during the time of bidding is to be covered in the Proposal and in closing agreement they will become a part thereof. List on bid form any addenda received. Failure of bidder to receive any addendum shall not release the bidder from any obligations under his bid, provided said addendum was sent to the address furnished by the bidder for transmittal of U.S Mail. 5. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND: For projects less than $500,000, Performance Bond and Payment Bond are not required. For projects exceeding $500,000, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide a performance bond in an amount equal to 100% of the Agreed price with a bonding company approved by the Owner, and on a form approved by the Owner, for the faithful performance of the Agreement and also a payment bond on a Washington Statutory Payment Bond form for the use and benefit of all parties who may become entitled to liens under said Agreement, according to the provisions of the laws of the State of Washington. This bond shall remain in force for and until one (1) year after the completion of the work and acceptance of same by the Owner. 6. SUBCONTRACTORS: VERIZON Business requires that each bidder use only pre- approved Subcontractors for this work. Should the bidder wish to use a Subcontractor not on the Approved Bidder List for this project, then approval in writing, must be obtained from the VERIZON Business project engineer prior to bidding. 7. TIME OF COMPLETION: Each bidder shall anticipate to commence work on or before Ma rch 2, 2009 and to fully complete the work on or before (date TBD upon receipt of equipment ETA). 7. PROPOSAL FORM: Each bidder shall indicate the amount he proposes for the base bid and any alternates on the proposal form. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE: A. Proposal guarantee is not required for project with construction cost less than $500,000. B. Proposal guarantee is required for project with construction cost greater than $500,000. For project requiring proposal guarantee, the proposal guarantee shall be included in the bid envelope and same shall be a cashier's check, a certified check, or a bid bond. It shall be in the amount of five percent (5 %) of the total proposal and made payable to the Owner. In the event agreement is awarded to a bidder who, for any reason whatsoever, refuses to execute a General Agreement and the required bonds, the proposal guarantee shall be forfeited to, and the proceeds of same shall become the property of, the Owner. Any bid which fails to include a proposal guarantee will not be considered. Proposal guarantees will be returned promptly after award of General Agreement, except that those of the three lower bidders may be retained for a reasonable time to determine that the low bidder will execute the Agreement and make bond within ten (10) days from date Agreement is tendered to him. 9. INSURANCE: Each Bidder shall include with proposal, a current "ACORD" Certificate of Insurance Form (sample attached following proposal form), indicating limits of insurance and policy expiration date which comply with the General Conditions section of the specifications. 10. DEVIATIONS: Each Bidder shall attach to his Proposal Form the Deviation Form included in this document indicating "no deviations" or "deviations" from the contract documents including plans, specifications and addendum(s) at the time of bid. Owner reserves the right to disqualify any Bidder based on deviations listed by Bidder. WTA, Inc. Consulting Engineers Abilene, Texas Ms. Lisa Davie, Verizon Business Senior Implementation Engineer VERIZON Business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction 604 Fast Hoag Si. PO Box 10 Yacoit. WA 98675 BASE PROPOSAL: TIME OF COMPLETION: EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA FOR VERIZON BUSINESS PROPOSAL FORM Having carefully examined the specifications and all conditions affecting the work, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, equipment and materials called for by the said documents for the EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT PROJECT at 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH in TUKWILA, WASHINGTON for the sums set forth as follows: The undersigned agrees to furnish all equipment and perform all work called for in the specifications for the EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT PROJECT at 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH in TUKWILA, WASHINGTON. DOLLARS ($ ) Each bidder must agree to commence work on or before the specified date and to fully complete the work as follows: On or before , 2009. ADDITIONAL WORK PRICE: The undersigned Contractor agrees to furnish all labor, equipment and materials for any additional work ordered by the Owner in accordance with General Agreement on file. A detailed breakdown of all cost shall be submitted with each change order proposal. ADDENDA: The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. _ to Addenda No. _ issued during the time of bidding and includes the several changes therein in this proposal. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND: Performance Bond and Payment Bond are not required for projects with construction cost less than $500,000. For projects exceeding $500,000, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide a performance bond in an amount equal to 100% of the agreement price with a bonding company approved by the Owner, and on a form approved by the Owner, for the faithful performance of the Agreement and also a payment bond on a Washington Statutory Payment Bond form for the use and benefit of all parties who may become entitled to liens under said Agreement, according to the provisions of the laws of the State of Washington. This bond shall remain in force for and until one (1) year after the completion of the work and acceptance of same by the Owner. INSURANCE: Bidder shall attach limits of insurance and expiration date to this proposal. DEVIATION FORM: Each Bidder shall attach to his Proposal Form the Deviation Form included in this document indicating "no deviations" or "deviations" from the contract documents including plans, specifications and addendum(s) at the time of bid. Owner reserves the right to disqualify any Bidder based on deviations listed by Bidder. The undersigned agrees that he will not withdraw this bid for a period of thirty (30) days from the date hereof. SEAL IF BID IS BY A CORPORATION DATE Please return bidder's check to: ADDRESS SUBCONTRACTORS: 1. Electrical 2. Mechanical 3. Fire Alarm 4. D C Power BIDDER BY TITLE DEVIATION FORM (Attach to Proposal Form and Complete one of the following paragraphs.) The undersigned agrees that he has provided the attached Proposal in strict accordance with the contract documents including but not limited to plans, specifications and addendum(s) without deviations. Signed Date The undersigned is disclosing deviations to the contract documents including but not limited to plans, specifications and addendum(s) as follows: Signed Date CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YY) POUCY EXPIRATION DATE (MUMMY) LIMITS GENERALLIABLITY CURRENT # 0/0/09 0/0/09 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000. XX COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABIUTY PRODUCTS-COMP /OP AGG. $2,000,000. 'CLAIMS MADE IXX (OCCUR. PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ XX OWNERS & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $2,000,000. XX FIRE DAMAGE (Ary one fire) $ MED. EXPENSE (Anyone person) $ AUTOMOBILE LIABIUTV CURRENT # 0/0/09 0/0/09 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $2,000,000. ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY XX BOOT Y INJURY $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $2,000,000. XX PROPERTY DAMAGE $1,000,000. EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABLITV OTHER CURRENT # 0/0/09 0/0/09 XX (STATUTORY UMITS EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000. DISEASE- PCLICV LIMIT $1 ,000,000. $1 ,000,000. DISEASE -EACH EMPLOYEE COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE USTEDBELON HAVE BEEN ISSLEDTO THE INSURED USTED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POUCIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. UMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION SAOCATIONSNEHICLESISPECAL ITEMS VERIZON BUSINESS IS NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY & AUTOMOBILE POLICIES WTA IS NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY & AUTOMOBILE POLICIES SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE EL FT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AGENT'S SIGNATURE eACORD CORPORATION 1990/WTA Rev. 10 -99 GENERAL CONDITIONS (Verizon Revised 2 -04) INDEX WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA ARTICLE PAGE TITLE NO. NO. ARBITRATION 49 GC -19 -20 ASSIGNMENT OF SUBLEASE 39 GC -14 BID BONDS 46 GC -18 CHANGES IN THE WORK 26 GC -10 -11 CLEANING UP 21 GC -9 CONTRACTOR'S INDEBTEDNESS 40 GC -15 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE AT SITE OF WORK 10 GC -5 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 9 GC -4 -5 COPIES OF AGREEMENT 3 GC -2 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 34 GC -13 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK 33 GC -13 DEFINITIONS 2 GC -1 ENGINEER'S INTERPRETATIONS AND DECISIONS 48 GC -19 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 8 GC -4 ERECTION 12 GC -5 -6 EXAMINATION OF SITE 6 GC -2 -3 HINDRANCE AND DELAYS 37 GC -14 INDEMNIFICATION 41 GC -15 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR 23 GC -9 GENERAL CONDITIONS (Verizon Revised 2 -04) INDEX - Continued WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA ARTICLE PAGE TITLE NO. NO. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR 11 GC -5 LIABILITY INSURANCE LIMITS 43 GC -16 -17 LIABILITY INSURANCE 42 GC -15 -16 LOCAL LABOR 17 GC -8 LOSS OR DAMAGE 27 GC -11 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 18 GC -8 OBSERVATION AND TESTING 24 GC -10 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 35 GC -13 -14 PAYMENTS 30 GC -12 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 45 GC -18 PROGRESS CHARTS, SUNDAY, HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORK 31 GC -12 -13 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 32 GC -13 PROPERTY INSURANCE 44 GC -17 -18 PROTECTION OF MATERIAL AND WORK 36 GC -14 PUBLIC REGULATION 15 GC -7 RELATIONS WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS 16 GC -7 -8 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 38 GC -14 SAFETY AND PROTECTION; EMERGENCIES 19 GC -8 -9 SANITARY REGULATIONS 20 GC -9 TITLE GENERAL CONDITIONS (Verizon Revised 2 -04) INDEX - Continued WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA ARTICLE PAGE NO. NO. SCOPE, NATURE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS 5 GC -2 SCOPE 1 GC -1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 7 GC -3 -4 STORAGE 14 GC -7 SUGGESTIONS TO CONTRACTOR ADOPTED AT HIS OWN RISK 22 GC -9 SUSPENSION OF WORK ON NOTICE 29 GC -11 -12 TAXES 50 GC -20 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER 28 GC -1 1 TIME FOR COMPLETION 47 GC -18 -19 USE OF PREMISES 13 GC -6 -7 VERBAL STATEMENT 4 GC -2 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS 25 GC -10 GENERAL CONDITIONS (VERIZON REVISED 2 -04) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 1. SCOPE: The Agreement consists of the Contractor's General Agreement, these General Conditions, the Drawings and Specifications, Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Performance Bond, Addenda to Drawings and Specifications, all supplementary and/or Special Conditions, duly authorized Change Orders, engineering data furnished by the Contractor (when and as approved by the Owner or Engineer), and instructions furnished by manufacturers of equipment for the installation thereof, and any other exhibits specified in the Agreement. 2. DEFINITIONS: A. The Agreement consists of the General Agreement made between the Contractor & Owner, and specifically, all of the Documents and Drawings enumerated in Article 1 "Scope" above. B. OWNER and CONTRACTOR are those mentioned in the Agreement. They are treated throughout as if each were of masculine gender and singular number. C. Wherever in the Agreement the term ENGINEER, ENGINEERS, or CONSULTING ENGINEERS is used, it refers to WTA, Inc. - Consulting Engineers. D. The term Work includes such equipment, labor, material, methods and transportation or other facilities as may be necessary to complete the scope of the Project. E. The term Subcontractor includes only those having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR and it includes one who furnishes material worked to a special design according to the plans and Specifications of this Work, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked. F. The term "date of Agreement" shall be the date of the specific Agreement pertaining to this Project and not the General Agreement. G. The term "day" and/or "days" shall mean a calendar day or days or twenty -four hours each. H. The term "Drawings" includes all drawings prepared and submitted by the OWNER and/or ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR during the progress of the Work as provided herein but excludes all shop drawings and other drawings and related data prepared by or submitted through the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor or supplier whether submitted by the successful bidder with his proposal or thereafter. I. The terms "approved," "as approved," "acceptable," "suitable," "properly," "satisfactory," shall mean "approved," "as approved," etc., by the OWNER and/or ENGINEER. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -I 3. COPIES OF AGREEMENT: Agreement shall be provided to the Contractor by the Owner. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 4. VERBAL STATEMENT: Verbal statements are not binding. Verbal statements do not form a part of, or alter in any way, the written agreement. 5. SCOPE, NATURE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS: A. Specifications and Drawings supplement each other and together constitute one complete set of Specifications and Plans so that any Work exhibited in one and not in the other shall be executed just as if it had been set forth in both, in order that the work shall be completed to the complete design or designs as decided and determined by the ENGINEER. 13. It is understood and agreed that the Work shall be performed and completed according to the true spirit, meaning, and intent of the Agreement, General Agreement, Specification and Drawings. It is incumbent of the CONTRACTOR that the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the Work complete and that the Work be satisfactory in all respects and fulfills the guarantees of the Job Specifications. C. Should anything be omitted from the Specifications and Drawings which is necessary to a clear understanding of the Work, or should it appear that various instructions are in conflict, then the CONTRACTOR shall secure written instructions from the OWNER and/or ENGINEER before proceeding with the construction affected by such omissions and/or discrepancies. 6. EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Neither the OWNER or ENGINEER guarantees or represents that all conditions affecting the CONTRACTOR's work are shown on the drawings or described or shown in the specification. B. CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine the site of Work and the adjacent premises. CONTRACTOR shall conduct the necessary investigations to inform himself thoroughly as to the facilities for delivering and handling his equipment and material at the site, and investigation of all difficulties involved in the completion of the Work in accordance with the specifications and drawings. CONTRACTOR shall make thorough investigation of the measures that may be required for protection of his Work and all existing construction or facilities from water or other hazards which may be encountered. CONTRACTOR shall also investigate other potential interference and difficulties he may encounter in the proper and complete execution of all Work specified herein and/or shown on the drawings. C. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and complete responsibility to provide whatever protection deemed necessary to protect all existing construction, furnishings, equipment, cable, utilities, etc., whether shown on the drawings or not, from damage caused by the CONTRACTOR, his employees, or subcontractors during the course of this construction. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Should any damage occur because of acts or failure to act by the CONTRACTOR, his employees, or subcontractor, the CONTRACTOR shall pay for the cost of all such damage and hold the OWNER and/or ENGINEER completely harmless from such damage. D. The submission of a proposal or bid and/or execution of the Agreement by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation by the CONTRACTOR that he has made a full and complete investigation of the site of the Work and all property and facilities adjacent or contiguous thereto with respect to both surface and subsurface conditions; and that the CONTRACTOR is willing to assume full and complete responsibility for the effect of any and all such conditions upon the Work and the progress thereof. 7. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES: A. After checking and verifying all field measurements, the CONTRACTOR will submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions, seven copies (or at the ENGINEER's option, one reproducible copy) of all Shop Drawings, which shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR and identified as the ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete and respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials, of construction and the like to enable the ENGINEER to review the information as required. B. The CONTRACTOR will submit to the ENGINEER for approval, with such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by the Documents and/or requested by the ENGINEER. All samples will have been checked by and stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR, identified clearly as to material, manufacturer, any pertinent catalog numbers, and the use for which intended. C. At the time of each submission, the CONTRACTOR will in writing call the ENGINEER's attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawing or sample may have from the requirements of the Documents. D. Shop Drawings are work products of the CONTRACTOR who prepares, furnishes or submits them and by the submission or furnishing of any Shop Drawings or related data, the CONTRACTOR through whom the same are furnished warrants and represents that the same have either been prepared or examined and approved by him, that they are accurate, correct and reliable and that the OWNER and his or its agents, servants, employees or representatives are entitled to rely thereon without further checking, examination or verification. E. No Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample submission shall be commenced until the submission has been approved by the CONTRACTOR. F. The ENGINEER may, as an accommodation to the CONTRACTOR, inspect, examine and reject Shop Drawings submitted by or through the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor or supplier; but the ENGINEER shall have no liability, responsibility or duty in this connection and shall not be called upon to approve any Shop Drawings. The submission of a Shop Drawing to the ENGINEER shall constitute a warranty and representation by the GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -3 CONTRACTOR through whom the same is submitted that the same is accurate and that the parts, device, material, equipment or function represented thereby is suitable for the purposes contemplated; and the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the OWNER and all other parties having any contractual relationship with or in any capacity representing the OWNER of and from all loss, damage, claims, cost, expenses, delay, liability and causes of action of whatever nature arising out of, connected with or in any way attributable to mistakes, errors, omissions, deficiencies, discrepancies or misrepresentations of facts, figures or portrayals shown or represented thereby. Under no circumstances shall the ENGINEER's inspections, examination or rejection of any Shop Drawing submitted by or through any CONTRACTOR relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility as herein provided for. 8. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. The ENGINEER shall be the OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in these General Conditions and shall not be extended without written consent of the OWNER and the ENGINEER. B. The ENGINEER may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed toward providing assurance for the OWNER that the completed Project will conform to the requirements of the Documents, but he will not be responsibility for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Documents. On the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of CONTRACTORS. C. The ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove of or reject Work which, in his opinion, is defective, i.e., it is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not conform to the requirements of the Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval referred to in Article 24. Failure on the part of the ENGINEER to disapprove of or reject Work, methods, or acts or omissions of any kind shall never at any time be deemed to constitute acceptance or approval of the same. D. If the OWNER and ENGINEER agree, the ENGINEER will provide one or more Resident Project Representatives to assist the ENGINEER in carrying out his responsibilities at the site. 9. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE: A. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risks in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA B. The CONTRACTOR will supervise and direct the Work efficiently and with his best skill and attention. He will be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Before undertaking the Work he will carefully study and compare the Documents and check and verify all figures shown thereon and all field measurements. He will at once report in writing to the ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancies which he may discover. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Documents. C. The CONTRACTOR will keep on the Work at all times during its progress a resident superintendent satisfactory to the ENGINEER. The superintendent shall not be replaced without the consent of the ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. D. The CONTRACTOR will provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Documents. He will at all times maintain good discipline and order among his employees at the site. E. The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractors, or any of his or their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 10. CONTRACTORS OFFICE AT SITE OF WORK: CONTRACTOR shall maintain a suitable office at or near the site of the Work which shall be the headquarters of his superintendent. Any communications delivered at the CONTRACTOR's office at the site of the Work shall be deemed to have been given to the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall install his own telephone and pay for all of his telephone and telegram charges. 11. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR: The business address of the CONTRACTOR given in the Bid Proposal upon which this Agreement is founded and the CONTRACTOR's office in the vicinity of the Work are hereby designated as the places to which letters, notices, and other communications to the CONTRACTOR may be mailed or delivered. Any notice to the CONTRACTOR required, permitted, or given hereunder shall be deemed sufficient if the notice, letter or other communication is delivered to CONTRACTOR at either of the above named addresses or if the same, properly addressed to the CONTRACTOR at either of such addresses, is deposited in the United States mail; and the date of any notice deposited in the mail shall be the date of such mailing. 12. ERECTION: A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, tools, materials, hoists, false work, scaffolding, etc., which may be necessary for the Work, and shall take out and pay for any required permits. At the request of either the OWNER or the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR agrees to remove any designated employee from the Work. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -5 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA B. CONTRACTOR shall employ a competent engineer to determine lines and elevations. CONTRACTOR shall lay out the Work and shall be responsible for its correctness. He shall correct at his own expense all errors in the Work arising from his inaccuracy. C. CONTRACTOR shall schedule, arrange, and carry on the Work so as not to interfere with the delivery and erection of the Work of others. In coordinating Work with other contractors, this CONTRACTOR shall cease Work at any point and transfer his men to other portions of the Work, without cost to the OWNER, to facilitate the erection of such other Work, returning them thereafter to complete the unfinished Work. D. CONTRACTOR shall do such fitting, cutting, and patching as may be required to install the Work and shall properly fit it to existing Work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any Work by digging, cutting, or otherwise, and shall not alter or cut the Work of any other Contractor except with the written authorization of OWNER or the ENGINEER. E. Commercial operation of all equipment incorporated in the Work shall be demonstrated to the ENGINEER's satisfaction. CONTRACTOR shall give OWNER all instructions and information as may be necessary for the proper care and/or operation of the equipment. F. Where connections are made to existing Work or to Work installed by others, they shall be made at such times as may be mutually agreed upon between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. G. Any existing work that may be removed by CONTRACTOR shall be either stored on the premises and shall remain OWNER'S property, or shall be removed from the premises and disposed of as may be requested by OWNER. 13. USE OF PREMISES: A. The CONTRACTOR shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits or approved by the OWNER and/or ENGINEER and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials. If OWNER makes available to the CONTRACTOR any store rooms, storage space, offices, or other accommodations, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect these and arrange with the OWNER for their use. In case of dispute between Contractors as to the use of such accommodations, OWNER or the ENGINEER will make the final allotment. C. CONTRACTOR's personnel shall not enter any of OWNER'S existing buildings and other facilities unless authorized to do so. No one other than the personnel of the CONTRACTOR engaged in actual performance of the Work in any existing buildings and other facilities shall receive authorization to enter the same. All of CONTRACTOR'S Work on existing facilities shall be coordinated with the schedule of OWNER'S plant operations. While working in existing facilities, CONTRACTOR shall comply with all plant rules OWNER may have in effect. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA D. The CONTRACTOR shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety. E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining the premises during the Work with due regard to the safety of workmen and others as well as for the protection of the Work. 14. STORAGE: A. If suitable space is available outside of the Project area, on property owned by the OWNER, this space as mutually agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR for the location of CONTRACTOR's office, shops, or warehouses, or for the storage of materials will be provided by OWNER free of charge. B. Office space inside of Project buildings will not be available to CONTRACTOR unless specific approval has been given by OWNER. C. All temporary buildings required by CONTRACTORS shall be erected by him at his own expense and only with OWNER's consent and shall be removed at the termination of their usefulness, termination of job, without cost of OWNER. D. Prior to the erection of any temporary building, CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER representation as to the type of materials and general appearance before any such building may be erected. 15. PUBLIC REGULATIONS: A. Building permits and all other necessary permits, licenses, etc., shall be taken out by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. CONTRACTOR shall also secure at his own expense all Certificate of Inspection and of Occupancy that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. CONTRACTOR shall give all required notices and shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations of any public authorities having jurisdiction. If CONTRACTOR discovers that any Drawing or Specification forming a part of the Agreement is at variance with such legal requirements, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work which is contrary to any such ordinances, regulations or laws, he shall bear all penalties and costs arising therefrom. Their Work shall also comply with regulations of the latest revision of National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Williams- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Where the requirements of the NFPA Standards or the Williams- Steiger Occupational and Health Standards exceed the requirements of the specifications, these Standards shall govern and where the specification requirements exceed the Standards, the specifications shall govern. B. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by the laws of the place where the Work is to be performed, unless specified otherwise in the Documents. 16. RELATIONS WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS: CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with all other Contractors who may be performing Work in behalf of the OWNER. He shall promptly make good at GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -7 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA his own expense any injury or damage that may be sustained by other Contractors or employees of the OWNER at his hands. 17. LOCAL LABOR: Local labor, when available, shall be given preference. 18. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Specifications, all equipment, materials and articles incorporated in the Work covered by this Agreement are to be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose and all workmanship shall be first class. B. Approval of the OWNER and/or ENGINEER shall be obtained prior to the utilization of any material, fixture or apparatus which is not definitely specified or which is offered as substitution for any material, fixture or apparatus which has been specified. 19. SAFETY AND PROTECTION; EMERGENCIES: A. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. He shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: B. All employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby. C. All the Work and all materials or equipment (including equipment and materials being furnished by the OWNER and to be installed by CONTRACTOR) to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site. D. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. E. The CONTRACTOR will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. He will erect and maintain, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for safety and protection including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards and promulgating safety regulations. He will notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials is necessary for the prosecution of the Work, the CONTRACTOR will exercise the utmost care and will carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. All damage, injury or loss to any person or property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, will be remedied by the CONTRACTOR, except GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA damage or loss attributable solely to the fault of Drawings or Specifications prepared by the ENGINEER. F. The CONTRACTOR will designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the CONTRACTOR's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER and the ENGINEER. G. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from the ENGINEER or OWNER, is obligated to act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. He will give the ENGINEER prompt written notice of any significant changes in the Work or deviations from the Documents caused thereby, and a Change Order shall thereupon be issued covering the changes and deviations involved. If the CONTRACTOR believes that additional Work done by him in an emergency which arose from causes beyond his control entitles him to an increase in the Agreement Price or an extension of the Agreement Time, he may make a claim therefore as provided in Article 26. 20. SANITARY REGULATIONS: CONTRACTOR shall conform with all rules and regulations of boards and bodies having jurisdiction with respect to sanitation. CONTRACTOR shall furnish toilet facilities and drinking water to all of his employees. 21. CLEANING UP: The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of debris caused by the Work, and at the completion of the Work he shall remove all such debris, and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave his Work "broom clean" or its equivalent. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, OWNER may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractors concerned, in proportions determined by OWNER or the ENGINEER. 22. SUGGESTIONS TO CONTRACTOR ADOPTED AT HIS OWN RISK: Any suggestion by the ENGINEER, his representative, or other representative of the OWNER, of any plan or method of work, but not specified, if adopted or followed by the CONTRACTOR in whole or in part, shall be used at the exclusive risk and responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER and the ENGINEER will assume no responsibility in such cases. 23. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR is and shall remain an independent CONTRACTOR will full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the Work covered hereby. The fact that the OWNER and/or the ENGINEER shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's Work during its performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER or the ENGINEER hereunder is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent CONTRACTOR with respect either to the OWNER or the ENGINEER or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -9 24. OBSERVATION AND TESTING: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. The OWNER, ENGINEER, and/or their representatives shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the Work. CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing, either at CONTRACTOR's shop or at the mills or shops of any manufacturer where any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured, or at any location wherever the Work is in preparation or progress. CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated, and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation. OWNER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Agreement, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors, and regardless of whether OWNER's observer has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work should be covered up without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER and/or ENGINEER or their representatives, be uncovered for examination at the CONTRACTOR's expense. B. If the Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR will give the ENGINEER timely notice of readiness therefore. The CONTRACTOR will fumish the ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society of Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Documents. If any such Work required so to be inspected, tested or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation at the CONTRACTOR's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of any such test, inspection or approval and any Work which meets the requirements of any such test or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR's expense. C. Neither observations by the ENGINEER nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the CONTRACTOR shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Documents. 25. VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS: The exactness of dimensions given on any Drawings issued by the ENGINEER is not guaranteed by him or the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall verify and satisfy himself as to the accuracy of all dimensions. In all cases of interconnection of the Work with other Work, he shall verify at the site any dimensions relating to such other Work. Any errors due to Contractor's failure so to verify any such dimensions shall be promptly rectified by CONTRACTOR without cost to OWNER. 26. CHANGES IN THE WORK: OWNER shall have the right to make any changes or alterations in the Work, the Agreement Sum being adjusted accordingly. Except in an emergency endangering life or GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -10 28. TERMINATION BY THE OWNER: 29. SUSPENSION OF WORK ON NOTICE: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA property, no claim for Work involving additional cost shall be allowed unless it shall have been ordered in writing by OWNER or his representatives. 27. LOSS OR DAMAGE: Until accepted in its entirety by OWNER, the Work shall be at CONTRACTOR's risk. If any damage to or loss of any part of the Work occurs prior to acceptance, CONTRACTOR shall promptly repair or replace the part or parts so lost or damaged without cost to the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall protect OWNER's property from and shall be responsible for any loss or damage arising out of the erection of the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for any damage or loss due to the use of any facilities or service furnished by OWNER, such as hoisting, switching, etc. regardless of OWNER's negligence. The CONTRACTOR shall pay for any injury or damages in the Work of any other Contractor which may be done by him or his workmen. A. If the CONTRACTOR is adjudged a bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Documents, then the OWNER, upon certification by the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the CONTRACTOR and his surety, if any, seven days written notice, terminate the employment of the CONTRACTOR and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the CONTRACTOR and may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. B. If the unpaid balance of the Agreement Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Engineer's additional services made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to the OWNER. The amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR or to the OWNER, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Engineer, upon application, in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Agreement. A. The OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to suspend all or any part of the Work for such periods of time as may be determined by him to be necessary or desirable for the convenience of the OWNER. Unless such suspension unreasonably delays the progress of the Work and causes additional expense or loss to the CONTRACTOR, no increase in Agreement price will be allowed. In the case of suspension of all or any part of the Work for an unreasonable length of time, causing additional expense or loss in the opinion and judgement of the GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -1 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA ENGINEER, not due to the fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER shall make an equitable adjustment in the Agreement price and modify the Agreement accordingly. B. An equitable extension of time for the completion of the Work in the event of any such suspension will be allowed the CONTRACTOR, provided, however, that the suspension was not due to the fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR. 30. PAYMENTS: No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Agreement, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be construed as acceptance of defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall at any time requested during the progress of the Work fumish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with a verified certificate showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before final payment is made, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy OWNER, by affidavits or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against OWNER's premises by reason of any Work under the Agreement. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of final payment on the Agreement price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against OWNER. 31. PROGRESS CHARTS, SUNDAY, HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORKS: A. Within five days after commencement of the Work hereunder or within such additional time as may be determined by the OWNER and the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to OWNER and ENGINEER for approval a practicable and feasible schedule, showing the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, the date on which he will start the several salient features (including procurement of materials, plant, and equipment) and the contemplated dates for completing them. The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of Work scheduled for completion at any time. The CONTRACTOR shall on the chart show the actual progress at the end of each week or at such intervals as directed by the OWNER and the ENGINEER, and shall immediately deliver to the OWNER and the ENGINEER three copies thereof. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish sufficient forces, construction plant, and equipment and shall work such hours including night shifts, overtime operations, and Sunday and holiday work, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution of the Work in accordance with the approved progress schedule. If, in the opinion of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR falls behind the progress schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve his progress and the OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to work overtime, or to increase the number of shifts and/or overtime operations, days of work and/or the amount of construction plant, all without additional cost to the OWNER. C. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with the requirements of the OWNER under this provision shall be grounds for determination by the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR is not prosecuting the Work with such diligence as will insure completion within the time specified. Upon such determination the OWNER may terminate the CONTRACTOR's right to proceed with the Work, or any separable part thereof. The OWNER may also hold up progress payments until, in the opinion of the OWNER, satisfactory progress is resumed. It shall be GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -12 32. PROGRESS PAYMENTS: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA understood by the CONTRACTOR that the schedule or actual progress of other Contracts is not to be used as a basis for comparison with or modification of this CONTRACTOR'S schedule except as approved by the ENGINEERS. The fact that other CONTRACTORS are not proceeding in accordance with their schedule shall not relieve this CONTRACTOR from expediting the Work under these Specifications. A. Upon execution of theAgreementby the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit an itemized breakdown of the Agreement price as to the various classifications of the Work by crafts, subcontracts, lump sum of materials and labor, which breakdown, subject to the approval of the ENGINEER, shall be used as his basis for progress payments of the Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER on or about the first day of each month an application for partial payment. Each pay request shall include the identified amount of Taxes (State remodel when applicable) which is included in the partial payment. B. Payments to the CONTRACTOR will be made for the Work done and materials in place plus an allowance of the invoice cost for materials properly stored at the site but not incorporated in the Work. From the total amount so ascertained ten percent will be retained until completion and final acceptance. 33. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK: CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials condenmed by the ENGINEER on account of failure to conform to the Agreement, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall at his own expense, promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other Contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such condemned work with in a reasonable time after a written notice by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, OWNER may remove and replace it at CONTRACTOR's expense. 34. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT: Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in the Agreement shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due hereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. The OWNER shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 35. OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK: If the CONTRACTOR defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Engineer's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -13 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor or both subject to the prior approval of the Engineer. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 36. PROTECTION OF MATERIAL AND WORK: The CONTRACTOR shall at all times take care to protect and preserve all materials, supplies, and equipment of every description (including property which may be OWNER fumished or owned) and all Work performed. All reasonable requests of OWNER to enclose or specially protect such property shall be complied with. If, as determined by OWNER, material, equipment, supplies, and Work performed are not adequately protected by the CONTRACTOR, such property may be protected by the OWNER and the cost thereof may be charged to the CONTRACTOR or deducted from any payments due to him. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS: In executing the Agreement, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time therein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the Work embraced in this Agreement except those expenses referred to in Article 29 entitled "SUSPENSION OF WORK ON NOTICE." 38. ROYALTIES AND PATENT: CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees which may be payable on account of the Work or any part thereof. He shall defend all suits or claims instituted against OWNER and/or ENGINEER for the infringement of any patent rights and shall pay all awards of damages assessed and all costs of suit adjudged against OWNER and/or ENGINEER in such suits or proceedings, provided OWNER and/or ENGINEER gives CONTRACTOR reasonable notice in writing of the institution of any such suit or proceeding, permits him to defend it and gives him all such information, assistance and authority as shall be necessary to enable him to do so. In case any part of the Work is held in any such suit to constitute infringement and its use is enjoined, CONTRACTOR shall within a reasonable time (a) replace at CONTRACTOR's own expense such part of the Work with a non - infringing part or modify it so that it becomes non - infringing, or (b) secure for OWNER the right to continue the use of such part of the Work by procuring for OWNER a license or such other permission as will enable CONTRACTOR to secure the suspension of the injunction. If the CONTRACTOR is unable, after reasonable effort, to secure such a license or permission, or to make replacement or modification, he shall remove the part so enjoined from OWNER'S premises and refund that portion of the Agreement price which represents any part affected by the injunction. 39. ASSIGNMENT OF SUBLEASE: CONTRACTOR shall not sublet or assign the Agreement for any part of the Work without first obtaining OWNER's written approval. Approval ofa Subcontractor will not be given unless OWNER has been furnished with satisfactory evidence that the proposed Subcontractor is carrying ample public liability insurance and workmen's compensation to the extent and in the same manner as is herein provided to be furnished by CONTRACTOR. If such approval is given, the CONTRACTOR is not relieved from full responsibility for the Work or the fulfillment of all obligations under the Agreement. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -14 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 40. CONTRACTOR'S INDEBTEDNESS: If during the progress of the Work Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by others or by Subcontractors and shall fail to pay and discharge such indebtedness, within five days after demand made, then OWNER may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of the Agreement price a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply sum so withheld to the discharge of the indebtedness. 41. INDEMNIFICATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER and their respective directors, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, demands, suits, judgments, losses, expenses and cost, including attorney's fees and expenses, arising out of, resulting from or in connection with the performance of the Work or any failure to perform the Work, or any part thereof, provided that any such claim, damage, demand, suit, judgment, loss, expense or cost (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of tangible property including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part or claimed to have been caused in whole or in part by or in connection with any negligent act or omission of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, the OWNER, the ENGINEER, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in whole or in part by a part indemnified hereunder. B. In any and all claims against the OWNER or the ENGINEER or any of their directors, officers, agents or employees by any employee of the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Article 41 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. C. The obligations of the CONTRACTOR under this Article shall not extend to any claim, damage, loss or expense which is attributable in whole to a defect in drawings and specifications prepared by the ENGINEER. 42. LIABILITY INSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance: The CONTRACTOR will purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him from claims under workmen's compensation laws, disability benefit laws or other similar employee benefit laws; from claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; from claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees including claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage, and from claims for injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom - any or all of which may arise out of or result from the CONTRACTOR's operations under the Documents, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone directly or GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -l5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be legally liable. This insurance shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Documents or required by law, whichever is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance. Before starting the Work, the CONTRACTOR will file with the OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of such insurance, acceptable to the OWNER: these certificates shall be on the form hereinafter attached and shall contain a provision that the coverage afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or changed until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the OWNER and ENGINEER. B. OWNER's Liability Insurance: CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain OWNER's Protective Liability Insurance in amounts and limits set forth in Article 43 which insurance shall name OWNER as the insured and which shall name the ENGINEER as additional insured therein and which insurance shall protect OWNER and the ENGINEER against any and all claims that may arise as a result of the operations of the CONTRACTOR, his Subcontractors or either of their employees or agents in fulfilling this Agreement. This policy shall be deposited with the ENGINEER at their offices in Abilene, Taylor County, Texas, prior to commencement of the Work. 43. LIABILITY INSURANCE LIMITS: The insurance provided for in Article 42 shall meet the following minimum requirements and evidence of compliance therewith in the form of approved certificates, or certified copies of policies shall be filed with the OWNER and the ENGINEER prior to commencement of the Work. Insurance shall be effected with companies satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER and shall be subject to the provision that cancellation or changes shall not be made effective without giving 30 days advance written notice thereof to the OWNER and ENGINEER. A. Workmen's Compensation - Statutory as respects employees subject to the applicable Acts and voluntary with respect to employees not so subject, including broad form all states endorsement. B. Employer's Liability - Minimum $500,000 as respects Accident, 500,000 as respects Disease - Aggregate and $250,000 as respects Disease - Employee. C. Comprehensive General Liability - Limits of Liability: Bodily Injury- $2,000,000 each occurrence; Property Damage - $2,000,000 each occurrence. The policy shall provide: (1) Personal injury coverage as customarily defined. (2) Broad form property damage coverage. (3) Coverage for hazards of blasting - explosion, collapse and underground facilities generally identified as the "x ", "c" and "u" hazards. (4) Contractual Liability coverage including the Indemnification agreement in Article 41. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -16 (5) Completed Operations Coverage: This insurance shall be furnished and maintained by CONTRACTOR for a period not less than one year from and beyond the date of final payment under the Agreement. (6) Contractor's Protective Liability (Liability due to work performed by Subcontractors). D. Comprehensive Automobile Liability - Limit of Liability: Bodily Injury - $1,000,000 each person, single limit; Property Damage - $1,000,000 each occurrence, combined single limit. E. Catastrophe Liability (Umbrella): Limit of liability - $2,000,000 minimum. F. Policy must be "Occurrence" Form only; "Claims Made" is unacceptable. G. Engineer and "VERIZON Business" shall be named as Additional Insured under the General Liability Policy. H. The issuing company will notify the Engineer and VERIZON Business (Regional Facilities Engineering and Construction) ten (10) days prior to any change or cancellation of policies. I. Exclusions to the policy shall be indicated. J. Refer to attached policy examples. Policy certificate holder shall read exactly: 44. PROPERTY INSURANCE: Verizon Business Technical Facilities Operation and Construction 604 East Hoag St., PO Box 10 Yacolt, WA 98675 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. CONTRACTOR shall effect and maintain "All Risk" Builder's Risk hazard insurance covering all risks of loss (subject to a deductible amount of not more than $5,000.00) in an amount equal to 100% of the Agreement Price hereof. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall effect and maintain "All Risk" Builder's Risk Insurance on equipment and/or materials furnished by the OWNER and stored and/or installed by the CONTRACTOR in an amount equal to 100% of the value of the equipment and/or materials. All such insurance shall name OWNER, CONTRACTOR, all Subcontractors, all Sub - Subcontractors, and ENGINEER and his consultants as insured, and all losses shall be adjustable with CONTRACTOR and OWNER and shall be payable to the OWNER as trustee for the benefit of each as his respective interest appears. B. In the event separate policies are issued, they shall be deposited with the ENGINEER at their offices in Abilene, Texas. If CONTRACTOR effects Blanket or Reporting form builder's Risk Insurance, he shall deposit a full abstract or the equivalent thereof of such policy but such abstract shall set forth all the terms, conditions, and exclusions thereof. All such policies and abstracts shall provide that as respects OWNER's interest, such insurance shall not be GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -17 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA canceled or changed without at least 10 days prior written notice to the OWNER and the ENGINEER. If, in the event of cancellation or change, CONTRACTOR fails to replace such insurance prior to the effective date of such cancellation or change, OWNER may effect such insurance as is necessary to protect his interest and the ENGINEER's interest at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall pay the deductible position in the event of a loss. 45. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: (NOT REQUIRED FOR PROJECTS OF LESS THAN $500,000.00) A. The CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, provide a performance bond in amount equal to 100% of the Agreement price with a bonding company approved by the OWNER, and on a form approved by the OWNER, for the faithful performance of the Agreement and also a payment bond on a Washington Statutory Payment Bond form for the use and benefit of all parties who may become entitled to liens under said Agreement, according to the provisions of the laws of the State of Washington. B. The OWNER agrees to mail a notice to the CONTRACTOR, calling his attention to any failure to comply with the requirements of the Bond, not less than ten days before notifying his surety of such failure. These bonds shall remain in force for and until one (1) year after completion of the Work and acceptance of same by the OWNER. 46. BID BONDS: A. A Bid Bond is not required if total project construction cost is less than $500,000. B. A Bid Bond is required if total project construction cost is greater than $500,000. When required, bid bond, acceptable to the OWNER and the ENGINEER, or a certified or cashier's check in the amount of 5% of the maximum amount of the CONTRACTOR'S bid shall be provided to guarantee that the CONTRACTOR will execute an agreement in accordance with his proposal within ten (10) days of the date of acceptance of his bid. 47. TIME FOR COMPLETION: A. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between each Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and the time for completion as specified in the Agreement of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this agreement; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this agreement shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the written "Notice to Proceed ". B. Each Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -18 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA C. If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work or any portion of the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner; the Owner after seven days written notice to the Contractor and his Surety may terminate the employment of the Contractor and complete the work as described in Article 28 or complete the work as described in Article 35. 48. ENGINEER'S INTERPRETATIONS AND DECISIONS: A. The ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations (in the form of Drawings of otherwise) as he may determine necessary for the proper execution of the Work, such clarifications and interpretations to be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Documents. If the CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification and interpretation entitles him to an increase in the Agreement Price, he may make a claim therefore as provided in Article 26. B. The ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the terms and conditions of the Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder. In his capacity as interpreter and judge he will exercise his best efforts to insure faithful performance by both the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. He will not show partiality to either and shall not be liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of or performance under the Documents shall be referred initially to the ENGINEER for decision, which he shall render in writing within a reasonable time. C. Either the OWNER, or the CONTRACTOR may demand arbitration with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter that has been referred to the ENGINEER, except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in Article 30, such arbitration to be in accordance with Article 48. However, no demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter shall be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which the ENGINEER has rendered his decision or (b) the tenth day after the parties have presented their evidence to the ENGINEER if he has not rendered a decision. No demand for arbitration shall be made later than thirty days after the date on which the ENGINEER rendered his written decision in respect of the claim, dispute or other matter as to which arbitration is sought; and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period shall result in the ENGINEER's decision being final and binding upon the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the ENGINEER renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but shall not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. 49. ARBITRATION: A. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the breach thereof except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Article 30, shall on the demand of either the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR, be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -19 End of Section. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. This Agreement so to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration law. The award rendered by the arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof. B. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the ENGINEER. The demand for arbitration shall be made within the 30 day period specified in Article 47 where applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute, or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. C. The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during any arbitration proceedings, unless otherwise agreed by him and the OWNER in writing. 50. TAXES: The cost of all applicable Federal, State, and local taxes (including all sales taxes) shall be included in each price proposal and shall be paid by this CONTRACTOR, all at no additional cost to the OWNER. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -20 GENERAL CONDITIONS: SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS: END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA The General Conditions of the Contract and the Special Conditions are hereby made a part of this specification. The General Condition, Special Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions herein shall become a part of the Contract and shall apply to all Contractors and Subcontractors. A. Working Superintendent: The Contractor's Job Superintendent for the project as required by Article 9 of the General Conditions shall be able to perform construction work tasks. However, skilled craftsmen, in the subject trade, shall perform the work tasks. In addition to work performed, the Job Superintendent's duties shall be to plan, coordinate, sequence, and oversee the work and various Subcontractors in the execution of the planned work. B. Approved Subcontractors: VERIZON Business requires that each General Contractor use a Subcontractor who is listed on VERIZON Business approved bidders list to provide the roofing, fire protection, dc power, mechanical and electrical work. Should the General Contractor wish to use a Subcontractor for dc power, mechanical or electrical work that is not listed, then approval in writing must be obtained from the VERIZON Business project engineer prior to bidding. Failure to comply with this requirement will be considered justification to disqualify the General Contractor's bid. C. Photo Identification: All Contractors, Subcontractors and their employees are to have a VERIZON Business issued photo I.D. visually displayed in order to access and/or be present on any VERIZON Business property. INDEX SPECIAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE PAGE TITLE NO. NO. ACCESS DOORS 24 SC -11 APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS 21 SC -10 BACKFILLING 17 SC -8 -9 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS 44 SC -15 -16 CHECKING DOCUMENTS 31 SC -12 CLEANING AND TESTING 38 SC -13 -14 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS 39 SC -14 CONFLICT BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND /OR PARTS OF EITHER 36 SC -13 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION 50 SC -17 COOPERATION 23 SC -11 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION 26 SC -11 CUTTING AND PATCHING 35 SC -12 -13 DEFINITION OF CONTRACTOR 25 SC -11 DEFINITIONS 1 SC -1 DISCREPANCIES 43 SC -15 DRAWINGS 12 SC -3 ENUMERATION OF DRAWINGS 53 SC -17 EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES 16 SC -7 -8 FIRE PROTECTION MEASURES 4 SC -1 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING 9 SC -2 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES 34 SC -12 GUARANTEE 27 SC -11 -12 SPECIAL CONDITIONS INDEX, continued ARTICLE PAGE TITLE NO. NO. GUARANTEE FORMS 28 SC -12 HANGERS, SUPPORT, PIPE SLEEVES, PIPE ANCHORS 15 SC-4 -7 INJURY TO OTHER CONTRACTOR'S WORK 20 SC -10 INTERIOR TRENCHING 18 SC -9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS 42 SC -15 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 5 SC -1 -2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 32 SC -12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 22 SC -10 -11 PAINTING 19 SC -9 -10 PATCHING OF PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, ETC. 37 SC -13 PERMITS 40 SC -14 -15 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT 47 SC -16 PRECEDENCE 14 SC -4 PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY 45 SC -16 PRESIDENTIAL EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 10925 3 SC -1 PROGRESS OF WORK 49 SC -16 PROTECTION 2 SC -1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND /OR FACILITIES 6 SC -2 REPAIRING AND REFINISHING 48 SC -16 RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK 29 SC -12 RULES AND REGULATIONS 10 SC -2 -3 SAMPLE CUTTING AND WELDING PERMIT FORM 51 SC -17 SPECIAL CONDITIONS INDEX, continued ARTICLE PAGE TITLE NO. NO. SCHEDULE OF WORK 7 SC -2 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTWORK, ETC. 41 SC -15 SPACE REQUIREMENTS 46 SC -16 STANDARD DETAILS 52 SC -17 STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS 13 SC -4 SUBMITTAL DATA 11 SC -3 SURFACES REQUIRED TO BE INSULATED 8 SC -2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND ALTERATIONS 30 SC -12 UTILITIES FOR CONSTRUCTION 33 SC -12 4. FIRE PROTECTION MEASURES: SPECIAL CONDITIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 1. DEFINITIONS: Where the term "Owner" or "Purchaser" is referred to in these specifications, it shall mean VERIZON Business. Where the term "Engineer ", "Engineers," or "Consulting Engineers" is referred to in these specifications it shall refer to WTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers, Abilene, Texas. All correspondence and communication in regard to this project should be directed to WTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers, One Village Drive, Suite 500, Abilene, Texas 79606, Telephone - 325 -695- 1090. 2. PROTECTION: It shall be each Contractor's responsibility to provide whatever protection and/or storage facilities required for his equipment between the time same is delivered to the installation site and same is placed in satisfactory commercial operation and accepted by the Owner. 3. PRESIDENTIAL EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 10925: Contractors in performing the work under this Agreement shall not discriminate against any applicant for employment or any employee because of race, creed, or national origin in compliance with the Presidential Executive Order No. 10925, as amended. A. Each Contractor shall take necessary precautions to eliminate possible fire hazards and to prevent damage to any construction work, building materials, equipment, and other property involved in or adjacent to the project. B. Fire extinguishers of proper type shall be provided by this Contractor and same shall be available to protect the entire project against fire during the installation and storage period. C. Cutting and welding operations are discouraged. However, if unavoidable, they shall be performed in strict accordance with requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 51B "Cutting and Welding Processes." 5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS: A. All work under these specifications shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Fire Codes as published by the National Fire Protection Association. B. The clearance between heat producing devices and combustible materials shall conform to the applicable requirements suggested in NFPA Pamphlet 89M -1, "Heat Producing Appliances." C. The above mentioned Fire Protection Association pamphlets are not to be construed as a complete list of applicable National Fire Protection Association standards. All other applicable National Fire Protection Association standards shall be a part of these specifications and where the requirements of these standards exceed the requirements of SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA specifications, the National Fire Protection Association standards shall govern and where the specifications requirements exceed the National Fire Protection Association standards, the specifications shall govern. 6. PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND /OR FACILITIES: It shall be the Contractor's sole and complete responsibility to provide whatever protection deemed necessary to protect all existing construction, fumishings, equipment, cables, etc., from damage caused by this Contractor, his employees, or Subcontractors during the course of this construction. Should any damage occur because of acts by this Contractor, his employees, or Subcontractors, each Contractor shall pay for the cost of all such damage and hold the Owner and/or Engineer completely harmless from such damage. 7. SCHEDULE OF WORK: In the case of alterations and/or additions to existing buildings and/or facilities, it is essential that all existing systems remain in operation throughout the construction period except at certain times, approved by the Owner, that a particular system may be shut down. Each Contractor shall schedule with the Owner, well in advance, times when particular portions of the systems will be out of service. All temporary services required during construction for satisfactory operation of existing systems shall be provided by the Contractor for that phase of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. In general, existing systems shall not be shut down except during periods when same will cause a minimum of inconvenience to the Owner. The Contractor and all required Subcontractors shall work nights, weekends and holidays as required so as to restore the system to operable condition in the shortest possible time after an approved interruption, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. SURFACES REQUIRED TO BE INSULATED: In addition to insulation called for elsewhere in the specifications, all piping and equipment subject to condensation and/or whose normal operating surface temperature is below 70 degrees F or above 110 degrees F shall be insulated. All piping subject to condensation and/or whose operating temperature is below 70 degrees F shall be insulated same as specified elsewhere in the specifications for chilled water or refrigerant suction line piping. All piping with operating surface temperature above 110 degrees F shall be insulated same as specified elsewhere in the specifications for domestic hot water or steam piping. All insulation shall be provided by the particular Contractor who installs the particular equipment or piping system. All equipment shall be insulated and finished in a manner suitable for the conditions and as approved by the Engineers. 9. FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING: Each Contractor installing piping, conduit, ductwork, etc., passing through the roof shall provide all flashing and counterflashing required for his work. Plumbing Contractor shall provide lead and all other flashings for all roof drains. 10. RULES AND REGULATIONS: All work must be performed in strict accordance with all Codes and ordinances which govern such work and must meet the full approval of all authorities enforcing these Codes. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code unless other governing codes and/or the drawings or specifications requirements exceed the National Electrical Code requirements. The work shall also comply with the regulations of the latest revision of National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Williams- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and any later revisions thereof. If the requirements of NFPA Standards, the SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -2 11. SUBMITTAL DATA: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Williams- Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act Standards or any Code exceed the requirements of the specifications, the Codes or Standards shall govern. If the specifications requirements exceed the requirements of the Codes or Standards, the specifications shall govern the work. A. Submittal data pertaining to plumbing, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, all other items of mechanical work, and electrical work shall be defined as a manufacturer's catalogue data, specification data, and other data prepared by the manufacturer, supplier or distributor which illustrate his product and are by definition not shop drawings. This definition, when pertaining to plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, all other items of mechanical work and electrical work, shall supercede any conflicting definitions in the General Conditions or elsewhere in the specifications and documents. B. Before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall make a brochure of manufacturer's catalogue and specification data for each item of equipment, including but not limited to boilers, motors, pumps, compressors, cooling tower, air conditioning units, fans, electrical panels and switchgear, light fixtures, etc., and of such other apparatus as required by the Engineer. This data shall show construction details, capacities, electrical requirements, and dimensions of each piece of equipment and, in the case of pumps, performance curves shall be included. C. Through the submission of any such data, the Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier by or through whom the same is submitted, warrants, represents and vouches for the accuracy of the parts, material, device, apparatus, or function shown thereby and of its suitability for incorporation into the equipment or work for the purposes contemplated thereby; and examination, approval or rejection of such submittal data by the Engineers shall not relieve such Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier from the responsibility of furnishing the materials, apparatus or device of proper dimension, size, capacity, quantity, quality and the performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the documents. Such approval shall not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort on the submittal data. If the submittal data deviates from the documents, this Contractor shall advise the Engineers of the deviations in writing accompanying the submittal data, including the reasons for the deviations. D. Wherever submittal data is called for in these specifications, it shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is required in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. 12. DRAWINGS: The drawings are intended to show the general arrangement and extent of the work contemplated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been selected and as the work progresses. Drawings and specifications are not intended to show all details, fittings, etc., which may be found necessary as the work progresses. SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -3 13. STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS: A. These specifications and the drawings accompanying same are intended to cover an installation which will not interfere with the structural design of the building, which will fit into the several available spaces, and which will insure a complete and satisfactory mechanical and electrical system. B. Each bidder shall therefore carefully examine the plans for all branches of the work and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the building. C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those shown on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Engineer before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. 14. PRECEDENCE: A. The mechanical and electrical work shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: 1. Light fixtures and air conditioning ceiling outlets 2. Soil and waste piping 3. Ductwork 4. Condenser, chilled- heated, cold and hot water systems 5. Gas Piping 6. Electric wiring 15. HANGERS, SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, PIPE ANCHORS: 1. 3/4" steel, wrought iron and copper, or smaller 5' -0" O.C. 2. 1" steel, wrought iron and copper, or smaller 6' -0" O.C. 3. 1 -1/4" steel, wrought iron and copper, or larger ...10' -0" O.C. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. All piping, etc., shall run parallel or perpendicular with the lines of the building. Conduits exposed to view shall also be run parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building. B. All different service pipes, etc., running parallel with each other and near together shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance apart to permit future repair work. Not less than 2" shall be provided between finished coverings. C. All horizontal pipes and conduits not laid in ground shall be securely supported by pipe hangers spaced not greater than: SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -4 4. Cast iron soil pipe 5' -0" O.C. F. SLEEVES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 5. PVC -- in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. D. Individual hangers for pipes and conduits shall be of the adjustable clevis type equal to Anvil No. 260. E. Where practicable, multiple trapeze hangers shall be used. (1) GENERAL: Proper openings through floors, walls, roofs, etc., for the passage of piping, ductwork, etc., shall be provided. All penetrations must pass through sleeves except soil pipe installed under concrete slabs on fill. Sleeves shall be set in new construction before a concrete slab is poured, as cutting holes through any part of the concrete will not be permitted unless acceptable to the Engineer. (2) The minimum clearance between horizontal penetrations including insulations where applicable, and sleeve shall be 1/4" except that the minimum clearance shall be 2" where piping contacts the ground. Sleeves through walls and partitions shall be installed flush with exposed surfaces. Penetrations through floors shall be fitted with sleeves of the next larger pipe size, grouted in place, and extended 2" above the finish floor. (3) MATERIALS: Sleeves shall be of standard weight galvanized iron pipe, except heavy gauge galvanized iron sleeves may be utilized in concrete pours where acceptable to the Engineer for size, and metal gauge. Sleeves in footings, grade beams, where pipes enter or leave the building, pass through concrete or masonry shall be Schedule 80 PVC along the pipe route from the underground installation to the insulating coupling installed above the ground. Provide galvanized pipe sleeves with 1/4" thick by 6" water stop on all basement and sub - basement wall penetrations. G. All horizontal piping and conduits shall be securely anchored to the building construction at points noted on plans, and where required. Vertical piping shall be supported from floor construction by approved wrought iron brackets, stanchions, or hangers in such a manner as to maintain its alignment while making provisions for expansion and contraction. H. Adequate provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction of all piping systems; and any expansion joints, expansion loops, spring type hangers, spring supports, special supports, anchors, etc., required to meet this requirement of the specifications shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. I. No pipes or conduits shall be supported from bulb tees or roof decking. J. All piping not specifically detailed to be supported in a particular manner shall be supported in accordance with the following restrictions: SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -5 (1) Perpendicular to Steel Joists: a. Pipes shall be supported from each steel joist. (2) Parallel to Steel Joists: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA b. Single pipes 2" and smaller may be supported at any point from the top or bottom chord of the steel joist but not more than one pipe shall be supported in each space between panel points. c. Pipe supports shall be attached to the steel joists at the top or bottom chord panel points only. a. Pipe or pipes shall run at mid - distance between the steel joists (very important for the larger pipes - 5 ", 6 ", and 8 "). b. Pipe cross supports between steel joists shall be supported at top or bottom chord panel points only and shall not exceed 8'. c. The maximum number and size of pipes run in adjacent spaces between steel joists shall be as follows: 1 - 5" round 1 - 4" round and 1 - 2 -1/2" round 1 - 3 -1/2" round and 1 - 3" round 2 - 3" round 2 - 2 -1/2" round and 1 - 2" round 3 - 2" round and 1 - 1 -1/2" round 5 - 1 -1/2" round d. The maximum number and size of pipes run in alternate (every other one) spaces between steel joists shall be as follows: 1 - 8" round 2 - 5" round 1 - 6" round and 1 - 4" round SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - 3 - 4" round 3 - 3 -1/2" round and 1 - 2 -1/2" round 4 - 3" round 5 - 2 -1/2" round 7 - 2" round 16. EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES: WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Each Contractor shall do all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of his work, including shoring, bailing, and pumping to maintain his trenches and keep them in dry condition until the work in question has been installed, tested, and approved. B. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of all portions of the utilities system. All excavated materials not required for fill or backfill shall be removed and wasted as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. All excavations shall be made by open cut. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable and where required shall be properly sheeted and braced. Trenches shall be not less that 12" wider nor more than 16" wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall be true to line so that a clear space of not less than 6" nor more than 8" in width is provided on each side of the pipe. C. For sewers, the maximum width of trench specified applies to the width at and below the level of the top of the pipe. The width of the trench above that level may be made as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing and the proper installation of the work. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded. Bell holes for lead pipe joints shall be 12" in depth below the trench bottom and shall extend from a point 6" back of the face of the bell of the pipe to a point approximately 13" in front of the face of the bell. Such bell holes shall be of sufficient width to provide ample room for caulking. Depressions for joints other than bell- and - spigot shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint manufacturers for the particular joint used. D. The bottoms of all trenches excavated for sanitary sewers shall be rounded so that at least 1/3 of the circumference of the pipes will rest firmly on undisturbed soil. The lower 4" of the pipe trenches measuring from an overhead line set parallel to the grade line of the sewer shall be excavated only a few feet in advance of the pipe laying by men especially skilled in this type of work. Excavation for sand traps and other accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least 12" in the clear between their outer surfaces and the embankment or timber which may be used to hold the banks and protect them. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is liable to result from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting will be ordered to be left in place. SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -7 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Except at the locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of the trenches is required, care shall be taken not to excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall be excavated to a minimum over -depth of 4" below the trench depths indicated on drawings or specified. The over -depth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be backfilled with loose, moist earth, thoroughly tamped. E. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of supporting the pipe, as determined by the Engineer, is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to a depth required and for the lengths designated by the Engineer, and the trench backfilled to trench bottom grade, as hereinafter specified, with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material. Backfill with earth under manholes or other buried structures will not be permitted, and any unauthorized excess excavation below the levels indicated for foundation of such structures shall be filled with sand, gravel, or concrete at the expense of the Contractor. F. All grading in the vicinity of excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface ground water from flowing into the excavations. Any water accumulating in the excavations shall be removed by pumping or by other approved method. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stacked m an orderly manner at a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave -ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted or properly disposed of offsite as approved by Engineer. G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions. All shoring and sheeting required to perform and protect the excavations and to safeguard employees and all other personnel and property shall be performed by the Contractor without any precautions being requested by the Engineer, Owner, or anyone else. 17. BACKFILLING: A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers until the pipe has a cover of not less than 1' for water mains and 2' for sewer mains. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened, and tamped in 1' layers. B. Broken rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and compaction, mounded over, and smoothed off. C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth and in such a manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -8 adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along with other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Any settlement noted during the first year after completion and acceptance of the work called for under this Agreement shall be immediately brought backup to grade and compacted, all at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Any existing sidewalks, curbing, paving, or other construction damaged during the excavation, installation, or backfilling operations shall be replaced with new construction of equal or better quality than was existing, all at no additional cost to the Owner and all as approved by the Engineer and Owner. 18. INTERIOR TRENCHING: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. The Contractor for each section of the work described in these specifications shall cut all openings required to install his work or repair any defective work. All this cutting shall be done under the Engineer's direction, and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required in wrong locations. B. The patching of all openings cut by each Contractor or by repairing of any damage to the work of other trades occasioned by those cutting operations or failure of any part of the work installed by each Contractor shall be performed by the trade whose work is involved, but shall be paid for by the Contractor cutting the opening or causing the damage. C. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Engineer to do such cutting. 19. PAINTING: A. All apparatus or materials herein specified to be painted shall first be cleaned, all rust scraped off, and all oil or grease removed before any paint is applied. B. When any appliances or materials hereinafter specified to be primed at the factory are received at the work unprimed, they shall be painted immediately upon arrival using paint of same material as specified. C. The priming painting shall be done in addition to other painting work herein specified. D. Finished painting coats shall not be applied until the plastering or other structural building work is completed, or until liability for damage to same due to unfinished operations of other Contractors in the building is removed, as the Contractor shall be required to leave his painting work in perfect finished condition. E. The Engineer may order repainting or retouching of any painted surfaces where the painting SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA has been carelessly applied or has been damaged through neglect of the Contractor to take proper precaution for its protection. F. Cloths shall be spread where necessary to prevent drops of oil, paint, etc., from defacing the adjacent walls, floors, or other portions of the building, and the Contractor will be held responsible for all damage by neglect of such precautions. G. All lead and oil paint used on this work except where otherwise stated shall consist of best grade pure white lead mixed with linseed oil and spirits of turpentine in proper proportions according to the character of the surface to which it is to be applied. H. All canvas covered piping not exposed to view shall be painted one coat of fireproof paint of a type and color selected by the Engineer. I. All canvas covered piping and canvas covered insulated ductwork shall be sized and painted two coats of glossy enamel paint of colors selected by the Engineers. All uninsulated ductwork, noncovered piping, hangers, louvers, goosenecks, outside air intake and/or exhaust air hoods, conduits, and piping on roofs and all other locations where exposed to view shall be painted three coats of paint as specified in the General Specifications for similar locations or as approved by the Engineer. J. All canvas covered insulation of piping and ductwork shall be provided two coats of fireproof sizing (before painting) sufficiently thick to completely seal all pores. K. All grilles and registers shall be spray painted three coats of a color selected by the Engineer. L. All equipment without factory applied finish paint shall be primed and finish painted using paint and colors approved by the Engineers. M. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to paint all surfaces above (or behind) perforated return air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint. All pipes, conduits, ductwork, structural members shall be painted. These surfaces shall be painted a distance away from the grille such that no nonpainted surfaces are visible to a person standing on the room side and viewing through the device. 20. INJURY TO OTHER CONTRACTOR'S WORK: The Contractor shall pay for any injury or damage in the work of any other Contractor which may be done by him or his workmen. The Engineer shall be the arbitrator in such manners as may arise. 21. APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS: VERIZON BUSINESS requires that each General Contractor use a Subcontractor preapproved for this project. Should the General Contractor wish to use a Subcontractor who is not on the preapproved Subcontractor's list, he shall obtain approval of the Subcontractor, in writing, from the Owner prior to bidding. 22. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: Each Contractor shall furnish five complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner and shall instruct the Owner's representative in the proper SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -10 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA operation of such equipment items or systems. At the beginning of the first cooling and heating season, he shall start the plant and operate same until satisfactory performance is achieved. 23. COOPERATION: The General Contractor, all other contractors, and all Subcontractors shall coordinate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of the work. Each trade shall afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installation of their work and the storage of their material. 24. ACCESS DOORS: Each Contractor shall furnish and install all access doors required for proper operation and service of all work installed under his Agreement. Access doors other than for ductwork shall be factory fabricated Milcor access doors and frames as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Company, or approved equal, with concealed hinges and shall have screwdriver operated locks. Access doors in fire rated walls shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories 1 -1/2 hour "B" label. All access doors shall be as approved by the Engineer for the particular area involved. All access doors shall be painted as directed by the Owner unless indicated or specified elsewhere to be chrome plated. Access doors for ductwork shall be Milcor insulated duct access door, or approved equal. Doors shall be of a sandwich type construction with an internal layer of fiberglass insulation. 25. DEFINITION OF CONTRACTOR: Where the term "Contractor" is referred to in these specifications, it shall mean the Contractor who contracts with the Owner to provide all work called for in the Specifications. 26. COORDINATION AND COOPERATION: The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with any Subcontractor and the owner as required to effect an overall complete and satisfactory operating installation, all as approved by the Owner. 27. GUARANTEE: A. The General Contractor shall guarantee all work, including that of his sub - contractors for one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. This does not waive other specified guarantees which may be in excess of one year. B. The Contractor is fully obligated to the Owner for the validity and performance of each guarantee and each warranty required by these Specifications. C. Whenever, within the guarantee period, the Contractor is notified by the Engineer or the Owner that any item of equipment, material and/or workmanship has proved defective or is not meeting the specification requirements, the Contractors shall immediately replace, repair, or otherwise correct the defect or defects without cost to the Owner and the guarantee shall be extended another year from the date the repairs or replacements are completed for the defective item or items. D. The written guarantees required in the Specifications shall be delivered to the Engineer at the time of final acceptance of the Project. SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -1 1 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 28. GUARANTEE FORMS: The Contractor shall provide all guarantees as called for by the guarantee forms hereinafter attached. At the completion of this project, the Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Owner these guarantee forms before his estimate of final payment can be processed. 29. RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK: It shall be understood by each Contractor that the work is entirely at his risk until same is finally accepted, and he will be held responsible for its safety. 30. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND ALTERATIONS: This Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials required to provide all temporary work required to maintain all existing systems in operation during the construction of this work. At the completion of construction or when temporary construction is no longer needed, this Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials, required to remove the temporary construction. 31. CHECKING DOCUMENTS: The specification pages and drawing sheets are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the specifications and drawings thoroughly and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Engineer will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the specifications and/or drawings. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete documents. 32. NOTICE TO BIDDERS: Before submitting his proposal, each bidder shall examine all specifications and drawings related to his work, visit the site of the proposed work, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work to be done on this project. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the material to be furnished or the amount of work to be done, it being fully understood that the tender of a proposal carries with it the agreement to all items and conditions referred to herein or required by nature of the site. 33. UTILITIES FOR CONSTRUCTION: The Owner will furnish electricity, water and gas as required for construction where the Owner's existing facilities are adequate for same. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to provide any temporary facilities in order to use the Owner's utilities and to remove any temporary facilities at the completion of this project. 34. FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES: All exposed pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., in room passing through floors, shelves, cabinets, ceilings and walls shall be provided with floor and ceiling plates of approved finish and pattern. 35. CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. The Contractor, for each section of the work described in these specifications, shall cut all openings required to install his work or repair any defective work. The Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. B. The patching of all openings cut by each Contractor or by repairing of any damage to the work of other trades occasioned by those cutting operations or failure of any part of the work installed by each Contractor shall be performed by the trade whose work is involved, but shall SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -12 be paid for by the Contractor cutting the opening or causing the damage. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA C. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Engineer to do such cutting. 36. CONFLICT BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND /OR PARTS OF EITHER: Where conflicts between drawings and specifications and/or parts of either occur, the bidders shall call the Engineer's attention to such conflicts in time for an addendum to be issued to clear up same prior to bid date. In the event such conflict is not discovered in time for an addendum, the Contractor shall include in his bid the requirement calling for the greatest quantity and/or requiring the highest cost. If any item is called for at any place to be furnished by a Contractor and/or Subcontractor, he shall include same in his bid even though it may be called for in another place to be furnished by someone else. 37. PATCHING OF PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, ETC: This Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to replace all existing pavement and/or sidewalks damaged during the construction of the work. All replaced pavement and/or sidewalks shall be of quality at least equal to that existing before same was damaged. Any settlements at excavated areas (and/or paved areas repaired under this agreement) during the one year warranty shall be reworked at the end of one year warranty period as required to leave same in an even elevation with the adjacent undisturbed areas, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 38. CLEANING AND TESTING: A. This Contractor shall, during the progress of the work or upon its completion make such tests of his work as are herein specified, or as are required by the Engineer or by State or Municipal Bureaus having jurisdiction, and under their supervision. B. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping connection, or any other requirements necessary for such tests. He shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to existing construction and/or facilities incurred by such tests as he will be required to repair and make good any damage so caused. C. Any leaks, defects, or deficiencies discovered as a result of the tests shall be immediately repaired or made good, and tests shall be repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with. No caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks will be permitted. D. This Contractor shall conduct tests of all apparatus installed by him to demonstrate the satisfactory operation of same and the fulfillment of the specifications. E. This Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation and maintenance of all equipment prior to acceptance of the work. He shall provide all necessary aid in placing the systems in successful operation. He shall make final adjustments to all equipment installed under this Agreement. This Contractor shall prepare operating manuals using manufacturer's SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -l3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA data and instruction manuals for the different phases of the work. F. Contractor shall keep the sites clean by removing trash from his work areas regularly. 39. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS: A. Before acceptance and final payment, each Contractor working under this section shall furnish: 40. PERMITS: 1. Accurate "Record" Reproducible Mylar Drawings. 2. All manufacturer's guarantees (5 copies). 3. All published operating manuals and spare parts lists or catalogs (5 copies). 4. Personal guarantee against faulty workmanship and material good for one year from date of acceptance by Owner (5 copies). 5. Unless additional information is required under other sections of these specifications, the Contractor shall provide the following record documents: (a) Drawings - one set of reproducible "Project Record Documents" mylar sepias which record actual construction as follows: (1) (1) Location of underground utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. (2) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structures. (3) Field changes of dimension and detail. (4) Changes made by Change Order or other modification. (5) Details not on original drawings. (b) Specifications and Addenda: Changes made by change order or other modification. (2) Other matters not originally specified. A. The Contractor shall pay all lawful fees required for the execution of his work and shall pay SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -14 43. DISCREPANCIES: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA for any and all services and fees required by the City and any other governing body. B. The Contractor shall secure all certificates of inspection that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 41. SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTWORK, ETC.: Each Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where same pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement as required to effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 42. MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed, and handled as directed by the manufacturer. All equipment shall be constructed of materials best suited for the service indicated on the drawings and/or specified regardless of whether or not materials are specified elsewhere in the specifications or documents. Each manufacturer and/or his representative supplying equipment and/or materials for use on this project shall familiarize himself with the plans and specifications sufficiently to determine if his products are indicated to be applied and installed in complete accordance with his recommendations. If the manufacturer and/or his representative determines that any equipment and/or materials which he furnishes for this project is not indicated to be applied or installed in accordance with his recommendations, he shall notify the Engineer in writing prior to accepting an order from the Contractor for the materials and/or equipment. B. It shall be this Contractor's sole responsibility to take whatever action necessary to insure that he and all manufacturers and/or suppliers fully comply with all requirements of this Article. Any item of material or equipment which is not suitable for the intended function or service shall be replaced by this Contractor with material or equipment which is suitable for the intended service at any time during the warranty period, all at no additional cost to the Owner or the Engineer. A. Exceptions or inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention before Agreement is signed. B. The Contractor will distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall be a finished and working job, and any item required shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. He shall also fully inform himself as to the construction and finish, and in case of doubt he shall in no case proceed with the work without first obtaining from the Engineer, at his office, such directions or drawings as may be necessary for the proper execution of the work. Should the Contractor find error in the drawings, he must at once report same to the Engineers. 44. CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS : When requested by the Engineer or Owner, the Contractor shall submit through proper channels a proposal of extra cost or credit as appropriate for the change SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -15 46. SPACE REQUIREMENTS: 48. REPAIRING AND REFINISHING: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA requested. Each change order proposal shall contain a detailed cost estimate of equipment, material, labor, taxes, overhead, and profit of all deleted and of added work. All equipment and material cost shall be substantiated by a copy of the supplier's quotation. All Subcontractors' costs shall be broken down and substantiated same as described above. 45. PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY: The Owner retains the right at all times to deliver, place, and install furnishing, etc., as the work progresses as long as there is no interference with the Contractor. Such preliminary occupancy shall not be construed as acceptance of such occupied portion of the building. A. The Contractor shall verify that each item of work furnished by him shall fit into the available space before ordering same. Any required changes due to the Contractor's failure to verify that each item of his equipment will fit into the available space shall be made by the Contractor or Subcontractor furnishing the equipment, all at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The routing of piping, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is approximate and where required to be compatible with items of existing construction or new work, the exact location and routing shall be as required by existing construction, all so that all conduits, piping, etc., shall be concealed. Any required changes due to the Contractor's failure to properly coordinate his work with existing construction and other portions of the new work shall be made by the Contractor installing such piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., all at no additional cost to the Owner. 47. PIPE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT: Where pipe connections to equipment are smaller than line size shown on plans, line size shall be run to within 6" of such connections and no elbow, valves, or tee shall be in the reduced portion of piping. A. All exposed surfaces damaged by work done under this Agreement and /or previously concealed surfaces exposed by work done under this Agreement (such as removal of cabinets, walls, etc.) shall be repaired and refinished to match adjacent surfaces. B. This repair work and refinishing shall be performed by the trade whose work is involved. C. Any existing construction required to be removed and/or relocated because of work called for under this Agreement shall be removed and/or relocated by this Contractor all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This repair work and refinishing shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineers all at no additional cost to the Owner. 49. PROGRESS OF WORK: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the engineer. SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -16 50. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION: Before calling for the final inspection, each Contractor shall carefully inspect his work, shall have completed all testing operations, and shall make sure his work is complete and in accordance with the specifications. If, m the opinion of the Engineer and/or Owner, the work is not ready for final inspection or is not in accordance with the specifications on the date requested by the Contractor another final inspection shall be required. 51. SAMPLE CUTTING AND WELDING PERMIT FORM: Each Contractor or Subcontractor shall comply with all the requirements of and provide a cutting and welding permit form (Appendix D) as hereinafter attached. 52. STANDARD DETAILS: The following Standard Detail is hereinafter attached and forms a part of this section of the specifications. STANDARD DETAIL NO. 30000 53. ENUMERATION OF DRAWINGS: END OF SECTION TITLE Explanation Of Section And Detail Symbols Refer to project drawings; drawings form a part of these documents. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC -17 MC 601947 (BACK) REF: 801.025 FORM TO BE PROVIDED BY VERIZON Business, TECHNICAL OPERATIONS - REPRESENTATIVE ATTENTION Before approving any cutting and welding permit, the Building Supervisor shall inspect the work area and confirm that precautions have been taken to prevent fires. PRECAUTIONS ❑ Portable fire extinguisher on site ❑ Cutting and welding equipment in good repair WITHIN 35 FT. OF WORK ❑ Floors swept clean of combustibles ❑ No combustible material or flammable liquids ❑ All wall and floor openings covered ❑ Protective blankets are suspended beneath work to collect sparks WORK ON WALLS OR CEILINGS ❑ Construction noncombustible and without combustible covering ❑ Combustibles moved away from opposite side of wall WORK ON ENCLOSED EQUIPMENT (Tanks, containers, ducts, dust collectors, etc.) ❑ Equipment cleaned of all combustibles ❑ Containers purged of flammable vapors FIRE WATCH ❑ To be provided during and 30 minutes after operation ❑ Supplied with portable fire extinguisher ❑ Trained in use of equipment and in sounding fire alarm FINAL CHECK -UP ❑ To be made 30 minutes after completion of any operation Signed Building Supervisor Cutting and Welding Supervisor MC 601947 (FRONT) REF: 801.025 (Address) VERIZON CUTTING AND WELDING PERMIT This permit is issued for cutting and welding operations in locations which have not been designated as regular cutting and welding areas. PURPOSE FOR WHICH PERMIT AUTHORIZED CUTTING ❑ Gas WELDING ❑ Gas ❑ Electric Beginning date: Starting time: A.M. P.M. Ending date: Ending time A.M.: P.M. Estimated number of days to complete The work will be conducted at (Building Name) Special Precautions Is Fire Watch required? ❑ Yes ❑ No The location where this work is to be done has been examined, necessary precautions taken, and permission is granted for this work. (See other side) Permit expires Signed Building Supervisor Cutting and Welding Supervisor 1.01 CLEANING UP: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all of his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials, and shall leave his work "broom clean" or its equivalent and ready for use, unless more exactly specified. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the several Contractors as the Engineer shall determine to be just. 1.02 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS: The following safeguards should be taken during any construction or alteration: A. The General Contractor shall be required to take necessary precautions to eliminate possible fire hazards and to prevent damage to any construction work, building materials, equipment, and other property, both public and private, involved in or adjacent to the project. B. Paint, paint thinners, gasoline, oil, or any other flammable liquids should not be stored within telephone properties under construction. C. All combustible debris should be removed from inside buildings at the close of every work day. D. Cutting and welding operations should be discouraged. However, if unavoidable, they should be performed in strict accordance with requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 51B "Cutting and Welding Processes ". 1.03 DUST PROTECTION: Equipment used in telephone buildings is highly susceptible to damage from dust and debris, therefore, the following safeguards shall be taken during the entire construction process. A. During the Pre - Construction Conference the General Contractor, the Engineer and the Owner's Representative shall made a visual inspection of the existing Building and a record of its condition shall be made. Refer to Sections 01200, 02010, and 02073 for additional requirements concerning Dust Control and preliminary meeting prior to initiation of work. B. Prior to commencing any construction or demolition the General Contractor shall install all temporary dust partitions and seal any and all openings that may emit dust. He shall insure the existing building is sealed dust tight. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 -1 C. The dust seals and temporary partitions shall be maintained dust tight during the entire progress of construction. D. Prior to the removal of any dust seal or temporary partition the construction addition shall be thoroughly cleaned of all materials, debris, and shall be "vacuumed cleaned ". The Engineer or Owner's Representative shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of the scheduled temporary partition removal so he may be present. Refer to Sections 01200, 02010, and 02073 for additional requirements concerning Dust Control. E. Should the General Contractor or his subcontractors fail to maintain the dustproof requirements and dust infiltrates the existing equipment room, the General Contractor shall be charged the cost of cleaning and if any, the cost of damage to telephone equipment. The cleaning of telephone equipment shall be done only by the Owner and his costs shall be assessed against the General Contractor. 2.01 PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. Contractor determines work is complete. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA B. Contractor gives written notice that the work is ready for Final Inspection, includes Application for Final Payment, Affidavit of Release of Liens, Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, and Guarantee information, "Record Drawings" Reproducible Sepias, Maintenance and Operation Manuals. C. Engineer will determine when building is "Substantially Complete ". D. Compliance with requirements of Article 39, Completion Requirements, of the Special Conditions. E. When work is acceptable, under the Contract Documents, the Engineer processes the Final Certificate for Payment to the Owner. Refer to Attachment for Project Closeout checklist to be completed by the Contractor prior to final acceptance. 2.02 PROJECT SCHEDULE: A. The Contractor shall submit a bar graph schedule indicating the various phases of work from beginning to project completion. This schedule shall be updated each month and the revised schedule submitted with his monthly pay estimate. 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S CASH FLOW SCHEDULE: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 -2 3.02 COST BREAKDOWN: 3.03 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT: 3.04 TAX INFORMATION: END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. The Contractor shall submit a schedule indicating the projected monthly estimates for the project. The monthly estimates shall correspond with the work indicated in the above Project Schedule. The cash flow schedule shall be updated each month indicating any change in actual work accomplished. The first schedule will be submitted with the Contractor's initial "Cost Breakdown ", with revised schedule being submitted with each monthly pay request. A. Provide a breakdown of the Base Proposal. The breakdown shall be in accordance with the following form including Contractor's profit on each part of the work. A. Each pay request (including progress payments) shall be submitted on the Owner's "Certificate for Payment" form. A sample of the certificate is included at the end of this section. Owner's "Certificate for Payment" forms will be provided to the Contractor at the project's Pre - Construction Conference. Each "Certificate for Payment" submitted for payment shall include an original and two xerox copies. The original and two copies shall bear original signatures. Copies of signatures are acceptable for the Owner's purposes for pay requests. A. A Tax Information form shall be included with each pay request or Certificate for Payment. This form shall identify the amount of Sales Tax included in each pay request. A sample Tax Information form is included at the end of this section. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 -3 COST ESTIMATE: TYKWWA ARCHITECT: LOCATION: 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH CONSULTANT: WTA, Inc. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON CONTRACTOR: PROJECT DESCRIPTION: EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT DIVISION: WTA 08093 PROJECT ENGINEER: LISA DAVIE Bid Date: Location Code: New Area: Work Order No.: Remodeled Area: No. of New Lines: Size of EGEN: Type of Equipment: Size of Service: Cost of EGEN & XFER: DIVISION 1 - General Conditions Insurance, Bonds, Permits DIVISIONS 2 & 3 - Sitework Earthwork and Soil Poisoning Drilled Piers Cable Vault Foundation Site Concrete Paving . Fencing DIVISION 4 - Masonry DIVISION 5 - Structural Steel Miscellaneous Metals DIVISION 6 - Carpentry DIVISION 7 - Roof System Waterproofing and Sealants DIVISION 8 - Doors, Windows, and Frames Hardware and Weatherstripping DIVISION 9 - Ceiling, Drywall, Insulation Vinyl Tile and Base Access Flooring 1 of 2 Painting DIVISION 10 - Specialties GT -80 PVC Conduit Security System Fire Detection System Fire Suppression System DIVISION 15 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Heating and Ventilating - Emergency Generator. Plumbing Plumbing - Emergency Generator Fuel System Fuel Monitoring System DIVISION 16 - Electrical Electrical - Emergency Generator or Receptacle Alarm System . Grounding System Remodel Repair Work (R121) Relocation of Existing (M121) Demolition and Dustproofing (X121) DC POWER PLANT AND FRAME WORK TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COST Contractor's Profit and Overhead ( %) Tax Architect's Fee ( %) TOTAL COST Construction Cost Per Square Foot TOTAL CONSTRUCTION TIME IN DAYS 2 of 2 VERIZON BUSINESS EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA WTA 08093 CONTRACTORS PROJECTED SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS (TO BE SUBMITTED WITH COST BREAKDOWN AND CONTRACTS) MARCH 2009 ($ dollars) APRIL 2009 ($ dollars) MAY 2009 ($ dollars) JUNE 2009 ($ dollars) JULY 2009 ($ dollars) AUGUST 2009 ($ dollars) OWNER: VERIZON Business BUILDING: EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT LOCATED AT: 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON We, , as General Contractor on the above building, do hereby guarantee that for a period of one (1) year from , 20_, the above work will be, and will remain free from all defects in workmanship and materials, and that it will comply with all the specific requirements of the specifications and other Contract Documents which govern the work under our Contract for the above building. It is further understood and agreed that, if any of the above work becomes defective during this one (1) year period, we will, at our expense, repair such work to the complete satisfaction of the Owner, or, if necessary, we will remove such defective work and replace it with new work meeting all requirements of the Plans and Specifications, and will bear all costs of supplying such new work, and installing and finishing same, and will assume all costs for replacing other work damaged by the removal and replacement of any defective work, including all costs for freight, drayage, and all labor in connection therewith. General Contractor GENERAL CONTRACTOR , 20 By Address 21. Bldg Dept Filing & Plan Approval / Work Permits (Permits & Inspections — City) 2009 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WA FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA WTA PROJECT 08093 1. Chilled Water System Balance Reports ❑ 2. Boiler Inspection / Sign Off N/A 3. Engine Generator Test Report N/A 4. Equipment Start -up / Testing ❑ 5. Site Survey N/A 6. Laminated / Framed Seq. of Operation N/A 7. Laminated / Framed Valve Charts N/A 8. Sprinkler / Suppression System Approval N/A 9. As -Built Drawings ❑ 10. Attic Stock (Signed Inventory Sheet) N/A 11. CAD Files on Disk ❑ 12. Operations / Maintenance Manuals ❑ 13. Project Directory ❑ 14. Punch List & Sign -Off ❑ 15. Final Release / Waiver of Liens ❑ 16. Shop Drawings & Submittal ❑ 17. Training Session & Signature (from Customer) N/A 18. Warranties / Guaranties ❑ 19. Environmental Filings / Permits ❑ 20. Bldg Dept Demolition Sign -Off (City) N/A 0 22. Technical Reports / Controlled Inspection ❑ (Field Reports) 23. Electrical Panel Index Cards Updated 24. Electrical Single Line Drawing 25. Sign -Off by Property Manager 26. Letter of Completion 27. Date Retainage Released to General Contractor 28. Copy of PO — DP (WTA) 29. Copy of PO — Contractor 30. Copy of Invoices — DP (WTA) 31. Copy of Bids 32. Contractor Certificate of Insurance 33. Copy of Invoices — Contractor 34. Approval for Change Orders 35. Change Orders 36. Retirement Document 37. Certificate of Occupancy (City) 0 ❑ PAGE 1 OF 2 v ie 7 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT ' FAILURE TO COMPLETE THIS DOCUMENT OR OMIT REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS MAY RESULT IN CERTIFICATE REJECTION WHICH MAY DELAY PAYMENT UNTIL NEXT BILLING CYCLE UNDER NO FAULT OF VERIZON OR DP CONTRACT /PO NUMBER: DATED: I BUILDING NAME: GLC / ID NUMBER: CONTRACT START DATE: PROJECT COMPLETE DATE: CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: ' AFFIDAVIT OF BILLS PAID FOR THIS CERTIFICATE ATTACHED: YES / NO (CIRCLE ONE ) FINAL AFFIDAVIT OF BILLS PAID ATTACHED: YES / NO (CIRCLE ONE ) PAGE 1 A: ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM $ B: NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDER $ C: CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (A +B) $ INCLUDE LINE C ON PAGE 1 OF THIS CERTIFICATE D: COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE $ ATTACH AIA G703 CONTINUATION SHEET IF APPLICABLE (SUBSCRIBED SERVICE) OR SIMILAR CONTRACTORS DETAILED BREAKDOWN DOCUMENT E: LESS RETAINAGE ( 10 %) $ F: TOTAL TO BE DRAWN TO DATE ( D -E) $ G: PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES' $ H: AMOUNT OF THIS CERTIFICATE ( F -G) $ INCLUDE LINE H ON PAGE 1 OF THIS CERTIFICATE I: TOTAL REMAINING AFTER THIS CERTIFICATE , INC RETAINAGE (C -D) $ J: AMOUNT INCLUDED IN THIS CERTIFICATE TO BE PAID AS TAXES $ SUMMARY OF CHANGE ORDERS: CO NO: APPROVED ADD /DEDUCT $ CO NO : APPROVED ADD / DEDUCT $ CO NO : APPROVED ADD / DEDUCT $ CO NO : APPROVED ADD / DEDUCT $ CO NO : APPROVED ADD / DEDUCT $ CO NO: APPROVED ADD /DEDUCT $ CO NO: APPROVED ADD /DEDUCT $ The undersigned Contractor certifies to the best of the Contractors knowledge, information and belief the work covered by this application for payment has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and the amounts shown on this document are now due. CONTRACTOR: BY: DATE: VERIZON BUSINESS APPROVED BY: TITLE: DATE: SUMMARY PAGE 2 TOTAL $ In accordance with the contract documents, based on site observations and the data comprising this application, WTA certifies to Verizon Business that to the bestof the DP's knowledge, information and belief the work has progressed as indicated, and that amounts indicated on this document are due the Contractor. WTA, Inc. BY: DATE: NOTES: PAGE 2 OF 2 VERIZON Business has requested that an attachment accompany all Certificates for Payment indicating how much Sales Tax is included in each Certificate. Tax shall be included on the Certificate as normally submitted. As an aid, this form may be attached to your Certificates for Payment and submitted for processing. WTA 08093 EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA DATE: CERTIFICATE NO. TAX INFORMATION (TO BE SUBMITTED WITH CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT) TAX INCLUDED IN THIS CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT: Contractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to unconditionally and forever release and discharge, and to indemnify, defend and hold harmless, Owner and its agents, employees, representatives and affiliates from and against any and all costs, losses, damages, claims, actions, or causes of action against them arising out of or relating to Contractor's performance of the Work, except for claims arising out of the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the party indemnified or held harmless. By: PARTIAL WAIVER AND RELEASE BY CONTRACTOR UPON PAYMENT EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA CONTRACTOR Name Title State of County of ) On the day of in the year 20 before me, the undersigned, a notary public in and for said state, personally appeared personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to this instrument and acknowledged to me that he /she /they executed the same in his /her /their capacity(ies), and that by his /her /their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. Notary Public ss: 2 1 Contractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to unconditionally and forever release and discharge, and to indemnify, defend and hold harmless, Owner and its agents, employees, representatives and affiliates from and against any and all costs, losses, damages, claims, actions, or causes of action against them arising out of or relating to Contractor's performance of the Work, except for claims arising out of the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the party indemnified or held harmless. By: State of FINAL WAIVER AND RELEASE BY CONTRACTOR UPON PAYMENT EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA CONTRACTOR Name Title County of ) On the day of in the year 20 before me, the undersigned, a notary public in and for said state, personally appeared personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to this instrument and acknowledged to me that he /she /they executed the same in his /her /their capacity(ies), and that by his /her /their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. Notary Public ss: 2 OWNER's Project No. ENGINEER's Project No. 08093 This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: To And To CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Project EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH in TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Plans and specifications dated , including addendums and change orders to contract up to the date of Substantial Completion. OWNER CONTRACTOR The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents on Date of Substantial Completion A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all- inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When this Certificate applies to a specified part of the Work the items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within _ days of the above date of Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion is the date upon which all guarantees and warranties begin, except as follows: The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance shall be as follows: RESPONSIBILITIES: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: Refer to attached Field Report prepared at the jobsite during project observation on date of this Certificate of Substantial Completion. Executed by ENGINEER on , 20 By Approved by OWNER on , 20 OWNER By The CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on , 20 By ENGINEER CONTRACTOR END OF SECTION 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES: 1.05 TIME OF COMPLETION: SUMMARY OF WORK WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Work of this project is comprised of the .PREMIUM DATA CENTER BUILDOUT at 2222 GRAUWYLER ROAD, IRVING, TEXAS for VERIZON BUSINESS (WTA 07043). 1. Additional requirements of all Parties to Contract: Conditions of the Contract. 1.02 CONTRACTS: A. Perform Work under single Contract as designated in Owner- Contractor Agreement. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS: A. Work on Project which has been executed prior to start of Work of this Contract, and which is excluded from this Contract. A. Contractor shall not have complete and exclusive use of premises for execution of Work. If necessary, the Contractor shall make arrangements for off -site construction personnel parking and material storage, and shall include these costs in the bid proposal. The Contractor shall cooperate with local VERIZON BUSINESS personnel to make certain there are no obstructions to telephone services. B. The General Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract; stored on or off the site. A. The Contractor shall begin his work immediately upon his receipt of his Notice to Proceed and shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion on or before OCTOBER 31, 2007. He (and his Subcontractors) shall work multi -shift days, weekends, holidays, as required to meet the completion dates. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -1 CUTTING AND PATCHING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Execute cutting including excavating, fitting or patching of work required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Provide routine penetrations of non - structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit written request well in advance of executing cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 2. Structural integrity of project. 3. Integrity of effectiveness of weather- exposed or moisture- resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight- exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. Identification of project. 2. Description of work affected. 3. Necessity for cutting or patching. 4. Effect of cutting or patching on work of Owner or separate Contractor, or on structural, weatherproof or visual integrity of project. CUTTING AND PATCH[NTG 01045 -1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 5. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting and patching. b. Contractor and trades to execute Work. c. Products exposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing. 6. Alternate to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, if applicable. 8. Written permission of separate Contractor whose work will be affected. C. If conditions of work or schedule necessitate a change of material from that originally installed, submit written request in accordance with General Conditions. D. Submit written notice to Consultant designating time Work will be uncovered, to provide for observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: For replacement of Work removed, comply with specifications for type of work to be done. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products or performance of work. 3.02 PREPARATION: Prior to Cutting: A. Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of Project. B. Provide protection for other portions of Project. C. Provide protection from elements. CUTTING AND PATCHINTG 01045 -2 3.03 PERFORMANCE: A. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances, and finishes. B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which prevent damage to other Work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new Work. C. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent damage to other Work, and will prevent settlement. D. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 1. Weather- exposed or moisture- resistant elements. 2. Sight - exposed finished surfaces. E. Restore Work which has been cut or removed; install new projects to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish: 1. Continuous surfaces: to nearest intersections. 2. Assembly: entire refinishing. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHINTG 01045 -3 1.01 GENERAL: REFERENCE STANDARDS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Various sections of specifications contain references to specific standards. Applicable portions of standards listed that are not in conflict with specification requirements are hereby made a part of Contract Documents. B. Modifications and exceptions to standards, or between specifications and standards, most stringent requirement shall govern. C. In case of conflict between standards, or between specifications and standards, most stringent shall govern. D. Editions of standards shall be latest edition at time of bid opening, or contract award, as applicable, including any supplements or amendments thereto. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS: A. Reference standards are listed in various sections using abbreviations contained below. B. Following schedule is partial; additional abbreviations and standards may appear in various sections and all abbreviations and standards may not appear. AA Aluminum Association AASHO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association APA Architectural Precast Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute BIA Brick Institute of America BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission CRA California Redwood Association CTI Ceramic Tile Institute REFERERENCED STANDARDS 01090 -1 END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA CLFMA Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute FM Factory Mutual System FS Federal Specifications FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association MIL Military Specifications NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEPA National Fire Protection Association NPCA National Precast Concrete Association OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Act PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast Concrete Institute PS US Product Standard SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute TCA Tile Council of America UL Underwriters Laboratories WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Association WOOJ Work Out On Job REFERERENCED STANDARDS 01090 -2 1.01 GENERAL: PROJECT MEETINGS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Contractor shall: 1. Attend a Pre - Construction Conference and progress meetings. 2. Make physical arrangements for meetings; notify all involved parties at least 4 days in advance. 3. Record significant proceedings and decisions at each meeting; reproduce and distribute copies to all parties in attendance. 1.02 PRE- CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: A. Schedule as near as possible to the date for the Notice to Proceed at the jobsite. B. Attendance: 1. Engineer and his principal consultants. 2. Owner. 3. General Contractor and job superintendent. 4. Major Subcontractors and suppliers, including: a. Electrical. b. Mechanical C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Distribute and discuss: a. List of major Subcontractors and suppliers. b. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical Work sequencing. 3. Relation and coordination of Subcontractors. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 -1 5. Processing of: a. Change Orders. b. Other modifications to Contract. c. Proposal Requests. d. Submittals. e. Applications for Payment. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Use of Premises: a. Office and Storage Areas. b. Owner's requirements. 8. Procedures for maintaining post - construction submittals: a. Project record documents. b. Operation and Maintenance Data. c. Warranties. 9. Construction facilities and temporary controls. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA a. The General Contractor to construct required dustproofing partition(s) and then obtain approval of the adequacy of the partition from the Central Office Supervisor and the VERIZON Business Regional Facilities Engineering and Construction Project Engineer. b. The partition(s) shall remain in place in a condition satisfactory to the site Supervisor ". c. The partition(s) shall only be removed after the General Contractor obtains permission from the site Supervisor and the VERIZON Business Regional Facilities Engineering and Construction Project Engineer. d. It is emphasized that there will be no smoking in the new construction areas as well as the existing building. e. Details regarding schematic diagrams for wiring and piping will be reviewed. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 -2 END OF SECTION f. It will be noted that when air conditioning, electrical control, or related work is to be performed, the consulting HVAC Engineer will be notified in advance in order to be present on a full time basis to assure proper system operations. g. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A list of project meeting attendees will be made and telephone numbers shall be recorded for their use during construction. h. Minutes of the project meetings are to be issued to all participants. 10. Security procedures. 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS: A. Schedule periodic progress meetings, as required. B. Location: Contractor's project field office. C. Attendance: 1. Engineer and his consultants as required. 2. Contractor and job superintendent. 3. Subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to agenda. 4. Others as required. D. Agenda: 1. Review work progress since previous meetings, including: a. Field observations, conflicts and problems. b. Construction Schedule and completion date. 2. Discuss and take corrective measures as appropriate to maintain quality standards, construction schedule and completion date. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 -3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.01 GENERAL: A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 01200, Project Meetings. 2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Provide projected construction schedules for entire Work with sub - schedules of related activities as appropriate. 1.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES: A. Prepare schedules in form of horizontal bar chart: 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operations. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week. 3. Allow space for notations and future revisions. 13. Order: Chronological order beginning of each item of Work. C. Marking: Identify each item referenced by major specification section number. 1.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES: A. Construction progress schedule: 1. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 3. Identify work for separate phases or other logically grouped activities. 4. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of Work as of first day of each month. 5. Include signed and dated copies of Schedule or letter from applicable Subcontractors indicating their review and acceptance of schedule and ability to perform work in time stated. 6. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -1 a. Submittal dates. b. Dates reviewed copies will be required. 7. Decision dates for: a. Selection of finishes. 1.04 UPDATING: A. Show changes occurring since previous submission. B. Indicate progress of each activity, with completion dates. C. Include: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous updating. 3. Revised projections due to changes. 4. Other identifiable changes. D. When appropriate, provide narrative report, including: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 1. Discussion of problem areas, including current and anticipated delay factors, and their impact. 2. Corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect. 3. Description of revisions. a. Effect on schedule due to change of scope. b. Revisions in duration of activities. c. Other changes that may affect schedule. 1.05 SUBMISSIONS: A. Submit initial schedules at Progress Meeting. 1. Consultant will review schedules and return reviewed copy within ten days after receipt. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -2 2. If required, resubmit within seven days after return of reviewed copy. B. Submit updated schedules along with each application for payment. C. Submit the number of copies required by Contractor, plus two copies to be retained by Consultant. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION: A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to: 1. Jobsite file. 2. Consultant. 3. Subcontractors. 4. Other concerned parties. END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Section 01200, Project Meetings. B. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Present in clear and thorough manner. B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers or room number shown on Drawings. C. Maximum Sheet Size: 30" high x 42" wide. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA: A. Preparation: (1) Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. (2) Show performance characteristics and capacities. (3) Show dimensions and clearances required. (4) Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: (1) 1.04 SAMPLES: Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to Work. (2) Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to work. A. Office samples: sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: (1) Functional characteristics of product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. (2) Full range of color, texture and pattern. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 -1 A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples sufficiently in advance of time returned copies are required to allow review by Consultant and resubmittal, if required. B. Field Samples and Mock -Ups: (1) Erect at site at location acceptable to Consultant. (2) Construct complete, including work of related trades required in finished work. (3) Remove a conclusion of work or when acceptable to Consultant. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. B. Verify: Field measurements, construction criteria, catalog numbers and similar data. C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. D. Submit to Consultant in accordance with provisions contained herein. E. Contractor's responsibility for errors or omissions is not relieved by Consultant's review. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA F. Contractor's responsibility for deviations from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant review, unless Consultant is notified of deviations in writing at time of submittal and gives written acceptance of specific deviations. G. Do not begin work which requires submittals until approved submittals have been received from Consultant. H. Reproduce and distribute copies after Consultant's review. 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: B. Number of Copies Required. (1) Shop Drawings: One reproducible transparency with two direct diazo prints each. (2) Product Data: Two copies for Consultant's use plus additional copies as Contractor needs. (3) C. Submittals shall contain: Samples: As required in each specification section. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 -2 E. Affix stamp and initials indicating date and action taken. F. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA (1) Date of submission, including previous submissions, if any. (2) Project title and number. (3) Names of Contractor, supplier and manufacturer. (4) Identification of product, with specification section number where applicable. (5) Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. (6) Relation to adjacent or critical features of work or materials. (7) Applicable reference standards. (8) Identification of deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. (9) Identification of revisions on resubmittals. (10) Space for Consultant, Architect and Contractor stamps. (11) Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying to review of submittals, verification of products, field measurements and construction criteria, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of work and Contract Documents. 1.07 RESUBMISSION: A. Revise submittals as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by Consultant. 1.08 CONSULTANT 'S /ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. B. Review for conformance with design concept of project and information given in Contract Documents. C. Consultant is not responsible for verification of field measurements, construction criteria, catalog numbers and other similar data. D. Review of separate item does not constitute review of an assembly in which item functions. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 -3 1.09 DISTRIBUTION: A. Distribute reviewed copies to Contractor's file, jobsite file, Project Record Document file, and Subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, and other parties as required. END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 -4 1.01 GENERAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Submit to Consultant for review and approval the completed form as indicated below prior to the initial request for payment. B. Upon request of Consultant, furnish additional data to support values given with data that will substantiate their correctness. C. Approved schedule will be used as basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. 1.02 A. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on AIA Form G702A, "Continuation Sheet" of Application and Certificate for Payment. B. Use Table of Contents of this Project Manual as basis of format for listing costs of work for sections under Divisions 2 -16. C. Identify each line item with number and title as listed in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. D. Schedule shall list installed value of component parts of work in sufficient detail to serve as basis for computing values for progress payments. E. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. For items on which progress payments will be requested of stored materials, break down value into: 1. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. 2. Total installed value. G. For each line item which has installed value of more than $20,000, break down costs to list major products of operations under each item. H. Sum of total costs of all items listed in Schedule shall equal total Contract Sum. 1.03 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL A. After review by Consultant, revise and resubmit Schedule if required. B. Resubmit revised Schedule in same manner. END OF SECTION SCHEDULES OF VALUES 01370 -1 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Description: Contractor to adhere to the following general guidelines and requirements when completing work at or on any Verizon Business equipment site. Other rules pertaining to specific work disciplines or specific building areas and systems will be provided, as required, by the local Verison Business Regional Operations Manager or Project Engineer. 1.2 General: All contractors are expected to use common sense in determining the safest and least disruptive method to perform the work. Contractor shall utilize expertise and experience of Verizon Business Operations Managers and Project Engineers to assist in confirming most appropriate method of implementation. 1.3 Method of Procedure (MOP): Contractor shall provide a detailed list of all activities to be occurring within the equipment space, in ancillary equipment space and/or on services such as electrical systems that could impact the equipments operations or the equipments infrastructure such as the HVAC and fire suppressions systems. 1.4 This list must not only a brief description of the work to be completed but also the anticipated start time, completion time and precautionary actions being taken to insure that risk to equipment is minimized. 1.5 This list must be submitted for approval of both the Verizon Business Project Engineer and Regional Operations Manager prior to construction work. Contractor to request Verison Business representatives to indicate on this list all Maintenance Window activities that are to be performed during the Maintenance Work Window. Under no circumstances can any work be started in the locations noted without this written approval on file. 1.6 Maintenance Window: Any work that is determined by the Verizon Business Project Engineer and/or Regional Operations Manager to be high -risk will be performed during Verizon Business standard maintenance window. This work typically is completed after - hours, specifics times will be established upon submission and acceptance of MOP. Some examples of Maintenance Window work include: 1. Any work being completed that requires activities in close proximity to the switch itself. 2. All electrical work that affects the power supplied to the switch or its environmental support system. 1.7 Emergency Situations: It is the contractor's responsibility to immediately contact the Project engineer and local Operations Manager in the event that any activity has directly impacted the switch or has created a suspect situation where an activity may have or could possibly affect the switch integrity. END OF SECTION 01410 METHOD OF PROCEDURE WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA METHOD OF PROCEDURE 01410.1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED: SUPERVISION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. The General Contractor shall include in the bid proposal the employment and assignment to the project of a full time working construction superintendent. B. The General Contractor shall require the construction superintendent to be present at the jobsite and to supervise construction when any trades are on site and working. C. The General Contractor shall require the construction superintendent to be present at the Pre - Construction Conference, and during inspections. 2.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Section 01010 - Summary of the Work. B. Section 01200 - Project Meetings. C. Section 01310 - Construction Schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURES: A. The Job Superintendent shall be a person with demonstrated expertise in construction supervision. Should the job superintendent not perform the required supervision properly, then a new job superintendent shall be employed as a replacement. B. It is desirable to employ an individual which is familiar with the demands of construction work related to the communications business. C. The job superintendent shall be responsible for the direct supervision and inspection of work performed by all Subcontractors on the project. It is expected that quality workmanship and materials are used during construction and that the job superintendent will assure that the work meets requirements of the contract documents. D. The job superintendent shall take special care to observe work relating to the following items: (1) Make arrangements to maintain the progress of the work to meet the construction schedule. SUPERVISION 01510 -1 1.05 SECURITY: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA (2) Make arrangements to maintain the progress of the work to meet the construction schedule. (3) Make arrangements to provide for dust control where existing telephone equipment is present. (4) Make arrangements to work with the local VERIZON BUSINESS representative for power cut overs and other related concerns. (5) Document with the assistance of the local VERIZON BUSINESS representative the exact location of all underground utilities and especially the underground telephone cables. (6) Make arrangements to properly notify the Consultants office m advance to allow for the scheduling of an inspection trip. (7) Make certain that any approved construction related changes or modifications are documents on the jobsite copy of plans. Make certain that complete sets of plans, specifications, shop drawings, product literature, change orders, etc., are at the jobsite. (8) The job superintendent shall make a punch list of final inspection items and shall have all items corrected prior to notifying the Consultant/Owner of the need for a final building inspection. (9) Make certain that all applicable safety standards are observed and that a first aid kit is on the jobsite and accessible at all times. (10) Make certain that all necessary fire safety precautions are taken to prevent the possibility of fire. (11) The job superintendent shall read all plans and specifications including the mechanical and electrical sections prior to the start of any on site work. 1.04 CERTIFICATIONS AND WARRANTIES: A. The job superintendent shall require the Subcontractors to submit required certificates, warranties, maintenance and operations manuals together with items required of the General Contractor considered as the "Owner's Records ". Final payment will not be made until this requirement is met. B. The job superintendent shall make certain that work by one trade which interfaces with another trade is properly coordinated. A. The job superintendent shall make certain that a list of names together with corresponding social security numbers of all "on- site" construction related personnel is submitted to SUPERVISION 01510 -2 B. The job superintendent shall take precautions to secure any openings where existing buildings are involved at the end of each workday. C. The job superintendent shall permit only authorized persons to be present at the jobsite. END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA VERIZON BUSINESS Regional Facilities Engineering and Construction- Texas. VERIZON BUSINESS Regional Facilities Engineering and Construction -Texas will issue red security badges which shall be worn by each individual while on the jobsite. The job superintendent shall collect all issued and non - issued and return them to VERIZON BUSINESS at the end of the project. SUPERVISION 01510 -3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL: A. Materials and equipment incorporated into Work: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Consultant. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacturer like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. c. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, by same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 4. Do not use materials or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 1.02 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS: A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation, including two copies to Consultant. B. Maintain one set of complete instructions at jobsite during installation and until completion. C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Consultant for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. D. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING: A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. B. Exterior Storage. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 1. Store fabricated products above ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store loose granular materials in well- drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -2 D. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. END OF SECTION from damage or deterioration. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PROJECT OPTIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 1.01 CONTRACTORS OPTION: A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any named. C. For products specified by naming one or more products, followed by "or equal ", Contractor must submit request for substitution for any product not specifically named D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Within 30 days after award of Contract, Consultant will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. B. Submit five copies of each request for substitution, including: (1) (1) Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. (2) For products: a. Product identification, including name and address of manufacturer. b. Product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. (3) For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Illustrations drawings. C. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents that: He has investigated proposed substitution and determined that it is equal or superior to that specified in all aspects. (2) He will provide same warranty as for product or method specified. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PROJECT OPTIONS 01630 -1 END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA (3) He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making changes as may be required to complete Work in all aspects. (4) He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution, which subsequently becomes apparent. (5) Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under Contract, excluding Consultant's redesign. D. Substitutions will not be considered if: (1) They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or data submittals without formal request. (2) Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. E. Contractor alone shall be responsible for substantiating acceptability of proposed substitutions. Consultant's decision in acceptance or non - acceptance of substitutions shall be final. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PROJECT OPTIONS 01630 -2 CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Cleaning for Specific Products of Work: Specification Section for that Work. 1.02 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: A. Maintain project in accord with laws, ordinances and rules of legal regulatory agencies. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. Execute cleaning to insure that building, grounds, adjacent private property, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. C. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue vacuum cleaning on an as- needed basis until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy. D. Schedule cleaning operation so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING: A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaner, for final cleaning. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA B. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight- exposed interior and exterior finishes; polish surfaces so designated to shine finish. C. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. CLEANING 01710 -1 D. HVAC System: (1) E. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner. END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Under no circumstances shall the HVAC systems be operated without filters in place. (2) The HVAC Contractor shall install an additional temporary fiberglass filter media over the unit (which contains the required filters) on the initial unit "start -up ". Prior to the final inspection, remove the temporary filter and change to new permanent filters. F. At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials and clean sight- exposed surfaces; leave project clean and ready for occupancy. CLEANING 01710 -2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.01 GENERAL: A. Maintain at jobsite for Owner one record copy of: (1) Drawings. (2) Specifications. (3) Addenda. (4) Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. (5) Change Orders. (6) Other modifications to Contract. (7) Field Test Records. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Store documents in secure location in Contractor's Field Office, apart from documents used for construction. B. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition and in good order; do not use for construction purposes. C. Make documents available to inspection by Consultant and Owner at all times. 1.03 RECORDING: A. Label each document "Project Record Documents ", in stamped or printed letters, on front, cover or other conspicuous place. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. C. Legibly mark to record actual construction as follows: (1) Drawings: a. Location of underground utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. b. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 01720 -1 1.04 SUBMITTAL: END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA c. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Changes made by Change Order or other modification. e. Details not on original Contract Documents. (2) Specifications and Addenda: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. b. Changes made by Change Order or other modification. c. Other matters not originally specified. (3) Incorporate the above items onto reproducible "Project Record Document" sepias. Refer to Article 39 of the Special Conditions. A. Upon completion of job, submit to Consultant for presentation to Owner. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS 01720 -2 1.01 GENERAL: A. Compile specified warranties and certificates of compliance. B. Review to verify compliance with Contract Documents. C. Submit to Consultant for review and transmittal to Owner. D. Related Requirements in Other Parts of the Project Manual: (1) (2) Individual specification sections. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES General Warranty of Construction: Conditions of the Contract. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Assemble warranties and certificates executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and Subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: Four (4) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. D. Provide complete information for each item. (1) Name and location of project. (2) Name and address of Contractor. (3) Product of work item. (4) Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. (5) Scope. (6) Warranties: a. Date of beginning and duration of warranty. b. Provide information for Owner's personnel: 1. Proper procedure in case of failure. 2. Instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond. WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES 01740 -1 (7) 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS: For certificates of compliance: a. Quantity and date of shipment. c. Signature of officer of company. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA b. Test attesting that materials incorporated into Work comply with specified requirements. Certification shall not be construed as relieving Contractor from furnishing satisfactory materials, if material is found to not meet specified requirements. d. Laboratory test reports submitted with certificates of compliance shall show date or dates of testing, specified requirements for which testing was performed and results of test or tests. A. Prepare and submit four (4) sets. B. Format: (1) Size 8 -1/2 inc x 11 in., punch sheets for 3 ring binder; fold larger sheets to fit into binders. (2) Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES ". List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. C. Binders: Commercial quality, three -ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS: A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and acceptance. B. Otherwise make submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Request for Payment. C. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal with 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of the warranty period. WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES 01740 -2 1.05 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED: A. Submit warranties, as specified in the respective sections of the Specifications. END OF SECTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES 01740 -3 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: MINOR DEMOLITION FOR RENOVATIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Remove designated fixtures, existing construction and equipment. B. Cap and identify with markers and exposed designed utilities. C. Provide temporary partition(s) to allow for continued building occupancy by Owner. D. Refer to Plans for Demolition Removal. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. General Conditions and Special Conditions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Obtain required demolition permits and utility service arrangements. B. Obtain required permits for transport and disposal of debris. C. Review anticipated demolition procedures and operational sequence with Consultant prior to start of work. 1.04 PROTECTION: A. Avoid interference with adjacent spaces not included in the work areas. B. Maintain free passage to all exits. C. Provide and erect barricades, lighting, and guardrails as required to protect building occupants and construction workers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Except where noted otherwise, maintain possession of materials being demolished and remove from the site. B. Carefully remove, store, and protect for re- installation, items where indicated on the drawings. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR RENOVATIONS 02072 -1 C. Materials to be removed from the site shall be disposed of in a legal manner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Where required, erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. B. Maintain exit requirements. C. Where required, install guardrails and protective devices at openings. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA D. Provide dry chemical fire extinguishers at convenient locations for fire protection during construction. Remove extinguishers at the end of construction. E. Erect and maintain dust proof partitions as required to prevent the spread of dust, fumes, and smoke to other parts of the building. Upon completion of the project, remove partitions and repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.02 DEMOLITION: A. Perform demolition in accordance with applicable authorities having jurisdiction. B. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no cost to the Owner. C. Burning of materials on site is not permitted. D. Remove tools and materials from the site upon completion of the work and leave the area clean and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant. END OF SECTION MINOR DEMOLITION FOR RENOVATIONS 02072 -2 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: DUST CONTROL B. Remove dust control walls at the end of the work. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA A. Furnish labor and materials as required to install temporary dust control walls. Provide regular and periodic dust clean up using approved equipment as necessary to maintain a dust free environment for the telephone equipment. C. Thoroughly clean during and after the removal of the dust control construction to leave the area free of dust. D. Submit complete data on the type of dust control construction proposed for use on the project. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Section 01200: Project Meetings. B. Section 02072: Minor Demolition for Renovation. C. General Conditions and Special Conditions. 1.03 PROTECTION: A. Install dust control construction to avoid damage to adjacent building elements and equipment. B. Provide and place proper bracing or shoring and be responsible for the safe support of the dust control construction. C. Arrange for safe access to the construction areas separated by the dust control construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide submittals for Consultant review and approval; comply with the provisions indicated in Section 01340. B. Indicate provisions for installation, maintenance and removal of the dust control construction. DUST CONTROL 02073 -1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Fumish and install dust control materials which are free of dust or other matter which could damage the telephone equipment. B. It is the intent of the scope of the work for dust control to allow the Contractor to propose the best type of dust control construction for the most economical cost and meet the provisions of this section. C. The Contractor shall use non - combustible materials. D. Reinforced plastic membrane: Furnish and install plastic film equal to GRIFFOLYN T 55 FR by Reef Industries, Houston, Texas, Phone (800) 231 -6074. Install plastic membrane with tape recommended for splicing membrane joints and as recommended for attachment to dissimilar materials. E. Furnish to the jobsite a commercial vacuum unit. Maintain the unit at the jobsite on a full time basis. Use the vacuum to not only clean up during regular maintenance clean up but during any drilling activity inside the building. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Provide for proper preparation of surfaces to receive the anticipated dust control construction at locations approved by the Consultant and Owner. B. Repair areas damaged by the removal of dust control construction. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA C. Furnish and install tape covering at pipe, conduit, and duct penetrations as required to dust proof the migration of dust to the telephone equipment. D. Schedule work on the installation, use, and the removal of dust control construction as necessary to provide for dust control, throughout the construction work by all trades. E. Coordinate access to the areas of the building affected by the construction with VERIZON Security personnel. Do not allow unauthorized persons access to the construction areas. END OF SECTION DUST CONTROL 02073 -2 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. General building insulation. 2. Firesafing insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Sections "Duct Insulation ", and "Pipe Insulation ". WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test - response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface - Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 07210 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Sound Batt Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. 2. Slag -Wool- /Rock -Wool -Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. b. Owens Corning. c. Thermafiber. 3. Foil Faced Shielding Barrier: a. Howmet Aluminum Corp. — Aluminum foil face kraft paper b. Metal Building Supply — FSK vapor barrier (Foil Scrim Kraft) c. Aluminum FSK pressure sensitive tape by Ideal or approved equal. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb /cu. ft. (26 kg /cu. m), unless otherwise indicated. B. Unfaced mineral -fiber batt insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool for use as general building insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket insulation for firesafing: ASTM C 665, Type I; consisting of fibers manufactured from rock wool; with maximum flame - spread and smoke- developed indices of 5 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 07210 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations, including removing projec- tions capable of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. E. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 07210 - 3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION A. Install mineral wool safing insulation to fill gap between top of partition walls and bottom of roof structure as indicated by tightly packing. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and roof structure with fire resistive caulking approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. B. Install mineral wool safing insulation at control joints in interior partitions as indicated. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit. Leave no voids in completed installation. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FOIL FACED SHIELDING BARRIER A. Install aluminum faced Kraft paper horizontally over floor slab and under roof sheathing 36" into new equipment room space. Lap behind foil faced G.W.B. 6" minimum. Tape all joints for a positive barrier. Tape all tears or damaged areas to maintain a positive shielding barrier. B. If foil faced G.W.B. is not available (refer to Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09260), install aluminum faced Kraft paper completely over the first layer of the double layered G.W.B. partition on the inside equipment room side of wall. Lap all joints (horizontally and vertically) by 6" to insure a completely shielded environment. Tape all joints, tears or damaged areas to maintain barrier. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210 - 4 SECTION 07841 - THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through - penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire- resistance -rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Roofs. 2. Walls and partitions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories. 2. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 3. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For the following constructions, provide through - penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire - resistance -rated load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire - protection -rated openings. 2. Fire - resistance -rated non -load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire - protection -rated openings. 3. Fire - resistance -rated roof assemblies. B. F -Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire- resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through - penetration firestop systems with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 07841- 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire- protection -rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross - sectional area. D. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant through - penetration firestop systems. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. E. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame - spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke - developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of through - penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through - penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through - penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through - penetration firestop systems, for each category of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency 07841 -2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA performing testing and follow -up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through - penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1.7 COORDINATION a. Through - penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through - penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through - penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) ITS in "Directory of Listed Products." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through - penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through - penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through - penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through - penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through - penetration firestop systems per manufacturers written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 07841- 3 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through - penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core - drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through - penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through - penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through - penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through - penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by the following manufacturer and as indicated on Drawings: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. No Exceptions 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through - penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through - penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 07841- 4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag- /rock - wool -fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming /backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 07841- 5 2.3 FILL MATERIALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide through - penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated below, as required by the UL design. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. 13. Cast -in -Place Firestop Devices: Factory- assembled devices for use in cast -in -place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. C. Latex Sealants: Single- component latex formulations that after cure do not re- emulsify during exposure to moisture. D. Firestop Devices: Factory- assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum - foil -faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water - resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single- component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. I. Pillows /Bags: Reusable, heat - expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral - fiber, water - insoluble expansion agents and fire - retardant additives. J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture- curing, single- component, silicone- based, neutral - curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self - leveling) formulation for openings in floors, roofs and other horizontal surfaces. 2. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 07841 - 6 2.4 MIXING WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through - penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through - penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through - penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through - penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through - penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. 07841- 7 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through - penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through - penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing through - penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued. C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through - penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through - penetration firestop systems with pressure- sensitive, self - adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated 07841 -8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning -- Through - Penetration Firestop System - -Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through - penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through - penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through - penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through - penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through - penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through - penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 07841- 9 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. c. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. 4. Other joints as indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire- Resistive Joint Systems" for fire- resistant building joint- sealant systems. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants for exterior and interior applications that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 07920 - 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint - sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint - sealant installations with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36 -month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in "Project Management and Coordination ". 07920 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. 13. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint - Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 07920 - 3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color pallet. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid - applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint - Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Stain - Test - Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint - Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 2.4 SOLVENT - RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic -Based Solvent - Release Joint- Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1311 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent - Release Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Acrylic -Based Solvent - Release Joint - Sealant Standard: Comply with FS TT -S- 00230 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent - Release Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. C. Butyl- Rubber -Based Solvent - Release Joint - Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent - Release Joint- Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. D. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: For each product of this description indicated in the Solvent - Release Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 provide manufacturer's standard, solvent - release- curing, pigmented, synthetic - rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3; 16 inch (5mm) or smaller in width. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone- Sealant System: For each product of this description indicated in the Preformed Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low- modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral -curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. B. Preformed Foam Sealants: For each product of this description indicated in the Preformed Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated, open -cell foam sealant manufactured from high- density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water - repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following: 1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Backing: Pressure - sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping. 2.7 JOINT - SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C: Closed -cell material with a surface skin. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. 07920 - 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint - filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, 07920 - 6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant - substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 07920 - 7 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 07920 - 8 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT- SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Multicomponent Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. CM -60; W.R Meadows, Inc. b. GC -5 Synthacalk; Pecora Corporation. c. Two -Part Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: aluminum, aluminum coated with a high - performance coating, and limestone. 6. Applications: Control joints, door and louver frames. 3.7 SOLVENT - RELEASE JOINT - SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Products: Provide the following: B. Butyl- Rubber -Based Solvent - Release Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Bostik 300; Bostik Inc. b. BC -158; Pecora Corporation. c. PSI -301: Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Sonneborn Multi- Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. e. Tremco Butyl Sealant; Tremco. 2. Applications: Exterior cast concrete, interior traffic joint tapping. 3.8 PREFORMED JOINT- SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Preformed Foam Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following. 07920 - 9 a. Emseal 25V; Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. b. Emseal Greyflex; Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Polytite B; Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. d. Polytite Standard; Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. e. Blocoband BF; Salamander Industrial Products Inc. f. Blocoband HF; Salamander Industrial Products Inc. g. Wilseal 600; Sealform, Ltd. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Applications: Sealant backup at interior horizontal traffic joint. Sealant backup at vertical building separation joint between additions and existing. END OF SECTION 07920 07920 - 10 SECTION 08110 — STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Steel cable slot frames. 4. Fire -rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections may include the following: 1.2 DEFINITIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot - grouting frames installed in steel -framed gypsum board partitions. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory- primed doors and frames. A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic- coated steel sheets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 08110 -1 B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. C. Fire -Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Temperature -Rise Rating: At fire doors for exit stairways and exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard - wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum fl- inch- (100 -mm -) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. b. Curries Company. c. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll -Rand. 08110 -2 2.2 MATERIALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc - iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc - Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Provide STC 45 rated doors as scheduled. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical - endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush), 18 gauge minimum face sheet. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, cable slots and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Exterior frames to be fabricated from electrolytic zinc- coated steel sheet. Provide STC 45 rated assembly as scheduled. B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 1. 0.053 -inch . 2. 0.067 -inch for exterior doors and openings wider than 48 inches. C. Frames of 0.0747 -inch- (1.9 -mm -) , 14 gauge minimum thick steel sheet for: 1. Cable slots. 08110 -3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Door Silencers: Except on weather - stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and two silencers on heads of double -door frames. E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016 -inch- (0.4 -mm -) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042 -inch- (1.0 -mm -) thick, electrolytic zinc - coated or metallic- coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177 -inch- (4.5 -mm -) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc - coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material: 1. Cold - rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Metallic- coated steel sheet where indicated. 3. Solid core door where indicated. C. Core Construction: Doors shall have solid insulated cores complying with SDI standards: 1. Polyurethane. 2. Vertical steel stiffeners. D. Clearances for Non - Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. E. Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. 08110 -4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA F. Single- Acting, Door -Edge Profile: Square edge, unless beveled edge is indicated. G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. J. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. K. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers and seamless face joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate knockdown frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly where indicated. L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface - applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied hardware may be done at Project site. M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory- applied coat of rust- inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 08110 -5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In metal -stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. 4. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 08110 -6 C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A 115.1 G. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke - Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 08110 -7 SECTION 08711 — DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of in- dividual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detail- ing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Se- quence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule in Drawings. 3. Content: Include the following information: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hard- ware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross - referenced to Drawings e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in sched- ule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 08711 - 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA h. Detailed keying information indicating how the Owner's instructions on the keying system will be fulfilled. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construc- tion schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current prod- ucts comply with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hard- ware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service per- formance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Con- sultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Archi- tect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Build- ings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1, and state adopted standards where applicable as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. 08711 - 2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening -force re- quirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors but in no means conflict with any ADA requirements: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to re- lease the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Delayed- Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds. c. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width. d. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hard- ware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated require- ments. 1.6 WARRANTY 08711 -3 A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the fol- lowing: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, mainte- nance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule in the Drawings. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. Other products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products and quality to named products and products complying with BHMA standard referenced will be considered as substitutions upon timely and proper submission of product documenta- tion. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other dis- tinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware 08711 -4 2.2 HINGES Schedule in the Drawings. Products are identified by using door hardware designa- tions, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. C. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm). 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm). 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches (2311 to 3048 mm). 4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches (3048 mm), provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 120 inches (3048 mm). 5. Provide hinges with non - removable (NRP) for exterior doors. D. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: Maximum Door Size (inches) 32 by 84 by 1 -3/8 36 by 84 by 1 -3/8 3 -1/2 0.123 4 0.130 Metal Thickness (inches) Hinge Standard Heavy Height Weight Weight (inches) 08711 - 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 36 by 84 by 1 -3/4 4 -1/2 0.134 0.180 42 by 90 by 1 -3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 48 by 120 by 1 -3/4 5 0.146 0.190 E. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template - produced units. F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded -to- the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC). 13. Electromechanical Locks and Latches: 1. Provided by Owner. C. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. D. Electromechanical Locks: BHMA Grade 1. E. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Grade 1; Se- ries 1000. F. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directo- ries: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Locks & Latches." G. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 08711 -6 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) latchbolt throw. H. Backset: 2 -3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING 1. Cylinders: a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC), J keyway core. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1. 1. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to the same change key. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: D. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Seven. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover -type cam. E. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; comply- ing with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. F. Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by per- manent cores. 2. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner in fi- nal keying instructions. G. Keying System: Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great- grandmaster) to integrate with the Owner's existing on -site keying system. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory- registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 08711 -7 H. Keys: Provide nickel- silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE ". 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the fol- lowing: 2.5 STRIKES a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grandmaster Keys (where required): Three. d. Great - grandmaster Keys (where required): Three. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Electric Strikes: a. Folger Adam Security Inc. (FAS). b. Locknetics Security Engineering; a Harrow Company (LSE). c. Security Door Controls (SDC). d. Von Duprin, Inc.; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (VD). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.5. C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hard- ware set, unless otherwise indicated. D. Electric Strikes: BHMA Grade 1. 2.6 CLOSERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Concealed and Surface - Mounted Closers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (LCN). 08711 -8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA c. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). d. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. C. Concealed and Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1. D. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers." E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written rec- ommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. F. Coordinate with hollow metal door supplier to ensure that internal reinforcement for mounting of closer is provided. No exposed mounting bolts are permitted on the opposite side of door from surface mounted closer. 2.7 STOPS AND BUMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Glynn- Johnson; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (GJ). 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16. C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1. D. Floor Stops: Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic or create a trip hazard. E. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled -in application to frame. 08711 -9 2.8 DOOR GASKETING 1. Door Gasketing: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 2. Door Bottoms: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. General: Provide continuous weather -strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfin per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. E. Smoke - Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having ju- risdiction, for smoke - control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke - labeled gasketing on 20- minute -rated doors and on smoke - labeled doors. F. Fire - Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic- tion, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. 08711 - 10 G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manu- facturer. H. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.9 THRESHOLDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim- ited to, the following: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). B. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156.21. 2.10 FABRICATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufac- turer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published tem- plates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application in- tended. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware - lack of coordination with the door supplier is not a valid reason. Where 08711 -11 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA through bolts must be used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire -rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 2.11 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strip- pable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appear- ance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indi- cated by the following: 1. BHMA 600: Primed for painting, over steel base metal. 2. BHMA 605: Bright brass, clear coated, over brass base metal. 3. BHMA 606: Satin brass, clear coated, over brass base metal. 4. BHMA 609: Satin brass, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated, over brass base metal. 5. BHMA 611: Bright bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 6. BHMA 612: Satin bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 7. BHMA 613: Dark - oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed, over bronze base metal. 8. BHMA 618: Bright nickel plated, clear coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 9. BHMA 619: Satin nickel plated, clear coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 10. BHMA 622: Flat black coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 11. BHMA 623: Light- oxidized statuary bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 12. BHMA 624: Dark - oxidized statuary bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 13. BHMA 625: Bright chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 08711 - 12 14. BHMA 626: metal. 15. BHMA 627: 16. BHMA 628: 17. BHMA 629: 18. BHMA 630: 19. BHMA 651: 20. BHMA 652: 21. BHMA 689: 22. BHMA 690: 23. BHMA 691: 24. BHMA 717: 25. BHMA 718: 26. BHMA 722: base metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base Satin aluminum, clear coated, over aluminum base metal. Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. Bright stainless steel, over stainless -steel base metal. Satin stainless steel, over stainless -steel base metal. Bright chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. Aluminum painted, over any base metal. Dark bronze painted, over any base metal. Light bronze painted, over any base metal. Bright aluminum, uncoated; aluminum base metal. Satin aluminum, uncoated; aluminum base metal. Dark - oxidized bronze, oil rubbed, over architectural bronze A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with require- ments for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wir- ing connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface - Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. 13. Wood Doors: comply with DHI A115 -W series. 08711 - 13 A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Ar- chitectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce at- tachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasten- ers. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set scheduled thresholds level in a full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compen- sate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 de- grees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is with- out damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 08711 - 14 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to Architectural Drawings. END OF SECTION 08711 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 08711 - 15 SECTION 09260 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non -load- bearing steel framing. 3. Interior furred gypsum wallboard ceiling. 4. Cementitious backer units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold- Formed Metal Framing" for load bearing light gauge metal framing. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking concealed in parti- tions. 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation. 4. Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop sealants. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced stan- dards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire - resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in as- sembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspect- ing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 09260 -1 1. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products ", UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" and GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual ". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traf- fic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not lim- ited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale /Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation. h. Unimast, Inc. i. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 09260 -2 b. G -P Gypsum Corp. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings; 20 Ga. minimum. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deep -Leg Deflection Track (Expansion Runner): ASTM C 645 top runner with 2- inch- deep flanges. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 STEEL FURRED CEILING FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete or Mortar: As follows: 1. Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing ac- cording to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep with minimum base metal thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).. 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with mini- mum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 - inch- (1.59 -mm -) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- (1.21 -mm -) diameter wire. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09260 -3 1. Type X: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded) for prefilling. c. Location: Where required for fire - resistance -rated assembly and unless otherwise indicated. Vertical and horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Foil Faced Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded) for prefilling. c. Location: Where required for secure wall assembly and unless other- wise indicated. Vertical and horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indi- cated. d. If un available to meet construction schedule provide Type X and foil faced kraft paper combination. Refer to Building Insulation Section 07210. 3. Type MR a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded) for prefilling. c. Location: At walls containing water piping and where required for moisture - resistance -rated assembly. Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized- coated steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -Bead (J- Bead): Use at exposed panel edges. c. L -Bead: Use where indicated. 09260 -4 d. U -Bead: Use where indicated. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. f. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.7 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged sur- face areas, use setting -type joint compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fas- teners, and trim flanges, use taping, all- purpose or setting -type joint com- pound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound. A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 32 inches (813 mm). B. Available Products: 1. C -Cure; C -Cure Board 990. 2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 3. FinPan, Inc.; UtiI -A -Crete Concrete Backer Board. 4. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 09260 -5 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: PART 3 - EXECUTION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. c. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC -170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA -98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstain- ing, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and that effectively reduces air- borne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building con- struction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic - rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation stan- dards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel mem- bers from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls. 1. Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive- backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fas- tener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 09260 -6 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow - metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with require- ments and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toi- let accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none avail- able, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent trans- fer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip -type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep -leg deflection track where indicated. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam - gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above sus- pended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended 09260 -7 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 3/4 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire - resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid - structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600 and with gypsum board manufac- turer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw ver- tical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2- inch (13 -mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match fram- ing required above door heads. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FURRED CEILING FRAMING A. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for furred ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel mem- bers. 13. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Furring Channels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 09260 -8 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA -216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between pan- els. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is at- tached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. I. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA J. Where partitions intersect joists and other structural members projecting below the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile of member; allowing 1/4- (6.4- mm -) wide joints at sides and 3/4- (19 -mm -) wide joints below member for sealant installation. K. Isolate perimeter of non - load - bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abut- ments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm -) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum pan- els are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board applica- tion and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 09260 -9 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applica- tions. M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 3.6 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Ceilings: Apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single -Layer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 1. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 2. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless other- wise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions /Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless other- wise indicated or required by fire- resistance -rated assembly. D. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base and face layers separately to supports with screws. F. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Moisture- Resistant Gypsum Board: Install behind ceramic tile, all plumbing walls and as indicated. Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 09260 -10 A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. Install ver- tical control joints wherever unbroken partition/wall length exceeds 30 feet. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, pene- trations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gyp- sum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance- rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for ceramic tile. 3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where indicated. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at all panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 09260 09260 -11 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE AND WALL BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Resilient Wall Base: Manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. B. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire- exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C)], in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. 09651 -1 B. After post - installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base VB -1: ASTM F 1861. I. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Color Integrated Wall Base. 2. Johnsonite; Vinyl Wall Base. 3. Roppe Corporation; Vinyl Wall Base. 4. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division; Vinyl Wall Base. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Basis of Design Product: Armstrong, Color Integrated Wall Base, Jet Black No. 60. C. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl). D. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered). E. Style: Cove (with top -set toe). F. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). G. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). H. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. I. Outside Corners: Premolded. J. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. K. Surface: Smooth. 09651 -2 2.3 INSTALLATION & FINISHING MATERIALS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated, as well as commercial office use. A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture- vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water /92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 09651 -3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Coat entire area surface if required to produce smooth, level base for tile. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job - Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 09651 -4 END OF SECTION 09651 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop and carefully spot -scrub surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. 09651 -5 SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that does not have a factory- applied final finish. Exclude mechanical and electrical elements installed over equipment racks. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components: a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Utility tunnels. c. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: 09912 - 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.3 SUBMITTALS a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. D. Related Sections include the following: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter. A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 09912 - 2 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. 09912 - 3 B. Apply solvent - thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado). 3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 4. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 6. Sherwin- Williams Co. (Sherwin- Williams). WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Exterior, Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied. b. Interior, Low- Luster Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. c. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied. d. Interior, Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied. A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 09912 -4 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint - material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. A. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory- formulated rust- inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35 -147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160 -XXXX Devguard Multi- Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Anti - Corrosive Primer 073 -132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6 /B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory- formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36 -11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 09912 - 5 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160 -XXXX Devguard Multi - Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Hydro -Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073 -189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). C. Exterior Aluminum Primer under Alkyd Finishes: Factory- formulated acrylic - based metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 180 -11 High Performance Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020 -XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Hydro -Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073 -189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; DTM Wash Primer B71Y1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm). 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40 -11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer - Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000 -1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037 -100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 09912 -6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). B. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40 -11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer - Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3210 -1200 Ultra -Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 4. Kelly- Moore; 247 Chem -Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer 037 -100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin- Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic- Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated alkyd- or acrylic - latex -based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2. Coronado; 78 -11 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3210 -1200 Ultra -Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Latex Undercoat 037 -154: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). D. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory- formulated quick -drying rust- inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer. 09912 - 7 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35 -147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160 -6130 Devguard Multi - Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Anti - Corrosive Primer 073 -132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). E. Interior Zinc - Coated Metal Primer: Factory- formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36 -11 Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160 -6130 Devguard Multi- Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Hydro -Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073 -189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 -709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer /Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; Galvite HS B50WZ30: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory- formulated full -gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308 -XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Rust -O- Lastic Finish Coating 074 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 09912 - 8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 7 -814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss -Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; Industrial Enamel B -54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low- Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory- formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Coronado; 30 -Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402 -XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Satin Eggshell Enamel 405 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils (0.032 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory- formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 32 -Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406 -XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 4. M. A. 13. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Semi -Gloss 410 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 6. Sherwin- Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel B31 W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 09912 - 9 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory- formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 271: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 2. Coronado; 27 -Line Super Kote 5000 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1516 -XXXX Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 4. Kelly- Moore; 1630 - -Kel -Cote Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Semi -Gloss 403 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6 -1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi -Gloss Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 7. Sherwin- Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 13. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION 09912 - 10 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral - fiber- reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SS PC's recommendations. a. Treat bare or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 09912 - 11 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 5. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built - in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 09912 - 12 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. Do not use spray equipment in rooms where Owner's telecommunications equipment is installed. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 09912 - 13 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Tanks that do not have factory- applied final finishes. 2. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Switchgear that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory- primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn- through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Abrasion resistance. 09912 - 14 3.5 CLEANING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA b. Accelerated weathering. c. Color retention. d. Content of the material actually delivered to the site as compared to the product's published label analysis; also information about the volume solids of the product and the theoretical dry film thickness. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Printer is not required on shop - primed items. 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust- inhibitive primer. 09912 - 15 a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss alkyd enamel. B. Zinc - Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc - coated metal surfaces: 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss alkyd enamel. C. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under alkyd finishes. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss alkyd enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low- Luster Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low - luster acrylic enamel. B. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over interior plaster surfaces: 1. Low- Luster Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low - luster acrylic enamel. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Zinc- Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc- coated metal surfaces: 09912 - 16 1. Semigloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. E. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a wood undercoater. END OF SECTION 09912 a. Primer: Interior zinc - coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic - enamel and semigloss alkyd - enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 09912 - 17 SECTION 10270 - ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following type(s) of access flooring systems: 1. Gravity-held panels on bolted stringer understructure (Necessary bracing should be provided to meet Seismic Zone requirements per city of Everett, WA) B. Furnish the following for mechanical and electrical requirements: 1. Cutouts in floor panels. 2. Service outlets. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Unit Prices: Cutouts and service outlets in floor panels. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Performance Requirements, General: Existing raised access floor system shall be modified to allow for new full height walls and stairs. Modifications to the existing system shall perform to the following specifications. Provide new perforated panels, number and locations refer to Mechanical Drawings. Provide access flooring systems consisting of proprietary portable assemblies composed of modular floor panels on elevated supports (understructures) forming accessible underfloor cavities (air spaces) to accommodate electrical and mechanical services and complying with performance requirements specified. B. Structural Performance per CISCA A/F: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products according to referenced procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors ": 1. Concentrated -Load Performance: Provide floor panels, including those with cutouts, capable of withstanding a concentrated design load of the following magnitude, with a top- surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 and 0.010 inch (2.54 and 0.25 mm), as 10270 - 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA determined by applying concentrated load through a 1 -inch- (25.4 -mm -) square or 1.128 -inch- (28.6 -mm -) diameter steel indentor according to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads." 2. Concentrated -Load Performance: Provide floor panels, including those with cutouts, capable of withstanding a concentrated design load of the following magnitude, with a bottom - surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 and 0.010 inch (2.54 and 0.25 mm), measured below each applied -load location at horizontal surface of nearest composite beam, as determined by applying concentrated load through a 1- inch- (25.4 -mm -) square or 1.128 -inch- (28.6 -mm -) diameter steel indentor according to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads." a. 2000 lbf (8896 N). 3. Ultimate -Load Performance: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding a minimum ultimate concentrated load equal to value obtained by multiplying specified concentrated floor panel design load by a factor of 2.5, without failing, according to CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate Loading." Failure is defined as the point at which access flooring system will not take any additional load. 4. Rolling -Load Performance: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding rolling loads of the following magnitude applied to panels, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) after exposure to rolling load over CISCA A/F Path A or B, whichever path produces the greatest top- surface deformation, according to CISCA A/F, Section III, "Rolling Loads." a. CISCA A/F Wheel 1 Rolling Load: 1000 lbf (4448 N). b. CISCA A/F Wheel 2 Rolling Load: 1000 lbf (4448 N). 5. Stringer Concentrated -Load Performance: Provide stringers, without panels in place, capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch (0.25 mm), as determined per CISCA A/F, Section IV, "Stringer Load Testing." 6. Pedestal Axial -Load Performance: Provide pedestal assemblies, without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding a 5000 lbf (22.24 kN) axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F, Section V, "Pedestal Axial Load Test." 7. Pedestal Overturning- Moment Performance: Provide pedestal assemblies, without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding an overturning moment per pedestal of 1000 lbf x 24 inches (113 N x meters), according to CISCA A/F, Section VI, "Pedestal Overturning Moment Test." C. Floor Panel Impact -Load Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding an impact load of 150 lbf (667 N) when dropped from 36 inches (914 10270 - 2 mm) onto a 1 -sq. in. (6.5 -sq. cm) area located anywhere on panel, without failing. Failure is defined as collapse of access flooring system. D. Static- Dissipative Floor Covering Resistance: Not less than 1 megohm nor more than 1000 megohms, as determined by testing identical products according to the method for conductive flooring specified in Annex 2 in NFPA 99 but modified to place one electrode on floor surface and to attach the other electrode to understructure. E. Static - Conductive Floor Covering Surface -to- Ground Resistance: Not less than 25,000 ohms nor more than 1 megohm as determined by testing identical products according to test method for conductive flooring specified in Annex 2 in NFPA 99 but modified to place one electrode on floor surface and to attach the other electrode to understructure. 1. UL Compliance: Provide flooring materials listed and labeled to comply with UL 779. F. Panel -to- Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Complete layout of access flooring based on field - verified dimensional relationships to adjoining work and installation tolerances. 2. Details with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, understructure, and other data to permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring system. 3. Shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the State of Oregon. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated, in sizes indicated below. 1. Carpet Tile: Full -size units. 2. Plastic Laminate: Size equal to full -size floor panel. 3. Carpet Trim: Size equal to length of one panel edge. 4. Resilient Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in length. 10270 - 3 5. Exposed Metal Accessories: 12 inches (300 mm) in length. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA E. Product Certificates: For each type of access flooring system indicated, signed by product manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by access flooring manufacturer and witnessed by the qualified testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain access flooring through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring. C. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with panel type and concentrated -load rating. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install access flooring until spaces are enclosed, ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 deg 1' (4 and 32 deg C), and relative humidity is not more than 70 percent. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with access flooring by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference with access flooring pedestals. B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor by use of a grid to enable mechanical and electrical work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestals. C. Proceed with installation only after completion of other construction within affected spaces. 10270 - 4 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Standard Field Panels: 5. 2. Perforated Panels: 10. 3. Pedestals: 6. 4. Stringers: 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE A. Manufacturers: 1. Steel- Covered, Wood -Core Panel Systems: a. Maxcess Technologies, Inc. b. Tate Access Floors, Inc. c. Fuller Engineering, Attn: Damien Nield - Ph: (317) 228 -5802 2. Cementitious- Filled, Formed -Steel Panel Systems: a. Maxcess Technologies, Inc. b. Tate Access Floors, Inc. B. Floor Panels, General: Modify or provide new panels to allow for new full height walls and stairs into existing floor system. Provide modular field panels complying with the following requirements that one person, using a portable lifting device, can interchange with other field panels without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure and that are free of exposed -metal edges with floor covering in place: 1. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24 inches (61 O by 610 min). 10270 - 5 2. Panel Attachment to Understructure: By gravity. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) of required size, with a squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch (0.38 nmm), unless tolerances are otherwise indicated for a specific panel type. b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.021) inch (0.50 nun), measured on a diagonal on top of panel. C. Steel- Covered, Wood -Core Panels: Fabricated with 1 - inch - (25 - mm - thick, high - density particleboard core, laminated to top and bottom face sheets of zinc - coated steel sheet, and with a flame - spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. Provide core edges enclosed with upturned, die - formed edge of bottom sheet or with perimeter steel channel welded to top sheet and welded or bonded to bottom sheet. D. Unfilled Formed -Steel Panels: Fabricated with die -cut flat top sheet and die - formed and stiffened steel bottom pan formed from cold - rolled steel sheet and joined together by resistance welding, with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish to produce units of the following type: 1. New Perforated Panels: Provide new, flat, perforated top surface with holes of number, spacing, and size standard with manufacturer to produce a nominal open area of 25 percent and 60 percent with a downward airflow as indicated in mechanical drawings with threaded holes on bottom surface to receive screw - attached dampers. E. Cementitious - Filled, Formed -Steel Panels: Fabricated with die -cut flat top sheet and die - formed and stiffened bottom pan formed from cold - rolled steel sheet joined together by resistance welding to form an enclosed assembly, with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish. F. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap); made of steel or aluminum or a combination of both. 1. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. (103 sq. cm) of bearing area. 2. Provide vibration -proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height over a range of not less than 2 inches (50 mm) and for locking at a selected height so deliberate action is required to change height setting and vibratory displacement is prevented. 3. Provide units of sufficient height to achieve a Finished Floor Height (FFH) of 24 ", measured from the floor slab to the top of access panels.. 4. Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated. 10270 - 6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Provide sound - deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels. 5. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: For anchoring pedestal bases to subfloor, provide expansion anchors made from carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild), with the capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the loads imposed by pedestal overturning moment on fasteners, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.3 FLOOR PANEL COVERING A. General: Provide factory- applied floor coverings of type indicated that are laminated by access flooring manufacturer to tops of floor panels, including perforated panels. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Panels with laminate finish to match existing facility panel finishes. Panels with carpet finish to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for panels with carpet. C. Conductive High Pressure Laminate (HPL): NEMA LD 3, High -Wear type, Grade 1/8 "(0.125) HPL fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face within perimeter plastic edging or with integral trim serving as edging, and with static decay of 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.5 seconds per FS 101C/4046 at 15 percent relative humidity 1. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar, International Paper, Decorative Products Division. D. Carpet: Refer to the Drawings Finish Schedule. Provide factory- applied carpet complying with the following requirements: 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for carpet is based on United Technical Products, Inc.; CompuCarpet RTG with Urabond8,Designer Plus Series. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Tate Floor Access Floors Systems, PosiTile On- Module One -To -One Fit. 2. Yarn: Solution -dyed, 100 percent soil- and stain - hiding nylon. 3. Conductive Fiber: Continuous conductive monofilament in every tuft. 4. Yarn Construction: 3.00 /two -ply high twist/cut pile. 10270 - 7 E. Edging: Tile with Top Set edge trim. 2.4 ACCESSORIES a. Monolithic edge. a. Furnish removable covers for grommets. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 5. Carpet Construction: High - density, textured loop. 6. Yarn Weight: 32 oz. /sq. yd. (1.08 kg /sq. m). 7. Pile Height: 0.25 inch (6.35 mm). 8. Backing: Dissipative unitary polyurethane backing with 25 -Ihf (111-N) tuft bind and 10-1b1 (44.4-N) edge lock. 9. Total Weight: Not less than 76 oz. /sq. yd. (2.58 kg/sq. m). 10. Critical Radiant Flux Rating: Minimum of 0.45 W /sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 11. Installation: Die cut and adhesively bonded in factory to panel face; edge condition as follows: A. Colors and Finishes: For exposed accessories available in more than one standard color or finish, comply with the following requirements: 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements. 1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: Provide Unit Prices. 2. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, if size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. 3. Provide foam - rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables and trim edge of cutout with molding having flange and ledge for capturing and supporting pads. C. Ramps: Ramp construction of width and slope indicated on construction drawings, but not steeper than 1:12, with high pressure laminate, and of same materials, performance, and construction requirements as cementitious - filled, formed -steel access flooring panels: g. 10270 - 8 D. Steps and Landing: Provide steps and landings of size and arrangement indicated in construction drawings with floor covering to match access flooring. Apply non- slip aluminum nosings to treads, unless otherwise indicated. Steps and landing construction shall be complete with closure panels on exposed sides and edge trim. E. Railings: Standard extruded- aluminum railings, at ramps and open -sided perimeter of access flooring. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates, and anchorages where required. Provide railings that comply with structural performance requirements specified in the following Section: F. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type required for lifting panels with floor covering provided. Provide (4) four lifting devices of each panel type required. G. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel edge and form transition between access flooring and adjoining floor covering at same level as access flooring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Pre - installation Adhesive Field Test: Before installing pedestals, field test their adhesion to subfloor surfaces as follows: 1. In areas representative of each sub -floor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same adhesive and methods required for completed work. 2. Allow test installation to cure for 30 days, with a pressure of 25 Ihf (1 1 I N ) applied vertically to pedestals during this period. 3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2 inches (50 mm) into pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base. 4. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement specified for pedestals' capability to resist overturning moment. B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary sub -floor preparation, and vacuum clean sub -floor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation. 10270 - 9 3.2 INSTALLATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of vibration, rocking, rattles, and squeaks. B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended by access flooring manufacturer to provide full bearing of pedestal base on sub -floor. C. Lay out floor panel installation as indicated construction drawings. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) where panels abut vertical surfaces. 1. To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of the following panel type with sealer recommended by panel manufacturer: a. Steel - covered, wood -core panels. b. Filled formed -steel panels. D. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, including vacuuming sub -floor area, as installation of floor panels proceeds. F. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or- debris- producing operations as remotely as possible from installation area and to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already installed. G. Level installed access flooring to within 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) of true level over entire access flooring area and within 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) in any 10-toot (3 - m) distance. H. Seal all edges of access panels at each space perimeter wall in order to achieve a pressurized air plenum. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion. B. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, otherwise damaged, or not complying with specified requirements. 10270 - 10 END OF SECTION 10270 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 10270 - 11 DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -1 to 7 15055 MOTORS 15055 -1 to 7 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 -1 to 7 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 15071 -1 to 12 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 -1 to 4 15083 PIPE INSULATION 15083 -1 to 11 15110 VALVES 15110 -1 to 7 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 -1 to 10 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 -1 to 7 15626 ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 -1 to 10 15734 COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 -1 to 6 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 -1 to 15 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 -1 to 21 DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS - VERIZON BUSINESS Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA WTA - 08093 TABLE OF CONTENTS 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -1 to 8 16060 GROUNDING 16060 -1 to 7 16120 WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE 16120 -1 to 7 (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16130 RACEWAYS 16130 -1 to 13 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -1 to 6 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 -1 to 4 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 -1 to 4 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -1 to 4 16410 DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16410 -1 to 3 16511 BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -1 to 6 TOC- 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 DEFINITIONS BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Mechanical demolition. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Painting and finishing. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Supports and anchorages. A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 18 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -prig minimum working pressure at 180 deg I'. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zum Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 - psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric - Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full - face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300 - prig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 - prig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 - pig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: PART 3 - EXECUTION a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS MOTORS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory- installed and field- installed motors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration" for mounting motors and vibration isolation and seismic - control devices. 2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor - driven equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Factory- Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized- equipment manufacturer as a component of equipment. B. Field- Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral component of motorized equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for Field- Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes. B. Shop Drawings for Field- Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following: 1. Each installed unit's type and details. 2. Nameplate legends. 3. Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of motor and for each control scheme. MOTORS 15055 - 1 C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around field - installed motors. Show motor layout, mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. E. Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field - installed motors to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations: Obtain field- installed motors of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options for Field- Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner's Representative at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 1.7 COORDINATION MOTORS 15055 - 2 1. Compatible with the following: a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multi -speed controllers. c. Reduced - voltage controllers. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are: 2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating. 3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning. C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Motor requirements apply to factory- installed and field- installed motors except as follows: 1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another Section. 2. Manufacturer for a factory- installed motor requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase. B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase. C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected. E. Service Factor: 1.15. MOTORS 15055 - 3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. H. Enclosure: Open drip proof. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Standard efficiency according to NEMA MG 1, Para. 12.59 and Table 12 -10. C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Multi -speed motors shall have separate winding for each speed. D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. E. Bearings: Double- shielded, pre - lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated. H. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp. 1. Finish: Manufacturer's Standard Finish. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced - Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. MOTORS 15055 - 4 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Rugged -Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non - hygroscopic material. 1. Finish: Chemical - resistant paint over corrosion- resistant primer. D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no -load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high - potential test. 2.5 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split -phase start, capacitor run. 3. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Shaded -Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal- protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. D. Bearings: Ball type for belt - connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, pre - lubricated- sleeve type for other single -phase motors. E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no -load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high - potential test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION MOTORS 15055 - 5 A. Examine areas to receive field- installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Examine roughing -in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 MOTOR INSTALLATION A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer Link. B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor design load. 2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation. 3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect field- assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for compliance with requirements. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Verify bearing lubrication. 4. Verify proper motor rotation. 5. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 3.4 ADJUSTING a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance. A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions. MOTORS 15055 - 6 3.5 CLEANING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15055 MOTORS 15055 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.5 SUBMITTALS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design heavy -duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. C. Where required design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal - hanger shield insert indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Pipe Hangers: a. Anvil Corp. b. B -Line Systems, Inc c. National Pipe Hanger Corp. d. PHS Industries, Inc. e. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 2. Channel Support Systems: a. Anvil Corp.; Power -Strut Unit. b. B -Line Systems, Inc. c. National Pipe Hanger Corp. d. Unistrut Corp. 3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: a. PHS Industries, Inc. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. 4. Powder- Actuated Fastener Systems: a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buiidout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP -58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field- applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 2 B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA -2, factory- fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. C. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 -psi minimum compressive- strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water - repellent- treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water - repellent- treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Mechanical - Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull -out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and - packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections. C. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange. 3. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. D. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. E. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 2. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 3. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 30001b. F. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe- Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360 - degree insert of high - density, 100 -psi minimum compressive- strength, water - repellent - treated calcium silicate or cellular -glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360- degree sheet metal shield. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field- assembled channel systems. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field- fabricated, heavy -duty trapezes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D -1.1. D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Install mechanical- anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Galvanized steel clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use galvanized steel thermal - hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. 2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal- hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Galvanized steel thermal- hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 5 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 3.4 METAL FABRICATION 3.5 ADJUSTING 3.6 PAINTING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy -duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot be shop - welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 6 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 15060 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts. 2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 4. Housed spring mounts. 5. Elastomeric hangers. 6. Spring hangers. 7. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 8. Thrust limits. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Freestanding and restrained air spring isolators. 12. Restrained vibration isolation roof -curb rails. 13. Seismic snubbers. 14. Restraining cables. 15. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient. B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California. OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seismic restraint it tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Av: 0.40 B. Component Seismic Coefficient: 2.0 C. Performance Criteria Factor: 1.5. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 1 D. Attachment Amplification Factor: 2.0 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 4. Seismic- Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. 5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2 -inch (13- mm) deflection in x, y, and z planes. C. Welding certificates. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seismic - restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic- MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic - restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are the manufacturers specified. 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc. 2. Amber /Booth Company, Inc. 3. B -Line Systems, Inc. 4. California Dynamics Corp. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS the following manufacturers not limited to, 15071 -3 5. Isolation Technology, Inc. 6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 7. Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water- resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene. 2. Durometer Rating: 50. 3. Number of Layers: As required. C. Elastomeric Mounts: Double- deflection type, with molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Durometer Rating: 50. D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts: All - directional elastomeric mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded, bridge- bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge - bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring isolators. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig (690 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open - spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory- drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 4 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all - directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) travel before contacting a resilient collar. H. Elastomeric Hangers: Double- deflection type, with molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color - code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel- washer - reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. J. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up- stop" on lower threaded rod. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 5 2.3 AIR - MOUNTING SYSTEMS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. California Dynamics Corp. 2. Firestone Industrial Products Company. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. B. Air Mounts: Freestanding, single or multiple, compressed -air bellows. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA K. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to equipment. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) movement at start and stop. L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All- directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) thick, 60- durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions. M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2- inch- (13 -mm -) thick, 60- durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 1. Assembly: Upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable, flexible, nylon - reinforced neoprene bellows. 2. Maximum Natural Frequency: 3 Hz. 3. Operating Pressure Range: 25 to 100 psig (172 to 690 kPa). 4. Burst Pressure: At least three times the manufacturer's published maximum operating pressure. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 6 5. Leveling Valves: Minimum of 3 required to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). C. Restrained Air Mounts: Housed compressed -air bellows. 1. Assembly: Upper and lower steel sections connected by a replaceable, flexible, nylon - reinforced neoprene bellows and spring, with angle -iron frame having vertical -limit stops and channel- section top with leveling adjustment and attachment screws. 2. Maximum Natural Frequency: 3 Hz. 3. Operating Pressure Range: 25 to 100 psig (172 to 690 kPa). 4. Burst Pressure: At least three times the manufacturer's published maximum operating pressure. 5. Leveling Valves: Minimum of 3 required to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2.4 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF -CURB RAILS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corp. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Description: Factory- assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand 125 -mph (56 -m/s) wind impinging laterally against side of equipment. C. Lower Support Assembly: Sheet -metal "Z" section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper floating frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of rigid, glass -fiber insulation on inside of assembly. D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic restraint. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 7 a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt. b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water - resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. a. Material: Bridge - bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251. b. Durometer Rating: 50. c. Number of Layers: As required. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA E. Snubber Bushings: All- directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at comers, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials. 2.5 SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. B -Line Systems, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division. 6. Mason Industries, Inc. 7. TOLCO Incorporated. 8. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division. 9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 11. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1- piece, molded, bridge- bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5, with a flat washer face. C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural -steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic - rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 8 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1- piece, molded, bridge- bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or minus 5. D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement. E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic - rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M. 2.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corp. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Mason Industries, Inc. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund. B. Steel Base: Factory- fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 -inch (25- mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory- welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. C. Inertia Base: Factory- fabricated, welded, structural -steel bases and rails ready for field- applied, cast -in -place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1 -inch (25- mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory- welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor -bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor -bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 9 2.7 FACTORY FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory- assembled and - tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot -dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color -code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic - control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in -place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment. WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile -iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 10 3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000 -psi (20.7 -MPa) concrete; trowel to a smooth finish. 1. Cast -in -place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base. 2. Install epoxy - coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Cast -in -place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality - control testing: 1. Isolator seismic- restraint clearance. 2. Isolator deflection. 3. Snubber minimum clearances. 4. Air- Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 5. Air - Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed -air leveling system. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 6. Test and adjust air - mounting system controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Air- Mounting System Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including piping connections. Report results in writing. 1. Isolator seismic- restraint clearance. 2. Isolator deflection. 3. Snubber minimum clearances. 4. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 5. Operational Test: Test the compressed -air leveling system. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 11 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) movement during start and stop. D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism. E. Adjust active height of spring isolators. F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. 3.6 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic - control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air - mounting systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15071 - 12 PART 1 - GENERAL 3.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 3.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment markers. 3. Equipment signs. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Stencils. 3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. 3.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1 1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2. Data: a. Name and plan number. b. Electrical panel and circuit number which supplies power to the equipment. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, laminated plastic. Include contact -type, permanent adhesive. 3. Size: 2 -1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4 -1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. 3.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. B. Self - Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure- sensitive, permanent -type, self - adhesive back. 2.3 STENCILS A. Stencils: Prepare with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1 -1/4 inches; and minimum letter height of 1 inch for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs and similar operational instructions. I. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acylic enamel in colors according to ASME 13.1, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single -type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 2 3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Including but not limited to chillers, CRAC units, air handling units, condensers, dry coolers, cooling towers, fluid coolers, pumps, fans, etc. 1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering. 2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units; electrical source to include panel name and circuit breaker number feeding this equipment. 3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Fuel- burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor -driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. f. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units (CRAC) and Dry Coolers. g. Tanks and pressure vessels. 3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non- concealed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non - accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers. B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 3 3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION C. Stenciled Duct Marker: Provide stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated - plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. D. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION 15075 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 -4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PIPE INSULATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field - applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. 1. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame- spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke - developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame - spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke - developed rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. C. Coordinate installation and testing of electric heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat -trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens- Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. B. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory- applied, all - purpose, vapor - retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire - Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A -3316C in the following classes and grades: PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 2 2.3 ADHESIVES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un -faced glass -fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to un -faced glass -fiber insulation. b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass -fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 4. Vapor - Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water - resistant, vapor - retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL- C- 19565C, Type II. 5. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral - Fiber, Hydraulic - Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. C. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre - forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Available Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heavy PVC Fitting Covers: Factory- fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30 -mil- thick, high- impact, ultraviolet- resistant PVC. 1. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. C. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H -14 temper. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 3 1. Finish and Thickness: Corrugated finish, 0.010 inch thick. 2. Finish and Thickness: Stucco - embossed finish, 0.016 inch thick. 3. Moisture Barrier: 1 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 4. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows; same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL- C- 20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre -sized a minimum of 8 oz. /sq. yd. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick. 5. Nickel - Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Wire: 0.080 -inch, nickel- copper alloy; 0.062 -inch, soft - annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 -inch, soft - annealed, galvanized steel. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 4 A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs. E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Seal joints and seams with vapor- retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Bond seams and joints with K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties. L. Hangers and Anchors: Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor - retarder mastic. 1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. 3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield. M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 5 N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: Q. 3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder. 4. Vapor - Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. 5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor - retarder mastic. P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor - retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor- retarder mastic. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below -grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor - retarder mastic. R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors. S. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. 1. Firestopping and fire- resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section " Firestopping." T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly. 1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor- retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder. A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 6 B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.5 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor - retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments. 3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor- retarder mastic. 1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 7 C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 3.6 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION 3.7 FINISHES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive; overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor - retarder mastic. 1. Apply pre - molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturers written instructions. 2. Only when pre - molded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass -fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands. 3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. 4. Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor - retarder mastic. 1. Apply pre - molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturers written instructions. 2. Only when pre - molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass -fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation. 3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor - retarder mastic. 5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor - retarder mastic. 6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. A. Apply metal jacket where indicated or specified, with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless - steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. A. Glass -Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass -cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 8 3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration - control devices. 3. Fire - suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Chrome- plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 6. Air chambers and unions. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality - control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineers. 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes. B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications. C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications. 3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements. 3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Domestic cold water. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, NPS 1 ' /2" and smaller: Thickness 3/8 inch. b. Copper Pipe, NPS 2" and larger: Thickness 1/2 inch. PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 9 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None. B. Service: Domestic cold water. (Contractor's Option) 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe, NPS 1 '' /z" and smaller: Thickness 3 /4 inch. b. Copper Pipe, NPS 2" and larger: Thickness 1 inch. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None. C. Service: Condensate drain piping. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None D. Service: Condensate drain piping. (Contractor's Option) 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral Fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None. E. Service: Chilled -water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible Elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Steel Pipe, NPS 1 %2" and smaller: Thickness 3/4 inch. b. Steel Pipe, NPS 2" to 4 ": Thickness 1 inches. c. Steel Pipe, NPS 6" and larger: Thickness 1 -1 /2 inches. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None. F. Service: Chilled -water supply and return. (Contractor's Option) 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 10 a. Steel Pipe, NPS 1 %2" and smaller: Thickness 1 inch. b. Steel Pipe, NPS 2" to 4 ": Thickness 1 'h inches. c. Steel Pipe, NPS 6" and larger: Thickness 2 inches. 4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 5. Finish: None. END OF SECTION 15083 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 11 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS VALVES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves: 1. Copper -alloy ball valves. 2. Ferrous -alloy ball valves. 3. Ferrous -alloy butterfly valves. 4. Circuit setter balancing valves. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 2. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. SWP: Steam working pressure. 6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA VALVES 15110 - I 1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold -water piping valves unless referenced. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew -point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves. B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2 -1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA VALVES 15110-2 F. Valve Actuators: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types. 2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 5 and smaller, except plug valves. G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast -iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. I. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Three- Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Flow -Tek, Inc. g. Grinnell Corporation. h. Hammond Valve. i. Honeywell Braukmann. j. Jamesbury, Inc. k. Jomar International, LTD. 1. Kitz Corporation of America. m. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. n. Milwaukee Valve Company. o. Nexus Valve Specialties. p. NIBCO INC. q. R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX). r. Red -White Valve Corp. s. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. t. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Three- Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full -port, chrome- plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. VALVES 15110 - 3 2.4 FERROUS -ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. American Valve, Inc. 2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. 3. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. 4. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. 5. Flow -Tek, Inc. 6. Foster Valve Co. 7. Hammond Valve. 8. Jamesbury, Inc. 9. Jomar International, LTD. 10. Kitz Corporation of America. 11. KTM Products, Inc. 12. McCANNA, Incorporated. 13. Milwaukee Valve Company. 14. NIBCO INC. 15. PBM, Inc. 16. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. 17. Worcester Controls. B. Ferrous -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -72, with flanged ends. C. Ferrous -Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, full port. D. Ferrous -Alloy Ball Valves: Class 300, full port. 2.5 FERROUS -ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flanged, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: A. Manufacturers: a. Bray International, Inc. b. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Mueller Steam Specialty. e. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. 2.6 CIRCUIT SETTER BALANCING VALVE WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP -67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flangless, 200 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one or two - piece stem. VALVES 15110 -4 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Armstrong 3. Taco B. %2" to 2" Valves: All valves to be bronze body/brass ball constructions with glass carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure read -out ports across valve seat area. Read -out ports to be fitted with internal EPT insert and check valve. Valve bodies to have 1/4" NPT tapped drain/purge port. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leak -tight at full rated working pressure. C. 2 %2" to 12" Valves: Valve shall be of heavy -duty cast iron construction with ANSI flanged connections suitable up to 175 psi (1207 kPa) working pressure. Valves 2 Y2" — 3" pipe shall have a brass ball with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves 4" — 12" shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seal insert, and stainless steel stem. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. Valves to be leak -tight at full rated working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. VALVES 15110 - 5 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Isolation/Shutoff Service: Ball, or butterfly valves. 2. Balancing/Throttling Service: Circuit - setter, ball, or butterfly valves as indicated. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Chilled -Water Piping: Following valves are permitted: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Three- piece, 600 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flangeless Lug Type 200 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. Circuit -setter balancing valve as specified above. D. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two - piece, 600 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 200 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. VALVES 15110 -6 B. Soldered Joints: Use silver solder joints, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 15110 VALVES WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 15110 -7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY HYDRONIC PIPING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes piping, special -duty valves, and hydronic specialties for chilled -water cooling systems and condensate drain piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping materials and installation requirements. 2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section. 3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves. 4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure gages. 5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of hydronic specialty and special -duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow - control valves. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Welding Certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 1 G. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at project site. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special -duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure- Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure -seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure -seal pipe couplings and fittings. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression- system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Calibrated Balancing Valves: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Flow Design, Inc. c. Gerand Engineering Company. d. Griswold Controls. e. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. f. Taco, Inc. 2. Air Separators and Air Purgers: 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. d. Taco, Inc. A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Annealed- Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A). B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought- Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg -1 (silver). 2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. C. Wrought -Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. D. Wrought Cast- and Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 -3 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch (3.2 -mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg -1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.6 VALVES A. Ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve. C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast -iron or steel body, ball type, 125 -psig (860 -kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. E. Automatic Flow Control Valves, NPS 6: Ductile iron body, directional flow, dual access ports, wafer style, 150 -psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, suitable for mounting wafer style between standard 150# or 300# flanges. Provide long flange bolts and nuts with each control valve. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 4 2.7 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) working pressure; 240 deg F (116 deg C) operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) discharge connection and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) inlet connection. B. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 -psig working pressure; 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. 2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y -Pattern Strainers: 125 -psig working pressure; cast -iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection. B. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire- reinforcing protective jacket; 150 -prig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. C. Stainless -Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire- reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 5 2. Factory- fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Factory- fabricated companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. F. Dielectric Nipples: 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: G. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Victaulic Company of America. 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Chilled Water, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type K (Type B) drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and brazed joints. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Chilled Water, NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints. C. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn- temper copper tubing with soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General -Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types: 1. Shutoff Duty: Ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Automatic flow control, circuit - setter, plug, ball, or butterfly valves as indicated. B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. D. Install automatic flow control valves in the return line at each chiller to facilitate system balance. E. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements. B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball drain valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. E. Reduce horizontal pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure- reducing valve, solenoid valve, in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 7 H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Iarger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50). WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP -58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. C. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 6. NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (10 mm). D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot (3 -m) intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 8 C. Install suction diffuser in pump suction lines. Install blow -down piping with ball valve; extend to nearest drain where indicated. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. 3.9 ADJUSTING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 9 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.10 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine -mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 10 SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Separately coupled, base - mounted, end - suction centrifugal pumps. 1.3 SUBMITTALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed -in plugs. B. Store pumps in dry location. C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage. D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter. E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified on drawings. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 2.2 PUMPS 1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturer specified. A. Base Mounted Flex Coupled Pumps. 1. Pumps shall be Taco Model FI or approved equal. The pumps shall be single stage end suction rear pull out design. The bearings and seal shall be serviceable without disturbing the piping connections. The capacities and characteristics shall be as called for in the plans /schedules. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 2 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Pump casing shall be constructed of ASTM A48 class 30 cast iron. The pump casing/volute shall be rated for 250 psi working pressure for all jobs. The pump flanges shall be matched to suit the working pressure of the piping components on the job, with either ANSI Class 125 flanges or ANSI class 250 flanges. The pump casing shall be drilled and tapped for gauge ports on both the suction and discharge connections and for a drain port at the bottom of the casing. The casing shall have an additional tapping on the discharge connection to allow for the installation of a seal flush line. The pump cover shall be drilled and tapped to accommodate a seal flush line which can be connected to the corresponding tapping on the discharge connection, or to an external source to facilitate cooling and flushing of the seal faces. 3. All casings shall be flanged. Threaded casings not allowed unless extra unions and fittings are provided with that pump to allow servicing. 4. Pump volute shall be foot mounted. Overhung cantilevered design not allowable. 5. The pump shall be center line discharge for both positive air venting and allowance for better load distribution. 6. The pump casing inlet shall have an integrally cast anti - rotational vane. 7. The impeller shall be ASTM B584- 836/875 bronze and hydraulically balanced. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced to ANSI Grade G6.3 and shall be fitted to the shaft with a key. The impeller shall be cast by the hydraulically efficient lost foam technique to ensure repeatability of high quality. 8. The pump shall incorporate a dry shaft design to prevent the circulating fluid from contacting the shaft. The pump shaft shall be AISI 1045 carbon steel with field replaceable bronze SAE 660 shaft sleeve. In order to improve serviceability and reduce the cost of ownership the shaft sleeve must be slip on (press on not allowable) and must be easily replaced in the field. 9. The pump shall be fitted with a single mechanical seal, with EPT elastomers and Carbon/Ceramic faces, rated up to 250 °F. This seal must be capable of being flushed externally via a tapping in the pump cover adjacent to the seal cavity. Any pump used on an open system shall be furnished with a seal flush line and a Cuno / Kynar / Purocell #900 replaceable cartridge filter or separator with shut -off isolation valve installed in the seal flushing line. The filter shall have the ability to remove particles down to five microns in size. The entire pump line shall use no more than three different sizes of seals. 10. All pumps to be provided with a fully welded, rigid structural steel base. The base shall include closed ends and top openings to allow for grouting. The base shall include an integral drain pan fabricated from steel with a minimum thickness of 0.1875" and shall contain an integral 3 /4" drain connection. 11. The pump bearing frame shall incorporate maintenance free permanently lubricated and sealed bearings with an L10 life of 60,000 hours. Bearing frame shall be equipped with Forsheda seals to protect bearings from moisture and airborne contaminants. The entire line of pumps shall use no more than four different sizes of bearing frames. 12. The pump shall be flexibly coupled to a NEMA standard T frame motor. The coupler shall be suitable for across the line starting as well as variable speed conditions associated with variable frequency drives. The coupling shall be equal to a Woods Dura -Flex coupler. Any pump manufacturer providing a mechanically inferior coupler design, especially in variable torque applications, shall extend the warranty of the coupler for an additional two years in addition to their own standard warranty. The coupling and shafts shall be covered by a metal guard. Pump shall be aligned upon receipt at job, during installation, and after system fill by contractor. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 13. In order to both simplify and reduce the total cost of ownership, the manufacturer shall standardize on no more than three sizes of mechanical seals and four sizes of bearing frames through out the entire range of the family of pumps. The manufacturer shall not use multiple part numbers for the same part. 2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, castiron body and end cap, pump - inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless -steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- fabricated support. B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175 -psig pressure rating, cast iron body, pump - discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor -bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 CONCRETE BASES A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy - coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Cast -in -place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified on drawings. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 4 3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Set base - mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete. 1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1 -1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting. 2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb. 3.4 ALIGNMENT A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made. B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1- 1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation." D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install triple -duty valve on discharge side of pumps. F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base - mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure -gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve. I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." K. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents. C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting: 1. Lubricate bearings. 2. Remove grease- lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked on pump casing. 4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound or drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps. 6. Clean strainers. 7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as follows: 1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for operation. 2. Open cooling water - supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where applicable. 3. Open cooling water - supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled. 4. Open sealing liquid - supply valves if pumps are so fitted. 5. Open warm -up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at operating temperature. 6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff. 7. Start motors. HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 6 8. Open discharge valves slowly. 9. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands. 10. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors. 11. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating. E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors. F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance notice. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below: END OF SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, air - cooled, electric- motor - driven, rotary-screw water chillers with the following features: 1. Motor controller. 2. Microprocessor -based controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EER: Energy - efficiency ratio. B. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's certified prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections, and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following: 1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Operating weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Vibration Isolation Calculations and Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - I 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. D. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Source quality- control test reports. G. Startup service reports. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following: 1. Structural supports. 2. Piping roughing -in requirements. 3. Wiring roughing -in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment. 4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances. E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water chillers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means" the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manual. A. ARI Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." B. ASHRAE Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. Comply with ASHRAE Guideline 3 for refrigerant Leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 2 C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. D. ARI 370 — Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Equipment. E. ASHRAE 34 — Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants. F. ASHRAE 90.1 — Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. G. ASTM A48 — Gray Iron Castings. H. Comply with NFPA 70. I. Comply with UL for construction of chillers and provide UL/cUL listing label. J. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Act. K. Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9002. L. Factory Test: Chiller shall be pressure- tested, evacutated and fully charged with refrigerant and oil, and shall be factory operational run tested with water flowing thru the vessel. M. Chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained and supported service organization that is within a 50 mile radius of the site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled and charged with refrigerant and oil by the manufacturer. B. During shipment, provide protective covering over vulnerable components. Fit nozzles and open ends with plastic enclosures. C. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate size and connection/header locations. C. Coordinate Electrical power requirements and wire /conduit and overcurrent protection sizes. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 3 1.8 WARRANTY WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant all equipment and materials of its manufacture against defects in workmanship and material for a period of twelve (12) months from date of initial start-up or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment, whichever occurs first. A 4 year extended parts and warrant shall be provided for each compressor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: The design shown on the drawings is based on York Intemational. Unit is Pre - purchased and supplied by the Owner. 2.2 PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS A. Description: Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and plans, factory assembled charged and operational tested air cooled screw compressor chiller as specified herein. Chiller shall include, but is not limited to: a complete system with not less than two independent refrigerant circuits, semi- hermetic twin screw compressors, shell and tube type evaporator, air - cooled condenser, R134a refrigerant, lubrication syste, interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls including capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, and special features as specified herein or required for safe, automatic operation. 1. Casing: Unit panels, structural elements, control boxes and heavy gauge structural base shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Unit panels, control boxes and structural bases are finished with a baked on powder paint. All painted surfaces shall be coated with baked on powder paint which, when subject to ASTMB117, 1,000 hour, 5% salt spray test, yields minimum ASTM 1654 rating of "6 ". B. Fabricate water chiller mounting frame and attachment to the pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when the water chiller mounting frame is anchored to the building structure. C. Operating Characteristics: 1. Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to ensure unit is capable of operation from 0 deg. F to 125 deg. F ambient. 2. Provide capacity control system capable of reducing unit capacity to 10% of full load. Compressors shall start in unloaded condition. Application of factory installed hot gas bypass shall be acceptable as required to meet specified minimum load. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 -4 2.3 COMPRESSORS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semihermetic, rotary twin -screw type, including: muffler, temperature actuated "off - cycle" heater, rain tight terminal box, discharge shut -off service valve, and precision machined cast iron housing. Design working pressure of entire compressor, suction to discharge, shall be 450 PSIG. Compressor shall be UL recognized. B. Motors: Refrigerant suction gas cooled accessible hermetic compressor motor, full suction gas flow through 0.006" maximum mesh screen, with inherent internal thermal overload protection and external current overload on all three phases. C. Lubrication: External oil separators with no moving parts, 450 PSIG design working pressure, and UL listing. Refrigerant system differential pressure shall provide oil flow through service replaceable, 0.5 micron, full flow cartridge type oil filter internal to compressor. Filter bypass, less restrictive media, or oil pump not acceptable. D. Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Capacity control range from 100% to 10% of chiller full load. Provide microprocessor control to command compressor capacity to balance compressor capacity with cooling load. When required to meet minimum load, hot gas bypass shall be factory installed and integrated into standard control system. E. Refrigerant Compatibility: Seals, O -rings and internal water chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. F. Refrigerant Circuit: Each independent refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve with charging port, low side pressure relief device, removable core filter -drier, sight glass with moisture indicator, and electronic expansion valve. 2.4 HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Evaporator: 1. Direct expansion type or flooded type shell and tube evaporator with high efficiency copper tubes. Independence refrigerant circuits shall be provided per compressor. 2. Constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with applicable sections of ASME pressure vessel code for minimum 235 PSIG refrigerant side design working pressure and 150 psig water side design working pressure. 3. Shell covered with 3 /4", flexible, closed cell insulation, thermal conductivity of 0.26k (BTU /HR -sq. ft.) maximum. Water nozzles with grooves for mechanical couplings, and insulated by contractor after pipe installation. 4. Provide vent and drain fittings, and thermostatically controlled heaters to protect to -20 deg. F. ambient in off cycle. B. Air Cooled Condenser: ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 5 1. Coils: Internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes, mechanically expanded into aluminum alloy fins with full height collars. Subcooling coil and integral part of condenser. Design working pressure shall be 450 PSIG. 2. Low sound Fans: Shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive, corrosion resistant glass fiber reinforced composite blades molded into low noise, full airfoil cross section, providing vertical air discharge from extended orifices. Guards of heary gauge, PVC coated steel. 3. Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 3 phase, insulation class "F ", current protected, totally enclosed air -over (TEAO), with double sealed, permanently lubricated ball bearings. 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Protective chiller panels (Factory Mounted): 1. Louvered/Wire Panels: Louvered steel panels on external condenser coil faces, painted to match unit panels. Heavy gauge, welded wire -mesh, coated to resist corrosion, around base of machine to restrict unauthorized access. B. Flow Switch (Field Mounted): Vapor proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 150 PSIG, -20 deg. F. C. Vibration Isolation (Field Mounted): 1. Neoprene Isolators. D. Provide suction service shut -off valve for each compressor (Factory Mounted). 2.6 CONTROLS A. General: 1. Provide automatic control of chiller operation including compressor start/stop and load/unload, ant - recycle timers, condenser fans, evaporator pump, evaporator heater, unit alarm contacts and run signal contacts. 2. Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power failure. 3. Unit operating software shall be stored in non - volatile memory. Field programmed set points shsll be retained in lithium battery backed real time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years. 4. Alarm contacts shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system safety fault. B. Display and Keypad: 1. Provide minimum 80 character liquid crystal display that is both viewable in direct sunlight and has LED backlighting for nighttime viewing. Provide one keypad and display panel per chiller. 2. Display and keypad shall be accessible through display access door without opening main controUelectrical cabinet doors. 3. Display shall provide a minimum of unit setpoints, status, electrical data, temperature data, pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the use of a coded display. 4. Sealed keypad shall include On/Off switch. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Programmable Setpoints (within Manufacturer's limits): display language; leaving chilled liquid temperature: setpoint„ control range; local or remote control; units of measure; compressor lead/lag; and maximum chilled water setpoint reset temperature range. D. Display Data: Chiller liquid return and leaving temperatures, ambient, lead compressor identification, clock and schedule, (variable) out of range, remote input indication, chilled liquid reset setpoint, and history data for last en shutdown faults. Compressor suction, discharge, and oil pressures and temperatures, suction and discharge superheats, percent of full -load, operating hours, starts, and anti - recycle timer status. Status Messages for manual override, unti switch off, compressor run, run permissive, remote controlled shut down, no cooling load, daily/holiday shut down, anti - recycle timer. E. Predictive Control Points: Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when operating outside design conditions by optimizing the chiller controls and cooling load output to stay online and avoid safety limits being reached. The system shall monitor the following parameters and the maintain the maximum cooling output possible without shutdown of the equipment: motor current, suction pressure and discharge pressure. F. System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto -reset shut down; manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Includes: high discharge pressure or temperature, low suction pressure, high/low motor current, high motor temperature, high pressure switch, high/low differential oil pressure, high oil temperature, low suction superheat, critical sensor malfunction, low or high current, phase loss /single phase power, overload of motor windings, and low voltage. G. Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if: high or low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage and flow switch operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per manufacturer's requirement. H. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic chiller operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring necessary to interface sensors to the chiller control system. 2.7 POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power /Control Panel: 1. NEMA (IP55), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing. Provide main power connection(s), compressor starters and fan motor contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring. 2. Panel shall include control display access door. B. Single Point Power: 1. Provide single point power connection to chiller, shall be 3 phase of scheduled voltage. 2. Circuit breaker shall be provided at point of incoming single point connection to provide disconnecting means AND be sized to provide the motor branch circuit protection, short ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 7 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA circuit protection and ground fault protection for the motor branch - circuit conductors, the motor control apparatus and the motors. Circuit breaker shall be equipped with lockable operating handle that shall extend through power panel door so that power may be disconnected without opening any panel doors. C. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and wired control transformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit power supply. Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side and provide 115V/ single phase on secondary. D. Short Circuit Withstand Rating of the chiller electrical enclosure shall be (200V & 230V: 100,000 Amps, 380, 400 & 460V: 65,000 Amps, 575V: 42,000 Amps) Rating shall be in accordance with UL508. E. Motor Starters: Motor starters shall be reduced inrush type (Wye -Delta or Solid State) for minimum electrical inrush. Across the line type starters will not be acceptable. F. Power Factor: 1. Provide equipment with a power factor of 95 %. 2. Power factor shall be same at full load and throughout part load operation. Designs that produce a power factor that reduces during part load operation will not be acceptable. 3. Externally mounted power factor correction capacitors will not be acceptable. G. Exposed compressor and fan motor power wiring shall be routed through liquid tight conduit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing -in for concrete equipment bases, anchor -bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations. 1. Final water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing -in for piping and electrical connections. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION A. Install water chillers on concrete base. Rig and install in full accordance with Manufacturer's requirements, Project drawings, and contract documents. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor chiller mounting frame to concrete base. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 8 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy - coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Cast -in -place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. C. Maintain manufacturers recommended clearances for service and maintenance. D. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Chilled- and condenser -water piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance. F. Ground water chillers according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Evaporator Connections: Connect inlet to evaporator with controller -bulb well, shutoff valve, thermometer, strainer, pressure gage, and union or flange. Connect outlet to evaporator with shutoff valve, flow switch, balancing valve, thermometer, pressure gage, and union or flange. D. Condenser Connections: Connect inlet to condenser with shutoff valve, thermometer, plugged tee, and pressure gage. Connect outlet to condenser with shutoff valve, thermometer, drain line and shutoff valve, strainer, and plugged tee. E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: Extend vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Inspect field- assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 9 D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION END OF SECTION 15626 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run -in period according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief is vented outside (for water - cooled water chillers). 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller startup and shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled water flow and low- temperature interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. ROTARY -SCREW WATER CHILLERS 15626 - 10 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of computer -room air - conditioning units: 1. Floor - mounting units 6 tons and larger. 1.3 SUBMITTALS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality - control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For computer -room air - conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Energy - Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water - cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of computer -room air - conditioning units with computer -room access flooring Installer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of computer -room air - conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Units are Owner furnished and Contractor installed. 2.2 FLOOR - MOUNTING UNITS 6 TONS AND LARGER A. Manufacturers: 1. Liebert Corporation. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 2 1. Assembly: Downflow air delivery, in draw- through configuration. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, and controls. C. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel, suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings; with floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads. 1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges, and concealed fastening devices. 2. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 1- inch -thick duct liner. 3. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked -on, textured vinyl enamel, manufacturers standard color. 4. Floor Stand: Welded tubular steel, 24 inches high. D. Evaporator Fan: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, and statically and dynamically balanced. 1. Drive: V -belt drive with steel shaft with self - aligning ball bearings and cast -iron or steel sheaves, variable- and adjustable -pitch motor sheave, minimum of two matched belts, with drive rated at a minimum of two times the nameplate rating of motor. 2. Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." a. Noise Rating: Quiet. b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. c. Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections. E. Chilled -Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with modulating control valve. Mount coil assembly over stainless -steel drain pan. F. Filter: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded - wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame. 1. Nominal Thickness: 4 inches . 2. Dust -Spot Efficiency: 30 percent. 3. Weight Arrestance: 90 to 92 percent. 4. Initial Resistance at 500 -FPM Face Velocity: 0.30 -inch wg. 5. Recommended Final Resistance: 1 -inch wg. G. Integral Electrical Controls: Unit - mounted electrical enclosure with piano- hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control - circuit transformer. COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 3 H. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded -case circuit breaker with handle accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position. Microprocessor- Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm on system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one malfunction occurs, system displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display fault when malfunction is cleared until system is reset. 1. Malfunctions: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 CONNECTIONS a. Power Loss. b. Loss of Airflow. c. Clogged Air Filter. d. High Room Temperature. e. Low Room Temperature. f. Smoke /Fire. g. Water- under - Floor. h. Supply Fan Overload. 2. LED Display: a. Control Power On. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Drainage Connections: Provide adequate connections condensate drain. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3. Push buttons shall stop and start process cooling system, silence audible alarm, test LED indicators. 4. Remote Signaling: Provide terminals for remote signaling of system status and alarms. A. Install computer -room air - conditioning units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 4 E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field- assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 2. After installing computer -room air - conditioning units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Verify that computer -room air - conditioning units are installed and connected according to manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. B. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit- breaker trip ranges as indicated. COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer -room air - conditioning units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15734 COMPUTER -ROOM AIR - CONDITIONING UNITS 15734 - 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. I/O: Input/output. C. MS/TP: Master slave /token passing. D. PC: Personal computer. E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 1 1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1.6 SUBMITTALS a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. g. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. h. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. i. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. j. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. k. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01 -inch wg. 1. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1 -inch wg. m. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: A. Refer to drawings for sequence of operations, control diagrams and I/O point summaries. A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers /transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays /switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third -party applications. 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 2 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 6. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 7. DDC System Hardware: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations. 8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 9. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list. C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with existing system. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover with factory- applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover. F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems. G. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions. H. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. I. Field quality - control test reports. J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 3 1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed -air station. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step -by -step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory- Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units. C. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. TAC Americas, INC. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. 2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read -only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each UO point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand -alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete /digital, analog, and pulse UO. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. Control units shall be compatible to existing system protocol. B. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on -off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low - voltage (0- to 10 -V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on -off or pulsed low - voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation with three- position (on- off -auto) override switches and status lights. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10 -V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two - position (auto - manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer. 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three- point, floating -type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 5 C. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current - limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full -wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100 - mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built -in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. D. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse -mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common -mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Unitized, capable of stand -alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient UO capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real -time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services compatible with existing system. 4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 5. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F (5 to 65 deg C). 2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10 -stage type, with heavy -duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor -Reset Controllers: Remote -bulb or bimetal rod - and -tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double -pole contacts. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 6 C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone- bridge - amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote - resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple -input models with control -point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set -point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode. 1. Remote - control -point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig. 2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig. 3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent. 4. Air - supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply pressure. 5. Gages: 2 -1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide -scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter input or output pressure. 2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m). 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless -steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches. 6. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. C. RTDs and Transmitters: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2 -1/2 inches. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 7 6. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 2.7 STATUS SENSORS WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Static - Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static - Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 -inch wg. d. Duct Static- Pressure Range: 0- to 5 -inch wg. 2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential- Pressure Transducers: Stainless -steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150 -psig (1034 -kPa) operating pressure and tested to 300 - psig (2070 -kPa); linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differential- Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot -duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential - pressure switch with pilot -duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5 -inch wg. B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current - sensing fixed- or split - core transformers with self - powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. C. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600 -V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single -loop, self - powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full -scale accuracy. D. Power Monitor: 3 -phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20 -mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. E. Current Switches: Self- powered, solid -state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. F. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10 -V dc, feedback signal. G. Water -Flow Switches: Bellows- actuated mercury or snap- acting type with pilot -duty rating, stainless -steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 8 2.8 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two- position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2. Permanent Split- Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring -return motors with inte 3. gral spiral -spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 4. Nonspring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf . 5. Spring -Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2 -1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf . 6. Nonspring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf 7. Spring -Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. B. Electronic Actuators: Direct - coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full- stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch- lb /sq. ft of damper. b. Opposed -Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch- lb /sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch- lb /sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed -Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch- lb /sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4 -Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm. Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V -bolt and V- shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation- sensing circuitry. 6. Fail -Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring -return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring -return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two - Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 -V ac or 8 W at 24 -V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10 -V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10 -V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: [Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 9 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.9 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles - Jamesbury. 6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 4. Sizing: 3 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug -type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless -steel or brass seats. a. Single- Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double- Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two -Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three -Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two -way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three - way valves shall have linear characteristics. 6. Close -Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close -off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two - way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 10 D. Butterfly Valves: 200 -psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 536 ductile -iron body and bonnet, extended neck, replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer 2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze. 3. Sizing: 1 -psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 2.10 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA ASTM A 126 cast -iron or stainless -steel stem, field- B. Dampers: AMCA- rated, opposed -blade design; 0.108 -inch minimum thick, galvanized -steel or 0.125 -inch minimum thick, extruded - aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064 -inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm -) diameter, zinc - plated axles using zinc - plated hardware, with oil- impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring- stainless -steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed -cell neoprene. 2.11 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber -optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct -, pipe -, and equipment- mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 11 3.2 INSTALLATION WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. C. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." I. Install duct volume - control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts. J. Install electronic and fiber -optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 12 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number -code or color -code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual -reset limit controls independent of manual- control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand - off -auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field- assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. DDC Verification: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 6. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self - contained pressure regulators. 7. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 8. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 13 9. Check air - operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 10. Check DDC system as follows: 3.5 ADJUSTING 5. Flow: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three -point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision- resistant source. a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3 -point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision- resistance source. HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 14 b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. B. Adjust initial temperature set points. END OF SECTION 15900 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. HVAC [NSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 15 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: 3. HVAC equipment quantitative - performance settings. 4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. 5. Vibration measuring. 6. Sound level measuring. 7. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 8. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING a. Constant- volume air systems. b. Variable- air - volume systems. a. Constant -flow systems. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - I E. NC: Noise criteria. F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. 0. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 2 F. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project -site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Engineer's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from TAB firm's forms approved by Engineer. E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 3 B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate the efforts of factory- authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 4 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems- -Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA N. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. O. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable- air - volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two -way valves and three -way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air - pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 6 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor banter and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper - control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed- control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts. C. For variable - air - volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air - handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 7 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT- VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions m ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air - handling unit. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR- VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set -point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure - Independent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable - air - volume systems as follows: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Set outside -air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust -air dampers at a position that simulates full- cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal -unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal -unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant- volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant - volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets as described for constant - volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static - pressure controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch- circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup - water- station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential - pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 9 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive - displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow- indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: I. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. G. Measure the differential - pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 10 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three -way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat - exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal- protection - element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT - TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature - control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight -hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 11 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria: 1. Solid -state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second. 3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils. 4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies. B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing. 1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures. 1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 2. Clear the space of people. 1. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans: a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested. D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is complete. E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer. F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested. G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW). H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes. 1. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the differences. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 12 J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored. 4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel - to- solid distance. 5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base and the floor. 3.14 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND -LEVEL MEASUREMENTS A. Perform sound - pressure -level measurements with an octave -band analyzer complying with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound -level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave -band filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification. C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone. D. Perform sound -level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete. E. Close windows and doors to the space. F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum. G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line -of -sight between the sound source and the sound -level meter. H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches above the floor and at least 36 inches from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the measurements. I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz. J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating. 1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on the difference and adjust measurements. K. Perform sound testing at 3 locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 13 1. Private office. 2. Open office area. 3. Conference room. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant sound source. 3.15 TEMPERATURE- CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low- temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply -air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail -safe operations. 3.16 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Retum, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 14 3.17 REPORTING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.18 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter - quality font, on standard bond paper, in three -ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 15 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside -, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable- air - volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static- pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. F. Air - Handling Unit Test Reports: For air - handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. J. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 16 b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static - pressure differential in inches wg. f. Cooling coil static - pressure differential in inches wg. g. Outside airflow in cfm. h. Return airflow in cfm. i. Outside -air damper position. j. Return-air damper position. G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry -bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering -water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F. H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 17 1. Fan Data: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to- center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. I. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross - section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air - handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfin. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. J. Air - Terminal- Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 18 a. System and air - handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air- terminal - device make. f. Air- terminal- device number from system diagram. g. Air - terminal - device type and model number. h. Air - terminal- device size. i. Air - terminal- device effective area in sq. ft. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. K. Vibration Measurement Reports: 1. Date and time of test. 2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower. 4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations. 5. Measurement readings for each measurement location. 6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken. 7. Description of predominant vibration source. L. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms: 1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve. 2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number. 4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location. 5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow. 6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal. 7. Description of predominant sound source. M. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 19 3.19 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: B. Final Inspection: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. 1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Engineer. 2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Engineer. 3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8 -hour business day. 4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 20 3.20 ADDITIONAL TESTS END OF SECTION 15950 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near -peak summer and winter conditions. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 21 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA DESCRIPTION: This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 16. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including UNIFORM GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 specification sections, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying Electrical Plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. 1.3 WARRANTIES: A. Refer to Section: CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 1.4 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS: A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures. B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by The Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed. C. All submittals shall be originals or clearly legible reproductions of originals. Do not submit facsimiles (FAXES) or copies of FAXES. FAXES or copies of FAXES received by the ENGINEER will be returned without review or comment. 1.5 DEFINITIONS: A. Contractor: Where the word "Contractor" is used throughout the Electrical Specifications, it shall mean the Subcontractor to the General Contractor for this project. Electrical Contractors shall be Subcontractors to the General Contractor. Each Subcontractor shall BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -1 refer to the "Instructions to Bidders" section of the Architectural Specifications for information regarding bonds required to be provided by Subcontractors for this project. 13. Engineer: Where the term "Engineer ", "Engineers ", or "Consulting Engineers" is referred to in the Mechanical and/or Electrical sections of the specifications, it shall refer to WTA, Inc., Consulting Engineers. C. Exposed: Conduit and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details; Change Orders; concealed control system devices. 13. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: A. Include the following information: (1) Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts. (2) Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break -in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. (3) Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. (4) Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT LISTING: A. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated. B. All major items of equipment to be installed on electrical systems operating at 600 volts or less shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Said items shall include the following: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -2 Switchboard Panelboards Contactors Transformers Disconnect Switches C. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items. 2.3 NAMEPLATE DATA: Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. SPACE REQUIREMENTS: (1) (2) The routing of piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is approximate and where light fixtures or other items of work are to be recessed in ceiling, piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., shall be routed around the light fixtures or other items of work where there is not sufficient space for same to be routed above such item of work with the recessed item properly installed. Any required changes due to the Contractor's failure to properly coordinate his work with recessed items shall be made by the Contractor installing such piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., all at no additional cost to the Owner. (3) B. PRECEDENCE: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Contractor shall verify that each electrical panel, light fixture, device, and each other item of work furnished by him shall fit into the available space before ordering same. Any required changes due to the Contractor's failure to verify that each item of his equipment will fit into the available space shall be made by the Contractor furnishing the equipment, all at no additional cost to the Owner. All conduits and all other items of work supported from the structure above shall be installed as high as physically possible (not just as convenient) considering all work required to be installed in the available space. If any such work is installed lower than it could have been installed, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials to remove same and reinstall the work as high as possible, all at no additional cost to the Owner. The mechanical and electrical work shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: (1) Light fixtures and air conditioning ceiling outlets. (2) Soil and waste piping. (3) Ductwork. (4) Cold and hot water systems. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -3 (5) Electric wiring. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING: Each Contractor installing conduit, passing through the roof shall provide all flashing and counterflashing required for his work. D. STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS: (1) These specifications and the drawings accompanying same are intended to cover an installation which will not interfere with the structural design of the building, which will fit into the several available spaces, and which will insure a complete and satisfactory mechanical and electrical system. (2) Each bidder shall therefore carefully examine the plans for all branches of the work and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the building. (3) (1) (3) (1) Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those shown on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. E. WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES: Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes, cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. (2) Thickness: Not less than 3/32 -inch for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.025 for up to 3 -inch pipe, 0.035 for larger pipe. Locations: Use where conduit penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations. F. ACCESS DOORS: Contractor shall fumish and install all access doors required for proper operation and service of all work installed under his contract. Access doors other than for ductwork shall be factory fabricated with concealed hinges and shall have screwdriver operated locks. Access doors in fire rated walls shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories 1 -1/2 hour "B" label. All access doors shall be as approved by the Architect for the particular area involved. All access doors shall be painted as directed by the Owner unless indicated or specified elsewhere to be chrome plated. G. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -4 (2) Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off -site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. (3) H. LARGE APPARATUS: All large pieces of apparatus which are to be installed in the buildings, which are too large to permit access through doorways, stairways, or shafts shall be brought to the job by this Contractor and placed in the spaces before the enclosing structure is completed. All apparatus shall be cribbed up from the floor by Contractor and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering where necessary to completely protect the equipment. I. CUTTING AND PATCHING: (1) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of electrical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment. (2) Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. (3) (5) Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations. (4) No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill- timed, defective, or non - conforming installations. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill -timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. f. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. (6) Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -5 ( (8) J. ROUGH -IN: (1) (3) (5) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. (1) Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. (2) Refer to equipment specifications in Division 15 for rough -in requirements. K. SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS: General: Proper openings through floors, walls, roofs, etc., for the passage of conduits shall be provided. All conduit penetrations of concrete floors, walls, etc., must pass through sleeves or be cast in place. Sleeves shall be set in new construction before a concrete slab is poured, as cutting holes through any part of the concrete will not be permitted. (2) The minimum clearance between horizontal penetrations and sleeve shall be 1/4" except that the minimum clearance shall be 2" where piping contacts the ground. Sleeves through walls and partitions shall be installed flush with exposed surfaces. Penetrations through floors shall be fitted with sleeves of the next larger pipe size, grouted in place, and extended 2" above the finish floor. Materials: Sleeves shall be of standard weight galvanized iron pipe, except heavy gauge galvanized iron sleeves may be utilized in concrete pours where acceptable to the Architect for size, and metal gauge. Sleeves in footings and grade beams, where pipes enter or leave the building, pass through concrete or masonry shall be Schedule 80 PVC along the pipe route from the underground installation to the coupling installed above the ground. (4) Vermin- Proofing: The open space around all conduits, etc., passing through the ground floor and/or exterior walls, shall be sealed with a continuous bead of sealant. The space around conduit passing through air plenums, shall be made airtight in a manner acceptable to the Architect. Ceiling plenums used for return air are considered air plenums. (6) Conduit penetrations of fire rated construction shall be sealed in accordance with Section: FIRESTOPPING. 3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -6 B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and other structural components, as they are constructed. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. I. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components. J. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. K. Do not position outlets, panels, etc., opposite to other objects. Stagger outlets, panels, etc., laterally by at least one stud. L. Maintain minimum clearance of 6" between conduit and piping and 12" between conduit and heat sources. M. Provide framed one -line diagrams in the Main Electrical Room and Generator Room Enclosure. N. Feeder Size Omission: In the event that an electrical feeder size is omitted, the Contractor shall report the same to the Engineers in time to issue an Addendum prior to bid date. If the omission is not discovered in time to issue an Addendum, the Contractor shall base his bid on installation of conductors sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code to be protected by the overcurrent device serving the feeder. Conductors shall be oversized as required to limit voltage drop in the feeder to a maximum of 3 %. Conduit for these conductors shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Contractor shall confirm the conduit and conductor sizes with the Engineer before purchase and installation of same. O. Provide properly sized junction /pull boxes where maximum of three 90° bends between boxes has occurred. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -7 P. Concrete pad foundations shall extend at least 6" below local frost depth. Q. Seal all penetrations in fire rated walls with approved fire rated sealant. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA R. Relabel existing panelboard directories to reflect demolition/ modifications to circuit. S. Provide adequate 4" round, concrete filled steel bollards in areas where electrical equipment is installed in vehicular traveled areas. T. Provide individual neutral conductor with each individual hot conductor (circuit). Do not share neutrals between circuits. 3.3 CLEANING: A. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps. END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16050 -8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCR[PTION: A. System Grounding: 1. Secondary service neutrals shall be grounded at the supply side of the main service disconnecting means. 2. Separately derived systems (transformers) shall have the secondary neutral grounded. B. Equipment Grounding: GROUNDING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. All metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be grounded for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. Division -16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Test Reports: 1. Submit certified test reports of ground resistance to the Engineer for approval. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit catalog cuts and descriptive literature for approval in accordance with Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND COLORS. 2. Include sufficient information, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this section to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Except where a specific date is given, the issue in effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) on the date of GROUNDING 16060 -1 Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text such specifications and standard are referred to by basic designation only. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): No. 83 Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires No. 44 Rubber - Insulated Wires and Cables No. 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, with THW insulation color identified green, except where otherwise shown on the drawings, or specified. B. Wire size shall not be less than shown on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC. 2.2 GROUND RODS: Shall be copperclad steel, 5/8 -inch diameter by 10 feet long, unless otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALLY: A. Grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. Size grounding electrode and equipment grounding conductors in accordance with Table 250 -66 and Article 250 -122 respectively. 3.2 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS: A. Main Bonding Jumper: 1. Connect the secondary service neutral to the grounded bus in the service equipment. B. Grounding Electrode System: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Provide a connection between the Principal Ground Point (PGP) ground bar and the service equipment neutral bus. 2. Provide a connection between the Principal Ground Point (PGP) ground bar and the building structural steel. GROUNDING 1 6060 -2 3. Provide a connection between the Principal Ground Point (PGP) ground bar and the building interior metal water piping. 4. Provide a connection between the Principal Ground Point (PGP) ground bar and the ground field. 5. Unless otherwise noted, size all grounding electrode conductors in accordance with Table 250 -66 of the NEC. C. Service Disconnect: 1. Provide a grounded neutral bar and separate grounding bar bolted to the enclosure with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors. Bond neutral bar to grounding bar, sized in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. D. Panelboards: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Connect the various feeder green grounding conductors to the grounding bus in the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors. 2. Connect the grounding electrode conductor to the grounded bus if panelboard contains main service disconnect. 3. Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to the housing, by grounding bushings and ground wire to the grounding bus. E. Transformers: 1. Separately derived system (transformers downstream from service equipment): Ground the secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide separate grounding electrode conductors from the transformer ground bus to each of the following: a. Driven ground rod. b. Building structural steel. c. Building interior metal water piping system. F. Conduit Systems: 1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. 2. Non - metallic conduit systems shall contain a grounding conductor. GROUNDING 16060 -3 3. Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding conductor shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit. G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install green grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits as follows: 1. All feeders. 2. All receptacle outlets. 3. All toggle (light) switches. 4. All light switches. 5. All motors and motor controllers. 6. All fixed equipment and appliances. 7. All items of equipment where the final connection is made with flexible metal conduit shall have a grounding wire. 8. All additional locations and systems as shown on the drawings. 9. All light fixtures. H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards: 1. Bond grounding conductors to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the ground conductors pass. 2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination. 3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs for terminating the ground wires. I. Motors and Starters: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing for ground wire termination. 2. Make ground wire connections to ground bus in motor control centers. J. Receptacles: Receptacles not approved for grounding through there mounting screws shall have a ground wire from green ground terminal to the outlet box ground screw. K. Lighting Fixtures: Shall be grounded with green grounding conductors. L. Electrical Appliances and Equipment: Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall have a ground lug installed for termination of the green ground conductor. GROUNDING 16060 -4 M. Provide and size all equipment grounding conductors in accordance with Article 250 -122 of the NEC. 3.4 CENTRAL OFFICE GROUNDING SYSTEM: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and services required to provide or upgrade a Central Office grounding system complete and in accordance with drawings, details, and as specified herein. B. The Contractor's particular attention is called to the requirements of the grounding system hereafter noted: (1) Conductors shall be copper insulated and taped for identification as specified and shown on the drawings. (2) Grounding conductors shall be routed only in nonmetallic conduit (PVC) where shown to be in conduit. Where local building codes do not permit the use of PVC conduit, grounding conductors shall be installed in metallic conduit with #6 bonding jumpers between ground bar or grounding conductor itself and ends of conduit. Provide conduit ground clamp for connection to this grounding jumper. Provide compression (crimp) connection between grounding conductor inside the conduit and the grounding jumper. (3) Conductors (either in conduit or not in conduit) shall be routed only through nonmetallic sleeves when passing through ceilings, floors, walls. (4) Conductors shall not be: encircled with metal clamps routed through metal walls, metal plates, or even short section of metal conduit or duct. Carlon non - metallic snap straps or approved equal shall be installed. (5) (6) Grounding conductors (in conduit or not in conduit) shall be supported by approved non - metallic clamps, ties, etc. Supports shall be Carlon snap straps or equal approved by the Engineer. ( Bends in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. Conductor bends shall have a large radius. Minimum radius for bends shall be as follows: a. 6 inch minimum for up to No. 6 gauge. b. 12 inch minimum for up to 4/0 gauge. c. 24 inch minimum for sizes greater than No. 4/0 gauge. Ground rod handhole and cover shall be cast iron (traffic rated where required) or reinforced fiber type (Quazite) handhole with 6 inch extension rings and lid with word "Ground Electrode" stamped in lid. The lid shall be painted green. GROUNDING 16060 -5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA The Electrical Contractor shall identify each ground conductor connecting to each ground bar with a 2 "x3" phenolic tag. Refer to drawings. Ground field and building steel ground conductors shall be solid, bare, tinned copper conductors of size indicated on drawings unless otherwise noted. The exterior ground field shall be continuous with no splices to provide continuous loop (cadwelds shall not be considered a splice). Other ground conductors shall be Type XHHW with green insulation or approved equal. (10) Termination of all grounding conductors at ground bar shall be made with T & B or Burndy, copper, 2 hole "YA" series compression type, long barrel lugs. Lug shall be compressed onto conductor (number of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, minimum 2 compresses) using hydraulic compression tool with full circumference die and be a U.L. approved assembly. Provide inspection port and clear heat shrink. At least three threads of the bolt shall protrude from the attached nut and be tightened to manufacturer recommended torque. Refer to detail on drawings for the application of NO -OX -ID compound on ground bars, and lugs. (11) Terminations at ground rods shall be by exothermic weld (cadweld). (12) Terminations at electrical system ground bus shall be by mechanical connection to ground bus. (13) Terminations at raised floor air conditioning unit frames shall be made with T & B or Burndy, copper, 2 hole "YA" series compression type, long barrel lugs. Lug shall be compressed onto conductor (number of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, minimum 2 compresses) using hydraulic compression tool with full circumference die and be a U.L. approved assembly. Provide inspection port and clear heat shrink. At least three threads of the bolt shall protrude from the attached nut and be tightened to manufacturer recommended torque. (14) Generator skid shall be grounded by cadweld, no mechanical connections. C. Before any part of the grounding system is covered up, the Contractor shall request an inspection of all portions of the Central Station grounding system (including reinforcing steel) and shall obtain approval of the Owner, in writing. Should the Contractor fail to obtain this inspection and approval before same is covered up, the Contractor shall remove all such work from the jobsite and rebuild same until it is inspected and approved as described above, all at no additional cost to the Owner. During the inspection, the Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor required to sectionalize various portions of the grounding system so that resistance can be checked. D. The Electrical Contractor is cautioned that substitutions of materials or devices will only be accepted if approved by the Engineer in writing and he shall order all materials required for the central grounding system as soon as the contract is GROUNDING 16060 -6 END OF SECTION 16060 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA awarded. The delivery time for these materials shall not be presented as an extension of construction performance time. 3.5 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST: A. The resistance of each grounding system shall be measured using the fall -of- potential method as called out in specification 16450 C.2, Grounding system test, in the Verizon Business Civil Engineering Handbook, latest revision. 3.6 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION: A. Distance: Drive each rod vertically so that the cadweld connection is a minimum of 30 inches below finish grade. B. Multiple Rods: Where required to obtain the specified ground resistance, install multiple rods along the new ground conductor, 20 foot minimum distance between rods. C. All buried ground connections shall be exothermic welds. D. Grounding system connections to the AST shall be with a "hi- Press" type, 2 hole lug. GROUNDING I6060 -7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. This section includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and lighting wiring. B. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be provided, installed, and connected to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications. C. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, communication and signal wiring shall be provided, installed, and connected to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables, low voltage (600 volts and below) specified herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit catalog cuts and descriptive literature for approval in accordance with Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND COLORS. 2. Include sufficient information, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): No. 44 Rubber - Insulated Wire and Cables WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA No. 83 Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires No. 493 Thermoplastic - Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables No. 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA - specified type wire and cable reels. Containers and reels shall be unbroken and each shall bear a tag giving the name of the manufacturer, the trade name of the wire and a UL label. B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires /cables is maintained. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Wire and cable shall be equal to that manufactured by General Cable, Phelps Dodge Cable and Wire Corp., Rome Cable Corp., Southwire Company, or Triangle PWC, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Cable and Wire (Power and Lighting): 1. Cable and wire shall be in accordance with UL, NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. 2. Conductors: a. Shall be copper. Aluminum conductors will not be acceptable. b. Shall be single conductor. c. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 and larger. Sizes No. 10, and smaller shall be solid. d. All control conductors shall be stranded. e. Size shall be not less than shown on the drawings. Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG. WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -2 f. 20 amp branch lighting and power circuits with farthest outlet more than 50' from their distribution panelboard shall have conductors not less than No. 10 AWG. g- Central station ground conductors shall be type XHHW in PVC conduit. 3. Insulation: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, insulation shall be as follows: a. Use THHN or THWN cables. b. Use XHHW cables for all underground installations. 4. Color code: a. All conductors and branch circuits shall be color coded as herein specified and strictly in accordance with Article 210 of the N.E. Code. (1) (3) All conductors connected to a 277/480 volt power distribution system shall be color coded as follows: Phase 1 - Brown Phase 2 - Yellow Phase 3 - Purple Neutral - Grey Ground - Green Phase 1 - Black Phase 2 - Red Phase 3 - Blue Neutral - White Ground - Green WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA (2) All conductors connected to a 120/208 volt power distribution system shall be color coded as follows: All conductors intended solely for grounding of equipment and devices shall be green unless indicated on the drawings to be bare. (4) Under no circumstances shall green or white be used for any conductors other than for ground or grounded neutral conductors, respectively. b. The insulation on all No. 12, No. 10, and No. 8 conductors shall have solid color compound or solid color coating. c. No. 6 AWG and larger conductors shall have either: (1) Solid color compound or solid color coating. (2) Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above. WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -3 (3) B. Splices and Joints: 1. Shall be in accordance with UL and NEC. 2. Branch circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller): 3. Feeder Circuits: 4. Plastic Electrical Insulating Tape: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Colored pressure - sensitive plastic tape. Tape shall be applied in half overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for all terminal points, and in all junction boxes, pull boxes, and troughs. Tape shall be 3/4 -inch wide with colors as specified above. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type. a. Connectors shall be solderless, screw -on, pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degree C, with integral insulation. They shall be approved for copper conductors, and shall be reusable. b. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires. c. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with. a. General: Provide factory- fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ratings, materials, types and classes as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and NEC standards. Select from the following types, classes, kinds and styles: Type: Crimp Type: Threaded Type: Compression - Machine set, ring crimp /Circumferential Crimp (Single indent not permitted) Class: Insulated Kind: Aluminum - DO NOT FURNISH CU /A1 rated connectors other than compression. Kind: Copper (for Cu to Cu connection). Kind: Aluminum- Copper (for Al to Cu connection). AL /CU compression Style: Butt connection. Copper compression only. Style: Split -bolt parallel connection. Copper Style: Tap connection. Copper Style: Pigtail connection. Spring type Scotch -lok b. Existing aluminum conductors shall be removed and circuits re- conductored with copper for any relocated items. WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -4 C. Control Wiring: 1. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except minimum size may be No. 14 AWG. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2. Wire size shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT for requirements related to Division 15 work. D. Wire Lubricating Compound: 1. Shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALLY: a. Tape shall be flame retardant, cold and weather resistant. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B. All wiring of every description shall be installed in raceway systems unless specifically noted or specified otherwise. C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes. D. All wiring inside panel cabinets shall be neatly arranged, run parallel and perpendicular to the lines of the cabinets, neatly laced to hold the wiring in place, and shall be arranged so that each conductor can be easily and readily traced from its circuit breaker to its conduit leaving the cabinet. E. No wiring serving electrically sensitive equipment shall be run in the same conduit serving any other load for any other piece of electrically sensitive equipment. F. No wiring for the 120/208 volt system shall be run in the same conduit with wiring for the 277/480 volt system. G. No wiring for the fire alarm system shall be run in the same conduit with wiring for any other system. H. No wiring for the sound signal and/or communication system shall be run in the same conduit with any other system. WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA I. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground between the wire and conduit, where the cable exits the conduit, with a non - hardening approved compound. J. Wire Pulling: 1. Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting or abrasion of conduits during pulling of feeders. 2. Ropes used for pulling feeders shall be made of suitable nonmetallic material. 3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. 4. All cables in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. K. Where 3 -phase circuits are connected to 3 -phase motors, temporary connections shall be made at motor terminals to determine proper rotation and any reversing of phases shall be done at the motor terminals in order to maintain proper color coding of phase conductors. L. Install lighting taps with parallel compression connectors that do not require cutting the feeder conductors. All feeder conductors shall be point to point without splices. Where splices are required by field conditions, the method employed shall be pre- approved on a case by case basis. M. Install splices and taps which have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent -or -better than conductor. N. Use splices and tap connectors, which are compatible with conductor material, and UL listed for the application which conform to current standards. O. Do not provide aluminum connectors or terminal connections. P. Standard compression tool T &B six sided compression tool with T & B copper lugs. 3.2 SPLICE INSTALLATION: A. Where the Engineer determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, the device shall be removed and approved devices properly installed shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION: A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, install wiring and connect to perform the functions shown on the drawings and specified in other sections of these specifications. WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -6 B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems. C. Where power supply circuits are not shown for systems, connect them to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation. D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de- energizing of the systems. E. System voltages shall not exceed 120 volts and shall be lower voltages where shown on the drawings or required by the NEC. 3.4 CONTROL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination. WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems. C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning. 3.5 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION: A. In each pullbox and junction box, install tags on all circuit cable and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. 3.6 FIELD TESTING: A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances. B. Test shall be performed by meggar and conductors shall test free from short- circuits and grounds. C. Test conductors phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. D. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests. END OF SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600V AND BELOW) 16120 -7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. This section includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of raceways, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceway is required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: RACEWAYS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Publications pertaining to raceways. 2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components which have been UL- listed and labeled. 3. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC pertaining to construction and installation of raceway systems. 4. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Federal Standard Publications pertaining to raceways where said standards are referenced. 1. Submit catalog cuts and descriptive literature for approval in accordance with Section SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. RACEWAYS 16130 -1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 2. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 3. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be marked on the catalog cuts. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Except where specific date is given, the issue in effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) on the date of Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text such specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only. A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): W- C- 582(1) Conduit, Raceway, Metal, and Fittings: Surface W- C -583B Conduit Boxes and Outlet Fittings, Floor (For Rigid Metal Conduit) W- C- 586B(1) Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps, Electrical: Cast Metal for Shore Use W- C -1094A Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid W- F -406B Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible W- F- 408C(1) Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid (Thick -wall and Thin -Wall (EMT) Type) W- J -800D Junction Box; Extension Junction Box; Cover Junction Box Steel, Cadmium, or Zinc- coated FF- S- 760A(2) Strap, Retaining (Metal for Conduit, Pipe and Cable) FF -S -325 Shield, Expansion, Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive INT AMD 3 Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) WW- C -540A Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Electrical, Aluminum) WW- C -563A Conduit, Metal, Rigid: Electrical, Thin -wall, Steel Type (Electrical Metallic Tubing); Straight Lengths. Elbows, and Bends WW -C -581 E Conduit, Metal, Rigid; and Couplings, Elbow and Nipple, Electrical Conduit: Zinc - coated. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): RACEWAYS 16130 -2 No. 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit No. 5 Surface Metal Electrical Raceway and Fittings No. 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit No. 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes No. 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment No. 514 Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings No. 651 Rigid Nonmetallic Electrical Conduit No. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing No. 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL: A. Metal Conduit and Tubing: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. All conduit and fittings shall be UL listed, in accordance with the NEC, and as hereinafter specified. 2. Size: Minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4 -inch. Size shall be in accordance with the NEC, but not less than shown on the drawings. Where permitted, by the NEC, 3/4 -inch flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Where used, flexible conduit to recessed lighting fixtures shall not be over 72" in length. 3. Conduit: a. Rigid steel: Fed. Spec. WW -C -581, ANSI C80.1, UL 6. b. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): UL 1242 and Fed. Spec. WW-C-581. c. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit. Rigid steel zinc - coated with additional external coating of PVC conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1. d. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Fed. Spec. WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3, UL 797. e. Flexible steel conduit (commercial greenfield): Fed. Spec. WW -C -566, UL 1. RACEWAYS 16130 -3 g. B. Conduit Fittings: Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit: Shall consist of flexible galvanized steel tubing over which is extruded a liquid -tight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Conduit shall be provided with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Indoor: RNC (Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit): NEMA TC2, Schedule 40 PVC. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC3; match conduit tubing type and material. 1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows. ANSI C80.1, Fed. Spec. W -F -408 shall apply, except material shall be steel or malleable iron only. IMC couplings may be integral retractable type. Use Type 1 fittings for raintight connections; use Type 2 fittings for concrete tight connections; use Type 3 fittings for miscellaneous connections. b. Locknuts shall be of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure. c. Bushings shall be of the metallic insulating type, and consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted. 2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a. ANSI C80.3, Fed. Spec. W -F -408 shall apply. b. Miscellaneous indoor fittings shall be all steel compression type. c. Set screw, cast compression and indent type connectors are not permitted. 3. Flexible steel conduit (greenfield) fittings: a. Fed. Spec. W -F -406 shall apply, except material shall be steel or malleable iron only. b. Shall be multiple point type, threading into the internal wall of the conduit convolutions, and shall have insulated throat. 4. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit fittings: a. Fed. Spec. W -F -406 shall apply, except material shall be steel or malleable iron only. RACEWAYS 16130 -4 C. Conduit Supports: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PENETRATIONS: A. Cutting of Holes: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA b. Shall be of a type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats. 1. All parts and hardware shall be zinc- coated or have equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Pipe Straps: Fed. Spec. FF -S -760, Type I, Style A or B. 3. Individual Conduit Hangers: Shall be designed for the purpose and have pre - assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving hanger rod. 4. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers shall be not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inch, 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels. Hanger rods shall be not less than 3/8 -inch diameter steel. 5. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Fed. Spec. FF -S -325. Anchors shall be GROUP III self - drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion anchors GROUP II, Type 2 or 4, or GROUP VIII. D. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes: 1. UL -50, UL -514, and Fed. Spec. W -J -800. 2. Shall be cast metal where required by the NEC or shown on the drawings. Boxes shall be rustproof. 3. Sheet metal boxes shall be galvanized steel except where otherwise shown on the drawings. E. Wall, Floor and Ceiling Plates: 1. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes, and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. 2. Thickness: Not less than 3/32 -inch for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.025 for up to 3 -inch pipe, 0.035 for larger pipe. 1. Holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures shall be cut with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or RACEWAYS 16130 -5 manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Architect/Engineer as required by limited working space. 2. Holes shall be located so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams. 3. Holes shall be laid out in advance. 4. In new construction, sleeves shall extend one inch minimum above the finished floor. B. Fire Stops: 1. Refer to Section: FIRESTOPPING. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Installation shall be in accordance with UL, NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B. Conduit installation shall be as follows: 1. No conduit shall be smaller than 3/4" unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2. All conduits shall be concealed in all finished parts of the building and in unfinished parts where it is possible to conceal the conduit. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, all conduits shall be sized in accordance with the NEC for THW insulated conductors of the size and quantity indicated. 4. All conduits shall be installed as complete runs before pulling in cables or wires. 5. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. 6. All conduits shall be installed so they will not obstruct head room, walkways, or doorways. 7. All conduits shall be cut square with a hacksaw, reamed, burrs removed, and drawn up tight. 8. All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. 9. All conduits shall be supported within one foot of all changes of direction, and within one foot of each enclosure to which connected. For conduits 1" and smaller support spacings shall not exceed 6-0 "; for conduits 1 -1/4" and larger support spacings shall not exceed 8' -0 ". 10. Ends of empty conduit to be closed with plugs or caps, at rough -in stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in. 11. Conduit shall not be installed under hoods. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA RACEWAYS 16130 -6 12. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers. 13. All lateral runs of conduits wherever possible and practical shall be so installed so as to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. 14. Joints of all conduit installed underground, in floor slabs, or in other locations subject to moisture, shall be sealed with an approved waterproof compound to insure 100% moisture tightness. 15. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials to provide all flashing and counterflashing required for all conduits passing through the roof. 16. Connections to all motors, transformers and other equipment subject to vibration shall be made using flexible conduit not less than 4" nor more than 18" in length. Flexible conduit exposed to weather shall be weatherproof flexible conduit with neoprene jacket (Sealtite). Connections to ceiling mounted light fixtures may be made with flexible conduit providing the flexible conduit is not more than 24" in length and all flexible conduit is in a concealed location. No flexible conduit connections to any light fixtures will be permitted in exposed locations. 17. Fish wires shall be left in all empty conduits. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 18. No conduit shall be routed underneath any boiler or in close proximity to any heat producing equipment. 19. MC cable and liquid -tight flexible non - metallic conduit is not permitted for any application. 20. Use compression steel conduit fittings. 21. Arrange multiple conduits, located below pedestal (Raised) flooring, in horizontal position to minimize obstruction of airflow. 22. Seal conduits at each end where one end is exposed to unconditioned space. 23. Provide nylon bushings at termination of open ended conduit. C. Conduit Bends: 1. Shall be made with standard conduit bending machines. 2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits. 3. Conduits shall not be bent with a pipe tee or vise. RACEWAYS 16130 -7 D. Layout and Homeruns: 1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, substantially as shown on the drawings. Any change resulting in a savings in labor or material is to be made only in accordance with a contract change order. 2. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences. E. Conduit Fittings: WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. 2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1 -1/4" are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. 3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4" and larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. 4. Where indicated or required, bushings of standard or insulated type shall have screw type grounding terminal. 5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece unions, split couplings, and plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application. F. Wall, Floor and Ceiling Plates: 1. Provide plates where conduits penetrate walls, floors and ceilings in exposed locations. 3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION: A. In Concrete: 1. Conduit shall be rigid steel or IMC. 2. Conduit shall be run in direct lines. 3. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete which is less than three inches thick. a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is not permitted. b. Spacing between conduits in slab shall be approximately six conduit diameters apart except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings. RACEWAYS 16130 -8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA c. Conduits shall be installed approximately at the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 3/4 -inch of concrete around them. 4. Couplings and connections shall be watertight. Thread compounds shall be UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. B. Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls: 1. Conduit shall be rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Types shall not be mixed indiscriminately in the same system. 2. Conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. Where conduits are installed in walls and partitions, conduit shall be installed in the vertical plane only. Lateral (horizontal) conduit installations in walls and partitions between outlets, switches, j- boxes, etc., are not permitted. If indicated on plans, conduits shall be installed in masonry walls. Conduits where installed in masonry walls, except face brick walls, must be chased in to face of same in vertical lines only, no lateral chases in walls or partitions being permitted. In face brick or glazed tile walls, conduits shall be concealed within the wall construction. 3. Branch circuit conduits, and conduits feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by the suspended ceiling or its supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning ducts. 4. Recessed lighting fixtures shall be connected to conduit runs with not over six feet (6') of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture. 3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION: A. Exposed conduits will be permitted only in the following areas: 1. In electrical equipment rooms. 2. On the roof where it is absolutely necessary to serve equipment without exposing the conduit. 3. In finished areas of the building where ceilings have not been provided and the structure is exposed. a. Where exposed conduits are to be installed in these finished areas, the location and routing of all conduits, junction boxes, etc., shall be as approved in advance of rough -in by the Architect. Any conduit (and/or junction box) installations not meeting the Architects approval shall be re- worked as directed at no additional cost to the Owner, Architect, or Engineer. B. Where it is absolutely necessary to expose conduit in the above areas, conduits shall be run neatly and parallel with each other and with the lines of the building and shall be firmly RACEWAYS 16130 -9 secured in place by means of approved hangers, straps, and screws and expansion shields where required. C. Where exposed conduit is permitted, no portion of the conduit bend where conduit turns from a concealed location (below floor, above ceiling or in wall) to an exposed run shall be visible. The entire bend in all such locations shall be concealed and no portion of it exposed to view. D. Where conduits are exposed above surface mounted electrical panels, said conduits shall be extended from panel without offsets or bends up through ceiling in a neat manner with Unistrut members between the wall and conduit to support the conduit sufficiently distant from the wall to permit the installation of escutcheon plates without overlapping exposed ceiling grid system and chrome plated escutcheon plate provided for each conduit. Conduits shall be spaced a sufficient distance in all directions from each other to permit the installation of chrome plated escutcheons without altering or notching the escutcheons or ceiling suspension members. E. Conduit shall be rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Types shall not be mixed indiscriminately in the system. F. Conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. G. Horizontal runs shall be installed close to the ceiling or beams and secured with approved conduit straps. 3.5 WET, DAMP, OR MOIST LOCATIONS: A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, conduits shall be rigid steel. B. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air conditioned spaces or similar spaces. 3.6 BELOW SLAB INSTALLATIONS: A. General: Conduits installed below concrete slabs shall be either rigid galvanized steel (RGS), intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) or PVC as hereinafter specified. B. RGS and IMC Conduits: a. Factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Conduits, couplings, and fittings shall be protected against corrosion by one of the following methods: b. Field applied half - lapped covering of 20 mil (thick) PVC corrosion protection tape equal to Scotchwrap No. 51. 2. Suitable tools shall be used for the installation and tightening of coated conduits to prevent damage to the coatings. Damaged areas of coating shall be repaired and/or recoated after installation. RACEWAYS 16130 -10 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3. Where RGS or IMC conduit is installed below slab and extends beyond the slab, the RGS or IMC conduit shall extend a minimum of ten feet (10') beyond the edge of the slab before changing to PVC conduit. Where the RGS or IMC conduit "run" changes to a PVC duct line a minimum of five feet (5') of the RGS (or IMC) conduit shall be concrete encased in the same manner as the PVC duct line to which it connects. 4. Couplings and connections shall be watertight. Thread compounds shall be UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. C. PVC Conduits: 1. PVC conduits, couplings, and fittings installed below slab shall be Schedule 40. 2. Where PVC conduit is installed below slabs, the conduit shall be concrete encased. 3. Use PVC coated rigid elbows. D. Conduit Stub -Ups: 1. Conduit stub -ups from below slab shall be coated or wrapped RGS or IMC as specified above. The stub -up shall extend a minimum of 4" above slab before changing to another type of conduit. 2. No portion of a conduit bend where a conduit turns up from below slab to an exposed run shall be visible. The entire bend in all such installations shall be concealed and no portion of the conduit exposed to view. 3. Where the below slab conduit "run" to a stub -up is PVC, the ten feet (10') of conduit immediately preceding the stub -up shall be coated or wrapped RGS or IMC as specified above. The RGS or IMC conduit shall be concrete encased in the same manner as the PVC conduit "run" to which it is connected. 3.7 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS: A. All underground conduits outside of building lines shall have 36 "minimum cover unless otherwise indicated or approved. PVC conduit outside building shall be encased in 3" of concrete with red dye applied. All elbows shall be PVC coated rigid conduit. 3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT: A. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to motors, transformers, and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission. 3.9 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION: A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices. B. Pipe straps or individual conduit hangers shall be used for supporting individual conduits. RACEWAYS 16130-11 E. Solid Masonry and Concrete: Fasteners shall be as follows: 1. Existing Construction: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported by trapeze hangers. Trapeze hangers shall be designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 pounds. Each conduit shall be attached by U -bolt or other approved fastener. D. Conduit shall be supported independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T -bars, angle supports, and similar items, except as specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer. a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 1/4 -inch bolt size and not less than 1 -1/8 inch embedment. b. Power set fasteners shall be approved, and not less than 1/4 -inch diameter with depth of penetration not less than three inches. c. Anchors or fasteners attached to concrete ceilings shall be vibration and shock resistant. F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. Bolts supported only by plaster are not acceptable. G. Metal Structures: Fasteners shall be machine screw or devices specifically designed and approved for the application. H. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking is not permitted. I. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit. J. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are not permitted. 3.10 BOX INSTALLATION: A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits: 1. Shall be flush mounted. 2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling construction and finish. B. In addition to boxes shown, install enough boxes to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap -in metal covers for sheet metal boxes. RACEWAYS 16130 -12 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA D. Outlet boxes in the same wall shall not be mounted back -to -back. 3.11 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES: A. Provide plates (escutcheons) at all locations where exposed conduits penetrate walls, floor and ceilings. 3.12 TELEPHONE CONDUIT: A. Install a complete raceway system for telephone service. Raceway system shall be as shown on the drawings. B. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch, but not less than shown on the drawings. 3.13 GROUNDING SYSTEM: A. Grounding system conductors specified elsewhere in these specifications to be routed in separate conduits shall be routed in a conduit system exclusively for the specified grounding system and no other system's wiring shall be routed in the special grounding system conduit. All type "A" grounding system conduit shall be Schedule 40 Type "A" PVC. Under no conditions shall metallic straps be used. END OF SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS 16130 -13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, and knockout closures. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables, low voltage (600 volts and below) specified herein. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including UNIFORM GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514- Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings, which are UL- listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds /Pub No.'s OS1, 0S2 and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. D. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W -C -586, "Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps ". ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet -steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion - resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code - compliance option. B. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet -steel non - gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with cable -size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide corrosion - resistant screws for equipment type grounding. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code - compliance option. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering outlet boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Appleton Electric; 2. Emerson Electric Co., RACO Div; 3. Harvey Hubbell Inc.; 4. Thomas Betts Co. D. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion- resistant cast -metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast -metal face plates with spring- hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant plugs and fasteners. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA E. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering raintight outlet boxes, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Appleton Electric; b. Emerson Electric Co.; c. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; d. OZ /Gedney; e. General Signal Co. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering junction and pull boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Appleton Electric; b. Emerson Electric Co.; c. Arrow -Hart Div; d. Crouse -Hinds Co. e. OZ /Gedney; f. General Signal Co. F. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion- resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering bushings, knockout closures, locknuts, and connectors, which may be incorporated in the work, include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Appleton Electric; b. Emerson Electric Co.; c. RACO div; d. Harvey Hubbell Inc.; e. OZ /Gedney; f. General Signal Co. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS: A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. 2. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. 3. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. 4. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. 5. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and shall be provided with approved fixture studs where required. Fixture studs shall be applied to boxes from rear and securely bolted to box. 6. Only such holes as are to be used for entering conduits shall be open; all other holes must be properly closed. 7. Four inch boxes shall not be used where more than one switch or receptacle is installed; solid gang boxes with suitable covers shall be used. 8. All outlet boxes, which require covers, shall be provided with same, and they shall be of such construction and design as to fit exactly and match the outlet box on which they are installed. Switch boxes, etc., shall have covers so arranged as to be easily adjustable for alignment with the walls and finish. Pull boxes, etc., junction boxes, and all other outlet boxes to which no fixture or device is to be attached shall be fitted with blank covers. 9. Provide special outlet boxes where space conditions limit the use of standard boxes. 10. Junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes shall be of the size required to terminate all required conduits and wiring, but not smaller than the sizes indicated on the drawings. Where larger boxes are required, the larger boxes shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 11. In addition to boxes shown, install enough boxes to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling operations. 12. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. 13. Provide pullboxes and cable supports in accordance with Article 300 -19 (a) & (b) and Table 300 -19 (a) of the N.E.C. for vertical raceway installations. 14. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -4 15. Junction boxes shall be identified by painting the covers as follows: 1. UPS — Orange or Yellow 2. BMS /Alarm/controls — Green 3. Fire Protection — Red 4. Security — Blue 5. Single Phase (either 120VAC or 277VAC) — Purple or Black 6. Three Phase (either 208VAC or 480VAC) — White WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA The box itself shall have a matching colored spot, either spray painted or decal on the side to assure that covers are not mismatched. If there is an existing scheme in place, match existing colors. B. LOCATION: 1. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire /cable, wiring devices, and raceway installation work. 2. The drawings indicate the approximate location of outlets and their grouping on the various circuits with "home runs" to respective distribution panels. The exact location shall be carefully laid out by this Contractor at the building in conference with the Owner's representative. The Owner reserves the right to change the location of any outlet, before work is roughed in, a distance of 6 feet from the location shown without extra charge. 3. Install electrical boxes in those locations, which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. 4. Boxes for concealed conduits: a. Shall be flush mounted. b. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling construction and finish. 5. Do not install boxes back -to -back in walls. Provide not less than one stud separation. Provide additional separation where specifically indicated. 6. Where any location of a ceiling outlet box as shown on the drawings occurs on a ceiling beam, it shall be moved to the nearest given location thereto as so requested by the Owner's Representative. If the Owner's Representative requires the box to be located on the beam, the conduit shall be bent close around the beam and enter the side or top of the box. 7. Where outlet boxes are located in suspended ceiling, the boxes shall be bolted to a steel bar of sufficient length to sustain firmly and securely the box in the ceiling construction. 8. Unless otherwise shown, specified, or requested, outlet boxes, etc., shall be located in compliance with the requirements of American Disability Act (ADA). ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -5 END OF SECTION 16135 They shall be located with the center of their coverplates at the following elevations above the finished floor lines: Wall switches (Toggle type) 48" Wall receptacles (Duplex type) 15" Wall Telephone Outlets 15" Thermostats 48" WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA All heights above the finished floor indicated on the drawings for devices shall be from the finished floor to the center of the coverplate. All heights below the finished ceiling indicated on the drawings for devices shall be from the finished ceiling down to the center of the coverplate. 9. Any outlets shown where cabinetwork, counters, etc., are located shall be installed above the cabinetwork whether indicated at that height on the drawings or not. The exact location shall be as approved by the Architect. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 -6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: WIRING DEVICES 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This section includes the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices and coverplates. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein. A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL- listed and labeled. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for heavy duty specification grade wiring devices as hereinafter specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device - Kellems. b. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. c. Pass & Seymour /Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. WIRING DEVICES 16140 -1 B. Receptacles: 1. Duplex Receptacles: C. Toggle Switches: WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire NEMA 5 -20R grounded type with polarized parallel slots. Body shall be supported by mounting straps having plaster ears. Contact arrangement shall be such that contact is made on two sides of an inserted blade. b. Receptacle shall have provisions for side wiring with four captively held binding screws and shall have break -off feature for two circuit operation. c. Receptacles shall be UL listed, shall be "Heavy Duty Specification Grade ", and shall be in accordance with NEMA WD -1 and Fed. Spec. WC 596. 2. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, as specified, mounted in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, die cast metal cover (color selected by owner), capable of closing and locking cover while the attachment plug cap is inserted. The cap shall be permanently attached to the coverplate by a hinge flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Coverplates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner.. 3. Duplex Receptacles with Ground Fault Interrupter: Shall be an integral unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box. a. Ground fault interrupter shall be specification grade and consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. It shall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20 ampere branch circuit. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes on the load side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1 /30th of a second. b. Receptacle: Shall be rated for 20 ampere, 120 volts for indoor use and shall be the standard 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type. 4. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Heavy -Duty grade, duplex orange receptacle, with equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. a. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated - ground receptacles. b. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. WIRING DEVICES 16140 -2 D. All wiring devices mounted in walls finished in light color shall be white finish and devices mounted in wall in dark color shall be dark brown finish. E. Coverplates: PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Switches shall be 20 ampere, 120/277 volt rated. 2. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. 3. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy -duty general use with an integral mounting strap with provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws. 4. Switches shall be UL listed, shall be "Heavy Duty Specification Grade" and shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard WD -1 HD and Fed. Spec. WS 896. 1. Coverplates shall be "Deep ", Specification Grade thermoplastic plates. 2. All coverplates for switches, receptacles, telephone outlets, and kindred devices shall be of white finish for walls of light colored finish and dark brown for walls with dark colored finish. 3. Coverplates shall be of the same manufacturer and color as the wiring devices. 4. Coverplate Identification: a. Each receptacle coverplate shall be identified by engraving. The engraving shall include panel and circuit breaker pole identification from which the receptacle is fed. The following is an example of the engraving (the actual panel identification and circuit breaker numbers shall be used): A -2 b. Each light switch shall be identified by engraving. The engraving shall include panel and circuit breaker pole identification from which the lighting circuit and switch are fed. The following is an example of the engraving (the actual panel identification and circuit breaker numbers shall be used): A -5 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. WIRING DEVICES 16140 -3 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 13. All switches shall be mounted in suitable steel boxes, and shall be installed on the strike side of the door whether so indicated on the plans or not. Single pole switches shall be installed in such a position that the circuit is open when the switch handle is down. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. D. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. E. Install wiring devices with hot and neutral on bottom and grounding opening on top. 3.2 TESTING: Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 -4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electric Materials and Methods Section, and is part of each Division 15 and 16 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein. A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: From electrical source to motor starters. From motor starters to motors. To lighting fixtures. To transformers and similar current adjustment features of equipment. To grounds including earthing connections. To master units of communication, signal, alarm, and temperature control systems. C. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in Division 15 and other Division 16 sections, and are work of this section. Electrical connections for Owner furnished equipment and equipment furnished under Sections 1 through 14 of these specifications are work of this section. D. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in applicable Division 15 and Division 16 sections; and electrical connections to said starters and disconnects are work of this section. E. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 16 sections, and electrical connections are work of this section. F. Refer to Division 15 sections for control system wiring; not work of this section. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 -1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties whose produces have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches. D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations. E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. F. ETL Compliance: Provide electrical connection products and materials which are ETL listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connections for equipment products and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of product): Adalet -PLM Div, Scott and Fetzer Co. Allen- Stevens Conduit Fittings Corp. AMP Incorporated Appleton Electric Co. Arrow -Hart Div., Crouse -Hinds Co. Atlas Technologies, Inc. Burndy Corporation Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. General Electric Co. Gould, Inc. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. Reliable Electric Co. Square D Company ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 -2 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire -nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. (1) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: Thomas and Betts Corp. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications. (2) Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work. C. Connect power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagram. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation re- sistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 -3 WTA-08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque - tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam -type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. H. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire /cable conductor, which indicates their voltage, phase and feeder number in accordance with Division 16 section "Electrical Identification ". Affix markers on each terminal conductor, as close as possible to the point of connection. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16142 -4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and schedules and as here in after specified. B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the following: (1) 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Electrical power and control conductors. (2) Equipment/system identification signs. A. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables, low voltage (600 volts and below) specified herein. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including UNIFORM GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and products. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems ", pertaining to electrical identification systems. C. NEMA Compliance; Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std No's. WC -1 and WC -2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical identification products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Alarm Supply Co, Inc. Brady, W.H. Co. Calpico Inc. Cole -Flex Corp. Direct Safety Co. George - Ingraham Corp. Griffolyn Company. Ideal Industries, Inc. LEM Products, Inc. Markal Company. National Band and Tag Co. Panduit Corp. Radar Engineers Div.; EPIC Corp. Seton Name Plate Co. Tesa Corp. 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: A. General: (1) Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. (2) Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. B. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: (1) General: a. Provide manufacturer's standard self - adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 -1/2" wide. b. Colors: As required for color coding specified herein. C. Engraved Plastic - Laminate Signs: (1) General: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA a. Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L -P -387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -2 2.3 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: A. General: (1) Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. (2) Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. (3) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. General Installation Requirements: (3) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. b. Thickness: 1/16 ", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units. c. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent epoxy adhesive shall be used where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers. (1) Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC. (2) Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work. (4) Conduit Identification: Provide 4" wide orange color bands on each electrical feeder conduit, and each telecommunications riser conduit; on color band state voltage involved. Example: 120V, 208V, 277V, 480V, telephone, etc. Apply bands within 10' -0" (ten feet) on each side of point where conduit penetrates walls, floors, ceilings, and at maximum spacing of 10' -0" (ten feet) on exposed conduit and 50' -0" (fifty feet) on concealed conduit. Characters used on band shall be 2" high on conduits 3" or larger and 1" high on conduits less than 3 ". 13. Install line marker for every buried circuit, regardless of whether direct -buried or protected in conduit. C. Cable /Conductor Identification: Refer to Section 16120, WIRES AND CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE for color coding and identification requirements. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -3 D. Operational Identification and Wamings: END OF SECTION 16195 (1) General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self - adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or wamings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. E. Equipment/System Identification: (1) General: (3) a. Install engraved plastic - laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/control /signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self - explanatory identification or signal system. b. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering, on 1 -1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), black lettering in white field. c. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. d. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work: Panelboards, switchboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. Individual devices in panelboards and switchboards. Disconnect switches. Panel HA 277/480V, 3 Ph, 4W 400A Served From Switchboard MDS, Circuit # WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA e. Provide engraved plastic - laminate sign with panel name and circuit number on all Mechanical equipment. (2) Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate. Provide nameplate for each panelboard consisting of engraved three- layered laminated plastic with %x" high white letters on a black background. Secure nameplates to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. Adhesive attachment is not permitted. The following is an example of the engraving: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 -4 DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section includes low voltage disconnect switches. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. C. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to Disconnects (Motor and Circuit) specified herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts for approval in accordance with Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND COLORS. 2. Include sufficient information, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 3. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, and enclosure types. 4. Show the specific switch proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): No. 98 Enclosed Switches B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): No. KS 1 Enclosed Switches DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16410 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS WTA -06114 Verizon Business Equipment Room Expansion 2525 Ridgepoint Austin, TX 2.1 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES: A. Switches shall be NEMA Heavy Duty Type HD and Underwriters Laboratory listed. B. Switches shall be non -fused as indicated on the plans and specifications. C. Switch Blades: 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with the door open. 2. Switches shall be of the dead -front construction with permanently attached arc suppressors hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy access to line -side lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. 3. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and/or aluminum cables and front removable. 4. All current carrying parts shall be plated through electrolytic process. D. Switch Operation: 1. Switches shall be quick -make and quick -break operating handle and mechanism, which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. 2. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the "On" position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. 3. Switches shall have pad locking provisions in the "Off' and "On" positions. E. Ratings: 1. Switches shall be voltage rated for the voltage of the system on which they are to be installed. 2. Switches shall be horsepower or current rated as required for the installation indicated on the plans. 3. Switches shall be NEMA Heavy Duty Type HD. 2.3 NEUTRAL CONNECTION: A. Solid neutral provision/connections shall be provided for each switch installed in a circuit, which includes a neutral conductor. 2.4 ENCLOSURES: A. NEMA 1 Enclosures: DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16410 -2 2. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with pin type hinges. WTA -06114 Verizon Business Equipment Room Expansion 2525 Ridgepoint Austin, TX 1 Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless specified as NEMA 3R (rain tight) on the plans or installed in a damp or wet location. 3. Enclosures shall be of Code gauge (UL 98) sheet steel, shall be treated with a rust inhibiting phosphate and finished in grey baked enamel. B. NEMA 3R Enclosures: 1. Where indicated on the drawings or in damp and wet locations, switches shall be furnished in NEMA 3R rain -tight enclosures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION: A. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, or as hereinafter specified provide Heavy Duty switches. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products fulfill requirements. END OF SECTION 16410 2. Rain -tight covers shall be securable in the open position. 3. NEMA 3R switches through 200 amperes shall be provided with closing caps and have provisions for interchangeable hubs and these hubs shall be provided as indicated on the plans or required. 4. Enclosures shall be of Code gauge (UL 98) galvanized steel (NEMA 3R), shall be treated with a rust- inhibiting phosphate and finished in gray baked enamel. DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT) 16410 -3 PART 1 - GENERAL BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section includes the furnishings, installation, and connection of the interior lighting. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including UNIFORM GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA C. Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts for approval. 2. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 3. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, lenses, louvers, lamps, and controls. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C -81 Electric Lamp Bases and Holders C -82 Lamp Ballasts B. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM): Requirements for Ballast Certification. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): No. 57 Electric Lighting Fixtures BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -1 No. 496 Edison -Base Lampholders PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Shall conform to the detail drawings, NEC Article 410 and the UL -57, "Electrical Lighting Fixtures ". B. Sheet Metal: 1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed. 2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 3. Fluorescent "Lay -in" Type Fixtures shall have minimum 20 gage (0.035 inch) housing, minimum 22 gage (0.029 inch) housings will be acceptable provided housing has strengthening embossed rib and break formations. 4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner. 5. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture is in the installed position, and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. C. Ballasts shall be accessible for servicing without removing or dismantling the fixtures. Each fluorescent ballast serving lamps 30 watts and larger shall be bolted to the fixture body or housing with four studs or captive screws. D. Lamp Sockets: WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 1. Fluorescent: Shall be the biting edge type or phosphorous- bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 542 and ANSI C -81. Lampholders for bi -pin lamps shall be of the telescoping compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a one - quarter turn of the lamp after insertion. 2. Incandescent: Shall have porcelain enclosures and conform to the applicable requirements of UL 496. E. Recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings. F. Fluorescent fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall have hinges, latches and safety catches to facilitate safe, convenient cleaning and re- lamping. BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA G. Mechanical Safety: Lighting Fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routing maintenance. H. Metal Finishes: 1. The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking. 2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing. 3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings. I. Ballasts for Fluorescent Fixtures: 1. Electronic Ballast: Electronic ballasts shall consist of a rectifier, high frequency inverter, and power control and regulation circuitry. The ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, with a Class A sound rating and shall contain no PCBs. Ballasts shall meet 47 CFR 18 for electromagnetic interference and shall not interfere with the operation of other electrical equipment. Design shall withstand line transients per IEEE C62.41, Category A. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum number of ballasts shall be used to serve each individual fixture, using one, two, three or four lamp ballasts. A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuous mounted, factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway and are identically controlled. a. Light outlet regulation shall be +/- 10 %. b. Voltage input regulation shall be +/- 10 %. c. Lamp current crest factor shall be no more than 1.7. d. Ballast factor shall be not less than 85% nor more than 100 %, unless otherwise indicated. e. A 60 Hz filter shall be provided. Flicker shall be no more than 15% with any lamp suitable for the ballast. f. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 25 degree celsius rise above 40 degree celsius ambient, when tested in accordance with UL 935. g. Input current third harmonic shall not exceed 32 percent total harmonic distortion or 27.5 percent of the third triplens. h. Power factor shall not be less than 0.9. i. Ballasts shall operate at a frequency of 20 KHz or more. j. Operating filament voltage shall be 2.5 to 4.5 volts. I3UILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -3 k. Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) shall be in accordance with the following table. Ballasts and lamps shall be matching rapid start. Electronic Fluorescent Ballast Efficacy Factors: 1. Lamp Type: 32W F32 T8 2. Type of Starter & lamp: Rapid or instant start. 3. Nominal Operational Input Voltage: 120 or 277 volt 4. Number of Lamps: 1 - 4. 5. Min. Ballast Efficacy Factor: 2.4, 1.4, 1.0, 0.8 2. Each ballast shall be rated for the circuit voltage indicated on the drawings. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA 3. Ballasts for outside lights and other lights in unheated areas shall be rated to provided proper starting with ambient temperatures from -10 degrees F. to 110 degrees F. 4. Ballast and replacement labor shall be guaranteed by the Contractor and the Ballast Manufacturer for two years from date of manufacture or one year from date of tentative acceptance of the work (whichever is longer) by the Architect and the Owner. Any ballast which fails during this period shall be replaced by like ballast at no cost to the Owner. 5. All ballasts serving shall be mounted by four non- turning studs or captive bolts firmly secured against the fixture body (or wireway) to maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Nuts and lockwashers, or locking type nuts shall be employed. 6. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. 7. To facilitate multi -level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast and the next inward pair (or single lamp in the case of three lamp fixtures) on another ballast. Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. J. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding their metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor. K. Lighting Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures (Diffusers): 1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. 2. Shall be not less than 0.125 inch overall thickness. 3. Unless otherwise specified lenses and diffusers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking. PART 3 - EXECUTION BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 1651 1-4 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly. C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the indicated locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the locations for equipment, change the locations for the lighting fixtures by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the Engineer. D. Where stem suspension hangers are specified hereinafter or shown on the drawings, they shall be ordered in correct lengths from the manufacturer, or they shall be cut to the lengths on the job in order that each and every fixture shall be mounted at proper heights above the floor. E. Lighting Fixture Supports: 1. Shall provide support at a minimum of two locations for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling. 2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and re- lamping. 3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. 4. Do not support/mount light fixtures from cable ladder. F. Completely lamp each new lighting fixture installed in accordance with following requirements: 1. Fluorescent Lamps: a. 48" lamps shall be F32T8SP35, rapid start, energy saving type, or approved equal. 2. Incandescent lamps shall be the general service, inside frosted type rated 130 volts except where otherwise shown on the drawings. G. Contractor shall coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed. H. In areas with exposed ductwork, piping, conduits, etc., light fixtures shall be installed as close as practical to the locations indicated on the drawings (after all ductwork, piping, conduits have been installed) and below all ductwork, piping, and conduits using suspension methods approved by the Engineer, all at no additional cost to the Owner. The exact locations for fixtures shall be as to best light the service area and as approved by the Engineer. I. Finished areas with exposed structure: Fixtures shall be installed where indicated. In the event of conflicts with ductwork, piping, structure, etc. verify exact mounting location with the Architect prior to rough in. J. Attach rows of fixtures together on unistrut "spine" for stability with the "spine" supported from structure. I3UILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -5 END OF SECTION 16511 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Dr. South Tukwila, WA BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16511 -6 PROJECT MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT AT 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 98168 FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA FOR VERIZON BUSINESS - TECHNICAL FACILITIES OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION 604 EAST HOAG STREET PO BOX 10 YACOLT, WA 98675 VERIZON BUSINESS SR. IMPLEMENTATION ENGINEER LISA H. DAVIE PREPARED BY WTF9 W T,`Alk , 11 N C ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 (325) 695 -1090 FAX (325) 695-3757 January 15, 2009 Expires VOLUME TWO — DC POWER PLANT AND FRAME WORK PROJECT MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT AT VERIZON BUSINESS 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 98168 FACILITY CODE: TYKWWA FOR VERIZON BUSINESS TECHNICAL FACILITIES OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION 604 EAST HOAG STREET- PO BOX 10 YACOLT, WA 98675 PREPARED BY \A/-I-dick 7 1 IV C . ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79GDG (325) 695-1090 FAX (325) 695-3757 January 15, 2009 AY , business VOLUME TWO — DC POWER PLANT AND FRAME WORK Page 1 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 1 - Table of Contents Section 1 — Section 2 — Section 3 — Section 4 — Section 5 — Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Section 6 — Section 7 — Section 8 — Section 9 — Section 10 — Section 11 — Section 12 — Table of Contents Project Overview Project References Customer Furnished Equipment Installation Notes and Standards 5.01 General Procedures 5.02 Hot Work/Night Work 5.03 Equipment Installation 5.04 Battery Installation 5.05 Bus Bars /Copper Bars 5.06 Cabling/Wiring 5.07 Cable Stitching/Lacing 5.08 Cable/Wire Terminations 5.09 Bonding and Grounding 5.10 Cable Ladders /Ironwork 5.11 Bolting and Anchoring Hardware 5.12 Wall/Floor Penetrations 5.13 Cable /Equipment Stenciling 5.14 Safety and Housekeeping 5.15 Project Specific Information Work Items for Equipment Mounting Work Items for Ironwork Work Items for Cabling Work Items for DC Alarms Work Items for Grounding Work Items for Turn-up Miscellaneous Work Items Page 2 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Section 2 — Project Overview Project Scope: This project specification provides the DC installation requirements for (1) 240XTLC -15, 480V UPS 60 Jar /240 Cell battery strings, (4) Three tiers, single row battery racks and frame work, and (2) spill containment barriers at the Verizon Business 12682 Gateway Drive South, Tukwila, Washington site. Site Location: Verizon Business Tukwila, WA 98168 Project Engineer: Verizon Business 604 East Hoag Street, PO Box 10 Yacolt, WA 98675 ab+ Page 3 Contact: Ms. Lisa Davie Sr. Project Engineer Technical Facilities Operation and Construction Phone: 360.686.3065 WTA --08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 3 — Project References Index of Drawings: Drawing Number Drawing Name Sheet Size Issue DC -1 Partial First Floor Plan — Communication Cable Ladder, South 1 of 1 D 1 DC -2 Partial First Floor Plan — Communication Cable Ladder, North 1 of 1 D 1 DC -3 Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, South 1 of 1 D 1 DC-4 Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, North 1 of 1 D 1 DC -5 Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, Power Room 1 of 1 D 1 DC -6 Partial First Floor Plan — Framework Grounding, South 1 of 1 D 1 DC -7 Partial First Floor Plan — Framework Grounding, North 1 of 1 D 1 DC -8 Partial First Floor Plan — Framework Grounding, Power Room 1 of 1 D 1 DC -9 -48V. D.C. One -line Diagram 1 of 1 D 1 DC -10 UPS -480V. D.C. One -line Diagram and Battery Rack Details 1 of 1 D 1 Page 4 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 4 — Customer Furnished Equipment Page 5 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards 5.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES a.) Project scheduling shall be handled through the Project Engineer. b.) No work is to take place unless under the direct supervision of the customer representative. c.) All work items listed in this Statement of Work (SOW) shall be installed in accordance with the Client Standards, this Statement of Work (SOW), OSHA requirements, National Electrical Code and the Manufacturer's Specifications and Installation Standards. d.) All equipment locations and cable routing shall be done in accordance with the attached drawings. e.) The installation vendor shall provide all materials (other than that listed in this SOW as customer furnished) and labor to complete the project within the time frame required. f.) Attention is directed to the installation vendor that the attached drawings and work items may not indicate every item of work to be accomplished. Bidders on work, before submitting proposals, shall visit and examine the site to satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of the work to be done and all details involved. Submission of a proposal will be taken as evidence that such examination has been made and various features noted. Later claims for extra compensation of additional labor or materials required on account of difficulties encountered, which should have been seen, will not be recognized and such items shall be properly disposed of by the vendor at his expense. g.) 5.02 HOT WORK/NIGHT WORK a.) Work on this project, consisting of power boards and bus bar that is not associated with working equipment may be performed during normal working hours. All other (HOT) work on this project is to be performed between 12:00 AM and 6:00 AM. b.) A detailed Method of Procedure (MOP) will need to be approved before any termination can be made to live, working equipment. All "HOT" work will be performed under the direct supervision of the customer representative per an approved MOP. The detailed MOP will be prepared by the installation vendor and submitted to the client for review at least 1 week in advance of "HOT" work. All AC work is to be performed by a locally licensed electrician. Page 6 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards c.) The installation vendor shall perform all "HOT" work in a safe manner as outlined in the Method of Procedure (MOP). 5.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION a.) All equipment installed shall be level and plumb with four (4) anchoring devices installed, one (1) in each corner, for each piece of equipment. 5.04 BATTERY INSTALLATION b.) WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA b.) The installation vendor shall test and adjust each piece of equipment installed as part of this SOW, in the presence of the customer representative, I.A.W. the client's and equipment manufacturer's specifications and standards. No equipment will be put into service until it has been properly tested and adjusted. All equipment installed and adjusted shall be tagged with the date of the installation, installation vendors name and the customer representative's name that witnessed the test. a.) The installation vendor shall maintain all safety and installation standards as set forth in the client's Standards and the manufacturer's Specifications and Installation Standards. All battery stands shall be installed level and plumb with two (2) anchoring devices installed in each frame. All bolting hardware used in anchoring the frames to the floor shall be case- hardened stainless steel (standard thread) machine bolts with the appropriate washer and lock washer. c.) No battery is to be lifted by the battery post or moved by grabbing the battery post. d.) All battery connections are to be cleaned, assembled and tightened as set forth in the client's Standards and the manufacturer's Specifications and Installation Standards. e.) The installation vendor shall perform a freshening charge on all batteries installed as set forth in the client's standards and the manufacturer's Specifications and Installation Standards. The vendor shall monitor and record the charge on the client furnished Battery Report. f.) The installation vendor shall leave one copy of the completed Battery Report on site and return a copy to the customer's Project Engineer for each battery string installed. g.) Only manufacturer approved chemicals shall be used to clean or slide a battery. • Page 7 Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards 5.05 BUS BARS /COPPER BARS a.) All bus bar connections shall be cleaned with scotch -brite or equivalent cleaning pad, and coated with a thin layer of NO -OX -ID. b.) Bus bars shall be handled with gloves to minimize finger print oxidation. 5.06 CABLING/WIRING a.) All power cable #14 AWG and larger is to be RHW/RHH type, low smoke (LS) /non- halogenated, gray covered, Class B or Class I stranding. Class I (flex) cable will be used for battery string and rectifier output cabling. All stranding is to be tinned to help prevent oxidation. All cable must be "UL Listed" & "CT Rated ". Cable provided is to come equipped with a gray outer cotton braid covering. DLO cable is not permitted. b.) All cable runs shall be continuous without splices. c.) All cable ends will be taped during the cable running. Caution shall be exercised when running cable in equipment areas not to damage the equipment or interrupt equipment service. d.) If power cable runs are paralleled to signal cable runs, allow a 4 -inch clearance between them. e.) Break all cables over the outer edge of the cable ladder. Do not run any cables through the cable ladder rungs. f.) All cables are to neatly tied to allow for future installation of distribution cables. g.) All cables installed shall maintain a minimum bending radius of: 750 MCM 350 -500 MCM #00- #0000 AWG #2 - #00 AWG #4 - #8 AWG 7" radius 5" radius 3 -1/2" radius 1 -1/2" radius 1" radius Page 8 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards h.) All DC power leads shall be run in paired lead configuration. The contractor shall take extreme care when running a cable to keep DC positive and negative leads paired, to avoid the crossing of cables. i.) Sheet fiber insulation, or equivalent insulation, shall be placed between the power cables and any sharp metal surface (i.e. cable ladder side bar, bus bars) that the cable may be in contact with. j.) All cables shall be identified when they are run and verified before they are terminated. k.) When pulling cable, the use of cable rings or the use of canvas should be provided to protect the sheathing from damage. 5.07 CABLE STITCHING/LACING a.) All power cables will be laced using #9 or #12 waxed nylon cord designed for cable lacing. Cables will be laced using the Kansas City stitch and/or Chicago stitch. b.) Power cables #0000 AWG and larger will be laced with four (4) strands of lacing cord. Power cables #000 AWG and smaller may be laced with two (2) strands of lacing cord. Alarm and control cables may be secured with plastic cable ties or lace cord inside power bays. c.) Vertical and inverted power cable runs will be secured a minimum of every nine (9) inches, with one (1) cable under a stitch. d.) Horizontal power cable runs will be secured a minimum of every eighteen (18) inches, except in a turn, with up to two (2) cables under a stitch. e.) All power cable turns, and eighteen (18) inches on both sides of the bend, will be secured every nine (9) inches with one (1) cable under a stitch. Page 9 Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards 5.08 CABLE/WIRE TERMINATIONS • a.) Cable terminations shall be made using two -hole compression lugs. All lugs shall be tin- plated copper, with wire -butt inspection holes (except for battery connections), and sized to accommodate a minimum of two crimps. All crimps shall use the manufacturer's specified die and shall be circumferential or hexagonal. On battery and main distribution cabling, the tool must exert a minimum 12 -15 tons of pressure. The completed assembly (lug, cable, tool and die) must result in an UL- listed assembly. T &B and Burndy lugs and crimping tools are the only approved manufacturers. Lugs are to have the number of crimps installed as recommended by the manufacturer. b.) All electrical connections shall have the mating surfaces cleaned with scotch -brite, or equivalent cleaning pad, with a thin coat of NO -OX -ID applied to the connecting surface. c.) All cable lugs are to have clear heat shrink over cable to lug connections. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA d.) All lugs shall have a thin coat of NO -OX -ID applied to the stripped cable end and/or inside of lug barrel before the cable is crimped. e.) Each lug shall have the appropriately sized bolts installed. All battery connection hardware shall be stainless- steel. 5.09 BONDING AND GROUNDING a.) All H -taps are to be copper compression -type in matching plastic covers. Aluminum H -taps shall not be used. b.) All grounding connections will have the paint removed and a thin coat of NO -OX -ID applied to the connecting surface. c.) All grounding and DC Reference conductors shall have a brass tag labeled "Do Not Disconnect" at each Bus Bar /Ground Bar connection. d.) Grounding and DC Reference conductors shall be tagged on each end with stenciled fiber tags reflecting far end termination point. e.) Free (un- terminated) ends of grounding conductors shall have heat shrink end caps (Thomas & Betts HSC or equivalent) installed. Page 10 Section 5 — Installation Notes and Standards 5.10 CABLE LADDERS/IRONWORK a.) All power cable ladder shall be new, not used, and be solid side bar manufactured by Newton Instrument Co. or Saunders Telecom. b.) All auxiliary cable brackets (Newton 2052 or equivalent) and cable clips (Newton 2107 or equivalent) will be spaced a maximum of every 18 inches. c.) All cable ladders shall be the proper size and installed at the height as specified in this Statement of Work (SOW) and attached drawings. d.) All cable ladders and supporting ironwork installed shall be level and/or plumb. e.) Cut ends of cable ladder, auxiliary framing, and unistrut shall be filed smooth and free of burrs, then painted to match the original material finish. Cut ends of threaded rods and bolts shall be filed and painted telco gray. f.) All cable ladder is to be solid 2" sidebar, painted gray. g.) Exposed cable ladder and auxiliary framing ends shall be covered with a rubber end cap. 5.11 BOLTING AND ANCHORING HARDWARE a.) All bolts shall, at a minimum, be flush with the nut surface and have a maximum of 1 -1/2 times the rod/bolt diameter exposed beyond the nut. All cut rod ends will be filed smooth and free of burrs, then painted telco gray. b.) All anchoring devices shall be preset type. Impact anchors shall not be used. WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA c.) Bolting hardware used for cable ladders /ironwork not furnished by Newton Instrument Co. or Saunders Telecom shall be Grade 8. 5.12 WALL /FLOOR PENETRATIONS a.) All through- the -wall or floor penetrations will be sleeved. Cored holes are to be sleeved with gray PVC. Rectangular wall /floor penetrations are to be sleeved with a metal sleeve. Floor sleeves shall be equipped with removable metal covers on each side of sleeve. Page 11 WTA -O8093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA b.) All floor penetrations or openings in fire -rated partitions shall be sealed with appropriate 3M firestop material in accordance with 3M product specifications at the end of every word day and after cables have been run. c.) Floor penetrations and/or openings in fire -rated partitions shall not be left open overnight or longer than necessary to complete pulling cable through them. d.) All fire blocking in referenced floors /walls shall be in compliance with 3M product specifications and using exclusively 3M- manufactured product (with the exception of sheet metal and hardware). Any opening left open or not sealed as required may be re- sealed by Verizon Business at the contractor's expense. 5.13 CABLE/EQUIPMENT STENCILING a.) All DC power cables, grounding cables and alarm cables shall be permanently tagged on both ends with stenciled fiber tags reflecting far end termination point voltage, polarity, origination point and cable identifier. b.) Stencil all equipment installed with the equipment designation (i.e. PDF 12.01, MPDB -1, Battery A, etc.) in 3/4" letters. Equipment bays shall be stenciled front and rear. c.) Stencil the nominal voltage (i.e. -24V, -48V) on all installed equipment in 3/4" letters. d.) Stencil all fuse blocks with bay location, load, and fuse size on the removable fuse block stencil card and on the fuse panel in 3/8" letters. e.) Stencil the installation date of all battery strings on the battery stand in 3/8" letters. f.) Number all battery cells using manufacturer's supplied number kit with cell #1 being the most positive cell and the last cell being the most negative cell. Page 12 Section 5 -- Installation Notes and Standards 5.14 SAFETY AND HOUSEKEEPING WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA a.) Make certain that all fire suppression systems have been de- activated in the areas where heat shrinking, drilling, or any work close to a sniffer head, to prevent accidental discharge of the fire suppression system. Deactivation will be performed by the Verizon Business Representative using the keyed abort station. The installation vendor shall cover all sniffer heads in the area where drilling or other dust creating work is performed to prevent contamination of the sniffer heads. The installation vendor shall remove all covers from the sniffer heads before the Verizon Business Representative activates the fire suppression system. b.) The installation vendor shall observe the rules of conduct, accident prevention, good housekeeping and fire prevention procedures that govern the facility. c.) The installation vendor shall be responsible for the security of all tools, equipment and material left on the job site. d.) The installation vendor shall be responsible for providing all safety equipment for his personnel to perform work operations required to complete this project. e.) All "HOT" work will be performed using OSHA- approved, manufacturer- insulated tools. Tools wrapped in electrical tape are not acceptable. f.) The installation vendor shall define all active work areas with orange safety cones or other equivalent highly visible markers. g.) The installation vendor shall clean up the job site on a daily basis and is responsible for the removal of all waste materials from the job site, including supplying the appropriate waste disposal containers. h.) Equipment will be unpacked in the facility receiving area whenever possible. i.) Floor, walls, and working equipment shall be protected with masonite, or equivalent protection material in all work areas. The contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage resulting from this work. j.) Cable reels will never be rolled on floors without masonite, or equivalent protection. Page 13 Page 14 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 6 —Work Items for Equipment Mounting Note: All equipment to be installed I.A.W. Section 5 of this S.O.W. and Verizon Business standards. Note: The DC installer is to verify that all room dimensions conform to the attached drawings. Report any discrepancies to the DC engineer before mounting any equipment. 6.01 Inventory all Verizon Business furnished equipment and ensure that it conforms to the equipment listed in this statement of work. Report any discrepancies to the DC power engineer. a.) Inspect the equipment for evidence of shipping damage prior to unpacking the units. Report any damage to the DC power engineer. 6.02 Locate and secure one (2) Verizon Business furnished Peco PDF', -48V (Equip. Item 1.00). Refer to drawing DC -3 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, South ". a.) Secure with four (4) 3/8" anchors. One (1) bolt installed in each corner. 6.03 Locate, assemble and secure four (4) Verizon Business furnished C & D Technologies RDB- 0902-7EP 3 -Tier, 1 -Row 7' -0" Battery Stand (Equip. Item 3.00) in the new Power Room Area. Refer to drawing DC -5 and the manufacture assembly instructions. 6.04 Set and assemble two (1) Verizon Business furnished C & D Technologies 240XT4LC -15 480V, 714 A.H. battery string (Equip. Item 2.00) I.A.W. this specification and the manufacturers recommendations on the previously installed battery racks. ..1t.t'4: V: • a.) Secure with four (4) 1/2" anchors and stainless hardware in each frame. a.) Designate the battery racks as shown on sheet DC -5. b.) Freshen charge the battery strings I.A.W. the manufacturers recommendations. Record the freshen charge and turn over to the Verizon Business representative. 6.05 Install Verizon Business furnished C & D Technologies Inter -cell Connector Covers (Equip. Item 4.00) on the battery string inter -cell connections. 6.06 Install Verizon Business furnished spill containment barrier (Equip. Item 500) around battery racks. Refer to the manufacture instructions furnished with the containment system. 6.07 Install Verizon Business furnished Neutralizing/Absorbing Pillows (Equip. Item 5.01) in the barrier system. Page 15 Section 7 — Work Items for Ironwork WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Note: All ironwork to be installed I.A.W. Section 5 of this S.O.W. and Verizon Business standards. 7.01 Furnish and install eighteen (18) Cable Hole Sleeves, between the new Equipment Room and the Existing Equipment Room. Refer to drawing DC -4 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, North" for sleeve location. 7.02 Furnish and install cable ladder as shown on drawings DC -2 "Partial First Floor Plan — Communication Cable Ladder, North ", DC -3 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, South ", and DC -5 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder — Power Room ". a.) The cable ladder shall be solid 2" stringer, painted telco gray. Saunders SB- 16 -xx -GR or Newton 2003 -Cxx. b.) All assembly pieces shall be finished with yellow zinc dichromate. Supports shall be 5/8" threaded rod with yellow zinc dichromate finish. c.) Cable ladder support shall be accomplished by using support channels from existing auxiliary frame with tie rods. 7.03 Furnish and install Power Cable Brackets for grounding cable support. Refer to drawings DC -3 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, South ", DC -4 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, North", DC -5 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder — Power Room ", DC -6 "Partial First Floor Plan — Framework Grounding, South ", and DC -7 "Partial First Floor Plan - Framework Grounding, North ". a.) The power cable brackets shall be painted telco gray. Saunders SB -119 -x or equivalent. b.) Power cable supports shall be installed every 18 ", maximum. Page 16 Section 8 — Work Items for Cabling 8.01 Furnish, run, secure and terminate cabling between tiers, between racks, and battery disconnects from the Battery Strings to the UPS. Refer to DC -5 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder — Power Room" and DC -10 "UPS 480V. DC One -Line Diagram (Split String) ". 8.02 Furnish, run, secure, and terminate primary distribution cabling from PDF 144.10 (Load 1A, 2B, 3A, & 4B) and PDF 165.09 (Load 1A,2B, 3A, & 4B) to the DC MPDB and existing external +48V. Return Bus. Refer to DC -3 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable Ladder, South ", DC-4 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable ladder, North ", DC -5 "Partial First Floor Plan — Power Cable — Power Room ", and DC -9 " -48V. D.C. One -Line Diagram ". Page 17 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 9 — Work Items for DC Alarms 9.01 Existing PDF Alarm to remain. Page 18 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 10 — Work Items for Grounding 10.01 Furnish and install framework grounding for Battery String to the Ground Bar. Refer to Grounding Floor Plans. 10.02 Furnish and install bonding straps across all cable ladder junctions. One (1) strap per cable ladder junction. Page 19 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 11— Work Items for Turn -up 11.01 Perform initial charge on the C & D Technologies battery strings I.A.W. the instruction manual. All battery records are to be made and turned over to the Project Engineer at project completion. Page 20 WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA Section 12 — Miscellaneous Work Items 12.01 Furnish and install 3M Composite Firestop Sheets and Putty on the cable hole sleeve between the Existing Equipment Room and the New Equipment Room. 12.02 Stencil all items associated with the new work in accordance to this Statement of Work. 12.03 Mark prints with the As -Built changes and turn over to the Verizon Business Representative. a.) Deleted items shall be marked in yellow pencil to indicate "remove ". b.) Added items shall be marked in red pencil to indicate "add ". 12.04 Turn over the Verizon Business provided spare parts to Verizon Business operations. Page 21 • WTA -08093 Verizon Business Equipment Room Buildout 12682 Gateway Drive South Tukwila, WA March 4, 2009 K. Craig Manawes, PE One Village Drive, Ste 500 Abilene, TX 79606 fer Marshall *t Technician encl File No. D09 -015 T:U.inks\Docs\D09- 0I5\D09 -0I5 Correction Letter #1.DOC jem Cif of Tu la RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Permit Application Number D09 -015 Verizon Business —12682 Gateway Dr S Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director Dear Mr. Manawes, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit(s) can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building and Public Works Departments. At this time the Fire and Planning Departments have no comments. Building Department: Allen Johannessen at 206 433 -7163 if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Public Works: Greg Villanueva at 206 431 -2442 if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and /or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. I have also enclosed a Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification that must be completed prior to issuance of the permit. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 o Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Building Division Review Memo • • Date: February 12, 2009 Project Name: Verizon Business Permit #: D09 -015 Plan Review: Allen Johannessen, Plans Examiner Tukwila Building Division Allen Johannessen, Plan Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet stamped, not copied.) 1. Engineers - Consultants sheet reference seismic zone 4. Revise spec sheets, and if necessary plan sheets, to reference compliance with seismic zone D -2. 2. Please provide quantities of all hazardous components stored or used in the batteries. Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206 -431- 3670. No further comments at this time. • • CITY OF TUKWILA PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT REVIEW COMMENTS www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Development Guidelines and Design and Construction Standards DATE: February 27, 2009 PROJECT: Verizon Business PERMIT NO: D09 -015 PLAN REVIEWER: Contact Greg Villanueva at (206) 431 -2442, if you have any questions regarding the following comments: 1. Show domestic water meter and installation of Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly (RPPA) with Hot Box anchored to concrete platform. This RPPA needs to be installed immediately downstream of the domestic water meter box. Recommend install of power and heating element for freeze protection. 2. Show existing landscape irrigation deduct meter and upgrade to AMR (meter /radio). Show existing Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA). In addition, our records indicate there is no current back flow test report on file, provide updated certified test report. 3. Show Fire Department Connection (FDC) and install of a single connection of Storz Knox locking cap with a 30- degree coupling. In addition, confirm if repair of the single check valve is completed. DEPARTMEN 3_b1 -6.1 Building Diviion MN /A VD - 01 Public Work DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete ri Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route ri Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • • PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D09 - 015 PROJECT NAME: VERIZON BUSINESS SITE ADDRESS: 12682 GATEWAY DR Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 DATE: 03 -24 -09 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete DUE DATE: 03-26 -09 Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: No further Review Required DATE: DUE DATE: 04-23-09 Approved Approved with Conditions Not Approved (attach comments) n Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Planning Division Permit Coordinator Not Applicable n U Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: ACTIVITY NUMBER: D09 -015 DATE: 02 -05 -09 PROJECT NAME: VERIZON BUSINESS SITE ADDRESS: 12682 GATEWAY DR X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued Bui ii Public Works TMEN S: �i PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP DETERMINATICy1V OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 • PERMIT COORD C� PAD �Wl mac. 3"M'? Fire Prevention Structural ❑ Incomplete ❑ DATE: DATE: 514 N /A- Prannin 'v ision Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 02 -09 -09 Not Applicable TUES/THURS R TING: Please Route Structural Review Required n No further Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: DUE DATE: 03-0 -09 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions E Not Approved (attach comments) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: o(f7 0 7 Bldg t4 Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW Qg Staff Initials: C Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 3/23/09 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206- 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us [] Response to Incomplete Letter # E'] Response to Correction Letter # 1 [] Revision # after Permit is Issued [] Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Verizon izon Business Project Address: 12682 Gateway Dr S REVISION SUBMITTAL Plan Check/Permit Number: D09 -015 Contact Person: K. CRAIG MANAWES, P.E. Phone Number: (325) 695 -1090 Summary of Revision: REVISED ENGINEERS — CONSULTANTS SHEET REFERENCE TO SEISMIC ZONE 4 TO SEISMIC ZONE D -2 (SEE ATTACHED) AS REQUESTED BY BUILDING DIVISION REVIEW MEMO. REVISED ENGINEERS — CONSULTANTS SHEET TO INDICATE QUANTITIES OF ALL HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS STORED OR USED IN THE BATTERIES (SEE ATTACHED) AS REQUESTED BY BUILDING DIVISION REVIEW MEMO. PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT REVIEW COMMENTS (1, 2, & 3 ARE TO BE ADDRESSED BY PROPERTY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE UNDER A SEPARATE PERMIT. A NON— RESIDENTIAL SEWER USE CERTIFICATION IS NOT APPLICABLE. NO PLUMBING FIXTURES ARE BEING ADDED AND THERE ARE NO CHANGES BEING MADE TO EXISTING CONNECTIONS, AND NO NEW SEWER CONNECTIONS ARE BEING MADE ON THIS PROJECT. SheetNumber(s): ENGINEER — CONSULTANTS SHEETS, PG. 1 -2; HAZARDOUS MATERIALS QUANTITIES, "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision pG. 1 - 5; MSDS SHEET PG. 1 - Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on \applications \forms - applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: 1 1, Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date SCHOMMER, CRAIG A PRESIDENT 02/16/1983 Bond Amount SCHOMMER, MARGARET H TREASURER 02/16/1983 58623005 SCHOMMER, STEPHEN VICE PRESIDENT 12/28/2001 SCHOMMER, ROBERT W VICE PRESIDENT 02/16/1983 ST PAUL FIRE N MARINE INS CO Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 11 WESTERN SURETY CO 58623005 12/31/2004 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 01/24/2005 10 ST PAUL FIRE N MARINE INS CO SR2055 12/31 /2002 Until Cancelled 12/31/2004 $12,000.00 01/02/2003 9 FIREMAN'S FUND INS CO SLR0645065612/31/2001 Until Cancelled 12/31/2002 $12,000.0012/28 /2001 8 FIREMANS FUND INS CO SLR0645065612/31/199712/31/2001 $6,000.00 01/08/1998 Untitled Page General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L&I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name A C SCHOMMER it SONS INC Phone 5032874646 Status ACTIVE Address 6421 NE COLWOOD WY License No. ACSCHSI171CW Suite /Apt. License Type CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR City PORTLAND Effective Date 2/16/1983 State OR Expiration 3/30/2011 Date Zip 97218 Suspend Date County OUT OF STATE Specialty 1 GENERAL Business Type Corporation Specialty 2 UNUSED Parent Company Business Owner Information Bond Information https: // fortress .wa.gov /lni/bbip /Detail.aspx • • UBI No. 600471740 Page 1 of 3 04/23/2009 HVAC SYMBOL LEGEND SECTION NUMBER SHEET SECTION IS LOCATED ON SYMBOL D4 CHS —°CHS-- -Y- CHIC - ----CHR �IF DESCRIPTION I CD-- EXISTING CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE (SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW) NEW GRAVITY CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE (SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW) PIPE ELBOW TURNED DOWN o• PIPE ELBOW TURNED UP o PIPE TEE TURNED DOWN o. PIPE TEE TURNED UP x PIPE ANCHOR UNION OR FLANGE FLEXIBLE PIPE CONECTION ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW VIBRATION ISOLATOR ISOLATION VALVE -�%r CHECK VALVE SIGHT GLASS PRESSURE GAUGE W /GAUGE COCK. EXISTING CHILLED WATER SUPPLY NEW CHILLED WATER RETURN EXISTING CHILLED WATER RETURN NEW CHILLED WATER RETURN TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE TEST PORT BALANCING VALVE, PLUG TYPE BALANCING VALVE, CIRCUIT SETTER TYPE AUTOMATIC FLOW REGULATOR -- TRIPLE DUTY VALVE SECTION IDENTIFICATION SYMBOL CRAC # COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONER DESIGNATION SYMBOL ICW ICW SS ICW CD I PCD G c� e � VTR BFP FD – –FOV- – FOS FOR DESCRIPTION DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE EXISTING DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE EXISTING INDUSTRIAL COLD WATER INDUSTRIAL COLD WATER DRAIN AND WASTE PIPE EXISTING STORM SEWER LINE EXISTING DRAIN AND WASTE PIPE HUMIDIFIER MAKE -UP PIPE CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE (SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW) PUMPED CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE VENT PIPE EXISTING VENT OR REVENT PIPE EXISTING GAS PIPE PIPE ELBOW TURNED DOWN PIPE ELBOW TURNED UP PIPE TEE TURNED DOWN PIPE TEE TURNED UP UNION OR FLANGE LINE SIZE BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE CAPPED CONNECTION CLEAN OUT (F.C.O. - FLOOR CLEAN OUT) (W.C.O. - WALL CLEAN OUT) VENT THROUGH ROOF BACK FLOW PREVENTER FLOOR DRAIN FUEL OIL VENT PIPE FUEL OIL SUPPLY PIPE FUEL OIL RETURN PIPE ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW SYMBOL P DESCRIPTION AUDIONISUAL ALARM APPLIANCE MANUAL FIRE PULL STATION EXISTING SMOKE DETECTOR NEW SMOKE DETECTOR EXISTING UNDERFLOOR SMOKE DETECTOR NEW UNDERFLOOR SMOKE DETECTOR EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR NEW HEAT DETECTOR ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND OO G.F.I. SYMBOL m to 3$ tN 31; W.P. c) cH EUES UEP U ES *MUM UEP UES 0 DESCRIPTION MANUAL MOTOR STARTER SPST WALL SWITCH (SWITCHING FIXTURES WHERE "a" IS INDICATED) 3 -WAY SWITCH NARROW MULLION SWITCH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - IN WALL L5 -20R RECEPTACLE L6 -30R RECEPTACLE DUPLEX TELEPHONE JACKS (VOICE AND DATA) - WALL MOUNTED ELECTRIC MOTOR (5 HP INDICATED) HP RATED DISCONNECT SWITCH SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD RECESS MOUNTED PANEL JUNCTION BOX WITH COVER GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTOR GROUND FAULT "W.P." BY ANY ELECTRICAL DEVICE SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THE DEVICE IS TO BE WEATHERPROOF CONDUIT "HOME RUN" TO PANEL (HASH MARKS INDICATE THE NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE (TYPE "A ") CEILING MOUNTED EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING MOUNTED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE /CEILING MOUNTED GROUND LEAD. REFER TO GROUNDING PLAN AND GROUNDING LEAD LIST SCHEDULE WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE EXISTING UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SECONDARY NEW UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL PRIMARY (PAVED SURFACE) NEW UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SECONDARY (PAVED SURFACE) NEW UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL PRIMARY (EXPOSED EARTH SURFACE) NEW UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SECONDARY (EXPOSED EARTH SURFACE) SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF Tl IKWILA FEB 0 5 7009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS L c No 42559 i Y y Expires V .-V --10I Fac. Code :TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, ps, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ 2 3 4 3 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 co c i a ; (/) 0 ucC (f) L V ' N (,) N � c.) qui 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 Sheet No. PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 MPE -1 MPE SYMBOL LEGENDS '' ,1 , .6 17 ?i 3; ..3:6T r:-..n.i-A I o 0000 •:.• .., ----;-\\ ) - ; r■ 3 '? • ) .,....,. ()Q 0 0 r.: . .7 -..,, ":::'.' ' ' .. ..'''.17..'(.2'7:.;!:.'1•I'''''''1.:7.'"-;'..C7;'''''''',..''''''. '''''.4:.'"24■C'&i.1'154"4 '''..4V''';' :-.V;;'1-:■/;177'...::'...iii.7:...■2:..V:',";',.'!'Y',1;t'7!'h.t ;7.fit'''' . ....;! ,---.. 7,7, ,f1 7., ''''I":';■'.17-2;:',:-,1C; ... e1"' . , 7,7 77, ..... n ' l 4%7.1, , ; , •• --.:•4..3,..f.3.3.v!,..,-• ,, .• , ' •-•'‘,"•:.:;"•-•34.,!;',v,.,..V..-....;,.,•••,;3:33..!.•ZI:V,!334.'.....,.:.- %:::••"Ti •, •:.• .., -! 3 '? M1.7 67.7 11.101-4 -..,, ":::'.' ' ' .. ..'''.17..'(.2'7:.;!:.'1•I'''''''1.:7.'"-;'..C7;'''''''',..''''''. '''''.4:.'"24■C'&i.1'154"4 '''..4V''';' :-.V;;'1-:■/;177'...::'...iii.7:...■2:..V:',";',.'!'Y',1;t'7!'h.t ;7.fit'''' • (L134 ( A - — •-•-•,--••---- • - y • _ • •,. ' 4 ) OFFICE SCALE: 3/32' = si ORA El EN 01F F ICE OFFICE BREAK Row 0 EH CE 0 f 1 OFFICE 1 1 PARTIAL MEZZANINE FLOOR PLAN REFER TO SHEET E-5, E-10, DC-5, AND DC-8 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA. SECURITY PANEL () FFCE ■ (t.t REFER TO SHEET M-5 AND E-7 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA. L0A0 NG DOCI< STORAGE ... 0 ) r .. • EXISTING AIR COOLED CHILLER #1 ADIVI I N. P ROOM MEN 0 _ 1 5150 ... WQME 13 N"-- LU 6 -. ".=.112:73=== _ ==11:::::=====3==•••=11______. CHI LL,ER YARD 6...1.304.41.7.Vil 5714.4 01 I ROW, 1 115.7411.75714 5- - t-- 'RIMY SA 077 '71777 7 7 EXISTING AIR COOLED Ad 111111111511=1•1111111 1' .71101. 4; 4-4 4 4 4 Ir• 4 4 4- 4 4 4 .a 4; 41 •4 • CHp CH CHILLER #2 1ST: . 6" CHLOW 1.3 • - V"; _ -,•-,• _• -• •• • -• .•. -.•.•-, ^ -••. v.- ■• ■-•.-. I- • .• -■_,• • • • -- AIR v iIiuIiiflhii- (5 11) (56) SCALE: 3/32" = NEW AIR COOLED CHILLER #3-08 1 1 1 1,.i,,, 1 ■10, RECT. I rom., 4117.74. TIRE . PRI11qER ROOM L 7760 it 1.61 POWER FUTURE UP540 AMP 007 KVA Fl.nua= UPS 0.4 6001IVA NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATOR DRAVVING. CONTRACTOR SHALL MODIFY AND UPGRADE DRAVVING TO SHoyv NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WITH ANY APPLICABLE CHNTS. GENERATOR EN(1. ()SURE . .„. ROOM oom 14102; L r Uttg , 11: A 0 77 4 7 "1W 14707 14404 144. 44414 43 0. 14701 14706 1 4 144, RAMP EX. 16:11. /16 11/E 1,5 T. I 1'1'1 '47 - 174011 144.00 140 1444 444=! 142117 PDF 14770 4111 IL 1 1 11 15 144.10 144.11 4.4 IZ 147.14 143.10 147.11 11.. 4414 1 14411 7 14474 147.14 14,14 141 11 44 14401 144 144 144.01 147, IOW 17 '4 , 777 , , - . - . 7 --- 1,0 .5 ,57,6 .10 1 4..15 176.10 1..15 1075 142.10 RAN:sFoRivitif 44444 14737 17 0. 14474 142,14 I. 1 t " I ROW, 1 1,11.717 E 7 , 4111 311.111 1 , .. - 1 1 M;1 6 .104 FUT1.11 36. .. . I L_ P617161. 7 .1172 7 ?, 4 ---- -ft - I- - et 1 1M J\ • T 1111141 ."1 1 1111 01 1474 • Akok 1.4, 16016V tan 140444 7 10107 114,4 15.5.114. -141 157 00 7 12700 1 1.1 01 114405 11344 146 , 07 144,13 14047 11476 ICC 0 .50110. 1,41. 145.. 101 1. 55 13411 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN — MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL I R CA I_ ROOM 10705 .p .U4 MA, 1. 4 701,660.7 171170,11.1011 ' 122.1E4 Tir3 fi3M.:33. 76. 10. 70.10. 134 LI 155.11 ,06 14. . . _ . 1.17 16477 154.14 6.1.5.1167651, 4.160 0041 „ 410 14.05,05,7 14:114:1104 11177 CORRIDOR c:-...==L.4:.........z./..., ... ( 1.7.)."••■ • , bog- o SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED ACCESSIBLE Ulf 76,0176.11 •111,•1111 •-t REFER TO SHEET E-6 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA. REFER TO SHEET M-4, P-4, FP-2. FP-4, E-4, E-9, DC-2, DC-4, AND DC-7 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA. NEV\I EOHIPIVIENT ROOM REFER TO SHEET M-3, P-3, FP-1, FP-3, E-3, E-8, DC-1, DC-2, AND DC-6 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA. RECEIVED CI1Y OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 ?009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 NAG MA1 • to -, 3••• 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 Fac. Code TYKVVVVA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 1212-08 11111•111111•111/ Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. MPE-2 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 1 MATCHLINE -- - - -_- EX. 6" CHS AND CHR MAIN BELOW RAISED FLOOR GENERAL NOTES: AA. CHS/CHR NEW PDU 150 KVA Iligi*Er of le "si FUTUR PDU W tmi-ir- imi�liiF�ararit - 1e5 .04 1 • (1E1 RELOCjATE EXITING CHILLED WATE MAINS O ALLOW FOR "NEW R�4CKS - IN TALLATIQN W irW® iimfirma 1 1E3.0?' WWI- Ili mm OHM D 131E3 09 14.5.10 4E5. 11 HS /CHR NEW 6" CHR/CHS REFER 0 DETAIL 4, SHEET M -8 143,16 142.16 14\6 143.17 142.17 NEW PDU 150 KVA 144.16 144.17 144.18 143,18 6" CH 142.18 s. 1 1 II 1 11 1 On 1 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 1 1I 1 1 , 1 1 1 1/ 1 V to NEW PDU 150 KVA MrilltilLAK41•10116611111 WARM LIIIMPON 'MOM NEW PDU 150 KVA ;.1 167.01 165.01 167.02 165.02 NEW PDU 150 KVA l4.01 167.03 165.03- AIM IN in in WWI* 159.1Ti . 15,1~;;1 198,06 f;5i1,(/ 161 ,I.)1_3 111-21 flielia c, -ors .PDF... 1 89.11 1f33 1:,. ,1,4 1i}♦ BFw- m- lil y- +Fis- �eb}-�- •9r61- ergsiiifimitll I 177 43111a ilF ®F® -W° in f� ido ofa�iiF� 17:;311 1Ei9.1 ? 169.331 1E39.15 71r4 OWSWIRIFIRK F F IT V INIIM 'IMMO '4 ■ 4 168.1 : iiin # 11@� ®•pie ,39 11 69 17 169.13 All I 1011 Fi mwr FIE11'tiriP REFER TO M -4 FOR CONTINUAT ON Jilin rlill 111-f-101-! ier�ai ®- DESIGNATE 60% PERFORATED AIR TILE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE QUANTITY OF PERFORATED RAISED FLOOR TILES AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL PERFORATED FLOOR TILES AS DIRECTED BY VERIZON BUSINESS REPRE SENTATIVE AND SHALL PROTECT AND STORE REMAINING PERFORATED FLOOR TILES ON SITE AS DIRECTED BY VZB FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION. 3. AFTER ALL WORK IS COMPLETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CONSTRUCTION TRASH AND DEBRIS AND VACUUM CONCRETE SURFACE BELOW RAISED FLOOR TO INSURE ENTIRE AREA BELOW RAISED FLOOR IS LEFT CLEAN AND DUST FREE. OM- in INFmr 1 C :19 of in ow -ii-w ii- INF LfiFiBt-IS in 14r111-M- i& 1®FIIFISI-0}Y in *tint al 1111-i0-110-® ii 41 9 1',;. i i 1 48 - 1 1.4 °5_'I;f i -`l 1 '1 1 148 1:5 ii WFiiF® 1- 1 s; a in ii miI-ma 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DIELECTRIC FITTINGS OR FLANGES AS SPECIFIED WHERE CONNECTING DISSIMILAR PIPING MATERIALS AND METALS. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 15 ! Mica 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE THE OPTION TO SHOP FABRICATE PIPING OFF SITE IN 10 FEET OR SHORTER LENGTHS WITH FLANGED ENDS. PIPING MAY BE DELIVERED AND ASSEMBLED WITH BOLTS AND GASKETS ON SITE FOR FINAL INSTALLTION. 4'3' 11 1: }: 1 `.1 so 8i iiiaaim pr Min- 18 int midi 5 mrinmreF :3 h,:, `l: :i 146-1=1 '1346 1 1'1';1 l :i 011ie in W W-W UW W 1O�- Yl - 1111 i/- iii-145 i&N- 1 "18 17 14 14:1 - 147 in IN-1 mi Went* in lid -Si In iolW W �W� 18.`lri 14E3. 17 SCALE: 1/4" . 1' -0" I :::::=121:12:==. `== _IL...._ ..1= .�: f1 CORRIDO PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. CHILLED WATER PIPING BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR, VERTICALLY STACKED WITH 6" CHILLED WATER SUPPLY ON TOP, 6" CHILLED WATER RETURN AT BOTTOM TO MATCH EXISTING. 2. MAINTENANCE WINDOW WORK: FREEZE LINE AT THIS LOCATION AND INSTALL ISOLATION VALVE WITH BLIND FLANGE IN BOTH CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES. 3. ISOLATE FLOW IN THIS PIPE SECTION BY CLOSING THESE VALVES HERE AND AT THE EXISTING NORTH ISOLATION VALVES (REFER TO SHEET M -4) TO ALLOW FOR THE RELOCATION OF THE 6" CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES AS INDICATED. 4. CONNECT NEW 6" LINES TO EXISTING. 5. RECONNECT EXISTING CRAC 26 TO NEW 6" CHILLED WATER LOOP. PROVIDE NEW 2" TAPS. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8. 6. CONNECT NEW CRAC UNITS TO EXISTING 6" CHILLED WATER LOOP UTILIZING EXISTING 2" TAPS. EXTEND NEW 2" RUNOUTS FROM EXISTING VALVES AND CONNECT TO UNITS. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8. - LINES CONTINUE ON SHEET M -4 WITH ISOLATION VALVES AT TOP I1 °,I- 77.7 - T I L Al,' • r R RJ [:) : sti-o`ritia-at FUTUR PDU in MAMA* 189. LOCAT EXISTING C C'UNIT TO W FOIL' WALL CONSTRUCT ON O HVAC -SOUTH 170.114 '70 05 N1-111ifFili ® -B "® 7 170 09 mi ii®In in ;1.1i.) 1? 0 1 ai-Ieim- X411- I11Ho-in- 7. NEW CRAC UNIT. INSTALL UNIT ON FACTORY FLOOR STAND TO MATCH HEIGHT OF EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. FLOOR STAND SHALL BE RATED FOR MOUNTING OF UNIT IN SEISMIC ZONE. INSTALL.LEAK DETECTION CABLE SERPENTINED BENEATH UNIT. CONNECT NEW CRAC UNITS TO EXISTING. CSI/TAC BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM UTILIZING EXISTING SITELINK PANEL (BY OTHERS). 8. EXISTING CRAC AND ACCESSORIES AT NEW LOCATION. RECONNECT CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES FROM NEW PORTION OF LOOP PIPING WITH NEW 2" RUNOUTS. RECONNECT UNITS CONTROL WRING. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE AND HUMIDIFIER WATER MAKE -UP PIPING. 9. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL GROUNDING FOR PIPE WALL PENETRATION AT THIS LOCATION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 10. EXTEND NEW 2" RUNOUTS FOR NEW PORTION OF CHILLED WATER LOOP. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8 FOR PIPING CONNECTION. 11. PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT FOR CHS AND CHR PIPING INSTALLED BELOW RAISE ACCESS FLOOR. REFER TO DETAIL 4, SHEET M -8 FOR PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL. REFER TO M -4 FOR CONTINUATION 170.12 mi WIN IBM 170. 4 WF lFiY-Ri r D _IL _ 11 1 MATCHLINE RECEIVED CITY OF TI IKWILA FEU 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A WATER TIGHT DRIP PAN BELOW CRAG. DRIP PAN SHALL BE DRIP ON CONCRETE FLOOR BELOW FLOOR STAND. R IP PAN S HALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH ALL WELDED JOINTS. THE DRIP PAN SHALL BE 2" DEEP AND EXTEND 2" BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE CRAC. TOP EDGES SHALL BE HEMMED OR ROLLED FOR SAFETY. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL WATER LEAK DETECTION CABLE SERPENTINED IN DRIP PAN BELOW UNIT. CONNECT THE WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM TO THE CRAC CUSTOM ALARM TERMINALS AS INDICATED BY DETAIL 2, SHEET M -9. 13. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL A WATER TIGHT DRIP ENCLOSURE BELOW EXISTING CRAC UNITS. ENCLOSURE TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLES WITH ALL WELDED JOINTS. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE 2" DEEP AND EXTEND 2" BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE CRAC. TOP EDGES SHALL BE HEMMED OR ROLLED FOR SAFETY. EPDXY PAINT ENTIRE AREA WITHIN THE ENCLOSURE WITH SHERWIN WILLIAMS ARMOSEAL 1000HS -SW 1006 OR APPROVED EQUAL. REFER TO DETAIL 3, SHEET M -9. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL WATER LEAK DETECTION CABLE SERPENTINED IN DRIP PAN BELOW UNIT. CONNECT THE WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM TO THE CRAC CUSTOM ALARM TERMINAL AS INDICATED BY DETAIL 2, SHEET M -9. 14. REMOVE EXISTING DAMAGED PIPE INSULATION AND PROVIDE NEW PIPE INSULATION AS SPECIFIED. D o 15 SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 1-• 3 Expiros C ;,.ts w X1 15 , t o 42359 Sheet No. M -3 k co � ° ON 0 � 0 co 8 co k- 4 ° z Qs o 1.--- WQ k 1, k LLI N ic v j N W 1-... N *I Q t Nil Fac. Code :TYKWWA PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - SOUTH FUTURE PANEL "DP4 ' DCGB-2 EX. CSI/TAC FUTURE . , \ \ PANEL "ULPP1-1" ,,,,,,„..„,..„...,, . .",.. BATTERY 1D BATTERY 1C _ BATTERY 1B BATTERY 1A UPS-1 . , NEW PANELBOARD BAS PANELS DCGB-1 PANEL "DP3A'\ - - 0 . ..... ____ . _ ._ _ ____ -- - .. - - • A ., , PL ANE ' PANEL 4 _ i 0 b d . ... . . 0 D \ D I 1 I I ... -----r- -t-- -- I _ _______ --I ....... ' • -r- ANALA§ER ___AITI ZONE 31BOX E PANE "CRPP ' 1" 1- ® 1 P.(1NEL "CFPPB1" \--AGB-1 ‘ \---FGB-1 III° ANALASER ____ ___ ______ ______ __ m ID 1111 ill& 44 1 i f -12 116,12 ii1-1111-11114111- ' M1D ill-1111-11i!III-1111. 1'7;5.1? 1'74.12 INI 1111-$11-111-1111-111-114-111-1111-1111-111/-11& - . . _ - _ _ _ i'VilD 011-1811-11111-1111- 17/ .13 1713.13 MID i . , 1 /5.113 1 '14.113 . ____. _ _ _ _ NI ID Ili 1 / 1 i 4 i'il it.) 111-11/11-4111-161-11171 '111.15 ____ .__ _ M i I J ili-iii-1111-101 't 71 .16 110.11 ili-10-011- 1 \JIID - _ _ _ .11111-1111-01/- 1'76. I 0 24 ,16 _ . . .__ ---- . - 17C,J. 11 lid-li1411-1111-11i MID . • : tr-! 176.16 11111 . MID RN- WWI* 175. - ...6" CH 8 Milt, P.-- 0 CHS AMNION. O ZONE 4 BOX ______/ .._ .. ' xi 0 Ili' wrim CHS ______________ _ CHS ._ _ . v './111.■ilat in I. 41 1.• ...„.. _ ____._ ... _ .__ __ . .. .. .. - _____. ___, __ ___ - - _ ..._ ___ _ _... ------- . ..... ___ ..... _ _ ...._ . ......_.. _ ___ ......_ ... ... _. _ . _ ________._._______ CHR _ __ _ ____ . . _ _ __. ..... ___ _._... _ _ - . ..... . _ _. . .. __ _... .. ....._ _ . _._ _ _ ___ ___ _ .. _ .. _ .. _ - .. ._____ .. __ CHR • • CHR Aim K3 EX. 3" -... I .... _ ... F _ r. 1 -- - - - ... ___ ____ _ ._..___ . .. . _. . _ - - - - - M D 181:lii- Wilk 10:3 ,...' \ . ro ii..7, 1111-119-10_ ANEW 154.09 , 4 'I 4 1 _ . _ . ilk . - . _ _ _ _ 0 . ...... _ __ ______ ..... ___ _ . 6 176.06 111111111-211-111-1111-81Hilliiith-11011111 M10 176.07 M/D 1 /6,08 MID m ID ___ _ .. .. _... . . M i ,..., 1111.181-NNIF WEI* 154 1 __- • - -- ........._ 71 .... ___ _ . 0 c ISTIN9 mu g_ ImP - I . _ . ., M D - ra - niton - , '113 '153.18 sionHoo-onon M1D - I 52 'I 6 mum i\Ipt, o 4 a _ 1 I 2 1 1 1713.1 "I la.iiiiitillibi M11) _ _ _ _ 1111 ilk -11N 1 I b.l'i 1 / 4. ti ___ ___ __ .. _ , . • - Z-><-j- 1 "...:<-] . . )1 - F 1 FUTURE ; CRAC #09 { I _ - • MID MID 11.11111 Oil NiN - Min I& 1311:61-541•11111- 154.16 1 b4 16 1 t..3-4 it 153.15 15110 1 5 ; roolainolonnou-onoin ovvritiorta-nou MID MID fte110 . - • 1 , 1 1 \ i 1 \ / __. ______ ... _ ____ .. _ _ . __. ___ _ _ .. „______ ____ . .-; EC 17,"-,Cii7A -4-1 ti F. __, 14 1( ___ 4., ,- -',' ,, z '176. D9 170.10 1111-111F1111-1111- ill MID 6111-&!:111/1111- 1 ,' t, . 09 1 '17409 ' MID , . -101- /5.10 - i' 4.10 -• - - , l e 1 21 4k / P (..5 / cl g\v/A / \ / 1 / 1 i \ i \ / / n/i , , ' 1-, • 6. 01' .' FUTUR PDU _L ', - _ _ ___ INN 17 \'-; Will .. 1111-11111-1111- 03 ,5. I '16.04 176.05 - 111 Mil VI 11 MID M11) _ 17E31 -1 116,15 111111111-1111-1111 MID M 1 DJ 114-1111-111421-iLlitiii11-1114111-11111- 17;15.14 175 15 'I '74.14 "1 WIN NI Of ill Iii-111Filailli-id- • - • - _ ___ _ ___ ._..._ _ _ ____ ___. _ ..... _ _________ ___ ___ _ ____._ __ ___... - - -- -- 1. 1 \ .1 ,, ,,,,:,\ ( 4- a MUM ret111461 ' 1111 "' Ild Willi ,-, i 5311 IN Ng rkill-161-1W118111-11-Mtairkild111 "..6. ■:.:', i 55.1 '3 153.14 a on isood-onos-nolottorst 1 0 • lit-ING-1111- 7. 1 1 5 0 it ,„ /7 ' . ", _ _ ......... -OW* INN - 175.02 I ' .4 t - IV 10 C. ild fil *I ale 152 6";' - 1. : ( FUTUR PDU MID 101 prlF M i D M 1 - 1 r . . . - - --!--- i 1 i --- FUTURE! , . li CRAG #1j 1 _. i ; . 1 -- 1>< 1 :1><1.. c _ r "%des 1— .....--.." 1111-4111-111- OE 152 06 111141111111161.111-111 Ell 111-1111-1111-iil- 1 :52 , (19 152 10 1 " CHS/CHR . ._. . ... ___ . ___ ___ .. ___ ..... _ . .. _._ __ _ • _. 118-11111-M1/41111111-MHINE )2 152 . r. 152.0.'3 Iii -1111411 .4111- 152.04 __ 1111-1111-1111.119-1111-11111-111H111-111- 152.05 152.0e -- , 1 / 5 -VM-V]:1111:111 :11111:0111 Mill Iiiill7i11 411 -11i 11111 1111 , Nli-illeriIHNIII . ,, 1 / b A Ob I i b. 0 ' 17i 0 17b,UB ______ _. • i 74 Al 174, OS 1 174.07 174,013 .0-1111-1111-811-111Fila l• azte_avN; ONILSIX: - EX:ft.: II ( E-CiaTIVI-1-14T _ . . RC OM -1*-611- 141-1*41 WINN 1111-1111-11111-1111101-11111-10-111-1111-61111111-1111-011*-11111 18-1111-11If 1811-111HEN- 52,12 "I 52.13 152 '14 152., 15 152.16 152 '17 1 . - 4-, ,,,, . at IN It 011-1111 iNli OW Ili IN 1 1 FUTUR 1 1 PDU I-E- 611111-1/11-1111-111H19-111-81-111-1111H011. NE- IIII Et NI Iil Ne•-•"-..-....-..- Kt Nil IN IN SI 1111-111-16-1111-11%-lii-lii-111-1011-#111-1111-118-1111 PDF - - - -- MN 1111 . • - ,... „ \ ,,,, , .: fi . ., / '' - •,'1,02', 'ti '15 'I 15 -1.1,:,3 1 1 i • . 1 ' : • . . 1 i ■ r -1 1. ...n i . . ....rf c I I . I • _L : t '-- C> 1 I> 1-2. , ii-C/ U I PME ° FE.QOR .. . _ _ - _ - -I _ _ I_ - - - L__ __ __ ________ '• • _ - - _ . . 151.06 151.07 151 i11,1 09 151,1.1.„ 151 --i -1 4, 5-1 -1,i- .3 151 . 14 1 : - . 5- i , 5 15 -16 1 51 12. ___ . .... _. . _ . . _ - __ .. _____-- ....... ...._______ .-. .._.......... _____. .. ...._,................___ _. ___ .. ... _ ..... ..._ ____ ... _ .__ _ .. ___ _ _ .... ... . __ _._ ____ ___ ..... ____ _ _ 4 . ..-.., /./ i No-a-a a IMP 11111-111118-10- - FUTUR PDU IR WI 1 -1 I 1 J 150.04 .075 111-10-1111-1111- 1111-101-IMAINHIMI .08 . 101*-11WHIII-101- 411-414-6111-fill-IN iii Ai iill Mill NW 1111101-111-11111- NAHNI-UHIV-Iii ,12 . 1 - 1111-118/1111-1/11-1111 •111141-118-1131-INH111-1111-101-1111-1110 atimurstiiiiiii1 friENNEINI-likii1481-ill-NIFill-lir _ 17 .> 17 1 - 17 '' 8 - 111-1111 : 111; ' 11111 - 111111111 - 11N-1111- " - - .- - - - . . ___ _ __. PDF 1111-10-111 NIFINi-ill , , ' M/1 fla UN Mild -11211101-14.11A 161- ill AIM 111-11111-16i 1 05 'I 50.05 150.07 150 013 15(.09 50 .10 150. '11 ' - - . __ __ .. ._. __ . __.________ .. . _... _ _ ____ . __ 150.01 _I- , ---- --- - - --- - _ . .. _ _ ___ _ RH* A* WWII* 111111F04011411 11111-1N-WINIE RAVI 1111-1141-01 50.'1.2 1,50.13 150.1-4 15(..1.11.3 150 '16 'I F.-0.'17 t>ii• i F 111-11111-1111- 17'3.10 -" - • --- I , 1 ; 1 (3••:, 1 I 1 t 1 1 •r * 1 1 I i 1 i 1 1 i i 1 1 1 RHO fil ill MO 110 Ill-ill-MI-IVa MI , if SO NE ii1-011HINI-111-111 ' " 3.11 173.12 '73. ' 173.1.4 173,15 173.16 72 , 10 172.'1 '1 17') '12 , '17`;'• 11'; , 1 1 1 15 1 i') lil la - WAN ' - 1111 - 1111111 - 11** - 1111F '".. " 111;1111 - 111 - MI - M1 - 1N-Will '. ' iill fiZill. INF liiHill-ili-1111-14HITh 1 - _ 10 . __ _ _ 1161-1111-11111-111-611-INIF 7 150.02 150 03 ! il , '01 ;■ g ,, 1 II I -I V - - - I \ / i \ i I 1 / 0 V / 21 * 1 P (3 / n v : 1\ / 1 I 1 / 1 / \ / C> -, ) L __._ . 1 • _.; 2 I FUTURE: 1 ; I CRAG #21 1 - 1 , L : , I i , . i 1 , . 17:3.01 /1 \ 7/ ' ' ) 1 1; 14 si 00.0040t 1 1 . 17?: .02 4 01 to risito az F UTURE WW1 . 73.03 '■. y r 1st- it Ili NI MI WIN- Billii 111-111-S11-10-1.1110 AKAN WIN- J- 173.04 17:3.05 17:3.00 17S.07 173.08 172,021 172,05 '172.06 '172.07 172 .01. -15 SHIN OHM 44HINH111-1111-1111-11111 1 0 ______ ______ __ ........... ___ _........ . ' ,-;.• , )1 1 10 PDU . _ - ___ _ ....._ __ ._._ • - .... - • -- ,... .-..- -:: ____ _ .._ ,;;, \ ,, // \ ., l',. , 0 , , ,-', i als-a- sa-Lit: ".)1 FUTUR PDU _ __ .. ___ .... _ ,:„ se :0---- - - . ..... . _ . 0 149 06 '? 49 .6-•;.1 149.07 1;) 08 149 09 . 149, u3 m9.11 .49, 001.404.404a4a41-01404400 li1411-111 11111111 . _ __________________.. ____.____________ _____. ... . ____ _____ _ . T ._ _ _ __...___....._......._..___.._______ 0 -12 1.49 13 -149,44 14 '9,1 f 140.18 - 149 '1 WO it 1111-61 1111-10-1111-11111S111-1111-111-1111 1{II 1111111-Iii -NW WAIN Vil 111-1111-11/- _ __ _ __________ ...._____...._ 0 '149 18 ._ . 01 ..1-{>C1-1-1 Nr IA _ :DO 1----<- D---fr EXISTING 8" CHS/CH RQ . p DV 70-644M- , __ _ • ..., , .„, 1111111311;1111 NI -INI-iillifrill-NON-111-111-idi-liFINIF mionFrot000naln-lid-11111-1111-1111- ,', , " . „_...... Ali 1111-1101-Will 1111-1111-1111-16N- ,, Ad _________ _ ... . 0 . . ___ _ . _ . . .......... . 1 , /1 / 1 i 1 , 1 / 1 . 1 A A i , ) 1-811-1111-1111-11i-NIN 0 T . 1 1 - WEB Iii 101-M1-11111-117HINHINHINH01 NM 4111-ill-111 Et 111-1111411 Ill1-111- 1111-1111 ' 0 -.. ,.. _ 1 0 I ...- _ 0 I 1 0 1 _ 1,- _ _ _ r 1""'" U. 0 l'• r--- -r. j i / \ I \ L.- ■ .., , , ..1°` }.." "1"' ""1. 7"."' maw aewsw MATCHLINE 1. GENERAL NOTES: 111 o DESIGNATE 60% PERFORATED AIR TILE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE QUANTITY OF PERFORATED RAISED FLOOR TILES AS INDICATED ON DRAVVINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL PERFORATED FLOOR TILES AS DIRECTED BY VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE AND SHALL PROTECT AND STORE REMAINING PERFORATED FLOOR TILES ON SITE AS DIRECTED BY VZB FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION. 3. AFTER ALL WORK IS COMPLETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CONSTRUCTION TRASH AND DEBRIS AND VACUUM CONCRETE SURFACE BELOW RAISED FLOOR TO INSURE ENTIRE AREA BELOW RAISED FLOOR IS LEFT CLEAN AND DUST FREE. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DIELECTRIC FITTINGS OR FLANGES AS SPECIFIED WHERE CONNECTING DISSIMILAR PIPING MATERIALS AND METALS. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. REFER TO M-3 FOR CONTINUATION POWER ROOM LINES CONTINUE ON SHEET M-3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -- HVAC NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. CHILLED WATER PIPING BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR, VERTICALLY STACKED WITH c" CHILLED WATER SUPPLY ON TOP, 6" CHILLED WATER RETURN AT BOTTOM. 2. MAINTENANCE WINDOW WORK: ISOLATE FLOW IN THIS PIPE SECTION BY CLOSING THESE VALVES HERE AND AT THE NEW SOUTH ISOLATION VALVES (REFER TO SHEET M-3) TO ALLOW FOR THE RELOCATION OF THE 6" CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES AS INDICATED ON SHEET M-3 AND OTHER WORK RELATED TO EXISTING LOOP. 3. CONNECT NEW 6" LINES TO EXISTING. 4. RECONNECT EXISTING CRAC 11 TO EXISTING 6" CHILLED WATER LOOP. PROVIDE NEW 2" TAPS. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M-8. 5. MAINTENANCE WINDOW WORK: DUE TO THE STAIRS CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTOR SHALL ISOLATE FLOW DOWNSTREAM OF THESE VALVES TO ALLOW RE-ROUTING OF THE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES AS INDICATED. THESE LINES SERVE CRAC UNITS #29 AND #30 IN ELEC. ROOM, THEREFORE TEMPORARY NC UNIT SHALL BE PROVIDED IN THAT ROOM. REFER TO M-5. 6. REMOVE THIS PORTION OF CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING TO ALLOW FOR STAIR CONSTRUCTION. EX. 3" CHS AND 3" CHR RISER UP WALL TO CRAC UNITS #29 AND 30 IN ELEC ROOM ELEC. ROOM 7. PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT FOR CHS AND CHR PIPING INSTALLED BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET M-8 FOR PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL. 8. REMOVE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN BRANCH LINES BACK TO LOOP AND CAP TO ALLOW FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION. 9. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL GROUNDS FOR PIPE WALL PENETRATION AT THIS LOCATION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRA1NINGS. 10. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL A WATER TIGHT DRIP ENCLOSURE BELOW EXISTING CRAC UNITS. ENCLOSURE TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLES VVITH ALL WELDED JOINTS. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE 2" DEEP AND EXTEND 2" BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE CRAC. TOP EDGES SHALL BE HEMMED OR ROLLED FOR SAFETY. EPDXY PAINT ENTIRE AREA WITHIN THE ENCLOSURE WITH SHERWIN WILLIAMS ARMOSEAL 1000HS-SW 1006 OR APPROVED EQUAL. REFER TO DETAIL 3, SHEET M-9. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL WATER LEAK DETECTION CABLE SERPENTINED IN DRIP PAN BELOW UNIT. CONNECT THE WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM TO THE CRAC CUSTOM ALARM TERMINAL AS INDICATED BY DETAIL 2, SHEET M-9. t O9O( ST SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED • RECEIVED CITY OF TUKIALA F-1-1-i 057009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 2 3 4 k Revision 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - NORTH M-4 (113) (112) (111) (110) MDS-SIDE B (109) MAIN BREAKER MDSB (108) TIE BREAKER (107) MAIN BREAKER MDSA (106} MDS-SIDE A (105) (104) (103) (102) (101) BATTERY 'ID BATTERY 1C BATTERY 1B BATTERY 1A UPS-1 . . ..... ......._. _ .......,........ .._____ ,,. .4.. • ....._........,...,....:.;_:.....4....2,z EXISTING CHILLED WATER PUMP P1 EXISTING P1 DISC. EXISTING P2 DISC. EXISTING CHILLED WATER PUMP P2 NEW P3-08 DISC. NEW CHILLED WATER PUMP P3-08 EX. 6" CHS EXISTING 6x4' ACCUSTICAL LOUVER EXISTING CONTROL INTERFACE EXISTING AIR COOLED CHILLER 1 (; °EXISTING 6" CHR 6"CHR&DHS PIPING OVERHEAD CFIILLER YARD EX. 4" PCV EX. 4" FLOW METER EX. 4" BYPASS EXISTING JANITOR SINK EXISTING GLYCOL FEED UNIT GE-1 EXISTING CHEMICAL POT FEEDER EXISTING EXPANSION TANK % CONTROL VALVE EXISTING AIR COOLED CHILLER 2 EXISTING MOTORIZED EXISTING 6'x4 ' ACCUSTICAL LOUVER \ 7:;\ EXISTING 8" CHR HEADER - BOTTOM / EXISTING 8" CHS HEADER - TOP ri EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONS/VERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. EXISTING 6" CHS 0 0 EXISTING V CHR ri C.B. NEW AIR COOLED CHILLER 3-08 ON EXIST. CONC. PAD e ■ NEW MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE EXISTING V CHS 0 NEW 6" CHR CONNECT NEW 6" CHR TO EXISTING EXISTING V CHR PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN — CHILLER YARD AND PUMP ROOM, MECHANICAL SCALE: 1/4" =- GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM CONTAINS 30% POLY PROPYLENE GLYCOL. THIS SYSTEM SHALL BE CONVERTED TO WATER ONLY. FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TAPE SHALL BE DEPLOYED AS INDICATED ON KEYED NOTE 10 IN ORDER TO PROTECT CHILLED WATER LINES OUTSIDE. CONTRACTOR SHALL FLUSH EXISTING SYSTEM TO REMOVE GLYCOL OUT OF SYSTEM. THIS IS DONE IN ORDER TO INCREASE COOLING CAPACITY AT EACH CRAC UNIT. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DIELECTRIC FITTINGS OR FLANGES AS SPECIFIED WHERE CONNECTING DISSIMILAR PIPING. --X NEW 6" CHS OFFSET CHILLED WATER RETURN LINE OVER CHILLED WATER SUPPLY LINE AS REQUIRED H ) TYPICAL CONNECT NEW 6" CHS TO EXISTING EXISTING 6" CHS GTRIcAL /\ PIPE COVER ROOM / - / PANEL "ULPP1-1" NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT AS INDICATED. REFER TO DETAIL 1, SHEET M-9. 2. PROVIDE FREEZE PROTECTION TAPE, INSULATION AND ALUMINUM JACKET FOR NEW PIPING. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 3. REMOVE ALUMINUM JACKET AND INSULATION FROM EXISTING EXTERIOR PIPING AND PROVIDE FREEZE PROTECTION TAPE AND NEW INSULATION. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 4. CONNECT CHILLED WATER PIPING TO NEW PACKAGED AIR COOLED CHILLER, REFER TO "CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC", SHEET M-6. 5. EXISTING GLYCOL FEED SYSTEM TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE. ENSURE ISOLATION VALVES ARE CLOSED. SYSTEM SHALL BE CONVERTED TO WATER. REFER TO CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC. 6. PUMP PAD, REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET M-8. 7. CONNECT NEW 6" CHILLED WATER SUCTION LINE TO EXISTING TAP AT SUCTION HEADER. REFER TO "CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC", SHEET M-6 FOR VALVE CONFIGURATION AND REQUIREMENTS. 8. EXTEND 6" CHILLED WATER LINE FROM NEW PUMP DISCHARGE UP AND CONNECT TO TAP AT DISCHARGE HEADER. REFER TO "CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC", SHEET M-6 FOR VALVE CONFIGURATION AND REQUIREMENTS. 1 1 XFMR UTRL1-1 LITHONIA LIGHTING CONTROLLER / K / /---\ / L PANEL "LPPAl" XFMR TRLA1 DIST. PNL "UPP1" ' DO9 UPS1 BY-PASS • SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED 7 1 7 ,7 : .-; :• ?.• : , ..; 1 hafeffir.il ..." :12611EM volsitea mama :151WMAII fitifaVahig • lttgiaLli Ii.Mig1031$ MAW hmizasw Ing.Eh'ia41 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN — ELECTRICAL ROOM SCALE: 1/4" 9. PROVIDE MINIMUM 5 TON PORTABLE SPOT COOLER IN BUILDING ELECTRICAL ROOM WITH HOT AIR DISCHARGE DUCT EXTENDED TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING. SPOT COOLER SHALL BE UTILIZED DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIODS WHERE CHILLED WATER SERVICE TO CRAC'S #29 AND #30 IS DISRUPTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL MONITOR CLOSELY AND MAINTAIN CONDESATE DRAIN TANK ENSURE NO OBSTRUCTION ARE WITHIN 24" CLEAR OF UNIT ON ALL SIDES (OR AS RECOMMENDED BY UNIT MANUFACTURERS. 10. FREEZE PROTECTION TAPE CIRCUIT FABRICATION KIT J-BOX. PROVIDE (1) CIRCUIT FOR CHILLED WATER SUPPLY PIPING AND (1) CIRCUIT FOR CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING. PROVIDE IN LINE T-SPLICE KITS AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR BRANCH PIPING PROTECTION. FREEZE PROTECTION TAPE SHALL BE THERMON 5-FLX-1 (30A BREAKER) SELF REGULATING HEATING CABLE OR APPROVED EQUAL. 11. CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CONNECTED TO EXISTING CSI/TAC CHILLED WATER CONTROL SYSTEM TO OPEN WHEN CHILLER AND PUMP ARE OPERATING AND CLOSE WHEN CHILLER AND PUMP STO ° Er° 1\1 PERMIT CENTER -AUTOSTICK II POVVER TRACK 9000 POWER MONITORING INTERFACE (G) MSGB PANEL "URDP1-3" VVTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 0 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS roa 3 p i ros - 9c2/1 . 717 - 1 Proj. Mgr.: KCM 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 uow 0 12 11 f:1 w in w (0 kw 41N W > x W a 1 Z 7 j 40 W "" Z M 0 0.1 4 ,„: ,„ I 1 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Date: 1212-O8 Revision 100% CD Project No. WA. 08093 Sheet No. M-5 ADD. NO. 1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - CHILLER YARD AND MECHANICAL 11111111IIL 95% REVIEW PERMIT SET L (TYP.) (TYP.) (TYP.) 0 O NEW CHILLER # 2 175 TONS 365 GPM EX. CHILLER # 2 175 TONS 365 GPM EX. CHILLER # 1 175 TONS 365 GPM 0 • ►4 —It 0 6" CHS • • 4 6" CHR 10 10 EX. 6" CHS 10 EX. 6" CHS EX. 8" CHR HEADER IN CHILLER YARD I t ? EX. 6" CHR 10 EX. 6" CHR 0 1 Q EX. 8" H pq - 1—pq— m r , — EX. 8" CHS HEADER IN CHILLER YARD -NEW AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVE EX. MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE (TYPICAL) X. AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVE (TYPICAL) EQUIPMENT COURTYARD PUMP ROOM 6" CHS — 6" CHR SUCTION DIFFUSER (TYPICAL) V i _ J PG 7— 6 " 1 TDV EX. CHILLED WATER PUMP 1 365 GPM 6 " CHR V A 6" DP ±. (TYP.) PG TDV r-L J V EX. CHILLED WATER PUMP 2 365 GPM 6" O 1' O V A 10 I 41 A PG 11 Ell- d ® e ;mow. 0 O NEW. CHILLED WATER PUMP 3-08 365 GPM SCALE: NONE GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM CONTAINS 30% POLY PROPYLENE GLYCOL. THIS SYSTEM SHALL BE CONVERTED TO WATER ONLY FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TAPE SHALL BE DEPLOYED AS INDICATED ON KEYED NOTE 10 IN ORDER TO PROTECT CHILLED WATER LINES OUTSIDE. CONTRACTOR SHALL FLUSH EXISTING SYSTEM TO REMOVEGLYCOL OUT OF SYSTEM. THIS IS DONE IN ORDER TO INCREASE COOLING CAPACITY AT EACH CRAG UNIT. 2. SYSTEM IS N + 1. CONTROLLED BY THE CSI/TAC BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM. NEW CHILLER AND PUMP SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THIS SYSTEM. BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM WORK SHALL BE OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT. EX. PRESSURE CONTROL EX. 6 " CHR EX. 1" 1 _�_ EX. WALL MOUNTED COUPON RACK SAMPLING i• L EX. FLOW i METER EX. 4" 9HVV BYPASS NC EX. 4 "CHW BYPASS V V • A EX. 6" CHR EX. 314' "' EX. 3/4" V A EX. CHEMICAL POT FEEDER V A EX. 1 1/2" V V a EX. EXPANSION TANK CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC ►a y NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. NEW PUMP PAD ON EXISTING CONCRETE HOUSE KEEPING PAD, REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET M -8. 2. ECCENTRIC REDUCER AT PUMP INLET. 3. SUCTION DIFFUSER. 4. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR. 5. CONCENTRIC REDUCER AT VERTICAL PUMP OUTLET. 6. PRESSURE GAUGE WITH GAUGE COCK. 7. TRIPLE DUTY VALVE. 8. THERMOMETER. 9. PRESSURE /TEMPERATURE TEST PORT (PETE'S PLUG). 10. PROVIDE FREEZE PROTECTION TAPE FOR ALL PIPING OUTSIDE OF BUILDING. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 11. "Y" TYPE STRAINER. PROVIDE WITH FULL SIZE BLOW DOWN VALVE (BALL TYPE) AND CAP. EX. TEMP SENSOR rs EX. AUTOMATIC AIR VENT FUNI 1 EX. ALR _.. SEPERATOR N.O. EX. FLOW METER FM I — — EX. 1 1/2" EX. PRESSURE SWITCH 18 PSI N.O. I N.O. ■/ —1 1/2" TT S ...FIN. FLOOR _...._.... ..._ EX. 55 GALLON AUTOMATIC GLYCOL FEED 10 -45 PSI b GO( s Ts EX. TEMP SENSOR 1 N.C. EX. 1 1/2" EX. GLYCOL FEED PUMP 12. CONNECT 6" LINE TO EXISTING ISOLATION VALVE AND EXTEND TO SUCTION SIDE OF NEW PUMP AS INDICATED. '13. EXTEND 6" PUMP DISHCHARGE LINE FROM NEW PUMP UP AND CONNECT TO EXISTING ISOLATION VALVE. 14. CONNECT 6" LINE TO EXISTING CHILLED WATER RETURN BRANCH LINE ISOLATION VALVE AND EXTEND TO NEW CHILLER AS INDICATED. 15. EXTEND 6" LINE FROM NEW CHILLER SUPPLY CONNECTION TO EXISTING CHILLED WATER SUPPLY BRANCH LINE ISOLATION VALVE AND CONNECT. 3/4" —17 PSI PRV —EX. CONTROLLER SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED EX. 1 1/2" VACUUM BREAKER - 1 1/2" TO BLDG. CONNECTION EX. 6" CHILLED WATER RETURN t EX. 6 " CHILLED WATER SUPPLY. REFER TO SHEET M -7 FOR CONTINUATION — RECEIVED CITY OF TIJKIMLA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS G MA ki cp • o kI' Revision 01 -05 -09 2 01 -15 -09 3 01 -26 -09 4 02 -02 -09 95% REVIEW 100% CD /DD. NO. 1 P1ERMIT SET it 3 2 J9 (f ` C.) J / ON AI { �� Ex1 n os IC. 1 Nog W : ;11 F- W o► Z 5" in -ton wo W i` Wimp a r Z 7 J ZmN 0Qti M -6 co c c ? ) p CD k v) Lu CD � V 0% N 4: i (f) .4) Fac. Code : TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- ? 12 -08 Project No thA. 08093 Sheet No. CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC EX. 6" EX. 6" SEE M -6 FOR CONTINUATION 0 EX. 2" EX. CRAC -1 EX. CRAC -3 EX. CRAC -5 C-- D�� -}- C ✓ 1 EX. 2" D4 EX. CRAC -27 O u> 0 0 EX. �7 EX. 2" EX. CRAC -6 EX. CRAC -8 EX. CRAC -10 CHS --CHR EX. CRAC -28 POWER ROOM EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM RELOCATE EXISTING 6" CHILLED WATER MAINS TO ALLOW TO NEW EQUIP INSTALLATION CHS CHR EX. 3" • 0 RELOCATE EXISTING 6" CHILLED WATER MAINS TO ALLOW TO NEW EQUIP INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM EX. CRAC -11 EX. CRAC -13 CIRCUIT SETTER BALANCING VALVE, TYPICAL NEW CRAC-16 EX. 6" \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \\ L D4 1 U � � EX. 6" EX, 2" 1 ce Z 0 EX. 6" ►. 0 EX. 6" CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC I\ T EX. CRAC -20 NEW CRAC - 23 EX. CRAC -24 4 a VI x, EX. 2" EX. CRAC-29 EX. CRAC -30 RELOCATE PIPE TO ALLOW FOR STAIR CONSTRUCTION ELECT ROOM EX. 2" CHS /CHR VALVED AND CAPPED D4- FOR FUTURE (TYPICAL) kJ Tr EX. CRAC -22 EX. 6" EX, CRAG -17 T ■ oT \ NEW CRAC -25 EX. 6" • „ /-hz r 4 ro .„/ 0 1 0 T ° , EX. CRAC -26 \ - a� RELOCATED NEW CRAC -18 0 \ \ D4 ► \ \ ► ! ;A/ ire MIA ® // t / /�: %!i 6 " CHS - �— \ - < CHR \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \\ TEMP. /PRESS, TEST PORT., TYPICAL NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. MAINTENANCE WINDOW WORK: FREEZE LINE AT THIS LOCATION AND INSTALL ISOLATION IN BOTH CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LINES. 2. MAINTENANCE WINDOW WORK: ISOLATE FLOW IN EXISTING CHILLED WATER LINES LOCATED IN NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM BY CLOSING THESE VALVES (NEW VALVES AT SOUTHWEST OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM AND EXISTING VALVES AT NORTH OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOMS). 3. EXISTING CRAC #26 AND ACCESSORIES TO BE RELOCATED TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. Project No. WTA. 08093 4. CONNECT NEW 6" LINES TO EXISTING. 5. RECONNECT EXISTING CRAC #26 TO NEW 6" CHILLED WATER LOOP. PROVIDE NEW 2" TAPS. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8. 6. CONNECT NEW CRAG UNITS TO EXISTING CHILLED WATER LOOP UTILIZING EXISTING 2" TAPS. EXTEND NEW 2" RUNOUTS FROM EXISTING VALVES AND CONNECT TO UNIT REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8. 7. EXTEND 2" RUNOUTS FROM NEW PORTION OF CHILLED WATER LOOP TO NEW CRAC #18. REFER TO TYPICAL CRAC UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, SHEET M -8. 8. CONNECT NEW 3" CHILLED WATER LINES TO EXISTING 3" CHILLED WATER LOOP AT THIS POINT. PROVIDE CAP IN EXISTING LOOP JUST BEYOND NEW 3" TAPS. EXTEND 3 " BRANCH LINES AS INDICATED. 9. CONNECT NEW 3" LINES TO EXISTING. 10. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL GROUNDING FOR CHILLED WATER PIPING WHERE PIPING PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. bO9 o SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS • c.\ :)59 Fac. Code TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By KCM DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 2 3 4 r 3 Ex pit es 0 NOI` M ID . HIP Z 5 " w d 14 ■IW.. 1\OW 4 W F- o w 4 W 0 t Z '" J W01 W"r Z Q tN G�poU `vM� �( ■ a s 0 L 2 / /0 co o * LV 'cc PPn� ( ) U) (1) .4) Revision 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 Sheet No. M -7 • Z -69 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCI Date: 12 -12 -08 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 w.a.�1u»u CHILLED WATER VALVE CONTROL ACTUATOR, PROVIDED WITH UNIT— 2 —WAY CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE, PROVIDED WITH UNIT TYPICAL CHILLED WATER CONNECTION TO NEW CRAC UNIT NO SCALE NOTE: PROVIDE DIELECTRIC FITTINGS WHERE CONNECTING DISSIMILAR PIPING MATERIALS AND METALS. CRAC CHILLED WATER COIL — CONNECT NEW 2" RUNOUT PIPING TO CRAC UNIT _ FOR EXISTING TAPS, REMOVE CAP AND CONNECT NEW 2" CHILLED WATER TO EXISTING .ai. ' } rf . -.'. r.r..�.- irw �....- .i.urG. .. �... u.� :li ti .�... y' . .;.�.xl� �.i' 10'- 0 "O.C. W U6 6" CHWS &CHR 1 5 / UNITSTRUT, TYPICAL. 3. 4 "X4 "X1/4" THICK PLATE . SCALE: AS INDICATED 2" VALVE NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O 4. FABRICATE CLAMP FROM Y8' THICK X %" WIDE METAL CLAMP /BAND. BOLT TO UNISTRUT. 5. SHEET METAL SADDLE (TYPICAL). 6. 6" CHS & CHR PLUS 2" OVERALL INSULATION. SCALE: 1/2" =1 2. DRILL THRU PLATE % "0 AND INSTALL % "0 X 2 Y2 " LONG CONCRETE BOLTS AND SLEEVES. (4 PLACES) TYPICAL. SIDE VIEW FRAME FRONT REFERENCE TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE TEST PQRT BALANCING VALVE, CIRCUIT SETTER TYPE TYPICAL CRAC UNIT 10'- 0 "O.C. TYPICAL UNDERFLOOR CHILLED WATER LOOP PIPE RACK DETAIL SCALE: 1" =1' -0" FRONT VIEW Et" FIN. FLOOR RAISED ACCESS FLOOR NEW CRAC UNIT SECTION SCALE: 1/2" =`1' -0" NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. EXISTING CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN LOOP. 2. EXISTING 2" TAP WITH VALTVE AND CAP. 3. EXTEND 1 -1/4" INSULATED CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN. 4. CONNECT RUNOUT PIPING TO UNIT. REFER TO UNIT CONNECTION DETAIL, THIS SHEET. FACTORY PIPES INSIDE UNIT; 6: NEW 2" COPPER RUNOUTS VIIITH SILVER BRAZING. INSULATE LINES AS SPECIFIED. REFER ITO M -8 AND ALSO TO DETAIL 1, THIS SHEET FOR VALVES. 7. INSTALL LEAK DETECTION CABLE IN DRIP PAN UNDER CRAC UNIT WITH SERPENTINED CABLE. CONNECT THE WATER DETECTION SYSTEM TO THE CRAC UNIT CUSTOM ALARM TERMINALS AS INDICATED BY DETAIL 2, SHEET M -9. 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVII E A WATERTIGHT DRIP PAN BELOW NEW AC' AND RELOCATED CR UNITS. DRIP PAN SHALL BE INSTALLED ON- CONCRETq FLOOR BELOW FLOOR STAND. DRIP PAN SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH ALL WELDED JOINTS. THE DRIP PAN SHALL BE 2" DEEP AND EXTEND 2" BEYOND THE REFIMETER OF THE CRAC UNIT. TOP EDGES SHALL BE HEMMED OR ROLLED FOR SAFEY. RAISED FLOOR CONC. FLOOR 3/8" THK. STEEL PLATE VIBRATION ISOLATION UNITS SHALL BE RECOMMENDED BY PUMP MANUFACTURER FOR SPECIFIED ISOLATION — EXISTING CONC. HOUSEKEEPING PAD— UMP OUT, RIEBIEMEMEll MEI TYPICAL DETAIL FOR INSULATED PIPE PUMP ANCHOR BOLTS PER PUMP MANUF. 4 THUS 1-6 6 X 6 6/6 WELDED WIRE FABRIC NO SCALE: SECTION 2" INSULATED CHS AND 5 2" INSULATED CHR EXTENSIONS TO CRAC UNIT CHILLED WTR. COI PROVIDE WEEPHOLES FOR DRAINAGE ON UNDERSIDE OF UNISTRUT WHEN MOUNTED ON EXTERIOR WALL IN HORIZONTAL PLANE TYPICAL DETAIL FOR UNINSULATED PIPE LEAK DETECTIOI MODULE CONNE TO UNIT #4 BARS @ 6" O.C. BOTH WAYS, TOP AND BOTTOM. WELD TO STEEL PLATE AT CORNERS:N NOTES: INSULATION ABOVE SADDLES SHALL BE FOAM GLASS OF SAME THICKNESS AS PIPE INSULATION AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF NOT LESS THAN 3,300 PSI. r L J � INTEGRAL D DISCONNECT NEW CRAC UNIT ON FACTORY FLOOR STAND 1 -1/4" INSULATED L rCOND. DRAIN \p-I\ 1 CT �— FLOOR STAND \ TURNING VANE — n SUPPORT PIPES ON CONC. FLOOR W /STEEL CHANNEL. REFER TO DETAIL 6, THIS SHEET FOAM GLASS RIGID INSULATION INSERTS AT ALL SUPPORTS OF INSULATED PIPE REFER TO NOTE 1 CLAMP AND BOLTS GALVANIZED UNISTRUT SECTION SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" TYPICAL CONCRETE PUMP BASE DETAIL B LINE SYSTEMS, INC. VIBRA CUSHION #6- 1999 ISOLATOR PROVIDE NEOPRENE PAD WHERE PIPE SUPPORT SITS ON EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAD ON GRADE OR INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED TYPICAL UNISTRUT PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL 30% FILTER PROVIDE W /UNIT —DRIP PAN j. :1.0t iF NOTES 1. L IS THE OVERALL LENGTH OF THE EQUIPMENT. 2. W IS THE OVERALL WIDTH OF THE EQUIPMENT. 3. CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3000 PSI @ 28 DAYS. 4. HORIZONTAL SURFACES SHALL BE TAMPED AND SCREEDED TO A TRUE SURFACE (TAKING CARE TO FILL ALL LOW SPOTS) AND STEEL TROWELED TO A HARD SLATE -LIKE SURFACE. THE PAD SHALL NOT BE MARKED OFF IN AREAS OR SCORED, BUT SHALL BE LEFT IN ONE PLAIN SURFACE. 5. ALL VERTICAL SURFACES SHALL HAVE A RUBBED FINISH. 6. ALL EXPOSED EDGES SHALL BE EDGED WITH A TOOL OF SMALL CORNER RADIUS. 7. ALL REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE COVERED WITH NOT LESS THAN 1 -1/2" OF CONCRETE. 8. CONCRETE FOR PADS SHALL BE LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE WITH A MINIMUM OF 5.5 SACKS OF CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD. WATER TO CEMENT RATIO SHALL NOT EXCEED 6 GALLONS OF WATER PER SACK. 9. PROVIDE ANCHOR BOLTS IN PAD OF PROPER SIZE AND LOCATION FOR PUMP FURNISHED. 10. SLUMP OF CONCRETE SHALL NOT EXCEED 3 INCHES. 11. MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE SHALL NOT EXCEED ONE INCH. FACTORY FLOOR STAND —INSTALL LEAK DETECTION CABLE IN DRIP PAN UNDER CRAC UNIT WITH SERPENTINED CABLE. REFER TO DETAIL 2, SHEET M -9 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FLB 05'_009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT C©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. HVAC DETAILS AND SECTIONS CHILLED WATER PUMP SCHEDULE PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE PUMP DESIGNATION CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) UNIT NO. TOTAL AIR CFM EXT. STATIC IN. WATER AIR EVAP. FAN ELEC. REHEAT HUMIDIFIER COOLING DATA CONDENSER SECTION COMPRESSORS CHILLED WATER SECTION COILS FACE AREA /ROWS TOTAL UNIT FLA EQUAL TO 480 FLOW H.P. VOLTS PHASE TYPE CAPACITY MBH TYPE CAPACITY ENT. AIR F CAPACITY MBH ENT. WTR. TEMP. °F FLOW RATE GPM PRESS. DROP PSI NO FLA EA. VOLTS PHASE ENT. WT R. TEMP. °F FLOTE W RA GPM ' PRESS. DROP PSI EVAP. CHILLED WATER LBS /HOUR DB WB TOTAL SENSIBLE 11 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 - - - - 45 65.6 8.4 25/6 80 LIEBERT'FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FUTURE 13 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 - _ - _ _ 45 65.6 8.4 _ 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FUTURE 15 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 - - - - - 45 65.6 8.4 _ 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 16 12,400 0.5 DOWN 15 460 3 < 72 60 327.0 267.0 ><' ><-' X i >< - ,>.< > 42 59.0 8.4 25/6 14 LIEBERT FH529C -AA00 NEW 17 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 45 42 65.6 59.0 8.4 8:4 �' / /�_ 25/6 25/6 80 14 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI LIEBERT FH529C -AA00 EXIST. NEW 18 12,400 0.5 DOWN 15 460 3 -----><-- 72 60 327.0 267.0 T < < 19 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' - - - - FUTURE 20 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 - _ 45 65.6 8.4 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 21 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FUTURE 22 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 _ _ 45 65.6 8.4 _ 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 23 12,400 0.5 DOWN 15 460 3 11°P-. - -- -- 72 60 327.0 267.0 4.11P-. '41IV. ,- 42 59.0 8.4 � 25/6 14 LIEBERT FH529C -AA00 NEW 24 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 _ _ 45 65.6 8.4 _ 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. 25 12,400 0.5 DOWN 15 460 3 >-----+ 72 60 327.0 267.0 �<----- J .>< X ,...>< .„><-'<- 42 59.0 8.4 ,,,. 25/6 14 LIEBERT FH529C -AA00 NEW 26 12,400 0.5 DOWN 10 460 3 ELEC 121.5 INFRARED 22.1 72 60 328.4 274.2 _ 45 65.6 8.4 25/6 80 LIEBERT FH529C -AAEI EXIST. CHILLED WATER PUMP SCHEDULE PUMP DESIGNATION GPM HEAD FT. WATER MIN. EFF. TYPE OF PUMP SPEED RPM MIN. H P. VOLTS PHASE MANUFACTURER No. OR APPROVED EQUAL 1 -08 365 100 END SUCTION- CENTRIF. 1750 ' 5 480 3 TACO FE3010 (EXISTING) 2 -08 365 100 END SUCTION - CENTRIF. 1750 ' 5 480 3 TACO FE3010 (EXISTING) 3 -08 365 100 70% END SUCTION- CENTRIF. 1750 ' 5 480 3 TACO FI3011 (NEW) NOTES: 1. NEW UNIT SHALL BE FACTORY EQUIPPED WITH 27" SEISMIC RATED FLOOR STAND, FLOOR STAND TURNING VANE ASSEMBLY, SMOKE DETECTOR, ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL. WATER DETECTION SYSTEM LIEBERT NO LT460Z45, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES AS SPECIFIED. 30% EFFICIENCY FILTERS. CONNCT NEW LINES TO EXISTING BAS SYSTEM. UNIT DESIG. 1 -08 G UNIT CAPACITY ENTERING AIR TEMP. °F 95.0 2 -08 3 -08 GPM 365 COMPRESSOR F.L.A. 1 © 140, 1 @ 128 365 365 ENT. T. °F 54 C 54 54 HILLER CA LVG. T. °F 42 42 42 PACITY MAX P.D. FT. WATER 22.0 22.0 17.8 AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER SCHEDULE SCALE FACTOR 0.00010 0.00010 0.0005 REFRIG. R -22 R -22 R -134a 1 @ 140, 1 © 128 1 159, 1 @ 105 CONDENSIN FAN F.L.A. 8 @4.OEACH 8 @4.0EACH 8 ©2.8EACH 95.0 95.0 EER EX. EX. 9.4 I PLV EX. EX. 14.8 VOLTS 460 460 460 PHASE 3 3 3 REMARKS EQUAL TO YORK #YCS0170EC46XFA EXISTING, NOTE 1,2 EQUAL TO YORK #YCS0170EC46XFA EQUAL TO YORK #YCIV0177PA46 (OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) EXISTING, NOTE 1,2 NEW CHILLER NOTES: 1. ADJUST CONTROLS OF EXISTING PACKAGED AIR COOLED CHILLER TO DELIVER 44 °F LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE WITH AN ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE OF 54 °F. 1. VERIFY EXISTING EVAPORATOR THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED HEATER ARE IN GOOD ORDER AND FULLY OPERABLE. SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" tWaaVagatiglatr NO SCALE WELD 360 DEGREES NO SCALE RASED Fl OO R GON ii. 1= . )O DRIP ENCLOSURE DETAIL 18 GA. GALV SLEAVE 12" LONG STD. U -BOLT I I PROVIDE 24V. AC AUXILIARY CONTROL POWER FROM CRAC UNIT GALVANIZED STEEL TUBE GALVANIZED ANCHOR AND BOLT (TYP 4 PER PLATE) f- GALVANIZED STEEL PLATE CRAC UNIT'S SPECIAL ALARM CONNECTION CABLE END TERMINATOR �o NOTE: PROVIDE DESIGN /CALCULATIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PIPE SUPPORT, INCLUDING WELDING CALCULATIONS AND DETAILS BY LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. TYPICAL FOR ALL PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS. PROVIDE WATER LEAK DETECTION MODULE, LIEBERT NO. LT 460Z45 COMPLETE WITH SENSING CABLE TYPICAL WATER DETECTION SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM FOR DRIP PAN WATER LEAK SENSING CABLE SERPENTINED IN DRIP PAN BENEATH CRAG UNIT INSULATION WITH ALUMINUM JACKET PROVIDE 18 GA. GALVANIZED STEEL SADDLE 12" LONG 1 1 TYPICAL EXTERIOR PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL RECEIVED CITY OF TI IKWILA F EU 0 5 %009 PERMIT CENTER NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL A WATER TIGHT DRIP ENCLOSURE BELOW EXISTING CRAG UNITS. ENCLOSURE TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLES WITH WELDED OR SOLDERED JOINTS. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE 2" DEEP AND EXTEND BEYOND THE PERIMETER OF THE EXISTING CRAC FLOOR STAND. TOP EDGES SHALL BE HEMMED OR ROLLED FOR SAFETY. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL WATER LEAK DETECTION CABLE SERPENTINED IN DRIP PAN ENCLOSURE BELOW CRAC UNIT. CONNECT THE WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM TO THE CRAC CUSTOM ALARM TERMINALS AS INDICATED BY DETAIL 2, THIS SHEET. 3. MASONRY BOLTS ANCHORED TO CONCRETE FLOOR AT CORNERS AND MID POINTS NOT MORE THAN 18" ON CENTER MAXIMUM DISTANCE APART. 4. 2 "x2" 18 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLE SET ON BED OF SEALANT. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED VVTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 ? ,IG MAN Ov WA 57 // Lice 0.42559 fi a�Gl51cR�� / `' /ONAL r �� v! Expires '?- (-- /e Fac. Code TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCIVI Date: 1202-08 Revision 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 1 0 In 0 2°N W (, dl 5t" L ii A r MN 111 ita M 4 W Inn ihei I 4 W O w n Wo -J W Jl >J. W -. zw. 04! • Sheet No. M -9 • oo (0 (r) oo W cf) 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET HVAC SCHEDULES MINNS Project No. WTA. 08093 Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision - . 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD 3 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 4 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET MATCHLINE Z EXISTING ROOM RAMP REFER TO P -4 FOR CONTINUATION EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. SCALE: 1/4" =1 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL PIPING SHOWN ARE LOCATED BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. 2. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. 3. AFTER ALL WORK IS COMPLETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CONSTRUCTION TRASH AND DEBRIS AND VACUUM CONCRETE SURFACE BELOW RAISED FLOOR TO INSURE ENTIRE AREA BELOW RAISED FLOOR IS LEFT CLEAN AND DUST FREE. LINE IS CONTINUED ON SHEET P -4 LJ I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 — — 0 1 -1/2" tr - -� r - � I I I L 1 9 I 1 I I I 11 11 i o. 1 1 / 1 / 1 I 1/ A /1 1 1 / 1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN FD t> a 11 '1 1 CO M Y 1 / 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" 1 -1/4" I's?, i IC3 JC °! En; 14- I'`r`ti>>1 PLUMBING —SOUTH NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. CONNECT 1.1/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE TO NEW CRAC UNITS CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION AND EXTEND TO EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN AS INDICATED. 2. TERMINATE NEW CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES AT EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. 3. RELOCATE EXISTING CONDENSATE DRAIN LIVE AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO RELOCATED CRAG #26. 4. RELOCATE EXISTING HUMIDIFIER WATER MAKE UP LINE AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO RELOCATED CRAC #26. LJ REFER TO P -4 FOR CONTINUATION u Dog - ors SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MATCHLINE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 '7009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS ti 3 >A M AN WA Sti;j141 g‹ Sheet No. 1 D 0.7 1I 21131 W Y1 7 '" w N R■; R I 11\0E6 W El a Wo > W Z m N oar :> \ _ 1 •�.. azer9 ‹ Ex pi: Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KM, DL, ZJ Project No. WTA. 08093 ID PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING - SOUTH DRAWING INDEX & STATUS LEGEND: SHEET ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION ISSUE / REVISIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 ►Zt SHEET ISSUED FOR INFO. & COORDINATION 0 SHEET VOIDED 01.05.09 - 95 % REVIEW 0125.2 -100%CD 01.26.09 - ADD . NO. 1 o.o2m- PERMIT SET ►33 SHEET ISSUED FOR INFO. & COORDINATION SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE DRAWING ISSUE DATE U ° '- 0 MECHANICAL - PLUMBING - ELECTRICAL (CONTINUED) b., E -8 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - SOUTH 12.12.2008 0 SHEET VOIDED SHEET NUMBER A/d » 3 --- * REFERENCE _12.12.2008 12.12.2008 E_ -9 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - NORTH _ E -10 _ PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING- POWER ROOM ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES 12.12.2008, E -11 E -12 UPS WIRING DIAGRAM AND FEEDER TABLE 12.12.2008 A -1.0 SITE PLAN 12.12.2008 E -13 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES 12.12.2008 A -1.1 EGRESS PLAN 12.12.2008 E -14 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES 12.12.2008 A -2.0 PARTIAL DEMO 12.12.2008 _ Y E -15 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES 12.12.2008 A -2.1 b 12.12.2008 A -3.1 E -16 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES 12.12.2008 12.12.2008 A -4.1 E -17 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E -18 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL GROUNDING 12.12.2008 MECHANICAL - PLUMBING - ELECTRICAL MPE -1 E -19 GROUNDING SCHEMATIC 12.12.2008 ` , MPE -2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL OVERALL FLOOR PLAN GROUNDING DETAILS 12.12.2008 ,, M -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - SOUTH 12.12.2008 D.C. POWER DC -1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER - SOUTH 12.12.2008 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - NORTH 12.12.2008 g, DC -2 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER - NORTH 12.12.2008 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -MECHANICAL ROOM AND CHILLERYARD 12.12.2008 M -6 DC -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - SOUTH 12.12.2008 71 DC -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - NORTH 12.12.2008 M - ( � �� ( ` { �_ M -8 _ DC -5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - POWER ROOM 12.12.2008 a DC -6 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUND - SOUTH 12.12.2008 M -9 DC -7 _ PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUND - NORTH PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUND - POWER ROOM ` 12.12.2008 12.12.2008 -' p _ DC -8 DC -9 -48V. D.C. ONE LINE DIAGRAM 12.12.2008 i ; ' P -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING - SOUTH DC -10 UPS 480V. D.C. ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND BATTERY RACK DETAILS 12.12.2008 ,r P -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING - NORTH 12.12.2008 FIRE PROTECTION • F P -1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - Fl RE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM - SOUTH 12.12.2008 - 12.12.2008 P -2 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - Fl RE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM - NORTH _12.12.2008 12.12.2008 12.12.2008 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL POWER - SOUTH - FP -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM - BELOW RAISED FLOOR -NORTH FP -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - Fl RE ALARM - BELOW RAISED FLOOR -NORTH DRAWING INDEX & STATUS LEGEND: ISSUE / REVISIONS SHEET ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 ►33 SHEET ISSUED FOR INFO. & COORDINATION w w in 0 0 0 0 o o U ° '- 0 Z ¢ N E. w a o ,,,. 0 SHEET VOIDED SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE DRAWING DATE REFERENCE C -1 COVER SHEET 12.12.2008 1 ' 1 ARCHITECTURAL A -0.1 ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES 12.12.2008 A -1.0 SITE PLAN 12.12.2008 A -1.1 EGRESS PLAN 12.12.2008 A -2.0 PARTIAL DEMO 12.12.2008 _ Y ! � =� , � A -2.1 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 12.12.2008 A -3.1 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS 12.12.2008 A -4.1 DOOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE 12.12.2008 MECHANICAL - PLUMBING - ELECTRICAL MPE -1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND 12.12.2008 ":"' ` , MPE -2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL OVERALL FLOOR PLAN 12.12.2008 M -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - SOUTH 12.12.2008 M -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC - NORTH 12.12.2008 g, M-5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -MECHANICAL ROOM AND CHILLERYARD 12.12.2008 M -6 CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC 12.12.2008 M -7 CHILLED WATER PIPING SCHEMATIC 12.12.2008 M -8 HVAC DETAILS AND SECTIONS 12.12.2008 M -9 HVAC SCHEDULES 12.12.2008 P -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING - SOUTH 12.12.2008 P -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING - NORTH 12.12.2008 12.12.2008 E -3 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL POWER - SOUTH 12.12.2008 E -4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL POWER - NORTH 12.12.2008 E -5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER ROOM, ELECTRICAL 12.12.2008 ` T E -6 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL ROOMANDCOURTYARD ,ELECTRICAL 12.12.2008 E -7 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - CHILLER YARD AND PUMP ROOM, ELECTRICAL 12.12.2008 AT very on business EQUIPMENT ROOM BUILDOUT 12682 GATWI ( DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SITE CODE: TYKWWA VERIZON BUSINESS - TECHNICAL FACILITIES OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION 604 EAST HOAG STREET PO BOX 10 YACOLT, WA 98675 VERIZON BUSINESS SR. IMPLEMENTATION LISA H. DAVIE A. DRAWINGS THE WORK OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE VERIZON BUSINESS STATEMENT OF WORK, AND AS INDICATED IN PROJECT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO INSTALL THE EQUIPMENT BASED ON WORKING SHIFTS BETWEEN 8:00 a.m. TO 5:00 p.m. ON WEEKDAYS EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFIED DIFFERENTLY BELOW. ALL HVAC AND ELECTRICAL HOT WORK HAS TO HAVE A VERIZON BUSINESS APPROVED METHOD OF PROCEDURE (MOP'S) BEFORE ANY WORK CAN TAKE PLACE. 2. ANY WORK REQUIRED OVER ACTIVE VERIZON BUSINESS SWITCH EQUIPMENT OR IN THE VERIZON BUSINESS POWER ROOM MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED BETWEEN 12:00 a.m. (MIDNIGHT) AND 6 :00 a.m. AND MUST BE APPROVED BY THE SITE MANAGER AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK. ALL ELECTRIC HOT WORK HAS TO HAVE A VERIZON BUSINESS APPROVED METHOD OF PROCEDURE (MOP'S) BEFORE ANY WORK CAN TAKE PLACE. ALL ELECTRICAL MOP HOT WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH 1000 VOLT TOOLS. 3. THIS IS A TRAFFIC- CARRYING, REVENUE - PRODUCING FACILITY WHICH MUST BE FULLY FUNCTIONAL THROUGHOUT THE DURATION OF THIS PROJECT. THEREFORE, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHILE WORKING INSIDE THE VERIZON BUSINESS COMPUTER AREA AND THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROTECTED FROM DUST AND DAMAGE AT ALL TIMES. 4. WORK TO BE ACCOMPLISHED ON THE EXTERIOR OF THE VERIZON BUSINESS LEASE SPACE MAY OCCUR DURING REGULAR BUSINESS HOURS, SEVEN DAYS PER WEEK. 5. ALL WORK WITHIN THE BUILDING MUST BE COMPLETED ON OR BEFORE CONTRACT DATE, INCLUDING DELIVERY OF THE UNITS, PIPING, SETTING, AND CONNECTING THE HVAC UNITS. SETTING AND RIGGING OF THE NEW LIEBERTS AND AIR COOLED CONDENSERS WILL BE BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH A SCHEDULE OF ALL WORK ACTIVITIES WITHIN THE BID PROPOSAL. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE VERIZON BUSINESS PROJECT ENGINEER OF ANY CHANGES TO THIS STATEMENT OF WORK WHICH MAY INCREASE THE AMOUNT OF THE CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM PROJECT ENGINEER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THE BASE BID. 8. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING WITH VERIZON BUSINESS MANAGEMENT FOR ACCESS TO THE BUILDING, FREIGHT ELEVATOR, SECURITY SYSTEMS, TURNING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ON /OFF, DELIVERIES TO AND FROM THE BUILDING. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK EACH DAY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE AREAS OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY, DUSTED AND BROOM CLEAN. CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL ARE TO USE EXTREME CARE WHEN USING SHOP VACUUM, INSURING FIRE SUPPRESSION IS DISABLED AND VACUUM DISCHARGE NOT DIRECTED AT ANY SMOKE DETECTORS. TRASH MUST BE REMOVED FROM BUILDING EACH DAY. 9. WHEN APPLICABLE, CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE ANY WORK DEEMED NOISY OR DISRUPTIVE TO VERIZON BUSINESS PERSONNEL OR SITE OPERATION WITH THE SITE MANAGER OR SUPERVISOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ACTIVITIES. 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS, LABOR, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND SUPERVISION TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT WITHIN TIME FRAME SPECIFIED. 11. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT WALLS, FLOOR AND ALL VERIZON BUSINESS PROPERTY FROM DAMAGE. IF DAMAGE OCCURS DURING CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR RESTORING TO THE PREVIOUS CONDITION. 12. PROVIDE A SAFETY BARRIER OVER ANY EQUIPMENT IN THE WORK AREA, IF APPLICABLE, OVER SWITCH EQUIPMENT BAYS, TO PREVENT ANYTHING FROM FALLING ON OR INTO THE BAYS. PROVIDE PLYWOOD COVERS OVER THE BATTERIES IF WORK IS OVERHEAD, WITH PROPER VENTILATION. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLOOR PROTECTION WITH 1/2" MASONITE BOARD FOR WORK AREAS AND DELIVERY PATH WHEN SETTING OF EQUIPMENT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLOOR PROTECTION WITH 1/2" MASONITE BOARD FOR TRAVEL PATH TO AND FROM TOILET ROOMS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS. REVISIONS No Changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. NOTE: Revisions will r 'ri n Pr.r, r k-sn glthrr,i } >�I `. r" •/. -' I I - ' ENGINEER SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: Er 1 hhanicai trical 5 1� Artnbing retas Piping City of Tukwila BUI +_►ZINC DIVISION 14. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING AND HUMIDIFIER MAKE -UP PIPING SHALL BE TYPE "L" COPPER WITH 15% SILFOS SILVER BRAZING JOIITT. a. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PROPER INSULATION ON PIPING AS SPECIFIED. b. PROVIDE PROPER LABELS ON PIPING AS SPECIFIED. WORKING CONDITIONS 15. WORK IN HALON PROTECTED AREAS BEFORE WORK CAN BEGIN WITHIN THE FACILITY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIRST DETERMINE THE IMPACT ON ANY HALON- PROTECTED AREA. IN MOST CASES, THE HALON SYSTEM SHALL BE DISARMED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. AT THE END OF EACH DAY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO ENSURE THAT THE SYSTEM IS RETURNED TO NORMAL OPERATION. ALL HALON DUMPED AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR NOT FOLLOWING THIS DIRECTIVE WILL BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT THEIR EXPENSE. VERIZON BUSINESS WILL NOT PROVIDE HALON FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S USE IN RECHARGING THE SYSTEM. IN THE EVENT THAT DRILLING OR CUTTING IS REQUIRED IN HALON PROTECTED ZONES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COVER EVERY HALON SENSOR LOCATED WITHIN 50' OF THE EFFECTED AREA WHILE THE SYSTEM IS DISARMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT FOREIGN PARTICLES DO NOT BECOME LODGED IN THE SENSOR, THUS RENDERING THEM INEFFECTIVE OR CAUSING A FALSE ALARM. 16. DRILLING AND CUTTING BEFORE BEGINNING ANY DRILLING OR CUTTING OF CONCRETE, GYPSUM BOARD, OR OTHER DUST - PRODUCING MATERIALS, THE VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE SHALL BE NOTIFIED SO THAT FIRE - PROTECTION SYSTEMS CAN BE DISARMED, AS NEEDED. WHEN DRILLING OR CUTTING IS REQUIRED IN AN AREA WHERE TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT INSTALLED, A HEPA VACUUM CLEANER SHALL BE EMPLOYED TO REMOVE THE DUST OR OTHER DEBRIS DURING THE OPERATION. ALL AREAS ABOVE THE CEILING OR UNDER THE RAISED FLOOR SHALL BE VACUUMED CLEAN AFTER THE WORK IS COMPLETE. ALL VACUUM CLEANERS SHALL BE APPROVED FOR USE BY RFEC AND FACILITY MANAGEMENT. WHEN WET CORING, ALL PRECAUTIONS SHALL BE TAKEN TO CONFINE WATER TO WORK AREA. ALL EQUIPMENT IN AFFECTED AREAS SHALL BE PROTECTED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE. ALL CORING LOCATIONS SHALL BE APPROVED BY VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO BEGINNING THAT WORK. 17. WELDING AND OPEN FLAMES APPROVAL TO DO WELDING SHALL BE OBTAINED IN ADVANCE FROM THE VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE. NO WELDING SHALL OCCUR WITHIN 5' OF ANY FIXED EQUIPMENT WITHOUT PRIOR NOTIFICATION AND SAFEGUARDS DEEMED APPROPRIATE BY THE VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE. THE VERIZON BUSINESS REPRESENTATIVE WILL COORDINATE DISABLING LOCAL ZONING OF FIRE/HALON SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS AND NOTIFICATION OF SECURITY /SURVEILANCE. 18. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN TRASH DUMPSTER FOR DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS AND TRASH. TRASH DUMPSTER TO BE REMOVED AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. C. VERIZON BUSINESS FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED LIEBERT CRAG UNITS 1. INSTALL NEW VERIZON BUSINESS FURNISHED LIEBERTS COMPLETE WITH LABOR AND MATERIALS. ELECTRICAL AND CRANE SERVICE, AS REQUIRED. 2. NEW UNITS SHALL BE PIPED WITH HYDRONIC PIPING AS SPECIFIED. a. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PROPER INSULATION ON CHILLED WATER PIPING AND DRAIN LINE AS SPECIFIED. b. PROVIDE AND INSTALL NECESSARY SERVICE VALVES ON NEW LIEBERT UNITS AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED. PROJECT LOCATION 12682 GATEWAY DRIVE SOUTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 3. FOR DOWN FLOW RAISED FLOOR APPLICATION, PROVIDE RAISED FLOOR PANEL OR RIGID INSULATION IN GAP BEHIND UNIT STAND AND WALL. TO PREVENT SUPPLY AIR LEAKAGE. 4. FOR DOWN FLOW RAISED APPLICATION, PROVIDE PROPER CUT -OUT OF RAISED FLOOR AT UNIT STAND LO 5. PROVIDE PROPER LABELS ON PIPING, AS SPECIFIED. 6. COMPLETE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO NEW LIEBERTS AND CONDENSER INCLUDING: a. AC POWER SUPPLY WIRING, CONDUIT AND TERMINATIONS AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED. b. ALL CONTROL WIRING, CONDUIT, AND TERMINATIONS BETWEEN LIEBERT UNITS, CONDENSERS AND AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER PANEL AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED. c. ALL CONTROL INTERLOCK WIRING, CONDUIT AND TERMINATIONS BETWEEN AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER PANEL AND THE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FOR EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION LOAD SHEDDING AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED. d. ALL CONTROL INTERLOCK WIRING, CONDUIT AND TERMINATIONS BETWEEN AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER PANEL AND FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL FOR UNIT SHUT DOWN AS INDICATED AND SPECIFIED. e. COMPLETE WATER TRACE INSTALLATION AND WIRING FROM UNIT TO DETECTOR. f. EQUIPMENT SAFETY GROUNDING TO VERIZON BUSINESS' GROUNDING GRID. 7. ROOF PENETRATIONS AND PIPE FLASHINGS TO BE INSTALLED BY APPROVED ROOFING CONTRACTOR UNDER MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR BID. 8. WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH WALL SLEEVE AND SEALED WATER TIGHT. 9. PROPER LABELING OF ALL NEW HVAC AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DISCONNECTS, AND J- BOXES. TO INCLUDE: a. NEW 1 "X4" BLACK LAMINATE LABELS WITH 1/4" WHITE LETTERS ON LIEBERT UNIT AND CONDENSER. b. LAMINATE LABELS SHALL DESCRIBE UNIT, ELECTRICAL PANEL, AND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION. c. J -BOXES SHALL BE LABELED SHOWING ELECTRICAL PANEL AND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION. 10. FOR DOWN FLOW RAISED FLOOR APPLICATION, CONTRACTOR TO INSURE BELOW RAISED FLOOR AROUND NEW LIEBERT UNIT TO BE CLEAN BEFORE START -UP. 11. CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE, COORDINATE AND SET UP FACTORY REPRESENTATIVE FOR FACTORY TEST START -UP. a. PROVIDE START -UP CHECK LIST AND SUBMIT COPIES TO CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR. D. PROJECT CLOSE OUT 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE PROJECT ENGINEER UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF WORK AND SCHEDULE PUNCH LIST WALK THROUGH. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETE ALL PUNCH LIST ITEMS WITHIN 5 WORKING DAYS OF PUNCH LIST WALK THROUGH. 51� f.. kkP.i CATION. ua �tb FILE COPY Permit No. - Plan review approval is subject to errors and omissions. Approval of construction documents does not authorize the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt of approved Field Copy and conditions is acknowledged: Date: ..,: City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 uK City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISIOisili cEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 -5 2009 PERMIT CENTER o WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 3 No.42559 I ONAL. 0 4 ° Expiros 01 -05 -09 2 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 4 02 -02 -09 C -1 l oot% Nog W : Z: "1" N w V w 41 C W 4 II■O W 'D 4E1 a o i W >JO W p Q Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, Z Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision Sheet No. 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 COVER SHEET PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 OMIS MATCHLINE FUTURE PANEL "DP4 DCGB -2 I . I 1 I 1 _x.___12 . ._._.___ _ _._ ......... .. o AGB -1 EQUr1iPMENr 'I s _ctJ!:' I.I BRGB -1� O t4;, : REFER TO P -3 FOR CONTINUATION EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONS/VERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. DCGB -1 GENERAL NOTES: FUTURE NEW PANELBOARD PANEL "DP3A" "DP2B" ANALASER ZONE 3 BOX 1. ALL PIPING SHOWN ARE LOCATED BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. 2. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. 3. AFTER ALL WORK IS COMPLETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CONSTRUCTION TRASH AND DEBRIS AND VACUUM CONCRETE SURFACE BELOW RAISED FLOOR TO INSURE ENTIRE AREA BELOW RAISED FLOOR IS LEFT CLEAN AND DUST FREE. Icw SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" PANEL "CRPPAI" 11 1 1 / 1 / 1 1 1 / 1 1 t E LINE IS CONTINUED ON SHEET P -3 W� : O D U - U EX. FD J / 1 WO \I EX. FD PANEL "CRPPB1" 1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. REMOVE EXISTING HUMIDIFIER WATER MAKE -UP LINE TO CRAC #11 BACK TO HUMIDIFIER WATER MAIN AND CAP. 2. PROVIDE NEW 1/2" HUMIDIFIER WATER MAKE -UP CONNECTION TO MAIN, EXTEND TO EXISTING CRAC #11 AS INDICATED, AND CONNECT TO UNITS HUMIDIFIER WATER MAKE -UP CONNECTION. 3. CUT A PORTION OF EXISTING PIPING AT THE LOCATION AND INSTALL A NON - CONDUCTIVE SECTION. REFER TO DETAIL, THIS SHEET. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR DETAIL OF PIPE PENETRATION THRU WALL. r 1 T r PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING -NORTH PANEL _._ -- ULPP1 ^ I ' ANALASER ZONE 4 60X T I J XFMR 1TRL1 -1 BATTERY 1D BATTERY IC BATTERY 1B REFER TO P -3 FOR CONTINUATION BATTERY IA UPS -1 • h EXISTING PIPE INSULATION NEW SOLDER EXISTING COPPER Lo TUBING NEW SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNION NEW PIPE INSULATION 1" ANNULAR SPACE W/ 1" DEPTH 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25WB +CAULK NO SCALE ): INSTALL WITHIN 6" FROM WALL NEW SOLDER EQUIPMENT ROOM ¶ ois WATER PIPE WALL PENETRATION DETAIL EXISTING COPPER TUBING= EXISTING PIPE INSULATION CORRIDOR SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL Dart Horn - .__ RECEIVED CITY OF TI IKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 42559 ■/2i7L:N � i�a j } . 0r1A,- 2 Z 7 [ 4 t /o1 Proj. Mgr.: KCM 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 1 OIQ� 1 W w i1 F- 1 • In N in la W w�M 2 eto W 4 W O daWo lis J In I j 10 W�� ZmN O Fac. Code: YKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ • VIM Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Revision Date: 12 -12 -08 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET MATCHLINE MINA IMRE _ ON - r 11:XISTI U1 NT- i.66" - MST: SECUR: J-BOX REL • IATED. EXIS J-BO REL . SECUR. TO BE TED. 7 L "DP213=2 - - DP2B:1 1-37 NEU UM 11 B - 1111 1101111981 Mir 148.02 4 00 (11 1 05 "fr, oa via ON RDPA1-33 :C0.1 14 • , • WW 1111 W 1111-1IN-01- WIWNA W 11114 14(3.02 146.03 '146. c 1 ON R PA1-3 rvl 3IE 24 • _ • A 3IE 22,7 2 r 147 05 - 147 0 147.07 1 C:16 1 At as si sr 111--------MI-511-1111-1111-1101A-M-1111-MB-ta- -11111-NI MAIN in -sw to- or Es- iiviawn FUTUR PDU NEW PDU 150 KVA 31E r�il 144.03 144.04 NEW PDU 150 KVA riQ R \IVIP 2. L5-20R RECEPTACLE SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS 3. L6-30R RECEPTACLE SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS REFER TO E-4 FOR CONTINUATION 3IE : r 1 1 . 41 , 31E 2.4E 142.02 142.03 142.04 3IE 1 41.4.1, !'.1. • 146 .0 145.05 ri I11211 :03 A 3IE :0 A 31E ?It 143.05 wA ri ryi 1 .1•1 142.05 145.06 ri 5,1 5. 144.05 144.06 143.06 :!Tot: ? :4I 3IE rdil A Pio] 142.06 111 911 1 z18. 0 1413.08 1 i41 (19 Walla 148 0'7 145.07 Sig r,.i ?I? IOU 3IE 3IE r h.0 144.07 143.07 A : , 3IE 511 ILOX 142.07 1111114- 1.16 415. 08 la WI WEI A :0; 144.08 143.08 21 rvi rdi 201 "".■■; 21 Ig o] 142.08 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL NEW AND EXISTING CONDUITS PENETRATE NEW WALL SHALL BE INSTALLED OR RETROFITED WITH PLASTIC COUPLER AS SHOWN ON DETAILS 3 AND 5 ON SHEET E-17. AN IN id 111111111141 IN 1 16 0'a 14€1. I 6 11 12,16 145.09 1413.10 145.11 45 12 145 1:1 145.1.4 MINIM nia-res-arrliavtworm r vi r t.1 4 .4 1 144.09 143.09 ri 3IE r 1. 1 . 1 .1 31E ri 5I1 2 1 0 . 01 ,4 142.09 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. PDF 144.10 144.11 44.12 143.10 3 ? ri L4 3IE 3IE 142.10 50, rtA 3IE 143.11 143.12 3IE 5g ?..!1 NE 2.!1 r t..$4 2) 3IE 3IE A ri 142.11 142.12 10 3IE 1 144.13 143.13 :0; 1: '010 IOU ',4IE 31E r 0 SY, ?„■ 142.13 15-131 1 . - 14 . 1 48.15 148 114 1413 - 17 101-611-1011111- AN IN NV INFINF 141 146.15 12i '16 1 1 146.'18 rffo, 3IE 3I ,PM 144.14 143.14 3IE :O ri et4 " . foi - 1 , 17. .16 WIN- ES 'ANN 215 111-1111-1111-116 "'4 144.15 143.15 143,16 S0 RDPA1 -28 O N UR P1-3-2 3IE 3IE 3IE ;0: 142.14 142.15 P ri L IU 3IE S Y, rOV NEW PDU 150 KVA 20 U12. : 3IE „"4 ri kiN).1 144.16 144.17 rdi rge, r0Q 3IE 3IE :10.1 142.16 • - 17 1 4 161-611-IN rtA ?1,4 3IE 3IE 142.17 rvi ri SCALE: 1/4" = ri r i 3IE rii 3IE ri 144.18 143.17 143.18 3IE A 142.18 .E.X. CRPPA1, 14,16,18 ‘• RPPA1- 0,22,24 CRPPAi _ 26,28,3 IF 4 / 1/ A / 1 / 1 1 / 1 I 1 / 1 EX. CRPPA1- 19,21,23 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. PDU INPUT J-BOX FURNISHED WITH PDI, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DETAIL. INSTALL J-BOX ON TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE. CONNECT THE INDICATED UPS OUTPUT FEEDER TO J-BOX. 2. PDU TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE (TSP) FURNISHED WITH PDU, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DETAIL 2, SHEET E-17. GROUND TSP AS INDICATED ON GROUNDING FLOOR PLAN. 3. OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PDU. PDU IS PDI MODEL NO PP-134-150-G641-0-4D-MDP, 150KVA PDU. INSTALL ON PDU FLOOR STAND AS INDICATED ON DETAIL 1, SHEET E-17. EACH PDU IS EQUIPPED WITH (4) DISTRIBUTION PANELS LOCATED ON PDU SIDE CAR. 4. EXTEND THE INPUT J-BOX FACTORY WHIP AND TERMINATE AT PDU MAIN INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER. 5. RELOCATE EXISTING DUPLEX RECEPTACLE TO FACE OF NEW WALL. 6. FACTORY DISCONNECT AT FRONT OF CRAC UNIT. 7. LIEBERT SITE LINK COMMUNICATION CABLE IN 1" CONDUIT FOR EACH CRAC UNIT. 8. FOUR SITE LINK COMMUNICATION CABLES IN 1-1/2" CONDUIT TO EXISTING SITE LINK PANEL IN POWER ROOM. / 1 1 1 1 1 / 1 1/ V A // 1 1 0 11 \1 1 0 L 9N DPA1r. 21 1 / 1 / 1 / // V „ A / 1 I 1/ 1 / kl i :FL T3 T6 ,77 t.. 1/ • .7 • ,.. s 1 , • 0. • IN NI NISI FUTURE PEW EH ri pP2B-3 POIRR1 L1 Ek/V F E . CRP 2 ,2Z24 '" ''' plitommic* samumilal EX. CIRPP131 - -14,16[48 (2) L5 20R A 31E 3IE 54; 3IE in-aim lot is 169.02 EX. CRP FUTUR. PDU 3IE ri 3IE 3IE re! 167.01 1167.02 167.03 PP1 0 1) pit hittA NEW 150Kv A ' otC3 E . CRP B1 - 228OE ii 3IE 165,01_ _2165.02 B1 - 1111-1, 1 69. 13 3IE 1,§ 3IE lirA NEW PDU 150 KVA ■0.4 3IE . 70 04 169.01: - 11"1 , '„3 1„.14 3IE 3IE 3IE 3IE 31E 167.04 166.03 3IE 3IE 164.04 3IE 7 - 07 170.08 170.4/9 ' 70 10 '1 7( 0 . 05 NI-N1F111 9111-111111 _169.05 1 NI IN III 111-111 3IE 1 i r. 10 ]! 3I 'E 05 166.04 3IE 3I E ON UFDP1:3: 3IE IE 165.04 165.05. 164.05 3IE 170 06 mi Is a" ■■ 111-11FM/r 169,09 168.06 3IE 167,06 167.07 167.08 ON URDP1,34 166.05 3IE 31E 164.06 3IE N E 3IE 31E 3IE r:71 10.07 3I E 3IE 3IE 3 IE 3IE 3IE 164.07 3IE 9. PDU NETWORKING CA..E IN 3/4" CONDUIT BELOW RAISED FLOOR. REFER TO PDU INTEGRATION DIAGRAM. 10. (2) L5-20R RECEPTACLES PER RACK FOR ROWS 165, AND 166. 11. (2) L5-20R RECEPTACLES PER RACK FOR ROW 164. 12. (1) L5-20R RECEPTACLE, (2) L6-30R, AND (2) L6-30R REDUDANT RECEPTACLES PER RACK FOR ROWS 142 AND 143. 13. (1) L5-20R RECEPTACLE, (2) L6-30R, AND (2) L6-30R REDUDANT RECEPTACLES PER RACK FOR ROWS 144 AND 145. 170.14 1r.11 -1111-911-INHNI WIN NI III-11111 111INt-NIVEN1111 WIN 3IE ' 5/ 3IE 3.1E rs 166.06 166.07 3IE 3IE 164.08 3I E 3IE 3IE PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -- ELECTRICAL POWER SOUTH 14. EXTEND EXISTING FEEDER CIRCUIT TO NEW LOCATION OF CRAC UNIT TO ALLOW FOR NEW SECURED WALL CONSTRUCTION. 15. FEEDER CIRCUIT FOR NEW CRAC UNIT FROM PANEL INDICATED. PULL CIRCUIT IN EXISTING UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ALREADY IN PLACE. VERIFY LOCATION OF RISER THRU FLOOR AT JOB SITE CIRCUIT SHALL BE 3-#10'S, 1-#10 GND., IN EXISTING 1 " CONDUIT. 16. INSTALL RECEPTACLE IN SURFACE MOUNTED OUTLET BOX BELOW RACK DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO FLOOR. BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SEAL-TITE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT EXTENDED FROM INDICATED PDU. LABEL CONDUIT AND OUTLET BOX VV1TH CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED ON PDU PANEL SCHEDULES. 16 ■:3, INFIN-118-11 3IE 3IE 167.09 166.08 3IE 2 3IE PDF :: : - i::::1:n1T:ILT r r'' --- rr:' i 11 jr 71 - E" TELL '! 10 111 INI-111-111-1111-1111111110 5-20 165.06 165,07 _ 165.08 _ _165 10_ 166.09 166.10 3IE IE 3IE 3IE is al in , wiNt '169 AND ( 3IE 3IE IE 3IE REFER TO E-4 FOR CONTINUATION 3IE _165.11 3IE 1(31'1.17 NIFININI-1111 ) L6 3 3IE g 167.10 167.11 167.12 166.11 3IE 31 _165.12_ 164.11 164.12 6 r. 6 . 1 3IE ‚-'‚4 3IE "170 113 IN SI 111110111M 169. 13 163.14 169.'! 3 '16916 169 '17 189.18 (3B13 11-11:1/4 1(13. 111-414-111161 R le 31E 3IE 31 E 3IE ri 167.13 31E 3IE 3IE C)ON R --- 31E 3IE 3IE 3IE ON UR P1-3-E 3IE .14 ON 166.12 166.13 3IE _165_13 165.14_ 164.13 164.14 3IE IN- III HI OH El 3IE 3IE 167.15 PB1-3 20 . 16 16f.3. 1/ 111-14 4I1 11111114NIII- 31E 167.16 3 (2) L 20R 22. J-BOX FOR FUTURE PDU CONNECTION. 3IE 167.17 ON RDP 1 11■1■41 ■••••••■ !STING S CUIRITY I3OX R LOCATED EXISTING EX TING LIGH SECURITY SWI c BOX TO BEI RELOCATE. Doc1ol5 6 " 17. PDU FEEDER CIRCUIT FROM EXISTING UPS OUTPUT PANEL "UPP1" WHICH IS FED FROM EXISTING UPS-1A. REMOVE EXISTING 80A, 3-P CIRCUIT BREAKERS NOT USED AND INSTALL A NEVV 250A, 3-P CIRCUIT BREAKER TO SERVE THIS PDU. REFER TO "ONE-LINE DIAGRAM". 18. LOCATION OF FUTURE F'DU INPUT J-BOX AND TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE. DO NOT INSTALL CONDUITS OR PIPES AT THIS LOCATION. 19. EXISTING PDU1-2, ASSOCIATED FEEDER CIRCUIT AND ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL REMAIN. 20. EXISTING OUTLET ON CORD REEL TO REMAIN. LOCATE CIRCUIT CONDUIT AT JOBSITE. WHERE CIRCUIT CONDUIT PENETRATE NEW WALL, CUT CONDUIT AND INSTALL NONMETALLIC CONDUIT ADAPTERS. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17. 21. EXISTING WALL MOUNT TELEPHONE, TELEPHONE JACKS, AND TELEPHONE CABLE SHALL BE REMOVED. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATE AT EXISTING OUTLET BOX. 23. PROVIDE NON-METALLIC CONDUIT COUPLER AT SECURED WALL PENETATION. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MATCHLINE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 05 NH PERMIT CENTER VVTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS DNAL'e- ' 'Pa r Expres/. 49 2 3 4 No .1259 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 Revision 01-05-09 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL POWER - SOUTH CSI/TAC V © _ 2 ..... . . ........ _.. ._ _ _. EXISTING FUTURE BUILDING PANEL "DP4 ' SYSTEM AUTOMATION CONTROL PANELS - / / 41 _ . .... D FUTURE 1 1 1 _____ ,, .:\ _ . , p ,u A L. N p E p l_ i_l, . UTRL1-1 ,:-.- BATTER 1D ...... BATTERY ......_ _ _ ,. 1C _____....__............_...... BATTERY 1B BATTERY 1A UPS-1 _ ..._ -1. _ NM NEW PANELBOARD PANEL "DP3A'-- "DP2B"---,_ 1 IT n---.1--- • - 7'''''' ..________ _ .....__ ..__. _ ________ ... ______ _ ___ _ . _ _ ... ________ _ ___ _... ._ . a PANEL , "BPPA2" , PANEL ' "BPPB2" E f E. 1 I - I 11 __ a, Ag - ummaimmammuwmammummumtouwwwwwwwwimwuombawmwowtawNdmiw,uuwamwomaLwmxamigluEmAimfidaimwww.iwiuug . A I L _ ______ _ ........_____ _____ ___________ __ ............._ .... ......_.____...,............_........ CAMtaiWOLUWM1AblUMWWWWWMWaMAWIMWMWUWWWIRINMMi t I_ ....k. ____. ......S - I . , I' .•- mmumummmmolummumammmmvawAmummmmmmigamwormoawwwm. .. ._ ...._ ___ ..________ .. _. _...... ______ .... _ - ------- ....... .. ... ...._ ___ ...... .... . _ ...... ..... .........___._ .._ .. .. ..._ ... ..... _... ________ . ___ ... .._ , .. _ ....._ ....... . ......_ ____ ... ............ ..... ____.. ..... ....... ..... ._ .. . . _. __._ .. ________.._ ..._...........___........„_..........._ ___________ ....__ , 0 O ANALA ZONE 3 ER BOX 0 • _. _ ........_ 4C---- _ . RDPA .....____ -2 4 _. .. PAN El. ■■ ON - RDPAI-28 _._..._ • - +7 _ ..._ PANEL "CP PPB1" . rr, ■ ' im,":- 1 ON RDPB1-30 ANALASER ZONE 4 BOX 0 _......... _ ___ ______ ... ..... _____ .................._ _________ .. .. . .._ _ „. ____„_. ..... ... ....... — — — – 1 — 7 . , : ',.t { .t 1 0 . , . 1 i /. ... I •••••• t t J i 0 ., , • . , 1 . • Li . 1 ; i , : • ... ..._..... ..____ ..______________ . ..... _______________ . ......... . ________ . . . ... . .. _ . ..... ...._ ..... ....... Ti NC"; .._....t... MEN T OM mo , i 771' 17Ei. 11 illiitillaWiti hi111'..) mmitimAim 176.11 174..11 wwww.mmumn ;.., ..... 177.12 175,12 18411-118111 ii E.) miums-u-si- 1 174.12. ON -32 .... • .. MINN i _ _ . . _ ..__ .. _ .... __ _____ __ (-- . . ... ______ __ _ .. ... _. _ PDU 1 1._____ p6.oi . . __ ___ ..... ....._..... i MID M D .... .A.... 177 i 176.13 170,14 175 • : :3 eivre ituasinisue , awtal•aliAs• MID '1 ") MID ' ..= ... M ■ D ......... 177 16 176.16 au - M1D lie w .........--- _. .. ._ - __. 0 -33 DRP1 NEW ., pOOM 3-9 Y _ ■ - mio I "1" halo 1;54 CO Dr2B-1 P2B-2 tTO DU 145.02 1 11 1 1 . .. ., .DP2B=4 EX. pRPPA1- . 0 -T. _ .... _____ ________ ._._. _ ..... _ .... .„ _..... _ _ .. ...... _ ......_____ 176,04 M i E.) ........ .... 175.04 "174 04 _____ . 176,05 Aam-a-mai MID _ 0 migimumm 17 f.;. 05 174 Ob , .. .... 17F,i,f 16 illawal-m- MID URI) • me-www 175. f SA 174 06 mmumm _...., . _ 17E5.07 MID 1-3-4 I ; 5 NI 1 ; • 176,0a -Fammiwas- M iD mlusig*Ala 175.06 1741,03 7 I ; __ - . ON RDPA 0 _.. 04 8,10 12 - --`. - --- . _ ____ . __ 1.1C 17 IN 411•11111 WAN /it[) . _ 17(3.'18 WWW Mli:") -.- -- _ __110 ____ PDU 0 PDU T45. _ ... 176,09 176.10 wwww MID -1- 11.-wis- me-wan- 175.00 ''. 1 '74.09 '74.10 woos's, was MD ... ....... ... 143.02 - - m iD "i'..!""' ..... __ wkwea-as- PA ID ...... __ . .. . .www-.ww.m.0*m..., 1 14 1 14 .... ___ -2 mu-ssim 150 14 1.49 1 fam-ava. _____ .. __ _ .. . _____ __ . ,.. - ivi ID wal-a.-Bamaimia - aa-st-o-sm MID . .... ._ .. .. . __ "162.'15 151 1:'''.) _ 14$3.16 , ___ ..... . . . . ____ _ ._ • I ; u_11 • • .• ; I I I --- _ m ID N4 1 D mis-was- 154,16 154.17 m ID al- i4118 611-811-1M-611-19 .. - - - MID _ . _ _ _ 1 1 ti 1 '1 ''.i . EX. CFIPPA1- 1.3;45;17 . wwww 'I 60 18 . - . 149 1 b _ _ _ ... __ - 1 1 1 ,-- . _ _ L - .... ________ . . _. ....._ __ ____ _ __________ ..„_____ .._ ___ ___ . . _ „.... _____ .D7B-3_TO _DU_164.01 j - - - [Ti • - .. • • • / i \ / 0 ; 1 z1 / P ciii R ,'■/' LU OA n ... .... . _ . . 1 ., _. 1 FUTURE , . i 1 : ! 1 i : : I , CRAG t1.9 i , • ! ! t 1 .. r I L 1 I I 1 1 ,c,i,, _Y , , . . /1 \ 4 ;',.. ,..,\ / 4 FUTUR PDU ..._ . . _ .__...._........ J__ 0 \, ,:, - / E 1 1 1 1 1 1 L__ I I 1 .. . .. _ . suss 4111-IN 42 M it) - - _ - _ ... . .. _ _ _ 152.16 161 16 ...... 1119.16 maiummia-rawiala- • . . , 1 , • $ — 0 1 ; 1 I ! ; • $ .,c° w , •=.7- ; • I ! ! ,•-• • ' 1 • ! 4 ; .1 4 I I • , 1 _ _________ 01-81-111-1111- M i D __ _ _ . .m.ww. 152.17 151 17 .... . mmlormilm 150.1'7 . ._. . 1 4.D 17 _ ______ ... . ._ .. ... ..._ / ■ / \ / 1 1 \ i \ .1 I ; • -,"";; ! • I ap ; ; • ii 1; 1 i L - _ .... ... . I CEP _., . ,,,, ' /,' ' it iii lif a W . 3,oa .. RV is show ...;.. to si - --- 111-1112-111-11A- Ni-81-1O-141- MID ON URDP1--2 1111-161-11111 0 Ill PDF ivi 1D - - - - _ .. .... gi) -- - ____............ ..... _ ___ .... ....... .. .. ......... __ . _______ ........... .. . .._ ______ ______._____._ _.......... - 1851-WW 175 01 ,,...., ,,, , # \ .'i 7/ "6 175.13 4 13 i 7 . . a..". UR P1-3- mm mula-ww 176.14 175.15 '174 '14 •114 1,.'i wwww.m.omm N ww=wwww • to i • g 1 ! 1 a ' • :2: I $ fx ; DI ) ; I ; FUTURE -- _ . . .. _ . __ ......,_ 1 __, . . _ .._ , I 1 1 : • • ! t • FUTURE CRAC#12 • 3 .0 _ _ _ , .. ... WWWW W WW 1;1'75.02 175. • • /, „. '''', , \/ -4. .„ ,,., - umm-sum wwwm 175.17 1'7:5.10 - 0 , _L._ _ ... , _. ..._ , • ..._ ___ ........._ _ - ...... _. . _.___ . _______ __ - .... ....... ... .._ . ... _ _ 0 -7 ■... 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ • .guism*, 152:13 t 51 . • L ..... . . ___ -- .... -- .._ 0 _ ww. 5 , 12 i k -- ■ 1 \ V Az / 1 I 1 / L- 7 /1 / I / I / 1 1 1 1 0 kr... re to p ,.. w , 75.10 7.1.. 1 1 _ ._.t _ _ _J wwwww i .‘,;',.!.i..)2 41.0,004. 152.1.Ki 1 r.5.2.0 wwww ,. - 152,05 51.:.::5 .... 12 .. - - - - - - .. _ .... ..... __ 1 ':t.0, 05 .... __....... ..... 149.05 - . _ _ __ '162.06 1 !,...,1 . 0 ... . ............... - - - - ......_ .... im•ims-ww 160 co ' 1'48 0(5 ... _______ ..... ....... ___„. 4 ----- 151 07 ..... ---_ _ _ - - - - - . 160 07 '14V;:i u . .. _____ __.„ ....... 6 0 ; ; ; 1 1131 ; — ; 1 0 If 1 1 LI: ; $ I, ! 1 1 1 1 .... 1 .06 1 S1 1.18 .... ... ... mmlum-lo 150, ,N.:1 . _ . ___ ... .. .. ._.. i l * • 7 .. ". . - n. , . 0 ! I I I i I I 4,, ! ; i I 1 1 : : 1 : 1 . ..,-,:! w ; ! 1 1 ! a T.--, ,..,•r.: i i 1 ! ; 1 * i5 7- * I 1 I ' ! I I 1 ' 5'2,09 1 . 1•': 1 f71; . . _... . warm- 150.09 14;) 00 ,-ra _ . _ _ ._... ww.gmum 152,10 •I ;?", I 16 ..... . . . _ _ _ _ l'ilF •. ., '150.10 wwww 152 .1'1 1r.; i .1 '1 :: .... .... ---- _ _ imFew,muum illamillit 150.11 1150.1'2 u \ 1 \ k 1 i - - r 1 1 - 0 wi 4:: , E ....._____ 1-24 mms4 1 1 1 1 mmummwq FUTUR PDU 1191 0 . _ URDP -3- • PDF . .. • Iwo- min-wom ........ . .............. _...._................ _______.... ................. ..._ _ .. _.._ _ _____ .... ....... _ .... _ ________ . . . . . . . .... ........ ... _... . _ ...... ... ..._ . . ....._ ._..... 1 oi E I 1 I , 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 6., // /i • ,. .-- . :. i ' Lk _____ _. 1_._ . CRPP1B1 - 8,10,12 , -,10...7.-vv---- -- .. ---- 51 12 ON RDP ' 0 .. , ,' , - 1 , ,,, i. 1 FUTURI - . PDU --EQUIPMEN1 . FFOOR ' , ._._. ON . RDP 1-34 _.. _ . .. . .... • DP 1'60.01 I. -35 150. 0'2 --- _ r- 101 r . 0 - - - -- _ .. . 150,06 _ - . .. 150.0 1 ..1 i ED ._ •■■ 1 . 1 1 1 t , 1 1 1 • 0.1, LJ I --T114r3V1:10 , ONIISIXE ON RDP1- , . '150.13 49 'I ','.. 141., 13 maciaaula _ ... .......__ .. ....._ _ . ._ . _ . . . ... .... ._ .... t_ f..., _....r_ FUTURE RAC #2'i 173.01 17:: .02 . 173. .. 7 7 \ / . il , '1 ., ' '/ ' ih.r..rr.' WIlk 173 , 04 1 /2,04 7 L - T! I : . 1 ...,,i ---- $ ,,,,, ---'.. 1'73,05 172,05 mmwom 1 '73,06 'I 72,06 173,07 172,0'7 1"13.0t3 172,06 MWMWM =mum 17'3..09 17;2.09 ' WWWW 73.10 12.10 173.'11 1'73.1'2 172..11 172.12 WWWWW WWWW '173.13 172,13 173.14 '173 15 'I 72.14 172,15 WWWWW WWWW 173.16 172.16 1 - 12 WWWW • .• ----. 0 01 , 1 ...... .. . MOM • ... . 1 1 1 I 1 f 1 1 rellIN .1- .. _ _1. 1 MINWIllperWlii1111 1 1 FUTUR e t 1 P DU .. _ _J''-. 1 1 CD ..J._ 11-WWWWWWWWWW WWW W ,.,,, 1 /1 .07 - - - - * 1/1 ,08 ■II MN= - - - - PD 'stew_ 1/l0 0 '. mm. MOS il■ (7 - - ( ' • . 'I) EM=1 mimi Y \ . viflituum wwww 1'.'11 171 71 12 MOM Mr ••••• DCCCO -rn c -a 17 1 .1:Ft , IMMO 1.■ cnD nnAMAII isummumism wwfaisr 1'71 .1 .1.5 14 17 ■Ml Illir MIME MEM itrinAl siva 171.18 (7 mil!mlir,mos 171 . '17 .........e. P. '1 171.1 '13 ■... ..., "1 / 7 0 I ... _. NI- .-, X 4k D 0 -Is .... , ,... __ _ _ _ E ' 1 ,-1 1 1 i 1 1 , 4E J" ____ ..... . . r..... ,. 6 • ' ,,,,,,..,..,.. .... . . , . /,/ , N t FUTURE PDU O --L-- 14 Y.10 14 f..-). 1 'i • -a-maimad walla-ma .. _ ____ ____ ... __ .. _ ___... ... _ ... _ ... - - . --- .. ...... _. _ _ t 4 ------N 0 1111) ....._ . . _ ._. _ . . , . .. _ ,._ C - \I 1 1 / / / / - 7 / / 2 Q 117.: tn 1110 R 1 \ I- , 1 i q ., ''' •,, - - -- ,- -eqrauma-mill sum-vel-fsa-wwww-am,avi 71. '1 171 .02 171 INNIMM IMINIM ran stww , 13 17'i .04 171 . (6 171 . (R5 1•111• =MI REFER TO E-5 FOR CONT. WIN IMMEIN MATCHLINE ( `3(.....f.).1) REFER TO E-3 FOR CONTINUATION GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL NEW AND EXISTING CONDUITS PENETRATE NEW WALL SHALL BE INSTALLED OR RETROFITED WITH PLASTIC COUPLER AS SHOWN ON DETAILS 3 AND 5 ON SHEET E-17. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAIMNGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OVVNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS CESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK QUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE CHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO BMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. LS It PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. EXISTING CRAG POWER PANEL WITH FEEDER CIRCUITS INSTALLED _UNDERGROUND TO EXISTING CRAC UNITS. PER RECORD DRAWINGS, UNDERGROUND EMPTY CONDUITS WERE ALSO INSTALLED FOR FUTURE CRAC UNITS. 2. RELOCATE EXISTING DUPLEX RECEPTACLE TO FACE OF NEW WALL. 3. LOCATION OF FUTURE PDU INPUT J-BOX AND TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE. DO NOT INSTALL CONDUITS OR PIPES AT THIS LOCATION. 4. CONNECT NEW RECEPTACLES TO A 20A, 1-P SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING UPS POWERED PANEL. 5. PROVIDE NON-METALLIC CONDUIT COUPLER AT SECURED WALL PENETATION. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17. 6. EXISTING OUTLET ON CORD REEL TO REMAIN. LOCATE CIRCUIT CONDUIT AT JOBSITE. WHERE CIRCUIT CONDUIT PENETRATE NEW WALL, CUT CONDUIT AND INSTALL NONMETALLIC CONDUIT ADAPTERS. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17. ELECTRICAL POWER - NORTH 7. EXISTING WALL MOUNT TELEPHONE, TELEPHONE JACKS, AND TELEPHONE CABLE SHALL BE REMOVED. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATE AT EXISTING OUTLET BOX. 8. PDU NETWORKING CABLE IN 3/4" CONDUIT BELOW RAISED FLOOR. REFER TO PDU INTEGRATION DIAGRAM. 10. (2) PDU NETWORKING CABLES IN 1" CONDUIT OVERHEAD TO CSI/TAC PANEL, INSTALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. REFER TO PDU INTEGRATION DIAGRAM. 11. DROP DOWN AND TERMINATE INTO 6"X6" JUNCTION BOX ABOVE CSI/TAC PANEL. EXTENSION OF CONTROL WIRING TO PANEL SHALL BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. 12. J-BOX FOR FUTURE PDU CONNECTION. 9. PDU NETWORKING CABLE IN 3/4" CONDUIT OVERHEAD, ROUTE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. REFER TO PDU INTEGRATION DIAGRAM. FROM EXISTING PANEL 111 " - b09 ols- ' „) MMII1 =NM SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED REFER TO E-6 FOR CONTINUATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 /009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 z we ;,, .) Expires o y WAS/, eoer• o 11 W sh w Z " to -Mg 11 wo W 4w . 0 !Ng 1 J >Jo W Wird Z M N G A O. 01-15-09 100°/0 CD E-4 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By KCM, DL ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KM Date: 12-12-08 Revision 01-05-09 95% REVIEW 01-26-09 ADD. NO. 1 02-02-09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL POWER - NORTH TUKWILA, VVASH1NGTON 9816 ANALOG DATA POINTS NAME INDEX NAME TYPE SCALE NOTE 0 INPUT VOLTAGE A -B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE PHASE ROTATION ERROR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE B-C 16 BIT INTEGER NONE SYSTEM SHUTDOWN 2 INPUT VOLTAGE C -A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE TOTAL KVA HIGH 3 OUTPUT VOLTAGE A -B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 4 OUTPUT VOLTAGE B-C 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE C -A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 6 OUTPUT VOLTAGE A -N 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 7 OUTPUT VOLTAGE B-N 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 8 OUTPUT VOLTAGE C -N 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 9 OUTPUT AMPS A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 10 OUTPUT AMPS B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 11 OUTPUT AMPS C 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 12 NEUTRAL AMPS 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 13 GROUND AMPS 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 16 KW A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 17 PF A 16 BIT INTEGER *100 100 =UNITY PF 18 KW B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 19 PF B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 20 KW C 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 21 PF C 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 22 KVA A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 23 THD A 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 5 =5% 24 KVA B 18 BIT INTEGER NONE 25 THD B 16 BIT INTEGER NONE 5 =5% DIGITAL DATA POINTS NAME STATUS ALARM ALARM LATCHED ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSFORMER HI TEMP 39 215 567 39 PHASE ROTATION ERROR 40 ` 216 568 40 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN 42 218 570 42 TOTAL KVA HIGH 252 604 76 4. GFI�WP EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 C 3 MATCHLINE EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAVVINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. ❑ / FUTURE BATTERY 5B DISCONNECT - 480V. DC, 1200A PANEL I � . PANEL "BPPB1" ,� . r "BPPA1" EXISTING CSI/TAC CSI IN EXIST. EN -23—\ MR LED sin .11ir IOW PORT PORT A B L N2 TRUNK IN FROM CSI BATTERY JU ENABLE NO D Q MPER LED (BET NABLE) PI R4]]1 P &]����] P,I P� &]1j]� PDI POWERPAK NO SCALE 4 "x4" COLUMN THIS ROOM) /(TYP. RECT. LL RECT. SPDB SPDB MPDB 1 3 #1 #'1 .— RECT. RECT. 2 4 TXn 0 13843 ELECTRONICS RS -232 TO RS-485 CONVERTER CVT -1 88B ELECTRONICS RS -232 TO RS-485 CONVERTER CVT -2 ROLL -r 1 EX. CSI/TAC PANEL. VERIFY AVAILABILITY OF CONTROLLER AND SIGNAL CONVERTER AT JOBSITE. EXISTING 120VAC PDU INTEGRATION DIAGRAM - FUTURE REMOVAL OF EXISTING 48V. BATTERY FOR INSTALL OF BATTERY 4A CELLS 121 -240. FUTURE I FUTURE PANEL "DP5A'L, PANEL "DP40 RS -485 CABLE - BELDEN NO. 8162 DO NOT T -TAP ALWAYS MAINTAIN DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION IN 3/4" C. NEW PDU 143.02 ADDR =1 ADDR =2 F RS-485 CABLE - BELDEN NO. 8162 DO NOT T -TAP ALWAYS MAINTAIN DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION IN 3/4" C. ADDR =1 G W P r- r NEW PDU 145.02 ADDR =2 1 RECT. RECT. 5 7 RECT. RECT. 6 8 RECT. 9 RECT. 10 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" ADDR =3 FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A 4 -. __FE AGB -1 Lf CRAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 EXIS(TIN( BUILDINI SYSTEM DB25 MALE PIN NO.1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 B B&B ELECTRONICS R6232/R8485 CONVERTER 485TBLED WITH EXTERNAL ROVER SUPPLY 485P62 (NO ECHO & RTS CTRL) FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA RS-485 CONVERTER POUVER RO()M FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA MBP ;rrffirurri iffarrW1Aut t CSI /TAC AUTOMATION CONTROL PANELS.. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN MAINTAIN POLARITY TX PAIR SHOULD BE TWISTED TOGETHER, RCV PAIR LIKEWISE. USE SHIELD FOR GROUND. R6485 TRUNK TD(A) TD(B) RD(A) RD(B) GND +12VD c I NO SCALE POWER ROOM CRAG #28 DSA1 25,27,29 N EW CONC. PAD. REFER TO DETAIL. i DCGB 2A ❑ tII. I nca naana' ❑ 41 a MI tai Yid DPI hB a NM BB 814 Oa a al a a MV Lal 'a al 0fi La t NBI a daY Mt ML AM a Ma Mt Ma IM Le NM MI tiVa Mail 4i Oa BB 411 a Mt (6) REFER TO SHEET E -4 FOR CONTINUATION 1 J6 RX- RX+ TX- TX+ GND PDU J7 RX- RX+ TX- TX+ GND. J6 RX- RX+ TX- TX+ GND ( 16 -1) BATTERY ALARM/ I CONTROL CIRCUIT -- f BRG &1 .._....._ ! ! DCGB -1 PANEL "D6'3A•' "DP26n ``aunx ❑ YM BM BB Mg 811 Inca 'L1 a at a WM Oa taB ally C:Y $t1 BM OR 141 a iiu4 0W tlaI M N TIDa a la m NI a tat Oeti 4SYq �_.__._.-• • POWER ROOM,_ELECTRICAL PDU REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS TRUNK CONNECTIONS, J6 AND J7 AT CONTRACTOR BOARD INSIDE PDU. PDU J7 RX- RX+ TX- TX+ OND NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA urr utrrrrrrrrrwrm MBP TO NEXT PDU'S SEE - DETAIL, THIS SHEET GROUND TERMINATED ONLY AT MIG AND LAST PDU l 1 PDU SERIAL INTERFACE 03 0 fn N C W W )-J F— J 2 W 0330 CS /TAC UPS INTEGRATION IN 3/4" CONDUIT- REFER TO DETAILS ON E -12. 113/0 GND. IN 2 "C. (PVC) TO BATTERY ROOM GND BAR (BRGB -1). 0 0z LLI re W g U BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. 9 7 5 3 1 RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. 10 8 6 4 2 I F NEW beL,lcllcLneRn Q 0 Z re w 0 0 U MPDB 0 SPDB #1 ANALA ER ZONE 3 BOX -- -- — — -- fir .. / *.. / - ,_ / ' – ' — SPDB #1 PANE "CRPP : r PDU DATA POINTS NO SCALE ❑ FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 11200A EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 STRING #3 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 STRINd #4 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY :1_ 1 1 FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 EX STING WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE. PANEL "BPPA2" EXTEND NEW TELEPHONE CABLE IN 3/4" CONDUIT TO TELEPHONE SYSTEM LOCATED ON MEZZANINE FLOOR. ROUTE CONDUIT OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM. PANEL 1 "BPPB2" p NEL G PPB1" TYYOI5T SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED I Z 3 w z MATCHLINE EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE AND 3/4" CONDUIT THRU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL BE REMOVED. PATCH WALL. INDEX NAME 26 KVA C 27 28 29 32 33 34 35 THD C TOTAL KVA FREQUENCY PERCENT KVA A PERCENT KVA B PERCENT KVA C KWH 36 1 PFC ANALOG DATA POINTS TYPE 16 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 18 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 16 BIT INTEGER 1 16 BIT INTEGER SCALE NONE NONE NONE *10 NONE NONE NONE HIGH WORD LOW WORD NOTE 5 =5% 600 -60 HZ 75 =75% 75 =75% 75 =75% KWH IS A 32 BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER DIVIDED INTO (2) 16 BIT INTEGERS ■■aa■ral 1 2 3 4 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 51009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS z 0 Q z z O ce O w W w 2 O w li- w ce 3 � \CeDtea` '7o [ N1COS vG MAN; NV A j< r CA t Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCIVI Date: 12 -08 Revision 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 maim 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 95% REVIEW PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet Flo. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER ROOM, ELECTRICAL 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Date: 12 12-08 u Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET EXISTING 5,000 GALLON DIESEL TANK ''. • .• • • . ' G EN pig0 ENCLOSURE • ' 4. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" • 4 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. V" a ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE BUS METER 4. TRANSFORMERS EXIST. UTIL XFMR #1 1 1 X. --X- -X- , 4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL ROOM AND COURTYARD, ELECTRICAL : 4 4 4 W I z G FIWP ..... ..... .... . ..... .... .... . .. ... • • , • • . • , • .• ri 1 LITHONIA LIGHTING PANEL • "LPPAl" FUT. UTIL XFMR #2 PAD Z 0 1 CONTROLLER PIPE COVER 17 PAA ChLINE 2 BUS METER PANEL "ULPP1-1 CRAC #30 DSB1 37,39,41 CT R GI LEC. ROOM ROOM .'• XFMR • t,',UTRL1-1 ,41 • NEW FEEDER BRKR. FOR PDU 166.01 REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM BATTERY 1D EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE AND 3/4" CONDUIT THRU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL BE REMOVED. PATCH WALL 77'7 . • XFMR TRLA1 BATTERY IC EXTEND NEW TELEPHONE CABLE IN 3/4"C. TO EXISTING TELEPHONE SYSTEM ON MEZZANINE FLOOR. ROUTE CONDUIT OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM. EXIST. "MDSB; S BATTERY 1B EXISTING WALL REFER TO SHEET E-4 FOR CONTINUATION MOUNTED TELEPHONE. 4 • ; (113) (1 12) (110) MDS-SIDE B (109) j/.• MAIN BREAKER MDSB (108) MDS-SIDE A (105) (104) BATTERY 1A CKT. BRKR. MDSI3-110E FOR UPS 2B PRIMARY INPUT REFER TO ONE- LINE DIAGRAM TIE BREAKER (107) • MAIN BREAKER q, MDSA (106) -NEVV CKT. BRKR. MDSA-103D FOR UPS 2B BY-PASS REFER TO ONE- LINE DIAGRAM tv a.;-441aada•.av•4444;a■ve'aaw.ee.1.4:.;laa'.LL.'al.esiw.41 . .LAac:a.'a.a.enllaajs•aa , .a...a 4 aa44.1* . ':.44aatr.LD' 414 a 44 .•'w... 1 mw. - ava 44 .ara.wwaacaa :' .' UPS-1 ki Obi WI AIM NA WW1 1YA Ud11161111 AlIntO 4311.14 1 1•it 10.1 0.•drikt 0.11W i•16 11a Si Eli' 4fl g 141 i4 44dj4U.fl I dig 61 &PA MU 111:1111/ ki 711 /K2 411011 1a11 /11111 (Mh4 4114 D409-- OiE EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE AND 34 CONDUIT THRU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL BE REMOVED. PATCH WALL. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED . z .1 H • • ' — EXISTING WALL MOUNTED PHONE. AUTOSTICK II POWER TRACK 9000 POWER MONITORING I NT ER FAC E IVISGB PANEL "URDP1-3" 17 , MATCHLINE 8 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 05 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E-6 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL ROOM AND COURTYARD, ELECTRICAL fl 4 . . - 4 11 • ••• , V = © { '"11.- LL ) ) U iiI L____I EXISTING GENERATOR 2500KVA/2000KW 277V/480V. 30, 4W i ,4A pliii im 'CIL IIII 1:0 01.1.1.1.43itikit 4 =11, • I 11 ,1„ „.„ r . ig ii, I ) --Ifili14.-. . -. • 1 ' . pro 1 ..-. . _. . • ..„...._____ L , ..,.....„ [ _r---,, 1 ., 7. . .. . • 11 . ... . - .. 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Date: 12 12-08 u Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET EXISTING 5,000 GALLON DIESEL TANK ''. • .• • • . ' G EN pig0 ENCLOSURE • ' 4. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" • 4 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. V" a ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE BUS METER 4. TRANSFORMERS EXIST. UTIL XFMR #1 1 1 X. --X- -X- , 4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL ROOM AND COURTYARD, ELECTRICAL : 4 4 4 W I z G FIWP ..... ..... .... . ..... .... .... . .. ... • • , • • . • , • .• ri 1 LITHONIA LIGHTING PANEL • "LPPAl" FUT. UTIL XFMR #2 PAD Z 0 1 CONTROLLER PIPE COVER 17 PAA ChLINE 2 BUS METER PANEL "ULPP1-1 CRAC #30 DSB1 37,39,41 CT R GI LEC. ROOM ROOM .'• XFMR • t,',UTRL1-1 ,41 • NEW FEEDER BRKR. FOR PDU 166.01 REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM BATTERY 1D EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE AND 3/4" CONDUIT THRU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL BE REMOVED. PATCH WALL 77'7 . • XFMR TRLA1 BATTERY IC EXTEND NEW TELEPHONE CABLE IN 3/4"C. TO EXISTING TELEPHONE SYSTEM ON MEZZANINE FLOOR. ROUTE CONDUIT OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM. EXIST. "MDSB; S BATTERY 1B EXISTING WALL REFER TO SHEET E-4 FOR CONTINUATION MOUNTED TELEPHONE. 4 • ; (113) (1 12) (110) MDS-SIDE B (109) j/.• MAIN BREAKER MDSB (108) MDS-SIDE A (105) (104) BATTERY 1A CKT. BRKR. MDSI3-110E FOR UPS 2B PRIMARY INPUT REFER TO ONE- LINE DIAGRAM TIE BREAKER (107) • MAIN BREAKER q, MDSA (106) -NEVV CKT. BRKR. MDSA-103D FOR UPS 2B BY-PASS REFER TO ONE- LINE DIAGRAM tv a.;-441aada•.av•4444;a■ve'aaw.ee.1.4:.;laa'.LL.'al.esiw.41 . .LAac:a.'a.a.enllaajs•aa , .a...a 4 aa44.1* . ':.44aatr.LD' 414 a 44 .•'w... 1 mw. - ava 44 .ara.wwaacaa :' .' UPS-1 ki Obi WI AIM NA WW1 1YA Ud11161111 AlIntO 4311.14 1 1•it 10.1 0.•drikt 0.11W i•16 11a Si Eli' 4fl g 141 i4 44dj4U.fl I dig 61 &PA MU 111:1111/ ki 711 /K2 411011 1a11 /11111 (Mh4 4114 D409-- OiE EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE AND 34 CONDUIT THRU NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SHALL BE REMOVED. PATCH WALL. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED . z .1 H • • ' — EXISTING WALL MOUNTED PHONE. AUTOSTICK II POWER TRACK 9000 POWER MONITORING I NT ER FAC E IVISGB PANEL "URDP1-3" 17 , MATCHLINE 8 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 05 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E-6 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL ROOM AND COURTYARD, ELECTRICAL H EXISTING GROUNDING TEST WELL H EXISTING 4/0 BARE 7 STRAND BURIED GROUND LOOP EXISTING CHILLED WATER PUMP P2 0 MCCA-3 NEW CHILLED WATER PUMP 3-08 DISCONNECT NEW CHILLED WATER PUMP 3-08 EXISTING P1 DISC. EXISTING P2 DISC. "MCCA" EXISTING CHILLED WATER PUMP P1 1 '71 ° PJMP ROOM EXISTING CONTROL INTERFACE EXISTING AIR COOLED CHILLER 1-- • NEW FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TAPE - CHILLED WTR SUPPLY NEW FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TAPE - CHILLED WTR RETURN RDPA1-39 RDPA1-41 EXISTING JANITOR SINK CONNECT NEW CHILLER GROUND TO EXISTING GROUND LOOP GROUND ROD AT THIS HANDHOLE EXISTING GLUCOL FEED UNIT GF-1 EXISTING CHEMICAL POT FEEDER EXISTING EXPANSION TANK EXISTING AIR COOLED CHILLER 2 BOLT #6 GROUND TO NEW CHILLER FRAME LEG AND EXTEND TO EXISTING BURIED GROUND LOOP c.13. BMS NETWORK INTERFACE CIRCUIT IN EXISTING CONDUIT EXISTING 1-1/2'C NEW AIR COOLED CHILLER 3-08 MDSA-104D CHILLER STARTER AND DISCONNECT PROVIDED VVITH UNIT PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN — CHILLER YARD AND PUMP ROOM ELECTRICAL, POWER EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. PROVIDE NEW 30A, 1-P, 120V. CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL. VERIFY CIRCUIT NUMBER AND SPACE AVAILABILITY AT JOB SITE CIRCUIT SHALL SERVE NEW FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TAPE. 2. NEW CIRCUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING UNDERGROUND CONDUIT(S). VERIFY LOCATION OF CONDUIT(S) AT JOB SITE 3. NEW DISCONNECT SHALL BE 30A, 3-POLE, 480V., NEMA 1 NO-FUSE. boct- 015 SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEH 05 /U09 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 11-• 3 I I.; J;;;..4 e:k ;- — i+4 Z.0 1 Expires 9 1 1 DOL. ti °or. w !h F- vat stsej Lm > x &OW W m att■ alio .4 >je w Zwei Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM DL, Z Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E-7 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - CHILLER YARD AND PUMP ROOM, ELE-CTRICAL, POWER LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER & CAT. NO FIXTURE TYPE MOUNTING LAMP & TYPE REMARKS VOLTAGE E SURE LITES CX-7-1-70-R-W LED EXIT SURFACE LED EXIT-RED - 2.9W NOTES 3,4 277 EXISTING FIXTURE INFORMATION - COLUMBIA RO-4-2-32-EB8-277-EL FLUORESCENT SUSPENDED (2) 32W T8 - PRISMATIC NOTE 1 277 - COLUMBIA RO-4-2'-32-EB8-277-EL (EMERGENCY FIXTURE) FLUORESCENT SUSPENDED (2) 32W T8 - PRISMATIC NOTE 2 277 MATCHLINE IS NI No' 0 0 0 / r r 0 A 0 _44 No # • iz ECM 011111111 ES 11111111111 4 4 1 EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM NEW EXIT LIGHT ON WALL 0 MV/ ,Aer t.11- PA ■111 -A1-tet... 110 ee1 iNe, A-A+ A 31A 0,149o-999. to 94. i•A ii11 tee A, A e -ite • A -A A A 41 A %A A W. tee 1,,.•113-1e3 A. lett "A .,111a ...S.:401114Q 1111 a1H D 111/4.11.31... 1 4 8. 15 '1;1 '48 - E 1 14 , (.1. 9 Y \ 1 ' • , v. ...,' ,., ,11, Ita e •e••■ Cli A 11 A eid , 41, 14.( (•r: 144;3.0'3 146.04 5.02 1,!VV P K U 0 t");' (.6( r")((t 148 (.4:: (:.:(5.1(.9 14 11 i 40 12 't 4:13 '14 14 b 1,4 (A, .( ?.;:-,-/ •(,9( .,.- .)..:( - (17 (.9((..i. 147 10 147 11 947.1(9 1:17 1 "I , 47 11 947.19(i -1 ( 49( 16 "(47 9 - ..,' 147 "It99. r4.44.L.N iu, AA:A-AA .ler,- AAA ill. tek, AY A 4•141 tie r•A 11•1• ter1.111111.1%-e..4.11,71•M, ,A•11,1 , le , AP t1,1 .i11.1 t'1,•ti.,■ l',4 oA. ,i3.: • i. t4k. ca ti.4 43 - 33 12,1 • 11,1, 111'c-gki 11.1 .- a1-111-111-11 -1Iet •••/.4,11 A Al 1.1 A ett All-.A-tettA T , /// I r - - - I " " - I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 ..:V1.11- ^ fe.1-ili..5.1• A 1411 1.. h7.1 GI Al•R• Ai. Ai- IA , AAA A-A-1 ea.. .1 Ail AAA e • 11A WAG'. eaisEe.iikikt ea Al fel ..eiti til ,I IA MAil• ,.. ' ,7, .,...,. ml ...i,i, ., At ief lit• Ar. Al• 146 (997 116( ".) '946 13'8 - 16 `I 0 14P, 11 - 91;3 "I (-' 146 13 146 - 94 1 ' 4 .5 I 4E 'Ill '' 46 ILO 17 146.18 145.05 145.06 145.07 145.08 '9.15 1,;(8 "945 - 10 145 - 1 j 4 5 •"ZeertetiletellAilt,,, VA1,111t111AAAA Alti114 Mt Iler.10-10.1. ?AAA Ad A AI 311, tE- 1,1•11 IV:AAA eit A Ai tit, 'A •filA1ile AAA AlAteli-1A•teUr • r 0 PDF /// _L CD. NEW P01.; 150 PC4 Jtamtmei',1A1U....1,1k«r1ik,:,4 4310111111 . :W111LI.E11/.111 'QI:411111a ii,11:1111,HA1.11f111,t 111. 1 W1111111,,1V1,1g11?1:1 AALIANteltAleit AttellietiAteitlAAAAAAAA2SA 144.02 144.03 144.04 144.05 144.06 144.07 144.08 144,09 144.10 144.11 144.12 144,13 144.14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.18 - 0 , $) - 0 LLI ip () • 'd. d \\■ GENERAL NOTES: // -- 1 ( 6 ) (6, )9 PO4.4 41 .50 kVA EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 1. ALL NEW AND EXISTING CONDUITS PENETRATE NEW WALL SHALL BE INSTALLED OR RETROFITED WITH PLASTIC COUPLER AS SHOWN ON DETAILS 3 AND 5 ON SHEET E-17. REFER TO E-9 FOR CONTINUATION 43.05 7 T /// MEM 1 ' '1.111:11g1111, . 15:01illiE1 1 1, 1 4 1 61111,1t1W;d 1 1inlki1.11 . 1 W. 111111 . 1. 1 1a'ittala 1.1.411A1fe.t:E11,=5,la ..ti.,X1111:41161i1a1,11111A.1/11.111,1b1R01111:i11141.131201.111141,111i1A11111.11.111L1i1i111.,:g/A1110.1.5attilL112=1,11/1,11.111.,1111M.,=*=,0. :Is.1111.12.11M11,,T,111,2 142.02 142.03 142.04 142.05 142.06 142.07 142.08 142,09 142.10 142.11 143.15 143.16 143.17 143.18 W.11,41,M 'TKO AMArilleelabAllAtilrli 1111.1W1Igi1 1, 1 / //// LS]! /// / ,e.c1.1.10111:1 11.1,11.1141A ' ..t.i.:11:11.11 42.12 142.13 142.14 142.15 142.16 142.17 142.18 _._.,_•_•__•._ . • • ^ • ^ • - ^ • - • • - • 1 - • - . ... TIE L....a. - rr - 3=7: Tr .71TI _IL 7TE. 1E7 = 9:1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. CONDUCTORS, VVIREWAYS, AND ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING TO BE REMOVED BETWEEN TWO FIXTURES TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONDUCTORS, VVIREWAYS, AND ALL ASSOCIATED LIGHTING CIRCUITING FROM LIGHT CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE REMOVED BETWEEN TWO JUNCTION BOXES TO CREATE NEW SWITCHING CIRCUIT. 3. EXTEND NEW LIGHTING HOMERUN IN CONDUIT THRU ISOLATION COUPLING AT NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17 FOR CONDUIT PENETRATION THRU WALL DETAIL. 4. EXTEND SWITCHING WIRES FOR SWITCHING DESIGNATION "b" IN CONDUIT TO BACK TO SWITCH BANK INSIDE EQUIPMENT ROOM. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL SHEET E-9 FOR EXTACT LOCATION OF SIMTCH. 5. EXTEND SWITCHING WIRES FOR SWITCHING DESIGNATION "d" IN CONDUIT TO BACK TO SWITCH BANK INSIDE EQUIPMENT ROOM. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL SHEET E-9 FOR EXTACT LOCATION OF SWITCH. 6. CONNECT 3-#12'S, 1-#12 GND, IN 3/4" C. FROM NEW EXIT LIGHT TO EXISTING EMERGENCY FIXTURE SHOWN. 7. EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING SHALL BE RELOCATED 1' NORTH OF CURRENT LOCATION TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 8. EXISTING SWITCHBANK TO BE REMOVED PRIOR TO NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL ASSOCAITED WIRING FROM SVVITCHBANK BACK TO SOURCE. THESE SWITCHES CURRENTLY CONTROL LIGHTS IN EQUIPMENT ROOM VIA LIGHTING CONTACTORS IN EXISTING LIGHT CONTROL PANEL. LPFIA - L„ 0 LPPA1 -1 0 fl 00 (Mk IMP ES to ro .. • :413'14 . 60.18 d d 1 . Are,410) -E 1 ,1/1,12 0 [el Al 114 At!. XI tv.i4111 A eti I Atal•ta •Ak-11,I• 1 .11,, 10 1Y:A 14.. 170 1 :Soli IA A IF ( 7 ) 9,")•1‘ d Q !pug:7.111: • R.. a. AV:al-1 / ,.. /7 ,, / , ,s.. . n 483.01‘, , i.1 nti •ka: tile ‘,11 A • i11 All A IA A ' 1:fel 1 1 I 1 FUTURE I ,::. I . PDIJ , , //,'.1 ... t. I cc RRU P...1 1 1 .,..., ..] . W...)U . 1 1 1 I d tieet,A.Al AAA' , `Altle.AAAAAAAVATAlAtikAAAAAAAAA=1 EdettlegliAtAellIAAleAPAW,VAtilatAAVA IlketAtitAAA AiliAttlAiAAWAIAttAAAMA 167 01 167.02 167.03 167.04 167 05 167.06 167.07 167,08 167 09 167.10 167.11 tx). /// d 1 4 tA1111.42.111 1110141.11.1.a14-171 /// FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES: 1 6"x4' FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, SLIM LOW PROFILE HOUSING. PRISMATIC ACRYLIC DIFFUSER. MOTOROLA RAPID START ELECTRONIC BALLAST, <10% THD. RFI SUPPRESSION 2. 6"x4' FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, SLIM LOW PROFILE HOUSING. PRISMATIC ACRYLIC DIFFUSER. MOTOROLA RAPID START ELECTRONIC BALLAST, <10% THD. RFI SUPPRESSION. PROVIDE EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK WITH MINIMUM OF 5 YEAR WARRANTY AND 1350 INITIAL LUMEN OUTPUT. CONNECT UNIT TO TWO LAMPS. PROVIDE BODINE B30 OR EQUAL BY LITHONIA. 0 64.06 lv 07 1 Aar PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - SOUTH d d 7 170.03 7(.3.f.;L. 170.1.',.'S aas( 111 rierle -1 :11,1-SAA 2 te,,1 1111 1p 1 10 4'1 11 • 11111,11,141111mawamigr /// PA:A AtA1/ eel Ad .1•11 A •164 (39. o .lid to w REFER TO E-9 FOR CONTINUATION '0 170.16 sis.1 1,S,1 •rall 41111•Vil , A•elte•Z- 1,21 1 • 0:).14 160114 16:1 05 168. 0:"3 '16E107 1 :93(3. Or:.1: 1 5::(3.C."(i1 1 6:3 •0 - 91)..;:l. "I - 1 1130 . 'l. 1933 ( ( 8.14 16(4( 15 '11".")("3.1 6 1693. 17 19(4)3.1 (1444 Ai ite* 41 NA MI. i:14a-%1 -0-11114:17 . 1 N....11411.-1^i 1 1-..1. , 1:14...xi-i%44E-4.:i-te,1.-61 - -tr1i liii 111.4119 4:11 1,-1.11.11ii.1'4411.1.-M41.3, -1V1 A% 4111 ifa 111. 4.1...1a. VI M. PreA11. AA11-1 tle: -•119 Ai AA •tilt Altle..A1-1.4A41 ai 1 i i I I 1 I ( /// -." 6.01 166.03 166.04 166.05 166.06 166,07 166.08 166.09 166.10 166.11 166.12 166 13 taistagaiinsei assusauatioassawIlsounsualaa,lassmiliM:1,11a 1111. AAAAteettA/1,1tAAttaRMIA,MA ilAbeete /// /// 11011.11 T.W.1.04 1 ;i11.:Vi.DY1a1a4 , :i1K, 'Skii,R -- 167.12 167 13 16 14 167.15 167.16 167.17 EXISTING EMERG. LIGHT FIXTURE FED FROM UPS PANEL SHALL REMAIN, TYPICAL ra14.1 zna,ztaatEc1:: , 2 1 ,4 1 11:11:11a0.11:111:ath1W.W.11 , 111 1 1.11 1 1= g111.1 . Lig.,141. 165.01-- 1-65.02 ....165.03.- 16504 . 165.05- -165.06 165.07-.--.16508.--.465 09 1&51� 165 11 165.12, -16513 16514- EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES AND VVIREWAY SHALL REMAIN: RE-CIRCUIT TO NEW SWITCH AS INDICATED, TYPICAL 1.1....ah A11:4 . +1,1.;111.1..: 1 1. P ill . / 1* 11 1 E. . A r )i d 64.14 3. EACH FIXTURE SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A BATTERY POWER PACK SUITABLE FOR 90 MINUTES OF EMERGENCY POWER. PROVIDE BODINE B30 OR APPROVED EQUAL. 4. EACH FIXTURE SHALL BE DIE-CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING, ALL WHITE FINISH, POLYMERIC DIFFUSER (RED) ARROWS AS INDICATED. 1 /// d NEW EXIT LIGHT ON WALL d SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MATCHLINE I RECEIVED CITY OF TU KVVI LA FE H 0 5 Z009 PERMIT CENTER • WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 L Expires . .--21-to 1 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 Proj. Mgr.: KCIVI E-8 Q) Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KM, DL, Z Date: 12-'12-08 Revision 100% CD Sheet No. 95% REVIEW ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - SOUTH RE -----F "DP4 " MATCHLINE EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM 0 p 0 0 e NEVy SEGURI • t F1 , 1 - - , 1 - 1, '" ........1 I ; 1 1 i // I , , ■ , it ' ', •,. '. 7 . • :, \, ; 1.% ,• .V,.+1,) 2. ,' .".. . :11'.., ,hi•I a'g 41 tv ) /... - ; , 1 1-11:8J ! 1 I ) 1 1 1 i i 1 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2. REFER TO LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SHEET E-8 FOR INFORMATION ON NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES. GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL NEW AND EXISTING CONDUITS PENETRATE NEW WALL SHALL BE INSTALLED OR RETROFITED WITH PLASTIC COUPLER AS SHOWN ON DETAILS 3 AND 5 ON SHEET E-17. REFER TO E-8 FOR CONTINUATION cAra-A11 - REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL, THIS SHEET FOR NEW WORK IN THIS AREA. . A- • ,‘ f AcAl .1,11/ 44 1.31 ; I P1)1, FUTU PANE 0 a li 2 1;33 la 1i3 ; ANALASER ZONE 3 BOX :bar 4ji AA.,°A a43 if, LOE h iS U .. .M • 1 AAL1C :13-4,,i• V.6 PDF W PANELBOARD P2B" A14■••• • .5:/A -A! 1.1• 1 5 "15 154.113 154 17 15=1. •; 1 I Mil.) M 1; M i I) I M i l'.1 PM) I I I I ■ 1 I I 1 ! .. .. . A b ) PDF SCALE: 1/4" =1 (p) 1113.1 " 1 !..1.3 18 AZA •141i • Oa Li-la WIG4Sti. 14-• . Eigriait-Z-nE1 ;61.4 -U1 AO :Rg AAJ,Al• 54i. tiid TV1.4 .414 afli fr i-i A;ti- ni.it•VAL • fai -AP. { •:OL 1AI 111 Xbk 1 f -1tHAA1 !)2, 02 112. CA 1 , 01:1 152.00 152.07 152.08 152,09 1132..10 152.11 ii2.1 2 152,113 152.'16 152.15 152 18 1 ,17 152,18 1 (t. ir ::51. ae; a • , 1 5 ''Ag 151.11v 1151.11 a • 51,12 1.51!W 151.14 - 151.1t!.i a 51.17 , t‘Ag AM I M nAl•• • ta• I& 1r 11 at AO fer YfrZItkU V:N• gt-O. ,A;-'4,1 ..41-.41a • 7,!•-• l.A•3 .1.LS-44 in 00 • Ael- i.:1414 t kg.7.-ASIt•aa•aei•Ul EXISTING EMERG. LIGHT FIXTURE FED FROM UPS PANEL SHALL REMAIN, TYPICAL A43 iAA7 '12.- •7•1- 1, 2A, W..4 AVN •■= 11Vr `a.A. v.:11 4 i"A w s.. Al•LAI-A,A-tei-1,4 1 •&D • 6.x. 41..141.ai ,,,ALV.,a•-kAa.it,,,a f a IV) '&3 • •=1 arkt-a,AI4e. 150.01 150.02 150,03 150.04 "150.05 150.06 150.07 "150.01;3 150 69 150.10 50.11 '1150.12 150.13 150 14 "150.15 150.10 150 17 - 150. '18 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN : 1. CONDUCTORS, WIREWAYS, AND ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING TO BE REMOVED BETWEEN TWO FIXTURES TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 149.(1 5 14.8.06 1411107 '1211'. 1. 09 Si 9. 10 1.4S. - 11 14.9.'12. •.19.•3 •.49 1.21 - 149.15 1219.15 1 49 17 141.) 18 tp. WY' q,:ta .114 -6:A1 fAV. qt.1-•ita,•el 1 WM UV: C,AW-.."4.a,404.gt-,Ar3ii. it'31.4.a. i51,1 +Ai ./0 AVIC zOr• t' /// 0 I a /// c) T - - - - - - 1 !•• •• ■•••• - - - -1 2. EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURE TO BE REMOVE TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN AND RE-USE FIXTURE FOR LIGHTING OF NEW SECURITY ROOM. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL FOR NEW WORK AND FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 3. CONDUCTORS, VIAREWAYS, AND ALL ASSOCIATED LIGHTING CIRCUITING SHALL BE REMOVED TO ALLOW FOR WALL CONSTRUCTION IN NEW EQUIPMENT AND SECURITY ROOMS. 4. EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURE TO BE RELOCATE TO ALLOW FOR NEW ROOM CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN LIGHTING FIXTURE BEFORE REINSTALLING FIXTURE. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL FOR NEW WORK AND FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 5. EXISTING LIGHTING HOMERUN BACK TO LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS FROM HOMERUN J-BOX TO LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL AND FEEDER PANEL. CONTRACTOR SHALL UPDATE PANEL SCHEDULE TO SHOW "SPARE" AT EXISTING POLE LPPA1-3. CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE NO FIXTURE INSIDE THE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM OR NEW SECURITY ROOM SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY EXISTING LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. 6. CONNECT 3-#12'S, 1-#12 GND, IN 10 C. FROM RELOCATED LIGHTING FIXTURE IN NEW SECURITY ROOM TO EXISTING UNSWITCHED POWER CIRCUIT FOR NEW ZONE 2 LIGHTS OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM. 7. EXTEND SWITCHING WIRES FOR SWITCHING DESIGNATION "a" IN CONDUIT TO BACK TO SWITCH BANK INSIDE EQUIPMENT ROOM. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL THIS SHEET FOR EXTACT LOCATION OF SWITCH. PANEL 'CRPPA1' EQUIPMENT ROOM C) LPPA1-3 PANEL "BPPA2" PANEL 'CRPPB1" 111111111111 [OM I I El 0 'Zr 172, 02 0 [. re 0 ro C01111111 [0 rommEliie ,; [. ,, • ,..„ ..,..,,' ,,Ar.,,,;:,,r,RE..,,,,, 1 p..S Wi tAA :di '4:, ,CANi ad ia ki:i Lli , ..AAk 1W q 1 1 PDO 1 1 1 1 1 1.1111P1 ID 17 r-- 7 0 - 77 PANEL "BPPB2" LPPAI:LI - - LPPA1-80 // .4c .A•U Jr_ ;WI ,Z1 W-MA A 175.0 17 1 V5 03 175.!..14 A \ , Ye ,, - \ / . i / ' ' '('' l' ' , 1'...11.11.1.E k.,,, 10 :,; 0 uu { , i■ xTE :•4 la' cd 41 ' a t A CC1 ' 51st ■ I POU ' " „ le; 1 • N; 4111 1i IV 0:1 -at k1 4 1,1 4 tIi FLUTURE P1)1,1 / 1 NEIN EQUIPMENT F: LOO 1 1 11. EXISTING EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURE FEEDER CIRCUIT. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION AND pRoypE ISOLATION COUPLING AT NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. REFER TO CONDUIT PENETRATION THRU WALL DETAIL, SHEET E-17, DETAIL 5. 12. CONNECT 3-#12'S, 1-#12 GND, IN 3/4" C. FROM NEW pa LIGHT TO EXISTING EMERGENCY FIXTURE SHOWN. 70.04 11 UR 1.,'a.E1.111 c.11U .410 r11 '173 WIWI BUMP I 0 1 ''-. It 1 .,';' L U) _ .... z 1L1 MA d 44 , I,4 at1 40 •idt.'M•NZI. Rik :n. ■P 4' n,t- 1.01-MA-gi-tiA ti O. l 171.01 171. 0 c.21 171 .03 171 .1)4 Lu 20 8. EXTEND SWITCHING WIRES FOR SIMTCHING DESIGNATION "c" IN CONDUIT TO BACK TO SWITCH BANK INSIDE EQUIPMENT ROOM. REFER TO SECURITY ROOM DETAIL THIS SHEET FOR EXTACT LOCATION OF SWITCH. to AU AU, J 9. EXTEND NEW LIGHTING HOMERUN IN CONDUIT THRU ISOLATION COUPLING AT NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E-17 FOR CONDUIT PENETRATION THRU WALL DETAIL. 10. EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT FROM LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADD LIGHTING FIXTURES SHOWN ON SHEETS E-8 AND THIS SHEET VVITH SWITCHING DESIGNATION "e" TO THIS LIGHTING CIRCUIT. NO FIXTURE INSIDE THE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM OR NEW SECURITY ROOM SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY EXISTING LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL. \\\ , PANEL "ULPP1-1N , 176.05 170, 02,3 176.07 ••6.08 176.09 1 1 '11 176,12 17;.1".111".3 1 7E3, 14. 'I 70 .15 • /6.•6 1 1'6,17 176.10 ,....,., NI .5,1k •tfa AP:4 rA;-..-10 , di. raLl-M-IM-i■te 9 434 -:i . WI -la 0.1 •:11).2.4 kla k11- i> a1 , 2..ill- 1-. ,,:,11 -iit .':ii -WS • , Tii■-• Til. :gr ilLA 1 ii.i11.4■1&•lat-hti-i%-lii .0 ViV ia :44.i411 • ,A,..A,aAfiVi6 4•-•L5,-V4-41-41 WI' , ti i6 •Ini , AI Ar4. gi OE- 1 I ! 1 1 ! 1 Ri) !I) i , 1 1 ) M 1C M I D Ni 1U1) 1 NA ID Aii to 11.4 i D A A ID IVI1D MO !\1111,) MID MID I 1 L . .. /// c ..At "Zii Xr1•41",11,11. 07 175.08 7 '' 7 '12 - 11E1. ' 7 - 15 1 5 11,1 175.1. 175.1 C 4o; La +.4g3 A A ad ,,,E1t 44,41.J 1,4 174.04 1"i 4 t"Y. 1'74,013 - 174,.07 114.08 I 74,oxf!) aa-1,, la; , a,s■ lk W1 IL: r iO-ilai,15,1-niW• 101.V 111 11111 1A • - I /// A ir d e r PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - NORTH - 1 -1 1 ; ANALASER I ZONE 4 .130( 1 ; r / . r / 1101M, 0 ,w ' 1/ 1 07 1 73.0g 17:3 XFMR 1 !1 0 1 C-'!, 11 172, u4 17'2, f15 172.013 17 172.00 '172.09 ", 72.10 172.'11 172.12 172. "13 172,44 '172.15 172.16 1'72,17 172,18 f q. Lrait •:a -121 traA -1A1A14114:-A1:: 11..5 :a: .„ A L. 4,s . , 11. -a 1, Mr . , , NOM •EM EMMIll 11101111111 P OF -10 t 111 1 , 041 -11i? AS/ , -15-`.a4.1 , ,. 1ili a•al. -1YA 101 tdi.fid-4,1- ?It^ taairr+X-IAAA 32.1 0-111-14 1 a.1E1, 111,117 .4A1 171.(15 171 .06 171.07 171.08 17'1.1)9 171.10 171.11 . 171.12 111.13 111.14 '171 15 171 16 171 17 171 18 --1 ( 1 5) REFER TO E-8 FOR CONTINUATION f, 7 9) BATTERY 1D I m Lit 1 ) tvilE) NH() . I I ------- • L1A,4 .1 L .ill ,41,1::1C,Z,A EiA.AA l'A-V.A-a•AA-IAtiti i 71 .11 177.'12 17"7 . 13 c 74.10 174 . 1! 1721,12 174.1:3 17'4.14 174:15 '174 !13 A.U3 i11 ■i•IA hiA1 Na BATTERY 1C LIGHT SWITCHES FOR NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM BATTERY 1B /// /// // c D09.--015" /// 173 1 172 14 101 15 sFT'URITY ROOM TaUcTd BATTERY 1A 713) SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" c EXISTING LIGHT IXTURES AND VVIREVVAY SHALL REMAIN. RE-CIRCUIT TO NEW SWITCH AS INDICATED, TYPICAL c UPS-1 REUSE EXISTING FIXTURES SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED NEW EXIT LIGHT MOUNTED ON WALL IMMO =MOW OM= MY SECURITY ROOM DETAIL. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 05 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 Expires q) Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Fac. Code:TYKWWA Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 Revision 1 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 100% CD Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E-9 95% REVIEW ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - NORTH .L EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER-24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 • ROW, 2 TIER-24 BATTERY [ CELLS 1-270 RY 5A CE FUTUREU 5 i x 1 PANEL PANEL "BPPB1" "BPPAl" LI EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAVVINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. SPDB #1 SPDB #1 MPDB RECT. 1 RECT. 2 RECT. 3 RECT. 4 ..... _ EX. 1/2"W UP AND 1"W DOWN TO BELOW RAISED FLOOR. RECT. RECT. RECT. 5 7 9 RECT. RECT. RECT. 6 8 10 1 r —1 (E) /1 C RAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 1 MBIf FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA P OVVER ROOM FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA MBP thiggifigibilig • .. taffiffillWigffiffigi NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BE RELOCATED TO NEW LOCATION. CRAC #28 DSA1 25,27,29 NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF MBP MBP FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA Wiffigtafifinurcg.gf.1 I LLJ 3'-0" 0 RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. RECT. 9 7 5 3 1 RECT. RECT. 10 8 4 1 .11 0 0 I , RECT. RECT. RECT. 6 4 2 (.) ANALASER V / 1 / / / I ZONE 3 BOX ( MPDB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V / / / / /1 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - POWER ROOM SCALE: 14 = SPDB #1 SPDB #1 PANEL "CRPPA1" 1 EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 STRIN1 #3 1 ROW. 2 TIER-24 BATTERY EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 STRIN1 #4 1 ROW. 2 TIER-24 BATTERY FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1-240 A 3 L 09 015 PANEL : PANEL L..."BPPA2" "E3PPB2" L "CRPPB1" rem= SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA H4 i 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 1 Expires Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, Designed By: KCM, DL, Z F'roj. Mgr.: KCM 2 3 4 3 cz LLI Date: 12-12-08 Revision 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 • 0 et% 0 in Ci 0 i g tO Pi W) I- w at 7 5 t"° ii. m a -tom ?.. a %0w'. i- < w 0 co -0 4 w 0 -iz i . ih " Z BIN 0 <El E-10 11111111111111101111111MIIIIININIM1111/141 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING - POWER ROOM BUS A - Isc 46224 A B ILI a. LL LL 0 < << 8 0 0 0 tr , w (.0 • (,) �J L 31,596A. I se = 1,900A. 1,853A. iso = 34,669A. SPARE /TAUPS 1 V2/300 KVA 2- -r- BATTERY STRING I.= 38,366A. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS 34,669A. EXISTING PANELBOARD UPP1 (480V., 30, 3W, 65KAIC) 1 2 Lo co ir 101 MAINT. BYPASS IsQ= 31596. REMOVE EXISTING PDU 1-2 AND ASSOCIATED FEEDER BREAKER AND CIRCUIT. 50KVA 50KVA PEW 1-1 PDU 1-2 SWITCH SWITCH ROOM ROOM F— U- 0 0 0 0 Lo < < < CO (0 (0 SPARE PDU 166.01 .=14,364A. CL LL U.) < 0 00 W() CO FUTURE UPS 4B BY-PASS REMOVE THREE EXISTING (100A,150A,125A) GE SELA SERIES SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKERS OR AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, THE CONTRACTOR MAY USE SPACE ABOVE MAIN BREAKER AND INSTALL A NEW 250AT/250AF. 480V., 3-P, 65 KAIC CIRCUIT BREAKER TO SERVE NEW PDU 166.01 6 7 0 0 0 0 (0 SPARE == FUT. 8,418A. XFMR "UTRR'1-1" 45KVA I.= i - 7,996A. _L r 1 FUT. PNL I'URDP1-1" ELECTRICAL ROOM LL 0 « 00 6 / co EXISTING PNL 'URDP1-2' OFFICE AREA FA, HSSD 102 0 0 '43 EX, XFMR "UTRR1-2" 45KVA rn WORKSTATION REEL EXIST. DIST. PNL "BPPA2'' w < LL < (/) 0 00 CO CO 9 0 o r- EX. XFMR "UTRR1-3" EXISTING EXISnNG PNL PNL 'URDP1-3" "ULPP1-*I" ELECTRICAL UPS ROOM LIGHTING FA, HSSD, T E F J_ FUTURE UPS 5A PRIMARY INPUT EX. XFMR "UTRL1-1 45KVA BUS 38,366A. I-- 1i in 0 N SPARE SPARE 6=17,947A. REMOVE EXISTING 600AT/600AF BREAKER AND INSTALL NEW 800AF/800AT 480V., 3-P CIRCUIT BREAKER 100% U.L. RATED G.E. SKLL36AT0800, 65 KAIC WITH SRPK 800A 800 TRIP MODULE. A LL (-) < < < 00 ,Z 00 CO CO to 103 EXIST. PNL "DSM" 1.1- < < o o 00 co co 0 m c.1 v) a. (0 cL z m 0 2-1 T TVSS EX ST. DIST PNL "CRPPA1' 30A, 3-P, 480V., NO-FUSE NEMA 1 A EXIST. MCC NEW CHILLED WTR PUMP NO. 3-08 SPARE 104 1- LE < 0 0 in 0 l CO 03 EX. CHILLER-'1 178 TON SCALE: NONE HLL ( - ) < 00 LO 0 Lo Tr CO co 001.= 17,797A. 06=17,364A. 0 NEW CHILLER NO. 3-08 178 TON FUTURE UPS 3A PRIMARY INPUT T 105 4000AT 4000AF 65KAIC LA 0 0 0 Ls PT rn L ftVSS OFCI OUTDOOR METERING — r UTILITY REVENUE METER UTILITY TRANSFORMER 2500KVA, OIL-FILLED 26KVA: 480Y/277, 30, 4W EX. DIESEL GENERATOR 277/480V, 30, 4W 2000KW, 2500KVA G1 -_/ -"- CONTROLS 1 3000AT ) 3200AF . 24VDC ST - r Al EQ NO I.= 46,269A. 106 L I&e =47,999A.---- ENTRANCE I.=4,441A. MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD 4000A, 480V, 30, 4W, + GND., 65KA IER 4000AT 1 4000AF NC 65KAIC Ni EQ )-E1, 1 T 1 107 108 AUTOMATIC THROWOVER SWITCH TIE 4000AT 4000AF 65KAIC ECTtl NO _ L 1NTERL6CK UPS IN BYPASS PLC-A PLC-B REMOVABLE LINK EX. 30 + NEUTRAL LANDING FUTURE UTILITY REVENUE METER TRANSITION DUCT 4000A, 30, 4W EX. (2) 4"C. EACH MV 1 UTX-8 L ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM 1 NC 1 CL UTILITY CABLES --- r - - - - I -- _ N2 FUT. DIESEL. GENERATOR 277/480V, 30. 4W 2000KW, 2500KVA 4000AT 4000AF 65KAIC GROUND TO RAISED FLOOR GROUND SYSTEM. REFER TO GROUNDING PLAN, TYPICAL [ CONTROLS 1 3000AT 3200AF 24VDC ST / r 109 r NO L livss co --, TO EX, UTILITY XFMRS FUTURE OM OUTDOOR METERING 480V TO EX. BLDGS 2 & 3 /, I FUTURE UTILITY TRANSFORMER 2500KVA, 01L-FILLED 26KVA: 480Y/277, 30, 4W EX. MV LOOP 26 KV, 30 MV VAULT , L - A2 EQ 4000AT 4000AF r AS PT 0 0 AS EXISTING VAULT EX. (2) 4"C. EACH MV 1 PPPP NNNN LLLL 234 PDU 143.02 J REPLACE EXISTING STANDARD 1200A CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH A NEW 1000AF/1000AT 480V., 3-P, 100% U.L. RATED G.E. SKLL36AT1000, 65 KAIC WITH SRPK 1200A 1000 TRIP MODULE EXIST, MCC U- 0 1 in in in N N < < 0 0 0 0 tr , co co SPARE PPPP NNNN LLLL 1234 PDU 145.02 u_ < < 0 0 in 0 L o 1 EX. CHILLER-2 178 TON 480V. DC BATTERY =- REFER TO 1 DC DWGS------1 EX. CL SWITCH EX. MV LOOP M V 26 KV, 30 EX. 2-4" CO FOR SERVICE TO EX. BLDG CITY LIGHT SWITCH PAN MOUNTED 7 PAD 4-1) SPARE ,5 3 u- 0 1 < < 0 0 LO N N 7A.- P P P P NNNN LLLL 1 234 PDU 164.01 4-1 ) NEW /TA UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF 0 SS MAINT. BYPASS Q3BP I 60 3,924A. <4: 0 0 0 0 L o SPARE SPARE E- u_ ° « 0 0 0 0 ix (0 CO c o MAI NT. BY-PASS MBP 111 EXIST. PNL "DSB1'' SPARE ( 4-1) I VNAAALWAI r . • ''' • ..... 7,209AALY lily 6,641A. PPPP NNNN LLLL 1 234 PDU 145.16 MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD BUS-B E - 7 EXIST. DIST. PNL "CRPPB1" 1. US I1=32, 7 A. 6 SPARE SPACE Is14,364A.0 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 2. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT FOR MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS ARE 16,780 A. 3. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO PANELS CRPPAI AND CRPPB1 IS 36,693A. 4. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO PANEL DSA1 IS 35,169A. 5. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO PANEL DSB1 IS 38,366A. 6. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO PANELS BPPA1, BPPA2, BPPB1, AND BPPB2 ARE 35,169A. 7. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO EXISTING UPS PRIMARY AND BYPASS CIRCUIT IS 40,509A. 8. 9. 112 < < 00 0 0 (.0 (.0 FUTURE UPS 3A BY-PASS co SPARE 1--- u_ < < 00 y 0 0 “..) to co (0 /- BUS 9- Isc 46224 I TVSS1 EXIST. DIST. PNL "BPPB2" T FUTURE UPS 4B PRIMARY INPUT Li 0 FUTURE UPS 5A BY-PASS SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT FOR CHILLER CIRCUIT IS 23,386A. SHORT CIRCUIT 3 PHASE CURRENT TO NEW UPS PRIMARY AND BYPASS CIRCUITS IS 36,518A. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT CALCULATED ONLY WHEN GENERATOR IS IN SERVICE. 10. TYPICAL SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT FOR EACH NEW PDU ON DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD "DP2B". 11. ALL UPS BREAKERS ARE 65 KAIC RATED. NEW DIST. PNL BD "DP2B" 800A, 480V., 30, 3W, 65KAIC D o o SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED 113 ct. < 4: o 0 0 in (I) SPARE SPARE u_ < < 7 0 0 00 CO TO (0 RECEIVED CITY OF TLIKVVILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 Expires ./o Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 Revision 1 01-05-09 95% REVIEW 3 01-26-09 ADD. NO. 1 2 01-15-09 100% CD 4 02-02-09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E-11 ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM i • ! I !I '1 1 I ( GENERAL NOTES ABBREVIATIO \S GE \ERAL DEMOLITO\ \OTES 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS: 1. INTENT OF INTERIOR WORK INCLUDES SELECTED DEMOLITION OF WALLS AND FLOORING FINISHES. MECHANICAL DUCT WORK AND AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT WILL ALSO BE REMOVED PER THE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING AND POWER SUPPLY MODIFICATIONS WILL ALSO BE SELECTIVELY DEMOLISHED PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF THIS MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONDUCTED IN A MANNER TO PREVENT DISTURBANCE OF OPERATING TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND TO LIMIT THE INCONVENIENCE TO THE VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER AS MUCH AS REASONABLY POSSIBLE. 2. CONTRACTORS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAFELY TRANSPORTING CREWS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, DEMOLITION DEBRIS, AND NEW MATERIALS THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING. 3. UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE, CONTRACTOR, VENDORS, AND ALL SUBCONTRACTORS WILL BE REQUIRED TO CHECK IN AND OUT OF THIS FACILITY AT BEGINNING AND END OF EACH SHIFT, COORDINATE WITH VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER. 4. NEW MATERIALS AND TOOLS ARE NOT TO BE STORED AT VACATED INTERIOR WORK AREAS. USE EXTERIOR STORAGE AREAS ON SITE AND /OR CONTRACTORS STORAGE FACILITIES. 5. DEMOLITION WORK TO BE COORDINATED WITH ALL TRADES. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DEBRIS REMOVAL FROM THE SITE ON A DAILY BASIS. SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL AT NO TIME TOTALLY BLOCK EXIT ROUTE 7. BEFORE STARTING ANY EXCAVATION, CALL UNDERGROUND CABLE LOCATION ASSISTANCE SERVICE 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE, LOCAL DIG NUMBER TO LOCATE CABLES AND OTHER BURIED UTILITIES ON SITE AND ADJACENT STREET. 8. SITE AND BUILDING ARE TO REMAIN SECURE AT ALL TIMES. ACCESS POINTS TO SITE AND BUILDING SHALL NOT BE LEFT UNATTENDED AT ANY TIME. CONTRACTOR TO NOTE THAT EXCEPTIONS TO THIS RULE WILL NOT BE TOLERATED. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MINIMUM 6' HIGH CONSTRUCTION FENCE AT ALL LOCATIONS AT PERIMETER WHERE EXISTING SECURITY FENCING IS BREACHED DUE TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. IF FENCING CANNOT BE CONSTRUCTED, CONTRACTOR IS TO EMPLOY, AT CONTRACTORS EXPENSE, 9. BEFORE START OF ANY DEMOLITION, AN OVERALL PROJECT PHASING MOP NEEDS TO BE APPROVED BY VZW SWITCH MANAGER AND OWNER /ARCHITECT BEFORE WORK PROCEEDS. ALL TEMPORARY DUST PARTITIONS AND PROTECTION OF ADJACENT AREAS NEEDS TO BE IN -PLACE AND APPROVED BY THE OWSF AND OWNER /ARCHITECT. INTENT IS TO CONFINE AND LIMIT CONSTRUCTION DUST TO IMMEDIATE WORK AREA ONLY. 10. INTERIOR METAL FRAMED, CONCRETE, OR CMU WALL DEMOLITION PROCEDURE SHALL BE BY DISASSEMBLING MANAGEABLE PIECES. DEMOLITION WILL START AT THE TOP OF THE WALL AND PROCEED DOWN TO FLOOR LEVEL. LARGE PANEL WALL TIPPING OR SMASHING WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. DEMOLISH NO MORE MATERIAL THAN WHAT CAN BE REMOVED FROM THE BUILDING BY THE END OF THE WORKING DAY. PILES OF RUBBLE AND DEBRIS LEFT BETWEEN SHIFTS IN THE BUILDING WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. WORK AREAS AT MINIMUM TO BE PUSH BROOM CLEANED OF DEBRIS AT END OF EACH WORKDAY. 11. COORDINATE WORK WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION. PROTECT CRITICAL EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES SCHEDULED TO REMAIN WITHIN THE BUILDING AND ON SITE. 12. REPAIR TO EXISTING CONDITION ANY ITEMS DAMAGED BY CONTRACT WHICH WERE NOT SCHEDULED OR NOTED. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL. 13. PROVIDE TEMPORARY WALK OFF MATS AT EACH ACCESS DOOR TO WORK AREAS. CLEAN MATS DAILY. 14. PROTECT FIRE ALARM HEAT DETECTION DEVICES FROM DAMAGE AND MAINTAIN FULLY OPERATIONAL DURING THE COURSE OF THE PROJECT. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF DEVICE OR CONDUIT AS REQD. COORDINATE WORK AROUND DETECTION DEVICES WITH ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. BAG HEADS IF NECESSARY TO PROTECT FROM DUST, UNCOVER AT THE END OF EACH DAY OR SOONER IF POSSIBLE. NEVER LEAVE WORK AREA UNATTENDED IF FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM IS NOT FULLY OPERATIONAL. COORD WITH VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER. 15. FIRE STOPPING MUST BE PROVIDED ON A DAILY BASIS. IF PERMENANT FIRESTOPPING CAN NOT BE INSTALLED RIGHT AWAY, PROVIDE TEMPORARY FIRE STOPPING AS REQ'D. TO MAINTAIN THE BUILDINGS FIRE SUPRRESSION AND FIRE RATING UNTIL THE PERMENANT FIRESTOPPING IS INSTALLED. 16. ALL CLEANING MUST BE PERFORMED WITH A HEPA VACUUM SYSTEM ONLY, NO SHOP VAC TYPES ALLOWED. NO DUST WILL BE TOLERATED IN TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT SPACES. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS 17. VERIFY WITH OWNER AREA APPROVED FOR STORING OWNERS SALVAGED MATERIALS. 18. FILL ALL ABANDONDED FLOOR SLAB AND ROOF DECK HOLES CREATED BY THIS WORK AND NOT SCHEDULED FOR REUSE. THIS INCLUDES ABANDONED AND DEMOLISHED WORK BY OTHER TRADES. (IE PLUMBING, HVAC, & ELECTRICAL) COORD W/ STRUCT. CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE AND FACILITATE THE PERIODIC TESTING AS REQUIRED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT TO ASSURE AVAILABILITY AND RELIABILITY FOR FIRE FIGHTING PURPOSES DURING CONSTRUCTION. 19. WHERE WALLS OR DOORS ARE REMOVED ADJACENT TO SURFACES, CONTRACTOR IS TO ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPAIRS AND RESTORATION OF SURFACE UP TO 12" BEYOND AREA OF WORK. 20. IF MATERIALS ARE DISCOVERED THAT APPEAR TO CONTAIN AZARDOUS MATERIALS (ASBESTOS) WORK IS TO STOP IMMEDIATELY AT THAT LOCATION. OWNER IS TO BE NOTIFIED AT ONCE. WORK IS NOT TO RESUME UNTIL MATERIAL HAS BEEN CONTAINED, REMOVED, AND /OR DET ERMINED TO BE FREE FROM CONTAMINATES. 21. ALL CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION DEBRIS IS TO BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DISPOSAL PER SITE AND APPROVED MEANS & SITES. 22. TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT NOT SHOWN. ASSUME MAX. 4' -0" AISLE CLEARANCE AROUND AREA OF WORK. VERIFY W/ VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER. 23. DUST WALL LOCATION IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND MAY NOT TAKE INTO CONSIDERATION EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS OR FUTURE CONFLICTS. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING TOTAL SEPARATION THROUGHTOUT DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. COORD. ALL TEMPORARY WALL LOCATIONS AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION W/ VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER. 24. PROVIDE TEMPORARY DUST WALL DOORS WITH STANDARD CLOSURE AND DUST SEAL HARDWARE PROTECTION. 25. COORD. ALL WORK W/ PHASING REQUIREMENTS OF ALL TRADES TO KEEP FACILITY 100% OPERATIONAL AND SECURE DURING COURSE OF PROJECT EXISTING SWITCH & EQUIPMENT ROOMS CONTAIN EXTREMELY SENSITIVE TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CARE TO PROTECT FROM CONTACT, DUST AND MOISTURE. ALL EQUIPMENT WILL REMAIN 100% OPERATIVE DURING COURSE OF PROJECT. DO NOT ENTER EQUIPMENT AREA WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL AND DIRECTION OF VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER. 27. EXISTING FIBER OPTIC TELCO CABLES ENTER THE EXISTING BUILDING AT TWO LOCATIONS. ARE TO CAREFULLY W/NEW WORK AND SUPPORTED PER DIRECTIONS OF VERIZON 28. PROVIDE TEMP TRAFFIC CONES AND BARRIERS TO SAFELY DIRECT SITE TRAFFIC AWAY FROM WORK AREAS. 29. PRE - DEMOLITION SITE SURVEY: BEFORE START OF DEMOLITION, CONDUCT SURVEY AND RECORD EXISTING CLEANLINESS FOR EACH ROOM OR DESIGNATED AREA WITHIN THE BUILDING. CONFIRM AND DOCUMENT DUST AND DIRT LEVELS AT ALL SURFACES INCLUDING FLOORS, EQUIPMENT CABINETS, PANEL TOPS, LIGHT FIXTURES, DUCTWORK, AND HVAC FILTERS. PROVIDE DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS AND WRITTEN DOCUMENTATION OF FINDINGS. PROVIDE ELECTRONIC COPY OF SURVEY TO VERIZON SWITCH MANAGER AND ARCHITECT /ENGINEER TEAM. 30. CON DE O ROOM MS PRESSURE CONFIRMATION: A BEFORE START OF DEMOLITION,REMEN EMEN POSITIVE ROOM AIR PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES DURING WORK TO ELIMINATE DUST MIGRATION TO OPERATIONAL AREAS. CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE SUPPLIMENTAL INDEPENDENT EXHAUST FANS TO VENTILATE ALL DUST- AND FUME - GENERATING WORK TO THE BUILDING EXTERIOR. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL WORK. 31. AT ALL WORK AREAS WITHIN THE EXISTING FACILITY, PROVIDE NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE DIRECTLY TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING. PROVIDE ROOM SEALS AND /OR TENTING AS NECESSARY TO ISOLATE WORK- GENERATED DUST. VENTILATED DIRECTLY TO BUILDING EXTERIOR. A/C AIR CONDITIONING E. EAST JAN. JANITOR Q T QUARRY TILE W. WEST /WIDE ACOUS. ACOUSTICAL EA. EACH JT. JOINT W/ W�TU ACT. ACOUSTIC TILE EL. ELEVATION RAD. RADIUS WD. WOOD ADA AMERICAN ELECTRICAL KIT. KITCHEN ELEC. W R.D. ROOF DRAIN W/O WITHOUT / KICKPLATE KPL. DISABILITIES ACT ELEV. ELEVATOR REF. REFERENCE WSCT. WAINSCOT ADD. ADDENDUM ENCL. ENCLOSE(URE) REFL. REFLECTED VI' WEIGHT ADJ. ADJACENT EQ. EQUAL L. LENGTH /LONG REFR. REFRIGERATOR ADJUS. ADJUSTABLE EQUIP. EQUIPMENT LAV. LAVATORY REG. REGISTER SYMBOLS WTA, 1 N c ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 (325) 695-1090 FAX (325) 595 -1069 THE CONTRACTORS SHALL USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL FIELD MEASUREMENT. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IF ANY DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND. 2. DIMENSIONS: KORD S KURISUgOARCHITECT 13028 HARBOUR HTS. DR. MUKILTEO, WASHINGTON 98275 (425) 870 -0368 A. THOROUGHLY REVIEW ALL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE STARTING WORK. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. B. VERIFY LOCATION AND DISPOSITION OF EXISTING AND PROPOSED UTILITIES BEFORE STARTING WORK. CALL LOCAL DIG NUMBER FOR LOCATOR AND CONTACT ALL VERIZON REPRESENTATIVES TO VERIFY LOCATIONS AND CLEARANCES. C. EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF EXTERIOR WALLS. D. DIMENSIONS ON PLANS ARE TO FINISH FACE OR CENTERLINE OF COLUMNS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. E. DIMENSIONS TO DOOR OPENINGS ARE TO R.O. IN MASONRY 8c CONCRETE AND TO JAMB OPENING IN STUD WALLS. VERIFY DOOR SIZE W/ SCHEDULE. 3. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A.F.F. ABOVE FINISH FLOOR EST. ESTIMATE L.H. LEFT HAND REINF. REINFORCING AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT EXH. EXHAUST LT. LIGHT REQ. REQUIRED ALT. ALTERNATE EXIST. EXISTING LVR. LOUVER R. REVISION @ A APPROX. APPROXIMATE EXP. EXPANSION R.H. RIGHT HAND CENTERLINE ARCH. ARCHITECT EXT. EXTERIOR MAX. MAXIMUM RM. ROOM AV AUDIO VISUAL M.C. MEDICINE CABINET R.O. ROUGH OPENING # NUMBER F.E. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MECH. MECHANICAL rf, BD. BOARD F.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MEMB. MEMBRANE S. SOUTH '{-' SQUARE FEET BET. BETWEEN CABINET MET. METAL S.C. SOLID CORE BLDG. BUILDING F.F. FACTORY FINISH MEZZ. MEZZANINE SCH. SCHEDULE MFR. MANUFACTURE(R) SEAL. SEALANT BLK. BLOCK F.H. FULL HEIGHT MIN. MINIMUM SECT. SECTION BLKG, BLOCKING FIN. FINISHED) MISC. MISCELLANEOUS SHT. SHEET BOT. BOTTOM FLR. FLOOR MTD. MOUNTED SIM. SIMILAR B/S BUILDING STANDARD FLUOR. FLUORESCENT MULL MULLION SPEC. SPECIFICATION MULL. B U BUILT UP F.O.C. FACE OF CONCRETE SQ. SQUARE F.O.F. FACE OF FINISH N. NORTH S.STL. STAINLESS STEEL CAB. CABINET F.O.S. FACE OF STUD(S) () N.F.S. NON FROST STD. STANDARD CER. CERAMIC FT. FOOT /FEET SUSCEPTIBLE STL. STEEL CHAMF. CHAMFER FURR. FURRED /FURRING N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT STOR. STORAGE CIRC. CIRCLE FUT. FUTURE NO. NUMBER STRUCT. STRUCTURAL CLG. CEILING NOM. NOMINAL SUSP. SUSPENDED CLR. CLEARANCE) GA. GAUGE N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE CNTR. COUNTER GALV. GALVANIZED T.C. TERRA COTTA COL. COLUMN G.B. GRAB BAR O.A. OVERALL TEL, TELEPHONE O.C. ON CENTER TEMP. TEMPERED CONC. CONCRETE G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR O.D. OUTSIDE DIAMETER TERR. TERRAllO CONST. CONSTRUCTION GEN. GENERAL O.F.C.I. OWNER FURNISHED THK. THICKNESS) CONT. CONTINUOUS GL. GLASS /GLAZING CONTRACTOR INSTALLED THRESH. THRESHOLD CONTR. CONTRACTOR GYP. GYPSUM WALL BOARD 0.F.0.1. OWNER FURNISHED TKBD. TACK BOARD CORR. CORRIDOR GWB GYPSUM OWNER INSTALLED TV TELEVISION CPT. CARPET OH. OVERHEAD nP, TYPICAL C.T. CERAMIC TILE H.C. HOLLOW CORE OPNG. OPENING CTR. CENTER HD. HEAD OPP.H. OPPOSITE HAND U.B.C. UNIFORM HDR. HEADER OPP. OPPOSITE BUILDING CODE DEMO. DEMOLITION HDWR. HARDWARE UNFIN. UNFINISHED DET. DETAIL H.M. HOLLOW METAL P.B. PANIC BAR U.N.O. UNLESS NOTED D.F. DRINKING FOUNTAIN HORIZ. HORIZONTAL P.BD. PARTICLE BOARD OTHERWISE DIAM. DIAMETER HR. HOUR PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE VCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILE DIM. DIMENSION HT. HEIGHT DN. DOWN H.V.A.C. HEATING /VENTILATING VEN. VENEER VERT. VERTICAL DR. DOOR & AIR CONDITIONING PLWD. PLYWOOD VEST. VESTIBULE D.S. DOWN SPOUT H.W. HOT WATER TANK PNL. PANEL VFY. VERIFY DWG. DRAWING PR. PAIR INSUL. INSULATION PT PRESSURE TREATED VIF VERIFY IN FIELD DWR. DRAWER INT. INTERIOR PTN. PARTITION V.W.C. VINYL WALL COVERING VZW VERIZON WIRELESS A. STRUCTURAL, CIVIL, ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS ARE SUPPLEMENTARY TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF EACH CONTRACTOR TO CHECK WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE THE INSTALLATION OF THEIR WORK. ANY DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND THE CONSULTING ENGINEER(S) DRAWINGS GS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECT'S ATTENTION BY WRITTEN NOTIFICATION FOR CLARIFICATION. ANY WORK INSTALLED IN CONFLICT WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE CORRECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT HIS OWN EXPENSE AND AT NO EXPENSE TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT. B. THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS IS TO SHOW GENERAL SCOPE AND INTENT OF THE WORK. METHODS AND MATERIALS NOT EXPLICIT BUT IMPLIED ARE INTENDED TO BE BUILDER DESIGNED, FURNISHED AND INSTALLED. 4. COORDINATION: o 1_ ' w w , v) = w ° 0 u I- N D < A. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS TO SECURE COMPLIANCE OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE ACCURATE LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, STAIRS AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. B. CONTRACTORS SHALL VERIFY SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AS WELL AS WITH APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. C. CONTRACTORS SHALL VERIFY SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PADS AND BASES. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY POWER, WATER AND DRAIN INSTALLATION W/ EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. PATCH AND REPAIR AFFECTED EXISTING EQUIPMENT /SURFACES AS REQUIRED. D. WHERE INSTALLATION AND/OR CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT IS NOT SPECIFIED BUT / SUCH CONNECTION AND /OR INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR SUCH CONNECTION AND /OR INSTALLATION. THIS WORK SHALL INCLUDE ALL UTILITY HOOK -UPS. 5. ABBREVIATIONS: < IA N 0 0 Y k a ~ (n .� N THROUGHOUT THE PLAN ARE ABBREVIATIONS WHICH ARE OF COMMON USE. THE LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS PROVIDED IS NOT INTENDED TO BE COMPLETE OR REPRESENTATIVE OF ALL CONDITIONS OR MATERIALS ACTUALLY USED ON THE PROJECT. THE ARCHITECT WILL DEFINE THE INTENT OF ANY IN QUESTION. 6. CODES: ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES AND ORDINANCES. IN CASE OF ANY CONFLICT WHEREIN THE METHODS OR STANDARDS OF INSTALLATION OR THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED DO NOT EQUAL OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LAWS OR ORDINANCES, THE LAWS AND ORDINANCES WILL GOVERN. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ALL CONFLICTS. 7. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED PERMITS: 'T ROC AT rEWA ' VVASHII A. GENERAL BUILDING PERMIT HAS BEEN APPLIED FOR AND A DEPOSIT HAS BEEN PAID. ARCHITECT SHALL BE REIMBURSED FOR THE DEPOSIT. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL ADDITIONAL PERMITS (FUEL TANK, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, FIRE SPRINKLER, ALARM, ETC.). B. ALL POSSIBLE RIGHT OF WAY WORK TO BE PER CITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGINEERING STANDARDS. C. WORKING HOURS FOR THE USE OF LOUD EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO TIMES ESTABLISHED BY THE CITY OF TUKWILA. THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL INCLUDE BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO GENERATORS, COMPRESSORS, GRADERS, DRILLS, COMPACTORS, RADIOS, AND OTHER SIMILAR EQUIPMENT. 8. EXITS: A. ALL EXIT DOORS SHALL BE ABLE TO BE OPENED FROM THE INSIDE WITHOUT USE OF KEY OR ANY SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. ALL EXIT SIGNS SHALL HAVE LETTERS SIX (6) INCHES HIGH MINIMUM, AND SHALL CONFORM WITH APPLICABLE CODES. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR EXIT SIGN LOCATIONS. COORDINATE POWER w/ ELEC. 9. LOUVERS AND SY vl B 0 LS I t 0 I I IIMI . ° a. DOOR NUMBER CONCRETE REFERENCE DOOR SCHEDULE INSTALL PER MANUFACTURES PRINTED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. WHERE DETAILED, PROVIDE ALL ADDITIONAL MATERIALS SHOWN OR NOTED. VERIFY ALL OPENING SIZES. BOTH NEW AND EXIST. PRIOR TO ORDERING. PROVIDE SPACE FOR FLASHING AS DETAILED. PROVIDE GALVANIC ISOLATION BETWEEN DISSIMILAR MATERIALS. 10. FINISHES: 114 ROOM NUMBER SAND, GROUT OR MORTAR REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE © A. PAINT ALL PAINTABLE ITEMS ATTACHED TO WALLS, CEILING, OR COLUMNS EXCEPT DUCTWORK AND FLEXIBLE AND /OR MOVABLE PARTS. CONCEAL ALL PIPE AND CONDUIT WHERE WALL FURRING IS PROVIDED. PRIME ALL MATERIALS WITH MATERIAL COMPATIBLE WITH SUBSTRATE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE AND FINISH NOTES B. OFFSET STUDS WHERE REQUIRED, SO THE FINISH WALL SURFACES WILL BE FLUSH. C. PROVIDE GALVANIC ISOLATION BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS. D. CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS SHALL BE STABILIZED AGAINST LATERAL MOVEMENT IN A CCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE UBC, GOVERNING EDITION. E. CEILING HEIGHTS ARE FROM CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB TO GRID AT ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING, OR FINISH ® HARD CEILING. F. ALL INTERIOR WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE TREATED. 11. FIRE PROTECTION: j/ WINDOW / LOUVER NUMBER CMU, COMMON FACE BRICK REFERENCE WINDOW / LOUVER SCHEDULE Cp_3) FINISH SYMBOL NEW METAL STUD WALL REFERENCE FINISH SCHEDULE 4 PLAN NOTE NO. NEW CMU WALL EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN. CR SECURITY SYSTEM CARD READER A. PROVIDE FIRE DAMPERS AND ACCESS PANELS FOR DUCTS AND A/C FIXTURES WHEN PASSING THROUGH A FIRE RATED ENCLOSURE. B. PROVIDE FIRE DAMPERS AT ALL SUPPLY AIR AND RETURN AIR OUTLETS OR INLETS PENETRATING FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES, ENCLOSURES, AND SURFACES AND AS REQUIRED BY CODE. C. PROVIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS AS SPECIFIED AND NOTED. 12. SPECIFICATIONS: EXISTING WALL TO BE REMOVED. • R.D. ROOF DRAIN TEMPORARY DUST WALL F.D. FLOOR DRAIN NORTH ARROW A. SPECIFICATIONS ARE A PART OF THIS CONTRACT. B. QUALITY OF MATERIALS AS SPECIFIED SHALL BE CONSIDERED MINIMUM AND ANY CHANGE SHALL BE OF DEMONSTRATED BEIIER QUALITY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY RELEASED BY OWNER AND APPROVED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT. MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED SHALL BE OF A HIGH QUALITY INTENDED FOR COMMERCIAL USE. PROVIDE ADEQUATE HEAT AND SHELTER ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS STANDARDS AND MATERIAL PRIOR TO, DURING EXECUTION OF THE WORK, AND UNTIL OWNER ACCEPTANCE, TO MAINTAIN DIMENSIONAL STABILITY AND MATERIAL QUALITY. STORED MATERIALS NOT INSTALLED SHALL BE OF A MOISTURE CONTENT THAT WILL NOT ALTER GENERAL APPEARANCE OR INTEGRITY OF ASSEMBLY WHEN MOISTURE CONTENT DECREASES TO SERVICEABLE LEVELS. MATERIALS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN A PROFESSIONAL MANNER TO THE HIGHEST INDUSTRY STANDARDS. 13. Fac. Code:TYKWWA 2 BUILDING SECTION 2 Drawn By: Designed By: A301 SHEET A301 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE /\ WALL SECTION C APP OVED 1 Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02-02-09 Revision A30' SHEET A304 APR 0 1 2009 B k ELEVATION B of Tukwila Tukwil a A. ALL OPENINGS, FLASHING, COUNTERFLASHING AND EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MAKE IT WEATHERPROOF. B. THE JUNCTION OF THE ROOF AND VERTICAL SURFACES SHALL BE FLASHED AND COUNTERFLASHED IN A MANNER TO MAKE THEM WEATHERPROOF. PROVIDE FOR ALL TEMPORARY WEATHERPROOFING DURING THE COURSE OF WORK TO ASSURE PROTECTION AND FULL OPERATION OF THE EXISTING FACILITY. 14. BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT: A. MAINTAIN AREAS FREE OF DEBRIS ACCUMULATION. KEEP WORK AREAS NEAT AND ORDERLY AS MUCH AS REASONABLY POSSIBLE. B CONTRACTOR (DO NOT ALL MATNRIALS NOT RELATED TO THE FINISHED PRODUCT C. NO ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS TO BE USED. 15. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL ERECTION, BRACING AND SHORING OF EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS UNTIL SUCH TIME IT IS PERMANENTLY SUPPORTED OR IS READY FOR REMOVAL DURING CONSTRUCTION. 16. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES, DEVICES & EQUIPMENT. COORD. W/ MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL TO VERIFY LOCATION REQ'D. 17. ALL HAZARDOUS WASTE WILL BE TRANSPORTED, UNLOADED, STORED, AND LOADED PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF CHAPTER 4.10 OF THE STORMWATER MANAGEMENT MANUAL. 1 01 -05 09 95% REVIEW A3.1 SHEET A3.1 DIVISION BUILDING I 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD � 2 4 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET DETAIL TWO SHEET A507 RECEIVED �A59 ciTRE FEB p 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER boci.. WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. A-O.1 ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES ( POWER WIRING TABLE RUN NO FROM TO WIRE RATING QTY OF WIRES NOTES 1 - 1 MAIN SWITCHBOARD MDSB -110E POWER MODULE UPS 2B INPUT 1000A 3-400 MCM'S 1 - #2/0 GND., IN EA OF (3) 3" C. BATTERY HIGH TEMP. 2 - 1 MAIN SWITCHBOARD MDSA -103D MAINT BYPASS CAB POWER MODULE UPS 2B 800A 3 -600 MCM'S 1 - #1/0 GND., IN EA OF (2) 3-1/2" C FAULT BATTERY CHARGING 3 -1 UPS 2B OUTPUT PANELBOARD DP2B 800A 3- 600MCM'S,1- #1 /OGND., IN EACH OF (2) 3-1/2" C. RECTIFIER VOLTAGE FAULT 4 -1 UPS OUTPUT "DP2B" TYPICAL PDU 250A 3 -250 MCM'S 1 -#4 GND., IN 2 -1/2" C. TYPICAL PDU FEEDER 5 -1 MAIN SWITCHBOARD MDSA -104D NEW AIR COOLED CHILLER #3 -08 450A 3- #4/0'S, 1 - #2 GND., IN EA OF 2" C. NEW CKT IN EXISTING UNDERGROUND CONDUITS 6 -1 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCCA" NEW CHILLED WTR PUMP #3 -08 30A 3- #1o'S, 1 - #10 GND., IN 3/4" C. NEW CKT IN EXISTING CONDUITS CONTROL WIRING TABLE RUN NO FROM TO DESCRIPTION NOTES 16 -1 BATTERY 1 UPS 2B 2 -PAIR 16AWG, IN 3/4" CONDUIT UPS 2B BATTERY PLANT ALARM /CONTROL WRING DISCONNECT IBEZ-XR3-7,8,11,12 8,11,12 TB -1 18 -1 UPS 2B MAINT. BYPASS 1 -PAIR 16AWG INTERNAL WIRES FUNISHED WITH UPS. INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR CABINET UPS 2B IBEZ -XR2 -4 IBEZ -XR2 -5 TB2 -10 TB2 -11 22 -1 ALL UPS COMM. BAS INTERFACE 2 -PAIR 22AWG SHEILDED BAS INTERFACE BY BAS CONTRACTOR PORT RAUZ -XR11 DIGITAL DATA POINTS INDEX (Al) POINTS 1 BATTERY CKT. BREAKER 2 BATTERY DISCHARGING 3 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE 4 LOW BATTERY WARNING 5 BATTERY HIGH TEMP. 6 ALARM MAINS 1 VOLTAGE 7 FAULT BATTERY VENT 8 FAULT BATTERY CHARGING 9 RECTIFIER STATUS 10 RECTIFIER FAULT 11 RECTIFIER VOLTAGE FAULT 12 RECTIFIER FREQUENCY FAULT 13 SYSTEM NORMAL 14 SYSTEM DOWN GRADED 15 INVERTER CONNECTED 16 INVERTER FAIL 17 STATIC SWITCH STATUS 18 UPS ON BATTERY - FORCING 19 BATTERY CHG. OFF - FORCING 20 INVERTER OUTPUT SWITCH 21 UPS ON BYPASS 22 UPS ON MAINT. BYPASS 23 BATTERY BACKUP TIME ANALOG DATA POINTS INDEX (Al) POINTS 1 KW PHASE A,B,C 2 KW TOTAL 3 KVA PHASE A,B,C 4 KVA TOTAL 5 % PEAK PHASE A,B,C 6 %TOTAL LOAD 7 % INVERTER LOAD 8 POWER FACTOR 9 MAINS 1 CURRENT PHASE A,B,C 10 MAINS 1 VOLTAGE PHASEA -B, B-C, C-A 11 MAINS 1 FREQUENCY 12 MAINS 2 CURRENT PHASE A,B,C 13 MAINS 2 VOLTAGE PHASE A -B, B-C, C -A 14 MAINS 2 FREQUENCY 15 INVERTER CURRENT PHASE A,B,C 16 INVERTER VOLTAGE PHASE A -B, B-C, C -A 17 INVERTER FREQUENCY 18 LOAD CURRENT PHASE A,B,C 19 LOAD VOLTAGE PHASE A-B, B-C, C -A 20 LOAD FREQUENCY 21 BATTERY CURRENT 22 BATTERY VOLTAGE 23 BATTERY BACKUP TIME 3 11On 0 213 � M W Z 51- 1 INuj M N .9,,J IE &oW WHO w � W � Z' >Jo W- Z Fac. Code Drawn By: IM !PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET 3 01 -26 -09 4 02 -02 -09 Project No. WTA. 08093 800/3 MDSA -103D 1000/3 MDSB - 110E -- r —( 2 -1 UPS SYSTEM INTERFACE PANEL P%R LED Es BATTERY Q4S 1000AF 800AT BATTERY ®' JUMPER ENABLE NO MET NABLE) .m all PORT P1 R6722 P2 RS232 UPS 2B 500KVA/450KW INPUT: 480VAC., 60Hz, 3PH, 3W OUTPUT: 480VAC., 60Hz, 3PH, 3W Q1 1000AF 1000AT PORT P3 RE -232 Q4S 1000AF 800AT INPUT FILTER Tx-n 8 H 0 0 RS -232 TO RS-485 CONVERTER NO SCALE RC-n REF TA. BATT. DISCONNECT REFER TO DC DWGS /// Z 120VAC OFF , BATT 2B REFER TO DC DWGS ADDR =1 TB MGE UPS DATA POINTS m X X ADDR =2 0 0 0 18 -1 (16 -1) STATIC SWITCH STATIC SWITCH UPS WIRING DIAGRAM - UPS 2B NEW UPS COMM. LOOP, RS -485 CABLE - 2 PAIR 22GA. SHIELDED IN 3/4" CONDUIT. UPS INTEGRATION DIAGRAM - MGE 7000 SERIES NO SCALE 0 0 CONNECT NEW UPS TO NEW COMM. LOOP. REFER TO TYPICAL UPS SERIAL INTERFACE DETAIL 5, THIS SHEET. MAINT. BYPASS CABINET 2B Q3BP 1000AF 800A Q5N 1000AF 800A DB25 MALE PIN NO.1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 B &B ELECTRONICS RS232 /RS485 CONVERTER 485019TB WITH EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 485PS2 (NO ECHO & RTS CTRL) RS -485 CONVERTER TO PANELBOARD DP2B RS485 TRUNK TD(A) RD(B) TD(B) RD(B) GND +12VD C BATT. DISCONNECT NO SCALE UV —I I-- PIN 5 (R +) PIN 4 (T +) PIN 3 (R -) PIN2(T -) PIN 1 (GRD) TB1 1 2 3 4 NEW COMM. LOOP MGE UPS COMM. TERMINAL RAUZ -XR11 UPS SERIAL INTERFACE NO SCALE 16 -1 TO NEXT UPS 7 8 11 12 XR3 IBEZ PCA UPS MODULE JUMPERS FURNISHED FROM FACTORY BETWEEN BY -PASS AND PRIMARY INPUT TERMINALS - DO NOT INSTALL BATTERY DISCONNECT CONTROL /ALARM WIRING DIAGRAM TYP. FOR EACH UPS CL >- t- m a 0 z MBP CABINET cKT. ( 2 - X ) FROM BYPASS SOURCE FEED SOURCE E A5 B5 C5 , " ,' f / , 7 TB2 TB1 CI 5 4 2 4 3 2 m B6 3 2 SCALE: NONE CKT. ( 1 -x ) FROM PRIMARY 3. GRADE 5 HARDWARE IS RECOMMENDED WITH TORQUE REQUIREMENTS AS FOLLOWS: BOLT DIAMETER TORQUE (INCH POUNDS) 3/8" 372 1 /2" 900 9/16" 1200 I 1A3I33IC3I G I UPS INPUT 77 UPS MODULE 2. ELECTRICAL JOINT COMPOUND ALCOA TYPE "2EJC" OR EQUIVALENT SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE CONNECTING THE TWO HOLE BARREL LUGS. 4. CONTROL WIRING MUST BE ROUTED IN INDIVIDUAL SEPARATE CONDUITS FROM POWER WIRINGS. INDICATES INDIVIDUAL SEPARATE CONDUITS. - TO Q1 INPUT BRKR G N 2 1 3 1 B6 A6 C4 B4 A4 BUSBARS PRIOR TO 480V. DC CKT FROM BATTERY DISCONNECT. REFER TO DC DWGS D XMQ3BP XMQSN SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED EVERY RUN NUMBER 6 2 1 XR9 XR2 BY -PASS INPUT TO Q4S BY-PASS BRKR. UPS OUTPUT FROM UPS UPS / MAINTENANCE BY -PASS CONNECTING DIAGRAM NOTES: 1. POWER WIRING BUSES ARE DESIGNED FOR TWO HOLE BARREL LUGS. 0 15 5. CONNECT GROUND FRAMES OF ALL EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. OBEZ IBEZ CIRCUITS BY CONTRACTOR CABLING SUPPLIED BY MGE CONNECTED BY CONTRACTOR RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 7009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 02009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS Sheet No. E -12 UPS WIRING DIAGRAM AND FEEDERS TABLE EXISTING PANEL L.L AI SERVICE: 277/480V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING 600A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BROWN INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - YELLOW SEPARATE GROUNDING LEG 3 - PURPLE BAR 35% 65,000 A. GROUND -GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GREY - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING A. NEUTRAL - BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY A. SYM. INTER. CAP. AS INDICATED POLE NO. 1 SERVES AREA LIGHTING ZONE 2 LOAD LEG BREAKER AMPS POLE 1 1 2 3- POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS LEG 1 - 2 3 POLES 20/1 POLE NO. 1 80 1 2 3 POLES 2 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL - 2 80 20/1 2 3 !AREA LIGHTING ZONE 2 CRAC #6 - 4 20/1 3 80 80 4 N.W. EQPT. ROOM LTS CRAC #10 - PDU 164.01 20/1 4 5 AREA LIGHTING ZONE 1 I 3- #.250 MCM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. - 20/1 5 80 6 S.W. EQPT. ROOM LTS t 8 12 14 16 18 8 - 20/1 6 7 AREA LIGHTING ZONE 1 - 80 80 20/1 7 10 CRAC #20 8 N.E. EQPT. ROOM LTS - 5 10 20/1 8 9 BATTERY ROOM 80 - ._ 11 20/1 9 12 10 S.E. EQPT. ROOM LTS - 3 20/1 10 11 CORRIDOR OFFICES 80 14 16 - 20/1 11 80 12 SPARE BREAKER 13 14 - 20/1 12 13 OFFICES, 1ST FLOOR - 15 17 19 21 I I 20/1 13 16 CRAC #24 14 SPARE BREAKER - 80 15 18 20/1 14 15 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING 18 - 20/1 15 3 17 J 16 SPARE BREAKER CRAC #16 -08 - 14 20/1 16 17 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING 80 - - - 22 - 20/1 17 24 18 SPARE BREAKER 80 - 20/1 18 19 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING - 24 CRAC #18 -08 20/1 19 14 3 20 SPARE BREAKER - 25 20/1 20 21 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING 25 - 20/1 21 14 34 22 SPARE BREAKER 26 - (F) CRAC 20/1 22 23 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING 27 - 20/1 23 CRAC #25 -08 DO NOT USE THIS SPACE 24 SPARE BREAKER - 28 - 20/1 24 25 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING - 29 31 33 35 20/1 25 30 29 26 SPARE BREAKER - - 20/1 26 27 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING - 20/1 27 .. 34 28 SPARE BREAKER - - 20/1 28 29 MEZZANINE PFFICES - - 20/1 29 37 38 30 SPARE BREAKER - 20/1 30 31 MEZZANINE PFFICES - - 20/1 31 -- 40 32 SPARE BREAKER - 20/1 32 33 STAIRWAYS, W /ROOMS I - 20/1 33 - 3 34 OFFICE - 20/1 34 35 ZONE 2 LTS - 20/1 35 37 ' 36 38 OFFICE SURGE ARRESTER (TVSS) - 20/1 20/1 36 38 37 ZONE 2 LTS - 20 /1 39 ZONE 1 LTS - 20/1 39 40 - - - (OECD 20/1 40 41 ZONE 1 LTS - 20/1 41 42 - 20/1 42 EXISTING L "C A l" SCHEDULE FED FROM MDSA EXISTING PANEL "C MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BROWN 588A. INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - YELLOW 588A. SEPARATE GROUNDING 65,000 A. LEG 3 - PURPLE 588A. BAR - I" SCHEDULE FED FROM MDSB SERVICE: 277/480V., 30, 3W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BROWN 588A. INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - YELLOW 588A. SEPARATE GROUNDING 65,000 A. LEG 3 - PURPLE 588A. BAR = GROUND - GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR 0 - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 800A. NEUTRAL - GREY BOTTOM FEED AT CONT R ACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY A. SYM. INTER. CAP. AS INDICATED POLE NO. ' SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 1 3 1 2 3• CONDUCTOR & CONDUIT SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 2 LEG AMPS LEG AMPS POLES 80 145 145 145 POLE NO. 1 80 2 80 3 1 2 3 POLES 80 2 2 80 250 250 145 145 CRAC #6 3- #.250 MOM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. 4 CRAC #8 CRAC #1 80 80 /" 4 CRAC #10 3 PDU 164.01 80 3 80 ._ 5 7 9 11 I 3- #.250 MCM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. g 6 80 3 6 t 8 12 14 16 18 8 PDU 145.16 80 250 145 80 - 8 80 80 8 7 9 10 CRAC #20 '10 80 11 5 10 250 250 - - 80 3 ._ 11 11 12 � 3 80 ,7' 13 80 3 _ 12 11 13 1 - - 80 14 16 CRAC #15 80 " 14 80 80 80 13 14 CRAC #13 t CRAC #22 80 80 80 // 3 80 15 17 19 21 I I I I 80 16 CRAC #24 19 80 80 80 15 18 15 19 80 I 18 14 14 80 3 17 J , 20 CRAC #16 -08 14 14 23 30 20 19 CRAC #26 80 - - - 22 CRAC #23 -08 1 1 I 14 24 22 80 / 3 21 23 30 23 , I 1 24 CRAC #18 -08 14 14 3 24 29 31 33 35 80 25 - 3 30 80 25 - 26 14 34 DO NOT USE THIS SPACE 30 26 (F) CRAC 34 - 36- 27 I 1 I - 30 ,V ,Z // 3 28 30 CRAC #25 -08 DO NOT USE THIS SPACE 14 - 28 27 ( F ) CRAC TVSS - 3 80 / �/ 3 29 31 33 35 14 3 30 29 32 - - 32 31 33 35 �� - - 34 } DO NOT USE THIS SPACE - .. 34 36., - - _ 36 j - - 37 " - 37 38 - 30 V 38 39 E DO NOT USE THIS SPACE - - 39 I 40 TVSS - 40 41 41 I 42 - 3 - 42 - 1 EXISTING L "C A l" SCHEDULE FED FROM MDSA PANELBOARD "DP2B" SCHEDULE MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BROWN 588A. INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - YELLOW 588A. SEPARATE GROUNDING 65,000 A. LEG 3 - PURPLE 588A. BAR - GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY TOP OR GROUNDED Y GREY MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 800A. MAIN LUG RATING 800A. MAIN LUGS ONLY A. SYM. INTER. CAP. AS INDICATED SERVICE: 480V., 30, 3W MINIMUM INTERRUPTING CAPACITY: 65,000A. TYPE MOUNTING WALL BREAKER AMPS POLE NO. DEVICE NO. SERVES BREAKER FRAME AMP TRIP LOAD AMP /LEG CONDUCTOR & CONDUIT AMP 1 _ 2 3 1 PDU 143.02 250 250 145 145 145 3- #.250 MCM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. 2 3 POLES 1 80 2 PDU 145.02 250 250 145 145 145 3- #.250 MOM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. 2 3 5 CRAC #1 80 80 / 3 1 3 5 3 PDU 164.01 250 250 145 145 145 3- #.250 MCM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. 4 6 80 80 80 7 t 8 12 14 16 18 4 PDU 145.16 250 250 145 145 145 3- #.250 MOM'S, 1- #4 GND., IN 2- 1/2 "C. , 8 80 '10 CRAC #11 11 5 SPARE 250 250 - - - 12 80 � 3 80 ,7' 13 6 SPACE ONLY 250 - - - - 14 16 CRAC #15 80 80 80 EXISTING L "C A l" SCHEDULE FED FROM MDSA SERVICE: 277/480V., 30, 3W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BROWN 588A. INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - YELLOW 588A. SEPARATE GROUNDING 65,000 A. LEG 3 - PURPLE 588A. BAR - GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY TOP OR GROUNDED Y GREY MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 800A. NEUTRAL - BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY A. SYM. INTER. CAP. AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD LEG BREAKER AMPS POLE NO. 1 2 3 r POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS 1 2 3 POLES 1 2 3 POLES 1 80 80 4 1 2 80 80 2 3 5 CRAC #1 80 80 / 3 1 3 5 4 CRAC #3 80 4 6 80 80 80 7 t 8 12 14 16 18 7 9 CRAG #5 80 80 80 7 9 1I , 8 80 '10 CRAC #11 11 80 3 11 12 80 � 3 80 ,7' 13 80 80 t 13 15 17 ' 14 16 CRAC #15 80 80 80 / 3 15 CRAC #13 80 17 80 3 18 19 CRAG #17 80 80 80 J _` 19 I 20 14 14 30 3 t 20 22 24 21 , 22 CRAC #16 -08 14 23 SPARE SPARE - - - - - - 80 - - - 3 80 / 3 80 ' 3 .. - 23 25 E 29 31 MI r 1 9 41 1 1 I 24 25 27 26 14 30 26 , I 1 28 30 CRAC #18 -08 14 28 29 31 33 35 14 3 30 32 - - 32 34 DO NOT USE THIS SPACE - - 34 I 36- - - 30 ,V ,Z // 3 _ 36 r 38 40 _42 37 39 41 DO NOT USE THIS SPACE 38 - 40 TVSS - 42 - Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12W 12 -08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET 01 -05 -09 2 01 -15 -09 3 01 -26 -09 4 02 -02 -09 Project No. WT 08093 SERVES MAIN BREAKER/INCOMING LUGS CHILLED WATER PUMP 1 NEW. CHILLED WATER PUMP 3 MAKE -UP AIR UNIT MAU -1 DUCT HEATER SURGE ARRESTER (TVSS) DEVICE DEVICE MAG-GARD CIRCUIT BREAKER VOLTAGE NO. INT. CAP. NO. RATING POLES SYM. AMPS. 1 2 3 4 6 480 480 480 480 480 480 3 3 3 3 3 3 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 STARTER SIZE 2 2 1 40A/3P 30A/3P START -STOP PUSH- BUTTON MAINTAINING CONTACT MAGNETIC CONTACTOR HAND -OFF RED -PILOT AUTO LIGHT YES YES MOTOR HP 15 15 2 AMPS 21.1 21.1 3.4 30.1 0. REMARKS PROVIDE NEW STARTER/BREAKER FOR NEW PUMP IN EX. SPACE. SERVES MAIN BREAKER/INCOMING LUGS CHILLED WATER PUMP 2 FAN COIL UNIT FCU -1 DUCT HEATER SPARE SURGE ARRESTER (TVSS) HUMIDIFIER NOTES: 1. REPLACE EXISTING 100AF /80AT, 3 -P 480V. CIRCUIT BREAKER(GE SELA36AT0100) TRIP MODULE WITH NEW 30A TRIP MODULE TO SERVE NEW CRAC UNITS. NEW CRAC UNITS ARE NOT EQUIPPED WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT OR HUMIDIFIER. 1 EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCCA" SCHEDULE EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCCB" SCHEDULE DEVICE NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 DEVICE VOLTAGE RATING 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 MAG -GARD CIRCUIT BREAKER NO. INT. CAP. POLES SYM. AMPS. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 STARTER SIZE 1 30A/3P 2 30A /3P 60A/3P START -STOP PUSH- BUTTON MAINTAINING CONTACT MAGNETIC CONTACTOR HAND -OFF AUTO RED -PILOT LIGHT MOTOR HP 15 2 15 AMPS 21.1 21.1 3.4 30.1 0.0 0.0 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 REMARKS NOTES: 1. REPLACE EXISTING 100AF /80AT, 3 -P 480V. CIRCUIT BREAKER(GE SELA36AT0100) TRIP MODULE WITH NEW 30A TRIP MODULE TO SERVE NEW CRAG UNITS. NEW CRAC UNITS ARE NOT EQUIPPED WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT OR HUMIDIFIER. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED NOTE 1 NOTE 1 OO9OI RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 /009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT ©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS ism 3 Expires %Z / -/O 1Owm LI le 0et W lu1 ui St") ima m w0W W I• O d Wo � Z � r JW: >Jo Z 111 0 419 r. co ° vJ k N co (f) Q) ot) Fac. Code;TYKWWA Drawn By: IM PS, ZJ Sheet No. E'dI 3 ELECTRICA. PANEL SCHEDULES PDU 145.02 PANEL "145.02/3" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING LEG 3 BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% 10,000 A. - GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. NEUTRAL -WHITE BOTTOM FEED AT MAIN LUGS ONLY CONTRACTORS OPTION AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD LEG BREAKER AMPS POLE NO. 12 30 POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS 1 2 3 POLES POLES 3 0 /�� 1 1 2 3 POLES " � 143.08 - L 630 - 144.12 - L630 2 30 r 4 143 - L630 - 2 3 30 r 2 s J 20/1 30 - s 2 L 3 . - 2 3 4 5 144.13 - L630 2 3 2 30 4 L 8 ( 10 - 143. - L630 2 Ill - 142.13 - L630 143.14 - L520 - - ! s 144.02 - L630 5 1 - 0 C7 7 } 144.09 - L520 - 30 r s : - 7 143.15 - L520 2 = 7 20/1 9 9 143.10 - L630 - - 3 0 30 9 20/1 - 10 144.03 - L630 - - 30 11 11 - - - / t 11 - 1111 12 - :o 2 11 - 2 12 13 143.11 = L630 - _ 2 3o r 13 144.15 - L630 IIU� 14 144.04 - L630 - - - 30 2L 16 r 14 15 15 14 3 0 - 2 15 151111 14 16 16 2 15 - 17 143.12 - L630 16 17 - 30 f 17 - 30 181 144.05 - L630 17 18 - 30 ( " 18 19J 30 - 19 r 18 20 / 2L19 144.16- L520 . 2 20J _ 19 - 20 21 144.17 - L630 2L20 - 21 143.13 - L630 20 - 144,17 - L630 30 r 21 144.17 - L520 30 / 22 144.06 - L630 22 24 22 142.17 - L630 3 0 22 23 } 30 22 23 _ f 2 L 23 - 2 24 25 24 - - 2 7 .,....,... / 2 30 2L32 24 f 26 28 r 30 5 143.14 - L630 - 1 144.18 - L630 - 30 25 30 r 25 26 144.07 - L630 - 24 - 27 } f 26 27 - • 2 27 2 L 27 28 28 L 28 - 145.05 - L630 L630 143.15 - - 145.05 - L630 2a 30 '' 2 29 _31 30 / • , 30 32 144.08 - L630 - 30 - 291 30 33 143.16 - L630 SPARE - 31 3o f 33 32 30 34 144.09 - L630 32 - 145.06 - L630 30 34 35} 30 / 33 1111 34 143.06 - L630, 2 35 142.10 - L630 30 „Al 36 35 30 r 34 - 2L36 ENIIIIIIU„® 37 143.17 - L630 - 35 - � 30 / r 37 _ 145.07 - L630 - 38 1 144,11 L630 - 3 ®® � 30 r 38 39 } 35 30 38 39 2 39 - - 40 40 30 f 38 _ 2 40 41 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY 39 - 20/1 41 42 • 42 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 - 20/1 42 PDU 145.02 PANEL 11 145.02/4" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W, CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING A. LEG 3 BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% 10,000 - GROUND -GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR NEUTRAL - WHITE - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123 NMI N POLE NO . SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE LEG AMPS LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES 3 0 /�� 1 2 3 POLES 1 144.12 - L630 - POLES 144.12 - L630 2 142.12 - L630 - 30 20/1 30 2 3 142.02 - L630 - - 20/1 30 f 2 s 3 143.13 - L520 2 - 2 3 4 5 144.13 - L630 4 144.08 - L520 - 3 © 2 Ill 6 142.13 - L630 143.14 - L520 - - ! 30 4 6 5 1 14 - L630 6 144.09 - L520 - 30 r s 7 J - 7 143.15 - L520 2 = 7 20/1 9 144,14 - L630 142.17 - L520 - 144.11 - L520. 3 0 s ,�� 1 � 100 20/1 - 142.14 - L630 143.16 - L520 - - 30 o 11 - - 10 - ® 3 11 1111 20/1 - :o 2 11 2 20/1 12 20/1 13 144.15 - L630 _ 2 L 12 /F 144.15 - L630 IIU� 20/1 14 142.15.- L630 - - 14 l 30 14 15 14 3 0 - 14 Pii- 2 151111 14 20/1 16 2 15 - - 16 16 17 144,16 - L630 2 17 144,16 - L630 - 30 17 30 17 18 142,16 - L630 18 1 20 142,06 - L630 - 30 18 19 r 18 20 _ - 144.16- L520 . 2 19 _ 19 20/1 20 21 144.17 - L630 - - 20/1 ® a 20 21 144,17 - L630 22 - 144.17 - L520 30 / 21 ��'� 22 24 22 142.17 - L630 144.05 - L520 - 2 30 22 23 24 143.10 - L520 22 - 2 23 25 24 - 23 144.06 - L520 - 25 24 25 1 144.18 - L630 - - 24 30 r 25 r 26 261 142.18 - L630 - 24 - 3 f 26 27 25 • - 27 2 L 27 145.06 - L520 28 L 28 29 145.05 - L630 ' L 28 29 145.05 - L630 2a - - 30 / 29 30 143.05 - L630 - 30 - 30 30 31 29 SPARE 7 31 IM1111BLE1111111EIN 20/1 32 30 - E 32 33 145.06 - L630 145.06 - L630 - - 30 / 33 1111 34 143.06 - L630, 31 - 142.10 - L630 30 „Al 34 35 30 r 34 35 } - ENIIIIIIU„® 32 - 2 35 - � 33 36 37 145.07 - L630 - - 2 3 ®® � 143.07 - L630 - 34 35 30 38 39 - 38 l - - ©r�;� 39 40 30 f 38 _ - PMIIIIE 40 41 SPACE ONLY 39 • - 20/1 41 42 SPACE ONLY SPARE 38 - 20/1 42 PDU 143.02 PANEL 11 143.02/4 11 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND -GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED NEUTRAL - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. -WHITE BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION A AS S MAIN D UGS ONLY INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER AMPS POLE NO. 123; POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG' LEG AMPS AMPS LEG NO. 1 ,2 3 POLES POLES 3 1 2 3 POLES POLES 144.12 - L630 - - 443x08 -1630 30 20/1 1 30 r 1 142.02 - L630 - - 20/1 30 f 2 s 3 143.13 - L520 2 - 2 3 • • 4 } 4 144.08 - L520 2 - 2 4 44.13 - L630 5 143.14 - L520 - 30 5 20/1 5 1 14 - L630 6 144.09 - L520 - 30 r s 7 J - 7 143.15 - L520 2 = 7 20/1 s J • 142.17 - L520 8 144.11 - L520. - L 8 144.14 - L630 20/1 - 9 143.16 - L520 - 10 10 1 142.04 - L630 - - 10 30 r 10 11 } 10 20/1 - :o 2 11 2 20/1 12 20/1 11 12 - 2 L 12 13 144.15 - L630 - 20/1 12 30 j 13 - 14 l 14 1 142.05 - L630 - 14 3 0 30 2116 14 15 20/1 14 20/1 14 2 15 - - 16 20/1 15 16 2 17 144,16 - L630 144.15 - L520 - 30 17 . 17 18 1 20 142,06 - L630 144.05 - L630 - - 30 2 r 18 20 19 J - 144.16- L520 - 2 _ 19 20/1 _ 21 144.17 - L630 144.04 - L520 - 20/1 3 142.07 J" 21 19 • 22 - L630 144.17 - L520 - 20/1 30 22 24 20 21 144.05 - L520 - 2 L 23 20/1 - 24 143.10 - L520 22 144.18 - L520 2 2( 25 144.18 - L630 - 23 144.06 - L520 30� 25 - 20/1 26 142.08 - L630 - 24 145.05 - L520 3o r 26 - 20/1 24 - SPARE 2 0 27 25 • 28 27 SPARE 26 145.06 - L520 2 L 28 29 145.05 - L630 26 27 - 29 2a - 20/1 30 J 142.09 - L630 _ 28 - 30 30 �32 31 20/1 - 29 SPARE 7 31 - 20/1 32 30 - 30 SPARE - 33 145.06 - L630 20/1 - 31 30 33 - 31 34 142.10 - L630 32 - 32 . 30 r 34 35 } 32 20/1 32 - 2 35 - 33 36 33 34 SPARE - 2 L 36 37 145.07 - L630 - 34 35 30 37 ?0/1 - 38 l 142.11 - L630 - SPARE 36 30 f 38 39 - 20/1 36 37 2 39 • 37 40 J 37 . SPARE 38 2 40 41 SPACE ONLY 20/1 38 - 20/1 41 - _ 42 SPACE ONLY • SPARE - 20/1 42 PDU 145.02 PANEL 11 145.02/1 11 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR NEUTRAL - WHITE - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES OAD BREAKER POLE . NO. 12 3- POLE POLE LOAD ! BREAKER POLE NO. _ LEG Amps LEG AMPS LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES 3 POLES 1 2 3 POLES 1 143.12 - L520 - 443x08 -1630 - 20/1 1 30 r 1 2 144.07 - L520 - 20/1 20/1 2 3 143.13 - L520 2 - 3 20/1 3 • 4 144.08 - L520 2 - 4 20/1 4 5 143.14 - L520 - - - 20/1 5 6 6 } 6 144.09 - L520 - - - 20/1 6 7 143.15 - L520 - :-;{ 7 20/1 7 • 142.17 - L520 8 144.11 - L520. - 9 1 143.10 - L630 8 20/1 8 9 143.16 - L520 - 10 20/1 9 - 142.18 - L520 10 144.12 - L520 11 - 10 20/1 10 11 143.17 - L520 2 20/1 - 20/1 11 12 143.05- L520 12 144.13 - L520 13 1 143.41 - L630 - - ; 20/1 12 13 143.18 - L520 - 14 l 144.04 - L630 20/1 13 14 3 0 14 144,14 - L520 - 20/1 14 20/1 14 15 144.02 - L520 - - 15 20/1 15 16 2 16 144.15 - L520 - - 20/1 16 17 144.03 - L520 18 1 144.05 - L630 - 20/1 17 3 1s 18 144.16- L520 - 20/1 - 20/1 18 19 144.04 - L520 - 20/1 - 20/1 19 220 7,....,...../f 2 30 22 24 ( 26 20 144.17 - L520 - 20/1 3; ,....... ,...- -- 20/1 20 21 144.05 - L520 144.06 - L630 - - 20/1 21 22 143.10 - L520 22 144.18 - L520 2 - 22 20/1 22 23 144.06 - L520 - - - 20/1 23 24 30 24 145.05 - L520 - 26 l - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - 20/1 25 20/1 25 27 SPARE 26 145.06 - L520 - 20/1 - 20/1 26 27 SPARE 29 - - 20/1 27 . _ 28 145.07 - L520 29 - - 20/1 28 29 SPARE - 20/1 - 20/1 29 30 SPARE 30 SPARE - 20/1 - 20/1 30 31 SPARE - - 31 20/1 31 32 _ 32 . SPARE - - 32 20/1 32 33 SPARE 35 - 33 20/1 33 34 SPARE 34 SPARE - 35 J - 34 20/1 34 35 SPARE - ?0/1 - 20/1 35 36 SPARE 36 SPARE - 20/1 - 20/1 36 37 SPARE - - 37 20/1 37 . SPARE 38 SPARE - - 38 20/1 38 39 SPARE 41 - - 20/1 39 • SPARE 40 SPARE 41 - - 20/1 40 41 SPARE - 20/1 - 20/1 41 42 SPARE 42 SPARE - 20/1 - 20/1 42 PDU 143.02 PANEL 1 143. 02/3 11 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% 10.000 GROUND - GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225 A. - BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL -WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER 3" '23 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS NO. LEG AMPS NO. 1 NO. 1 2 3 POLES - 2 1 2 3 POLES - 443x08 -1630 - 20/1 1 30 r 1 2 1 143.18 - L630 30 20/1 30 s - 2 20/1 3 2 L 3 4 J - 2 20/1 4 5 4 5 1 143.09 - L630 30 - - 5 i 142.13 - L630 6 6 } 144 - L630 30 2L8 - - 2`8 7 J - 2 7 :-;{ 7 8 8 142.17 - L520 - 142.04 - L630 9 1 143.10 - L630 8 - 142.06 - L520 30 r 9 20/1 10 144.03 - L630 - 142.18 - L520 3 o r 10 11 20/1 10 11 142.07 - L520 2 11 2 20/1 12 12 J 12 143.05- L520 2 12 13 1 143.41 - L630 - 12 13 30 r 13 142.15 - L630 30 14 l 144.04 - L630 - 16 14 3 0 14 15 3 � 20/1 14 15 2L15 - - - 16J 15 1 17 16 2 17 1 143.12 - L630 20/1 - 30 17 142.16 - L630 • 18 1 144.05 - L630 17 18 L - 3 1s 19 - - 20/1 18 2 19 - 20 J 20/1 - 20 220 7,....,...../f 2 30 22 24 ( 26 21 1 143.13 - L630 30 - 20/1 3; ,....... ,...- -- r 21 142.12 - L520 - 22 144.06 - L630 20/1 - 23 1 23 22 143.10 - L520 - - 2 L 23 22 23 24 - - - 25 1 143.14 - L630 - 24' 24 30 25 - - 26 l 144.07 - L630 - SPARE - 27 25 20/1 25 26 1 2 27 SPARE - 28 J 26 20/1 - 27 2 28 291 143.15 - L630 29 20/1 - 30 J' 29 28 _ 30 144.08 - L630 29 20/1 - 30 30 31 29 - 20/1 29 2 L 31 30 SPARE 32 30 - 20/1 30 2 32 33 1 143.16 - L630 * - 31 30 33 32 _ 34 144.09 - L630 33 - 32 30 34 35 - 35 20/1 33 2 35 34 SPARE 36 - - 35 J 20/1 34 2 36 37 143.17 - L630 - ?0/1 35 30 37 36 SPARE 38 144.11 - L630 - 20/1 36 30 38 39 (" 37 39J - 37 / 2 39 . SPARE 40 1 38 39 - 38 2 L 40 SPARE 41 SPACE ONLY 41 20/1 - 20/1 41 40 SPARE 42 SPACE ONLY 41 20/1 - 20/1 42 PDU 143.02 PANEL 11 143.02/1 11 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND -GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED NEUTRAL - WHITE - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225 A. BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION A D UGS ONLY AS S N INDICATED POLE NO. SERVE LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 3" POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG Amps LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 2 3 POLES 1 142.02 - L520 - 3o 20/1 1 2 142.14 - L520 - 30 20/1 2 3 142.03 - L520 - 2 20/1 3 . 4 142.15 - L520 - 2 20/1 4 5 142.04 - L520 - 30 - 20/1 5 i 142.13 - L630 6 142.16- L520 - 30 2L8 - 20/1 6 7 142.05 - L520 - 2 7 20/1 7 8 8 142.17 - L520 - 142.04 - L630 20/1 8 9 142.06 - L520 r s - 20/1 9 10 142.18 - L520 r 10 - 20/1 10 11 142.07 - L520 L - 2 20/1 11 12 J 12 143.05- L520 - - 20/1 12 13 142.08 - L520 - 142.15 - L630 30 20/1 13 30 16 14 143.06 - L520 - 3 � 20/1 14 15 142.09 - L520 - - - 20/1 15 1 17 16 143.07 - L520 - 20/1 16 17 142.10 - L520 142.16 - L630 - - 20/1 17 18 L 18 1 18 143.08 - L520 - - 20/1 18 19 142.11 - L520 - - 2 20/1 19 20 20 143.09 - L520 - 30 r 21 20/1 20 21 142.12 - L520 - - 30 / 20/1 21 23 1 22 22 143.10 - L520 - - 30 4 20/1 22 23 142.13 - L520 - - 20/1 23 - 24' 24 143.11 - L520 r 25 - - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - 30 25 20/1 25 26 1 142.18 - L630 26 SPARE - 30 26 20/1 26 27 SPARE 2 - 29 20/1 27 - 28 SPARE - 29 20/1 28 29 SPARE 30 29 - 20/1 29 143.05 - L630 _ 30 SPARE 30 30 - 20/1 30 31 SPARE - 31 * 20/1 31 - - 32 SPARE - '� 32 33 20/1 32 33 SPARE 30 - 35 20/1 33 143.06 - L630 _ 34 SPARE 30 - - 35 J 20/1 34 35 SPARE 2 35 - ?0/1 35 36 SPARE . 36 - 20/1 36 37 SPARE - (" 37 39J 20/1 37 143.07 - L630 - 38 SPARE - 38 39 20/1 38 39 SPARE 2 - 41 20/1 39 - 40 SPARE 4 - 41 20/1 40 41 SPARE 20/1 41 - 20/1 41 SPACE ONLY • 42 SPARE 20/1 42 - 20/1 42 PDU 143.02 PANEL 11 143.02/2 11 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED NEUTRAL - WHITE - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123 - POLE SERVES LOAD ' BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 2 13 POLES 2 142.02 - L630 - 3o 30 142. 142.12 - L630 - L630 - 30 30 r 2 s 1 2 3 l.. 1 • 4 1 2 142.03 - L630 5 '1 142.03 - L630 - 30 - 30 r i 142.13 - L630 1 142.13 - L630 - 30 2L8 s - 30 $ ? 2 7 2 7 8 $ - 142.04 - L630 - 9 1 142.04 - L630 r s - 30 9 10 142.14 - L630 r 10 - 30 10 11J 2 L - 2 11 12 J - 13 142.05 - L630 - 12 13 142.05 - L630 - 14 142.15 - L630 30 13 30 16 142 - L630 - - 3 � 14 15 16 1 - - L . 2 1 17 142.06 - L630 - 16 17 142.06 - L630 18 142.16 - L630 - 30 17 18 L 18 1 142.16 - L630 - 30 18 19 20 - 2 19 2 20 20 J - 30 r 21 20 21 142.07 - L630 142.17 - L630 - - 30 / 21 • 23 1 22 142,17 - L630 - L 23 30 4 22 23 - 2 23 25 142.08 - L630 - 24' 3 r 25 - • 24 25 142.08 - L630 - 30 25 27 1 26 1 142.18 - L630 - L 27 . 30 26 27 1 - 2 27 29 142.09 - L630 28 - 30 29 28 29 142.09 - L630 - 30 29 31 301 143.05 - L630 2 - 30 30 31 - 2 31 * 142.10 - L630 32 J - - 30 33 32 33 142.10 - L630 - 30 r 33 35 341. 143.06 - L630 - - 35 30 34 - 35 J - 2 35 371 142.11 - L630 36 30 J" 37 . 36 37 1 142.11 - L630 - 30 (" 37 39J 38 143.07 - L630 - 2 30 38 39 - 2 39 41 SPACE ONLY 40 - 20/1 41 4 40 41 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 41 42 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 42 PDU 145.02 PANEL 11 145.02 /2 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED NEUTRAL WHITE -MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. - BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE POLE 123, POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE LEG AMPS LEG AMPS POLES NO, 1 2 3 POLES 1 2 3 1 142.02 - L630 - 3o J" 1 2 l 142.12 - L630 _ 30 (N42°. ]. 2 3 2 142.03 - L630 - 30 i 142.13 - L630 - 30 2L8 r 6 ? 2 7 8 142.04 - L630 - 30 r s 142.14 - L630 3 2L12 r 10 1 - 2 L 1 2 - 13 142.05 - L630 - 30 r 13 • 14 142.15 - L630 - 30 14 15 - 2 L 15 16 1 - . 2 16 17 142.06 - L630 - 17 18 142.16 - L630 _ 18 L 19 7,.........„/"{ 2 19 20 - 2 20 21 142.07 - L6 - 30 r 21 22 1 142.17 - L630 - 30 22 23 1 2 L 23 , 24 J - 2 24 25 142.08 - L630 - 3 r 25 • 26 - 142.18 L630 - 3 ..... 0 „.„,„ „--- --- ( 26 27 1 2 L 27 . 28 1 2 28 29 142.09 - L630 - 30 29 30 143.05 - L630 - 30 30 31 2 31 32 2 L 32 33 1 142.10 - L630 - 30 33 34 143.06 - L630 - 30 34 35 - 2 35 36 - 2 36 371 142.11 - L630 - 30 J" 37 381 143.07 - L630 30 38 39J 2 40J 2 40 41 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 41 • • 42 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 42 GENERAL NOTES: 1, PANEL SCHEDULES INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINIGS ARE PROVIDED WITH PDU BY PDU MANUFACTURER WITHOUT THE SPECIFIED BRANCH BREAKERS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL BRANCH BREAKERS INDICATED HEREIN. 2. FOR EACH L520 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1410 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L5 -20R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 3. FOR EACH L630 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1- #1 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L6 -30R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 4. FOR EACH CIRCUIT, PROVIDE LABELS TO IDENTIFY. RACK NUMBER AND CIRCUIT NUMBER AT BOTH ENDS OF CIRCUIT CONDUIT. ALSO, PROVIDE LABEL ON OUTLET COVERPLATE TO IDENTIFY CIRCUIT NUMBER AND PDU PANEL. Doc1ot5 SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT ©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS I 010 0 n� M l W� 0 it Hot 7 5 L 0 I ill N W w N a ix wh. i! W 1" 0 � Jr. w� z >We i W m� , Z N 0 QV Lic. iN 559 r ")\ Sheet No. E -14 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES PDU 164.01 PANEL "164 /3" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 1 2 3 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS NO. 1 NO. 1 2 3 POLES POLES 1 1 2 3 POLES 3 J 167.01 - L630 - SPACE ONLY - 3 J' l 167.11 -1630 - _ 2 30 2 3 166.06 - L520 2 0 / 1 - 3 21 L 3 - 4 4 1 - - 4 SPACE ONLY 4 7 167.02 - 1630 20/ 4 - 3.0..........„„....-/# f - 6 1 167.12 - L630 - - 30 8 7 166.08 - L520 - 6 7 2 7 8 : J 7 - s 2� s 167.03 -1630 144.03 - L630 - - 30 ..........„, „...- - " (" 9 9 - 10 167 - L630 144.14 - L630 - - 30 10 11 11 166.10 - 1520 20/1 - - 111 11 12} 12 _J ] 12 11 - - - 12 12 167.04 -1630 - 20/1 12 30 r 13 - - 14 1 167.14 - L630 - - 15 30 14 15 15 - - 2 2 1 15 15 16 1 16 20/1 15 - - 16 " 16 171 167.05 -1630 - - - 3o f 17 SPACE ONLY 18 18 167.15 - L630 20/1 - - 30 18 19 J - 19 2 2 t 19 19 20 1 20 j - - 20/1 19 20 20 21 167.06 - L630 SPACE ONLY - 21 30 21 20 21 22 167.01 - L630 - - 20/1 30 22 23 J 22 ` SPACE ONLY - / 2 23 L 23 22 24 24 23 2 - - 24 {26 25 167,07 - L630 - - 24 30 / 25 25 24 26 167.02 - L630 - - 26 3C 27 26 27 26 SPACE ONLY - 27 PlaillIM 27 28 27 28 27 - - 28 29 1 167.08 - L630 28 29 -` 30 29 {31 - 30 30 167.03 - 1630 29 30 - 30 L 30 31 30 r 30 31 30 f 2 30 31 2 32 30 - -1 32 - / 2.[ 32 34 33 167.09 - L630 31 - 33 } ao 33 - 33 34 SPARE 32 - 34 30 � 35 - 20/1 30 34 2 35 SPACE ONLY 34 36 } z 20/1 34 35 / 2 36 37 167.10 - L630 - 35 36 30 37 - 36 38 SPARE - 36 37 30 { 38 39 38 20/1 3o r 38 / 2 39 SPACE ONLY - 40 2 39 - 3 9 - 2 40 41 SPACE ONLY 20/1 ■ - 20/1 _ 41 20/1 - 42 SPACE ONLY 41 41 - 20/1 _ 42 PDU 145.16 PANEL "145.16/4" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES L.AD BREAKER 123 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER LEG AMPS POLE LEG AMPS POLE LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES NO. 3 POLES 1 2 3 POLES NO. 1 "1 143.18 -1630 - SPACE ONLY - 30 (' 1 2 144.12 - L630 - ! 2 30 2 3 166.06 - L520 2 0 / 1 - 3 21 3 - 4 4 1 3 - - 4 SPACE ONLY 4 5 144.02 -1630 20/ 4 5 30 ( 5 - 6 1 144.13 -1630 - - 30 6 7 166.08 - L520 20/1 6 7 217 - 8 8J 7 - s SPACE ONLY 8 9 144.03 - L630 20/1 - 9 30 9 - 10 10 144.14 - L630 - - 10 30 12 11 166.10 - 1520 20/1 io - SPACE ONLY 11 12} - 12 11 - - - SPACE ONLY 12 13 } 144.04 - L630 - 20/1 12 30 (' 13 - - 14 144.15 - L630 - - 15 30 r 14 15 15 - 20/1 2 15 SPACE ONLY 15 16 1 16 20/1 15 - - 16 17 l 144.05 -1630 16 - - 30 r 17 17 SPACE ONLY 18 144.16 - L630 - 20/1 - 30 18 19 -J SPACE ONLY 18 19 2 L 19 18 19 20 1 - - 20 20/1 19 20 21 144.06 -1630 SPACE ONLY - 21 30 j 21 20 21 22 144.17 - L630 - - 20/1 30 22 23 22 ` SPACE ONLY 22 - 2 L 23 22 23 24 23 2 - - 23 24 25 144.07 - L630 - 24 25 30 / 25 24 25 26 144.18 - L630 - 26 20/1 30 26 27 26 SPACE ONLY - 27 PlaillIM 27 26 27 28 27 - - 20/1 27 28 29 144.08 -1630 SPACE ONLY 28 - 30 29 28 29 30 145.05 - L630 31 - - 30 r 30 31 30 - 30 31 2 31 30 31 -1 32 - 33 32 20/1 31 t 33 } 144.09 -1630 SPACE ONLY - 33 30 r 33 32 33 34 145.06 - L630 - - 20/1 30 34 35 34 SPACE ONLY 34 _ z 20/1 34 35 36 35 142.11 - L630 - 20/1 35 36 37 } 144.11 - L630 - 36 37 30 37 36 37 38 145.07 -1630 - 38 20/1 3o r 38 39 38 SPACE ONLY - 39 2 39 38 3 9 40 39 - 40 20/1 ■ L 40 41 SPACE ONLY 20/1 - - 20/1 41 41 SPACE ONLY 42 SPACE ONLY - 20/1 - SPARE 42 PDU 164.01 PANEL "164.01/4" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123 POLE SERVES LOAD BREA KER' POLE N O. LEG AMPS POLE AMPS 1 LEG AM 1 2 3 POLES 1 1 NO. 1 2 3 P OLES 1 SPACE ONLY - 20/ 1 20/1 1 - ! 2 SPACE ONLY - 3 166.06 - L520 2 0 / 1 2 3 SPACE ONLY 3 - 4 20/1 3 - - 4 SPACE ONLY 4 - 166.07 - L520 20/ 4 5 SPACE ONLY 5 - 20/1 5 - s SPACE ONLY 6 7 166.08 - L520 20/1 6 7 SPACE ONLY - 8 20/1 7 - s SPACE ONLY - 9 166 - L520 20/1 8 9 SPACE ONLY s - 10 20/1 9 - - 10 SPACE ONLY io - 166.10 - 1520 20/1 io 11 SPACE ONLY 11 12} - 20/1 11 - - 12 SPACE ONLY 12 13 166.11 - L520 20/1 12 13 SPACE ONLY - - 14 20/1 13 - 15 14 SPACE ONLY - 15 166.12 - L520 20/1 14 15 SPACE ONLY 15 - 16 20/1 15 - - 16 SPACE ONLY 16 - 166.13 - L520 20/1 1e 17 SPACE ONLY 17 . - 20/1 17 19 - 18 SPACE ONLY 18 19 - 20/1 18 19 SPACE ONLY - 20 20/1 19 - - 20 SPACE ONLY - 21 167.02 - L520 20/1 20 21 SPACE ONLY 21 - 22 20/1 21 - - 22 ` SPACE ONLY 22 - 167.03 - L520 20/1 22 23 SPACE ONLY 23 2 - 20/1 23 25 ( 143.14 - L630 - 24 SPACE ONLY 24 25 - 20/1 24 25 SPACE ONLY - (" 26 26 20/1 25 - ; 26 SPACE ONLY - 27 SPARE 20/1 26 27 SPACE ONLY 27 - 28 20/1 27 - 30 , 28 SPACE ONLY 28 - SPARE 20/1 28 29 SPACE ONLY 29 31 - 20/1 29 2131 - ; 30 SPACE ONLY 30 31 - i 20/1 30 31 SPACE ONLY - 33 32 20/1 31 - 3[ 33 32 SPACE ONLY _ 33 SPARE . 20/1 32 33 SPACE ONLY 33 - 34 20/1 33 . L 35 34 SPACE ONLY 34 35 SPARE 20/1 34 35 SPACE ONLY 35 142.11 - L630 - 20/1 35 30 r 37 36 SPACE ONLY 36 37 - 20/1 36 37 SPACE ONLY - • 38 20/1 37 2 1 38 SPACE ONLY - 39 SPARE 20/1 38 3 9 SPACE ONLY 39 - 40 20/1 39 � 40 SPACE ONLY 20/1 - 41 20/1 40 41 SPACE ONLY 20/1 41 - 20/1 41 SPARE 42 SPACE ONLY 20/1 20/1 -` 20/1 42 PDU 164.01 PANEL '164.01/2" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225 A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 1 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS POLE AMPS 1 NO. 1 2 3 POL NO. 1 1 2 3 POLES 1 166.05 - L520 - 20/1 20/ 1 2 167.04 - L520 - ! 20/1 20/1 2 3 166.06 - L520 - - 20/1 2 0/1 3 ■ 4 4 167.05 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 4 5 166.07 - L520 - - 20/1 5 6 6 167.06 - L520 - - 20/1 6 7 166.08 - L520 - 20/1 20/1 7 8 8 167.07 - L520 - 20/1 20/1 8 9 166 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 s . 10 10 167.08 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 io 11 166.10 - 1520 - - - 20/1 11 12} 12 12 167.09 - L520 - - - 20/1 12 13 166.11 - L520 - 30 20/1 20/1 13 - 14 14 167.10 - L520 - 15 20/1 20/1 14 15 166.12 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 15 16 16 167.11 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 16 17 166.13 - L520 30 - - 20/1 17 . 18 18 167.12 - L520 19 - - 20/1 18 19 167.01 - L520 - 20/1 20/1 19 20 20 167.13 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 20 21 167.02 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 21 , _ 22 22 167.14 - L520 - - 20/1 20/1 22 23 167.03 - L520 24 - - 20/1 23 2 24 24 167.15 - L520 25 ( 143.14 - L630 - - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - - 20/1 20/1 25 (" 26 26 26 167.16 - L520 - ; 20/1 20/1 26 27 SPARE - - 20/1 20/1 27 L 28 28 28 167.17 - L520 - 30 , 20/1 20/1 28 29 SPARE - - 20/1 29 31 30 30 SPARE 2131 - ; - 20/1 30 31 SPARE - 20/1 20/1 31 33 32 32 SPARE - 3[ 33 20/1 20/1 32 33 SPARE - - 20/1 20/1 33 35 34 34 SPARE - L 35 20/1 20/1 34 35 SPARE - - - 20/1 35 142.11 - L630 36 36 SPARE 30 r 37 - 20/1 36 37 SPARE - 30 2 20/1 20/1 37 • 38 38 SPARE 2 1 20/1 20/1 38 39 SPARE - - 20/1 20/1 39 • . 40 40 SPARE - - 20/1 20/1 40 41 SPARE - - 20/1 41 . 42 SPARE 20/1 20/1 42 PDU 164.01 PANEL "164.01/1" SCHEDULE FED', FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND -GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL -WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 1 POLE SERVES LOAD' BREAKER E. POLE NO LEG AMPS LEG r AMPS POLE AMPS 1 NO. 1 2 3 POLES NO. 1 1 2 3 1 164.04 - L520 - - 20/1 1 2 165.04 - L520 - - ! 20/1 2 3 164.05 - L520 - _ 20/1 3 t 3 ■ 4 165.05 - L520 - - 20/1 4 5 164.06 - L520 144.13 - 1630 - 20/1 5 6 165.06 - L520 143.09 - 1630 - 20/1 6 7 164.07 - L520 - 20/1 7 • 8 165.07 - L520 - - 20/1 8 9 164.08 - L520 - - 30 20/1 9 10 10 165.08 - L520 - - 330 20/1 to 11 164.11 - L520 - - 20/1 11 12} 12 165.10 - L520 - - 20/1 12 13 164.12 - L520 - " 13 30 20/1 13 142.15 - 1630 - 14 165.11 - L520 - 14 15 20/1 14 15 164.13 - L520 2 - 15 20/1 15 16 16 165.12 - L520 - 17 1 142.06 - 1630 20/1 16 17 164.14 - L520 " 17 30 - 20/1 17 18 1 . 18 165.13 - L520 18 19 - 20/1 18 19 165.01 - L520 - 20/1 19 - 20 165.14 - L520 - 21 1 142.07 - L630 - 20/1 20 21 165.02 - L520 - 22 20/1 21 - 144.06 - 1630 22 166.03 - L520 23 - (' ` 22 24 20/1 22 23 165.03 - L520 2 24 - 20/1 23 - 2 24 166:04 - L520 - 25 ( 143.14 - L630 - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - 142.18 - L630 - 20/1 25 30 (" 26 26 SPARE - ; 20/1 26 27 SPARE 28 - 20/1 27 3 , 0 „.. *: , - L 28 28 SPARE - 30 , 20/1 28 29 SPARE 143.05 - L630 - 20/1 29 30 31 30 SPARE 2131 - ; 20/1 30 31 SPARE - - 20/1 31 32 33 32 SPARE - 3 ..... 0 ,,,,..„. „...-- - " 3[ 33 20/1 32 33 SPARE 143.06 - 1630 - - 20/1 33 { 34 36 35 34 SPARE - - L 35 20/1 34 35 SPARE - - 20/1 35 37 1 142.11 - L630 36 SPARE 30 30 r 37 20/1 36 37 SPARE - 30 2 20/1 37 39 • 38 SPARE - 2 1 20/1 38 39 SPARE - - SPACE ONLY 20/1 39 41 SPACE ONLY 40 SPARE - - I 20/1 40 41 SPARE - 20/1 41 42 SPARE 20/1 42 PDU 145.16 PANEL "145.16/1" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 12 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER LEG AMPS AMPS 3, LEG POLE AMPS 1 2 3 POLES 3 POLES NO. 1 2 2 3 NO. 1 142.02 - L630 - 30 30 / - 1 2 - 142.12 - L630 - ! 3 POLES 30 2 3 _ 1_ t 3 ■ 2 ) 4 - 2 t 4 ? 5 1 142.03 - L630 144.13 - 1630 - 30 " 5 s 142.13 - L630 143.09 - 1630 - 330 6 7 - �_ 7 • 8 J s _ - � 8 9 1 142.04 - L630 143.10 - 1630 - - 30 - 9 (9 10 142.14 - L630 144.03 - L630 - - 330 j' 10 L 11 11 - �_11 2 L 11 12} 12 1 - 13 142.05 - 1630 - 13 � 144.15 -1630 143.11 - 1630 30 " 13 30 3o 14 1 142.15 - 1630 - 14 144.04 - L630 30 14 15 30 (' 14 - 2 15 15 2 16 J 16 16 1 16 17 1 142.06 - 1630 2 L 16 - 30 " 17 30 - 18 1 142.16 - 1630 18 1 143.12 - L630 - 30 18 19 - 30 r 18 1 20 19 2.19 - 20 J 19 - 20 1 21 20 21 1 142.07 - L630 - - 21 ] 143.13 - L630 30 - 21 3 j - 22 142.17 - L630 - 144.06 - 1630 30 22 23 ao (' ` 22 24 - 2 - 23 - 2 24 24 - 2 24 25 1 142.08 - L630 - 25 ( 143.14 - L630 30 " 25 30 25 26 142.18 - L630 - - 30 (" 26 27 27 - ®- 27 28 - 3 , 0 „.. *: , - L 28 29 1 142.09 - L630 - 30 , " 29 30 143.05 - L630 - 30 30 31 - - 2131 2 _ 31 32 32 1 - 21...32 . 32 33 142.10 - L630 - - 3 ..... 0 ,,,,..„. „...-- - " 3[ 33 34 34 l 143.06 - 1630 - - 30 3 { 34 36 35 - 2 L 35 35 36 J 36 5 36 f - 2 30 2 �{ L 36 38 40 42 37 1 142.11 - L630 - 30 30 r 37 38 38 143.07 - L630 - 30 2 30 r 38 39 - - - { 39 2 L 39 40 J 40 J 42 40 } - - 41 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY L 40 41 SPACE ONLY 41 - 42 41 42 SPACE ONLY - 42 PDU 145.16 PANEL "145.16/2" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS2BDP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 1 POLE SERVES LOAD ' BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG i AMPS POLES NO. 1 2 3 POLES - . 1 2 3 3 143.08 - L630 144.12 - L630 - 30 1 r 1 143.18 - L630 - ; ! 30 r J f t 3 ■ 2 ) 4 } 2 t 4 ? 143.09 - 1630 144.13 - 1630 - 30 r 5 144.02 - 1630 143.09 - 1630 - ,� 30 r 6 2 24_ • 8 s - 2 2 9 143.10 - 1630 - 30 (9 10 "1 144.03 - L630 - 30 10 11 - 2 L 11 12 1 - 21 12 13 � 144.15 -1630 143.11 - 1630 30 3o r 13 14 1 14 144.04 - L630 - 3 30 (' 14 15 - 15 2 15 16 16 1 2 30 / r 21 20 � 16 18 2 L 16 17 143.12 - 1630 - 30 - 30 f 17 18 1 143.12 - L630 - 18 144.05 L630 - 19 - 30 r 18 1 20 19 2 - 2 19 - 20 1 21 - - 2 21 ] 143.13 - L630 21 { - 3 j - 21 - 22 144.06 - 1630 22 - ao (' ` 22 24 23 23 - 2 23 24 - 2 L 24 25 "� 144.18 - 1630 2 25 ( 143.14 - L630 3o r 25 30 25 26 143.14 - L630 26 l 144.07 - L630 - 30 ( 26 L 28 26 27 - 2 27 28 - 3 , 0 „.. *: , - 29 29 '1 143 - L630 - 3o r 29 30 144.08 - L630 - 30 _28 30 31J - - 2131 2 31 32 32 } - 21...32 33 l 33 143.16 -1630 - - 30 3 ..... 0 ,,,,..„. „...-- - " f 33 34 34 l 144.09 - L630 - - 30 30 ( 34 35 - 2 L 35 36 J 36 5 - 2 30 2 �{ L 36 38 40 42 37 143.17 - L630 - 30 37 38 38 144.11 - L630 - 30 2 39 39 - - :>..„....- { 39 _ 39 41 40 J 40 J 42 SPACE ONLY - - 41 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY - 41 • 42 SPACE ONLY PDU 145.16 PANEL 145:16/3" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 2B DP2B SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123 POL SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS LEG AMPS NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 2 3 POLES 1 144.12 - L630 - 30 r 1 2 143.08 - L630 - 30 2 t 3 4 } 2 { 2 144.13 - 1630 - 30 143.09 - 1630 - 30 24_ 7 s - 2 s 9 1 144.14 - 1630 - 30 9 10 143.10 - L630 - 3io 11 - 2 11 12 1 2 12 13 � 144.15 -1630 - 30 f 13 14 1 143.11 -1630 - 3 14 15 2 15 16 2 30 / r 21 20 � 16 18 17 144.16'- 1630 - 30 (" 17 18 1 143.12 - L630 - 19 2 19 20J - 21 144.17 - L630 - 30 21 { 22 143.13 - 1630 30 22 23 - 23 24 } - 2 L 24 25 "� 144.18 - 1630 - 3o r 25 26 143.14 - L630 - 30 ( 26 L 28 27 J 2 L 27 28 2 29 145.05 - L630 - 30 29 30 143.15 - L630 - 30 2 132 r 3 31 - 2 31 32 } - 33 l 145.06 - 1630 - 30 f 33 34 143.16 - 1630 - 30 34 35 J 2 35 36 J - 2 36 37 145.07 - L630 - 30 37 38 143.17 - L630 - 30 2 r 38 t 40 42 39 - - . 2 _ 39 41 40 J 42 SPACE ONLY - - 41 SPACE ONLY GENERAL NOTES: 1, PANEL SCHEDULES INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINIGS ARE PROVIDED WITH PDU BY PDU MANUFACTURER WITHOUT THE SPECIFIED BRANCH BREAKERS, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL BRANCH BREAKERS INDICATED HEREIN. 2. FOR EACH L520 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1 - #10 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L5 -20R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 3. FOR EACH L630 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1- #10 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L6 -30R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 4. FOR EACH CIRCUIT, PROVIDE LABELS TO IDENTIFY. RACK NUMBER AND CIRCUIT NUMBER AT BOTH ENDS OF CIRCUIT CONDUIT. ALSO, PROVIDE LABEL ON OUTLET COVERPLATE TO IDENTIFY CIRCUIT NUMBER AND PDU PANEL. boc1% SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA I- Lb 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 tv 3 • Expires E -15 Sheet No. Revision V"�UP - Z Z. 0? Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCIVI, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 01 -15 -09 100% CD 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES PDU 166.01 PANEL "166.01/4 SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 1A UPP1 SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. O. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. A D UGS ONLY AS S MAIN INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER AMPS POLE NO. 1 2 3 V POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS BPPB1 LEG AMPS 1 2 3 POLES POLES NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 SPACE ONLY - - CRPPBI 20/1 1 2 SPACE ONLY - - 20/1 2 3 SPACE ONLY 164.05 - L520 - - 20/1 3 3 MCCA 4 SPACE ONLY 165.05 - L520 - - 20/1 4 5 SPACE ONLY 164.06 - L520 - 20/1 s 5 6 SPACE ONLY 165.06 - L520 CHILLER #2 - 20/1 6 6 SPACE ONLY - - 20/1 7 7 UPS #1 E s SPACE ONLY - - 4 20/1 8 9 SPACE ONLY 164.08 - L520 - - 20/1 s 9 . 10 SPACE ONLY 165.08 - L520 - - 20/1 to 11 SPACE ONLY 164.11 - L520 - 20/1 11 11 12 SPACE ONLY 165.10 - L520 - 20/1 12 13 SPACE ONLY - - 30 20/1 13 13 14 14 SPACE ONLY - - 30 20/1 14 15 SPACE ONLY 164.13 - L520 - - 20/1 15 15 16 16 SPACE ONLY 165.12 - L520 - - 20/1 16 17 SPACE ONLY 164.14 - L520 - = 20/1 17 17 18 18 SPACE ONLY 165.13 - L520 - - 20/1 18 19 SPACE ONLY - - 2 20/1 19 19 20 1 20 SPACE ONLY - - 2 20/1 20 21 SPACE ONLY 165.02 - L520 - 20/1 21 21 22 22 SPACE ONLY 166.03 - L520 - - 20/1 22 23 SPACE ONLY 165.03 - L520 - - 20/1 23 23 24 } 24 SPACE ONLY 166.04 - L520 - 20/1 24 25 SPACE ONLY ° - - 20/1 25 25 26 26 SPACE ONLY - - 30 20/1 26 27 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 27 27 28 28 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 28 29 SPACE ONLY SPARE - 20/1 29 29 . 30 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 30 31 SPACE ONLY - - 2 20/1 31 31 32 32 SPACE ONLY - - / 2 3 ...„ 0 „,... „,„/1_ 20/1 32 33 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 33 33 . 34 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 34 35 SPACE ONLY SPARE � . - 20/1 35 35 _ 36 SPACE ONLY SPARE 167.10 - L630 - 20/1 36 37 SPACE ONLY - - 38 20/1 37 37 38 SPACE ONLY - - 20/1 38 39 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 39 39 ^ 40 40 SPACE ONLY SPARE - - 20/1 40 41 SPACE ONLY PDU 164 LANTRONIX SPACE ONLY - 20/1 41 41 _ 42 42 SPACE ONLY SPARE - 20/1 42 PDU 166.01 PANEL "166.01/1" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 1A UPP1 SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN D UGS ONLY AS S N INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123./ POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS BPPB1 3- LEG AMPS 1 2 3 POLES NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 164.04 - L520 - CRPPBI 20/1 1 2 165.04 - L520 - 6 20/1 2 3 164.05 - L520 - 207.84 20/1 3 MCCA - 4 165.05 - L520 - MCCB 20/1 4 5 164.06 - L520 - 20/1 5 6 165.06 - L520 CHILLER #2 - 20/1 6 7 164.07 - L520 - 298.8 20/1 7 UPS #1 E • 8 165.07 - L520 - 4 UPS#2B 20/1 8 9 164.08 - L520 - ; 11 20/1 9 . 4 10 165.08 - L520 TOTAL KVA © 480V, 30 - TOTAL KW (GEN) @ :9 P.F. 20/1 10 11 164.11 - L520 - 20/1 11 . 12 165.10 - L520 - 20/1 12 13 164.12 - L520 - 30 r 13 20/1 13 14 167.14 -1630 14 165.11 - L520 - 30 14 20/1 14 15 164.13 - L520 - 15 20/1 15 16 16 165.12 - L520 - 16 20/1 16 17 164.14 - L520 - 30 - 20/1 17 18 167.15 - L630 18 165.13 - L520 - 30 - 20/1 18 19 165.01 - L520 - 2 1 19 20/1 19 20 1 4 20 165.14 - L520 - 2 20 20/1 20 21 165.02 - L520 - 21 20/1 21 22 167.04 - L630 22 166.03 - L520 - 22 20/1 22 23 165.03 - L520 - 2 - 20/1 23 24 } 24 166.04 - L520 / L - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - 25 20/1 25 26 167.05 - 1630 26 SPARE - 30 26 20/1 26 27 SPARE - 27 20/1 27 28 28 SPARE - 28 20/1 28 29 SPARE 3 ..... 0 ,,,.... ,....- - "1 - - 20/1 29 30 1 167.06 - L630 30 SPARE - 30 - 20/1 30 31 SPARE - 2 20/1 31 32 32 SPARE - / 2 3 ...„ 0 „,... „,„/1_ ^ 32 34 20/1 32 33 SPARE - 33 20/1 33 . SPARE 34 SPARE 35} - 20/1 34 35 SPARE � . - 20/1 35 _ - 36 SPARE 167.10 - L630 - - 20/1 36 37 SPARE - 38 SPARE 20/1 37 39 38 SPARE - L 20/1 38 39 SPARE - - 20/1 39 ^ 40 41 40 SPARE - 20/1 20/1 40 41 PDU 164 LANTRONIX SPACE ONLY - 20/1 41 _ 42 42 SPARE - 20/1 42 PDU 166.01 PANEL "166.01 /3" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS 1A UPP1 SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND - GREEN PANEL MAY BE TOP OR GROUNDED BOTTOM FEED AT NEUTRAL - WHITE CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN D UGS ONLY AS S N INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 12 POLE SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS BPPB1 3- LEG AMPS 1 2 3 POLES NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 167.01 - L630 - CRPPBI 30 r 2 167.11 - L630 - 6 30 [ 2 3 i 166.06 - L520 - 207.84 2 3 MCCA 1 167.05 - L520 - MCCB 2 4 5 167 - 1630 - 30 f 5 6 167.12 - L630 CHILLER #2 - 30 6 7 166.08 - L520 - 298.8 2 UPS #1 E • 6 J 167.07 - L520 - 4 UPS#2B 2 { s 9 167.03 - L630 - ; 11 30 r 9 1456.2 4 10 167.13 - 1630 TOTAL KVA © 480V, 30 - TOTAL KW (GEN) @ :9 P.F. 30 2 112 r 10 11 166.10 - L520 - 2 [ 11 12 167.09 - L520 - 131 167.04 - L630 - 166.11 - L520 - 30 r 13 20/1 14 167.14 -1630 - 167.10 - L520 - 30 14 15 14 15 166.12 - L520 2 15 20/1 16 16 167.11 - L520 2 16 17 1 167.05 - L630 17 166.13 - L520 - 30 J 17 20/1 18 167.15 - L630 18 167.12 - L520 - 30 18 19 J 18 19 167.01 - L520 - 2 1 19 20/1 20 1 - 167.13 - L520 - 2 20 21 1 167.06 - L630 21 - 30 21 20/1 22 167.04 - L630 22 167.14 - L520 30 22 23 22 23 167.03 - L520 - 2 L 23 20/1 24 } 2 167.15 - L520 / L 24 25 167.07 - L630 - SPARE - 25 20/1 26 167.05 - 1630 26 167.16 - L520 - 30 26 27 26 27 - :>.....- 27 20/1 28 28 - 2 , , 28 29 1 167.08 - L630 29 SPARE 3 ..... 0 ,,,.... ,....- - "1 - 29 • 30 1 167.06 - L630 30 SPARE - 30 30 31 30 - SPARE - 2 20/1 32 - SPARE - / 2 3 ...„ 0 „,... „,„/1_ ^ 32 34 33 167.09 - L630 33 - 30 33 20/1 34 SPARE 34 - 35} - 20/1 - 2 SPARE � . 36} 20/1 _ - 2 36 30 { 38 37 167.10 - L630 - - 20/1 3( 37 { SPARE - 38 SPARE - 39 38 SPARE - L 39 38 39 40 - - 20/1 2 ,. ^ 40 41 SPACE ONLY SPARE - 20/1 41 40 41 42 SPACE ONLY - - 20/1 _ 42 PDU 166.01 PANEL "166.01/2" SCHEDULE FED FROM UPS IA UPPI SERVICE: 120/208V., 30, 4W. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE LOAD M. L. 0. BUS RATING A. MINIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER LEG 1 - BLACK 10 KVA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY LEG 2 - RED 10 KVA SEPARATE GROUNDING 10,000 A. LEG 3 - BLUE 10 KVA BAR 35% GROUND -GREEN GROUNDED PANEL MAY BE TOP OR NEUTRAL - WHITE BOTTOM FEED AT CONTRACTORS OPTION - MAIN BREAKER OR MAIN BREAKER RATING 225A. MAIN LUGS ONLY AS INDICATED POLE NO. SERVES LOAD BREAKER POLE NO. 123- POLE SERVES LOAD . I BREAKER POLE NO. LEG AMPS BPPB1 . LEG ' AMPS 1 2 3 POLES NO. 1 2 3 POLES 1 166.05 - L520 - CRPPBI 20/1 416.24 2 167.04 - L520 - 6 20/1 2 3 166.06 - L520 - 207.84 20/1 MCCA 4 167.05 - L520 - MCCB 20/1 4 5 166.07 - L520 - 20/1 6 167.06 - L520 CHILLER #2 - 20/1 6 7 166.08 - L520 - 298.8 20/1 UPS #1 E 11 8 167.07 - L520 - 4 UPS#2B 20/1 8 9 166.09 - L520 - ; 11 20/1 1754.63 1456.2 4 10 167.08 - L520 TOTAL KVA © 480V, 30 - TOTAL KW (GEN) @ :9 P.F. 20/1 10 11 166.10 - L520 - 20/1 12 167.09 - L520 - 20/1 12 13 166.11 - L520 - 20/1 14 167.10 - L520 - 20/1 14 15 166.12 - L520 - 20/1 _ 16 167.11 - L520 - 20/1 1 17 166.13 - L520 - 20/1 18 167.12 - L520 - 20/1 18 19 167.01 - L520 - 20/1 20 167.13 - L520 - ; 20/1 20 21 167.02 - L520 - 20/1 22 167.14 - L520 - 20/1 22 23 167.03 - L520 - 20/1 2 167.15 - L520 - 20/1 24 25 SPARE - 20/1 26 167.16 - L520 - 20/1 26 27 SPARE - 20/1 . 28 167.17 - L520 - 20/1 28 29 SPARE - 20/1 30 SPARE - 20/1 30 31 SPARE - 20/1 3 2 SPARE - 20/1 32 33 SPARE - 20/1 • 34 SPARE - 20/1 34 35 SPARE - 20/1 _ 36 SPARE - 20/1 36 37 SPARE - 20/1 38 SPARE - 20/1 38 39 SPARE - 20/1 _ 40 SPARE - 20/1 40 41 SPARE - 20/1 42 SPARE - 20/1 42 LOAD SUMMARY CALCULATIONS PANEL/DEVICE FIGHTING LOAD RECEPTACLE LOAD MOTOR LOAD CONTINUOUS LOAD NON- CONTINUOU LOAD BPPA1 136.1 BPPA2 136.1 BPPB1 136.1 BPPB2 136.1 CRPPAI 416.24 CRPPBI 416.24 DSA1 6 233.8 46.1 DSB1 15 207.84 MCCA 69.08 MCCB 112.63 CHILLER #1 298.8 CHILLER #2 298.8 I CHILLER#3 i 298.8 UPS #1 E 11 8 96 4 UPS#2B 172.8 TOTAL J ; 11 29 1754.63 1456.2 4 TOTAL KVA © 480V, 30 3254.83 TOTAL KW (GEN) @ :9 P.F. 2930 GENERAL NOTES: 1. PANEL SCHEDULES INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINIGS ARE PROVIDED WITH PDU BY PDU MANUFACTURER WITHOUT THE SPECIFIED BRANCH BREAKERS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL BRANCH BREAKERS INDICATED HEREIN. 2. FOR EACH L520 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1 - #10 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L5 -20R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 3. FOR EACH L630 CIRCUIT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 2- #10'S, 1- #10 GND. IN 3/4" "SEAL -TITE" FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM PDU TO OUTLET MOUNTED BENEATH THE DESIGNATED RACK. OUTLET SHALL BE NEMA L6 -30R RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN OUTLET BOX. DO NOT ANCHOR BOX TO CONCRETE FLOOR. 4. FOR EACH CIRCUIT, PROVIDE LABELS TO IDENTIFY. RACK NUMBER AND CIRCUIT NUMBER AT BOTH ENDS OF CIRCUIT CONDUIT. ALSO, PROVIDE LABEL ON OUTLET COVERPLATE TO IDENTIFY CIRCUIT NUMBER AND PDU PANEL. bO9 SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 '/_009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT ©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 It 3 Lc. ro475 (iires4 cif) isz) Fac. CodeTYKWWAI Drawn By: IM 'S, ZJ g By: ,CM, DL ZJ Designed B Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 12 -08 Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E -16 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES 4 1 41 L. a • 4 4 4. 4 HAND RUB EXPOSED CONCRETE NO SCALE CONNECT FLOOR STAND TO EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID USING H -TAP CRIMP CONNECTOR -1 s -47 1.1" • 4 4 4, . 4 #6 BARE COPPER GROUND, REFER TO GROUNDING PLAN 3/4" CHAMFER 4 . 4 4 4 4 4 • O i. ° a 4 4 A 4 4 L + 12 " 4 4 d • NO SCALE GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL ANCHORING BOLTS SHALL BE EMBEDDED A MINIMUM OF 2" DEEP IN THE CONCRETE SLAB. REFER TO DETAIL 8B. 4 9 4 6.25" VENTILATING AIR OPENING, DO NOT BLOCK 4 4' 4 4 4 44 V 4 4 4 4 4 #4 BARS @ 6" O.C., BOTH WAYS TOP AND BOTTOM 4 .4 4 FLOOR StB CHIP TO EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASE DETAILS PDU MOUNTING DETAIL NO SCALE OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT (W X L) 39.25" 26.75" PAINT ALL VERTICAL SIDES OF PAD SAFETY YELLOW NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF UPS ANCHORING LAYOUT 1. NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: REFER TO DETAIL 8C, THIS SHEET FOR UPS FRAMING ANCHORING. 2. REFER TO DETAIL 8A, THIS SHEET FOR SEISMIC BRACKET ANCHORING FOR EPS7000. 3. SIDE PANEL ANCHORING REQUIRES ONLY ONE TYPE A BOLT (.531 0). FRONT OF SIDE CAR ATTACHED TO PDU MAIN CABINET FRONT OF PDU MAIN CABINET SECURE PDU MAIN CABINET TO FLOOR STAND USING HARDWARE PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER ADJUST LEG TO PROVIDE STAND HEIGHT OF 24" TO MATCH EXISTING RAISED FLOOR SECURE FLOOR STAND TO CONCRETE FLOOR USING 1/4" DIA. ANCHOR BOLTS (4 PER LEG) NOTES: 1. L IS THE OVERALL LENGTH OF THE EQUIPMENT. 2. W IS THE OVERALL WIDTH OF THE EQUIPMENT. 3. CONCRETE SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 3,000 PSI X28 DAYS. 4. HORIZONTAL SURFACES SHALL BE TAMPED AND SCREEDED TO A TRUE SURFACE (TAKING CARE TO FILL ALL LOW SPOTS) AND STEEL TROWELED TO A HARD SLATE -LIKE SURFACE. THE PAD SHALL NOT BE MARKED OFF IN AREAS OR SCORED, BUT SHALL BE LEFT IN ONE PLAIN SURFACE. 5. ALL VERTICAL SURFACES SHALL HAVE A RUBBED FINISH. 6. ALL EXPOSED EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 1 ". 7. WHERE ONE EDGE OF PAD IS LOCATED ADJACENT TO A WALL OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION, PROVIDE 1" THICK PRE MOLDED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER BETWEEN THE PAD AND THE ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION AND DO NOT CHAMFER THE EDGE ADJACENT TO THE EXPANSION JOINT FILLER. 8. ALL REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE COVERED WITH NOT LESS THAN 1 -1/2 INCHES OF CONCRETE. THIS DETAIL IS TYPICAL FOR MISCELLANEOUS 9. FLOOR- SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT FOR WHICH NO SPECIFIC DETAIL IS PROVIDED. CONCRETE FOR PADS SHALL BE LIGHTWEIGHT 10. CONCRETE WITH A MINIMUM OF 5.5 SACKS OF CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD. WATER TO CEMENT RATIO SHALL NOT EXCEED 8 GALLONS OF WATER PER SACK. 11. SLUMP OF CONCRETE SHALL NOT EXCEED 3. NO SCALE b CONDUIT SUPPORT PDU FEEDER CIRCUIT FROM DISTRIBUTION PANEL. LABEL CONDUIT OR J -BOX WITH CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION - --) 5 CONCRETE SLAB METALLIC CONDUIT OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM NO SCALE .75 °(TYP. E.W.) TERMINAL BLOCK TWO -HOLE MECH. LUG 0.4375 HOLE (4 PLACES) OPENING FOR RAISED FLOOR FLOOR STAND 10' POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY BY PDI. THRU WALL DETAIL BOLT TYPE "B" - .62T0 #6 BARE COPPER GROUND TO INDICATED RAISED FLOOR GROUND BAR PDU'S J -BOX AND TRANSIENT SUPPRESION PLATE DETAIL NO SCALE 6" MAX. INSIDL;. NEVV EQUIPMENT ROOM CONDUIT PENETRATION DETAIL - OVERHEAD SEISMIC BRACKET FOR EPS 7000 FROM MGE 1/2 -13 GRADE 5 (2) BRACKET SEISMIC BRACKET ANCHORING DETAIL 36' 3/8'0 GND. STUD ON INTERIOR PLATE. USE SUITABLE PRESSURE TERMINAL PER N.E.C. METALLIC CONDUIT . a PLASTIC ISOLATING CONDUIT SUPPORT COUPLING PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND SLEEVE #6 BARE COPPER GROUND TO EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID 1 SECURE PLATE TO EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR USING (4) 7/16" DIA. ANCHOR BOLTS TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE MOUNT INPUT J -BOX ON TRANSIENT SUPP. PLATE OUT3ID NEwE(UIPIVM NOO iI PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN PIPE AND WALL EX. MECHANICAL PIPE -.. b M ECHANICAL PIPE PENETRATION DETAIL - GROUNDING NO SCALE NOTE: DETAIL APPLIES TO PRE- ACTION SPRINKLER PIPING. 1/2" DIAMETER HILTI HD I ANCHORS OF 2" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT UPS FRAME OR BRACKET NO SCALE EXTEND CABLE AND TERMINATE AT PDU INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER PIPE THRU WALL DETAIL CONDUIT I!` NEVV PMEN r Rz)C)N PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN PIPE AND WALL REFER TO DETAIL 7, THIS SHEET 0 0 O BOLT ANCHORING DETAIL 6" MAX. d RAISED FLOOR OUP3IDE NEVV EQ(JII"'IJ ENT ROOM PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND SLEEVE CONDUIT CLAMP MOUNTED TO FLOOR CONCRETE FLOOR PIPE GROUND CLAMP A.L.T. NO. 900 SERIES, CLASS II BOLT TYPE CONNECTOR WITH 2 -HOLE GROUND LUG, AS MANUFACTURED BY ADVANCED LIGHTNING TECHNOLOGIES, INC. PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN CONDUCTOR AND SLEEVE THRU WALL AT FLOOR DETAIL CONDUIT PENETRATION DETAILS -BELOW RAISED FLOOR NO SCALE PLAN VIEW BOLT TYPE "A" - .5310 b o c f o l5 RAISED FLOOR PIPE GROUND CLAMP NO SCALE NOTE: PROVIDE GROUND CLAMP ON PIPES NOT EQUIPPED WITH PLASTIC ISOLATION COUPLING, EXTENDING THROUGH NEW SECURE WALL. LOCATE GROUND CLAMP ON SECURE SIDE OF WALL. CONCRETE SLAB CONDUIT GROUND LEAD TO PIPE CLAMP BY UTILIZING 2 -HOLE LUG WITH COMPRESSION (CRIMP) CONNECTION SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED VERIFY SIZE OF PIPE AT JOB SITE PRIOR TO ORDERING THE GROUND CLAMP WHERE GROUND CLAMP IS INSTALLED, REMOVE PAINT OR PROTECTIVE COATING OF PIPE WITH WIRE BRUSH TO EXPOSE BARE METAL. APPLY THIN COAT OF ELECTRICAL JOINT COMPOUND, ALCOA NO. 2 EXTEND #6 GROUND CONDUCTOR TO BUILDING STEEL UPS FRAME ANCHORING DETAIL NO SCALE CONDUIT CLAMP MOUNTED TO FLOOR END VIEW RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 "1.009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS \ L ic. 12559 1 Expires 9'21--(1( Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL Z Proj. Mgr.: KCM 2 3 4 3 olpt% o W� � Z w"m IIF� ce PO W o �Wo J W� >j10 W -1 ZInN 0Qal -e- co ( i) c) ,‘zzc z `` rczc .4zc V N (.0 e 4*114 Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 01 -15 -09 100% CD 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E -17 ELECTRICAL DETAILS Jr IL __U 0 i 0 VES 7 - : 7_ r 7 7 _ - N is ';;) i'1 is) GENERAL NOTES: 1. REFER TO FIRE PROTECTION SHEETS FP -1 AND FP -2 FOR LOCATION OF FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING PENETRATIONS. WHERE PIPE PENETRATES NEW SECURED WALL, INSTALL #6 GROUND TO PIPE FROM BUILDING STEEL. 2. REFER TO FIRE PROTECTION SHEETS FP -1 AND FP -2 FOR LOCATION OF VESDA PIPING PENETRATIONS. WHERE PIPE PENETRATES NEW SECURED WALL, INSTALL #6 GROUND TO PIPE FROM BUILDING STEEL. - :T EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. P. 0 II flfilvllht. VA.:WIEN MTH T 0 - - •T -- P. 0 _ I ) RE C4kTE RF B =1 P. i 11 .2.112.7.:M:111r= =.11" ._1r'_ _u= 711:= cz 4' flb I 0 P. 3. EXISTING 2/0 BARE STRANDED COPPER INTERIOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR BELOW RAISED FLOOR ON CONCRETE, SHALL BE RE- ROUTED TO POINT INDICATED. 0 O - 5. EXISTING 2/0 BARE PERIMETER GROUNDING CONDUCTOR BELOW RAISED FLOOR ON CONCRETE, SHALL REMAIN. cz FIRE' 'I�I�IiP SCALE: 1/8" = 1' -0" NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O : 1. ALL CONDUCTORS INDICATED WITH HATCHING SHALL BE REMOVED TO POINT INDICATED. 2. EXISTING #4 BARE INTERIOR GROUNDING CONDUCTORS BELOW RAISED FLOOR ON CONCRETE, SHALL REMAIN. 4. INSTALL 2/0 BARE INTERIOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TO 2/0 BARE PERIMETER GROUND RING WITH H -TAP CONNECTION. REFER TO DETAIL 2, SHEET E -20. 6. INSTALL 2/0 BARE PERIMETER GROUNDING CONDUCTOR BELOW RAISED FLOOR ON CONCRETE. CONNECT NEW CONDUCTOR TO EXISTING 2/0 BARE PERIMETER GROUNDING. REFER TO DETAIL 2, SHEET E -20. 7. PROVIDE CONDUIT SLEEVE WITH PLASTIC ISOLATION COUPLER AT WALL PENETRATION. 8. RE- LOCATE EXISTING RFGB AND ALL GROUND CONDUCTORS TO OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM AS INDICATED AND PROVIDE SIGN ABOVE FLOOR AND OVERHEAD TO IDENTIFY LOCATION OF THIS GROUND BAR. SIGN SHALL READ "RAISED FLOOR GND. BAR -1 BELOW'. O -_ r. ".G'QUII MEW ...._ RC OPT! _._. NEW PDU 160 KW 144.02 144.03 144.04 144.05:.144.03 144.0 143 .05, 143.00 .143.0' 194.08 144.09 144.10 144.11 143.08 143.08 143.10 3,11 .12 144.13 . 144 14 144.16 144.16 43.12 143.13 143.14 143.16 143,16 142! 4203 14204 142 05 4206 142.0 1408 142.00 142.10 142.1 42.12 14293 14214 142.15 0 0 O Rem y° 1 ; 0 A ,thik . r AA r r I , P � ' I POU _ .._.. � -. .. .__.. 160 KVA � - 911WW NEVI c,IAI„l 1 144.1 43.17 NIuNu 0 144.18 143.13 1 dro 0111111111111111111 'G 108 W(' 100.07 0 1 m 0 165.01 - .18572. .465.03. 16544 NEW PDU 150 KVA . 155.03 .. 55.10 ._166.11 ..155.12 ■ 154.12 _155.07. 185.08. .. �: ✓'�.. _ u _ ... �. 164.04 164.7+ 154. '! 164.07 15400 01 r 0 4II 0 0 0 0 0 0 04.0 0 _._ - 411tpaammmpo 0L - 0 0, IP _ U oir 20 1E11 "±:i-Argim , __ 0 1 TY 11MI' TO MSGB ro 00 145.5 140.06 145. STIRIC K MI XI TING RFG FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A U18E1 - T 6 0 / NEW RFGI 2 14216 "0, 0 42.1 14218 9. INSTALL NEW 48" RAISED FLOOR GROUND BAR FOR NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM. PROVIDE SIGN ABOVE FLOOR AND OVERHEAD TO IDENTIFY LOCATION OF THIS GROUND BAR. SIGN SHALL READ "RAISED FLOOR GND. BAR -2 BELOW'. 10. INSTALL NEW AREA GROUND BAR AT LOCATION INDICATED (9' -6" A.F.F.). PROVIDE SIGN ABOVE FLOOR AND OVERHEAD TO IDENTIFY LOCATION OF THIS GROUND BAR. SIGN SHALL READ "AREA FLOOR GND. BAR -2 BELOW'. 11. INSTALL #750 MCM INSULATED GROUND EQUALIZER CONDUCTOR FROM NEW RFGB -2 TO RE- LOCATED RFGB -1. 12. INSTALL #750 MCM INSULATED GROUND EQUALIZER CONDUCTOR FROM RE- LOCATED RFGB -1 TO EXISTING MSGB LOCATED IN ELECTRICAL ROOM. 13. WHERE CHILLED WATER PIPES PENETRATE WALL, INSTALL #6 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM EXISTING CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPES TO BUILIDINGI STEEL. SEE DETAIL 6, SHEET E -20. 14. INSTALL #750 MCM INSU I T ID GROUND EQUALIZER CONDUCTOR FROM NEW RFGB -2 TO EXISTINGM IN ELECTRICAL ROOM. REFER TO KEYED NOTE 7 WHEN PENETRATE NEW WALL. 15. TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE GROUND -BOND PLATE TO EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID USING #6 BARE COPPER. PROVIDE H -TAP CRIMP CONNECTOR AT GROUND GRID. USE 2 -HOLE COMPRESSION LUG AT PLATE. z S 0 a Z� i 1 i 00 Lgur 7OR 167.01 : 167.0: {- /V -/ /f / - /- /f / /f/ / / : a -- :1L» -rr- -~ �a _ ai._ -gin: - - ter = �.rr x :. :-.gi n.:._ _ -_ rr - -; - »~,�_ . :nrM ;. c .,:�: w- -- lr_ - »-� ¢ T. �>�• : ;..= ::L :: M. ..�.:�r_ ::_- ::s: u:.._.._�..tt .::;:�t:: ::: :•: • • - 7 AWUIW`ER • .© EXISTING .13 12 64 13 13- 165.14 16. PDU FLOOR STAND GROUND-BOND STAND TO EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID USING NO. 6 BARE COPPER. PROVIDE H-TAP CRIMP CONNECTOR AT GROUND GRID. USE 2-HOLE COMPRESSION LUG AT STAND. 17. TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION PLATE GROUND-BOND PLATE TO NEW RFGB-2 USING #6 BARE COPPER. PROVIDE 2-HOLE COMPRESSION LUG AT BOTH ENDS. 18. PDU'S ISOLATION TRANSFORMER GROUND-BOND ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SECONDARY GROUND TO NEW RFGB-2 USING NO. 1/0 INSULATED CONDUCTOR. 19. CRAC UNIT FLOOR STAND GROUND-BOND CRAC UNIT METAL FLOOR STAND TO EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID USING NO. 4 BARE COPPER. PROVIDE 2-HOLE COMPRESSION LUG CONNECTION AT FLOOR STAND. PROVIDE H-TAP CRIMP CONNECTOR AT EXISTING GROUND GRID. b09%-, 0 5"" 20. CONNECT BOTH NEW 2/0 PERIMETER GROUND AND EXISTING #4 GROUND GRID TO RAISED FLOOR PEDESTAL. TERMINATE EXISTING #4 CONDUCTOR BY ATTACHING TO MAIN CONTINUOUS STRINGER OF RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM VVITH BOLT, LOCK WASHER AND NUT, DRILLED AND INSERTED THROUGH SIDE OF STRINGER. REFER TO DETAIL 1, SHEET E-20. SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED Ti 1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS i Th N LLI LLI i<t Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By. KCM, DL, ZJ Date: 12-12-08 01-05-09 95% REVIEW 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 13 11:11(3161 NO W 16 4 Id ' 0 0 6 U 1 1 'PIE Revision cid; 0 (f) LD • 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 E-18 PERMIT SET Project No. WIA. 08093 Sheet No. FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL, GROUNDING EG 0 • GROUND BUS UPS MODULE O 0 0 0 O U UPS BATTERIES 6AWG TYPICAL XFMR UTRR1 -3 #4/0 AWG BARE TO GROUND RING XFMR UTRLI -1 O • XFMR TRLA1 0 0 0 1 1 1 o PRODUCERS (9 4 TRRB1 XFMR Q UTRRI -2 XFMR TO COLD WATER PIPE, OR BUILDING STEEL AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES (TYPICAL) 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFMR TRRRAI 0 • • 0 RFGB -2) 0 2 O O 0 Q 0 0 • 0 0 0 0 RFGB -1 GENERAL NOTES: 1. PROVIDE GROUND I.D. TAGS ON EVERY GROUND LEADS. EACH TAG SHALL IDENTIFY TERMINATION AT OPPOSITE END (ORIGIN). REFER TO DETAIL 8, E -20. a SC FGB -1 4 AWG (TYPICAL) r UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG PERIMETER NO SCALE SPRINKLER PIPE SYSTEM GROUND L O 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 EXISTING MSGB Z rt DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM GROUND • RELOCATED RFGB -1 (UNDERFLOOR) GROUNDING SCHEMATIC ABSORBERS O 0 • 0 O 2 CS ( I " GROUND ROD EXOTHERMIC CONNECTION n\J n 0 0 h O t BUILDING STEEL 2/0 AWG n r\J r r\J r\.J rU 0 0 0 1 I 1 /I I / 1 I 1 1 /1 (— Hi — —, 1 j p 1 1 I \. BURIED GROUNDING SYSTEM HATCH CONDUCTORS SHALL BE REMOVED BY DC CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DC FLOOR PLANS. - 2/C AWG MOUNTED UNDER CABLE LADDER (TYPICAL) NON - ISOLATED MAIN AC DISCONNECT TO CABLE '-'TRAY AT (4) LOCATIONS 0 4/0 AWG NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG. REFER TO E -11. NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG. REFER TOE -11. -- NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0 PERIMETER. REFER TO E -11. NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0. REFER TO E -11. 0 O NEW #750MCM. REFER TO E -11. SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM EXIST. AG B -1 O 0 O 0 0 GROUND TAG, TYPICAL. REFER TO DETAIL ON E -20. OUND BUS IN MDS O a O O O 0 0 2 0 NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG. REFER TO E -11. AGB-2 0 O 0 4 AWG (TYPICAL) NEW UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG PERIMETER. REFER TO 0 U' i a 500 KCMIL ISOLATED 2 0 2 N O O O O O 0 ----- ---- - MOUNTED UNDER CABLE LADDER ALONG EACH EQUIPMENT LINEUP 1 0 0 2 n 6 AWG TO EQUIPMENT RACKS 2 2 0 ti rtJ r \J rN 0 0 0 1 0 0 O 0 0 BATTERY ROOM MOUNTED UNDER CABLE LADDER e 0 2 r\J n\.J n NEW RFG B -2 (NEW SECURED ROOM UNDERFLOOR) u) 0 a 0 NEW 2/0 CONDUCTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED BY DC CONTRACTOR (TYPICAL FOR 19). REFER TO DC FLOOR PLANS. COMPRESSIONED TWO HOLE LUG MPB NEW 2/0 CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED BY DC CONTRACTOR. REFER/ TO DC FLOOR PLANS.- 6 AWG TYPICAL - - RECTIFIERS l / J CABLE LADDER DCGB -1 0 0 a a n 0 0 n r\J NEW 750MCM a r z Q 0 0 0 BATTERY RACKS NEW 6 AWG CONDUCTOR TO NEW PDF 144.10. SHALL BE INSTALLED BY DC CONTRACTOR. REFER TO ---\ FLOOR PLANS. / 500 KCMIL TO CABLE TRAY AT (4) LOCATIONS / O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 BY OTHERS NEW #6 CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED BY DC CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DC FLOOR PLANS. UNDERFLOOR 2/0 AWG PERIMETER -� REFER TO E -11 FOR PDU AND TSP LOCATIONS. NEW AGB-2 0 • NEW BATTERY RACKS 0 0 0 MSGB MOUNTED UNDER CABLE LADDER FOR VZB LOCAL SWITCH 2 0 2 NEW 6 AWG CONDUCTOR TO NEW PDF 167.09. SHALL BE INSTALLED BY DC CONTRACTOR. REFER TO DC FLOOR PLANS. - . O O O O O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 UPS GROUND. NEW 1 -3/0 GND. IN 2'C. (PVC) 1 � TYPICAL --- MPB RECTIFIERS CABLE LADDER LRE LOCAL SWITCH GROUND BARS 6AWG SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED / l J 750 MCM 750 MCM 750 MOM L_1 I BATTERY RACKS 1 CABLE LADDER FRAME AISLE GROUND EXISTING CABLE LADDER FRAM MAIN GROUND BUS. BY OTHERS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 '.1.009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS It 3 jo MAN- U 4 O� w isr s r p� L. o 4255;: 0„ T ONAL Cfi Expires Co LLI C.D co Fac. Code:TYKWWA Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. E -19 /OIQr r �+■� w 10: I- Mai N w�N � f- W < W O 4z w2 " JcD DOI GROUNDING SCHEMATIC TOTAL DEPTH OF SUPPORT SHALL NOT EXCEED 4' MAIN STRINGER. #4 AWG. SUPP. BONDING CONDUCTOR #2/0 AWG. GROUND RING THRU -BOLT CONNECTION. DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 3/8" TOGGLE BOLTS FOR HOLLOW CMU WALL OR BOLTS IN EXPANSION SHIELDS FOR CONCRETE WALL 600 VOLT ISOLATOR BUSHING UNISTRUT P3347 "U" SHAPED FITTING 5/8 "0 5/8 " -11 HEX HEAD CAP SCREWS CAD PLATED WITH CAD PLATED LOCKWASHER AND HEX HEAD NUT 0 UNISTRUT SUPPORT TERMINATE CONDUIT 6" FROM GROUND BAR. SUPPORT UNISTRUT TO WALL W /3/8" TOGGLE BOLTS AT 18' O.C. MIN. STANDARD DETAIL 7G052 NO SCALE 7/16"0 RAISED FLOOR PEDESTAL. ALL PAINT SHALL BE COMPLETELY REMOVED FROM OUTSIDE SURFACE PEDESTAL AT THE POINT WHERE CONNECTOR AND CONDUCTORS ARE ATTACHED TO THE PEDESTAL, TO PROVIDE MAXIMUM BONDING. #210 AWG. GROUND RING #4 AWG. SUPP. BONDING CONDUCTOR. LOCKWASHER AND NUT. BURNDY U -BOLT (CAT. # GP64526G1). 1/4"x4" COPPER BUS 1/4 "x4" COPPER BUS NOTE: 1. PROVIDE GROUND BAR MANUFACTURED BY NEWTON, RELTEC OR SAUNDERS. 2. LABEL BUS BARS AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLAN. NO SCALE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR NONMETALLIC BUSHING PVC MALE ADAPTER EQUAL TO CARLOW 943 r boo i MATCH ADJACENT STRUCTURE PAINT CONDUIT & SUPPORTS TO 1 40) 1 1041i0 CARLON E978 NONMETALLIC, CONDUIT STRAPS OR APPROVED EQUAL SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDUIT AS SPECIFIED PVC CONDUIT TERMINATION AT GROUND BAR GROUND BAR DETAIL 7/8" NEW BONDING JUMPER AS INDICATED. „rt- 21/32" STAND -OFF BRACKET CORNERS SHALL BE ROUNDED ON ALL PHENOLIC I.D. TAGS ENGRAVE CONDUCTOR ORIGIN ON TAG 1 JJ DETAIL NOT TO SCALE G XISTING RAISED FLOOR ROUND GRID BURNDY H -TAP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2" (TYP ENTIRE SURFACE OF BUS SHALL BE FREE OF BURRS, ETC. CONTACT SURFACES OF BUS SHALL BE SANDED OR WIRE BRUSHED CLEAN. APPLY A THIN COAT OF NO -OX -ID (OR EQUIV.) ONLY WHERE LUGS ARE TO BE CONNECTED. �- -,f 3/4" o 0 0 o C3—J6 0 0 7/16" . ( OF 42) 5/8 " -11 HEX HEAD CAP SCREWS CAD PLATED WITH CAD PLATED LOCKWASHER AND HEX HEAD NUT SECURE TAG TO GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WITH TY -RAPS, NON- METALLIC CABLE, ETC. 3" 318 GROUND LOOP L.1 DO DISCONNECT LEAD RAISED FLOOR PEDESTAL. ALL PAINT SHALL BE COMPLETELY REMOVED FROM OUTSIDE SURFACE PEDESTAL AT THE POINT WHERE CONNECTOR AND CONDUCTORS ARE ATTACHED TO THE PEDESTAL, TO PROVIDE MAXIMUM BONDING. CORNERS SHALL BE ROUNDED ON ALL PHENOLIC I.D. TAGS 1/4" HOLE PHENOLIC I.D. TAG ENGRAVE CONDUCTOR ORIGIN ON TAG I.D. TAG NOTE: 1. PHENOLIC TAGS SHALL BE BLACK WITH WHITE LETTERS. I.D. TAG DETAILS STANDARD DETAIL 7G101 NO SCALE #4 AWG. DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 11 COMPUTER FLR. GROUND RING L.14B DO NEST DISCONNECT LEAD PHENOLIC I.D. TAG #4 AWG. LOCKWASHER AND NUT. BURNDY U -BOLT 1/4" HOLE EXISTING 6" CHWS PIPE EXISTING 6" CHWR PIPE BELOW NO SCALE PROVIDE CLEAR HEAT- SHRINK OVER ENTIRE BARREL WITH MINIMUM 1 INCH OF CABLE INSULATION COVERED SECURE TAG TO GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WITH TY -RAPS, NON- METALLIC CABLE, ETC. BRASS OR COPPER NUTS, LOCK WASHERS, FLAT WASHERS AND BOLTS GROUND BAR INSPECTION CUTOUT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TERMINATION DETAIL STANDARD DETAIL 7G102 NO SCALE NOTE: SINGLE HOLE FOR CHILLED WATER PIPE CONNECTIONS SIMILAR. OUTSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM NEW SECURE WALL --- BUM NOTE: THIS DETAIL APPLIES TO BOTH CHS AND CHR PIPES EXITING SPACE AT NORTH AND WEST WALLS. EXTEND GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN 3/4" CONDUIT TO BUILDING STEEL. EXOTHERMICALLY WELD TO BLDG. STEEL. INSIDE NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM EX. RAISED FLOOR CLEAN SURFACE WITH CLEANING PAD. APPLY A THIN COAT OF NO -OX -ID AT THE CONNECTING SURFACE. ALL LUGS SHALL HAVE A THIN COAT OF NO -OX -ID APPLIED TO THE STRIPPED CABLE END AND /OR INSIDE OF LUG BARREL BEFORE CABLE IS CRIMPED. TWO HOLE CONCENTRIC COMPRESSION TYPE COPPER, LONG BARREL LUG (BURNDY "YA" SERIES OR EQUAL BY "T & B ") WITH COPPER OR BRASS BOLTS AND LOCKWASHERS. PROVIDE 2 "X3" PHENOLIC I.D. TAG FOR EACH CONDUCTOR. CRIMP TOOL SHALL BE HYDRAULIC TYPE, WITH FULL CIRCUMFERENCE DIE CRIMPING TOOL FOR PROPER SIZE AND TYPE WIRE. LUGS SHALL HAVE THE NUMBER OF CRIMPS INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. CONNECT NEW #6 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TO EXISTING PIPE, SEE GROUND CONDUCTOR TERMINATION DETAIL 4, THIS SHEET. EX. PIPE ' FLANGE i XISTING CONCRETE FLOOR RAISED FLOOR PIPE GROUNDING DETAIL D SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED EX. 6" PIPE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 Z009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 1••• 3 Li N . 42559 h 1 Expires 9V-Alb I 1 01 -05 -09 2 01 -15 -09 3 01 -26 -09 4 02 -02 -09 co F vJ O CD z vJ vct 100% CD Sheet No. E -20 GROUNDING DETAILS Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM, Date: 12-12-08 Revision 95% REVIEW ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 MATCHLINE GENERAL NOTES: t..U1PMENT FLOOR r - Ir II II I II 11 II I II 11 11 1 II II 1 r -a" TYP. 1 1 I \\ JL_ LJL� , 711 ir7' l L 11 _.x, 4 %, ? � iii 2' -0" TYP II II II 11 II I 11 11 11 II 11 1 1 1 1 1 111 RI 11 11 e MOH OI ■1 11111110 1 P1 1 YII 1 ltI[uIili Y 1 1 1111111111 m 111 111 11 0 1 1 11 r' 19 �.1 11 11 11 1 11 1 111 u 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 111 11 ESC 1-61494, 10 -7) r4 n t't J 1,' 1 ^ 03 Latwi:!,tiu:.aur:, 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) us 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 101 -0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. REFER TO DC -2 FOR CONTINUATION '"_i 1, n r t I 1 .,. 7 Jd. y,�4} .�i.l = 111 -C }� ,. .., I�rt +.1? �'C� i; <'f�i7�. 1 '9.'! •� 115 14 ',at:a Mar �. F ,f ?raft ,2 :: 2. . tL^131151 .. l5:b '. .06 45.37 m3rdfi k, � Y .4`Ll,I1 f.,:,w1.ia f4CN712i; a'1:Lix ssn t I11 i :t EX. 1 -6 L(9 -1 10 -7) , t f) EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) EX. 1- L(9 -1, '(0 -7) 1 0 -7) 1'1 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 1 EX. 1- «L(9 -1, 10 -7) IIFHIIIII[II 1-6L 9 -1, 10 -7 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) EX. 1-6L 9 -1, 10 -7 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) Il i 0 :4 I4 • 1. tx 1.1 1 • 17 S 3 '7 • 1 i.: 1113 '; x�x at��ru - ;. i .01, , ..mf- LYWaG.i, .r✓rC�IFE. .. tiliHI..t6Gt7s^'.,.211E;Ld�Y, cl.4 k1!';', l _2Lt..6�....' . .,. ItiVa tllF.x ,.,, . !._J :.J tedt.tI I. : :.,. ,, :..; . :, ,, ... ,, .., ,. ,,. . fi.wu..L, it 4.tia.6 .4It t 0 ,LI10 LI » .af ,a 1011, p,y ,k . S l3tt.L�,i�ut, ... �..,.o a,.Y,JY.k�F3 ahl 1t s 5 ..1ry. 1- 1 114.'17 1 ;1;1.'18 ►,� 1.1!. '�� 11 t..u.ICdJ : , t6Nd�1.41.Yt Lt 557 :t' ltSiW utfarfia 144.02 144.03 144.04 144.05 144.06 144.07 144.08 144.09 144.10 144.11 144.12 144.13 144.14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.1 1 :.lALG1i 4te 3. EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE TO MULTIPLE WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS ON SECOND TIER OF COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER TO BE REMOVED. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATED OF WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS. rq [; I HM IM r N €3111 I u O DU 1111111ralt 1I! I I I'/ ' !fit i I1► I smir , � -_1111111 1rinta r Mitlininillinirintallindi r i lil�l►I�in�1 li�i1� it �11�� i �1�ll �1ir �d i� X111 MIM NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. REMOVE THIS SECTION OF CABLE LADDER TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETELY REMOVE CABLE LADDER AROUND COLUMN TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. L1i EX. 1 (9 -1, 10 -7) :QUIP ME 1 1 %t1 \\ , 1. i -I I I __ J 165 01 . ,. +sa v z 16 Y 135,02 7 I 70 1 :) -1 - 1 170. Lt:) 70 16 170.07 n .tct -er s ; tiu a „a ,... 4.s .it `- _s ; tit _ 6504 16 0 16 166 03 166 li • 68 04 1 13,( 1 11;- 1l- -kHli4 65 JN'4l 4l 7 .u.F.1.,4u+.,. 16 7.9 1 167.02 167.03 167.04 167,05 167.06 4 165 C5 170.085 3 . C, t.)9 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) ' ... .. T _ ....._ 1-6149-1, 10-7) .1E -+t t All;Itte 1.4.11 16a.p,. a 166 06 111 1.65 07- PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, SOUTH 1 1 � I 1 � 11 31111 ,11 a8 th vLt 1 167.07 167.08 136:(.7 6 0 16 05 1 4 4 4. 164.06 164.07 164.08 - U,vs.'.Si'..n >i :BA Uh.a.LU >`NSLk#ii ts�� lltkiY.,"+�hHQ'.k"'GSS.."u,RJLl s, 4�i'tY'i...prtoaiSa4Y. :21EL :Tr - 1I _. =N_ 1 1- 1-- EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 16 r,i.Xi 'P38,07 1 , Est „w -Kl+i u., Kwa., un 1 EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) 166:01 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) _PDF . Ali i . 35 8.._. _16 ).0 i s EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 1 3 '4,09 6 8.17: 1'A..' 1 1$.3.'1: !t:'rei 1;:1 1 18,14 w sa tat , ,.�. .: 1- ,r_�t kC+..[ .. n..J :7. :... Lu:rh.aSea4 :4..121 113tu14Rin`i 4..x'3 167.09 1 167.11 167.12 111115.t s",7.- l�tfd4 ^zi.'k; ! 5kk ':.,5541:htw?:7.'Lci464�.�fii 65 169 -p I5 70.10 170.11 '170.1 I 70.113 '170 1 1 . ner tth. 4 Y1 "9 .f ,,.e -.. ., a ,A Mt ,:,'G,. 1 1X 6.`1'1 66 09 136. E0 .10 1 5 . REFER TO DC -2 FOR CONTINUATION w. SrnP�_a a.r�rzn ea]�5r: 1 ... 160:11 115 irl M1i"vU'. }: 'iF-' ).1.2 1139.13 u,rr;,u ow :�.crt 167.13 166 ,va 12 65 13 ._ 1 '167.14 136'3 55. 4.. 164.11 164.12 6 41L 1 .13 6 164.13 1 4.14 1:.154 16 %l{ft lit 444 51.311 " .1 ux 163.1 •.• 1643 1:; 1,15.11 7 lattf4tatila.1,a �. 167.15 167.16 167.17 1_- '111,1 111 _ i t, 169 1 r 1 +:34,. 1c 1 ad x Ladder. DC CABLE LADDER SYMBOL LEGEND Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cabl Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. u �. �� 1Ir .., 11 1 .. 7 _ Indicates Cable Ladder to be It II 11 II 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). MATCHLINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila B UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TI IKWILA ED 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 Revision 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 DC-1 U m id i fi r2 t No 1.WIL < W o 19 a co c8c; o co cr) co Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM DL ZJ Date: 12-12-08 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, SOUTH II II 1 III u II 1 . u r I I U L1 k 9 it 1 l t:; t at V @ [l1. 4 k4 4 „k A +° @ r . V r E FQ k _ 0, •R -( 12 1 , 1 0171) 33k &t3 I N+. S A F & ( Z ffiS Z d !1 U 9� It v W, ,v1 L F 3 11u, : 71 J, ., , a /.i :'u ' tk ES U Oil i MATCHLINE GENERAL NOTES: t..U1PMENT FLOOR r - Ir II II I II 11 II I II 11 11 1 II II 1 r -a" TYP. 1 1 I \\ JL_ LJL� , 711 ir7' l L 11 _.x, 4 %, ? � iii 2' -0" TYP II II II 11 II I 11 11 11 II 11 1 1 1 1 1 111 RI 11 11 e MOH OI ■1 11111110 1 P1 1 YII 1 ltI[uIili Y 1 1 1111111111 m 111 111 11 0 1 1 11 11 11 11 1 11 1 111 u 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 111 11 ESC 1-61494, 10 -7) r4 n t't J 1,' 1 ^ 03 Latwi:!,tiu:.aur:, 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) us 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 101 -0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. REFER TO DC -2 FOR CONTINUATION r' 19 �.1 1 .,. 7 Jd. y,�4} .�i.l = 111 -C }� ,. .., I�rt +.1? �'C� i; <'f�i7�. 1 '9.'! •� 115 14 ',at:a Mar �. F ,f ?raft ,2 :: 2. . tL^131151 .. l5:b '. .06 45.37 m3rdfi k, � Y .4`Ll,I1 f.,:,w1.ia f4CN712i; a'1:Lix ssn t I11 i :t EX. 1 -6 L(9 -1 10 -7) , t f) EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) EX. 1- L(9 -1, '(0 -7) 1 0 -7) 1'1 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 1 EX. 1- «L(9 -1, 10 -7) IIFHIIIII[II 1-6L 9 -1, 10 -7 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) EX. 1-6L 9 -1, 10 -7 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) Il i 0 :4 I4 • 1. tx 1.1 1 • 17 S 3 '7 • 1 i.: 1113 '; x�x at��ru - ;. i .01, , ..mf- LYWaG.i, .r✓rC�IFE. .. tiliHI..t6Gt7s^'.,.211E;Ld�Y, cl.4 k1!';', l _2Lt..6�....' . .,. ItiVa tllF.x ,.,, . !._J :.J tedt.tI I. : :.,. ,, :..; . :, ,, ... ,, .., ,. ,,. . fi.wu..L, it 4.tia.6 .4It t 0 ,LI10 LI » .af ,a 1011, p,y ,k . S l3tt.L�,i�ut, ... �..,.o a,.Y,JY.k�F3 ahl 1t s 5 ..1ry. 1- 1 114.'17 1 ;1;1.'18 ►,� 1.1!. '�� 11 t..u.ICdJ : , t6Nd�1.41.Yt Lt 557 :t' ltSiW utfarfia 144.02 144.03 144.04 144.05 144.06 144.07 144.08 144.09 144.10 144.11 144.12 144.13 144.14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.1 1 :.lALG1i 4te 3. EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE TO MULTIPLE WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS ON SECOND TIER OF COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER TO BE REMOVED. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATED OF WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS. rq [; €3111 I u O DU 1111111ralt 1I! I I I'/ ' !fit i I1► I smir , � -_1111111 1rinta r Mitlininillinirintallindi r i lil�l►I�in�1 li�i1� it �11�� i �1�ll �1ir �d i� X111 MIM NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. REMOVE THIS SECTION OF CABLE LADDER TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETELY REMOVE CABLE LADDER AROUND COLUMN TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. L1i EX. 1 (9 -1, 10 -7) :QUIP ME 1 1 %t1 \\ , 1. i -I I I __ J 165 01 . ,. +sa v z 16 Y 135,02 7 I 70 1 :) -1 - 1 170. Lt:) 70 16 170.07 n .tct -er s ; tiu a „a ,... 4.s .it `- _s ; tit _ 6504 16 0 16 166 03 166 li • 68 04 1 13,( 1 11;- 1l- -kHli4 65 JN'4l 4l 7 .u.F.1.,4u+.,. 16 7.9 1 167.02 167.03 167.04 167,05 167.06 4 165 C5 170.085 3 . C, t.)9 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) ' ... .. T _ ....._ 1-6149-1, 10-7) .1E -+t t All;Itte 1.4.11 16a.p,. a 166 06 111 1.65 07- PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, SOUTH 1 1 � I 1 � 11 31111 ,11 a8 th vLt 1 167.07 167.08 136:(.7 6 0 16 05 1 4 4 4. 164.06 164.07 164.08 - U,vs.'.Si'..n >i :BA Uh.a.LU >`NSLk#ii ts�� lltkiY.,"+�hHQ'.k"'GSS.."u,RJLl s, 4�i'tY'i...prtoaiSa4Y. :21EL :Tr - 1I _. =N_ I HM IM r N 1- 1-- EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 16 r,i.Xi 'P38,07 1 , Est „w -Kl+i u., Kwa., un 1 EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) 166:01 EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) _PDF . Ali i . 35 8.._. _16 ).0 i s EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) 1 3 '4,09 6 8.17: 1'A..' 1 1$.3.'1: !t:'rei 1;:1 1 18,14 w sa tat , ,.�. .: 1- ,r_�t kC+..[ .. n..J :7. :... Lu:rh.aSea4 :4..121 113tu14Rin`i 4..x'3 167.09 1 167.11 167.12 111115.t s",7.- l�tfd4 ^zi.'k; ! 5kk ':.,5541:htw?:7.'Lci464�.�fii 65 169 -p I5 70.10 170.11 '170.1 I 70.113 '170 1 1 . ner tth. 4 Y1 "9 .f ,,.e -.. ., a ,A Mt ,:,'G,. 1 1X 6.`1'1 66 09 136. E0 .10 1 5 . REFER TO DC -2 FOR CONTINUATION w. SrnP�_a a.r�rzn ea]�5r: 1 ... 160:11 115 irl M1i"vU'. }: 'iF-' ).1.2 1139.13 u,rr;,u ow :�.crt 167.13 166 ,va 12 65 13 ._ 1 '167.14 136'3 55. 4.. 164.11 164.12 6 41L 1 .13 6 164.13 1 4.14 1:.154 16 %l{ft lit 444 51.311 " .1 ux 163.1 •.• 1643 1:; 1,15.11 7 lattf4tatila.1,a �. 167.15 167.16 167.17 1_- '111,1 111 _ i t, 169 1 r 1 +:34,. 1c 1 ad x Ladder. DC CABLE LADDER SYMBOL LEGEND Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cabl Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. u �. �� 1Ir .., 11 1 .. 7 _ Indicates Cable Ladder to be It II 11 II 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). MATCHLINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila B UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TI IKWILA ED 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 Revision 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 DC-1 U m id i fi r2 t No 1.WIL < W o 19 a co c8c; o co cr) co Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM DL ZJ Date: 12-12-08 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, SOUTH n r 1-7 i 1 N EXISTING BUILDING GATEWAY DR. SOUTH SEE PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN FOR NEW WORK IN THIS AREA SEE PARTIAL EGRESS FLOOR PLAN SHEET A -1.1 m CODE INFORMATION APPLICABLE CODES: 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) 2006 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC) 2006 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) 2006 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) 2006 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC) WASHINGTON STATE BARRIER FREE REGULATIONS LATEST EDITION FEDERAL GUIDLINES AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (WAC 51 -20) BUILDING INFORMATION: CONSTRUCTION TYPE: OCCUPANCY: EXIST. BLDG. AREA: TENANT IMPROVEMENT AREA: TELECOMUNICATION EQUIP. AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT V -N (SPRINKLED) B 70,775 S.F. 9,800 S.F. n PROJ. NORTH ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA: UNLIMITED PER SECTION 507.4 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS THROUGHOUT 60' PUBLIC WAYS ON 4 SIDES FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS: EXTERIOR NON - BEARING WALLS NON -RATED INTERIOR BEARING WALLS NON -RATED STRUCTURAL FRAME NON -RATED FLOORS NON -RATED ROOF NON -RATED SHAFTS NON -RATED STAIR ENCLOSURES NON -RATED SITE PLAN SCALE: 1" = 30' -0" 009 NORTH VICINITY NO SCALE VIA P J REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPR VED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 1 WT1 WTA, 1 N C ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 796E16 (325) 695-1090 FAX (325) 695 -1055 fiarrA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: 01 -05 -09 2 01 -15 -09 4 02 -02 -09 cn ozb O Fac. Code:TYKWWA Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 100% CD Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. co :;;; (f) ® V z vJ Lu cp 00 k (0 Q w N � 95% REVIEW PERMIT SET A -1.0 ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES 11 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 ■ 1 1 11 1 11 111 -. ■Y 11 111 O NMI MINS IMMO Walla MATCHLINE FUTURE PANEL "DP4 DCGB -2 AGB -'I EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) EQ►..J PM EN - 11 TYP. Ill -C)gR —EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) II II I II II I II II O C. -. 1 II -II . _I 1.. j II - f II II I I " 11 ll 11 1 2 '_ O ' 1r - 17 - - 1 11 II I 11 11 I 11. I 7r''1r "'1 II 11 I II II 1 1r 1 `I II 11 I II II 1 O Ur II II I II 11 1 II I II ° I U 1 I 1111 II fl 11 it 11 lr it lr "ll` lr ir - 1I IF II — 1f -- I MiD 0 I i I i Ira 1111111111 11 1 r 1" lr Tr lr"11 11 11 II 11 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1 11 11 11 11 2' -O" TYP! II 11 ll L 1 II I I II 1 rr`Tr —r 1 11 1 1 11 1 11 11 1 1011 1 1 1 111 1 1 1 11 1 111 0 111 111 1 1 1 111 1 1 11 5115 1 1 11111111 1 1 111 51111515 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 P 1 1 11 mamma Tam 1 IMRE L am= Mal MEM MEM 11 11111111M M MEM 1.11 I 1 m NOM Itja BUM ~GSM ANON 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ■ 11 1 1 11 1 ■ 1 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 to 11 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 HP' 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 11 1 1 111 1 11 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1�1 1 1 1 111 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 111 11 1 1 1 ■ 1 1 1 111 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 ■ ■ 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 HP 11 0 1 1 e 11 111 1 e 1 1 11 1 1 111 11 1 11 it 11 11 11 1 111 111 111 11 111 11 1 I 1 (r r 11 "lr lr" n fl' 11 it 11 11 Tit 11 (r" fr 'rl 11 ir r 1 11 1 11 11 11 11 11 -11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 , 11 111111 1 11 I 11 � II 11 Il II 11 11 11 11 11 II II LL1L L .11_:It!L il!I�.11- 11-11_ IL .1L_1L 11_.11_. U C \ , JI_ 1 L_� li MINIM I S :iH Y ni5 i f w ■ r:tl -Se2 59 .t!'1 1 'i.fi I ..) , 1'a0. 1 =i lr - " — 11 - 11 II - 71` II II II II II 11 11 II II II II II II 11 11 11 11 11 II II II II II .11- II 11 1 AIFN! f i! i4Z ei ede 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. MMINI , 1 1 (. �5 54"1 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 10' -0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. POD 4 41P .,'F t4 .. 1.b Y1 - "1"id � i9 Sl .1 xr.9 Ii I ','sl 'fl ➢ +.CYI Y=H -S$ k9• I I I I 1"'" GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWNGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. MOM U ° 1 .0 .3 ' ,07 1 51 08 1 BRGB -1 O 52 .05 152.06 1"::12.07 10.2 1 °.I-n.(I ) I7 1 I T `T ii Iz L if 4 kd A !'h , �F, J S.3 . al , J ril r'� tid' kil•V•V VAI VA 'VOL. ^ ra ti21 ;W;4 i U tt 3 14 -d:f S's w, 4£5 -r;3 ::a i i7 1! Ft 4 t'L!- ?.(' I ?:.1 If;t,I17 'r.,,13 1 1150.'10 1ti;v'1,1 1tr1i.'I;.. 150.1'3 4, ? 1 r 1';1:..'1:} ;;)0.1 1 f; 3 55 REFER TO DC -1 FOR CONTINUATION DCGB -1 \-FGB -1 at FUTURE NEW PANELBOARD PANEL "DP3A"--\si "DP2B" 9 EX. 1-6L(9 EX. 1-6L(9 EX. 1-6L 9 NI ID ANALASER ZONE 3 BOX 1 10-7 1 10-7) 1 10-7 11 01111' '141 'III PP MOW NEW 0-6L(9-1) MINEN MINIM 7 192 18 160 P 1 41 _r1 PANEL NEM C4 41: NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. REMOVE THIS SECTION OF CABLE LADDER TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETELY REMOVE CABLE LADDER AROUND COLUMN TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 4. EXISTING TELEPHONE CABLE TO MULTIPLE WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS ON SECOND TIER OF COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER TO BE REMOVED. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATED OF WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLETS. 3. PROVIDE RUNWAY SUPPORT - B-LINE SB-2113-24-GR OR APPROVED EQUAL NEWTON PRODUCT, AND MOUNTING FIRE RESISTANT WOOD BATTEN. PAINT WOOD BATTEN TO MATCH MOUNTING SURFACE. MOW WIN EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) PANEL PANEL EQUIK 71 31 POLI PANEL 10-7 "." ner EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7' EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 17 0 XFMR UTRL1-1 1421 V& PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, NORTH 71 BATTERY 1D DO°1 0 15 BATTERY 1C MID N110 17'5 175 16 175:17 175.18 BATTERY 1B PA , 22.1-416VVV•M cgs ala BATTERY 1A ET al 1 1 REFER TO DC-1 FOR CONTINUATION DC CABLE LADDER Sheet Nlo. DC-2 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - COMMUNICATION CABLE LADDER, NORTH Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE Indicates Existing Single Tier able APPROVED Ladder. Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. City of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION Indicates Existing Triple Tier C Ladder. - lr — lr - lrnr - r - Indicates Cable Ladder to be II 11 11 II II 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). APR 0 1 2009 RECEIVED CITY OF TIJKWILA FEB 0 5 PERMIT CENTER COPYRIGHT 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 WA Sij 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 D la Z 51N in IT) t ix < w is „L Date: 12-12-08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 o cr4 co cid2 (I) (D 0% \``.". c cn ftle,) Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL ZJ MATCHLINE , k-ir .•97•• EQUIPMENT L.poR Fri /11 11 ..1 ...11 11.,, 1.. 1 I 11„ 1 • 11 • 2 2'-0" TYP. • TYP I k PLJU I f. ' f i 1 i f 1 REFER TO DC-4 FOR CONTINUATION „,==„.=5..-r. •• Ir - .1T. 9-n". 1 1 1 1 ii4 .tat, a/a/ V4.1.94,C ataa at/ -4'41 to/4/4 it 4 1ii 45 al .aza V4, ii44. 4;4 4 k1ii W Pi oa at, at f:81 1 $3u: 1,1,a (1 i3 i4 .118,05 1,48 06 1460'7 11 i3 08 1,46 09 i 4 t 1,4 1 i 8 12 145.13 1 4 1 11 15 I 48.16 146 17 148 144 I • t 1 , Z11 a}:414'4 •ft AA, Wattit ii.i4iii44. ilfit 42i4•444 4,U-.444,44-ik74:14444 40111 • L-14-144 fitaAla,r1 Al: a al...a'alk:A-S1 146.02 14 6.0 .41i .4=44 146.05 1 146.0"/ 418 08 146.09 140 10 146 11 44 46.14 1 '15 146.14 4 146.15 1 -46 1 / fa 146. 17 14.0.18 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ALL CABLE THAT WILL BE RE-USED. , 41 14 148 . 1:1, 01 f."/ '11.7 EL 1:'. 4 I,' / 4 14.7 'ft/ 1i1 14 i 7 1 .4-4,1 •44.- 444 '444.414 444 •W 14. 4* 434 ii.1344ii- 4tit W.V. 041143 - ;41. 1 U ai-a, As5 ttf, GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAVVINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAVVINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1-0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10-0) REPRESENTS 10'-0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2'-3" HIGH. l4tj 14444 A.0.474 0 ‘,1 143.05 143.06 143.07 143.08 143.09 143.10 143.11 143.12 143.13 143.14 143.15 143.16 143.17 143.18 '5114MiniiitAiMakaliMMII4a1114;i441W4114,14434404M24a4,44tafaiiiia lilial=nailifariAllat4414a4C474741014U41V1V4i4414aLt.".1;;VinitiVM :/t.motatottaaast,...raf.,/aaotrastatay.Ullta.41=2■Orai;fR',EnVA6iii:A41:GiiiiMiait'ii.A taat I antla Ba/ tgla ttlotaaaattt ;la/mt./Oak" ata Iialaarttga. altakallaiala •arAlie =kV aataattiatAta" aPAV271iMtkir111" al'a# n g41 41,44ikili4=E44241114 4tal: • taxaktatiatavataatata..a 144.02 144.03 144.04 144.05 144.06 144.07 144.08 144.09 144.10 144.11 144.12 144.13 144.14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.18 RELOCATED PDF EXISTING PDF TO BE (16)-350 MCM CONDUCTORS FROM REMOVED AND REUSED. EXISTING PDF 42 TO MP9B TO BE REUSED FEED PDF 14t1.. (8)-350 MCM CONDUCTORS PERTOLARITY. - - 1. L A EXISITNG (8)-350 MCM (-) CONDUCTORS FROM H-TAP- EXISTING (8)-350 MCM (+) CONDUCTORS FROM EXTERNAL RETURN BUS • itiii4.4iiii4.1044,1iik.ii.4,444424344a441K44,4Ltiatk4,4.54L,41,4/4, titaWWAWItatalaWaiatiaa, 142.02 142.03 142.04 142.05 142.06 142.07 . 142.08 142.09 142.10 142.11 142.12 142.13 142,14 142.15 142.16 142.17 142.18 SCALE: 1/4" =1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN : r a're. :11 REMOVE THIS SECTION OF CABLE LADDER TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL RE-USE EXISTING (16)-350 MCM CONDUCTORS, ((8) CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY), FROM EXISTING PDF 42 TO FEED PDF 144. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THIRD TIER ON TOP OF EXISTING DOUBLE TIER CABLE LADDER. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY SUPPORTS FOR 1-6L CABLE LADDER EXTENSION TO NEW PDF. PROVIDE 90° WATER FALL DOWN TO NEW PDF. WATER FALL SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 8" OFF THE BACK OF THE PDF. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL NEW (16)-350 MCM CONDUCTORS, ((8) CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY), FROM H-TAP INDICATED (REFER TO SHEET DC-4). fl ..,. ,/ , , 1,,4, 0.01 170..04 170.05 179.06 17 0 . (.147 170.08 110,09 1 170.11 1 '70.12 170. I 3 170 14 ''' 70 15. 170 .19. t o ull xt :4.nt 1 va /a to fa Ia a q laa-tia-tiaAV•a•la:akrA a 0 L:f3 a 'a 7:::,,,aalaatta,A4.41 la 54 ilA ft IA Itatlallati Ati a; ii.9 ii■J ,:ataa-a.itiialr •itt: 1::,, W a M ,./. --4 / : FUTURE I I CV /4 . _ 1 1 I 1 -.4.,,,1 I - 1 I : I I ■ 1 I I I E ROOM NEW (8)-350 MCM (+) COND1.1 FROM EXTERNAL RETrN BLp. tm A //d atu/a w sa I PDF ta •■:, 5-1,fiaria Rt a it .} ./0 ot Ait, &DI tti, W •Stataa AT: 44114 Li ugi , ,,{14 41,01141144 AI ti14 44:4 411- 169,01 169 02 169,03 1 103,05 106 6.9, 166 07 169.4)8 39.10 1 (39.11 1 (:49 1 :;:e 109.13 169 10 14 14 15 II 09 16 '189 1 '7 I FUTUR 4 E 1 ,,.,:.. ,,, i 1 i ' 47 , i i P DU i F A - -1 1 L. 4 1 1 1 NEW (8)-350 MCM (-) CONDUCTORS FROM HTAP I ' ' • V.442.4.114V441 167.01 1167.02 1013.04 198.05 160,66 138 163,00 •ad 103.0:9 163.10 4?.3 Sli17111-4.4i -41 la a TM L. 164.04 164.05 164.06 164.07 164.08 41Miiit44,4iiila.adia,ii4i1'411454,44:11ii.4444ALML44iititt '14,4,111WV4Vil.iii44,1inliWit:OftIV. I PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER, SOUTH EX. 1 - 6 12-1 111 ME s VII MIMI MI NM , - I , RHO I 1 I MIMI NI ill1111111 InLIZZl r ol " 0 _IN ION III Mill IMIIMIIII Milli , MIIIN Mil_N illlii111 . , , ! _ IMIlig Milt - 1 - i 1%1111 il !Pk EX. 1-6L(12-1) I Milli 0 1 NMI rtifiviceititiltalEillit1111111MitithOltitiletlitenrr1181121111M RIO mi um _i .,. NE i-ev 2 mot rot ii!ilkil!6iiiiitiwitaitorinwokomitsmisammostwaziakeimiimieconapvaintaizeixellibtilkhl, UMW SUM 11111111111111 IIMMII NEM MIMI MEM IMMO ..1= RE REFER TO DC-4 FOR CONTINUATION 168.11 168.12 108, V.;, . 168.1 '5 166.'18 1643.41 f1.4 Al 4 4i II::£.013-fig .44 •iiSA 4E1 -W • '4"44■14.43-g4-%1,44-4,1-.4*A4i-i6i46: tal Aiagaiak,Vaatiatadaataataalk?.alaaat tarattaot/ita, La./. attattaattrat ovaavat.....ttattiaattakatacaval-a,tita2tat svailtaltaa.atiamt kaaaaaa05 167.03 167.04 167.05 167.06 167.07 167.08 167.09 167.10 167.11 167.12 167.13 167.14 167.15 167.16 167.17 166.03 166.04 166.05 166.06 166.07 166.08 166.09 166.10 166.11 166.12 166.13 1 ,1441M:4tk:=441 ez4t4ifil=4L4M14.24441.142f4t414441W ,4J.Q..e..444.cil4a41(0041404044T4iV41f34V14:44Wliilita414S Inatiaitataal LL61 OCATE PDF ■ • - =4'11:1=11=121 tazoKaaraaa:/ atttaatateaktraztztamtarato./ 65.10 --165.11 - 165,12.. -16543 .- 165.14- 164.11 164.12 164.13 164.14 El • Ladder DC CABLE LADDER SYMBOL LEGEND Indicates future equipment to _ be installed. -11-1 Heavy line indicates equip -11 n - lE 1 r Indicates Cable Ladder to be fi 11 11 11 11 removed. _ 1 I, Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90 Outside Bend). MATCHLINE icates Existing Single Tie\ C face side. Ind IANCE CODE C°M APPF* Indicates Existing Double Tie , city 01 la Cable Ladder. 14G o RECEIVED CITY OF TUK\MLA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 0 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING NC-iNR ARlt ENE. TEXAS 2 3 4 3 Expires Mkv OV 8 /1 1 • 0 2 65_C AL 04-1 4 '4 Z DY Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KM, DL Z Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 Revision 01-05-09 95% REVIEW 01-15-09 01 02-02-09 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. DC-3 PERMIT SET PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER, SOUTH 1111111 NM I - 1 1 ■ 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • EQUIPMEN f V f` �C]I R I1, II I I 0 - -ll ' 11 u I[. I[ '41 2' -0" TYP. ,I J` lr `l 11 ,II 1 11 If• 1 0 1r.:1 11 ll 1I 11 1 0 0 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 11 1 1 MIEN nun ®1 #11O ®111111 Mine wpm _11_1 111 mum mum gloom . 1011111 110Minginli 111111 min NM IN •IIJII NAM Minim non Mpg ��1 del 111 111 1 II � I IN 1 1u MIN num NMI II s 1,e0�1 �N s 0 i 1 lir?" YAP :A iL 7r 7 7 r 711 - -. - t - 7 1'- r-li 11 11 H. II 4,, II• I I. I 'IL I 11 I � I I II 11 .II •.II - II�•• I I I I II 11 , II 11, `14 14 `11 '41 1 11 1I II `II III II 11 11 If, 11, 11. 11 11 'I1 '`II 11 11 41 . IL_:..,11-_..11_:: _ Il II' • IL J. I I I I 1 11 1 I <.I1 L . 2' -0" TYP r l I II I. 11 11 " \ 1T' 1 II. ` `1 `11 1 '`II 11 `•,11 II 11',11 II II II II II, 1 • 1 - II ••,11 `II II'• II II IN, Il 11,. • 11 II 'It I( i1 11 J1VjL ll_ 11 [l `- rig NEW I� CURI " . I ..,, tl , Id s. d1 02 152.03 1.52 04 11 111 1;71 ,1 .es,'2P eu 0 �r II I 1 3 1 •Id i I IA 1 Lis:3:1 I. "[ }f . s 1V 11 NAIL OA 'WI Fti 1 FUTURE Il A$ dt 1151 nt .5S aiE iB 1 :1 11r :Fr 1- %5F ,l s`hi PAN I' 1 .T9 _hk{u d'a uYt 5tk . iFn YR7 -U ( 1 -1 c ad, MID P 2 ail 1 -E 2- 6,11D t u d; .Lv73Ya1 „A�u v "4-A.ai51 E.;4 si. G'; iSR 9S -r' °r �dfi MID n3 °uu.au =;a1�,sa u.a nsr .a n as lt•t % . 1 2 1„ . 13 162.. 1 2- MU I 141 MID 11+111.'+ 1 f_ 52 18 1 i1 . 17 152.'13 i'.;,1, i 2, 1:: "1. 13 151 ; r.,;. 151 1 i k € [ f.i f F.,1 1, "15113 11 EXISTING (8) -35 MCM ( -) T OND T TORS ; FROM H -TAP " 111) iv i f :) EXSI ING (1'6)-350 MCM (+) AND CONDUCTORS FROM MPDB 12 NEW t Numeral 1: 1 i 0 1 MIN _1_1000! omit 16 , •i1u®li 1 s 1A1 .I offieN ® 1 IN X1111 o al 1m�11 ( -) 111n NUM 1111.11 1 ii ®11®r H CL 4 � c� 0 } Y,- !f: 113 [ 137 Jf Mi 11 1;' } • MATCHLINE FUTURE PANEL "DP4 f 2' -O TYP. 41 '•11 `.1 II'• 11 L. I1, 1 ,.I1 1 1 It, 1•, ` Tr 1 •.11 1 I. 11 1. 2' -0" TYP :gin 1. ru a ,u uJ zal 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ALL CABLE THAT WILL BE RE -USED. 48 ,8, w.3 A :; ; ;Ai --1 1 I'f t 11 GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 10' -0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. 150.0 .J I I_! REFER TO DC -3 FOR CONTINUATION PDF t`C f .r v,. 1x5 b tl ttJ 313 .0 .Y:S� *' Wl [ � •iu.. - dl.. It,7 y1 1.. S0.07 1 �1G.; 150.09 1 `,0,'10 iNtll ,a. 551 t db 5e'F C NEW PANELBOARD "DP2B" - __ _11__1.1__..__ �..____._.__._._ _111_1. ® pr i g 1 LASER �� _ PANEL E 3 BOX "CRPPAI" ` 1 I 1 i i .. � I , 11111111111111111 11111111111111 `'. 1 `. LEV lag * Woo EI5.l I� EI�I�I�I� ®I E®I I� �➢I1 1 .- E,.. � 1 i1.11 17111>,� lI ri i i i i mobilem'loi l® i iii oom mini' �m mI I � �i_h = now S aa 0 o% � .a / n�.11 0 Al iiti ii iltW • AF, U 4 . I I>sf).1... l.. V: .1, 14) 7. REFER TO SHEET DC -5 FOR CONTINUATION. 8. NEW 4" CONDUIT SLEEVE FOR PDF FEEDER CONDUCTORS TO PENETRATE NEW WALL. TWO CONDUIT SLEEVES PER PDF, EIGHTEEN TOTAL. fi.1 IS 1 .a'i..w't U.- tl- F sRl 150.151 150,15 150 .1 '1150 1 T 1 „l 1° 1H fil , vi • alttull•itttl kS.P NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. REMOVE THIS SECTION OF CABLE LADDER TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. REMOVE (16) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS FROM EXISTING PDF 68 NEW H -TAP LOCATION. (8) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE (18) NEW 4" CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR THRU WALL PENETRATION. REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR CONDUIT SLEEVE THRU WALL PENETRATION DETAIL. 5. REMOVE (16) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS FROM THE REMOVED PDF 70 TO MPDB. (8) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY. 6. REMOVE (16) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS FROM THE REMOVED PDF 72 TO MPDB. (8) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY. 9. NEW CONDUIT SLEEVES TO BE USED FOR FEEDING OF PDF 144.10 AND 165.09. EACH 4" SLEEVE SHALL HAVE (8) 350 MCM'S CABLES EITHER ( +) OR ( -). lnt 4. PROVIDE RUNWAY SUPPORT - B -LINE SB- 2113 -24 -GR OR APPROVED EQUAL NEWTON PRODUCT, AND MOUNTING FIRE RESISTANT WOOD BATTEN. PAINT WOOD BATTEN TO MATCH MOUNTING SURFACE. Y7 EX STING_ (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. '150.'10 ✓ EXISTING (16) -350 MCM ( +) AND ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM MPDB DU : � U 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INSULATION AND FIRE RETARDING FOAM INSIDE EMPTY (SPARE) CONDUIT SLEEVES AND THEN CAP BOTH ENDS FOR UNUSED CONDUIT SLEEVE PENETRATIONS 11. (18) -4" CONDUIT SLEEVE PENETRATIONS. (4- CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR PDF 144.10 AND 165.09, (12)- CONDUIT SLEEVES FOR (6) FUTURE PDF, AND (2) SPARE SLEEVES). 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL RE -USE EXISTING (16) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS, ((8) CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY), FROM EXISTING PDF 42 TO FEED PDF 144. CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT WIRE AT LOCATION OF NEW H -TAP CONNECTION. PULL CONDUCTORS FROM POINT INDICATED ON POWER CABLE LADDER TO OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. AFTER CONDUIT SLEEVE PENETRATIONS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED IN NEW WALL CONTRACTOR SHALL RE -FEED CONDUCTORS AND SPLICE USING H -TAP AT LOCATION INDICATED TO FEED PDF 144. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE WIRE FROM EXISTING PDF 68 TO POINT OF NEW H -TAP CONNECTION. PULL EXISTING CONDUCTORS FROM POINT INDICATED ON POWER CABLE LADDER TO OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. AFTER CONDUIT SLEEVE PENETRATIONS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED IN NEW WALL, CONTRACTOR SHALL RE -FEED CONDUCTORS AND SPLICE TO NEW (16) -350 MCM CONDUCTORS, ((8) CONDUCTORS PER POLARITY) AT NEW H -TAP LOCATION TO FEED PDF 165. '- PANEL PANEL a. "BPPA2" "' "BPPB2" PANEL "CRPPB1" J J EX. 1- 6L(12 -1) i-r TO RELOCATED PDF 144.10 TO RELOCATED PDF 165.09 NEW H -TAP iii ar3 b'. 173,0 1 1 1 1 1 - L NEW (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM H -TAP TO POP 1554 Gi E;tt 7.!5 F: W5:4 CiS J GS„ I 1 d.:1.) i 111 fa, NEW (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. r 1 TYP. T E � PDF 72 _ FORMER LOCATION OF PDF 72. 176,04 Fig tiFF 1 j MID PDF 79 ; �`' -- FORMER LOCATION OF PDF 70. I POWER CABLE 3RD TIER LADDER AT 12' -11. ALL LADDERS SHALL TOP AT WALL AND BE SUPPORTED BY WALL BRACKET. REFER TO DC -10. 1/5 0 1 a -1 '( 1 '� I hX � G7 i. 1 L ( ,' 1.114 11111;7 r MID PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -POWER CABLE LADDER NORTH 0 ANALASER ZONE 4 BOX T EXISTING PDF TO BE RELOCATED. I I 1/ MID NO SCALE PANEL. "ULPP1 -1" 1 /5.57 1 `0.L 13 u,l ll Ci,i 1i} 1i Fa AA 3.11 Ei uKi E:G1lJIPME N I RO rzlitsi -. J MID P EX. 1-6L(12-1) CABLE LADDER r MID 1 .., [ . :77 -, *:11 V1 11 1:1 1111 3,09 IVY 1 17 1: a_ 715.15 170.11 9 j i 7 [1 � I is 1 2 li air . AIF ttiYF .i aCrr - at a.r't31ii 41 17/.11 177.12 .111 14 .rI ..:r:lrt - s.1 .CF$7.u• Cii 1.. .1158 i1u'd ,'111 I '172,12 ...t'F:Ud rid .gi 000 000 00 0 000 0 EX. 1-6L(12-1) CABLE LADDER On 015 BATTERY 10 176,1:: 171 +.'1 4 1 (0.'15 176,153 1 MID L� - r ��1 - � m 174,04 1 'Y -ta 3 { p di• ) 1 .. J 1 d 1 41 -J 1 1 Y 1 1 f I. J... 3 d i. � i f [. 2. 174,11 174,12 ry d Ht, ii 'i1 -tom �.tr11�4ur Aka iii11j. 111111 ;.d . inF ii •SF'i 1l aS .nS 73.12 173.13 1,2.13 i1i 9:k'�1ii111 .a 2 11 451 Y.t -8C' f. "1'i 71 12 171 BATTERY 1B REFER TO DC -3 FOR CONTINUATION POWER CABLE CONDUIT SLEEVE DETAIL BATTERY 1A a., f, i yS {{ G i. �f 1 1 1 , rt [� .,� � r h. 7 . RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVILA FEB 057(109 PERMIT CENTER r J � d I /�: r i r� kl r 11 1 i2H CO la ..R lM p a tla'kE ,,a ,bV4 ktlr Rik a4g,a ar :z H,i .tP w.. aY �'J9 .ba nu5�1,1',Cfr EX. UNISTRUTAND SUSPENSION ROD FOR CABLE LADDER 3 nML 4 'l N.krA t cf.1'j 9- n "'.tlt1 21 19 �.l 5£;!'ai4 S f>f • i 4 '1:'1.15 171,1 1,'1 ,17 171.1 x REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED PR 01 2009 MATCHLINE DC CABLE LADDER SYMBOL LEGEND Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Cable Ladder to be II II 11 11 II " 11 11 11 11 removed. 11 II 11_ II IL Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 VVTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS It ENE Dow lj ti" w en 1- M Z 51"a ati in " ;/;...; < W ozw>. It E X :1:41sNe6?-:-.64NTWiAl:- 1°.1r i=k) LLI 00 (f) cf) Lu cC co ci) cir) (i) t.Q Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. DC-4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER, NORTH EX TERM PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. 1/2 "W UP F ND 1 "W DOWN Ta BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 ❑ EX. 16 "X12" BUS ❑ ❑ L__J 1- - FUT BATTERY 5B DOCOr'NECT --- 480Vt DC, 1200A 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ALL CABLE THAT WILL BE RE -USED. GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 10' -O" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. 1 C.B. 0; L SPDB- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) SPDEZ #1 EX. EXTERNAL +48V. RETURN BUS MPDB RECT. 13.FC1T 2 ❑ FUTURE F{ EMOAL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INST4LL Ofi BATTERY 4A CELLS121 -240. I I I I RECT. - - REG� C 4 ❑ I r W CO � J ij m 0 RECT. RECT. - _RECT. RFCT_ 6 8 9 - R EGT_ 10 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 DCGB -2 uuaui AGB -1 CRAG #27 DS81 31,3,35 MB c6) PO1I /E Ft FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA MBP FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA ««: < BRGB -1� ❑ ❑ EMI MI CRAG #28 DSA1 25,27,29 MBP ❑ NEW UPS 28 500 KVA 0.9 PF NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN (): 1. REFER TO SHEET DC -4 FOR CONTINUATION OF PDF FEEDER CONDUCTORS. 2. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 3. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 4. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 5. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 6. EXISTING 1 -6L CABLE LADDER TRANSITIONS FROM 12' -1" TO 9' -1 ". 7. INSTALL 2- 350MCM'S (THHN'S), 1- 3 /OGND. IN EACH OF (4) 2 -1/2" CONDUIT. REFER TO UPS 480V. DC ONE LINE DIAGRAM SHEET DC -10. 8. EXISTING BUS DUCT BRACING SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH NEW CABLE LADDER, MODIFY EXISTING BUSDUCT BRACING AS NECESSARY. MBP FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA L EX. 1 -6L i -eT RECT. - -9- -- RECT. I RECT. I RECT. - - 7 - - (q N re Z Q W U `i Li j !I I jIH1 I1 UI ,.._. EW 1 -6L(9 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 120$A. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. I I I I I 1 RECT. MPDB ER )X 0 CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING SPILL CONTAINMENT AND UNUSED TWO -TIER BATTERY RACK CURRENTLY ON SITE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ACID ABSORBANT PILLOWS AS WELL. NEWW_1_ 6L(9_i) RECT. RECT . RECL 10 I 8 I 6 RECT. _RECT 4 I 2 - SPDB #1 SPD # ass werilal21l2illl�ll 111l 11 ®1 01 0 ' M ® � I� ®I mi ni g lgol ospe,wi 1'i m ICI I�I� 1 siiiii so i iil ii ii® IUi I�IiiI® i! i ,rl� �Il�l l�l�i1ll1 ®1ll�I1I1li�l ', l m® ®� - ®® i EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) ii 111 II I Tml PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN —POWER CABLE LADDER — POWER ROOM EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) 1 J Doi -ors EX. BUS DUCT 1' L °J "CRPPA1" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCO'1NECt 480V. DC,11200A ( L __J EXISTI$IG TERM. PLANT #2 STRINC 1 ROW EXISTIP STRING EX. EXTERNAL I 1 +48V. RETURN BrS I 1 ROW 2 TIER -24 BATTERY # 2 TIER -24 BATTERY 0 TERM. PLANT #2 #4 x FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 L 3 - ,---------- - - - - -- ------ _-- __-- _--- -- - - ------- - - - - -- PANEL ANEL � PANEL "E3PPA2" "BPPB2" PANEL "CfPPB1" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED 1 APR 0 1 2009 DC CABLE LADDER Ci4y of Tukwila SYMBOL LEGEND LSQti Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. - o ir lrlr Indicates Cable Ladder to be II II II II II 11 11 11 11 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 2 3 4 Lic Nu 55959 /.< F. .t 1 \C GisTevo " -� ,�t 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 la i i N®� W� U1 II- u o► Z 5 IN4D M N o W le iNowb- w 4 u,® - in W Zw4 _ co s'; Q vJ L ` w `V (0 V Fac. Code :TYKWWA Drawn By I M PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- 12.08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. DC -5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - POWER ROOM EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 I STRING #2 2 ROW, 2T1ER -24 BATTERY r EX TERM PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. 1/2 "W UP F ND 1 "W DOWN Ta BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 ❑ EX. 16 "X12" BUS ❑ ❑ L__J 1- - FUT BATTERY 5B DOCOr'NECT --- 480Vt DC, 1200A 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ALL CABLE THAT WILL BE RE -USED. GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 10' -O" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. 1 C.B. 0; L SPDB- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) SPDEZ #1 EX. EXTERNAL +48V. RETURN BUS MPDB RECT. 13.FC1T 2 ❑ FUTURE F{ EMOAL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INST4LL Ofi BATTERY 4A CELLS121 -240. I I I I RECT. - - REG� C 4 ❑ I r W CO � J ij m 0 RECT. RECT. - _RECT. RFCT_ 6 8 9 - R EGT_ 10 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 DCGB -2 uuaui AGB -1 CRAG #27 DS81 31,3,35 MB c6) PO1I /E Ft FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA MBP FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA ««: < BRGB -1� ❑ ❑ EMI MI CRAG #28 DSA1 25,27,29 MBP ❑ NEW UPS 28 500 KVA 0.9 PF NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN (): 1. REFER TO SHEET DC -4 FOR CONTINUATION OF PDF FEEDER CONDUCTORS. 2. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 3. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 4. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 5. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 6. EXISTING 1 -6L CABLE LADDER TRANSITIONS FROM 12' -1" TO 9' -1 ". 7. INSTALL 2- 350MCM'S (THHN'S), 1- 3 /OGND. IN EACH OF (4) 2 -1/2" CONDUIT. REFER TO UPS 480V. DC ONE LINE DIAGRAM SHEET DC -10. 8. EXISTING BUS DUCT BRACING SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH NEW CABLE LADDER, MODIFY EXISTING BUSDUCT BRACING AS NECESSARY. MBP FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA L EX. 1 -6L i -eT RECT. - -9- -- RECT. I RECT. I RECT. - - 7 - - (q N re Z Q W U `i Li j !I I jIH1 I1 UI ,.._. EW 1 -6L(9 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 120$A. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. I I I I I 1 RECT. MPDB ER )X 0 CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING SPILL CONTAINMENT AND UNUSED TWO -TIER BATTERY RACK CURRENTLY ON SITE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ACID ABSORBANT PILLOWS AS WELL. NEWW_1_ 6L(9_i) RECT. RECT . RECL 10 I 8 I 6 RECT. _RECT 4 I 2 - SPDB #1 SPD # ass werilal21l2illl�ll 111l 11 ®1 01 0 ' M ® � I� ®I mi ni g lgol ospe,wi 1'i m ICI I�I� 1 siiiii so i iil ii ii® IUi I�IiiI® i! i ,rl� �Il�l l�l�i1ll1 ®1ll�I1I1li�l ', l m® ®� - ®® i EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) ii 111 II I Tml PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN —POWER CABLE LADDER — POWER ROOM EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) 1 J Doi -ors EX. BUS DUCT 1' L °J "CRPPA1" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCO'1NECt 480V. DC,11200A ( L __J EXISTI$IG TERM. PLANT #2 STRINC 1 ROW EXISTIP STRING EX. EXTERNAL I 1 +48V. RETURN BrS I 1 ROW 2 TIER -24 BATTERY # 2 TIER -24 BATTERY 0 TERM. PLANT #2 #4 x FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 L 3 - ,---------- - - - - -- ------ _-- __-- _--- -- - - ------- - - - - -- PANEL ANEL � PANEL "E3PPA2" "BPPB2" PANEL "CfPPB1" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED 1 APR 0 1 2009 DC CABLE LADDER Ci4y of Tukwila SYMBOL LEGEND LSQti Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. - o ir lrlr Indicates Cable Ladder to be II II II II II 11 11 11 11 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 2 3 4 Lic Nu 55959 /.< F. .t 1 \C GisTevo " -� ,�t 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 la i i N®� W� U1 II- u o► Z 5 IN4D M N o W le iNowb- w 4 u,® - in W Zw4 _ co s'; Q vJ L ` w `V (0 V Fac. Code :TYKWWA Drawn By I M PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- 12.08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. DC -5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - POWER ROOM EXISTING TERM. PLANT #2 I STRING #2 2 ROW, 2T1ER -24 BATTERY I EX TERM PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. 1/2 "W UP F ND 1 "W DOWN Ta BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 ❑ EX. 16 "X12" BUS ❑ ❑ L__J 1- - FUT BATTERY 5B DOCOr'NECT --- 480Vt DC, 1200A 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ALL CABLE THAT WILL BE RE -USED. GENERAL NOTES: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. CABLE LADDER SIZE REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. 1 -0L INDICATES 12" WIDE CABLE LADDER. 3. CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION HEIGHT REPRESENTED IN FEET AND INCHES. (10 -0) REPRESENTS 10' -O" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, MEASURED TO THE TOP OF THE CABLE LADDER. EXISTING EQUIPMENT ROOM HAS RAISED FLOOR AT 2' -3" HIGH. 4. ALL CABLE LADDER TO BE SOLID BAR, 2" STRINGER, PAINTED GRAY. 1 C.B. 0; L SPDB- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) SPDEZ #1 EX. EXTERNAL +48V. RETURN BUS MPDB RECT. 13.FC1T 2 ❑ FUTURE F{ EMOAL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INST4LL Ofi BATTERY 4A CELLS121 -240. I I I I RECT. - - REG� C 4 ❑ I r W CO � J ij m 0 RECT. RECT. - _RECT. RFCT_ 6 8 9 - R EGT_ 10 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 DCGB -2 uuaui AGB -1 CRAG #27 DS81 31,3,35 MB c6) PO1I /E Ft FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA MBP FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA ««: < BRGB -1� ❑ ❑ EMI MI CRAG #28 DSA1 25,27,29 MBP ❑ NEW UPS 28 500 KVA 0.9 PF NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN (): 1. REFER TO SHEET DC -4 FOR CONTINUATION OF PDF FEEDER CONDUCTORS. 2. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 3. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 165 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 4. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( -) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO MPDB. (48 VDC.) 5. EXISTING (8) -350 MCM ( +) CONDUCTORS FROM PDF 144 TO EXTERNAL RETURN BUS. (48 VDC.) 6. EXISTING 1 -6L CABLE LADDER TRANSITIONS FROM 12' -1" TO 9' -1 ". 7. INSTALL 2- 350MCM'S (THHN'S), 1- 3 /OGND. IN EACH OF (4) 2 -1/2" CONDUIT. REFER TO UPS 480V. DC ONE LINE DIAGRAM SHEET DC -10. 8. EXISTING BUS DUCT BRACING SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH NEW CABLE LADDER, MODIFY EXISTING BUSDUCT BRACING AS NECESSARY. MBP FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA L EX. 1 -6L i -eT RECT. - -9- -- RECT. I RECT. I RECT. - - 7 - - (q N re Z Q W U `i Li j !I I jIH1 I1 UI ,.._. EW 1 -6L(9 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 120$A. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. I I I I I 1 RECT. MPDB ER )X 0 CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING SPILL CONTAINMENT AND UNUSED TWO -TIER BATTERY RACK CURRENTLY ON SITE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ACID ABSORBANT PILLOWS AS WELL. NEWW_1_ 6L(9_i) RECT. RECT . RECL 10 I 8 I 6 RECT. _RECT 4 I 2 - SPDB #1 SPD # ass werilal21l2illl�ll 111l 11 ®1 01 0 ' M ® � I� ®I mi ni g lgol ospe,wi 1'i m ICI I�I� 1 siiiii so i iil ii ii® IUi I�IiiI® i! i ,rl� �Il�l l�l�i1ll1 ®1ll�I1I1li�l ', l m® ®� - ®® i EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) ii 111 II I Tml PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN —POWER CABLE LADDER — POWER ROOM EX. 1- 6L(9 -1) 1 J Doi -ors EX. BUS DUCT 1' L °J "CRPPA1" 1 FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCO'1NECt 480V. DC,11200A ( L __J EXISTI$IG TERM. PLANT #2 STRINC 1 ROW EXISTIP STRING EX. EXTERNAL I 1 +48V. RETURN BrS I 1 ROW 2 TIER -24 BATTERY # 2 TIER -24 BATTERY 0 TERM. PLANT #2 #4 x FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 L 3 - ,---------- - - - - -- ------ _-- __-- _--- -- - - ------- - - - - -- PANEL ANEL � PANEL "E3PPA2" "BPPB2" PANEL "CfPPB1" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED 1 APR 0 1 2009 DC CABLE LADDER Ci4y of Tukwila SYMBOL LEGEND LSQti Indicates future equipment to be installed. Heavy line indicates equipment face side. Indicates Existing Single Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Double Tier Cable Ladder. Indicates Existing Triple Tier Cable Ladder. - o ir lrlr Indicates Cable Ladder to be II II II II II 11 11 11 11 11 removed. Indicates New Cable Ladder to be installed. Indicates Water Fall (90° Outside Bend). RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 2 3 4 Lic Nu 55959 /.< F. .t 1 \C GisTevo " -� ,�t 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 la i i N®� W� U1 II- u o► Z 5 IN4D M N o W le iNowb- w 4 u,® - in W Zw4 _ co s'; Q vJ L ` w `V (0 V Fac. Code :TYKWWA Drawn By I M PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- 12.08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. DC -5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER CABLE LADDER - POWER ROOM MATCHLINE 0 0 II II 1 II II 1 11 11 1 11 11 1 I �t E. 1- 62(9 -1, 10 -7) €1SEi ffiJ! , J!! J !J11!1!i1!.!I! EX. 1 -6 L(9 -1 10 -7) EX. PDF 42 4� _ 1■ 0 _ EX . 1- • L 1■ I ■ 1 /�I /J/JI►�J ■ ■ ■ I S�J.t.11 ■ ZJ I X 1 I�J17J ■ i � I 1111 lrm ■ 1 i■ 11 !6 .. II 1 I ■11 1 iii • ®f 111k111 lil 1111111°7111111 .uz.r _ t x:s...,. in IN i 11 11 1 11 11 1 I � I i ,� .... .:,;. ,. ,. -,.:, !:, „ ". .. >G. ,; {�4 L { ' .T .l - .t, i; - , I . { e , ,..�1?F ' • ,,: r . , s,1' :X- : k.Y l ., 1 l '1+ 1, n. ....... . .... { ! Ir K'r •t11 I r, �, .{ I A ri r. 'te d,J ��L: I ! t{ ■I ■I ■I ■I I ., ,.;1 _ t . r ,[ .r I , � � ■ ■I ■I■ ■� ■lil ■i■ �� I wJfirl!V Yt J I'JI/J•'JI�J1>iJ•Sr//1i�1 �� 1 { 5Jl Ii*Ii *i*ildi $ ?v EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) _ _ _ _ _ _ NEW #2 /0 LATERAL FRAME WORK GROUND � _ _ �` N D LO A B TTOM TIER, TYP. ®r ° w _ ° ° ° ;� t , O GROUN OP T O �/ ' ,, '., . ;� .. r=r 1 , r„ `i il 1 1.16 3 ; 1r ,w _ I Iwl_ ll 1 , all Iwl_Iwr�r w l w l °I > •,f ,; ,, \. �, r�!; ,•Shin �17 {::J I. s,,,5 ,.1.,�_# �s..� ldf t �, -. 1: ii 1, .� � .. � ' '5i -13i� _ �I� �k+ �� � b � ��I,I,I, �I ■I�Il,l ■I� ■��! !i■I■Ii i� 1... _ ill ■h I IIIhl®III I i 1y - :JI1 "!��If/�!�JrIIJ®JIIJrJ IrJ?+1L AIi 'i7J!a�i�.�il /.l /JG71�►JIIJ�J rJ� ='=A' �J:w I^11r� I�I�,I2V= A��4li l��J�I ►�IIJ�I�/I !�i - am ►1JI=J �J1 IPI G II�, A ��I�� ,a - , , � :.•..In��RI j Ij!!I'�'yIoNI Ir_ -__ -1 - 1 .wn w -_ _�..' lcI wn.. - /n_.1 ��Iw- - �l 1 t EX1 -6 (9 -1, 10_7) � . / 111111 l 1 6 L(� ,� 0�_r� _ E� _ EX. 1- 62(9 , 1 0 7) J: ' �'� ■ � - �� II 1111111111111■ 1 1111 ■ 111111111 11111111111111 ® 111 11111■ ■�I ■■ ■■'!!!'! ■! ■ ■■■!!■it ■, ■ L PJ !i ,"1■ 11 I M ■ ■ ■ ■ � �,� �J!pt�1.IL1r1JIJIJ /1JI1J Ili�1.IrJrJ1I1JIIIJ r.s -_ . I'1J!'Jl�J•.�1.I�Irr11/1J ,,•• - -•-- } I 1 .1/1JII1JI�1Jt - _- _- .w.. -..-- .-- w -...- __.1-- ..- n.w.v -. • -- - -t 'fL�1�11I1.1 ►1 I .. ..w..- .w -.w -- 7J -.- w 3� t - -_ -- _._ _w. - -..w. • -- -. _ .- ..wa. -. rw 1 _w�L ti f ;. e "l i>; �I•11 J TYP.© EX. 500 MCM i? _ _ . t L(9- -7) � EX 1 -6 1, 10 MAIN FRAME ;� �■ 1 1 1 t I t 1 I! ! I ! ! ! N _ EX. 1- �L(9- 1 � - _ ___ _ �1_ _ _ -_ - r -rt.� { I 1 1 I 1 S ! t I 1 1 1 11111'1 ■I ■I ■I ■I ■I ®®I ®®I ■I ®1111111 ®I ■I ■1 ■I ■ ■I ■I ■■ ■ � IIII 1111 ®1111111 ®1111 '''I�111.11111111 ■ 111■11!■!i ■■il■!■ l ■i �■ r � IIJI T! ttJr l■■ i 11■■ � .'J♦ �JRi�Jr.III �JrJ ■■ � � Ilol ■ 1l �� �, �■ ') - - -_ -- -w. r_ Ir � e i � i '. i�lr/17►JAI7/AI'Jt!�/ I�1�7.ICJIII►1/7J 7IJI/�' /�I�i�I. IJ/ r111IJ7VJ�J- . -. rw. w. +. � I /_JI7JI!'J!7J• ��� /r1 IJrJI!!71 �1� 9rJl'7JlIl.vJt . _ .._..wn._. "+.- • .__' -_ _--- - ..w..- .n- -f+..- - ._._ -f -.-� -w 1._..- .1._. -x - -_- - - - _- 1__1-_. - _.._-_- _- �_....__ _w -- 1- w+1. -- ^r -� _-r -.. _ ' ^i - « a4b-r l .. .•, I.� .. t rSir; G., :kSd-^ -�,.r F.E�I: sir,: Y.S ,,u :r. . +.i,l `d9 Stt dS {3�9t �..�S,.f"�ti[ tcy: T : ➢ _.. .... _...._ ._. _..._ _ Ix{h- "ti.ffY' -i9 ,d R:1 -_. +E.3 J,1a d J .uk ➢„f SIA�,h�t .§r f. � . -.. _. ... ii7 ''I L1... I .. 7 e � I - 1 I EX. 1- 6L(9 -1; 10 -7) - - �. I I I® Ill■ iii■ �i® I® �® 1■ ��l® �11��1® 1!�f�l!l�T /i�l�`�I:�I��l�l�l!l�,�[�I;��I iNli rJiJ /i'JVJi 7 wl�as t►11rir , 12V� � yr -- � /i�JiVJVJ17/ . .'INJ1�71YJPil - iiVl{IJ�' t i I, _ , a ^ -'1 ! I t EX. 1 -6 L(9 -1 10 -7) i 9 -1 0 -7 ( 1 ) , r,;�; � I ■ICI ■I■ III ■l■ ■1111 ■ ■1�1�1 ■�■■1rll� ■��� i ■iiuu u 1 1 ■l ■lll ■■ �1�� ■Ill�i ■II I.� ill _��l ■i ®h . SYJ• IIJISIIL/ J1rlJlgnl '1J!�Jt!i•J�S�1•SIJntII1/ I1 /tGnt�1J!�JI'J• �1.!IJ�Ir11 rlJl/ .. .I �J II _ ►_.._.,._.1. -.. _. -._- _- - _I -w r_.a. -.._.. _..._- -- - ._.1-- .._.._.._. w.a -- -.__ _ -r �� --- ' � w I. +�� � �, _- _.. -- ._ -1 -_ 1 ._. 1 ._.._ -n_ -1_ s - -..__. a_n- _.._.v_- ._ -1_ .._ -.__. w _..._ -Iw.- ..- __I_ 1 - v.. �.v.'L,xi a .02 144.03 144 04 144 05 144 0h 4.0 147 144.08 144.09 144.'10 144.1 1 144.'12 144.13 144.'14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.18 ! NEW #2 /0 LATERAL FRAME WORK GROUND -1�r: LON GROUND LOOP AT BOTTOM TIER TYP. EX. 1 -6L 9 -1 10 -7 . U11 ! i ! , __ _ ; _i_.- i i ���I�f��1 ■ ■I ■�i ■i ■I ll ��.�t_ I_ i ►1 11111111111 .i 1111111111111111111111111UHl�Rl ■1 1 aIJII� J .ice r /�I 9a.1 I' �>tsl I E J �17J117J #J!'I /'JI►.!V9 .Ir/ II. +IJ J , 11�1�� ,r .Y ®GIJJII YJM 1.6Y.I.�Ir ' P� ISJ ti� J t�i V ,VJIIY7V: i i�IOII 6 rVJ ai IWJrIiiViFII• 1 Jl�•Y Vyl . 11. :: : I: i '+ ■i■ ■i ii ■i�i�U I ■IIiIII ■UIii ■IIII� UI���I UI III IIIN s - 1■I . h r "_. ._ ..__.:Iil I i ■i'�i�hi i i. . , -. s lit if�aTii�Ji7i il�lat¶fiSGr�i.lir�'!2 . -- : �G�i.�"�! �- lir�t.t�!r�JI 17 P? YJ !!�l/JIJIIJIJI11JI7JIi= JI�S�I�1 ��71T�ii =�7 � �I��I wr7 �!�i��!r �!�li�.r� . �r+ r�I� -� ..- ..- - -. . _.L- ..- �1-- .0 -.__ ..wa.... .-n. .1 -- _.- - ...._ -�w.w. - -. r- .1. -..w- w-.- ��- EX. 500 MCM X. ©TYP. MAIN FRAME D - © WORK GROUN m. 1.1-_1 ,.f.q ,.� � , a 111 ■11111 ■1■ 111■ l■ i l■ I _ l� - I ■1 ■1111111 ■Il ■Il ■1 ■I f. 11111 _ 1 � � I.t.i V� �i T 4 '. 1 .,...Lr. v4 YU k { SJl.t ,iJ „,u:t:.l u. ,vW,d_Ltr.vk . z.. szi�:. w: tF/ � .+�r ,�;f�,t�aew� ,v.t.c "z w,lwt ,.;:vut;sdwt,.ac�,.a5r +_.u.�trtr'tzs ��I '; sallrYla_1 .aru.re� w rda it�llia-.la� r.rr.rrlwirl. rr �.IIrr1 w .ra.wlr. rl� wlwraF.� r�llraiwl . 11111111 1 . 1111 . ... lIlIlIlill 111011 ■1���� = -LWI_ ■■ 11111111111 .111 ■1111111 ■1l ■11111 I 1 1 ..1�' _r11 ; EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) a.sraL.:w:.6d ,u.wYw [ +/ "wJIk,ASW S6.. u^:' Ji. 3c. 4t ..urLifi'LaS,�.,,,:LCtaE4 s[L.a•.,G i+:a`,F;a .a.u.5ub'. 167.Q1 167.02 167.03 167.04 167.05 167.06 167.07 167.08 EX. 1-6L(9-1 10 -7 164.04 164.05 164.06 164.07 164.08 i tie +. �.. wiG4: k3. l., dc. dsS. WG.nk,nndL_Wa,frbs'�'YtU"mY..Cw {,.mom- III�`.SL3.Ii, �G.f.,aJ.:id�'lla,lYf5sJ.7vSY EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 -7) . .J 101.1'4 ' "i S�a3U•F ! 15 1 €.tr..i 39.17 t � ➢F,Y !, r .4 o-d 47J L, vn ssx b n - .: _. _.... ..5 !9. IGi e,RXa1}lf.xSl ...: _.,... ._ hr~ esa4.'i'.L .L wvru.d;IG•YSrRJzut .:ilna..uY+tit aa. -rd.> 1..,- 167.09 167.10 167.11 167.12 167.13 167.14 167.15 167.16 167.17 6L 9 1 1D -7 EX.1 ( ) w I ri 1 1 11 I I I .i I�. I 1 L � I� �, � 1111111111111111111111111111 1!Il111. � 111 i r ,,Ili I . ,. -.e � v�.r .. :..,uew : ;Z{(_ 1,..P, ' 6�a'n t.p3d .+rtbuY, aL,ad.Pln.Ltz,t i.;kv`l4 LM1ti�stlli`dwY_1GY.a.dls�`..0 a16. di..J+6`N3G, 1_n'a'EL..72fS ?SSI+ klrw_.sl o-.231utiS.su, . I' I O KVA - ---. . . _t 1 .1_Is 1_1_1 1 u rr ..11 _ _I_i_I_I_I_I_I_I_I_I_I_tl_rM rrlr ua 1rr11a_all_I_I_t_I_ wlrrl_ _t_ t_ _ _ I_(_ _t_ ■ IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 11111111111111111 111■111■1■11111■1■111 11 111111111111111111111111 1111 111 1111 1 ®Iil 111 II EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10 -7) ,. ! EX. #210 LATERAL FRAME WORK GROUND ON GROUND LOOP AT BOTTOM TIER, TYP. . - t .., ---. -..- .. ,..GLGk.v�� 231, L;atu<b<kt;t lsf_.+s,iitd3i 164.11 164.12 164.13 164.14 rFil AI�'i -,u - -„• -1,• -1,• ti HPMiEN T FLOOR T - lr 1 II GENERAL NOTES: 1. H -TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALLCABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW /RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON- HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED ". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. REFER TO DC -7 FOR CONTINUATION SCALE: 1/4" = :... --- - _:[ :, :: " ,:: = : :_:IL: : :r:C ::«: ::= ::: 1:1- :: - :IL_ :: : r1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING FRAMEWORK GROUNDING AT POINT SHOWN TO ALLOW FOR INEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE OPTION OF RE -USING EXISTING FRAMEWORK GROUNDING SHOWN TO BE REMOVED OR PROVIDING NEW CONDUCTORS FOR NEW WORK. IF CONDUCTOR IS RE -USED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT EXISTING GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FOR DEFECTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 3. #6 AWG GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM PDF FRAME TO FRAMEWORK GROUNDING. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL FOLLOW POWER CABLE LADDER FROM PDF FRAME UNTIL GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IS TO HORIZONTAL CABLE LADDER. AT THIS POINT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL DROP DOWN TO LOWEST COMMUNICATIONS CABLE LADDER AND SPLICE WITH EXISTING #210 AWG FRAMEWORK GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 4. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE FRAMEWORK GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM PDF 42. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE CONDUCTOR TO H -TAP CONNECTION. _L _ _ i: - L: :it: :i.I - -. -rr PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING il / d r "f i _I_ _ afar_ _ r®.1_I _.wrl_I_ 1111,1,1 �1 ■ ■ 111 111111 ■■I■Ii1■1111■11■8■ EX. 1- 6L(9 -1, 10 - 7) I I {{ ! 1 I �I / I l t 1 t i t. ! ( .1 -0.7 1 1. d- v. nIf �A'. X17 F.,3 At .dl t9�iIN3 .un v SOUTH NEW BONDING JUMPER AS INDICATED. ffllal DETAIL NOT TO SCALE . f / t 3 G7 mritFx • BURNDY H -TAP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR OR APPROVED EQUAL. - EXISTING RAISED FLOOR GROUND GRID REFER TO DC -7 FOR CONTINUATION �G s i ! } `1 f t . 1 3 -a -.k � f.e .,Y ,.Y +.•dr u v.:i5 snl 1 5 Shi F.T1 r� Mw b. I ".rl ryv 2 F9 - , I I ____. :- .__.__._._1Z_._ MJL i._� _. _..__iL_ __ __.:iE __.___...�I_. -_. , . _` 1'S j i DRAWING SYMBOLS r • INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L _ J TO BE INSTALLED. n HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. 'nr INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. ( INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H -TAP CONNECTION MATCHLINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPUANGE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 052009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 2 3 4 . j Lic N+ 41559 F /ONAL Ex I res I Proj. Mgr.: KCM 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 Drawn By: iM, PS, ZJ Sheet No. .1 DC -6 Fac. COde :TYKWWA Designed By: KCM, DL, Z, 95% REVIEW 100% CD AE D. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - SOUTH FUTURE PANEL "DP4 MATCHLINE - 1- 1DCGB-2 te. BRGB-1 i wlorAmow PAI . I -1111111 -11 11 M 1101111 =I II 1 1111 • MIN 111 0 11:7 A Kit 4 lit Nil' 1:6 f'• 1 _ 1 11 0111111,11111 011111101111111111110111 din 4 EX. #210, w11111111101 0 011111 .111111111 0 11111MOIL 0 AIWA, or Imam: •1 II I II I 11 II II 1 1 II , I I II I II I II I II 1 II II II 1 1 II I II I II I , II . •nrAtl• .411.1,411/.1,..WI.E.VM.1111411r.dwo■ 1 1 11 1 1 II 1111111! II I II I II II NEW -SECURITY ROOM 0 'EQUIPMENT FLOOR 0 , II II I II II I II II 1 II II I II II I , II II I II II I I I I EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) II II I II II I 0 "TrM1 II II I II II I 0 II II 1 11 11 1 0 - EX. 500 MCM 11 - I •••■••• • III 1 1 4 4t < u.. I II I •••■ .. 1 1 1 1 1 ••••,. I I / ...11___IL....11_ II II X ), \ / _..10 1 0 0 105 1111111.•117111, I 1 1 11 11 1 1 11 11 11 11 11 I 1 1 1 1 11 II II 1 1 II II II II II 1 1 I 1 I II • 0 diltr I49/.• Aratrollit NEW 0-6L(9-1) NEW #2/0 LATERAL FRAME VVORK GROUND ON GROUND LOOP AT BOTTOM TIT, TYP. x. 1-6L(9 1, 10 7) I 1 II I I II I E a t . 1t3. 400 ie .CL 41 id- i'Mt td.tal...2tt IN -id t741t if.0 • Ed- '21k , -11tt.t 0•42 • ttA:tt.f' 4.:A1.01« ;Ai ttUt $ Zit t EX. 1-6L 9 1, 10-7 ..it.t...M-4 Vett 41.• )1 1 ,.). •1 SO. 150.06 q ' 50 10 .12 -0.13 1 hEt 14 150.15 150.16 150.1'7 15( NEW #2/0, TY 111N7M 11 Immo i11111111 111111111111 111111111111 1111 .1 lik4IIPPIMIF25:1MILSTIMIMMIRSIMMI!Wer: LVIM!-172.50M13125121112-9MIITEEMLMILT.MAMILVAM117.1itfig.!BUir2i,T22.741,7212!ILTEMOP-IV.J.721M,MMIESTLW.W.Mr2ZIIVAMiLMIE;MIELE/2W2, 711111 / 1 TYP. 1111111 III , imiriDFAImmipirepmpropvio!mpmumnrimpammilywnrumuntriveirm!rm!timmulrArivFamprign!ammismErvpvatmEnvmpiglartapv..,,,,,,,,.. ! .,,,,,,„,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„, : , riew EX. 1-6L(9-1 10-7) 11111 1 0 1 r TYP.0 EX. 1-6L(9-1 10-7) UJ 1111 I_LIJM111111111111111111111 1 1111111111111111111111111111 65 11111 Mal 1111116.1 1 1 Nom inim ■ .linsoul , tttfin tlfflre kti6 nSLMMET.imemraIMILMIME-reaMMIVA. 44 Trilr/IrrilM"21•2"!rlmr2rmvm°'"'"" WO 245immirAm" ttttl ;.L. : IPZIT 21.17,,MTIMIWIEWRIERmli..M11 i f ° mill! r. !II Ira 11-Kli 'IN/ •■••am...)..r...•■■• MN 1 50. (), 1 50, 150,f 50. 150.09 150.1'; 15( 5 IIII Ell Mg moo 11111111111111111111 111 1111111 11111111111111111 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111!111111111111111111111111111111111ww- MMIMMOMMWrat emimerP9-.-tece.re,vt remememm.;maim. MIN NM il".1 F1) WI alihWi m mm om UN 1 11111 111 1 MUM 0 1111111111 1 1 MO . '11\ T M 11 nomml 1111111 hill 1 11 111 1 1 bump moo T, onsoullonn 11 11 010 1 1111111111 1111111111111101111111111111111 1111111111111 USN U MW 11111111111111111110111111111111111MIT 11111111" - AGB-1 GENERAL NOTES: 1. H-TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW/RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON-HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. DCGB-1 - • - N • • - • • - • ■ - • - - • • - • y . 1 • • - • n - • - • I 1 FGB-1 FUTURE NEW PANELBOARD PANEL "DP3A'\ 'DP2B" ANALASER ZONE 3 BOX EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 1111111111 .... ..... [1 ftr PANEL 'CRPPA1' NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE EXISTING FRAMEWORK GROUNDING AT POINT SHOWN TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE OPTION OF RE-USING EXISTING FRAMEWORK GROUNDING SHOWN TO BE REMOVED OR PROVIDING NEW CONDUCTORS FOR NEW WORK. IF CONDUCTOR IS RE-USED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT EXISTING GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FOR DEFECTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 3. RELOCATED EXISTING 500 MCM GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM EXISTING AGB-1 TO NEW AGB-2. CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE PLENTY OF LENGTH IS LEFT ON CONDUCTOR TO COMPLETE RELOCATION OF LINE. 4. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE FRAMEWORK GROUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM EXISTING AND REMOVED PDF'S 68,70, AND 72. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE CONDUCTOR TO H-TAP CONNECTION. ii■m.• ? mom . NEW 48" • . .. rn E . 0 AGB-2 MI . ,.. II I Itallaill olilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiilliiiiiiiiiiiiiiNiiiiilliiiiiilliillitiiiiilliWy.:a lir ::;:,..r.l_vlrt.vtr.v,,...r,p it L,4t 1,,,...... EY. i !-;Iii-lk .i'd -61-L 7 7 • , .■•• .. • ■ ,•., is lir) Min i 1 EX. 1-6L(9 10-7) Ix. , ,i:: e.. if..', 1 .,%-144. YSrl.at i'tt7 10 dia V./l tt.tt:' tlit::et2 IVS l, 4,1.',' ,`11.1stitt.,M rel 1 1 F L , 1 .- ----- ii" 1 w , (3) tIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIEPI"M ' '''' D 0 tVe121.021,3.21=1=irAfIrmimmfrAmMIMMIVIATEL.IPMIti.V.72.M.MaMiESILIMIMIL02-r412!Bizemr2m.m.imeromemmor_smummimit,. ....---Fir Ell EX. 1-6L(9 10-7) VI 0.4-13-0 7/A 'NI ti.t1-471 *44W %.SA ed,11 fk- Wa tz-va.11:4-■v,1 z-1.1 ; 41.1(4.21- Mir "al' co.:a I I 111111011111111 I 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111w ,- viii 4t 0 111 11111111 II 11111 II 11111 111 11111111111111111-wm-_,W. REFER TO DC-6 FOR CONTINUATION • 1 •. 1 1 L. IMO f."1) EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) ft, L1 w 0 PANEL 'CRPPB1' 111 , • PANEL 7 PANEL "BPPA2" "BPPB2" EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) : -: EX. PDF 72 1 ,, (41 te11 .41 tai11 I- - EX. PDF 70 1 1:1,111. tiLl ?el 1 1 1 : ' 1 Ij 1 1 11 I'I'iiI lE 111111111 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 -L 1 1 EQUipMEN"1: ROOM r EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 PANEL 111111111101 L . . • XFMR BATTERY 1D BATTERY 1C BATTERY 18 BATTERY 1A "ULPP1-4--" .... .. ... T ANALASER I ZONE 4 BO* EX 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) EX. 1-6L r 9-1, 10-7 EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 PDF hilID EX. 1-6L 9-1 10-7 i IV1 1• 1 MI0 1 . 1 . 1 1 111111 1 1 0111111111 - e , i.0 ia '21 We a Usl, ffi % V.H --ial:-.M-41:4HV21-.T.A SA C11 AO a fi:4',0- ik2. 44 :■%51 1A.5 1- ' ai 1 • 1 1 1 0 1 1 rtti &I alJ 0.1 Et • 1 ' get! :15 M ' tal 1'4 :EA a tta ritt6 I 73.01 173,02 1 73.03 173.04 173.05 173.06 '173.07 173.0a 173.09 1 73.10 173.11 173.12 173.13 173.14 17 13.1 '373.16 1111 ,, IMO EX. 1-6L(9-1, 10-7) 604 110M5 I • 76.08 176 1'76 08 17'6.09 178.10 17611 176.12 17(:;. 13 176,14 11'6 15 176.16 1/6.17 173.18 1 Alt-rl'a':4:,. 1112 410 41Yi itit-1.13-113 Wtt T111. ,U 4i9 1U -7.0i.1,11 5. lie -TA 41',1 • '' LEL11. EX. 1-6L , 10-7 1 1 SW 2'4 EU- ■.1.31-14.:W 14 1- .. -En W iktt 11 k.2 4,1d W4- iiii1.1L1 4D-U.i.11-'4 a. R4. ±0. a 41 , .1-14- ,:1:6 4 u si -ett att. 1L.111111 ., il 1715, 0' I 1 '75.02 . 17 1 5.03 175,04 176.05 175.06 175.07 1'75.08 175.09 1., 75.10 76.11 175.12 17'1 1 "I 75.14 176.15 175 16 '1'75. 'I 7 '175.13 _ ... .. . .. EX. #210 LATERAL FRAME WORK GROUND ON GROUND LOOP AT BOTTOM TIER, TYP. EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 MINIMIONNIIMMUNKIN 1 EX. 1-6L 9-1, 10-7 IH 111 Ad Et ". tt4.114..1 a'al f »11 Vt4,t:.Q. tIttitt 4,3•Ta p- 'i1i-lii : ■•• ri - 18 1 ' (; 5 ,) REFER TO DC-6 FOR CONTINUATION (/8 7 • UPS-1 1.)09015 111111Ma DRAWING SYMBOLS r - a l INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L J TO BE INSTALLED. n HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. 1 1 INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H-TAP CONNECTION 1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 0 1 2009 City of Tukwila r"NIG DIVISION I RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS NAG MAIN o v WAS!' 1:7 Lic. No. ,.9 6 /ONALO - Fac. Code:TYKWWA 111 • 11111111111112 111111111111111, Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ . . 1 111111111111111111.1,101■SIP Designed By: Kci'M DL, ZJ 11110111 111111•1111111111111111114111 , Proj. Mgr.: KUM 1 01-05-09 2 01-15-09 3 01-26-09 4 02-02-09 Revision NIMBI Date: 12-12-08 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET MIN Project No. WIA. 08093 Sheet No. DC-7 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - NORTH I 1111 II 111 FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 �_ -- ---- -M -- - - 1 C.B. EX. 16 "X12" BUS DUCT - -_� „y ❑ ; ❑ EX. 1 /2 "WUP AND 1 "W DOWN T BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE BATTERY 5B DOCONINECT --480V DC, 1200A I I L ___ r i L SPDk- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) MPDB RECT. RFC 1T 2 REC.L 4 FUTURE PANEL "DP5A' ❑ inn GENERAL NOTES: 1. H -TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM POWER CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW /RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON - HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED ". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. r _RECT 6 6. EXISTING GROUNDING FOR ALL RECTIFIERS, MPDB'S, AND ALL SPDB'S SHALL REMAIN. FUTURE FILMO9AL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INSTILL Oit BATTERY 4A CELLSI 121 -2 i 40. RECT RECT. .1 a= T 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A AGB- 1 DCGB -2 anal CRAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 FUTURE PANEL "DP4B' miu Raiomt' mma& mdi7itsmmWam4m Lk wum"liC FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA PpyVER ROOM FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA CRAC f!28 DSA1`25,27,29 aomomeamtlon SidmumuAilw.u+i amfi' mm ID3Lm SkitWum PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN BRGB -1 FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA WwifirtmUf tuff if ! I gif NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 2. CONTINUATION OF EXISTING #210 GROUND BUS CONDUCTOR FROM DCGB -1. NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF MBP • EX. 2/0 LATERAL GROUND r i ..__ 12- iM,137U Mk tM EktA k;3",yi� 3Y76UMt6Y€?fi'Fd ® - e FGB -1 E)ATIER.Y.RACK_ RAITERYRACK ECT. ECL 10 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. D, 120pA. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. RECT. I RECT. RECT nY: RECT. — 7 - - - T- 4 .� o DCGB -1 - Wi■ 1 apes EW 1 -6L(9- NEW #6 GND. FOR \--NEW #6 GND. FOR RECT R.FCT RECT. _RECT 8 ----------u--------- E 3 BOX --' MPDB 1 1 NEW PANELJBOARD I FRAMEWORK GROUNDING —POWER ROOM T _ SPDB - - SP DB #1 I #1 It ' ❑ i ;ND. FOR Y RACK L ° FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCONNECT' 480V. DC,114200P1— 1 1 1 L - -J Lti PANEL "BPPA2” PANEL 'CRPPB1" PANEL "BPPB2" bo 015 C1. FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 rt �, DRAWING SYMBOLS r . 1 INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L _ J TO BE INSTALLED. TT HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. T1 INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H -TAP CONNECTION CODE COMPLIANCE I APP OV D APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 11 3 1OO r. 0 4®� w 0 , ei 1-u'0% Z 5 M IN N ®; i wq ww is Y w� W® �w� a >Jo w ® Zmo Sheet No. DC -8 Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - POWER ROOM EXIS=646 STRIN 1 ROW TERM. #2 . #3 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER 24 BATTERY BATT" EXISTI STRIN r, 1 ROW, G TERM. PLANT #2 #4 2 TIER 24 BATTERY FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 �_ -- ---- -M -- - - 1 C.B. EX. 16 "X12" BUS DUCT - -_� „y ❑ ; ❑ EX. 1 /2 "WUP AND 1 "W DOWN T BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE BATTERY 5B DOCONINECT --480V DC, 1200A I I L ___ r i L SPDk- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) MPDB RECT. RFC 1T 2 REC.L 4 FUTURE PANEL "DP5A' ❑ inn GENERAL NOTES: 1. H -TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM POWER CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW /RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON - HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED ". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. r _RECT 6 6. EXISTING GROUNDING FOR ALL RECTIFIERS, MPDB'S, AND ALL SPDB'S SHALL REMAIN. FUTURE FILMO9AL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INSTILL Oit BATTERY 4A CELLSI 121 -2 i 40. RECT RECT. .1 a= T 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A AGB- 1 DCGB -2 anal CRAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 FUTURE PANEL "DP4B' miu Raiomt' mma& mdi7itsmmWam4m Lk wum"liC FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA PpyVER ROOM FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA CRAC f!28 DSA1`25,27,29 aomomeamtlon SidmumuAilw.u+i amfi' mm ID3Lm SkitWum PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN BRGB -1 FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA WwifirtmUf tuff if ! I gif NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 2. CONTINUATION OF EXISTING #210 GROUND BUS CONDUCTOR FROM DCGB -1. NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF MBP • EX. 2/0 LATERAL GROUND r i ..__ 12- iM,137U Mk tM EktA k;3",yi� 3Y76UMt6Y€?fi'Fd ® - e FGB -1 E)ATIER.Y.RACK_ RAITERYRACK ECT. ECL 10 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. D, 120pA. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. RECT. I RECT. RECT nY: RECT. — 7 - - - T- 4 .� o DCGB -1 - Wi■ 1 apes EW 1 -6L(9- NEW #6 GND. FOR \--NEW #6 GND. FOR RECT R.FCT RECT. _RECT 8 ----------u--------- E 3 BOX --' MPDB 1 1 NEW PANELJBOARD I FRAMEWORK GROUNDING —POWER ROOM T _ SPDB - - SP DB #1 I #1 It ' ❑ i ;ND. FOR Y RACK L ° FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCONNECT' 480V. DC,114200P1— 1 1 1 L - -J Lti PANEL "BPPA2” PANEL 'CRPPB1" PANEL "BPPB2" bo 015 C1. FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 rt �, DRAWING SYMBOLS r . 1 INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L _ J TO BE INSTALLED. TT HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. T1 INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H -TAP CONNECTION CODE COMPLIANCE I APP OV D APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 11 3 1OO r. 0 4®� w 0 , ei 1-u'0% Z 5 M IN N ®; i wq ww is Y w� W® �w� a >Jo w ® Zmo Sheet No. DC -8 Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - POWER ROOM EX. TERMPLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. #• 1 EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER 24 BATTERY FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 �_ -- ---- -M -- - - 1 C.B. EX. 16 "X12" BUS DUCT - -_� „y ❑ ; ❑ EX. 1 /2 "WUP AND 1 "W DOWN T BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE BATTERY 5B DOCONINECT --480V DC, 1200A I I L ___ r i L SPDk- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) MPDB RECT. RFC 1T 2 REC.L 4 FUTURE PANEL "DP5A' ❑ inn GENERAL NOTES: 1. H -TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM POWER CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW /RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON - HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED ". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. r _RECT 6 6. EXISTING GROUNDING FOR ALL RECTIFIERS, MPDB'S, AND ALL SPDB'S SHALL REMAIN. FUTURE FILMO9AL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INSTILL Oit BATTERY 4A CELLSI 121 -2 i 40. RECT RECT. .1 a= T 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A AGB- 1 DCGB -2 anal CRAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 FUTURE PANEL "DP4B' miu Raiomt' mma& mdi7itsmmWam4m Lk wum"liC FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA PpyVER ROOM FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA CRAC f!28 DSA1`25,27,29 aomomeamtlon SidmumuAilw.u+i amfi' mm ID3Lm SkitWum PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN BRGB -1 FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA WwifirtmUf tuff if ! I gif NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 2. CONTINUATION OF EXISTING #210 GROUND BUS CONDUCTOR FROM DCGB -1. NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF MBP • EX. 2/0 LATERAL GROUND r i ..__ 12- iM,137U Mk tM EktA k;3",yi� 3Y76UMt6Y€?fi'Fd ® - e FGB -1 E)ATIER.Y.RACK_ RAITERYRACK ECT. ECL 10 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. D, 120pA. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. RECT. I RECT. RECT nY: RECT. — 7 - - - T- 4 .� o DCGB -1 - Wi■ 1 apes EW 1 -6L(9- NEW #6 GND. FOR \--NEW #6 GND. FOR RECT R.FCT RECT. _RECT 8 ----------u--------- E 3 BOX --' MPDB 1 1 NEW PANELJBOARD I FRAMEWORK GROUNDING —POWER ROOM T _ SPDB - - SP DB #1 I #1 It ' ❑ i ;ND. FOR Y RACK L ° FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCONNECT' 480V. DC,114200P1— 1 1 1 L - -J Lti PANEL "BPPA2” PANEL 'CRPPB1" PANEL "BPPB2" bo 015 C1. FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 rt �, DRAWING SYMBOLS r . 1 INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L _ J TO BE INSTALLED. TT HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. T1 INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H -TAP CONNECTION CODE COMPLIANCE I APP OV D APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 11 3 1OO r. 0 4®� w 0 , ei 1-u'0% Z 5 M IN N ®; i wq ww is Y w� W® �w� a >Jo w ® Zmo Sheet No. DC -8 Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - POWER ROOM EX. #• 1 BATT" FUTURE UPS BATTERY 5A CELLS 1 -240 �_ -- ---- -M -- - - 1 C.B. EX. 16 "X12" BUS DUCT - -_� „y ❑ ; ❑ EX. 1 /2 "WUP AND 1 "W DOWN T BELOW RAISED FLOOR FUTURE BATTERY 5B DOCONINECT --480V DC, 1200A I I L ___ r i L SPDk- #1 4 "x4" COLUMN (TYP. THIS ROOM) MPDB RECT. RFC 1T 2 REC.L 4 FUTURE PANEL "DP5A' ❑ inn GENERAL NOTES: 1. H -TAP CONNECTIONS ARE TO POINT TO THE GROUND SOURCE. 2. CONDUCTORS TO BE #6 AWG GREEN, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. INSTALL GROUNDING STRAP ON ONE SIDE OF ALL CABLE LADDER JUNCTIONS. 4. ALL AISLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE SUPPORTED FROM POWER CABLE SUPPORTS, INSTALLED ON LOWEST CABLE LADDER; UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. ALL CABLE IS TO BE TYPE RHW /RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON - HALOGENATED, GREEN COVERED, CLASS B STRANDING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP PREVENT OXIDATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED ". CABLE PROVIDED IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GREEN OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. r _RECT 6 6. EXISTING GROUNDING FOR ALL RECTIFIERS, MPDB'S, AND ALL SPDB'S SHALL REMAIN. FUTURE FILMO9AL OF EXISTING'48V. BATTERY FOR INSTILL Oit BATTERY 4A CELLSI 121 -2 i 40. RECT RECT. .1 a= T 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" FUTURE BATTERY 4A DISCONNECT 480V. DC, 1200A AGB- 1 DCGB -2 anal CRAC #27 DSB1 31,33,35 FUTURE PANEL "DP4B' miu Raiomt' mma& mdi7itsmmWam4m Lk wum"liC FUTURE UPS 4B 500 KVA PpyVER ROOM FUTURE UPS 5A 500 KVA CRAC f!28 DSA1`25,27,29 aomomeamtlon SidmumuAilw.u+i amfi' mm ID3Lm SkitWum PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN BRGB -1 FUTURE UPS 3A 500 KVA WwifirtmUf tuff if ! I gif NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 0: 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL HEAT SHRINK END CAP. 2. CONTINUATION OF EXISTING #210 GROUND BUS CONDUCTOR FROM DCGB -1. NEW UPS 2B 500 KVA 0.9 PF MBP • EX. 2/0 LATERAL GROUND r i ..__ 12- iM,137U Mk tM EktA k;3",yi� 3Y76UMt6Y€?fi'Fd ® - e FGB -1 E)ATIER.Y.RACK_ RAITERYRACK ECT. ECL 10 BATTERY 2B DISCONNECT 480V. D, 120pA. REFER TO DC DRAWINGS. RECT. I RECT. RECT nY: RECT. — 7 - - - T- 4 .� o DCGB -1 - Wi■ 1 apes EW 1 -6L(9- NEW #6 GND. FOR \--NEW #6 GND. FOR RECT R.FCT RECT. _RECT 8 ----------u--------- E 3 BOX --' MPDB 1 1 NEW PANELJBOARD I FRAMEWORK GROUNDING —POWER ROOM T _ SPDB - - SP DB #1 I #1 It ' ❑ i ;ND. FOR Y RACK L ° FUTURE BATTERY 3B DISCONNECT' 480V. DC,114200P1— 1 1 1 L - -J Lti PANEL "BPPA2” PANEL 'CRPPB1" PANEL "BPPB2" bo 015 C1. FUTURE UPS BATTERY 3A CELLS 1 -240 rt �, DRAWING SYMBOLS r . 1 INDICATES FUTURE EQUIPMENT L _ J TO BE INSTALLED. TT HEAVY LINE INDICATES EQUIPMENTFACE SIDE. T1 INDICATES COPPER GROUND BUS. INDICATES HEAT SHRINK END CAP INDICATES H -TAP CONNECTION CODE COMPLIANCE I APP OV D APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 11 3 1OO r. 0 4®� w 0 , ei 1-u'0% Z 5 M IN N ®; i wq ww is Y w� W® �w� a >Jo w ® Zmo Sheet No. DC -8 Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FRAMEWORK GROUNDING - POWER ROOM EXIS*TING EXTERNAL (+) 48 V. RETURN BUS, 6000A, ----------- EX. 750 IVICIVI T() GROUND BAR DCGB-1 ---------- PDF 165.09-4B ----------- PDF 165.09-3A --------- --- PDF 165.09-2B --------------- PDF 165.09-1A ------------- PDF 144.10-4A ----------- PDF 144.10-3A PDF 144.10-2B PDF 144.10-1A EX. (2)-350 MCM'S FROM PDF, TYP. POSITIVE 48\/ DISCHARGE BAR NEGATIVE 48V DISCHARGE BAR EX. 6 AVVG (0), FRWK GND. (16)-350 MCM (+) RETURNS FROM PDF 144 AND 165 EXISTING 6-750 MGM'S EX. SPDB'2 41400A (6 FUSE PANELS) FUSE 24 400 AMP FUSE 23 400 AMP FUSE 22 400 AMP FUSE 21 400 AMP FUSE 20 400 AMP FUSE 19 400 AMP FUSE 10 400 AMP FUSE 17 400 AMP FUSE 10 400 AMP FUSE 15 400 AMP FUSE 14 400 AMP FUSE 10 400 AMP FUSE 12. 400 AA4P FUSE 11 400 AMP FUSE 10 400 AMP FUSE 9 400 AMP FUSE 5 400 AMP FUSE 7 400 AMP FUSE 0 400 AMP FUSE 5 400 AMP FUSE 4 400 AMP FUSE 3 400 AMP FUSE 2 '100 AMP FUSE 1 400 AMP --- 48V --- 48V - 48.V 48V - 48V -- 48V .-- 48V __.. 40V 48V --- 48V 48V -- 49V - 40V ---- 48V --- 48V -- 48V 48V , 18V - 48V --- 40V ---- 48V _-. 48V --- 48V --- 48V SPARE SPARE 1 SPARE j SPARE SPARE SPARE j SPARE 1 SPARE SPARE j SPARE SPARE SPARE I SPARE j SPARE SPARE EX. 0 AVVG ()) FMK GND. EXISTING 6-•50 MCIVI'S EX. SPDB1 -4/400A (6 FUSE PANELS) 2. ALL WIRE #18 AWG AND SMALLER SHALL BE SOLID, TIN PLATED COPPER. MULTI-PAIR CONDUCTORS SHALL HAVE TELECOMMUNICATIONS COLOR CODING WITH A GRAY JACKET. FUSE 48 400 AMP FUSE 47 '100 AMP FUSE 40 400 AMP FUSE 45 400 AMP FusE 44 •00 AMP FUSE 43 400 AME' FUSE 42 400 AMP FUSE 4'1 41)0 AMP FUSE 40 400 Am p FUSE :39 400 AMP FUSE 38 400 AMP FUSE 37 .400 AMP FUSE 30 400 AIVIP F1.1..11.-: 35 400 AMP FUSE 34 400 AMP FUSE . 33 400 AMP FUSE 32 400 AMP FUSE 31 400 AMP FUSE 30 400 AMP FUSE 29 400 AMP FUSE 28 400 AIVIP USE 27 400 AMP FUSE 26 400 AMP FUSE 25 400 AMP GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL CABLES #14 AWG AND LARGER TO BE RHW/RHH TYPE, LOW SMOKE (LS)/ NON-HALOGENATED, GRAY COVERED CLASS B OR CLASS I STRANDING. CLASS 1 (FLEX) CABLE WILL BE USED FOR BATTERY STRING AND RECTIFIER OUTPUT CABLING. ALL STRANDING IS TO BE TINNED TO HELP REVENT OXIDIATION. ALL CABLE MUST BE "UL LISTED" AND "CT RATED". CABLE PROVIDED FOR POWER IS TO COME EQUIPPED WITH A GRAY OUTER COTTON BRAID COVERING. DLO CABLE IS NOT PERMITTED. - 48V ___ 48V _-. 48V --- 48V --- 48V 40V -- 48V 40V --- 48V 48V 46V -- 48V -- 48V -- 4E1V -- 48V 48V ---- 48V 48V 48V - 481/ 48V 48V 413V 40V SPARE SI-VkRE .3P.ARE SPAR.E SPAR.E j SPARE ',3PARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ) SPARE .SPARE SPARE SPARE S PARE SPARE 1 SPARE EX. 0 AWG (0) FRWK GND. EXISTING 6-'75() MCIVI'S EX. MPDB 4/400A FUSE (4 PANELS TOTAL) NO SCALE FUSE 04 400 AMP FUSE 63. 400 AMP FUSE 02 400 AMP FUSE 61 400 AMP FUSE 60 401) AMP FUSE 59 400 AMP FUSE 5• 400 AMP FUSE 57 400 AMP FUSE 50 400 AMP FUSE 55 400 AMP FUSE 54 401) AMP FUSE 53 400 AMP FUSE 52 10(1 AMP FUSE 51 400 AMP FUSE 50 400 AMP FUSE 49 -400 AMP 48V o - 48V PDF 144.10-4B -- 48V PDF 144.10-3A 48V PDF 144.10-2B 48V PDF 144.10-1A - 48V PDF 165.09-4B -- 48V j PDF 165.09-3A --- 48V PDF 165.09-2B 48V PDF 165.09-1A 0 0 0 0 -- 48V PDF 72-4B, REMOVED 48v j PDF 72-3A, REMOVED 48V I PDF 72-2B, REMOVED EXISTINC.?; 2 PER PDF 72-1A, REMOVED - 4(0/ PDF 70-4B, REMOVED - 48V PDF 70-3A, REMOVED - 48V 1 PDF 70-2B, REMOVED \ 40V PDF 70-1A, REMOVED EX. (2)-350 MCM'S, TYP. G-1 G-4 0-7 0-'10 (.9-2 0-5 C.3-8 0-3 (3-6 G-9 NEGATIVE 48V CHARGE BAR _7 ------------------- EXISTING RECTIFIER OUTPUT CABLES +.• --• ..... ---.--•-yry---,, -48V. D.C. ONE-LINE DIAGRAM 0-4 G-1 G-2 0 ' -5 G - 8 G-3 (9-0 (3-9 EXISTING AC INPUT EX, (3 AWG (0) FRWK GND. [..-_ EXISTING -- AC INPUT * [ EX. 0 AWG (0) _ FRI/VI< GND. EXISTING AC IN PIJ'r' EX. 0 AVVG (0) FRVVIK GND. EXISTING - AC INPUT EXISTING AC INPUT 6 AWG (0) FRWK GND. 1 EXISTING --- AC INPUT - --.,---- EX. 6 AWG (0) FRWK GNI). [ EXISTING AC INPUT '- :`-- EX. 6 AVVG (0)1 _ FMK GND. EXISTING -- AC INPUT EXISTING AC INPUT EX. 6 AVVG (0) FRWK GND. EX. 6 AVVG (0) F RWK GN D. EXI •'ST1N G AC INPLTE EX 6 AWG (0)1 FRVVIK 011D. EX. 0 A WG (0) r FRWK GND. 1, [1 53+ TAPS AVAILAF3LE FOR FUTURE. • RECTIFIERS '11.16 El+ B- 1.1 I L2 sn AC EG B+ - EX. -48V B RECTIFIER 0 L.2J0r1 400A LO AC 60; El+ 1.2 811 LO ACES 13+ B- Li L3 AC EC; B+ 8- Ll L2 IST 03 , ACEG 1 E3- EX. 48V L L I 2 STl L:3 „ ACEG 8+ EX. -48V RECTIFIER (3 -' 400 A • . • EX. 48V RECTIFIER G 400 A EX. -48V RECTIFIER G -4 400 A EX. -48V RECTIFIER G -5 400 A RECTIFIER 0 -6 400 A El EX. -48V L1 RECTIFIER -7 1_2 1.3 Sr-i 400 A ACEG B + EX. -48V Li RECTIFIER " RECTIFIER (3 -8 L2 811 L3) ACEG 11 E.:X. -48V Ll RECTIFIER G -9 L2 PI 400 A AC EG 8+ 400A RI, EX. -48V 1.'1 "i RECTIFIER 0 -10 1_ L2 S ri 400 A 3 „ AC EG TAPS AVAILABLE FOR (4) FUTURE BATCERY STRINGS. C. - BATT. 4 BATT, 4 BAJT. 3 BATT, 3 BA Fr 2 BATT, 2 6 7 ) POSITIVE •8V CHARGE BAR BUS BARS POSITIVE :ele.;‘,/ CHARGE BAR NEGATIVE -48'V CH.ARGE BAR DO 9- 0 1 5 EX I STI NG 2 --- (00 MC PER POLARITY (0) ,...443y BATTERY RACK-2 (±) E N ERSYS E. )K I DE GU-45 ( - ) 3990 Ai'-'l EX. - 48V BATTERY RACK-2 (+) • ENERSYS EXIDE GU-45 . 3990 .API I EX. -48V BATTERY RACK-2 ENERSYS • EXI 3990 All 4111-- E.X ST I N G .._.,...1 0 .AliVG (0) FR.VVI•K GND. EXISTING (3 AtiVG (0) RVVK GND. EXISTINIG 6 AVVG (0) FRWK GND, REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE A PROVED APR 0 1 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 1 Expires 92/./r) Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Fac. Code:TYKWWA Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12-12-08 Revision 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 Sheet No. 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 DC-9 -48 V.D.C. ONE-LINE DIAGRAM J I CELL I L 1 --� ( +) CELL 1 JARS 1 -5 ( -) CELL 20 �-- TOP TIER , ICELLI 120 [. -n n-1 62 63 —� (- ) CELL 40 JARS6 -10 ( +) CELL 21 -- MIDDLE TIER 64 --� ( +) CELL 41 JARS 11 -15 ( -) CELL 60 �-- BOTTOM TIER I CELLI L 0 J J I CELL I L 1 61 , ICELLI 120 [. -n n-1 62 63 64 --- SPARE I CELLI L 0 J 3 .i.1-` rr I CELLI 1 - i SPARE 41 7 42 43 57 3 1 5 4 7 ICELLI L . . n r - 58 17 59 18 60 SPARE 20 1A SPARE 2B 3A 4B 37 53 39 54 55 56 --- SPARE SPARE 1A 2B 3A 4B 49 50 . 51 I 52 "'-- SPARE J I CELL I L 1 45 , ICELLI 120 [. -n n-1 46 47 48 SPARE I CELLI L 0 J 3 .i.1-` rr I CELLI 1 - i SPARE 41 7 42 43 44 3 1 5 4 7 ICELLI L . . n r - 17 18 SPARE 20 SPARE 37 38 39 40 13 14 SPARE 15 I33 34 SPARE l 35 36 SPARE 10 11 12 29 30 31 32 I � SPARE 1 I� 5 6 7 I 8 SPARE 25 26 27 28 SPARE J I CELL I L 1 21 , ICELLI 120 [. -n n-1 22 23 24 I CELLI L 0 J 3 .i.1-` rr I CELLI 1 - i SPARE 7 r 3 1 5 4 7 ICELLI L . . n r - 17 18 19 20 SPARE 13 14 15 16 SPARE 10 11 12 SPARE I � 1 I� 5 6 7 I 8 SPARE 1 2 3 4 SPARE J I CELL I L 1 , ICELLI 120 [. -n n-1 I CELLI L 0 J 3 .i.1-` rr I CELLI 1 - i 7 r 3 1 5 4 7 ICELLI L . . n r - ICELL I 1180. 1 TO UPS, DC INPUT N N 2 -350 MCM'S, 1 -3/0 GND. IN EA. OF (4) 2- 1/2 "C. TO 1200A., 480V. DC BATTERY DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY UPS MANUFACTURER - (+) LINE 4- 350MCM'S ( +) ON CABLE LADDER (+) + LOAD LINE ( -) ( -) LINE • LINE • ( -) LOAD 4350MCM'S ( -) ON CABLE LADDER / 4- 350MCM'S + O ON CABLE LADDER NO SCALE #6 TO GROUND BAR -- 4- 350MCM'S ( -) ON CABLE LADDER #6 TO GROUND BAR #6 TO GROUND BAR #6 TO GROUND BAR 1 () CELL 120 ( +) CELL 81 ( -) CELL 80 ( +) CELL 121 ( -) CELL 180 ( +) CELL 161 () CELL 240 ( +) CELL 201 -I ( -) CELL 200 JARS 26-30 JARS 21 -25 JARS 16-20 JARS 31 -35 JARS 36-40 JARS 41 -45 JARS 56-60 JARS 51 -55 JARS 46-50 TOP TIER MIDDLE TIER BOTTOM TIER TOP TIER MIDDLE TIER BOTTOM TIER TOP TIER MIDDLE TIER BOTTOM TIER ( +) CELL 101 ( -) CELL 100 ( +) CELL 61 1---- ( -) CELL 140 ( +) CELL 141 (- ) CELL 1801 ( +) CELL 221 ( -) CELL 220 ( +) CELL 181 UPS 480V. DC ONE —LINE DIAGRAM (SPLIT STRING) NOTE: ALL POWER CABLES TERMINATED AT BATTERY DISCONNECT SHALL BE TYPE "THWN" OR "THHN ". 3 -TIER RACK NO. 1. 15 UNITS, 60 CELLS. 3 -TIER RACK NO. 2. 15 UNITS, 60 CELLS. 3 -TIER RACK NO. 3. � 15 UNITS, 60 CELLS. 3 -TIER RACK NO. 4. 15 UNITS, 60 CELLS. BRASS OR COPPER NUTS, LOCK WASHERS, FLAT WASHERS AND BOLTS GROUND BAR INSPECTION CUT -OUT PROVIDE CLEAR HEAT- SHRINK OVER ENTIRE BARREL WITH MINIMUM 1 INCH OF CABLE INSULATION COVERED SPDB #2 NO SCALE ALL LUGS SHALL HAVE A THIN COAT OF NO -OX -ID APPLIED TO THE STRIPPED CABLE END AND /OR INSIDE OF LUG BARREL BEFORE CABLE IS CRIMPED. TWO HOLE CONCENTRIC COMPRESSION TYPE COPPER, LONG BARREL LUG (BURNDY "YA" SERIES OR EQUAL BY "T & B ") WITH COPPER OR BRASS BOLTS AND LOCKWASHERS. PROVIDE 2 "x3" PHENOLIC I.D. TAG FOR EACH CONDUCTOR. CRIMP TOOL SHALL BE HYDRAULIC TYPE, WITH FULL CIRCUMFERENCE DIE CRIMPING TOOL. LUGS SHALL HAVE THE NUMBER OF CRIMPS INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TERMINATION DETAIL S ANDARD DETAIL 7G102 NO SCALE UNISTRUT RACK MOUNTED TO FLOOR 1200A. DC BATT. DISCONNECT c1 8.56 MPDB AND SPDB ELEVATIONS CLEAN SURFACE WITH CLEANING PAD. APPLY A THIN COAT OF NO -OX -ID AT THE CONNECTING SURFACE. r -- _ _i — r. 1 1I II TYP. NEW 1-6L CABLE LADDER 7' -0" II I ME NEE 110M r MI EU awkiaftkaNCI■itsagANI 34" J SPILL CONTAINMENT WITH ACID ABSORBING PILLOWS SPDB #1 BATTERY RACK SINGLE ROW 3 -TIER (TWO PER STRING) i CABLE RACK 60 BATTERY UNITS TOTAL, 4 -CELL EACH NOMINAL 480V. DC. (C &D 240XT4LC -15) 0 co NEW WOOD BATTEN MPDB REVIEWED COMPLIANCE OMP CE APPROVED APR 01 Nth City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION IL +4- 1 "A.F.F. Anq TOP OF LIGHT G 1T 1 J E Cl1if mc.YJT jigqm ALL MOUNTING HOLES (18)4 "PVC SLEEVES NEW SECURED WALL - WATERFALL OFF CABLE LADDER 3' -0" 8, EXISTING FUSE POSITION PREVIOUSLY SERVING PDF 42 TO SERVE LOAD PANELS ON NEW PDF 144.10 EXISTING FUSE POSITION PREVIOUSLY SERVING PDF 68 TO SERVE LOAD PANELS ON NEW PDF 165.09 EXISTING FUSE POSITION SERVED LOAD PANELS ON PDF 70 HAVE BEEN REMOVED. EXISTING FUSE POSITION SERVED LOAD PANELS ON PDF 72 HAVE BEEN REMOVED. SECTION SCALE: 1/4 24.06' I CELLI 160 ;...1 BATTERY RACK ELEVATION (C & D RDB 0902-07EP2P) REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL .e. /... DRAWINGS FOR NEW SECURED WALL ATTACHMENT. ROOF ta VARIES REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR PENETRATION OF AUXILIARY FRAMING THRU NEW SECURED WALL. I • E (11AMI,Elqlf f ^r IL CABLE TRAY pa +18' -7' A.F.F. AUXILIARY FRAMING POWER CABLE [a +17 -1" A.F.F. LADDER Ili COMMUNICANTION +1d -T+ A.F.F. CABLE LADDER WV COMMUNICANTION ash +9' -1" A.F.F. CABLE LADDER CONCRETE FLOOR 0 +a -a. F.F. CELL I 240 n rr~ RAISED FLOOR 0 +7.3" A.F.F. NEW 1-6L CABLE LADDER RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA F EH 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER BATTERY RACK SINGLE ROW 3 -TIER 3RD TIER 2ND TIER c0 1: SECURE EACH RACK TO CONCRETE FLOOR WITH MIN. 5/8" ANCHOR BOLTS AS RECOMMENDED BY RACK MANUFACTURER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 Expire; Designed By: KCM DL ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 Imor v) q) Sheet No. 00 1° d �J (D (f) 4.1 q N 'J C O MINIM 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 DC -10 UPS 480 V. DC ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND BATTERY RACK DETAILS MATCHLINE XI T NC t? O,OO H e' T 0 O B rim (STING ACP ■ A NUNCIA OR NEL ALY HD HD--) HD 0 IQI 101 TYPICAL :iGi+il u{a. F.AI�FJE ,u „TO..k;: 144.0 44.03 rib 1 s:11t i +a 1460;1. PON t• 1 6 sw1; 5.02 NVV CHID I;V A REFER TO FP -2 FOR CONTINUATION 7- 46.04 d..J0q::t11 144.04 £+ { .q 1 f?.7` 1 l i ,, 146 OS 145.05 144.05 143.05 idr') 111 145.06 (FIR) r ID asxalr 144.0• 44.07 143.06 143.07 , 1:a" Fxko: k..Lv1 kAIMIas„axa. w 101 145.07 7JZtf115t'7 +rfl4d r 10 4117/ cS EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. DURING CONSTRUCTION OF PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS OFF -LINE IN ORDER TO PREVENT ALARMS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEMPORARILY COVER ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM ACCUMULATING ON THE DETECTORS. PROVIDE FIRE WATCH AT NIGHTS AND ON WEEKENDS. UNCOVER AND PLACE DETECTORS ON -LINE AFTER PROJECT IS COMPLETE. 1411 k .,. ji 1< 00 1 4 1 4 11 4 u.1 aa-f; VE 144.08 143.08 .1, ::t. ,a( s:23212 , 111 11. 1 11 t)9 47 09 1 09 11 09 ll5 r9.d 534 SZI -iL�' DA PIPING sY2.iAtmrG1;UNI 144.09 143.09 146.10 144.1 .T Itb1i 11;51`I 143.10 143.11 ara a1 :2 T .rbi &PSE. s{h N¢t�4.ky.rodk..,S 44.11 144.12 1 43.12 143.1: 101- Pr..»ta,cmll.u'.:.ma,J..a�'{timT S<.ISJ..5.�.1l�:n:Gw 1kuv,., 'v'ru.aad: Jami1s -1. e4tw. u..., x;4..1 111SJ:J1kaa;APlr.4ui,J ek.P:iVX[t,oL Ikh slip .,SW.f kP. :s>5.'4u.vefal. 142.02 142.03 142.04 142.05 142.06 142.07 1142.08 142.09 142.10 142.11 142.12 142.13 101 • 0 0 111.13 ad-LMxiJl4 II. 1.16.1:1 144.13 T 11; 1,1 147 10 A- 1344;.: ,412 146.14 14 14 142.14 CEP OID 141:1.1,E1 a 11 614123'1h 41234 144.1 44.15 SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0" 10 1'47 10 1 16.'113 140.10 .. 'P. 144.16 143.14 143.15 143.16 - BRA .,1 I1:.1.. :4 211b112 a6 t21/5.ir,,al :• 9nci2„)r,41Uc.,M1a r21112,d.,Ir.Sln121:4112 142.15 142.16 142.17 u gStiu5! I1 • 1 / t 13 N E1IV j, SO KVA _v 's 144.17 144.1 IRE SP INKLER VCH PIPI &(TYP: IQI 143.17 143.18 , re.. ,4, .1212 41. ;:.._ 101 ,w1u..t.fl1i1iti'd Y gl:.... 142.18 IQI LJ EX. FIRE SPRINKLER MAIN -VESDA P PING El Q) H3 1x1 C) I Z F A V . (.HO ._... 0 0 0 0 CORRIDOR 11 I- t 110 x!11 167.01 167.02 1 165.01- { s r V'ti.l .. ?.. 185..02 /4 :0.,1 1. 3-).3 i 1 ' 1 COP ••;\ 0 END) - 167.03 f 167.04 NEW /4.1/.1 101 1310 KVA -__ O 66 03 111 (. € ..l1 '17 0`45 t14 . '12 , 24 k t 160.05 U.v14x !J „It.:� 167.05 16503 165 04 165 05 1 r 106,05 1 166.04 166 515 0 0 164.04 164.05 d.1^ r 0114111xGIa.1.•42 i ! ,1 167. 165. Azi.45a3..P4iL tt'Watt} iv..JE LJ '7 I T / i L8 t 4 i I J laa L m4111- 108 0 167.07 6_:.. 165,07 -_ VESDA PIPING (HD) i+ 167.08 166.0 66.07 1 us w 165.08._ 164 ) 6 164.07 164.08 DT Y 0 CCo 10 1 167.09 166.08 66.09 .Ec . 1,1122llSir3m,J..s. TYPI AL 1 67.10 167.11 Luf.i n,u tt.., .xa . - 165..10... 6. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR TO BE RE- LOCATED. RELOCATE ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. 7. WHERE EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUND PIPE. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET E-20. 1 69. I 1061'1 164.11 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. EXISTING AUDIONISUAL ALARM TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED TO NEW LOCATION INDICATED. REFER TO SHEET FP -3 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. EXISTING AUDIONISUAL ALARM DEVICE TO REMAIN. 3. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR MOUNTED AT BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK TO REMAIN. 4. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUITS. PULL CIRCUITS OF ANY CONDUIT TO REMAIN THAT WILL PENETRATE NEW WALL BACK TO NEAREST J -BOX LOCATED OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM, CUT CONDUIT AT WALL PENETRATION AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING THEN RE -PULL CIRCUIT TO DEVICES AS REQUIRED. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E -16 FOR DETAIL OF PVC COUPLING AND WALL PENETRATION. 5. EXISTING FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL TO BE RELOCATED TO LOCATION INDICATED. REFER TO SHEET FP -3 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REFER TO FP -2 FOR CONTINUATION � 1 i s r f'1 i .1 I � !! It 1 v 1i l 1_....av -.r 1,. v. -GG ,. r, ..,. c� .e 141 i.v. •aa, t4Y�_ - x..n. la. ,4X+-3 =aa-i a. 9krdvn :aifl -HD 1- ae } �.ta `169 12 11516111 611' � I . .a�s.dlz. i�<. 1 I�.ua MD� HD 167.12 165.11.._165.12_ 164.12 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM -SOUTH 1 .1 69. 0 .2 u3- 914-2: 67.13 1 66.12 2..2.414,4:51.8 65.13 64.13 1 101 i J 'E.F i 109.14 1:1. 1 4 ESDA P PING .111V4.: X11,1 w ,Akx 1 u.; .412; U 167.14 167.15 167.16 166.13 6i�16 +,Si.1la^96s ! . d 9.654.4_. 164,14 i..1..ikai&„til �Na 1 U9 HO 1613.1 v.S ik1 121 .s i 1 nia HD I0' HD- 1 /19. Cupp - -- - -H tt' 3 -iiT. vrN 167.17 0 (Ho •-) HD HD HD- SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MATCHLINE } RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FLB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT 02009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 .1 p,lG MA j OY wAs„, ..,,,1 \ Lic. No 4255 t ) ` ��E ;I,TEt ' i s 6 /0NAL0' 2. I. •c Sheet No. FP--1 co `6), cp z k J L 'ct CD '< co � L � L i 2 3 4 Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM - SOUTH LEGEND: TAG REF TYPE EXISTING WALL EXIST. 2 -HR. RATED ASSEMBLY F' — H NEW WALL •/// ///Z NEW FURRED G.W.B. & MTL. STUD WALL ADJACENT TO EXIST. WALL -- -+ PATH OF EGRESS L ACCESSIBLE EXIT ACCESSIBLE EXIT 1 55 ACCESSIBLE EXIT Y MEANS OF EGRESS ILLUMINATION IBC 1006.1 Illumination required. The means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. IBC 1006.2 Illumination level. T h fo e ot mceans andle of egress w Illumination (kingleveiJ level shall not be less than 1 at'the IBC 1006.3 Illumination emergency power. The power supply for means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premises' electrical supply. In the event of power supply failure, an emergency electrical system shall automatically illuminate the following areas: 1. Aisles and unenclosed stairways of rooms that require two or more means of egress. 2. Corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways.. 3. Exterior egress components... 4. Interior exit discharge elements... 5. Exterior lari 4 fir exiLdisQharge,:d s EGRESS ELA ACCESSIBLE EXIT EXITING NOTE: 9,471 S.F. /100 = 95 = 2 EXITS EXITS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 70' APART 0 ACCESSIBLE EXIT KEY NOTES: O EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM EXIST. ACCESSABLE RAMP REMOVE EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIRS RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM MODIFIED FOR NEW STAIR EXIST. ADJACENT TENANT IS COMMERCIAL OFFICE / WAREHOUSE USE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIIA FEB 0 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 1 2 4 WTI WTA, 1 N I ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAB 79606 (3Z51695-1090 FAX (325) 695-1089 w IC) N O 0 9 Z 0 O 10 ZI 0= N. co co cc co o M 2 ti O Q LLI co co Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 02 -02 -09 95% REVIEW 100% CD PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 MEI Sheet No. A -1.1 ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES I FUTUR I r __ 1 " 0 W r Ce a (t: ?I _._. . -... � _... W1W ffi rW #WY r ., .. W WW1 ®W. WW �,. . iir at- ®fir WIY WNW-WM WW WM WIMMI W WcWW 6�y� 'n1O ►- H � I OW . c m,� ... , : w. , . 'iW , .,,. .. .. -. ..... -..._ - - . .. .... ...... _.. _ »Hp.__ ._ BO -I HD ,p, � � -1 �£y 1� rt n,� ♦,. a . "timi�iRr379� .. ,., .. •V f... j' .. V -- r -� ll • � �L. I i m� a _� ®� �. ��. ® KERN Mr L - ---- - - - - -- -- - - - --- . . � y 4 � - _ Tf1 /�Y Cf��. f'�AAII \II 1A r11 %k \ f _• - - - MATCHLINE FUTURE PANEL "DP EQ EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: REFER TO FP -1 FOR CONTINUATION 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. DURING CONSTRUCTION OF PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS OFF -LINE IN ORDER TO PREVENT ALARMS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEMPORARILY COVER ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM ACCUMULATING ON THE DETECTORS. PROVIDE FIRE WATCH AT NIGHTS AND ON WEEKENDS. UNCOVER AND PLACE DETECTORS ON -LINE AFTER PROJECT IS COMPLETE. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM -NQRTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. EXISTING AUDIONISUAL ALARM TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED TO NEW LOCATION INDICATED. REFER TO SHEET FP -4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. EXISTING AUDIOVISUAL ALARM DEVICE TO REMAIN. 3. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR MOUNTED AT BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK. 4. EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE TO REMAIN. 5. EXISTING CONTROL MODULE TO REMAIN. 6. NEW VISUAL ALARM DEVICE. REFER TO SHEET FP -4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 7. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR TO BE RE- LOCATED. RELOCATE ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. 8. WHERE EXISTING AIR SAMPLING PIPING FOR VESDA (VERY EARLY SMOKE DETECTION ALARM) PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL, CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUND PIPE. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET E -20. 9. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM CIRCUITS AT JOBSITE. PULL CIRCUIT OUT OF ANY CONDUIT TO REMAIN OR RE- LOCATED CONDUIT THAT PENETRATES NEW WALL BACK TO NEAREST J -BOX OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM, CUT CONDUIT AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING, THEN RE -PULL CIRCUIT TO DEVICES AS REQUIRED. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E -16 FOR DETAIL OF PVC COUPLING AND WALL PENETRATION. 10. WHERE EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL, CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUND PIPE. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET E -20. NEW SOLDER Lr� I v rr- 1 rvr� t _ EXISTING COPPER TUBING NEW SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNION NO SCALE 0 11... 015 INSTALL WITHIN 6" FROM WALL 1" ANNULAR SPACE W/ MINERAL -WOOL PACKING -� NEW COPPER MALE ADAPTOR 1 ANNULAR SPACE W/ 1 DEPTH 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25WB +CAULK NEW SOLDER EQUIPMENT ROOM ji. j j SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED WALL EXISTING COPPER TUBING RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0.5 2009 PERMIT CENTER CORRIDOR NON-CQNDUCTIVE CONNECTION DETAIL WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT ©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 Noel I o pp j W Z 5 " -IA M 4w w oho P � Z JWo�+ Z Q r7 0 Q.. Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KIM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- 12 -08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 1 2 3 4 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 Sheet No. FP -2 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM - NORTH FIKC SF'KINKLEK MAI - - \ XFMR a B BATTERY B BATTERY IC BATTERY 16 B BATTERY IA UPS-1 NEW PANELBOARD / Q P "- " °• '° P /' � \ � Q PANEL ' ' PANEL _ �!- _ <> �.._ < W W W A2Y ill dd r W r W "3 . N W W W N A AW L �iryy^_ LA A N W W W A W WA N W N W N W r P A N i3f N N WA W3 rA N !Ael N A 4A# IG71 N N A to m u N A N 144 AiA N N :.W, N N A A N N w w w w w 'dad m w to ul u m a 9 _ - ! 9 3 tt" = # #+Ii rY6 m A 1.'YY WA' u u m m m o m m wF . d kytl .-Yi xY�O 6xt 6N 5uA rc'A Wil 14' uE eYa 6fY t, i 1'1d ui4 k89 1143 1 i,AJ txii E24 35 >e.i 00 WS d 1 uW 6Li LL+Y 4ia +'F ✓A Hil 3tN ffix �i'l d•1 �E .tu6 ICi N( 4'ii dN sR S ra, r raY .ilfi il,d t7k5 r4'7 W'Y U4 w5N dig& W. , II _ . __.. __. _...__._.__..,..�- .__.____.... _ .. .}._.. - - ........._ _ } __ L .W. , ,._.. -.. _ _ _._._ _ �� r - _.....__.. _ _.._ . -. . r A 1 I -FGB -1 I ANALA E ER i i _ ( P PANE_ � T - PANEL I . . AGB- - ._ -_. -_. - - __.___ -_ . I 1 I H H ANALASER 1 H - H H � ..�._._. _ __ -.__ _ ._- _--- HD_....__._ . .__.. . p.__. - - -. _ l • .._, _ _ �HD� , H HD H __..__ . HD C__ � �. i �_ H HD 1 H � , O ,D o � o o I o o O O O iii.) i i= al1��1 { {'o lL� .. I I�rltl} I�r! 4) � �1,'1i1,% A 1 t £ +. `i i 1 A � � - - - 'al r ��� - I B B' �'[ 1 1 - .__,.__.. . HD H O I - - -- - - - - _._. -.__._ r - - -- - -- - - - - -- - - - - - -- - -- - ..._.._ _..___ - _ .41111111111111 I I , H F T ._... _ _. ._ . W I ! } ie3 ' E 4'_s £ • k - {} { V >I1 }., , __. ...,_.. _ O _ I ...... _..__.. -.. _ _.... ._._. _._.__......_,, a -- - - ' FUTURE CRAC *19 {: i £ £'` � 1.13 I 1 H _.__.... / $44 D H'D� H ._. __-.__..___._.__.-.. . .. . .,......__......_.....__. _ HD _ H "5 A ' ^ 5 1 111 . HD ® ® - - 6 sil;i ® ®" 4 41:310 I I H ..._.._....,_._.. . HD 1 1 U .._..______._..._.....- . - ....__.. : ...... __. . v _ ._-_--.__- .__..... _ ___ .._. . �, I'1•� f f 9 9 �i If � i i �, '. r v v k.7. �{.., } 111. I�l ! . Ft. i.:i } - ..__._.. - . __..__ - - ..__.. . . -. ..._......_ . _...... _._ . -... _ _.... . ... -._ .. ............ - 7, 1:,14.", } : \. 1 o o - __.__ -._ . ..__.._._.._ _ __._...._ -Hp._ _ _._____. - -_. __ . ._._..._. _ H H -. L 1 FUTUR. I I p.._.. -__ -. _ : . — 1 ! 1 : ! i I • = : , . . _ •-•____'__, _I . : • - : — I . , • I ' .- I I r' ea _ f 0 o ....- _..._._.._ . '�" P i 0 _,- ..._.. - --- -_- .__. _ -- • YI !!",411,11 __ _ .__ .. - - _ .._ ._.__.. _..._. _ __ _..._...__.. ,. _ _ . _ a a - - ...- . ....__..__..__....__ . .. _ - _ .._ --_ -- _ _ __ _.. -. ... _ _____...._ m ___ .__ - o ...___.- _ _ ..._ m IMM • 1 :UTURE 1 1 I ;..eFAC #12 I I I 1 1 T _ MM _..._..__. .- _..__....___.___.- _ _.. -__.. F ; 1 ! i 1 1 ; I ; !! • _ ?r ? : I 4! i Fwo. . cm _.- - -- ..._ . -... .__._._. ®saa W r ■ , __._.. _ \ / ..... _ - - _.._. _ _ I - ONII J taa -r-rf . . Wi.r.v ® ® r m ........ . . / ! /� /1 \ '�� 1 � , \ ' �. ; � C' f f i . ; ..._,' , .. DI r riq W WtWFmf -milk i6Fr-W'risimvi ,,, _ _ ! 1 ! 11 .---- H 1 ' .„...,: fll ; I == 1 : 1 1.5' 1. F , ...Hp _ ___._ . . , \ / „ _ . 41ik ® l n IVV' P'rrf1 - �F.r� - �d - W r r r- , �1-i'. : i 1 I ■ cf, 1 i I 1 ■ 1 I I 3 '—: • . y • %+rfrr PDF _. ____ . . _- .__.. . ...---- _ __.. - - ` 101 t s' . . t' O J -- - - - -- - __ A �. . ., , - . ` _ . A 7 _. _. .__.... -.__. , :`it! :; 1151 . . . 7* -* ! , 0 ! * ! I ! : ! ! • .• ! 1 ;7 ; . • • Z I ••‘.: a. : 0 ! ▪ i IL 1 2 I ▪ * am . _ _ _ p __-__.. -.._ . p _ _,.._.._.....__-- _ . ..__. _ J]. _ ___. 1 �, W I _ __ _...__. . __. __..._ . _ FUTUR _.. - 1.___.. . _.. ___. __. -. . . __. - -_ _ V ° PIPING .___. _.__._ -__ ... _ _ ..__. -.- _.___ _ e _--- -_.._. _.._._._._ - __..__. _ _..__.. -. o o � C __.___.. _ _- _ -_.._. . � - - - -- . : I ;FUTURE RAC #21: 1 ;� �? 1 _.- ..._ -._ _ .__._.__._. _ _..._ _ .__ _ � � a B . , -- - - J E ...... .... ....__. ® EXJSI1NG__, .. ....,_...._ . -- - _ __...__.._... - l • __. -...__ wen- AtlF 11:;. wrrW.W WF . r rrWt r a'r-rr-W W W ter' I IWI AfffFtl W -- I . -- . -_.,.. ...__- , ,. _..__.,.. .. .. _. I ®r W-W'.W'®iY-Wi!-110-W'W-W- _ . _ _ -.__.. ._ H r Hp.. H �� - o - !•! I 1 I ! l .r.lif, -..... .. � • . . !!:!• * : . . a • L—L ! t !rd!1r, i i•t! ^;'l., 1 1£l,ir 1 1= ;.}S: i :; 1 149 .'1'i ! !'J i:, f o H l.;y ; 1.4.,'1;1 1 1;a.`i4;i 1 1 -3' 'I'' 1 t; lt ... ...... ..... ...... ........ .. _ _ _.. ._._...._ - - I � - - - - -J - -- -- - -- - - - - - - - -- - - - - MATCHLINE FUTURE PANEL "DP EQ EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: REFER TO FP -1 FOR CONTINUATION 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. DURING CONSTRUCTION OF PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS OFF -LINE IN ORDER TO PREVENT ALARMS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEMPORARILY COVER ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM ACCUMULATING ON THE DETECTORS. PROVIDE FIRE WATCH AT NIGHTS AND ON WEEKENDS. UNCOVER AND PLACE DETECTORS ON -LINE AFTER PROJECT IS COMPLETE. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN -FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM -NQRTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1 NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. EXISTING AUDIONISUAL ALARM TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED TO NEW LOCATION INDICATED. REFER TO SHEET FP -4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. EXISTING AUDIOVISUAL ALARM DEVICE TO REMAIN. 3. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR MOUNTED AT BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK. 4. EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE TO REMAIN. 5. EXISTING CONTROL MODULE TO REMAIN. 6. NEW VISUAL ALARM DEVICE. REFER TO SHEET FP -4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 7. EXISTING HEAT DETECTOR TO BE RE- LOCATED. RELOCATE ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. 8. WHERE EXISTING AIR SAMPLING PIPING FOR VESDA (VERY EARLY SMOKE DETECTION ALARM) PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL, CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUND PIPE. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET E -20. 9. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM CIRCUITS AT JOBSITE. PULL CIRCUIT OUT OF ANY CONDUIT TO REMAIN OR RE- LOCATED CONDUIT THAT PENETRATES NEW WALL BACK TO NEAREST J -BOX OUTSIDE OF NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM, CUT CONDUIT AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING, THEN RE -PULL CIRCUIT TO DEVICES AS REQUIRED. REFER TO DETAIL 5, SHEET E -16 FOR DETAIL OF PVC COUPLING AND WALL PENETRATION. 10. WHERE EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING PENETRATES NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL, CONTRACTOR SHALL GROUND PIPE. REFER TO DETAIL 6, SHEET E -20. NEW SOLDER Lr� I v rr- 1 rvr� t _ EXISTING COPPER TUBING NEW SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNION NO SCALE 0 11... 015 INSTALL WITHIN 6" FROM WALL 1" ANNULAR SPACE W/ MINERAL -WOOL PACKING -� NEW COPPER MALE ADAPTOR 1 ANNULAR SPACE W/ 1 DEPTH 3M FIRE BARRIER CP 25WB +CAULK NEW SOLDER EQUIPMENT ROOM ji. j j SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED WALL EXISTING COPPER TUBING RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0.5 2009 PERMIT CENTER CORRIDOR NON-CQNDUCTIVE CONNECTION DETAIL WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT ©2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 3 Noel I o pp j W Z 5 " -IA M 4w w oho P � Z JWo�+ Z Q r7 0 Q.. Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KIM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12- 12 -08 Revision 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 1 2 3 4 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 Sheet No. FP -2 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM - NORTH MATCHLINE (S l OPM RQO ( S1 L. 7 ._...1._......._1_. ( SD: ( SD EX. PDF 42 (SD if 1- I .... 77 177 77 72 77 77 £ �Ir111> r I t: U'etaZZik.a U26xli3.S�t is'F1 144.02 144.03 .02 RAMP REFER TO FP -4 FOR CONTINUATION 146.02 146 63 ( 144.04 A.1 a- :1GSla t3 =LY�w.�,V�;SJ fYY.uJu a;LF,t6 �.6 {,�f(f, «!:Cal. 142.02 142.03 142.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND /OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK. NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT /ENGINEER. 2. DURING CONSTRUCTION OF PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS OFF -LINE IN ORDER TO PREVENT ALARMS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEMPORARILY COVER ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM ACCUMULATING ON THE DETECTORS. PROVIDE FIRE WATCH AT NIGHTS AND ON WEEKENDS. UNCOVER AND PLACE DETECTORS ON -LINE AFTER PROJECT IS COMPLETE. 145.05 144.05 143.05 ...., e,tJVtSiGf roj uxtwt 142.05 ik 3i 1 ;':P I ? SD 145 07 11)3 i I6 ( SD ) 145.06 144:06 142.06 145.07 aid S.C. f 3S SD ) (. 144.07 SD) 142.07 142.08 (_ SD ; 4;3 j8 i J3 1 37 r ,:.,; • 1• • .40 II14 186 t)8 1 ) }: Cr 1::1 [• 0 2 €is� Lnalai; 144.0 14 .09 Iwfi,tu.il:t 144.09 143.06 143.07 143.08 143.09 lcE4au ti;.;k;.�:& k. CU;i,Ci 142.09 c r6...+ iEv.ra 14-4k 4 .'10 1' £ 145.10 1 G Ct1E 144.10 143.10 144.11 143.11 UN ER FLOOR SII)IOKE DE ECTOR, TYPICAL ( _SD (SD- ( SD 44.12 144.13 43.'12 143 13 ,:.: ,1FA'it xti4UfliettEU (SD .S.�,f6t.f '.liN i+'wdllIg1.,tu "fed �.a:Al1,vdL ga4:etal ffia6 142.10 142.11 142.12 142.13 (So 1 SD 141 18 is ?7 i 144.14 143.14 148 ) 5 '1`) 1 E; : of 1 .. P,ii4 S. .s6 . dH 144.15 143.15 G -au- -d y ..� 148.1 6 1 48 l i'' 1 •f 8 1E> 147 1 4 fd ,F u 144.16 144.17 143.16 46. 17 140.1 143.17 ..41y5',uvd,l.r 1'v.,a.ri 2/ 11_... rt. laiJ. va8ddli' 3: usWtYs,tfe,8...Lt„15.:wau8.,, 4wXtr L »libi!1aiC+i.:u 142.14 142.15 142.16 142.17 142.18 .x,Xtr.4i: .Maim ( (IS SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0" ulf.[Liu.'Yi�: 144.18 143.18 tx.e .rc<i Tree: ( SD I I I I I I I I ii (SD (SD (SD ®1 ( SD, L_ :' _� ::1L���� NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN O: 1. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONDUIT. PULL CIRCUIT OUT OF CONDUIT BACK TO NEAREST J -BOX WEST OF NEW WALL, CUT EXISTING CONDUIT AND PROVIDE PVC CONDUIT SLEEVE AND COUPLING AT WALL PENETRATION THEN RE -PULL CIRCUIT. REFER TO DETAIL 1, THIS SHEET. THIS SHEET MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUITS TO REMAIN THAT PENETRATE NEW WALL. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONDUITS AT JOBSITE, AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING AT ALL THAT PENETRATE NEW WALL. 2. EXISTING FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL TO BE REMOVED AND LOCATED TO LOCATION INDICATED. RELOCATE ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. 3. AUDIONISUAL DEVICE ABOVE RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. 4. EXISTING NAC J -BOX BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. REMOVE CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT TO AN DEVICE INDICATED TO BE RELOCATED. 5. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT UNDER RAISED ACCESS FLOOR TO NEW LOCATION OF RELOCATED AN DEVICE. EXTEND CONDUIT UP INSIDE NEW WALL AND CONNECT TO J -BOX INSIDE WALL, BEHIND AN DEVICE. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN v.. A v- . - - 'n 1 �n> .1 v l 1/ re :S zd ri�i _1-65.01. $D) 1 } h.Jla1: 1 �� krpa ( SD) _• r3f1 . t, w.7 S,uSi ....usuu.Au s.if..,U.{'.,SSei :' .1Ru 167.01 167.02 167.03 (.SD ) le 3 .165.02 ...165.03.. 166.03 uleaUtrDu6 o.J.6.. 167.04 1.65.0.4 _ 164.04 FIRE ALARM BELOW RAISED FLOOR 6. RELOCATE EXISTING AN DEVICE FROM WEST FACING OF EXISTING , O LUMN TO WEST FACE OF NEW WALL. REMOyE EXISTING CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT FOR DEVICE AND PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT AS DESCRIBED IN NOTES 4 AND 5 ABOVE. 7. CONNECT EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE! TO NEW CRAC UNITS SMOKE DETECTOR ALARM TERMINALS. 8. EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MODULE FOR MONITORING CRAC UNITS SMOKE DETECTOR. 9. RELOCATE EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE AS REQURED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CRAG 26 LOCATION AND PREVENT INTERFERENCE WITH NEW EQUIPMENT ROOM WALL. :l i +1Gr.. 1 IY f b ;E e. 1 1 3 167.05 166.04 1.65.05.. t') .l1F )Y 1 1 6 1.�ti l I 166.05 ..165.06_ CONDUIT - 170 ( SD_ ( SD 167.06 167.07 167.08 167.09 ( SD 166.06 ) £ .08 i aJ L'J.k.s.G.. Yiie; 165,01. 164.05 164.06 164.07 ;ta,`t'tw,zrth.+.d : 6: 4f: i' 91W.sh3tl7<[u1�U+sWAtieWaSi;aC, (,SD 170. (3 rk fi ! 1.„ 166.07 164.08 um. 1 L eIf- rhJ;9S f: i a l I ?U 11 1 I! "i J 1 i 1It 1 '..7 Wtr. ue�- Mfr��aisL na x�.,J :.r,fY.a °tx 167.10 166.08 66.09 urNt, l ktl.n k i:.:'l 165.08. 165.09_ .165.1o.. 165.11 REFER TO FP -4 FOR CONTINUATION 164.11 ra . 166.10 166.11 a(dr atZ1.. a11.L ^u 465.12 -. 164.12 RAISED FLOOR (1 91 _ % 104.14 SOUTH 01 .1 I° ;31DE NEVI! EQUIPMENT ROOM PROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN WALL AND SLEEVE ( SD .!._.. NO SCALE I 3 9 SD) 167.11 167.12 167.13 167.14 SD ; 166.12 SD) 164.13 109.1.4 164 '15 1 68 14 Xr'.L91R ii4^111 166.13 { }i.21.Nt5en.u,.ri� 1 :1.4 - 164.14 v�lAfdtiBfN�llLS' 1' f t if. 5:r,.rr 4 a, 4 St ,1 ,s 3 ruk AYi� 167.15 10 '0.14 167.16 SD) CONDUIT CLAMP MOUNTED TO FLOOR CONCRETE FLOOR P ROVIDE FIRE RETARDING FOAM IN SPACE BETWEEN CONDUCTOR AND SLEEVE 1 6I 16;3 ,17 ,w n+i�Tm iw::v 167.17 ..0 ( ( ' SD THRU WALL AT FLOOR DETAIL f. z -RAISED.FLOOR 1\.1 T IDE .1q1.Tyy E , It If DATE NT • •6" MAX. CONDUIT CONDUIT PENETRATION IEAJLS PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MATCHLINE CONDUIT CLAMP MOUNTED TO FLOOR RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 057009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 01 -26 -09 02 -02 -09 co ‘ go„ c.) U N co P cn cn cao Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By KCM, DL, ZJ Proj. Mgr.: KCM Date: 12 -12 -08 Revision 100% CD Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. ADD. NO. 1 FP -3 95% REVIEW PERMIT SET PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM - BELOW RAISED FLOOR - SOUTH D CGB-2- HU FUTURE - 's \ PANEL • ..- "ULPP1- " 1 • , - BATTERY 1D • BATTERY 1C BATTERY 1B . . . _ BATTERY 1A UPS -1 NEW PANELBOARD DCGB-1 PANEL "DPW\ "DP2B BRGB-1 • . . . PANEL " BP PA2 ,, PANEL " , / . ... / .. . •• Th ' XFMR UTRL1 1 0 0 El • - ..;:rt, : ..... •• 1>__ a. 42. i 1 mummawwwwmam _52. ..... ..... --„---------------- MMUM2WWWWWWWWWMUMMMWMMWMIUUMUAWM4MUN6MUCWUIliiMMAWUA4416MWWW:,WW546,1AUMM44MUikla ----------- t'wodiautalikirdiAtaiwomowawa4maiiducilmumwmultzblkamuommodualwwaiatAlatilowwwimmaalurtmuwt T _-_____-........ _ ............._ .....---.., SD ........- ' / - II: - • , 4 - I /-////,/ /7; / - - i - PANE "CRPP" A1 " "i PANEL 'CFk PPB1" _____ •//,/-* FGB-1 - 0 ANALASER ZONE 3 BOX . __ , .... ..... ..... ...4..... L 7 l- A 1 //7'; . .... . ;4 V/ 4 // 1 V/ :4 L / • • SD .......-•e - .. , 5 [ 1 r ANALASER 4 _...._ ..._. ..... _ ___ . ...._......„..... /4 CI - MID ..... 177.v 17,2 61 mwww, ;Oil') MIDI ...I. 1771 I I 1 70. I k , . 1 MID MID .... 177 16 1 , 1,,1 ID 175 le . 174.16 WW ----- _ ' lel- 173.16 172. 1 16.17 wwwww killi,) - '175.17 ... . _ . . 172.1 .,,' .... . . ... ___ ...... , „.._..... . . ..... - ,_..,(-- - 7 D S , -__-- /4-( -4-W/7< H zso ...... ___ r . ..... ..... : /4 /, , CS - _ .__ .....___ ........ _ . . . , . .... ..... ._ _. , . . , Ai ____ ....... ' , -!, /4 / - ... S . D ... )-1- • , Z, //// (c----2.7i_T_==.,, - - /4. !-/, e•W i 1 -1 -4---T I - ---1 7 ZONE 4 BOX ., 1 1 1 1 _ _ 1 - _ 1 _ . I T - 1 r- T 1 1 1 1 1 - II. 0 A V r t. A ,,‹P i 1 1 1 I I I 0 I LC 1111164 rt,1 1 0 MD .... 77 .14 177 15 1 76.1 4 170 1 .5 wwwww wwww MID MID Mit) WWWW WWWW 175.1=4 175.15 174.14 i '14.15 WWWWWWW FF .....1■1 4 1 1 ,....i, . ._ 4MI ri 11 11 ( 1 411 1 NW Z \ • \'-\\\ -Ws k e , _____ E(SD .. [4 1111 _ - ---- - _..,„ 401 MID _ ..........................._... 153 '16 M If ) . .. _.. , . 152.15 151.15 • wwww 150.15 14'.;) •16 - kliD wwww. i ',..'',Z 16 Amisim MID 151 .11)3 WNW OW _ . _ www I ; 1 ,,,, : ;!, 4 ; , 1 , * ,,- ! . $ 1 . : : • . ; • : 1 : ! . I ; ...-. ; . 1 I , , • 1 ,.---- $!...= „.. 0 I 3 I j' ;I ' 4 '',-- .--- 0 ! ' 1 • , ' — 3 t.,!!'") ,,,,, : 1 :.-.7: ; ---. I ,,_-_. . ' • $ ;•.•,i- .. 3 ISI, • : ; -,- : $ 1 1 I 1 t A 1 $ ,- . 4 i : i , ; 1 : m ; .1 : $ ' , : . . : 1 , . : _.J .. w 1 I I • - . . ..... ... . , 0 I I 1 1 \._ ._ ' I 2 0 6,,,,.... 0 ,...- - . .. _ . i : , ../ I i . , ; , i • I i ; •., i."• I , .• : . 1 ! I I I •:-.:!' • ; • ; ; . . ; •-•!!!!,•• i ; . I i 1 ; 1 i . • . I . ; ! • i ; 1 . i . i PDE4 2 r /71 ' \ ., /1 I. /.. mw. -w. I 1 _ _ 1 _ _ - - Ex - ,S i 0 176.04 .1- _ . 175.()4 . _ 174 04 - --c- , 1 70.1Z w.. tvl I D 1 , A u ! 1 L . 4,,,\ •., ( 6.07 MID ',.... \ 1,-- -- SD _ „„-- 1 I I I 175. _ :. - 174.07 0 6.8 1 10 .ww MID M D oor _ Q\' „._ .. o ,.... Is 1 1 •• \ • • _ .. ....._...... 1 ----- . LI 0 _, , 7;/. Ai - .._ ...... _ _ __. _ 11 153 1 wwww MILI _ mamer 152.1 1 151.1'1 III-111/WW _ _ 1 bo i i 11u. 1 wilullum- 41- ra - - . k . / \ — — — — 7 ____. I_ 1 ________ . . 1 . . • . . 1 1 t ! I i , ■ ! , . i I i i I 17(i, Ck.) wwww NI I 0 --- ') -- 7 70.10 tv11D , 75.10 74.1) ," 17 1 a,1 ..... MID 1 70.1B wwww --- - \ 1 •\‘-,\ \ \;‘,\ ...... ..__ 0 - - - _ _ ( I--..; 1 r I IdnI .-...,---7, - 1 ..... -------. ---- 0 -• - - - - wwww 152. f) i L .,,,,, ,• )1.02 i _., . I 1 • L ' • - - • NI i 0 wwwww ir) 08 _ ___ __ ,., NI ILI wwwwW 154 o . _. _..... ' , .. m.www 1 , .'2,.10 'lb -I (.- -BOW IIII IBM 1 ,)!). 10 isiougamm I ; j . ' 4 .— 1 1 : . ; 4 F- `..--••! 1 T.::: 3 1 , I ' 4 1 • $ 1 I j I • I , ; 1 • I ' ; ! a ! • : ;1 3 ! 4 ! 1 1 ....._............ le M ID wwww 154 ._______. !,..: . 1.5; 4 77-I i i i I I I : h • . ! MID wwww-i 1 .)4 17 _____ .. ___ •\-,,....\\\-p- *,-, : -.7 * : 1 -- 1 ) EXISTING _ — CR6C-#11 — _ — — _.... ! n--1 , . i ! 1 Lki I ! , 64 OV80 ! ; 1 i i 1 1 • 3 nind : . \\\;•\!\"on ! I ,:-, \\ , ww- 1 1 1 _ J . • ...... . ... _ _ . _...................._ 10/ 0 ___ . .. __ _ ..._.._ .. „............_ .._ ...... .... .. (SD- -1-: 1 / ,.-; . ' - l i I tt - - - - - -- .....wwwww 815:'„,.07 __. 151 07 II4 id NI 441-W - - - - 6 - ) wwwwwwwwww 50 . 07 '1,4 , 07 mmiairum-iwwinweit // Hif.P...c wo A at imo is A- ma FUTUR PU D 1 ' ( 5:3 )4 wwa ilw- 1.17( 53 wes-mw0 . -- .. PDF 7 1:1 _ _ WWWWW WWWW 175 0:3 175.09 74,f8 174.08 WWWWWWWW r'lr,t: 1 . WWW NS ill 173.08 173,0"u ) 172,0'3 1 / 2, al.:, ww... wwwW ( SD _- ( 175.1a . . . .. ( - S - D - --- <,\ 1 I I I v-1-.4 . .... . ) Mit) _ _ _ _ _-_ Alwilli 'il.,7;61 -- I .':il 1 2 1111-WHIEW- _ _ _ ( 6 - D - _ 1 ) • )4';‘)•J 1:.:. , --wisimm-al 1 1 ( -_- T- 'PDF I M i rit I I ;1-4 .. . . .___ vormA wwww 152,13 1.52,14 r 11'31.1'3 1 51 14 1111-11411111W161 1111 wwww. 1 O. :3 150,14 liij,i .1 ',.::.; 1 wilipswer - - - - • F MO _____. _ . . - - - eilAwA 162.17( 151.'17 WNW- W. ( mww.. . .. ' ' D I I I I 676.21.8 151 1 li S i) t 1.50 18 . _ . - - - - -• SD " ) - . • : ' • , • ! • a, • I ; I ■ , I ; tit — 3 ; co! 1, \I 3 or:, •••■ I • I I ; \ T-a" ;,•• • I co I • • . v--11 , : ! • . .. . r . . .. . _ . .. • 1 I c-iii II _ , - 175 01 1 's, // \ 1 , Auto I 1 _i_ PICAL .1a)rLJLIgIVI0ER - 1 n .01 , , I ',( It' ''. ., _.'' 02 wwww 1 I i _ __ ..L. - --- . ( , 1 I WWWWW WWWW 175.11 175.12 74 '11 174.12 - WWWWW vt% 75.13 I 74.13 - - -- - 1 !':?2 08 151 oa AllHlil 61146-1111- - - - - - - I 60 , 08 ILI i.4. n -- - - ,- 52.09 t os , , ' - - - - wwww 150 09 14')) .Y , ___ . .. . WWWWW WWWW 175.) 5 175.01: 174.05 174.06 ..... _.. . ...... 71 _._..... _.. . . ..._.. . . .. . . . _ ... ... ... _ o ... I - - - - - ..... 152.04 ,:.■,,, -. - - - - - www 152.05 '5. 105 ni-a-mums- -ow... 150 1 4 '‘,. i );.) alFweivis- - 1:152.0E'k 1 1 ,, . i76 INIW-111- . ( wwww 1 Go co 1 4.9 .06 www ( WWWWW WWWW 175,02 175.c.i3 . . . // ' 1 - ■, '', .0 ) A I . _ 1 ( - _ _ i J j I • • , . ; , - 1 ; 1 ! I 1 3thlinJ 1..! - 1 . . : , . OZ#_0.1(111; 1 ON1J-SIX-: - i '. '?/, A ( mommi sa I 1 1 .- - - - ' 4 U U 4111-111-IIIHIEWWWWWIIII (lb --.....-- 0 WNW 511- „ . INF 173.O 173.00 173.07 ( SD •,..._- 1 )2, t):;:, 1 /2.0e., 1 - 12. l',1/ mwmw. wwww wWww W' -- ( ID - " ) 173.13 ID ) 172.13 , .. .-. ... iii . • • . . ; . , . • • . IT•1 . NI------- 1 IIII: . ' 7 0 72.10 ...._ _L._ rt \s, a A alb , w Ica re al loam 1 I --FUTUR I _ Ei al <El v - PDU 1 I A I J 150, 04 -1----- . • - - .. WWW-1111-111 173, '14 172, '14 WIWIIII•Of NI 173.15 172 '15 . .. _ ._ ._ ...__ .._ . - .• ...._ . , .- .. - .. _ . 0 TY*ICAL ( - 150 01 _..__. _____ . ,-- - - ( SD . _ . _.. _.1._ 150.02 // \ 1/ , 4 ' ";.q9.1:r I I i www 16o, o: • 1/ '‘, / /, .; ,- FUTUR PDU ... . - V.- r 1.._ FUTURE; I 1 1 RAC #2i 1 i .• : I • .••• . f PDF 68 _ _ _ . _._ ...... ...... (__SD 172.•i '4!. . I i ; .. • . : - 1 1 (ID 1 1, I 1, , Z * 1 P 0 / V) ..tr1 / R oev / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / \ / WWW-111 MI MI SW WI41 WWW:W 113,02 173.03 173.04 sp ) -7 , 0 '1 \ '''' )12,04 wwwmwww-• Ifil-W , 73.11 172.1 w.m.. INI SAW NM IN 173.12 ( 172.'12 150.16 150.17 - 1 9.1 c:i '1=1"... ) . i 7 mmarmiga-wwww . _ - • - - - - ( - • FUTUR PDU . _ _ _ _ _ • . - --- ... ..... _ . . . ... _ ( SD • - - - - _ . . ------- .. ...... --- ..... - _____ PDF 1 I _ - - --- . - • wwww • ( mmalmfa 171,11 171 ,12 ......... . /1 '.,;-),, _ ............. wwwww wwww ismAimiguill wistal-flu 1 - It 14 1 71 .15 OMR BMW r wwww , 1 i • — • en 1 ; I 1 I i . 1 • I 1 I! , • 1 I ! 1 P. • I 1 I 1 ...w. wwww _ .. - .___. . ... ,,, __. _____. .. _____ ..._ _ __ _ _J _ SD' _ _ . F _ L : L ; 1 1 FUTURE 1 CRAC #1.4 ( -6 . . .. ,- ... ... % A 1 \ \ / rae_0! - — 1 1 — NI.LE. _ . ._ ..... _ .. - --- - _. _ .. .. SD ) ,--- 1 mum- '171.01 mom-will . 171.02 '171,03 171 .(1)1 istfilliw 171 .0F.? 1 l''I .0 . 171.01 ,- ................ 171.C.P,3 1 /1 .0i, ........ A 71.1r _ .... willi_migliim wwwm• 171 1'1 171,18 .. ..... ..... .. .... FUTURE PANEL "DP4 (sji) S ) EQ111t4V! ENT R: OM (6 - - MATCHLINE EXISTING CONDITIONS NOTE: 1. EXISTING CONDITIONS AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS WERE TAKEN FROM THE OWNER'S RECORD DRAWINGS AND/OR SITE VISITS AND ARE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS AN AID IN ASCERTAINING THE SCOPE OF HIS WORK NEITHER THE OWNER, THE ARCHITECT, NOR THE ENGINEER GUARANTEES THE ABSOLUTE ACCURACY OR CONDITIONS INDICATED HEREIN. VARIATIONS OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COULD IN ALL PROBABILITY OCCUR. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO THE BID TO MAKE INVESTIGATIONSNERIFICATIONS AS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. AFTER BID DATE, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE COMPLETE, OPERABLE SYSTEMS AND CONSTRUCTION PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ALL AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2. DURING CONSTRUCTION OF PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS OFF-LINE IN ORDER TO PREVENT ALARMS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEMPORARILY COVER ALL SMOKE DETECTORS AND HEAT DETECTORS TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM ACCUMULATING ON THE DETECTORS. PROVIDE FIRE WATCH AT NIGHTS AND ON WEEKENDS. UNCOVER AND PLACE DETECTORS ON-LINE AFTER PROJECT IS COMPLETE. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 01) PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM BELOW RAISED FLOOR NOTES INDICATED BY NUMBER IN 1. AUDIONISUAL DEVICE ABOVE RAISED ACCESS FLOR. 2. EXISTING NAC J-BOX BELOW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. REMOVE CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT TO AN DEVICE INDICATED TO BE RELOCATED. 3. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT UNDER RAISED ACCESS,FLOOR TO NEW LOCATION OF RELOCATED A/V DEVICE. EXTEND CONDUIT UP INSIDE NEW WALL AND CONNECT TO J-BOX INSIDE WALL, BEHIND NV DEVICE. 4. RELOCATE EXISTING AN DEVICE FROM EXISTING COLUMN TO NEW LOCATION INDICATED. REMOVE EXISTING CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT FOR DEVICE AND PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT AS DESCRIBED IN NOTES 2 AND 3 ABOVE. 5. EXISTING UNDER FLOOR SMOKE DETECTOR TO BE RELOCATED. REMOVE CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT BETWEEN THIS DETECTOR AND DETECTORS UP STREAM AND/OR DOWN STREAM, AS INDICATED. 6. NEW LOCATION FOR RELOCATED UNDERFLOOR SMOKE DETECTOR. 7. PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING AT WALL PENETRATION. REFER TO DETAIL 1, SHEET FP-3. 8. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONDUIT. PULL CIRCUIT OUT OF CONDUIT BACK TO NEAREST J-BOX WEST OF NEW WALL, CUT EXISTING CONDUIT AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING AT WALL PENETRATION AND RE-PULL CIRCUIT. REFER TO DETAIL 1, THIS SHEET. THIS SHEET MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUITS TO REMAIN THAT PENETRATE NEW WALL. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONDUITS AT JOBSITE, AND PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE AND COUPLING AT ALL THAT PENETRATE NEW WALL. 9. EXISTING ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE FOR MONITORING OF CRAC UNITS SMOKE DETECTOR. 10. NEW VISUAL ALARM DEVICE. CONNECT NEW CIRCUIT TO DEVICE FROM NEAREST NAC J-BOX. 11. EXTEND NEW FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOOR TO WALL AS INDICATED EXTEND UP INSIDE WALL TO J-BOX FOR NEW VISUAL ALARM DEVICE. 77 5 REFER TO FP-3 FOR CONTINUATION (7.8) NORTH SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED MINN. MOM NMI. MO RECEIVED CITY OF TI JKIMLA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS 2 3 4 3 1 Exp ires W. /6> Proj. Mgr.: KCM 01-05-09 01-15-09 01-26-09 02-02-09 Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: IM, PS, ZJ Designed By: KCM, DL, ZJ Date: 12-12-08 Revision noilmmississmsommommui 95% REVIEW 100% CD ADD. NO. 1 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. FP-4 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM - BELOW RAISED! FLOOR - NORTH —L 4- Q L - -fi t- - -- L 0 N 'an SCALE: 1/8" = 1 1 PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN r 1 = I I I __11.— l_ L _J _ I— J_ _1 _ I_ L J _._._ - - 1--- r ---- _ - _ - 1. - ____ } - -a r 1 T!'" 10 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (W /IN 10' TEV 1 KEY NOTES: O EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM O EXIST. ACCESSABLE RAMP ® REMOVE AND RELOCATE EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIRS 4 REMOVE AND MODIFY AS REQ'D. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM FOR NEW RAISED ACCESS FLR. STAIR & WALL 5 EXIST. ADJACENT TENANT IS COMMERCIAL OFFICE / WAREHOUSE USE 6 REMOVE AND MODIFY EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM AS REQ'D. TO INSTALL NEW FLR. TO CLG. WALL O REMOVE AND MODIFY EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM ADJACENT TO EXIST. WALL AS REQ'D. TO INSTALL NEW FLR. TO CLG. WALL REMOVE AND RELOCATE EXIST. WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL FOR NEW FURRED WALL SYSTEM. \ / REMOVE AND MODIFY AS REQ'D. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIRS FOR NEW FURRED WALL (10) EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL COLUMN 11 EXISTING CABLE TRAY AUXILARY IRON COLUMN 12 EXISTING HANDRAIL C8) 13 REMOVE EXIST. GUARDRAIL AND HANDRAIL 14 APPROX. LOCATION OF TEMP. DUST PARTITION. INSTALL 18" MIN. CLR. FROM ALL EQUIPMENT. SEE DTL. 1/A2.0 15 TEMP. DOOR FOR EGRESS AND OWNER ACCESS TO EQUIP. PROVIDE WALK -OFF MAT AT EACH DOOR - CLEAN DAILY FULL HT. TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE WEDGE TIGHT SHEETROCK NAILS AND DUCT TAPE AT ALL SEAMS FIRE TREATED Sc STATIC RESISTANT PLASTIC SHEET, SEAL TOP, BOTTOM AND SIDES PER SPECS. 1/2" PLYWOOD OVER 2 X 4 STUDS @ 24" O.C. SECURE PLASTIC W/ HEETROCK NAILS AND DUCT TAPE AT ALL SEAMS FIRE TREATED STUDS OR METAL FRAMING. TYPICAL OF TELEPHONE EQUIP) SCALE: 1 1 /2" = bo o r s 3' X 4' FILTER MEDIA, LOCATE ABOVE 8' -0" AS REQ'D. TO ALLEVIATE CROSS PRESSURE ON TEMP. WALL ASSEMBLY TEMPORARY DUST PARTITION AS REQUIRED, COORDINATE W/ MECH. SECURE PLASTIC AND FILTER W/ BATTON BOARDS Sc SHEETROCK SCREWS AROUND PERIMETER, PROVIDE DUCT TAPE AT ALL SEAMS P. DUST PARTITIO\ 1' -0" SHEETROCK NAILS AND DUCT TAPE AT ALL SEAMS FIRE TREATED Sc STATIC RESISTANT PLASTIC SHEET, SEAL TOP, BOTTOM AND SEAMS — BRACE W/ STUDS AS REQ'D TO HOLD SHEETING SECURE IN PLACE FIRE TREATED STUDS OR METAL FRAMING. SECURE PLASTIC W/ SHEETROCK NAILS AND DUCT TAPE AT ALL SEAMS PROTECTIVE PLASTIC SHEETING (NON— CRITICAL SPACES ONLY) REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION FULL HT. TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ABOVE WEDGE TIGHT CITY OFTUKWILA FEH 0 5 ?U09 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS WTA 1 Ni C . ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 M25) 695-1090 FAX (325) 695-10138 cif) (.0 otb O Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 1 2 4 01 -05 -09 01 -15 -09 02 -02 -09 Sheet No. 95% REVIEW 100% CD PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 A -2.0 PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN Ilfi, l', 1I I I ; I I I1 WALL LEGEND: TAG REF TYPE EXISTING WALL 1 I EXIST. 2 -HR. RATED ASSEMBLY H - H 1/A3.1 P -1 NEW SECURE WALL PARTION 2/A3.1 P -2 NEW SECURE FURRED G.W.B. & MTL. STUD WALL ADJACENT TO EXIST. WALL f 31A3.1 P -3 NEW WALL PARTION ••• •••••••••• PANEL BPPA1 PANEL OPPB2 EXIST. OFFICE AREA EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #1 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY EX. TERM. PLANT #1 STRING #2 1 ROW, 2 TIER -24 BATTERY 1 ____ -.11 FU'E UPS BATTERY 5A I UR CELLS 1 -240 1 r r 1 � p I 1 I IL J L _I J - 10;8A SPDB #1 SPDB #1 RECT. 10 CORRIDOR RKLR 141 SECURITY NEW PEW 150 KVA VE$TI3UL / A v li i I 1 0 4 g4 4 ri 0 I / Ll VUV p F aou 01-1 A I %I® /I 611 • AIL 0 16 0 DSB1 31..,35 r -- -91 11 11 FUTURE II II MB II UPS SA II II II 500 KVA II II# _,,__- - .4 RAC #28 SA1 25,27,29 NEW UPS 28 500 KVA 0.9 PF 1 152.03 152.04 152.05 PDF 50.01 150.02 150.03 150.04 j 150.05 150.06 150.07 150.08 150.09 150.10 150.11 0.12 150.13 150.14 1 . 15 150.16 -. 150.17 150.18 IT T t . '._- I_LrJ- 1 1 149.022/ q - -.- 149.05 149.06 749.07 149.08 149.09 149.10 FUTURE I 1_, J \ PDU I - -I 1 N EW 1 - - M EQ R - I , 108Q A .1 . 117 : TT I _ } 0 r - -T__ 0 152.11 2.12 152.13 17152.18 2 O6 152.01 152 08 152.09 152.10 ' � 152.14 1 152.15 152.18 152.1 f I 51.07 151.08 1 151.09 1 151.10 51.11 1.12 77 7- 148.07 148.04 141305 148.06 148.07 148.06 - ', 1148.09 148.10 148.11 148.13 148.14 j 148,15. 148.16 ', 8.177 148.18 147.05 1 14706 147.07 1 14x08 1 ' 147.09 14710 147.11 1 147.12 j 14713 1147.14 14715 147.16 1 147.17 1 14218 1 - •- - - - -- -- a, 1 POF 1 146.022 '' 146.711 146.04 146.055 145.06 146.07 146.08 146.09 146.10 146.10 I 146 .1 • j r 45.05 145.08 145.07 145.08 145.09 745.10 1 145.1 1 PDF 1 -- % I - t_ .144. 02.144.03 144.04 144.05 144.06 144.07 144.08 144.09 144.10 144.11 144.12 1 144.13 144.14 144.15 144.16 144.17 144.18 EX. PDF 42 NEW PDU 150 KVA 143.05 143.06 143.07 , 143.08 j 143.09 1 143.10 1 143.11 '43.12 143.13 143.14 143.15 143.16 1 143.17 143.18 RECT. 10 RECT. 7 3.12 1 153.13 153.14 1 153.15. 153.16 153.17 153.18 PDF 11D - -- I MID 1 MID MID MID MID 1_ .i 151.13 151.14 151.15 151.16 151.17 1 151.18 6.18 14613 146.14 146.15 146.16 146.17 146.18 r i 1 , 5.12 I 145.13 : 145.14 145.151 tiGw 142.02 142.03 142.04 142.05 j 142.06 14207 142.09 142.09 142.10 142.11 2.12 ', 142.13 142.14 14215 142.16 142.17 142.18 BATTERY 149.1 }49.12 149,13 149.14 149.15 149 6 149.17 149.18 EXISTI G TERM. PLANT #2 STFIN #3 1 ROW, 2 T1ER -24 BATTERY EXISTI STFINC 1 ROW G TERM. PLANT #2 #4 2 TIER -24 BATTERY T 752 175 175.02 775.077757H 175.05 75.077577 175.08 j1 75.09 NEW PDU 50 KVA PDF 70 PDU 50 KVA CORRIDOR 118 116,05 - EX - -- } POF 68 CRAG 830 D081 37,39,41 'ANEL 'ULPP1 -1' 173.2173.02 173,03 173.05 173.06 173.07 173.08 173.09 168.04 168.05 ^69,06 165.07 168.08 168.X9 1 167.01 167.02 167.03 167,04 167.05 167.06 167.07 167.08 167.09 - 1 166,03 1 166.04 1 166.05 166.06 166.07 166 08 .-- PDF 414 1FS as 03 865,04 15sns 1 . 165 5607 16508-�65no 0a 1 1 n r -, 1 164.04 1 164 05 j 164.06 164.07 1 164.08 11 LITHONIA LIGHTING PANEL CONTROLLER •LPPAI" UPS / ELECTRIC XFMR JTRL1 -1 BATTERY 1C BATTERY 1B BATTERY 1A 5710 1711 4.177•1757 17.14 7.17775 175.17 7517 4.10 174.11 174.12 174.13 174.14 1 .S 1(1 165 1 1 DIST. PNL 55PP1' 1= 66.12176.13 176.14 �76,15e176.16 176.17 MID MID MID MID MID MID 172.08 j 172.09 172.10 172.11 172.12 172.13 172.14 172.15 172 172.17 172.18 --- 42.15 172Z.„ - - --� 7 71.01 1 171.02 771.07 171.05 171.06 171.07 171.08 111.09 1.10 171.11 171.12 171 171.14 x.15 1 171.18 1- 170.06 170.07 170.08 j 170,09 70.10 170.11 170.12 170.13 170.14 170.15 170.16 PDF � x 1697 169.02 1 169.03 169.0 - 1 169.05 1696 l 169 .069.07 169.08 09 16 2 1 9.10 169.11 169.169.13 169.14 169.15 . 169.16 159.17 169.18 8.10 I 2 1 168. 168.11 168,12 16.14 68.15 1.16 768.17 68 168.18 � 1 __- 1 7.10 1 167.11 167.12 167.13 167.14 167.15 167,16 16 (113) (112) (110) MOS -SIDE B (109) MAIN BREAKER MDSE (108) TIE BREAKER (107) MAIN BREAKER MDSA (10W) MDS -SIDE A (105) (104) (103) (102) (101) 12 12 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1' -0" AUTOSTICK II E POW ER TRACK 9000 POWER MONITORING INTERFACE PANEL "URDP7 -3" 12 12) 17 TYP. THIS WALL GENERAL NOTES: 1. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL 2. WORK TO BE COORDINATED WITH THIS DRAWING AND THE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN. 3. ALL DOORS SHALL BE KEYLESS IN THE DIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN EXISTING SLAB UNDER RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM PER VERIZON'S DATA CENTER REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE WITH VERIZON REP. IN FIELD PRIOR TO ROOM READY. 5. PROVIDE 8 "X8" GROMMETTED OPENINGS AT EACH EQUIPMENT RACK IN EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF OPENINGS WITH VERIZON EQUIPMENT PLAN. KEY NOTES: O EXISTING RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM @ 2' -3" ± A.F.F. 0 EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM ACCESSABLE RAMP AND HANDRAILS - 1:12 SLOPE 3 PATCH, PREPAIR EXIST. SLAB AND EPDXY PAINT THIS ENTIRE EXPOSED SLAB AREA TO MATCH EXISTING O RELOCATED RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIR MODIFY EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM AS REQ'D. KII::: PROVIDE NEW HANDRAILS EACH SIDE OF NEW STAIRS 6 OWNER'S EQUIMENT RACKS N.I.C. - COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS FOR POWER, DATA AND FLOOR OPENINGS. O 7 NEW MECHANICAL UNIT - SEE MECHANICAL O EXISTING HANDRAIL 9 MODIFY OR PROVIDE NEW RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIRS FOR NEW FURRED WALL PARTITION RELOCATE EXISTING HANDRAIL 0 EXISTING CABLE TRAY AUXILIARY IRON COLUMN 0 EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURAL COLUMN n APPROX. LOCATION OF TEMP. DUST PARTITION. INSTALL REFER TO PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN SHT. A.2.0 /14\ TEMP. DOOR FOR EGRESS AND OWNER ACCESS TO EQUIP. PROVIDE WALK -OFF MAT AT EACH DOOR - CLEAN DAILY PROVIDE (2) 4'X8' F.R. A/C PLYWOOD BUTT EDGES ANCHOR TO MTL. STUD FRAMING W/ SCREWS @ 16" O.C. EA. WAY - EDGE TO ALIGN WITH STUDS FOR ATTACHMENT Dag - ors CLEAN DUST, DIRT AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS INCLUDING VACUUMING UNDER RAISED FLOOR (AIR PLENUM) THE ENTIRE AREA BETWEEN GRID LINES (A.5 & F) AND (5.6 & 8) AFTER ALL NEW WORK HAS BEEN COMPLETED. AFTER ALL NEW WORK HAS BEEN COMPLETED CLEAN AND BUFF RAISED ACCESS FLOOR PANEL LAMINATE. VERIFY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITEN CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTAIN ANY MATERIAL CONDUCTIVE PROPERTIES. EXISTING CABLE LADDER DIAGONAL SEISMIC PIPE BRACING ABOVE - WRAP WITH FOIL BACKED INSULATION WHERE PIPE BRACE PENETRATES THE NEW WALL PARTITION - 17 TYP. AT NEW WEST AND EAST WALLS. REV I WED FO CODE COMPLIANCE AP ROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 %009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS III III" 1 l Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: 2 3 4 WTA 1 NJ C . ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 1325) 695 -1090 FAX (325) 695-1088 Revision Sheet No. A -2.1 co co • co ® vJ rr V rr^^ vJ Lu g rn w V N co k 1` (1) (1) cza ^^ W v , Date: 02 -02 -09 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 01 -15 -09 100% CD 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN EXI RE AD FO EXIST. STL. COL. / WALL DETAIL @ - EXIST. COL. 6 J SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'--0" WALL DETAIL @ STRUC. COL. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" INA ii• II 11 Milli 11 11 41 . 1 b- 11 11 T. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTE OVE /MODIFY SYSTEM, PANELS & ITION PEDISTALS & BRACING AS I NEW WALL TO PASS THROUGH `3) 'ROVIDE E Q'D. NEW TYPE P1 PARTITION SEE DTL. 1/A4.1 EXIST. BUILDING STRUCTURE COL. NEW WALL PARTITION SHALL PASS IN FRONT OF EXIST. COL. - PROVIDE i" CLEARANCE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" EXIST. FURRING AROUND EXIST. COL. ONE LAYER OF EXIST. 8" G.W.B. OVER 2" FURRING CHANNELS FIRST LAYER OF G.W.B. TO RUN PAST EXIST. COL. FURRING - SECOND LA ER SHALL BUTT INTO EXIST. FURRED G.W.B. NEW PARTITION P2 SEE DTL. 2/A3.1 EXIST. RIGID INSUL. & ROOF SYSTEM • SOUND BA Il TO WALLS1 6" CHANNI FASTENER` INSTALL SI RAISED FL( 1 TYPE P3 - \ -W PARTITIO EXIST. PLYWD. ROOF DECK FIRE SAFE EACH SIDE OF PARTITION DEFLECTION CHANNEL 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. EA. SIDE OF STUDS ATTACHED W/ 1 1/4" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" O.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. CHANNEL SHAPED 6" 16 GA. STEEL STUDS © 16" O.C. MAX. STUDS TO BE CUT 3/4" LESS THAN ASSEMBLY HT. VINYL, DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2" WIDE, EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS. INSTALL SCHEDULED BASE AND FLOORING © RAISED FLOOR ELEVATION, BOTH SIDES 1-Y2" COL BRIDGING STUD W/ SCREWS CONTINUE WALL TO STRUCTURE BELOW ROLLED 20 GA. CONT. CHANNEL 48" O.C. MAX. ATTACH TO EA. GA. CLIP ANGLE & TYPE S INSULATION. FASTEN EA. BATT RUNNERS ATTACHED W/ 16" O.C. MAX. DULED BASE AND FLOORING © R ELEVATION, BOTH SIDES EXIST. CONC. S LIB _H (4) NEW WALL FACE OF EXISTING PARTITION SOUND BATT INSUL. FACE OF EXIST. WALL EXIST. PARTITION - 2 LAYERS " G.W.B. EA. SIDE OF 6" MTL. STUDS © 16" O.C. WITH BATT INSUL. z 0 142" COLD- ROLLED 20 GA. CONT. CHANNEL BRIDGING © 48" O.C. MAX. ATTACH TO EA. STUD W/ 20 GA. CLIP ANGLE & TYPE S SCREWS 6" CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED W FASTENERS © 16" O.C. MAX. EXIST. WALL (2 TYPP � P2 - SCALE: 1 1/2" 3'-8"± VARIES - FIELD VERIFY CHANNEL SHAPED 6" 16 GA. STEEL STUDS © 16" O.C. MAX. STUDS TO BE CUT 3/4" LESS THAN ASSEMBLY HT. ONE LAYER OF EXIST. i" G.W.B. OVER 2" FURRING CHANNELS I 0 11%■11111WP■KMAMINII■MIMIIMIWIrAllINVAIIMIle EXIST. STL. COL. WALL DETAIL @ EXIST. COL. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" EXIST. RIGID INSUL. & ROOF SYSTEM EXIST. PLYWD. ROOF DECK FIRE SAFE EACH SIDE 0 PARTITION MI V %Aid 71I■ SC TC AU M SEEJ ALUM. FOIL FACED KRA PAPER LAP ACROSS ROOF SHEATHING 36" AND LAP DOWN OVER EXP. MTL. MESH 6" SECURE WITH STAPLES & ALUM FSK PRES. SENSITIVE TAPE DEFLECTION CHANNEL (1) LAYER OF 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" O.C. IN FIELD & VERT. o 0 EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" o O.C. EA. LAYER. 9 GA FLATTENED EXPANDED METAL MESH SPOT CONTINUE WALL TO 7 3/8" STRUCTURE BELOW NEW WALL CHANNEL SHAPED 6" 16 GA. STEEL STUDS © 16" 0.C. MAX. STUDS TO BE CUT 3/4" LESS THAN ASSEMBLY HT. VINYL, DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2" WIDE, EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS. INSTALL SCHEDULED BASE AND FLOORING © RAISED FLOOR ELEVATION, BOTH SIDES SLCJRE PARTITIO = 1' -0" WELDED © MAX 12" 0.C. IN FIELD TO EACH METAL STUD -EXP. MTL. SEAMS SHALL OCCURE AT A STUD & SPOT WELD © 6" O.C. MAX. (1) LAYER OF FOIL BACKED 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" O.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" O.C. EA. LAYER. FOIL SIDE FACING INSIDE OF ROOM. EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR S REMOVE /MODIFY SYSTEM, PANEL ADDITION PEDISTALS & BRACING FOR NEW WALL TO PASS THROU D BATT. INSULATION. FASTEN BATT ALLBOARD . FOIL FACED KRAFT PAPER LAP . SLAB 36" AND LAP UP OVER 6" SECURE WITH ALUM FSK P' ITIVE TAPE L EXIST. CONC. SLA (1) LAYER OF 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" 0.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" 0.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" O.C. EA. LAYER. 9 GA FLATTENED EXPANDED METAL MESH SPOT WELDED © MAX 12" O.C. BOTH DIRECTIONS IN FIELD TO METAL STUD. SPOT WELD PANEL SEAMS © 6" O.C. MAX. (1) LAYER OF FOIL BACKED 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" O.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" 0.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" O.C. EA. LAYER. FOIL SIDE FACING INSIDE OF ROOM. FACE OF EXISTING PARTITION STEM & PROVIDE AS REQ'D. OVER XP. MTL. S. NEW PARTITION P2 SEE DTL. 2/A3.1 EXIST. WALL - SEE DTL. 2/A3.1 FOIL BACKED G.W.B. NOTE: IF FOIL BACKED G.W.B. DELIVERY LEAD TIME DOES NOT FIT THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 5/8" TYPE "X" G.W.B. OVER ALUMINUM FOIL FACE KRAFT PAPER AS MANUFACTURED BY HOWMET ALUMINUM CORP. OR FSK VAPOR BARRIER (FOIL SCRIM KARFT) AS MANUFACTURED BY METAL BUILDING SUPPLY OR APPROVED EQUAL. TAPE JOINTS & SECURE WITH FSK PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE BY IDEAL OR APPROVED EQUAL. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE � APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION EXIST. HANDRAIL EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLR. SYSTEM STAIRS - MODIFY FOR NEW WALL RELOCATED HANDRAIL NEW TYPE P2 PARTITION RELOCATE EXIST. HANDRAIL NORTH (2) LAYERS OF 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. APPLIED VERT. INNER LAYER ATTACHED W/ 1" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" 0.C. OUTER LAYER ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" 0.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. JOINTS BETWEEN INNER & OUTER LAYER STAGGERED 24" 0.C. EA. LAYER. EXI RE AD TO T. RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTE OVE /MODIFY SYSTEM, PANELS & ITION PEDISTALS AS REQ'D. FOR SS THROUGH 6" CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHE FASTENERS © 16" O.C. MAX. EXIST. CONC. SLAB OVIDE W WALL � TYPE SCALE: NEW TYPE P2 PARTITION EXIST. RAISED ACCESS FLR z EXIST. WALL r/' PARTIAL PLA\ SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" SYSTE I■ PANEL "BPPA2" PANEL "BPPB2" ors. MET HAN RAILS E �- • NE 'DF EXIST. RATS DACCE NE SID / 1 PATCH, PREPARE AND PAINT CONC. SLAB FWITH EPDXY PAINT TO MATCH EXIST. RELOCATED RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM STAIRS 6' -8 "± LPP1 -1 XFMR UTRL1 -1 PARTIAL PLA\ NORTH , SCALE: 1/4" = 1 - 0 EXIST. RIGID INSUL. & ROOF SYSTEM 8 5/8" 0 0 0 w 0 z P1 - SEC„ 1 1/2" = 1' -0" R EXIST. PLYWD. ROOF DECK FIRE SAFE EACH SIDE OF PARTITION DEFLECTION CHANNEL All■ Ilk Ilk I■ 411B. AIL. /Ilk \ N: ■ i■ ■ ■7 • • "■ '■ INSTALL SCHEDULED BASE AND FLOORING © RAISED FLOOR ELEVATION, BOTH SIDES 142" COLD - BRIDGING © STUD W/ 21 SCREWS SOUND BATT TO WALLBOP -- OLLED 20 GA. CONT. CHANNEL 8" O.C. MAX. ATTACH TO EA. GA. CLIP ANGLE & TYPE S NSULATION. FASTEN EA. BATT PARTITIO b o$9% o i 1/45 PE P2 PARTITION ISED ACCESS FLOOR REMOVED EXIST. STAIR (1) LAYER OF 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" O.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" O.C. EA. LAYER. 9 GA FLATTENED EXPANDED METAL MESH SPOT WELDED © MAX 12" 0.C. IN FIELD TO EACH METAL STUD -EXP. MTL. SEAMS SHALL OCCURE AT A STUD & SPOT WELD © 6" O.C. MAX. (1) LAYER OF FOIL BACKED 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD APPLIED VERT. ATTACHED W/ 1 -5/8" TYPE 'S' SCREWS © 16" 0.C. IN FIELD & VERT. EDGES AND © 12" O.C. TO FLOOR & CEILING RUNNERS. STAGGER JOINTS 24" 0.C. EA. LAYER. FOIL SIDE FACING INSIDE OF ROOM. CHANNEL SHAPED 6" 16 GA. STEEL STUDS © 16" 0.C. MAX. STUDS TO BE CUT 3/4" LESS THAN ASSEMBLY HT. VINYL, DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2" WIDE, EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS. ALUM. FCC FACED KRAFT PAPER LAP OVER CONC. SIA3 36" AND LAP UP OVER EXP. IvOrL. MESH 6" ECURE WITH ALUM FSK PRES. SENSITIVE - APE CIT° dinskl PEF 2ECEIVED OF TUKWILA 05?ON IIIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS WTA 1 N I _ ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ABILENE, TEXAS 79606 (325) 595-11390 FAX (325) 695-1088 O O INN Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 2 4 01 -15 -09 02 -02 -09 100% CD PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. A -3.1 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PEMKO DOOR BOT. AS SCHEDULED EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM 2x FIRE TREATED BLOCKING. ALIGN TOP SURFACE WITH T.O. RAISED FLOOR. ( 3 3OOP JAVB DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" 7 1/4" ® OR H SCALE: 3" -A> D INTERIOR SURFACE OF A PARTITION. /3\ 1' -0" DOOR SILL DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 3 - %" 18GA KING STUDS EACH SIDE OF DOOR TACK WELDED 12 "OC, BOTH SIDES. 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1- SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 80 -CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. / \ 16GA H.M. WELDED DOOR FRAME PEMKO THRESHOLD AS SCHEDULED T.O. RAISED FLOOR 2' -O" ± AFF FEILD VERIFY MODIFY EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM PANELS, GRID AND SUPPORTS AS REQ'D. FOR NEW PARTITION AND THRESHOLD (2) -80 CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). PARTITION TYPE P1 BELOW. ROOM NUMBER 108A 108B 115 116 106 102 ROOM NAME EXIST. EQUIP. RM. NEW EQUIP. RM. SECURITY /VEST. CORRIDOR CORRIDOR EXIST. OFFICE AREA FLOOR MAT'L /FIN EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT NO NEW WC NO NEW WC BASE MAT'L /FIN RB RB RB RB RK EXIST. TO RK EXIST. TO WALLS NORTH EXFM GB /P GB /P EXFM REMAI REMAI EAST GB /P GB /P GB /P GB /P SOUTH EXFM GB /P GB /P GB /P WEST EXFM GB /P GB /P CEILING MAT'L EXFM EXFM EXFM EXFM HT CASEWORK U L c NOTES (REFER TO FIN. MATERIAL NOTES) 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 FINISH LEGEND FINISH MATERIAL NOTES: WOOD FINISHES 80 -89 FLOORING 0 -19 80. 0. RAISED FLOOR NOTE: RE -USE EXISTING SYSTEM. PROVIDE FINSIH LAMINATE90 - 109 PANEL EDGE TRIMS AND REPLACE ANY DAMAGED PANEL FINISH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXIST. ON gill_ MODIFIED PANELS. BASE 20 - 29 MISC. 110 - 149 20. MFGR: ROPPE COLOR: MATCH EXISTING NOTE: PROVIDE NEW AT ALL NEW WALLS MATCH BUILDING STANDARDS WALL FINISH 30 - 69 30. (2) LAYERS OF %" GYP. BD PAINTED MFGR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 COLOR: PURE WHITE SW1004 FINISH: EGG SHELL NOTE: FIELD VERIFY EXISTING BUILDING STANDARD INTERIOR WALL COLOR TO MATCH. CEILINGS 70 - 79 70. MFGR: COLOR: FINISH: NOTE: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 CEILINIG WHITE OR MATTE BLACK EGG SHELL EXIT. EXPOSED STRUCTURE TO REMAIN AS IS. PATCH & PAINT AS REQ'D. FOR NEW WORK. 110. NOTES 200 - 249 200. TWO TONE PAINT? FINISH SHCEDULE KEY AFT ACCESS FLOOR TILE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONC CONCRETE PANEL CPT CARPET CT CERAMIC TILE EX. AFT EXISTING ACCESS FLOOR TILE EM ENTRY MAT EPP EXFM EXP EXS FWC GB IN M MB OH OV P PL PLY PT RB SAT Sc SF SM SV VCT VW WM EPDXY PAINT EXISTING FINISH MATERIAL EXPOSED STRUCTURE EXISTING STRUCTURE FABRIC WALL COVERING GYPSUM BOARD INSULATION W/ VAPOR BARRIER MIRROR MINI BLINDS OVERHEAD DOOR OVERHEAD DOOR W/ VISION PAINT PLASTIC LAMINATE PLYWOOD PORCELAIN TILE RUBBER BASE SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE SEALED CONCRETE STOREFRONT SHEET METAL SHEET VINYL VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VINYL WALL COVERING WALK -OFF MAT MATERIAL & FINISH SCHEDULE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � 1)a9 -ors RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS WTA ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ASILEN TEXAS 79606 (325) 695-1093 FAX (325) 695 -1 BBB s z 0 z Q n Li- ce 0 N 3 0 F Q tin O Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 3 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD 4 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. A -4.1 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES f 4Il�ihi DOOR SCHEDULE NUM. DESCRIPTION DIMENSION RATING (MIN) DOOR FRAME HARDWARE COMMENTS KEYING 1080 EXISTING SINGLE 3'- 0 "x8'- 0 "x1 -3/4" 90 MIN. HM HM 1 4, 6, 7 - 108F SINGLE 3'- 0 "x7'- 0 "x1 -3/4" - HM HM 1 1, 5, 7 3 1 1 5A PAIR DOORS 6'- 0 "X8'- 0 "X1 -3/4" - SC HM 2 1, 2 3 1 15B PAIR DOORS 6'- 0 "X8'- 0 "X1 -3/4" - SC HM 2 1, 2, 5, 7 3 DOOR NOTES: SHALL BE WELDED CONSTRUCTION. TO RECEIVE NEW ELECTRONIC STRIKE. CORE. FRAME. FRAME SYSTEM. HARDWARE AND REPLACE WITH NEW AS SCHEDULED. 108F SHALL HAVE SECURITY CAMERA'S MOUNTED OVER THE DOOR ON THE INSIDE SIDE OF DOOR - COORDINATE ETC. WITH SECURITY. CONDUIT, J -BOX, AND PULL STRING VERIZON 1. HOLLOW METAL FRAME 2. PREP DOOR & FRAME 3. VERIZON TO PROVIDE 4. EXISTING DOOR AND 5. STC 45 DOOR AND 6. REMOVE EXIST. DR. 7. DOOR 115B, 108C AND LOCATIONS OF IN WALL BOXES, 8. CARD READER - PROVIDE 9. XO -9 PROVIDED BY HARDWARE SCHEDULE SET LOCKSET HINGES DOOR STOPS OTHER 1 VON DUPRIN PUSH BAR NO EXTERNAL HARDWARE AUDIBLE ALARM 1 -Y2 PR McKINNEY TA792 ANCHOR SET SECURITY HINGES ROCKWOOD 409 x 32D PEMKO THRESH 276A WS /LA PEMKO SWEEP 321CN LCN CLOSER 4000 SERIES INSIDE MOUNT HD STRIKE PROVIDED BY VERIZON 2 VON DUPRIN 600 SERIES W/ DS OPTION DR. COORDINATOR CLOSER FULL ASTRAGALS ON ACTIVE DOOR EXIT DEVICE INSIDE - NO ALARM WITH KEYED MORTISE LOCKSET OUTSIDE 2 PR McKINNEY TA792 ANCHOR SET SECURITY HINGES DOUBLE DOOR ELECTRONIC STRIKE W/ POWER SUPPLY TRANSFORMER DOOR COORDINATOR CLOSER HD DOOR PINS UPPER & LOWER CONCEALED WITH RELEASE ON EDGE OF DOOR ROCKWOOD 409 x 32D PEMKO THRESH 276A WS /LA PEMKO SWEEP 321CN LCN CLOSER 4000 SERIES INSIDE MOUNT HD STRIKE PROVIDED BY VERIZON ACOUSTIC SEAL JAMB - PEMKO 588 SERIES COMPRESSIBLE BULB HARDWARE NOTES: SHALL MATCH BUILDING STANDARD. CORE. SHALL BE TAMPER PROOF 1. ALL FINISHES 2. VERIZON TO PROVIDE 3. ALL HARDWARE 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PEMKO DOOR BOT. AS SCHEDULED EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM 2x FIRE TREATED BLOCKING. ALIGN TOP SURFACE WITH T.O. RAISED FLOOR. ( 3 3OOP JAVB DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" 7 1/4" ® OR H SCALE: 3" -A> D INTERIOR SURFACE OF A PARTITION. /3\ 1' -0" DOOR SILL DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 3 - %" 18GA KING STUDS EACH SIDE OF DOOR TACK WELDED 12 "OC, BOTH SIDES. 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1- SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 80 -CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. / \ 16GA H.M. WELDED DOOR FRAME PEMKO THRESHOLD AS SCHEDULED T.O. RAISED FLOOR 2' -O" ± AFF FEILD VERIFY MODIFY EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM PANELS, GRID AND SUPPORTS AS REQ'D. FOR NEW PARTITION AND THRESHOLD (2) -80 CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). PARTITION TYPE P1 BELOW. ROOM NUMBER 108A 108B 115 116 106 102 ROOM NAME EXIST. EQUIP. RM. NEW EQUIP. RM. SECURITY /VEST. CORRIDOR CORRIDOR EXIST. OFFICE AREA FLOOR MAT'L /FIN EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT NO NEW WC NO NEW WC BASE MAT'L /FIN RB RB RB RB RK EXIST. TO RK EXIST. TO WALLS NORTH EXFM GB /P GB /P EXFM REMAI REMAI EAST GB /P GB /P GB /P GB /P SOUTH EXFM GB /P GB /P GB /P WEST EXFM GB /P GB /P CEILING MAT'L EXFM EXFM EXFM EXFM HT CASEWORK U L c NOTES (REFER TO FIN. MATERIAL NOTES) 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 FINISH LEGEND FINISH MATERIAL NOTES: WOOD FINISHES 80 -89 FLOORING 0 -19 80. 0. RAISED FLOOR NOTE: RE -USE EXISTING SYSTEM. PROVIDE FINSIH LAMINATE90 - 109 PANEL EDGE TRIMS AND REPLACE ANY DAMAGED PANEL FINISH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXIST. ON gill_ MODIFIED PANELS. BASE 20 - 29 MISC. 110 - 149 20. MFGR: ROPPE COLOR: MATCH EXISTING NOTE: PROVIDE NEW AT ALL NEW WALLS MATCH BUILDING STANDARDS WALL FINISH 30 - 69 30. (2) LAYERS OF %" GYP. BD PAINTED MFGR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 COLOR: PURE WHITE SW1004 FINISH: EGG SHELL NOTE: FIELD VERIFY EXISTING BUILDING STANDARD INTERIOR WALL COLOR TO MATCH. CEILINGS 70 - 79 70. MFGR: COLOR: FINISH: NOTE: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 CEILINIG WHITE OR MATTE BLACK EGG SHELL EXIT. EXPOSED STRUCTURE TO REMAIN AS IS. PATCH & PAINT AS REQ'D. FOR NEW WORK. 110. NOTES 200 - 249 200. TWO TONE PAINT? FINISH SHCEDULE KEY AFT ACCESS FLOOR TILE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONC CONCRETE PANEL CPT CARPET CT CERAMIC TILE EX. AFT EXISTING ACCESS FLOOR TILE EM ENTRY MAT EPP EXFM EXP EXS FWC GB IN M MB OH OV P PL PLY PT RB SAT Sc SF SM SV VCT VW WM EPDXY PAINT EXISTING FINISH MATERIAL EXPOSED STRUCTURE EXISTING STRUCTURE FABRIC WALL COVERING GYPSUM BOARD INSULATION W/ VAPOR BARRIER MIRROR MINI BLINDS OVERHEAD DOOR OVERHEAD DOOR W/ VISION PAINT PLASTIC LAMINATE PLYWOOD PORCELAIN TILE RUBBER BASE SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE SEALED CONCRETE STOREFRONT SHEET METAL SHEET VINYL VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VINYL WALL COVERING WALK -OFF MAT MATERIAL & FINISH SCHEDULE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � 1)a9 -ors RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS WTA ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ASILEN TEXAS 79606 (325) 695-1093 FAX (325) 695 -1 BBB s z 0 z Q n Li- ce 0 N 3 0 F Q tin O Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 3 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD 4 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. A -4.1 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES f 4Il�ihi / f / \ ® A PT H.M. DOOR A a 0 DOOR FRAMES ( 9 DOOR TYPES SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -O" SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PEMKO DOOR BOT. AS SCHEDULED EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM 2x FIRE TREATED BLOCKING. ALIGN TOP SURFACE WITH T.O. RAISED FLOOR. ( 3 3OOP JAVB DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" 7 1/4" ® OR H SCALE: 3" -A> D INTERIOR SURFACE OF A PARTITION. /3\ 1' -0" DOOR SILL DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 3 - %" 18GA KING STUDS EACH SIDE OF DOOR TACK WELDED 12 "OC, BOTH SIDES. 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1- SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR PARTITION TYPE P1 SEE 1/A3.1 (2) 80 -CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). 16GA HM DOOR FRAME 1 -%4" SOLID CORE WOOD DOOR INTERIOR SURFACE A OF PARTITION. / \ 16GA H.M. WELDED DOOR FRAME PEMKO THRESHOLD AS SCHEDULED T.O. RAISED FLOOR 2' -O" ± AFF FEILD VERIFY MODIFY EXIST. RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM PANELS, GRID AND SUPPORTS AS REQ'D. FOR NEW PARTITION AND THRESHOLD (2) -80 CSJ 16 BOXED LINTEL (TYP). PARTITION TYPE P1 BELOW. ROOM NUMBER 108A 108B 115 116 106 102 ROOM NAME EXIST. EQUIP. RM. NEW EQUIP. RM. SECURITY /VEST. CORRIDOR CORRIDOR EXIST. OFFICE AREA FLOOR MAT'L /FIN EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT EX. AFT NO NEW WC NO NEW WC BASE MAT'L /FIN RB RB RB RB RK EXIST. TO RK EXIST. TO WALLS NORTH EXFM GB /P GB /P EXFM REMAI REMAI EAST GB /P GB /P GB /P GB /P SOUTH EXFM GB /P GB /P GB /P WEST EXFM GB /P GB /P CEILING MAT'L EXFM EXFM EXFM EXFM HT CASEWORK U L c NOTES (REFER TO FIN. MATERIAL NOTES) 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 0, 20, 30, 70 FINISH LEGEND FINISH MATERIAL NOTES: WOOD FINISHES 80 -89 FLOORING 0 -19 80. 0. RAISED FLOOR NOTE: RE -USE EXISTING SYSTEM. PROVIDE FINSIH LAMINATE90 - 109 PANEL EDGE TRIMS AND REPLACE ANY DAMAGED PANEL FINISH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXIST. ON gill_ MODIFIED PANELS. BASE 20 - 29 MISC. 110 - 149 20. MFGR: ROPPE COLOR: MATCH EXISTING NOTE: PROVIDE NEW AT ALL NEW WALLS MATCH BUILDING STANDARDS WALL FINISH 30 - 69 30. (2) LAYERS OF %" GYP. BD PAINTED MFGR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 COLOR: PURE WHITE SW1004 FINISH: EGG SHELL NOTE: FIELD VERIFY EXISTING BUILDING STANDARD INTERIOR WALL COLOR TO MATCH. CEILINGS 70 - 79 70. MFGR: COLOR: FINISH: NOTE: SHERWIN WILLIAMS PRO MAR 200 CEILINIG WHITE OR MATTE BLACK EGG SHELL EXIT. EXPOSED STRUCTURE TO REMAIN AS IS. PATCH & PAINT AS REQ'D. FOR NEW WORK. 110. NOTES 200 - 249 200. TWO TONE PAINT? FINISH SHCEDULE KEY AFT ACCESS FLOOR TILE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONC CONCRETE PANEL CPT CARPET CT CERAMIC TILE EX. AFT EXISTING ACCESS FLOOR TILE EM ENTRY MAT EPP EXFM EXP EXS FWC GB IN M MB OH OV P PL PLY PT RB SAT Sc SF SM SV VCT VW WM EPDXY PAINT EXISTING FINISH MATERIAL EXPOSED STRUCTURE EXISTING STRUCTURE FABRIC WALL COVERING GYPSUM BOARD INSULATION W/ VAPOR BARRIER MIRROR MINI BLINDS OVERHEAD DOOR OVERHEAD DOOR W/ VISION PAINT PLASTIC LAMINATE PLYWOOD PORCELAIN TILE RUBBER BASE SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC TILE SEALED CONCRETE STOREFRONT SHEET METAL SHEET VINYL VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VINYL WALL COVERING WALK -OFF MAT MATERIAL & FINISH SCHEDULE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 01 2009 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION � 1)a9 -ors RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 5 2009 PERMIT CENTER WTA - 08093 COPYRIGHT © 2009 WTA, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS ABILENE, TEXAS WTA ONE VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 500 ASILEN TEXAS 79606 (325) 695-1093 FAX (325) 695 -1 BBB s z 0 z Q n Li- ce 0 N 3 0 F Q tin O Fac. Code:TYKWWA Drawn By: Designed By: Proj. Mgr.: Date: 02 -02 -09 Revision 1 01 -05 -09 95% REVIEW 3 01 -26 -09 ADD. NO. 1 2 01 -15 -09 100% CD 4 02 -02 -09 PERMIT SET Project No. WTA. 08093 Sheet No. A -4.1 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES f 4Il�ihi